VA Signage

Design Guide

Veterans Health Administration Washington, DC 20420

December 2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 VA Signage Design Guide

Trim width of
paper to match
spine width of
binder pocket.
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Table of Contents

VA Signage Design Guide

• Introduction
• Acknowledgments
• Design Elements Section 1
• Need a New Sign Program Section 2
• Room Renumbering Section 3
• Exterior Signs Section 4
• Parking Structure Signs Section 5
• Parking Lot Signs Section 6
• Mandatory VA Policy Signs Section 7
• Code and Life Safety Signs Section 8
• Interior Signs Section 9
• "You Are Here" Maps and Directories Section 10
• Specialty Signs Section 11
• Cemetery Signs Section 12
• Glossary Section 13
• Appendix
• Emerging Technologies Appendix 1
• Sustainability Appendix 2
• Sign Index Appendix 3

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Introduction

This detailed program guide provides guidelines for the design of signs and sign
programs at VA facilities. It provides detail guidance for the development of a sign
system that assists VA customers as they approach the property, locate buildings
and functions within them.

Executive Summary This VA Signage Design Guide is a revision of the previous Design Guide pub-
lished in February 2005.

The revised design guide provides information and suggestions for the develop-
ment of sign programs at Veterans Affairs Facilities. The guide provides detailed
guidance for the development of a sign system that assists VA customers and staff
as they approach the property, locate buildings and services within the facility.

The Signage Design Guide includes revisions, which are the result of new sign
products, new sign manufacturing techniques and materials, regulatory changes,
expansion of VA facilities, procedural changes, and practical knowledge gained
from field experience. The revision of the guide has been a collaborative effort,
with comments and suggestions from VAMC and administration, and VACO pro-
gram officials including designers, fire and safety, security and law enforcement,
National Cemetery, and Veterans Benefits Administration.

The Guide has added new sections to assist VA facilities contemplating small room
renumbering programs or a complete revision of their existing signage systems.
The new sections educate program officials, designers, and planners on identifying
the need for a signage program and steps on interviewing and selecting a qualified
environmental graphic design firm. The sections also include an in-depth guide for
parking lots and parking structures signage.

The following are highlights of both the updated sections and the new sections that
have been added:

Updated Sections

• Proper/Improper use of VA Seal/Signature.

• Interior sign types and their specification, layout, construction, and installa-
tion guidelines. Along with new interior sign products and expanded sign type
families.
• Exterior sign types and their specifications, layout and construction. New sign
products, expanded sign type families and new illumination methods.
• Expanded exterior building mounted marquee signs (both illuminated and
non-illuminated).
• Mandatory VA policy signs containing specific text, layout, size, placement,
and location requirements that cannot be altered.
• Added Specialty Signs including construction site signs, construction site
safety sign, banners, memory boxes, freestanding sanitizing stations signs
plus others.
• An expanded Code and Life Safety signs section with additional pictorials for
installation of stairwell signs and those surrounding it.
• A greatly expanded wayfinding discussion in both the interior and exterior sign
sections
• Expanded campus/site plan design/layout options

12/2012
 Introduction

• Expanded “Need a Sign Program” chapter

• Expanded “Room & Floor Renumbering” chapter
• New signs added to Mandatory “VA Policy Signs by Directive”
• Additional options have been added to the monument sign design.
• Various topics within the sections were revised to include more information
and details.
• Within sections new subjects have been added on how to review shop draw-
ings and submittals, how to select the correct type of sign company.
• New colors for exterior and interior signs have been provided along with up-
dated colors for parking lot and parking structures.
• An expanded section discussing room renumbering and floor renumbering.
• Additional subjects that were revised include “Tips and Hints” and
“Construction and Assembly Details”.
New Sections

• A section on Your Are Here Maps and Directories.

• A section on Parking Lot Signs
• A section devoted to National Cemetery Signs.
• A glossary of terms used in the sign industry
• A new section titled, “Emerging Sign Technologies” provides an overview of
conceptual developments toward the use of new products and technology. The
section also discusses applications of new technologies.
The revised VA Signage Design Guide is a living document that will be periodi-
cally updated. When changes do occur, “Design Alerts” will be e-mailed with the
included changes.

The VA Signage Design Guide incorporates guidelines from ABAAS, ABA/ADA

and NFPA.

Lloyd H. Siegel, FAIA Associate, Director, Strategic Management Office

October 2012

12/2012
 Acknowledgments

This Program Guide for the Department of Veterans Affairs has involved work and input
from many departments, individuals and VA Medical Centers. The followinidentifies the
participants and acknowledges their contributions.
Department of Veterans
Affairs
Veterans Health Administration
Christa Fairchild Desiree Lee, LEED AP
Interior Designer Interior Designer
VAMC Huntington VAMC Kansas City

Keith Frost Katie Willis

Security Specialist / Team Leader Interior Designer
VA OSP / Office of Security VAMC Dallas
and Law Enforcement

David P. Klein, P.E.

Fire Protection Engineer
VA Central Office

Office of Construction & Facilities Management

Orest Burdiak Alejandra De La Torre
Principal Interior Designer Architect

Fei Chan (Linda), AIA Nancy Zivitz Sussman

Planner / Architect Management & Program Analyst

Veterans Benefits Administration

Samuel Gyulnazarian, AIA, IIDA, LEED BD+C®
Architect, Project Manager

National Cemetery Administration

Peggy Jensen
Architect / Project Manager

Design Consultants

KAL Architects

Rita Kalwani, AIA, NCARB, IIDA, LEED AP BD+C®

Principal, Project Manager
Jennifer Hanscome, CID, IIDA, LEED AP BD+C®
Senior Interior Designer
Mark Niese, AIA, CSI, CDT, ACIA, LEED AP BD+C®
Technical Support
Anne Blomberg, CID, LEED Green Associate®
Technical Support

Solsis LLC

Bill Englund Robin Eckert

Principal Environmental Graphic Designer
Fran Kalbfeld Mark Englund
Environmental Graphic Designer Environmental Graphic Designer
Sarah Braun
Environmental Graphic Designer

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Design
Elements

• Typography
• Letterspacing
• Logo Signature
• Seal
• Arrow
• ABA/ADA Specifications
• Colors
• Images and Patterns
• Languages
• Metric

12/2012 rev 08/01/2014

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Components Design Elements

The Department of Veterans Affairs signage system has been designed using a
selected group of common design elements and visual standards.

The design elements include the Department of Veterans Affairs logo signature
and seal, three versions (weight and style) of the Helvetica typeface and specifica-
tions for letter and word spacing. Visual standards include: colors, finishes, and let-
ter size in relation to viewing distance.

The design elements become the component building blocks upon which signs are
configured. The elements have been adopted to provide functional consistency in
signs for the Department of Veterans Affairs.

If specialized or unique sign applications require deviation from the signage guide,
contact the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs, Office of Construction & Facilities
Management for approval as required.

12/2012 Page 1-1-1

 Components Design Elements

Typography
Helvetica Bold is the standard
typeface for the VA Sign System
and will be used predominantly
throughout the sign program. Signs
identifying permanent rooms shall
be ABA compliant, to accommodate
the visually impaired (refer to ABA
sections). All non-ABA signs are to
maintain an upper and lower case
(Initial Caps) format.

The secondary language of a

multilingual sign shall be Helvetica
Regular.

Overhead signs shall be Helvetica

Bold Condensed.

Letterspacing
Normal letter spacing is utilized
when the readability ratio factor Normal Spacing
(capital letter height in inches
to maximum readable viewing
distance in feet) is 1:25 for a word
using upper and lower case letters.
Word spacing shall be equivalent to
the width of a lower case “v”.

ABA letters should be spaced so

that tactile readers can feel where
one letter ends and the next begins.
Braille needs to be spaced so the
reader can feel where one dot ends
and the next dot begins (refer to ABA
sections).

Normal letter spacing should not

be used when letter forms are to be
illuminated as light bleed causes
letters to fuse together visually.

Distance letter spacing shall be

utilized when the copy content is
intended for readability at greater
viewing distances than normal letter
spacing allows. The readability ratio
factor is 1:40. Distance letter spacing
shall be used for all exterior and
illuminated signs.

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-2

 Components Design Elements

Mm
Interline Spacing
Interline spacing will generally be x
noted on sign type drawings. As a
1/2 x
Mm
rule, line spacing shall be no less
than 1/2 the height of the upper
case letter form.

Paragraph Spacing

Mm
Paragraph spacing will generally
be noted on sign type drawings. As
a rule, paragraph spacing shall be
x
no less than the height of the upper
case letter form.

x
Mm
Mm
Mm
Alignment
A flush upper left copy format shall
be the general rule though certain
x
exceptions shall be noted. *
As a rule, all copy placed on inserts,
changeable directional modules,
listing strips, overhead panels, and
x
*

changeable exterior panels shall be

vertically centered, (equal margins
top and bottom) Graphic symbols
used in square format shall be
Text Line One
centered on four sides.
Text Line Two

X - Dimensions vary per sign type.

See Sign Type Drawings for exact dimensions

12/2012 Page 1-1-3

 Components Design Elements

Logo Signature
The VA has developed a new logo/
signature for use in signage. You
will note that the name is also now
presented differently.

The new logo and name signature

replaces the old logo and name
presentation effective immediately.

The old logo may remain in use in

and on existing signs, but all new
signs shall incorporate the new
logo/ signature.

Adjacent are its application in a

horizontal format and a vertical
format. These are the only formats
to use for signs. Do not use the

U.S. Department
format/art from the VA Graphic
Standards that incorporate the VA
seal.

of Veterans Affairs
The master art for the new
logo/signature for signage is
available as an electronic file, for
downloading, in the Technical
Information Library.

NOTE: The master art and

typography shall not be altered.
The font, the size relationship
between the elements, and the
letter spacing for the “VA” and “U.S.
Department of Veterans Affairs”
name, shall remain as presented
in the master art. The ruled line is
considered a part of the master art
and shall not be moved or deleted.

New VA Blue New VA Blue

The VA has selected Pantone 541
as the new standard color. The
CMYK values are as follows:
C: 100 M: 60 Y: 0 K: 40
Pantone 541
C: 100 M:60 Y:0 K:40

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-4

 Components Design Elements

Seal
The illustrated VA Seal is new.

There are specific requirements

regarding its use and reproduction
in both the full color version and
one color version. Consult the VA
Graphic Standards for complete
details regarding the seal.

NOTE: In regard to signage, the

seal is NOT to be used. It is not to
be altered, stylized or treated as an
accent element in signs.

It’s use remains as before, to be

displayed within a buildings entry
or lobby and reproduced per the
specifications and art exhibited in
the VA Graphic Standards.

Arrow
Illustrations show the prescribed
arrow for use in the VA sign
program.

The arrow is always centered

within a square field.

POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3

POSITION 4 POSITION 5

Arrow Alignment with Text

The arrow is always positioned in
such a manner that it is centered in
relationship to the capital letter that
it precedes. The standard position
for arrows, in relationship to text, is
1/3" Cap Height
either on the left of the first line of
text or immediately above the first
line of text.
EQ.

Text Line
On signs with numerous
destinations, a single arrow will be
1.5 x

placed adjacent to the first line of

x

text to identify the direction for all

destinations grouped together.
EQ.

The arrow size is one and one half

(1 1/2) times the capital letter
height.
Text Line

12/2012 Page 1-1-5

 ADA Design Elements

Architectural Barriers Act

Tactile Sign Specifications
3/8" Min 1/8" Min 3/8" Min
Character Specifications clear space Letter Spacing clear space
Characters shall be sans serif, all
capitals, and shall not be italic,
3/8" Min
bold, script or highly decorative. clear space

Characters and Braille shall be in a

horizontal format. Character height
2" Max height
5/8” Min height
CLEAN

Baseline Spacing
shall be 5/8" minimum and 2"

UTILITY
maximum, depending on viewing
distance (see Table 703.5.5 in "ABA
Accessibility standards for federal 3/8" Min
clear space
facilities").
Approx 1/4" Clean Utility
Character stroke thickness of the 3/8" Min
uppercase letter “I” shall be 15% clear space
Front View Copy
maximum of the height of the
character.
Braille
Character spacing to be 1/8"
minimum and four times the
character stroke width maximum.

Line spacing to be 135% minimum

and 170% maximum of the letter 3/8" Min 1/8" Min 3/8" Min
height. clear space Letter Spacing clear space

3/8" Min
Characters shall be separated from
clear space
raised borders and decorative

A-2578
elements by 3/8" minimum
2" Max height
5/8” Min height
Characters shall be raised 1/32"
minimum above their background. 3/8" Min
clear space
Approx 1/4" A-2578
Characters to be used shall be
3/8" Min
selected from styles where the width clear space
of the uppercase letter “O” is 55% Front View Copy
minimum and 110% maximum based Braille
on the height of the uppercase letter
“I”.

Pictograms
Pictograms shall have a field height
of 6". Characters and Braille shall
not be located within the pictogram
field. Pictogram text descriptions
to be located directly below the
pictogram field.

Finish & Contrast

Characters and their background to 6"
have a non-glare finish. Characters
shall contrast with their background
with either light lettering on a dark
background or dark letters on a
light background.

General
Where both visual and tactile
characters are required, either one
sign with both visual and tactile
lettering or two separate signs, one
with visual, one with tactile lettering
shall be provided.

Raised letters to be read by touch

should not have sharp or abrasive
edges.

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-6

 ADA Design Elements

Architectural Barriers Act

Tactile Sign Specification .100 .300
Braille
Shall be contracted, (Grade 2).
Raised dot
See measurements shown at right.
.100
Braille dots shall have a domed or No raised dot
rounded shape.
.400
The indication of an uppercase
letter or letters shall only be used Individual cell
.063
before the first word of sentences,
proper nouns and names, Individual
letters of the alphabet, initials, and
Blank cell .025
acronyms.
between words
Braille shall be positioned below Braille Specifications Raised Braille
the corresponding text. If text is
multi-lined, Braille shall be placed
below the entire text. Braille shall
be separated 3/8" minimum from
any other tactile letters and 3/8"
from raised borders.

Exception
Braille provided on elevator car
controls shall be separated by
3/16" minimum and shall be located
either directly below or adjacent
to the corresponding raised letters 18" wide available
and symbols. area for
Plan View
tactile signage
Location
Where a tactile sign is provided at
a door the sign shall be located
alongside the door at the latch side.
Where a tactile sign is provided at
double doors with one active leaf
the sign shall be located on the
inactive leaf. With two active leafs
the sign shall be located to the
right of the right hand door. Where
there is no wall space at the latch
side of a single door or at the right
side of double doors, signs shall
be located on the nearest adjacent
wall. Signs containing Tactile
AREA OF
characters shall be located so that
a clear floor space 18" minimum
AREA OF
REFUGE
area of refuge
REFUGE
area of refuge
by 18" minimum centered on the
Tactile characters is proposed
beyond the arc of any door swing
between the closed position and 40 48" 60"
degrees open position. Min Max

Tactile lettering on signs shall be

located 48" minimum above the
finish floor or ground surface,
measured from the baseline of the
lowest tactile character and 60"
maximum above the finish floor
or ground surface, measured from Elevation
the baseline of the highest tactile
character.

12/2012 Page 1-1-7

 ADA Design Elements

Arcitectural Barriers Act

Requirements
4" (102 mm)
Cane Sweep
Objects with leading edges more
than 27 inches (686 mm) and not
more than 80 inches (2129 mm)
above the finish floor or ground
may protrude 4 inches (102 mm)
maximum horizontally into the
circulation path.

EXCEPTION: Handrails shall be

permitted to protrude 4 1/2 inches
(114 mm) maximum.

Protrusion Limits
When a cane is used and the
element is in the detectable range,
it gives a person sufficient time
to detect the element with the
cane before there is body contact.
Elements located on circulation
paths, including operable elements,
must comply with requirements for
protruding objects. For example,
awnings and their supporting
structures cannot reduce the
minimum required vertical
clearance. Similarly, casement
windows, when open, cannot
encroach more than 4 inches (102
mm) into circulation paths above 27
inches (686 mm). 4" 4"
(102 mm) (102 mm)

Post Mounted 80"

Protruding Objects (2029 mm)
Free-standing objects mounted
on posts or pylons shall overhang 27"
circulation paths 12 inches (305 (686 mm)
mm) maximum when located 27 4" (102 mm) 4" (102 mm)
inches (686 mm) minimum and
80 inches (2129 mm) maximum
above the finish floor or ground.
Where a sign or other obstruction is
mounted between posts or pylons
and the clear distance between the
posts or pylons is greater than 12
inches (305 mm), the lowest edge
of such sign or obstruction shall
be 27 inches (686 mm) maximum
or 80 inches (2129 mm) minimum
above the finish floor or ground.

EXCEPTION: The sloping portions of

handrails serving stairs and ramps
shall not be required to comply. 27"
(686 mm) 4" (102 mm)

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-8

 Colors Design Elements

Sign Colors
The chart and accompanying
illustrations provide a listing of sign U.S. Department
colors that allow a medical center Text of Veterans Affairs
to coordinate an interior or exterior
sign program to the architectural
colors and finishes of the buildings Background
on the campus.

The color options listed have been

Accent
selected because they provide
contrast between typography and
the sign background; the contrast
shall be light on dark or dark on light.

Night and day light conditions for

exterior signs can vary, therefore,
readability should be field verified
with actual color samples.

High contrast for readability is equally

important for interior signs, especially
for the elderly and vision impaired.
Light background colors require black
or dark gray text and deep or dark
colors require white text.

If a facility deviates from the

identified family of colors, sufficient
contrast between the typography and
sign background under all lighting
situations shall be maintained. U.S. Department
Text of Veterans Affairs
Placement, type of light fixture,
sodium and halide lights, warm
and cool fluorescent lights can also
change colors and affect contrast, so
this needs to be taken into account.
Background
Some colors listed can be used
for both interior and exterior
applications and are so indicated.
There are however certain colors
that should not be used for interior Posts
or exterior signs because of their
unsuitability or because they are only
for special applications.

ABA Sign Colors

Generally, ABA related signage
shall consist of white text and/or
figures on a blue background, blue
shall be equal to color no. 15090 in
Federal Standard 59513; white is
not defined in the ABA standards.
VA may approve other colors
to complement decor or unique
design.

12/2012 Page 1-1-9

 Colors Design Elements

For exterior signs use the chart at Exterior Sign Background Colors
right to select a background color
and a type color.
Color Text
Color Description Color Matthews # Azko Nobel #
The paint colors listed are acrylic Ref #
polyurethne paint systems
manufactured by the following two B1 Drake White MP05732 SIGNM05732
companies. These are commonly
used in the sign industry: B2 Wells Fargo Black White MP26309 SIGNM26309

Matthews Paint B3 Lime Peel White MP12444 SIGNM12444

760 Pittsburg Drive
Delaware, OH 43015 B4 Marinated Olive White MP15975 SIGNM15975
www.matthewspaint.com
B5 Bear Creek White MP07050 SIGNM07050
Akzo Nobel
5555 Spaulding Drive B6 Kaffe Tan White MP03290 SIGNM03290
Norcross, GA 30092
www.akzonobel.com
B7 Indian Throne Blue White MP10261 SIGNM10261
Note: Always obtain color samples
from the paint company. Colors B8 Djbouti Flag Blue White MP10273 SIGNM10273
shown are for representational
purposes only. The actual paint B9 Mudstone White MP00547 SIGNM00547
colors may vary significantly from
the corresponding swatches B10 Brown County White MP04991 SIGNM04991
indicated in this document. Colors
will appear differently when viewed B11 Blue News White MP05040 SIGNM05040
on different computer monitors and/
or printed from different printers. B13 Claret Jug White MP10658 SIGNM10658
For a true color sample, it is best
to obtain an actual paint sample of B14 Asgard Wall White MP05480 SIGNM05480
the desired color.
B16 Handicapped Blue White MP26511 SIGNM26511
All traffic sign faces should use the
prescribed colors as listed in the B17 Red (OSHA) White MP09251 SIGNM09251
Manual for Uniform Traffic Control
Devices. New VA Blue MP09829
B18 White SIGNM09144
All OSHA Safety Colors are to meet
B19 Yellow (OSHA) Black MP09144 SIGNM09829
ANSI specification Z53.1/OSHA.
Black,
B20 White Red, Purple MP32071 SIGNM32071

B19 - White can be paint, white opaque vinyl application or translucent white vinyl application for
illuminated signs

Additional Colors for Trims, Accents, Posts & Brackets

A1 Dark Bronze Anodized A4 Polished Aluminum
A2 Black A5 Satin Aluminum
A3 Clear Anodized Aluminum

B17 Background color U.S. Department B13 Background color

of Veterans Affairs
B20 Text color Baltimore VA Medical Center B20 Text color
VA Maryland Health Care System

A5 Trim color
VA Capitol Health Care Network

A5 Trim color

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-10

 Colors Design Elements

For parking garage signs, vinyl colors

will be applied to either white or Parking Structure & Parking Lot Sign Colors
one of the other paint colors listed
in the chart at right. The colors and
their respective numbers listed in the Paint Colors Vinyl Text Colors
chart.
Color Color Matthews Azko
The paint colors listed are acrylic Ref # Description Paint # Nobel # 3M # Avery #
polyurethne paint systems
manufactured by the following two Purple Lavender
companies: B30 Purple Print MP02112 SIGNM02112
7725-48 A9475-0
Matthews Paint
Tomato Red Tomato Red
760 Pittsburg Drive B31 Gravity Tractor MP10844 SIGNM10844
Delaware, OH 43015 7725-13 A9325-0
www.matthewspaint.com
Wells Fargo Black Black
B32 MP26309 SIGNM26309
Akzo Nobel Black 7725-22 A9090-0
5555 Spaulding Drive
Norcross, GA 30092 Saddle Brown Cocoa
B33 Modena Mud MP00607 SIGNM00607
www.akzonobel.com 7725-139 A9278-0
The vinyl colors listed are
B34 Sailboat Blue MP02160 SIGNM02160 Vivid Blue Vivid Blue
premium high performance vinyls 7725-17 A9570-0
manufactured by the following two
companies: Apple Green Apple Green
B35 Anole Green MP13427 SIGNM13427
Avery Dennison Graphics and
7725-196 A9660-0
Reflective Products Division
Light Orange Orange
250 Chester Street, Building 6 B36 Antartica Orange MP01229 SIGNM01229
Painesville, Ohio 44077 7725-54 A9160-0

3M Graphics Market Center Teal Real Teal

3M Center, Bld 2002-12-E-04
B38 Aqua Riva MP14879 SIGNM14879 7725-96 A9615-0
St. Paul, MN 55144
Magenta Magenta
Note: Always obtain color samples B39 Rose Essence MP15170 SIGNM15170
7725-103 A9411-0
from the paint company. Colors
shown are for representational White White
purposes only. The actual paint B40 White Wonder MP32071 SIGNM32071
7725-10 A9005-0
colors may vary significantly from
the corresponding swatches
Sunflower Med. Yellow
indicated in this document. Colors B41 Shell Oil MP05585 SIGNM05585 7725-25 A9130-0
will appear differently when viewed
on different computer monitors and/
or printed from different printers.
For a true color sample, it is best
to obtain an actual paint sample of Additional Colors for Trims, Accents, Posts & Brackets
the desired color.
A1 Dark Bronze Anodized A4 Polished Aluminum

A2 Black A5 Satin Aluminum

A3 Clear Anodized Aluminum

P33 Paint background color

P34 Paint background color
P40 Vinyl text color Elevators
P34 Vinyl text color
A5 Trim Color P40 Vinyl text color

5 P40 Paint background color

Level

12/2012 Page 1-1-11

 Colors Design Elements

Accent

Text 2A244
2A244
Background

Bracket

Background Cardiac
Text
Intervention
Unit

Text

Background
Fire
Door
Keep closed
at all times.

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-12

 Colors Design Elements

For interior signs use the chart to the

right to select a background color
Interior Sign Background Colors
and a type color.
Color Text
Color Description Color Matthews # Azko Nobel #
The paint colors listed are acrylic Ref #
polyurethne paint systems
manufactured by the following two B1 Drake White MP05732 SIGNM05732
companies:
B2 Wells Fargo Black White MP26309 SIGNM26309
Matthews Paint
760 Pittsburg Drive
B3 Lime Peel White MP12444 SIGNM12444
Delaware, OH 43015 B8 Djibouti Flag Blue White MP10273 SIGNM10273
www.matthewspaint.com
B10 Brown County White MP04991 SIGNM04991
Akzo Nobel
5555 Spaulding Drive B28 Orange County White MP07869 SIGNM07869
Norcross, GA 30092
www.akzonobel.com B29 Spice Trader White MP02795 SIGNM02795
Note: Always obtain color samples
B31 Gloomy Gray White MP10124 SIGNM10124
from the paint company. Colors
B33 Fresh Fields White MP11532 SIGNM11532
shown are for representational
purposes only. The actual paint B34 Plum Crazy White MP04400 SIGNM04400
colors may vary significantly from
the corresponding swatches B35 Antwerp Blue White MP03362 SIGNM03362
indicated in this document. Colors
will appear differently when viewed B16 Handicapped Blue White MP26511 SIGNM26511
on different computer monitors and/
or printed from different printers. B17 Red (OSHA) White MP09251 SIGNM09251
For a true color sample, it is best
to obtain an actual paint sample of B18 New VA Blue White MP09144 SIGNM09144
the desired color.
B30 Spruce Pine Black MP13106 SIGNM13106
B32 Baby Boy Blue Black MP00344 SIGNM00344
B21 Garbo Silver Black MP02650 SIGNM02650
B22 Clintonite Green Black MP14762 SIGNM14762
B23 Old Copper Roof Black MP03397 SIGNM03397
B24 Foie Gras Black MP04685 SIGNM04685
B25 Winter Slush Black MP04982 SIGNM04982
B26 Toasty Gold Black MP05322 SIGNM05322
B27 Corn Silk Black MP11392 SIGNM11392
B19 Yellow (OSHA) Black MP09829 SIGNM09829
Black,
B20 White MP32071 SIGNM32071
Red, Purple

Additional Colors for Trims, Accents, Posts & Brackets

A1 Dark Bronze Anodized A4 Polished Aluminum
A2 Black A5 Satin Aluminum
A3 Clear Anodized Aluminum

B3 Background color

25286
25286
B20 Text color

B20 Text color

12/2012 Page 1-1-13

 Images Design Elements

Integration of Images and

Patterning with Signage
Visual iconography, such as images
and patterns, can be incorporated
into the design of both interior and
exterior signage systems. Their Receptionist
inclusion can add visual interest,
unify, or differentiate, signs related
to specific areas of a building
and/or campus. Imagery should RESTROOM
be thematically cohesive and Restroom

integrated in a consistent manner

Surgery
throughout the sign program.

Imagery can be cut from vinyl,

screened, painted, etched or applied
as a vinyl or laminated digital print.
Example shows possible use of a repeating pattern as visual texture, in this case the texture has
Imagery should be visually of
secondary importance to messaging been applied to separate substrate behind the sign panel.
and not distract or conflict with
readability of sign.

RESTROOM
Restroom

Receptionist Receptionist

Surgery Surgery

RESTROOM
Restroom

Example shows integration of photographic imagery. Example also illustrates the use different images
related to a common theme. This approach can be useful when implementing a sign system in a facility
where different areas of that facility have been assigned different color and material palettes.

Glass or Acrylic with either etched

graphic or application of translucent film to
simulate appearance of etched glass

Receptionist

RESTROOM
Restroom

Surgery

Example shows graphic as silhouetted images. This example illustrates a subtle approach to integration
of imagery/patterning

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-14

 Language Design Elements

Second Language
In facilities in the United States, Margin
the English text is listed above the
second language text. The cap

44544
height and interline spacing of the
second language text are half the
cap height and interline spacing
of the English text, unless noted
otherwise (see sign type drawings 44544
for specific dimensions).

In facilities in the Puerto Rico, the

Soiled Utility
Y X
Spanish text is listed above the
English text and the cap height and English
interline spacing of the English text Text
are half the cap height and interline
spacing of the Spanish text, unless 1/2 X
noted otherwise.

Suplidos Usados Second

Language
1/2 Y

Sign used in U.S Facility

Margin

44544
44544

Suplidos
Y X

Spanish
Text
Limpios
1/2 X

Clean Utility English

Text
1/2 Y

Sign used in Facility in Puerto Rico

12/2012 Page 1-1-15

 Metric Design Elements

Metric Nearest Nearest Nearest 1"=

The metric system is the preferred Inches 1 mm 5 mm 5 mm 25mm
system of measurement in (1/25") (1/5") (2/5") EXACTLY

accordance with the Metric 1/32"

1
Conversion Act of 1975, P.L. 94- 1/16"
168, as amended by Section 2
5164 of Omnibus Trade and 3/32" 2
Competitiveness Act of 1988, and 1/8" 3
Executive Order 12770.
3/16" 5
In accord with the Department of 1/4" 6
Veteran Affairs metric conversion
5/16"
plan, the sign system is preferably 8
to be constructed in metric, 3/8" 10
however, the English system can 7/16"
be used on VA projects, if it meets 11
the needs of a specific facility. 1/2"
13
The use of metric should not add 9/16" 14
cost to a project and “off the shelf”
metric sign systems are preferred. 5/8" 16
3/4" 19
The VA does not intend to impose
7/8" 22
rigid metric conversions on the
sign industry and will support sign 1" 25 25
manufacturers as their industry
converts to the metric standard. 11/4" 32 30
11/2" 38 40
For assistance in transition
13/4" 44 45
to metric, the drawings with
dimensions should be prepared 2" 51 50
showing direct metric English 21/4" 57 55
conversion. While typography is
generally referred to in the graphic 21/2" 64 65
industry by point sizes and the 23/4" 70 70
sign industry in inches, the VA sign
program is showing text layouts 3" 76 75
developed in inches and then 31/4" 83 85
directly converted to metric. It is
preferred, however, that metric 31/2" 89 90
dimensions be rounded up to 33/4" 95 95
the nearest 1 mm up to 1 inch; 5 102 100 100
4" 100
mm up to 4 inches; and, above
4 inches rounded down to the 5" 127 125 130 125
nearest 25 mm. 6" 152 150 150 150

The adjacent conversion chart 7" 178 180 180 175

should provide assistance in 8" 203 205 200 200
determining conversions from
9" 229 230 230 225
inches to millimeters.
10" 254 255 250 250
For further information on the
11" 279 280 280 275
conversion to metric, contact the
Department of Veteran Affairs, 1'-0" 305 305 300 300
Office of Construction & Facilities 2'-0" 610 610 610 600
Management.
3'-0" 915 910 900
4'-0" 1220 1220 1200
5'-0" 1525 1520 1500
6'-0" 1830 1830 1800
7'-0" 2135 2130 2100
8'-0" 2440 2440 2400
9'-0" 2745 2740 2700
10'-0" 3050 3050 3000
15'-0" 4570 4570 4500
20'-0" 6095 6100 6000

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-16

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Need a Sign
Program

• How to Know When

• Getting Help
• Project Process

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Evaluation Need a Sign Program

Every Building Needs That common understanding starts with the fact that today’s building codes require
a Sign Program certain life safety signs for building occupancy. In addition, signs are needed for
basic operational purposes, such as restroom signs.

Next, comes the need for labeling rooms. This allows for people to find rooms, its
occupants and services, have things delivered, and get repairs made. When a
building has more than one straight corridor the need for directional signs becomes
apparent. Add another floor(s) and additional types of life safety signs and floor
level designations are required.

So clearly every building needs signs. New buildings are easy because they can
start with a fresh new sign program tailored to the initial occupancy of the building
and to the requirements of the first users.

Older buildings, on the other hand, have existing signs, and unless the sign pro-
gram has been regularly updated with every building remodel, modification, and
change in informational use, the sign program is probably in need of replacement or
at a minimum, updating for code compliance.

Every Site Needs a Today’s building codes require certain exterior signs for building occupancy such as
Sign Program the identification of handicapped entrances and parking. Additionally, VA directives
require certain signs at the entry to the site and its buildings.

Next is the need for identifying buildings and entrances. This allows for people to
find occupants and services and have things delivered. When a site has more than
one building, directional signs become necessary. Add even more buildings, parking
lots and roads, and directional information to drivers and pedestrians, directional
signs become critically important for people to find their destination.

It is evident that every site needs exterior signs. New sites can start with a fresh
new sign program, however, this is typically not the case.

Most sites have been in use and have added and removed buildings over the
years, have relocated building entrances, and moved services from one building
to another. Unless the exterior sign program has been regularly updated, the sign
program may be in need of replacement.

The following are some probable indicators that a site and facility need a new exte-
rior sign program. Generally, the more of these that apply, the more pressing the
need.

• Is the exterior sign program older than 10 years?

• Do the exterior signs have rust showing through the paint?
• Is the name on the main site identification sign correct?
• Does the exterior sign program contain signs that are leaning or falling over?
• Have changes been made to parking lots? (use and location)
• Have buildings closed or changed use?
• Is the paint or lettering peeling off signs?
• Have signs been vandalized and not repaired, or repaired poorly?
• Does the exterior sign program refer to buildings that are closed?

12/2012 Page 2-1

 Evaluation Need a Sign Program

Does the facility need • Are exterior signs faded and streaked?
a new exterior sign
• Do visitors frequently ask for directions or become lost?
program?
• Are there plywood or temporary signs serving as directional or identification
(continued)
signs?
• Are exterior signs covered or hidden by landscaping or trees?
• Do the exterior signs refer to departments, entrances or services that are no
longer available or have been relocated?

How does age affect If the sign program is 3 to 5 years old and the signs have been maintained and cre-
the exterior sign ated or updated the necessary directional signs every time a department or service
program? is moved, the sign program can be considered reasonably current and will function
for many years to come.

If the sign program is 5 to 10 years old, more than likely the directional wayfinding
program has mistakes, missing information and misleading directional information.
During the 5 to 10 year period the paint finish on the signs is starting to show the
effect of weather aging.

Also, over a 10-year period there has probably been remolding or new construction
projects that have created orphaned signs or signs that are incorrectly labeling
buildings or services. Parking location and usage has also probably changed. And,
sign programs that are 10 years old have had different people working to maintain
them over the years.

At 15 years, a sign program has passed the threshold of being usable. Rust,
corrosion, peeling and severely faded paint mean the signs have now reached
point where they should be replaced like any other worn out or obsolete piece of
equipment.

Exterior sign programs that are over 20 years old are past the point of usefulness.
The physical condition of the signs is usually so bad they are actually “junk”. Other
aspects with a sign program at this age is the information conveyed is probably so
out of date that it provides little if any help to patients and visitors.

Does the facility need Following are probable indicators that the facility needs a new interior sign program.
a new exterior sign Generally, the more of these that apply to the buildings, the more pressing the need
program? for a replacement sign program.

• Is the sign program older than 15 years?

• Does staff constantly get asked for directions from confused or lost patients
and visitors?
• Is the information counter overwhelmed with requests for directions?
• Have code and life safety signs been upgraded in the last 5 years?
• Are there home made or paper signs identifying rooms or functioning as direc-
tional signs?
• Are directional signs and graphics still directing people to departments that no
longer exist or have moved?
• Are there interior signs in different colors, or materials, at the same door?

12/2012 Page 2-2

 Evaluation Need a Sign Program

Does the facility need • At the same door, are interior signs different types?
a new interior sign
• Are room number signs mounted on the door or on the door frame above the
program?
door?
(continued)
• Are signs mounted in the correct location?
• Are interior signs taped to the wall?
• Has remodeling or new construction changed the circulation routes in the
building?
• Are there color stripes in the floor or on the wall that no longer lead to desig-
nated departments?
• Has the use of the rooms in building changed?
• Is the room numbering system confusing and are numbers being used out of
sequence?
• Has there been a major relocation of services within the medical center?
• Are there repeated requests for updated wayfinding signs?
• At department entrances, are there 3 or 4 signs describing the occupant?

How does age affect If the sign program is 5 years old and the signs have been properly maintained
the interior sign and necessary directional signs have been updated every time a department has
program? moved, the sign program can be considered reasonably current and will function for
many years to come.

If the sign program is 10 years old, more than likely the directional wayfinding
program has mistakes, missing information and misleading directional information.
Also, over a 10-year period there have probably been remodelling projects that have
created orphaned signs or signs that are incorrectly labeling rooms or services.

Sign programs that are 10 years old may have had different people working to
maintain them over the years. As different individuals add or delete items to an
existing sign program in an uncoordinated fashion, the logic and/or cohesive struc-
ture of that sign program becomes compromised. As a result, the sign program can
become confusing and difficult for visitors to understand.

At 15 years a sign program has now past the threshold of being usable.

By now the original sign program is very likely so disconnected from what was origi-
nally implemented that there is no common thread of communication, look, finishes,
placement or information.

Sign programs that are over 20 years old are totally broken, dysfunctional and
should be replaced like any other obsolete piece of equipment.

What does a new sign Implementing a new sign program has a positive impact on every individual that
program bring to a uses the facility, whether it is a patient, visitor or employee.
facility?
These are just a few of the things achieved.

• Improved patient satisfaction.

• Improved image of the VA to the patients and visitors.

12/2012 Page 2-3

 Evaluation Need a Sign Program

• Improved employee morale.

• Improved professional image in the medical community.
• Reduced staff time in providing directions to patients and visitors.
• Modernized appearance to older buildings.

Does the facility need Following are some probable indicators that a building needs to have the rooms
room renumbering? renumbered and implement a new interior room identification sign program.

• Is the sign program older than 15 years?

• Has there been major remodeling with in the building?
• Are there duplicate room numbers within the building?
• Has there been additions to the building and were the new building room num-
bers coordinated with the existing building room numbers?
• Has there been the addition of several letters after a single room number to
accommodate new rooms?
• Has the use of the rooms in a building changed?
• Has there been a major relocation of services within the building?
• If a patient or visitor is given a room number to go to, can they find it without
asking someone for directions?
In a facility wide replacement sign project, it is important that improved patient
wayfinding is not hindered by keeping an outdated and broken room renumbering
systems in order to maintain current facility management systems. There are vari-
ous ways to address new room numbering in facility management systems that
maintain the database with current room renumbering.

Refer to the Room Renumbering section of this Guide for additional information.

12/2012 Page 2-4

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Getting Help It is recommended that an Environmental Graphic Design firm be hired for the
development of large-scale interior and exterior sign programs. The contractual
options are: (Option 1) Include services as a part of an overall Architect-Engineer
(A-E) contract; (Option 2) Utilize existing “Open-Ended Architect-Engineer” con-
tracts and engage the firm as a subcontractor; (Option 3) Hire an Environmental
Graphic Design firm like any other A-E firm.

The following document is an example of a typical statement of work for engaging

environmental graphic design programming services for a project. The statement
of work can be used as a template. Also, following are samples of evaluation cri-
teria and questions that can used as an aid in the selection process for a qualified
Environmental Graphic Design firm.

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
figure 1
STATEMENT OF WORK

VAMC ___________________
ENVIRONMENTAL GRAPHIC PLANNING SERVICES

This statement of work is to provide environmental graphic design services.

The project will plan, design and program an interior and exterior sign and graphics
program for the VAMC _________ and Community Based Outpatient Clinics (CBOCs)
located in the ___________ area. The exterior sign program will identify buildings and
provide directional wayfinding. The interior sign program will develop a new room
numbering system, provide for new code / life safety signs, new room identification and a
directional wayfinding sign program.

During the course of the development of the directional wayfinding sign program for the
interior, coordination will be conducted with the facility to identify architectural, interior
design and communication issues at the facility that can be improved to provide better
circulation and communication of services for patients and visitors. In the development of
the directional wayfinding sign program for the exterior, coordination will be conducted
to identify site circulation issues for both vehicles and pedestrians that can be improved to
provide better circulation and parking for patients and visitors.

The sign program “design look” will be developed to coordinate with the VA Signage
Design Guide utilizing a component base sign system.

A. QUALIFICATIONS FOR SCOPE OF WORK

The Environmental Graphic Design firm shall have experience in providing design
services specifically for the development of interior and exterior signage for health care
facilities. The environmental graphic designer’s activities and experience requirements are:

1. Primary business activity (70%) is in the field of Environmental Graphic Design

performing the work of sign programming and design.

2. Project Manager assigned to signage planning, wayfinding and programming must

have extensive experience with programming the room and informational signing
for the interior and exterior of large medical centers. Included are the development
of a wayfinding (directional) sign programs, room number and life safety signing,
the development of pedestrian and vehicle wayfinding sign programs, building and
entrance identification and traffic/regulatory signing. Extensive experience refers to
1

12/2012 Page 2-5

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
(continued) having worked on and managed multiple large sized (250+bed) medical centers as
figure 1 well as mental health facilities, community living centers and outpatient clinics.

3. Ability to provide sign location plans in AutoCAD (if AutoCAD files are available
from the VA for the buildings and sites involved).

4. Professional member of the Society for Environmental Graphic Design.

5. Thorough familiarity with the VA’s Signage Design Guide.

6. Knowledge of medical terminology and operational characteristics of medical

centers and clinics.

7. Selected firm will be excluded from bidding the sign product and installation.

8. Project manager assigned to the project must have experience in developing new
room numbering systems for medical centers.

B. PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK

1. INTERIOR TASKS

a. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will review the existing room numbering
system and advise the medical center if it needs to be replaced. If the existing
room numbering system is “broken”, the Environmental Graphic Design firm will
develop a new room numbering system for all rooms and all floors of the selected
medical center/clinic. This room numbering system is one that is to be directed
toward visitors and staff. Proposed options for new room numbering system will
be reviewed with facility Engineering and Interior Design.

b. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will design and program an interior
room identification sign program. This will involve programming and sign
location plans being prepared for all of the room identification signs throughout
the selected medical center/ facility. This will include a complete sign message
schedule identifying each sign, its message and its type. Sign location plans will be
prepared showing the placement/location and mounting method of the signs.

c. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will design and program a life safety,
code and regulatory sign program. This will involve programming and sign
location plans being prepared for all of the regulatory, code and life safety signs
throughout the selected medical center/facility. This will include a complete sign
message schedule identifying each sign, its message and its type. Sign location
plans will be prepared showing the placement/location and mounting method of
regulatory, code and life safety signs.

d. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will design and program a directional
wayfinding sign program. This will involve programming and sign location plans
being prepared for all of the directional signs throughout the selected medical
center/facility. This will include a complete sign message schedule identifying each
sign, its message and its type. Sign location plans will be prepared showing the
placement/location and mounting method of directional signs.

e. The Environmental Graphic Design Specialist will develop a report identifying

architectural, interior design and communication problems at the facilities that
need to be changed and improved to provide better identification, circulation and
communication of services for patients and visitors.

12/2012 Page 2-6

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work
Sample Statement of work
(continued)
figure 1 f. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will develop the design scheme for
the “look” of the interior sign program. The design will generally define the
various types of signs that will be used throughout the project along with issues
of image, materials and finishes, typography and layout, and color. Terminology,
names and titles, flexibility of the system, form and scale, and legibility will also
be considerations in developing the design scheme. The design documents will
identify material finishes, trims, sign construction, installation and other design
details. The documents will include elevation drawing of each sign type with
applicable size and layout dimensions and any necessary side, top and back views.

g. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare complete specifications for
the product(s) being specified for the project.

h. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare suitable documentation

necessary for the VA to obtain pricing/quotations for the demolition of existing
signs and the installation of new signs. The Environmental Graphics Design firm
will be required to prepare any of the VA’s bidding documentation, excluding VA’s
standard forms.

i. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare a pre-construction budget

for product, demolition and installation.

j. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will provide construction

implementation services which include reviewing submittal and shop drawings
submissions and perform a pre-installation walk thru with contractor. At
completion of installation, the Environmental Graphic Design firm will make a
final inspection walk through and prepare a “punch list” report noting deficiencies
and corrections necessary for the contractor to complete the project.

k. The interior signs will be designed with consideration given to the ATBCB’s
guideline for accessible signage related to the Americans with Disabilities Act.

l. Examples of the types of interior signs that will be included in the scope of work
are: Primary room/department identification signs; Patient room signs; Secondary
room identification signs; Informational signs; Wall and ceiling mounted
directional signs; Entrance lobby signs; VISN identification signage; Regulatory,
life safety code and restrictive signs.

2. EXTERIOR TASKS

a. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will design and program an exterior
wayfinding/directional sign program. This will involve programming and
sign location plans being prepared showing the placement of the signs and
their respective messages. This will include a complete sign message schedule
identifying each sign, its message and its type. Sign location plans and photographs
will be prepared showing the exact placement/location and installation method of
the directional signs.

b. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will design and program an exterior
building identification sign program. This will involve programming and
sign location plans being prepared showing the placement of the signs and
their respective messages. This will include a complete sign message schedule
identifying each sign, its message and its type. Sign location plans and photographs
will be prepared showing the exact placement/location and installation method of
the building identification signs. The signs on the building may be augmented with

12/2012 Page 2-7

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
(continued)
freestanding signs as necessary to assist in identifying buildings.
figure 1
c. The Environmental Graphic Design Specialist will develop a report identifying
site circulation issues for both vehicles and pedestrians that can be improved to
provide better access, circulation and parking for patients and visitors.

d. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will develop the design scheme for
the “look” of the exterior sign program. The design will generally define the
various types of signs that will be used throughout the project along with issues
of image, materials, finishes, typography and layout, and color. Terminology,
names and titles, flexibility of the system, form and scale, and legibility will also
be considerations in developing the design scheme. The design documents will
identify material finishes, trims, sign construction, installation and other design
details. The documents will include an elevation drawing of each sign type with
applicable size and layout dimensions and any necessary side, top and back views.

e. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare complete specifications for
the product being specified for the project.

f. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare suitable documentation

necessary for the VA to obtain pricing/quotations for the demolition of existing
signs and the installation of new signs. The design firm will not be required to
prepare any of the VA’s bidding documentation.

g. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will provide construction

implementation services which include reviewing submittal and shop drawings
submissions and perform a pre-installation walk thru with contractor. At
completion of installation, the Environmental Graphic Design firm will make a
final inspection walk through and prepare a “punch list” report noting deficiencies
and corrections necessary for the contractor to complete the project.

h. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare a pre-construction budget

for product, demolition and installation.

i. Examples of the types of exterior signs that will be included in the scope of work
are: Freestanding, wall or building mounted identification signs; Freestanding, wall
or building mounted directional signs; Parking lot identification and parking stall
signs; Traffic signs; Site identification signs.

3. AREA OF WORK

a. The interior sign area of work at VAMC ________________ is defined as the

interior of the medical center complex and ______ community based outpatient
clinics (CBOCs).

b. The exterior sign area of work at VAMC _________________ is defined as the

traffic and parking lot signs and building identification signage.

4. PHASES OF WORK

a. Phase 1 - PLANNING

Project begins with an initial meeting with the Environmental Graphic Design
firm, the network planner, the medical center/facility project coordinator, and
appropriate VAMC staff. It begins by defining and refining the scope of the
project in greater detail and reviewing the responsibilities of the Environmental

12/2012 Page 2-8

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
(continued)
Graphic Design firm and facility staff regarding input, design, documentation,
figure 1 coordination, direction and approvals. A project schedule will be established
which relates to the project’s sequence of events and priorities of importance.
Functional relationships will be discussed regarding design character,
implementation phasing, document submissions and purchasing/bidding
procedures.

Deliverables: 3 hard copies and 1 electronic file (PDF format); A project schedule.

b. Phase 2 - NEW ROOM NUMBER PROGRAMMING

The Environmental Graphic Design firm will survey and review the selected
medical center/facility buildings and develop a new room numbering system. The
room numbering scheme will be presented to the Facility Director and appropriate
staff for their review, comment and approval.

Deliverables: 3 hard copies and 1 electronic file (PDF and DWG format). Drawings
illustrating the proposed room numbering scheme. A conversion table listing new
and old room numbers.

c. Phase 3 - PRELIMINARY PROGRAMMING and DESIGN

The Environmental Graphic Design firm will revise the new room numbering
system based upon comments received from the facility. When the room
numbering revisions are complete, the Environmental Graphic Design firm will
issue the final documentation to the facility project coordinator that will consist of
floor plans, which list both the new and the old number. This documentation will
be incorporated into the new room identification sign program.

The Environmental Graphic Design firm will survey and review the project for
sign locations, text and placements. With the exterior signs, evaluations will be
made regarding sign illumination requirements. For the exterior directional signs,
evaluations will involve analyzing public, employee and vehicular circulation and
traffic flow patterns around the project site. On the basis of information gathered
in these activities and in the Planning Phase, the Environmental Graphic Design
firm will develop the schematic design scheme for the “look” of the sign program.
The Environmental Graphic Design firm will identify finishes, trims, types of
signs and other design details. This will all be based upon a component based sign
system as identified in the VA Sign Design Guide, created for the Department
of Veterans Affairs. Emphasis will be placed on developing a sign program that
provides the facility with a progressive professional look, coordinated with the
building’s interior design and architecture, re-cycle element of the existing exterior
sign program, if possible, and address the facility’s maintenance requirements.
For both the interior of the buildings and the exterior signs for the campus, a
preliminary sign location plan will be prepared along with a preliminary sign
message schedule.

The schematic design scheme, preliminary sign location plan and preliminary
message schedule will be presented to Facility Management, coordinated by
the facility project manager, for their review and comment. The Environmental
Graphic Design Specialist will assist the facility in the review of the documents
and the assembly of the facilities review comments.

Deliverables: 3 hard copies and 1 electronic file (PDF); Drawings illustrating

the proposed look, color, trim, etc. of the interior and exterior sign program;

12/2012 Page 2-9

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
(continued) Preliminary sign location plan and message schedule.
figure 1
d. Phase 4 - FINAL PROGRAMMING and DESIGN

After the schematic design of the sign program and the preliminary sign location
plan and message schedule has been reviewed and approved by the medical center/
facility, the Environmental Graphic Design firm will proceed to develop the draft
of the sign project documents involving the sign type drawings and specifications.

These documents will show preliminary illustrations of all interior and exterior
sign types in the sign program. A preliminary draft of the specifications and
budget will be developed that will define the cost of implementing the program.
The Environmental Graphic Design firm will revise the sign location plan and
message schedule. These documents will be presented to appropriate facility staff
for review and comment.

Deliverables: 3 hard copies and 1 electronic file (PDF); Preliminary version of the
sign project manual showing all of the sign types, revised sign location plans and
message schedule; Preliminary specifications and budget.

e. Phase 5 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

In this phase, the Environmental Graphic Design firm refines and finalizes the
physical design of the signs, based upon client input from design development
documents. The facility project coordinator will return the design development
sign type drawings, sign location plan and message schedule to the Environmental
Graphic Design firm with final comments and final revisions. The Environmental
Graphic Design firm will prepare the final sign project manual. The sign project
manual will follow the general format of detailed sign type drawings, defining
all of the signs in the hierarchy of the sign program, selected sign construction
details, sign installation details and specifications. The sign type drawings will
include elevation drawings of each sign type with applicable size and layout
dimensions and any necessary side, top and back views. It will also contain the
interior and exterior sign message schedule, which defines the wording of each
sign, referenced to the particular sign type and location. Final specifications will be
provided for both the interior and exterior signs. Final sign location plans, in the
form of AUTOCAD files will be provided for both the interior and exterior sign
locations. A pre-construction budget estimate will be developed for implementing
the program.

Deliverables: 3 hard copies and 1 electronic file (PDF and DWG format); Sign
Project Manual/Document containing – Specifications, Sign Type Elevation,
Layout, Detail and Mounting Drawings, Sign Message Schedule and Sign Location
Drawings, pre-construction budget.

f. Phase 6 - CONSTRUCTION / IMPLEMENTATION PHASE

The Environmental Graphic Design firm is to assist the facility project coordinator
with the following services.

i. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will provide advice and direction to
the VA in matters related to the contractors and suppliers during the course
of the implementation of the project. The Environmental Graphic Design
firm will have no direct or indirect affiliation with any of the contractors or
suppliers involved with the implementation of the project.

12/2012 Page 2-10

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
(continued) ii. Review all design submissions at the medical center with VAMC project
figure 1 coordinator and other appropriate staff.

iii. Review the fabricator/sign contractors’ submittals, shop drawings and

samples to ensure compliance with the Bid/Project Design Documents. The
review could consist of one complete submittal and one revised submittal.

iv. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will visit the project site with the
facility project coordinator and the sign contractor and perform a pre-
installation walk through for both the interior and exterior sign project.

v. At the completion of all fabrication and installation, the Environmental

Graphic Design firm will make a final inspection walk through of the project
and prepare a report noting deficiencies and corrections necessary for the
sign contractor to complete both the interior and the exterior sign projects.

vi. At the completion of final inspection corrections, the Environmental Graphic

Design firm will make a final inspection walk through of the project and
prepare a report noting if there are still any outstanding deficiencies and
corrections necessary for the sign contractor to complete both the interior
and the exterior sign projects.

5. PRELIMINARY PROJECT SCHEDULE

Phase 1: ____ weeks; Phase 2: ____ weeks; Phase 3: ____ weeks;

Phase 4: ____ weeks; Phase 5: ____ weeks

6. EXCLUSIONS

The fabrication and installation of signs, site electrical and the engineering within
signs is by others. Interior signs not included in the scope of work are: illuminated
fire safety exit signs, signs related to or on equipment or fixtures, and signs relating to
employee operational matters. Exterior signs not included in the scope of work are:
parking stall identification, signs related to or on equipment or fixtures and striping
and pavement markings.

7. PROJECT COORDINATOR

_____________________________________

NOTE
This statement of work is a general guide to assist in the development of a scope
for a project and facility. Close coordination with a Contracting Officer will help tailor
the document to meet current contracting requirements and procedures.

12/2012 Page 2-11

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Federal Business
Sample Federal business opportunity ad
Opportunity Ad
figure 2
DESCRIPTION: IDENTIFINITE DELIVERY CONTRACT (OPEN-END) FOR

ENVIRONMENTAL GRAPHIC DESIGN PROGRAMMING SERVICES

The project will provide professional services necessary for various environmental graphic
design services for VA medical centers located in the VA Integrated Service Network
(VISN) ____. The VISN ____ facilities will include VAMC ___________. Also included
will be various Community Based Outpatient Clinics in the VISN ___ catchment area.
Services include design and program of interior and exterior signage, directional wayfind-
ing signage, new room numbering system directed towards visitors and staff, life safety,
code and regulatory signage, traffic regulatory signs. This will involve programming and
sign location plans for all signs throughout the medical center/facility. Area of consider-
ation is within the continental United States. The environmental graphic design firm shall
perform work on an indefinite quantity (Open-Ended) basis. When services are required,
a work order will be issued. Work orders will be issued by the Contracting Officer and
will detail the scope of work. The environmental graphic designer, VA and Contracting
Officer will review the scope of work and negotiate the amount of hours required and the
completion schedule. VA intends to award an open-ended Environmental Graphic Design
contract. The Government is uncertain as to the number of task orders that will be placed
against the contract during the term of the contract. Award of individual task orders is
contingent upon project funding. Selection criteria will be based on: (1) Primary business
activity (70%) is in the field of Environmental Graphic Design performing the work of sig-
nage programming and design. (2) Project Manager assigned signage programming must
have extensive experience with programming the room and informational signing for the
interior of large medical centers including the development of a wayfinding (directional)
sign program and life safety signing. Extensive experience refers to having worked on and
managed multiple large sized (250+ bed) medical centers as well as psychiatric hospitals,
nursing homes, and outpatient clinics. Be familiar with hospital departments and their
interaction with one another. (3) Project Manager assigned signage programming must
have extensive experience with programming the signing for the exterior of large medical
centers. This includes the development of pedestrian and vehicle wayfinding (direc-
tional) signs program, building and entrance identification and traffic/regulatory signing.
Extensive experience refers to having worked on exterior sign programs for multiple
medical centers in rural, suburban, and urban locations. (4) Ability to provide sign loca-
tion plans in AutoCAD (if AutoCAD files are available from the VA for the buildings and
sites involved). (5) Professional member of the Society for Environmental Graphic Design.
(6) Thorough familiarity with the VA’s Environmental Graphic Design Program Guide. (7)
Knowledge of medical terminology and operational characteristics of hospitals, psychi-
atric hospitals, nursing homes, and outpatient clinics. (8) Selected firm will be excluded
from bidding the sign product, demolition and installation. (9) Project manager assigned
to the project must have experience in developing new room numbering systems for
medical centers. Environmental Graphic Design firms that meet the requirements listed in
this announcement are invited to submit two (2) copies of the completed Standard Forms
(SF) 254 and 255 by _________________. SIC code 8711 applies. No bid packages are
available. This is not a Request for Proposal (RFP).

12/2012 Page 2-12

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample The following are some rating factors that can be used in the selection process for
Rating Factors an Environmental Graphic Design firm.

1. Primary business activity (70%) is in the field of Environmental Graphic

Design performing the work of signage programming and design.
2. Project Manager assigned signage programming must have extensive experi-
ence with programming the room and informational signing for the interior of
large medical centers including the development of a wayfinding (directional)
sign program and life safety signing. Extensive experience refers to having
worked on and managed multiple large sized (250+ bed) medical centers as
well as psychiatric hospitals nursing homes, and outpatient clinics.
3. Project Manager assigned to signage programming must have extensive
experience with programming the signing for the exterior of large medical
centers. This includes the development of pedestrian and vehicle wayfinding
(directional) signs program, building and entrance identification and traffic/
regulatory signing. Extensive experience refers to having worked on exterior
sign programs for multiple medical centers in rural, suburban, and urban
locations.
4. Ability to provide sign location plans in AutoCAD (if AutoCAD files are avail-
able from the VA for the buildings and sites involved).
5. Professional member of the Society for Environmental Graphic Design.
6. Thorough familiarity with the VA’s Signage Design Guide.
7. Knowledge of medical terminology and operational characteristics of hospi-
tals, psychiatric hospitals, community living centers, and outpatient clinics.
8. Selected firm will be excluded from bidding the sign product, demolition and
installation.
9. Project manager assigned to the project must have experience in developing
new room numbering systems for medical centers.
10. Provide 5 client references (past projects) that can be contacted for back-
ground and performance information on the Environmental Graphic Design
firm.

12/2012 Page 2-13

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample The following are some interview questions that can be used in the selection pro-
Questions for cess for evaluating an Environmental Graphic Design firm.
Environmental Graphic
Design Firm During 1. What type of firm is _____________?
Interview 2. How long has the firm been in business?
3. Is the firm affiliated with, or a division of, another firm or sign company?
4. Does the firm sell signs or any other manufactured product?
5. How long has the firm been designing sign programs for medical centers?
6. How many interior and exterior sign programs has the firm designed for medi-
cal centers?
7. What is the largest medical center that the firm has designed a sign
program for?
8. How many VA Medical Centers has the firm designed and programmed? And,
what are the names of those facilities?
9. Does the firm have any VA projects currently underway?
10. What comprises the firm’s staff and what is their experience in the field of
Environmental Graphic Design?
11. What is the educational background of the staff?
12. How many people typically work on a project?
13. Who works on the Design Phase of a project and then who works on the
Construction Phase?
14. What are the 5 most recent projects bid?
15. What are the 5 most recent projects completed? (fabricated and installed)
16. What are the 5 most recent medical facility projects?
17. What are 5 projects currently in design at the firm?
18. Has the firm received any awards for design excellence?
19. Has the firm had any litigation involvement in the last 5 years?
If so, what was the outcome?
20. Is the firm a Veteran owned firm?
21. How familiar is the firm with the sign products available?
22. Is the firm familiar with GSA sign manufacturers?

12/2012 Page 2-14

 Process Need a Sign Program

The Project Process The process to develop a new sign program for a medical center, a site or a build-
ing, can take several months or even a year to complete.

Programming the signage requirements for a facility first requires a definition of the
project to be undertaken.

Interior sign programs are generally best undertaken with projects that involve
remodeling, repainting or refurbishing. When an old sign program is removed there
is generally considerable refurbishment needed to walls. A new interior sign pro-
gram sign quantity will generally be two thirds of the signs that are removed, so
there is considerable patching, repairs and painting involved.

An exterior sign program may require repairs to landscaping, new electrical, repair-
ing walks, walls and paved surfaces. It is best to undertake an exterior sign program
for the entire medical campus rather than attempting to do it piecemeal. Doing just
a portion of a campus will lead to confusion on the part of patients and visitors
because when they see new signs they will not be sure that the information on an
old sign is correct.

The following is a sign program project template that outlines the various tasks,
documentation and events in a sign project for a building or a site. This overview
can also function as a “project road map” to keep a sign project on track for mile-
stones and deliverables.

Phase 1 Engaging an Environmental Graphic Design Firm

Objective • Selection of a qualified firm to provide sign

programming and design services.
Determine what needs to be
accomplished.

Environmental Graphic • Submitting profile and qualifications.

Design Firm Tasks
Verify what will be done by the
Environmental Graphic Design firm.

Documentation • GSA Form 330

Establish what will be delivered.

VA Project • Coordination of the review and approval

Management Tasks process with Contracting.
Identify what will be done by the • Assembly of the personnel that will be involved
VA. in the selection review process.

Approvals • Coordinated by Contracting.

Determine what approvals need to
be achieved.

Time • 8 to 16 weeks
Determine how much time will be
required.

12/2012 Page 2-15

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 2 Establishing the Project Team

Objective • Development of project milestones.

Determine what needs to be • Development of the review and approval
accomplished. process.
• Assembly of the personnel that will be involved
in the project.

Environmental Graphic • Project manager and design team staff

Design Firm Tasks finalized.
Verify what will be done by the • Prepare a project time line.
Environmental Graphic Design firm.

Documentation • Project time line

Establish what will be delivered.

VA Project • Develop the core committee that will function

Management Tasks as the project lead.
Identify what will be done by the • Develop a process for reviewing the project
VA. documentation.

Approvals • Prepare a project document review time line.

Determine what approvals need to • Develop the channel of approvals that will be
be achieved. utilized for the project.

12/2012 Page 2-16

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 3 Programming
Defining the scope of the project, the criteria for the design and any special
requirements.

Objective • Defining the project.

Determine what needs to be • Defining the influences.
accomplished. • Identifying the coordinating elements.

Environmental Graphic • Determine where signs are needed.

Design Firm Tasks • Determine the types of signs required.
Verify what will be done by the • Determine the circulation system and decision
Environmental Graphic Design firm. points.
• Develop a preliminary message schedule of
text for the signs.
• Identify specific site and/or architectural
conditions.
• Define special requirements for lighting,
installation and maintenance.
• Identify coordination issues with architect,
landscape architect and interior designer.
• Establish budget objectives.

Documentation • Sign message schedule and location plan.

Establish what will be delivered.

VA Project • Review the sign message schedule and loca-

Management Tasks tion plan providing comment and revisions.
Identify what will be done by the • Provide input and direction on budgets.
VA

Approvals • Documents being developed so there are no

approvals.
Determine what approvals need to
be achieved.

Time • Depending on the overall size of the project,

this can take 2 to 12 weeks.
Determine how much time will be
required.

12/2012 Page 2-17

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 4 Design Development

Creating the design look of the sign and graphics program and resolving issues.

Objective • Defining the look, image and design character.

Determine what needs to be • Applying the image and design character to the
accomplished. needs defined in the Programming Phase.

Environmental Graphic • Define the various types of signs to be used.

Design Firm Tasks • Define issues of image, finishes, layout, and
Verify what will be done by the color.
Environmental Graphic Design firm. • Define terminology, names and titles.
• Drawings of all the interior and exterior sign
types that will be included in the sign program.
• Revise sign location plan and message
schedule.
• Develop preliminary budget.
• Coordinate with other design consultants.

Documentation • Presentation drawings of the proposed design

look.
Establish what will be delivered.
• Drawings showing all sign types.
• Revised sign location plans and message
schedule.
• Preliminary budget.

VA Project • Review design concepts and drawings and

Management Tasks provide comments.
Identify what will be done by the • Review sign message schedule and location
VA. plan providing comment and revision.

Approvals • VA approval of Design Development

documents.
Determine what approvals need to
be achieved.

Time • Starting during Programming, this phase will

take 5 to 10 weeks.
Determine the amount of time
required.

12/2012 Page 2-18

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 5 Final Design

Preparation of documentation for the manufacturing and installation of the sign and
graphics program.

Objective • Final documentation for purchasing

implementation.
Determine what needs to be
accomplished.

Environmental Graphic • Prepare final sign location plans and

Design Firm Tasks message schedule.
Verify what will be done by the • Prepare final sign type drawings, text layout,
Environmental Graphic Design firm. construction details.
• Prepare installation and mounting details.
• Prepare specifications.
• Develop pre-construction budget.
• Provide list of pre-qualified GSA sign
manufacturers.

Documentation • Drawings showing all sign types, details,

mounting and layouts.
Establish what will be delivered.
• Final sign messages schedule and location
plan.
• Pre-construction budget.
• Specifications.

VA Project • Review the final sign location plan,

Management Tasks message schedule, sign type drawings and
specifications.
Identify what will be done by the
VA.

Approvals • VA approval of Final Design documents.

Determine what approvals need to
be achieved.

Time • This phase will take 6 to 8 weeks.

Determine how much time will be
required.

12/2012 Page 2-19

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 6 Demolition
Removal of existing sign program

Objective • Defining what work is to be accomplished

regarding removal of existing signs.
Determine what is to be
accomplished.

Environmental Graphic • Develop documentation.

Design Firm Tasks
Verify what will be done by the
Environmental Graphic Design firm.

Documentation • Documentation describing the scope of demo-

lition work. This can consist of photographs,
Establish what will be delivered.
description of work and plans of location of
signs to be removed.

VA Project • Provide direction on the scope of demolition to

Management Tasks be addressed.
Identify what will be done by the • Review demolition documentation.
VA. • Review sign removal schedule and plan provid-
ing comment and revisions.

Approvals • VA approval of demolition documents.

Determine what approvals need to
be achieved.

Time • 2 to 4 weeks
Determine how much time will be
required.

Sign Company • Removal of demolition approved signs as well

Responsibilities as any corresponding signage components.

12/2012 Page 2-20

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 7 Purchasing
Bidding and entering into a contract for manufacturing and installation.

Objective • Engage a qualified manufacturer and installer.

Determine what needs to be
accomplished.

Environmental Graphic • Assist in the pricing process by answering

Design Firm Tasks questions and providing clarifications.
Verify what will be done by the
Environmental Graphic Design firm.

Documentation • Form 90-2237

Established what will be delivered. • Statement of Work
• Estimate

VA Project • Contracting Officer conducts the purchasing

Management Tasks process.
Identify what will be done by the
VA.

Approvals • Pricing Abstract

Determine what approvals need to • Technical Team
be achieved. • Contractor Qualifications
• Grade Review

Time • This phase will take 4 to 10 weeks.

Determine how much time will be
required.

Sign Company • Material samples and drawings for sign fabri-

Responsibilities cation and installation.
• Materials for samples and/or sign prototypes.

12/2012 Page 2-21

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 8 Implementation
Manufacturing and installation

Objective • Install and complete the project.

Determine what is to be
accomplished.

Environmental Graphic • Review of shop drawings.

Design Firm Tasks • Review of materials, finishes, colors
Verify what will be done by the and samples.
Environmental Graphic Design firm. • Develop change orders.
• Perform pre-installation walk through.
• Perform punch list inspection.
• Prepare punch list report.

Documentation • Reviewed shop drawings.

Establish what will be delivered. • Reviewed materials, finishes, colors
and samples.
• Punch list inspection report.

VA Project • Review shop drawings.

Management Tasks • Review materials, finishes, colors and
Identify what will be done by the samples.
VA. • Review punch list inspection report.
• Provide access to the building and site.
• Coordination with facility staff.

Approvals • Acceptance of installed project.

Determine what approvals need to • Receiving Report.
be achieved.

Time • Generally projects take from 12 to 20 weeks,

depending on their size and scope.
Determine how much time will be
required.

Sign Company • Creation of shop drawings

Responsibilities • Creation of material, finish and color samples.
• Creation of requested sign prototypes.
• Fabrication of signage structures.
• Production of large format printed graphics.
• Installation of signage structures.

12/2012 Page 2-22

 Process Need a Sign Program

Getting Help for a While this information will provide guidance for all projects, much of what has been
Small Project discussed relates to large scale sign programs. The approach for small projects will
be similar whether design/programming services are engaged or the work is done
“in house”, with VA staff and resources.

Specifying environmental graphic design and programming services as a part

of a purchase order for a small sign project is an option that can be considered.
However, be careful in retaining control and defining the qualification of the pro-
grammer/designer who will be doing the work.

There is an inherent conflict of interests with the programmer/designer working

for the manufacturer and not the ultimate client, with a tendency to over specify
the quantity of sign products needed or the types of signs being provided. Make
sure the scope of work being provided by a manufacturer is also clearly spelled
out, in detail, relating to the exact type of programming services that is going to be
provided.

Be suspect if the manufacturer does not identify the true cost for designing and
programming services and “buries” it in the product cost. Programming and design
services are never free.

12/2012 Page 2-23

 Programming Need a Sign Program

Interior Sign The Sign Message Schedule is a spread sheet listing the variety of unique speci-
Message Schedule fications for each sign in the project. The Message Schedule is first developed
during the Programming phase of the sign process. Refined during Design develop-
ment and finalized at the Final Design phase. The Message Schedule specifies
sign location, specific sign text, and sign type. Additional information as to quantity,
notes, layout symbols, revision dates and special conditions should be included.

• Floor: Interior sign schedules include a floor level number for each sign.
Exterior message schedules do not include a floor level designation.
• Location: A number designating the location of a sign on a particular floor
(location numbers should not be repeated on the same floor). There is typically
a symbol indicating the orientation of a sign in plan view. A symbol parallel to a
wall, designates the general location of a sign on a wall. Symbols for overhead
signs are often located in the center of a hallway, or at a doorway opening.
Symbols perpendicular to a wall indicate flag signs. To determine the specific
horizontal placement of a sign, refer to the sign type drawing. To determine
mounting height, refer to the installation details.
• Sign Type: A variety of sign types are typically used in a project. The size,
design configuration and text layout vary amongst different sign types.
• Sign Text: The Message Schedule lists the text on each sign. Text required is
specific to each location.
• Sign Side: Needs to be specified on all double sided signs. If one side is blank
the words (blank) will appear in the message schedule.
• Quantity: In some situations more than one sign will be necessary at a par-
ticular location. Signs are often stacked horizontally on a wall to accommodate
multiple signs sharing the same location.
• Layout/Symbol: Many signs use icons. For example, the accessible symbol, of
a person in a wheelchair, is to indicate an accessible restroom.
• Notes: Critical information in any project can be listed in the notes. “Client to
verify text” if often listed indicating that the copy is not final and need client
approval prior to fabrication.
• Glass Backers: Signs installed on glass doors, windows and side lights, glass
backers are installed to cover the back side of mounting tape.

Figure 3
Interior Message Schedule Installation
Interior Message Building Name Glass
Schedule Side Backer
Layout/ Revised
Floor Location Sign Type Sign Text Quantity Notes
Symbol Date
2 201 IN14.01 Clinic E
Main Lobby 1
-------------------------
Therapy Services
Radiation Therapy

2 203 IN19.01 1 Mount to yes

Pharmacy
sidelight

CAUTION
2 207 IN01.22 1 Biohaz. Mount to
BIOHAZARD
symbol door
(symbol)

IN03.01 1359
2 206 Soiled 1
IN04.02
Utility

IN09.01 Men
2 205 (men symbol) 1
symbol
12/2012 Page 2-24

2 202 IN03.01 1360 1

 Programming Need a Sign Program

Interior Sign Interior Locations Plans show sign locations relative to doors, walls, hallways,
Location Plan lobbies. The signs are placed to identify rooms, as well as areas, and provide a
wayfinding system to help patients and visitors locate rooms and services. Sign
Location Plans are architectural floor plan drawings showing sign locations, which
are cross referenced to the corresponding message schedule. These drawings can
be part of the architectural drawing set or a separate document. The drawings need
to be drawn to scale and exterior plans need north orientation. Location plans can
be a variety of sized documents such as Architectural A to E size or 11"x 17" lay-
outs. The drawings must be printed so that location call outs are legible.

Figure 4
Interior Location Plan

206 205
200A 200B 203
207 202

201

208 204

Location
Building Floor Plan

12/2012 Page 2-25

 Programming Need a Sign Program

Exterior Sign The Exterior Sign Message Schedule is a spread sheet listing the variety of unique
Message Schedule specifications for each sign in the project. The Message Schedule is first devel-
oped during the Programming phase of the sign process. Refined during Design
Developments and finalized at the Final Design phase. The Message Schedule
specifies sign location, the specific sign text and sign type. Additional information
as to quantity, notes, layout symbols, revision dates and special conditions should
be included.

• Location: A unique number representing each sign location. The symbol indi-
cates the orientation of the sign on the site.
• Sign Type: A variety of sign types are used in a project. The size, design con-
figuration and text layout vary from different sign types.
• Sign Text: The Message Schedule lists the text on each sign. Text required is
specific to each location.
• Sign Side: Needs to be specified on all double sided signs. If one side is blank
the words (blank) will appear in the message schedule.
• Quantity: In some situations more than one sign will be necessary at a par-
ticular location.
• Notes: Critical information in any project can be listed in the notes. “Client to
verify text” if often listed indicating that the copy is not final and need client
approval prior to fabrication.

Figure 5
Exterior Message Schedule

Installation
Exterior Message Building Name
Schedule Revised
Location Sign Type Sign Text Side Quantity Notes
Date

002 EN03.02 Exit A 1

----------------
Visitor Parking B
Patient Drop Off

001 EN09.07 Medical Center (logo) 1

(underscore)

003 EN09.03 2151 N. Harbor Blvd. 1

004 EN05.03 Service 1

Vehicles
Only

007 EN10.03 YIELD 1

12/2012 Page 2-26

 Programming Need a Sign Program

Exterior Sign Exterior Locations Plans show building location within a site and vehicular, as
Location Plan well as pedestrian, paths of travel. Roads, buildings, landscape layouts, building
entries. Sign Location Plans are Architectural or Civil plan drawings showing sign
locations. These drawings can be part of the architectural drawing set or a separate
document. Drawings need to be drawn to scale and exterior plans need north ori-
entation. Location plans can be a variety of sized documents such as Architectural
A to E size or 11"x 17" layouts. The drawings must be printed so that location call
outs are legible.

Figure 6
Exterior Location Plan 001

002A
009
002B
011
012
PATIENT 010 003
DROP-OFF S
DELIVERIE
004
006 005

007
008
Sign location number

12/2012 Page 2-27

 Sign Industry Need a Sign Program

Picking a Sign Not all sign companies are the same and they don’t all have the same capabilities.
Company Typically sign companies specialize in one of two types of signs groups. These
groups are generally the ones that fit the company’s manufacturing capabilities.
There are certain sign products that almost all sign companies buy from select
vendors because of the specialized processes required to produce the product (i.e.
cast metal plaques cast metal letters).

It is important to work only with a sign company that has a current state contrac-
tors license. Most states require a license for site sign construction, installation and
electrical work. The sign company (contractor) must pay a fee and pass a lengthy
test, which determines their ability to perform the work correctly. The fee they pay
is insurance in the form of a Surety Bond with the state construction contractors
board. This provides a limited amount of financial security in the event the contrac-
tor is ordered to pay damages due to failure to uphold a contract. Having a license
also is a way to be sure the company is not an operation “working out of the back
of a truck”.

Types of Sign The sign industry is generally divided into four main categories – Electrical,
Companies Commercial, Architectural, and Service. Within these categories there are compa-
nies that range in size from small to large and provide products and services locally,
regionally and nationally.

The key to a successful sign project is to select the correct type of sign company to
build and install the type of signs needed. An analogy would be, that if you broke
your ankle, what kind of doctor would you go to: a cardiologist, a gynecologist or an
orthopedic doctor. They are all doctors, however, they do not all practice the same
specialties.

Electrical Sign Company: The electrical sign company typically has a large
manufacturing facility and are capable of fabricating large electrical signs including
large pylon signs, skyline building signs, illuminated letters, neon signs, electronic
dynamic displays and many more types of custom lighted signs. They will also have
computerized equipment for cutting of custom letters and sign elements. They will
have boom trucks or crane trucks for high-rise and large sign installation along with
a variety of service vehicles. They will have installation staff and vehicles, permit
services, drafting departments and maintenance services.

Architectural Sign Company: An architectural sign company typically manufac-

tures sign products found in “institutional” or public facilities, such as hospitals, civic
buildings, airports, corporate buildings, and schools. These companies manufac-
ture and install both interior and exterior signs and their products tend to be more
integrated into the architecture and environment as opposed to presenting a com-
mercial appearance. They will have installation staff and vehicles, permit services,
design and drafting departments and maintenance services.

This type of sign company is best suited for providing signage to a VA facility.

Commercial Sign Company: This group is generally comprised of Retail Sign

Companies, Franchise Sign Companies and Small Neighborhood Sign Companies.
Many times these types of sign companies are found in strip malls, retail outlets
and small industrial buildings. They usually don’t have large or complex equip-
ment and tend to specialize in less technical manufacturing techniques. They offer
fairly quick turnaround times and offer such signage as vinyl lettering for windows,
vehicle graphics or vehicle wraps, decal and banners. They may also manufacturer
sandblasted wooden signs, do screen printing or hand lettering. Usually these

12/2012 Page 2-28

 Sign Industry Need a Sign Program

Types of Sign companies are small, with just a few employees, and are often family owned and
Companies operated and specialize in only certain types of signs. These companies can often
be found in the phone book. They will most often list their specialty in their ad.
(continued)
These types of sign companies can be a resource for temporary signs, banners,
informational signs, event signs, etc. They are not equipped to manufacture and
install large-scale institutional sign projects for a VA facility.

Service and Lighting Company: These companies repair existing signs. They can
be called to repair a sign that is no longer illuminating or functioning properly. They
have service trucks and a staff familiar with sign construction and installation. They
can also repair parking lot and street lighting. Also some of these companies pro-
vide services to maintain facilities light fixtures, both inside and outside of buildings,
as well as parking lots and structures.

12/2012 Page 2-29

 Submittals Need a Sign Program

Submittal and Shop In the course of implementing a sign program, the first milestone is reviewing the
Drawing Check List sign company’s submittal of samples and shop drawings.

The following outline provides an overview of items to look for and check during the
submittal and shop drawing review. It should be noted that each project is different
so this guide cannot be all inclusive of every possible item to check.

It is recommended that the submittal and shop drawings review process be

conducted with a complete submittal, meaning, all samples and all drawings
are submitted at one time. Partial submittals can result in items being missed or
misunderstood.

If, in the review process, one has a question, needs more information, or wants a
clarification, the sooner in the submittal review process it’s raised the easier it is to
address. Once the submittal and shop drawings are approved, the sign company
takes that as authorization to proceed into manufacturing and any changes after
this point will usually result in a change order and additional cost.

Samples The quantity of samples submitted can vary for different projects, but a quantity
of 3 of each is recommended, as a minimum. This allow one set to be returned to
the manufacturer, when approved, one set to remain in the project master file, and
one set to be used by the designer, during the course of the project, for reference
purposes, meetings, field comparisons, etc. If the sign program is part of a renova-
tion project, additional copies are required. When reviewing the shop drawings,
the following considerations must be addressed before the shop drawings can be
considered complete:

1. Have all materials, colors and finishes been provided?

2. Are all colors and finishes labeled with their reference/color code and manu-
facturer name?
3. Are color submittals, samples and material finishes at least 6” x 6”. If there is a
grain, finish, pattern, or texture, is the direction indicated?
4. Have all the correct sign type samples been submitted?
5. On letters with a satin grain finish, is the direction of the grain on the letter
face indicated?
6. Verify the original material specifications have been met and not altered or
substituted with an inferior product.

Shop Drawings General – Both Exterior and Interior

The following items are applicable to the review of any sign program submittal, inte-
rior or exterior.

1. Do the drawings make sense? Are they logical, consistent and complete?
2. Are all sign types required for the job included and indicated in the drawings?
3. Are paint colors specified by color number, name and paint manufacturer? If
a custom color is mixed, is the added information of the formula included?
4. All the graphic symbols and type fonts should be noted.
5. All drawings need to be drawn in scale and the scale noted.

12/2012 Page 2-30

 Submittals Need a Sign Program

Shop Drawings 6. All sign face layouts need to be fully dimensioned with capital letter size,
(continued) interline spacing and margins. All Braille symbols need to be properly defined.
7. Are all code required and VA mandatory signs included?
8. On double sided signs, is the layout for each side shown and dimensioned?
9. Are the job colors, materials and finishes noted and correct for each sign?
10. Are the dimensions shown for each sign type and its components detailing
length, height and thickness?
11. Are the dimensions shown for the placement of all graphics on the sign?
12. Do the dimensions for the intended size and the placement of the graphics
add up?
13. Do the drawings clearly show how is the sign is assembled?
14. Do exterior signs that utilize adhesive in the assembly process identify the
type of adhesive (glue or tape) and the method of surface preparation?
15. Is the sign type installation specifically shown and detailed? Will it adequately
secure the sign to its intended location?
16. Are instructions provided for the correct cleaning methods of the signs?
17. Are instructions provided on maintenance of the signs (i.e., how to access
lamping for service, how to change directory strips, etc.)?
It is important to remember that shop drawings will become the file document that
will be used for future reference when servicing, repairing, updating or ordering new
signs. These drawings also become and important reference for future vendors who
may be trying to match new signs to existing signs.

Exterior General – Illuminated and Non-illuminated

The following items are applicable to the review of any exterior sign program
submittal:

1. All signs over 8 feet require a structurally engineered footing (foundation). Do

the footing drawings have the structural engineers name and license/stamp
visible on the drawing? Are calculations provided to substantiate the founda-
tion design?
2. How is the sign connected to it’s footing?
3. Exterior signs with a visible concrete base must have the finish of the
exposed concrete identified.
4. Are all sign cabinets, structural posts, etc. fully dimensioned?
5. All signs over 8 feet require a structural engineering detail the internal sup-
port structure. The drawings must have the structural engineers name and
license/stamp visible on the drawing.
6. Exterior signs on private property (leased facilities) require building/sign per-
mits from the local city or county. The signs also require final inspections by
city or county inspectors and must be scheduled and performed the day of
the installation.
7. The shop drawings should clearly show where the signs are to be installed
with any field conditions noted that have a bearing on the sign location

12/2012 Page 2-31

 Submittals Need a Sign Program

Exterior (curbs, walks, electrical service point, underground utilities, etc.). These draw-
ings should be drawn in “plan-view” clearly noting street names, distance
(continued)
from sidewalks, streets, buildings and easements.
8. All hardware should be noted as being corrosion resistant.
9. Exterior signs that have dissimilar metals in contact with one another must
have isolating material between them.
10. Is the sign construction and installation method appropriate for the materials
used? (e.g., acrylic cannot be welded to steel.)
11. All exterior signs and letters that are attached to a building must show and
identify how the building penetrations are going to be sealed to prevent water
intrusion.
12. All exterior signs and letters must have a small spacer to slightly space the
sign off the wall to allow for water run-off and prevent streaking on the build-
ing surface.

Illuminated Exterior Signs

The following items are specifically applicable to the review of an illuminated exte-
rior sign program submittal:

1. On each electrical sign the service voltage required and circuit load should be
noted.
2. Sign footings for all electrical signs should show footing dimensions and
details regarding reinforcing steel and concrete. Does the footing design
require a structural engineer?
3. Exterior illuminated sign cabinets must show details on how the cabinet
opens for access to servicing internal lamping and components.
4. Internally illuminated signs illuminated with florescent lamping must identify
the size and type of lamp and ballast.
5. Internally illuminated signs illuminated with LED’s must identify the LED
manufacturer and the LED part number.
6. Internally illuminated signs illuminated with LED’s must show the placement
and position of the LED’s and the quantity being installed and note the light
color.
7. Internally illuminated signs illuminated with florescent lamping must show the
lamps position in the cabinet, the distance from the sign face and the number
of lamps installed as well as the lamp light color.
8. Where does electrical wiring needed to power the sign enter into the sign?
9. Large exterior illuminated sign cabinets sign faces should be hinged.
10. Where is the “UL sticker” located on the sign?
11. Where is the placement of the shut off switch and how does one access it?
12. The interior of an illuminated sign cabinet must be noted as being painted
with a reflective white finish.
13. Exterior illuminated signs with aluminum sign faces and routed-out text must
show the mechanical attachment of letter voids to the diffuser. Adhesive
attachment of the letter void is NOT an alternate construction method
because it will fail.

12/2012 Page 2-32

 Submittals Need a Sign Program

Exterior 14. Exterior illuminated signs with aluminum sign faces with routed-out text must
(continued) show how the mechanical attachment of the plastic diffuser is made to the
aluminum sign face. Adhesive attachment of the letter void is NOT an alter-
nate construction method because it will fail.
15. Illuminated letters must show the attachment points of the letters and to the
building surface and identify the type of hardware.
16. Is the depth and construction of the footing shown and detailed and
appropriate for the soil conditions where the sign is going to be installed?

Non-illuminated Exterior Signs

The following items are specifically applicable to a non-illuminated exterior sign
program submittal:

1. Sign footings for all signs should show footing dimensions and details
regarding concrete.
2. Is the depth and construction of the footing shown and detailed and appropri-
ate for the soil conditions where the sign is going to be installed?
3. The finish on the edges of letters needs to be noted.

Parking Lot Signs

Refer to the general and exterior sign list.

Parking Structure Signs

Refer to the general and exterior sign list.

1. Determine if the type of mounting hardware is suitable for the type of

construction used for the parking structure.
2. Any mechanical fasteners used in a post-tension construction structure need
to be coordinated with the structure’s construction drawings to ensure method
of attachment does not contact or effect the tension system.

12/2012 Page 2-33

 Submittals Need a Sign Program

Interior The following items are specifically applicable to the review of an interior sign pro-
gram submittal.

1. Interior sign method of mounting to wall surface should be noted and speci-
fied. Is the method appropriate for the wall surface?
2. Detail drawings for the directory strips needs to note material, size, margins
and layout for all directories.
3. What is the assembly method shown for interior signs that have component
parts?
4. Interior sign drawings must show the mounting placement on the wall, with
dimensions, for each type of sign.
5. The finish on the edges of letters must be noted.
6. Flag type signs should detail the method of mechanical attachment of the
sign to the wall.
7. For hanging and overhead signs, details must be provided showing the
mounting method and clearance height to the bottom of the sign for each
type of ceiling condition. Is the method of attachment appropriate?
8. Directory drawings must indicate how the inserts or strips are removed and
updated. Does the door swing open, lift off, slide off, etc.?

12/2012 Page 2-34

 Integrated
Wayfinding &
Recommended
Technologies

• The Integrated Wayfinding Experience

Model
• Assessment Criteria for Wayfinding
Systems
• Key Benefits of Wayfinding Technologies
for VA facilities
• Guiding Principles and Best Practices
• Solution Strategy Model
• Platform, Design and Operational
Strategies
• Gauging the Complexity of an
Environment

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Overview Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Need a New Visitors expect to be able to access navigation and wayfinding information, whether
Wayfinding System they are at home planning their journey, on their way to a facility, or walking down a
Incorporating corridor to their appointment.
Technology?
Traditionally, signs and maps have been the major tools to guide people through
an environment, and further chapters of this Guide explain the role of signage in
wayfinding.

An expanded definition of the term wayfinding recognizes that visitors use multiple
cues and tools to find their destination — from spatial relationships manifested by
the architecture to lighting and interior finishes.

A new class of wayfinding tools has emerged with the technology revolution. Global
positioning system (GPS) devices, websites, apps, and on-site touchscreens can
be effective tools to help people along their journey. The smartphone has become
our own personal navigation device.

This chapter defines wayfinding technology, its role in helping people find their way,
and recommendations for expanding current VA technology tools to serve wayfind-
ing needs. It also contains tools to gauge the complexity of an environment so that
decisions about deploying wayfinding technology can be made at the facility level.

VA can make visits easier by providing door-to-door directions and on-site tools
to guide people effortlessly to their destination, relieving Veterans of some of their
anxieties.

Integrated Wayfinding Wayfinding is an integral part of the overall visitor experience. For this reason,
Experience Model the solution to any wayfinding problem should be approached from the visitor’s
perspective. Beginning with the visitor’s point-of-view to assess and improve the
wayfinding experience parallels the Veteran-centric mission of VA and its strategic
goals to increase Veteran satisfaction.

The Experience Model is a framework for structuring both the wayfinding problem
and the solution. It is consists of seven steps, as shown in figure 1.

The problem and, ultimately, the solution are detailed within the first six steps, which
are representative of a typical visitor’s journey arriving at and traversing the facility.
Step seven refers to the critical efforts of training staff to give directions and main-
taining the wayfinding system as facilities change and grow.

The model allows us to evaluate wayfinding tools according to the role each plays
in a visitor’s journey, and to assess the overall effectiveness of a system based on
how much support a visitor has at any one step.

It is important to note that a successful wayfinding program provides tools across

various media at every point in the visitor’s journey. For example, some visitors pre-
fer to navigate with a printed map, while others choose to follow step-by-step direc-
tions. An integrated wayfinding system provides redundant tools across media to
help people navigate in whatever manner they prefer.

The term “integrated” means that all wayfinding tools share the same informa-
tion — most importantly, the destination names — so that visitors can use any tool
in the wayfinding program at any point on their journey to find their destination. An
integrated wayfinding system utilizes the same nomenclature, wayfinding logic, and
visual language across each element in the system. When a wayfinding system is
not integrated, a visitor may receive an appointment letter with directions to “X-Ray”
and yet the signs in the facility direct to “Imaging,” resulting in confusion.
12/2012 Page 2-1
 Overview Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Integrated Wayfinding The following diagram of the Integrated Wayfinding Experience Model refers to a
Experience Model journey to a healthcare facility, but the model’s seven steps are applicable to other
facility types.
(continued)
The Integrated Wayfinding Experience Model Summary
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Get Find the Enter the Enter the Get Navigate Train and
Information Campus/ Campus/ Building Directions and Return Maintain
Site Site
Prior to Use road- Find Find the Get direc- Self- Train staff
departure, way signs, appropriate appropriate tions to a navigate to on the
learn where perimeter parking building destination a destina- system
to go and signs, and/ area, valet, entry. by using tion or desti- and keep
understand or GPS to shuttle, signs, maps, nations and the system
parking/ find the drop-off or or tools, or return to up - to - date
transit campus. Emergency by asking car, valet, or and
Figure 1 options. entry. staff. other mode accurate.
The Experience Model of transit.

A closer look at steps one through six reveals the expectations visitors have at each
point in their journey and what type of wayfinding tools they might use. For step
seven, it is important to identify the requirements of the institution and the tools that
support those expectations. Again, we have used a healthcare visit in this example.
Signage tools mentioned below are further defined in later chapters.

Step 1: Get Information

Visitor Expectations
Visitors expect to receive information from their healthcare provider about their
appointments, including the street address of the facility, parking options, and direc-
tions to the destination (including floor and room name and/or number).

Sample Tools
a. Call Center: a phone number to call to get appointment and wayfinding informa-
tion. Features may include the ability to email or text directions and maps.

b. New Patient Packet: appointment letter with directions and a map to the appoint-
ment and parking/transit options.

c. Wayfinding Website: a feature on the institution’s website to generate custom driv-

ing, parking, and walking direction to the appointment. Website also optimized for
smartphone and tablet use. Visitors can email, text, or print directions and maps.

d. Third-party Mapping Websites and Apps: patients may print or email directions
from sites such as Google (market leader with 83 percent market share as of
December 2013) or Bing (10 percent as of December 2013).

e. Car- or smartphone-based GPS: visitors may enter the street address in their
GPS to navigate.

Step 2: Find the Campus/Site

Visitor Expectations
Motorists need reinforcement that they are headed toward the campus/site, and
they must recognize when they have arrived on the property.

12/2012 Page 2-2

 Overview Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Integrated Wayfinding Sample Tools

Experience Model a. Department of Transportation and City-owned Roadway Signage.
(continued)
b. Gateways and Thresholds: identify the site and welcome visitors at its perimeter.

c. Campus and Building Identification Signs.

d. Car- or smartphone-based GPS: visitors may enter the street address in their
GPS to navigate.

Step 3: Enter the Campus/Site

Visitor Expectations
Motorists need big, clear, explicit cues and information that can be easily read from
a distance.

Sample Tools
a. Vehicular and Pedestrian Wayfinding Signs: directing to buildings and parking
options.

b. Building and Parking Identification Signs.

Step 4: Enter the Building

Visitor Expectations
Visitors need to locate the right building entry from the parking garage, parking lot,
or from the street. When there are multiple entrances, they need to find the one
closest to their destination.

Sample Tools
a. Building Entry Identification.

Step 5: Get Directions

Visitor Expectations
Visitors must intuitively make sense of the environment, orient themselves, and see
helpful resources that they can use; the wayfinding system must respond to what
they know.

Sample Tools
a. Entrance Lobby Information Desk: a prominent, staffed location where visitors
can ask for directions, pick up a map or visitors’ guide, or personalized directions.

b. Printed Map: a facility or campus map and directory of major destinations.

c. Visitors’ Guide: a more detailed version of the printed map, with department
phone directory and additional information on services and amenities.

d. Custom Route Maps: pre-printed route cards to major destinations or pre-printed

maps that a staff member highlights with custom directions.

e. Wayfinding and/or Check-In Kiosks: well-placed self-service interactive kiosks

where visitors can check in for appointments, get directions, or perform other per-
sonalized transactions.

f. Interior Navigation by Smartphone: to provide interior walking directions and you-

are-here capabilities for visitors.

12/2012 Page 2-3

 Overview Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Integrated Wayfinding g. Wayfinding Website: accessible by smartphone/tablet to access directions and

Experience Model nearby amenities.
(continued) Step 6: Navigate
Visitor Expectations
Visitors must confidently navigate to and from their destination, and they expect
reinforcement and guidance at frequent intervals. Information should be progres-
sively disclosed to prevent inundating the visitor with too much information at any
one point in their journey.

Sample Tools
a. Wayfinding and/or Check-In Kiosks: placed at decision points such as elevator
lobbies and destinations such as clinic waiting rooms.

b. Orientation and Directional Signage: wall- and/or ceiling-mounted signs that help
people navigate all the public areas of the facility.

c. Floor Directories: to identify all public destinations on each floor.

d. Department and Clinic Identification Signage: to identify public destinations.

e. Interior Navigation by Smartphone: to provide interior walking directions and you-

are-here capabilities for visitors.

f. Wayfinding Website: accessible by smartphone/tablet to access directions and

nearby amenities.

Step 7: Train and Maintain

Visitor Expectations
An overarching expectation of visitors is that all the wayfinding information they
interact with, such as directions from staff members or on signs, maps, and other
tools, are accurate and up-to-date.

Institutional Requirements
Roles have been defined to manage the wayfinding system, its content, and all
its public-facing tools. Administrative procedures and tools have been designed to
help maintain the system, and staff have been trained and are knowledgeable and
helpful.

Sample Tools
a. A centralized repository to manage wayfinding content such as building, depart-
ment, and destination names.

b. Procedures for updating the elements of the wayfinding system when there is a
change such as a department move, temporary construction re-routing, or a name
change.

c. Training for staff members (“wayfinding managers”) to maintain the repository and
the elements of the system.

d. Training for general staff on the wayfinding logic, how to give directions, and how
to introduce wayfinding tools to visitors.

More specific recommendations for maintenance and training will be detailed in the
section on Wayfinding Technology Strategy.

12/2012 Page 2-4

 Assessment Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Integrated Wayfinding Potential Usage of Wayfinding Technology across the

Experience Model Visitor’s Journey
(continued)
Because the focus of this section is the role of emerging technologies in wayfinding,
it is helpful to highlight the technology-based tools and their relevance at each step
in the visitor’s journey (steps 1-6) in figure 2.

1 2 3 4 5 6
Get Find the Enter the Enter the Get Directions Navigate and
Information Campus/Site Campus/Site Building Return
Wayfinding website
Third - Party websites + apps

Figure 2 GPS
On-site interactive kiosks
Emerging Technology in the
Experience Model Interior navigation by smartphone or tablet

Note that GPS applications and third-party websites and apps focus on public
property, with the exception of Google Indoors, which will be explained further in
the section on Related VA Initiatives. On-site kiosks, by definition, are specifically
an aid to navigating when you are at the facility, although they could direct to other
facilities as well.

Assessment Criteria In conjunction with the Integrated Wayfinding Experience model described above,
for Wayfinding a series of questions have been developed to help VA staff assess how successful
Systems a given wayfinding system may be. These criteria can be used to pinpoint specific
points of weakness for further examination.

Reflecting the emphasis on the Veteran-centered approach, seven of the ten criteria
evaluate the system from the visitor’s perspective; three evaluate the system from
the perspective of administration and operations.

From the Visitor’s Perspective

1. Is the experience of navigating the environment intuitive?
Are you aware that you’ve arrived at the right place?

Is there a sense of place? Do you feel welcomed?

Are there coherent vehicular and pedestrian pathways?

Are the technology tools promoted prominently (on-site and on the facility’s
website)?

Are the technology tools helpful and intuitive to use?

2. As a first time visitor, is it easy to access the tools you need?

Is there an information desk, information kiosk, and/or greeter at the entrance?

Are on-site technology tools well situated and accessible?

Are tools provided in the population’s main languages?

Are technology tools properly maintained and supported? (Do the printers work,
for example?)

3. Is the language friendly, accessible, and consistent?

12/2012 Page 2-5

 Assessment Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Assessment Criteria Are destination names easy to understand (no acronyms or medical jargon)?
for Wayfinding
Systems Does the name of the destination on the sign match that on the website and on
patient letters, printed maps, and all other wayfinding material?
(continued)
When symbols or icons are used, are they easy to understand and remember?

4. Is the wayfinding information up-to-date and accurate?

Do directions and maps reflect construction and temporary closures?

Are there “hand-made” signs that differ from the permanently-installed signs?

Is all wayfinding information proactively managed and updated?

5. Are amenities (restrooms, cafés, etc.) easy to find?

If the wayfinding system uses landmarks, such as named elevators or spaces,
are they easy to identify and remember?
6. Are the functions of technology tools simple to learn?
Do the technology tools share a common user experience and visual
vocabulary?

Are the technology tools accessible to low-vision, hearing impaired, and wheel-
chair-bound visitors?

Is there someone able to help a visitor use the technology?

From the Facility Administration Perspective

7. Is the wayfinding system easy to maintain (the physical components
as well as the content)?
Are wayfinding roles and responsibilities clearly defined?

Is all wayfinding information centralized and “published” to various tools?

When a department is relocated, how quickly are the wayfinding tools updated?

Are the technology tools deeply integrated into relevant systems?

8. Is the wayfinding system seen as a vital contributor to the patient

experience?
Is there an approved roadmap that details enhancements and updates?

Is there a maintenance budget available for updates that fall outside defined
projects?

Do patient satisfaction surveys ask about wayfinding?

9. Are staff well-trained in using the wayfinding system, its tools, and its
nomenclature?
Is wayfinding training a part of new employee orientation?

10. Is there a defined role of “wayfinding manager” responsible for the

system and its content?
Is the wayfinding manager knowledgeable about upcoming construction, expan-
sion, and renovation projects?

Answers to these questions may trigger further research to resolve problems. For
example, if there are many “hand-made” signs in a facility and unclear wayfinding

12/2012 Page 2-6

 Benefits Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Assessment Criteria responsibilities among the staff, next steps may be to determine how frequently
for Wayfinding wayfinding information changes at that facility and to identify a point-person to take
Systems on the “wayfinding manager” role. Further strategies are defined in the upcoming
(continued) section on Wayfinding Technology Strategy.

Key Benefits of The last few sections have dealt with technology tools as components of an inte-
Wayfinding Technology grated wayfinding system. But what are the benefits of implementing wayfinding
for VA Facilities technology solutions in and of themselves for VA facilities? Six major benefits have
been identified.

1. The ubiquity of the Internet and smartphones have dramatically

increased expectations of visitors to access information themselves,
where and when they need it.
VA leadership explains this shift and a commitment to address these needs in the
Department of Veterans Affairs FY 2014-2020 Strategic Plan:

Communications and information technology (IT) will continue to reshape the

world. Like the general public, the communication preferences of Veterans and
eligible beneficiaries and their families are changing. Veterans and eligible
beneficiaries increasingly expect to receive VA communications via the Internet
and on mobile devices. VA must embrace and fully support changing mobile
lifestyles and personalize that interaction to Veteran needs at that time and
place. VA must be able to collect and analyze data to understand our client’s
needs and expectations, and personalize the Veteran’s experience with VA. VA
needs to be able to adapt to and keep up with the rate of technological change.
(page 15)

We live in a connected world. The rapid pace of technological advancement is

reshaping Veteran’s expectation regarding how services, benefits, and support
should be delivered. Today’s client expects instant access to information and
self-service options via the Internet, and increasingly through mobile devices
like tablets and smartphones (and the next generation “smart” devices that are
yet to be deployed). (page 24)

2. In an era when healthcare choices are expanding — for Veterans as

well as for all Americans — offerings that improve patient satisfaction are
a competitive advantage.
Medical centers that have adopted wayfinding technology, such as Kaiser
Permanente, see it as an increased commitment to serving their communities.

When Kaiser Permanente undertook a broad research initiative to understand the

needs of their members (entitled “Creating the Total Healthcare Environment”), two
key findings emerged that underscored the relevance of wayfinding technology:

a. The need for understanding the efficiency of the journey to the medical
center and point of service… Members expressed the desire to have efficient
communication systems for understanding the reception and copay processes,
flow, and queuing, and navigating the wayfinding systems for guidance to their
locations.

b. The need for convenience, efficiency, and timeliness of service and care.
Members are keenly aware of the amount of time invested in waiting, and the
uncertainty about when they will be summoned. As stated above, members
view this waiting time relative to the whole of their journey. (Creating the Total
Health Environment, June 2010, page 21)

12/2012 Page 2-7

 Benefits Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Key Benefits of This second point touches on a way that wayfinding technology can assist in the
Wayfinding Technology larger mission of integrative care.
for VA Facilities
Patient satisfaction is a major part of the total brand experience. A successful way-
(continued) finding system can provide a consistent and tangible expression of the institution’s
brand and values. A VA-wide branding effort is underway to articulate and reinforce
the brand of VA and its services. For example, VHA interior designers are working
with an internal branding team to extend the brand into environments like clinics
and hospitals in order to emphasize VA’s mission of patient-centered care. For VA,
a coherent set of wayfinding technology tools can support and convey the brand as
Veterans and visitors are guided to their destinations.

3. When patients can access a “live” view of their appointments and how
to get to them through a kiosk, website, or their smartphone, their time
at the healthcare facility can be more efficiently managed.
Appointments can be rescheduled, additional appointments can be added, such as
a lab test or a specialist consult, and integrative care can be achieved. Wayfinding
technology can support this more complicated patient flow.

The Patient Aligned Care Team (PACT) model that VA employs is primed to take
advantage of enhanced scheduling and real-time communication tools such as
MyHealtheVet. It is instructive to describe a potential future case, in which PACT
supported by wayfinding may speed diagnosis and treatment:

At 10am, a Veteran visits a primary care provider at a CBOC, where during an

annual check-up an irregular heartbeat is discovered. The physician performs
an electrocardiogram in the exam room and determines that further tests are
needed. Those tests are conducted at the VAMC nearby. The clerk schedules
the first of these tests for 1pm the same day. The Veteran has never been to
the VAMC, so the clerk emails the time and location of the new appointment to
the Veteran’s email address. A link to driving, parking, and walking directions to
Imaging are included in the email. The Veteran reads the email on his smart-
phone (preferred communication method as chosen on MyHealtheVet) and fol-
lows directions to the second appointment.

4. A more agile approach to wayfinding, in which wayfinding content can

be updated and immediately published to devices, ensures that visitors
can navigate an ever - changing environment.
VA facilities are in a constant state of flux from construction, renovation , and relo-
cation. In 2015 alone, one billion dollars in major and minor construction is planned.
Also included in FY 2015 will be approximately 30 new CBOCs coming on line,
mainly through the VA leasing program.

In such variable conditions, the best way to manage change is through a content
management system, where changes are identified, impacts to static signage can
be quantified, and updated content can be delivered to websites, kiosks, and other
tools, all in sync with construction and relocation schedules.

5. In addition to its less tangible benefits of increased patient satisfac-

tion, the benefits of wayfinding technology can be quantified.
VHA’s Veterans Point of Service Program (VPS) designs, develops, and deploys
self-service devices such as VetLink kiosks that provide beneficiaries and employ-
ees with clinical and business transactions. Just as a return on investment (ROI)
exercise was undertaken by VHA for VPS, ROI could be calculated for the adoption
of wayfinding technology. Based on the specific functionality of the recommended

12/2012 Page 2-8

 Benefits Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Key Benefits of system and its costs, an assessment of its net impact could be estimated, with fac-
Wayfinding Technology tors such as:
for VA Facilities
• decrease in patients who are late for appointments because they are lost or at
(continued) the wrong location.

• decrease in staff time giving directions.

• decrease in no-shows because patients are lost.

• more efficient management and update of signage.

6. It is an opportune time to identify strategies for wayfinding technology

because systems can leverage existing initiatives and programs that are
underway at VACO, VHA, and NCA.
Some current VA initiatives are closely aligned to wayfinding, such as the VA
Patient-Centered System Navigation Work Group. Others provide existing platforms
that can be expanded to publish wayfinding information, such as the VetLink kiosks
and VAMC websites. The VetLink kiosk project also provides pertinent lessons
learned in the deployment of self-service technology, from planning pilot projects to
identifying Integrated Project Team (IPT) members to support the endeavors.

12/2012 Page 2-9

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and Guiding principles provide the foundation for all best practices, strategies, and tac-
Best Practices tics within a given area of study. The Guiding Principles for wayfinding innovation
at VA facilities define what is truly important for a wayfinding system’s success and
frame the recommendations that follow. The six Guiding Principles are:

1. Tell visitors what they need to know, when they need to know it, and in the
medium they prefer.
2. Maintain consistent nomenclature — the system of names and symbols used
to direct visitors to destinations — across all wayfinding tools.
3. From planning through implementation, assure that the wayfinding system
addresses the specific needs of the facility and those of its visitors.
4. Design a system that is sustainable, easy to update, and extensible as facili-
ties change and grow.
5. Use cost-effective high-impact solutions, leveraging and extending assets
and platforms as possible.
6. From the start, create a management plan that identifies the people, pro-
cesses and tools to keep wayfinding content accurate and technology
operational.
These Guiding Principles are a product of research which included site visits and
interviews with staff at VA and comparable institutions.

• Visits to five non-VA healthcare institutions with innovative wayfinding:

Houston Methodist Hospital
The University of Texas, MD Anderson Cancer Center
Mountain View Center Palo Alto Medical Foundation (Sutter Health)
Kaiser Permanente (KP) Oakland Medical Center
University of California San Francisco (UCSF) Medical Center,
Parnassus Campus and Mission Bay Campus

• Visits with three vendors of wayfinding technology:

22 Miles
Google
Connexient (via web conference)

• Visits to two VA Medical Centers:

Michael E. DeBakey VA Medical Center, Houston, Texas
VA Palo Alto Health Care System, Palo Alto, California

• Visit to one VA National Cemetery:

Golden Gate National Cemetery, San Francisco, California

• Interviews with the Wayfinding Workgroup and other VA stakeholders

• Primary research on wayfinding technologies and innovations
In addition to the site visits and primary research, the findings from industry exper-
tise and user research studies (empirical data and user perceptions) along with
academic and industry research have contributed to the findings.

The Guiding Principles provide context when designing the solutions outlined in
the Recommended Strategies section and should be applied at the beginning of all
relevant projects to guide decision-making.

12/2012 Page 2-10

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and Associated with each of the Guiding Principles are Best Practices: methods and
Best Practices techniques that have proven to deliver effective and productive solutions. When
(continued) available, examples demonstrate how the Best Practices have informed a project.

Guiding Principles and Best Practices Matrix

1 2 3 4 5 6
GUIDING PRINCIPLES
Tell visitors Maintain con- From planning Design a Use cost- From the start,
what they sistent nomen- through imple- system that effective create a man-
need to know, clature — the mentation, is sustain- high - impact agement plan
when they system of assure that able, easy to solutions, that identifies
need to know names and the wayfind- update, and leveraging the people,
it, and in the symbols used ing system extensible and extending processes
medium they to direct visi- addresses the as facilities assets and and tools to
prefer. tors to destina- specific needs change and platforms as keep wayfind-
tions — across of the facility grow. possible. ing content
all wayfinding and those of accurate and
tools. its visitors. technology
operational.

BEST PRACTICES
Provide way- Help people Gauge the Begin with a Build upon Leverage cur-
finding guid- find what they complex- list of desired VA.gov web- rently - defined
ance along the are looking ity of your features, not a sites’ Location duties and
visitor’s com- for by match- environment product-selec- and Directions consolidate
plete journey, ing approved and develop tion process. sections, similar respon-
starting from nomenclature relevant tools VPS VetLink sibilities into
home. to common accordingly. platform, and a wayfinding
nicknames. the Google manager role.
Indoors
initiative.
People prefer Use interna- Design for Develop an Stand-alone, Train front - line
to use familiar tional symbols the first-time integrated proprietary staff how to
technology developed by visitor. wayfinding wayfinding give directions
and common the AIGA and solution kiosks and and how to
interaction ISO. roadmap. apps are not use wayfinding
methods. viable or effec- tools.
tive solutions
for large - scale
organizations
comparable
to VA.
Verbal direc- Serve your A visitor- Focus on
tions aren’t community friendly map building a
enough — in relevant should be robust content
people need a languages. designed for repository,
guide. every large- publishing to
scale and/or platforms as
hard-to-nav- they become
igate facility viable.
and provided
as paper maps
and download-
able maps
from the facil-
ity’s website.
Mobile has Prototype,
emerged as test, monitor,
the primary and survey to
wayfinding find out what
platform. works and
what doesn’t.

12/2012 Page 2-11

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and Guiding Principle 1: Tell visitors what they need to know,
Best Practices when they need to know it, and in the medium they prefer.
(continued) It is easy to overwhelm visitors with too much information. The concept of progres-
sive disclosure — giving people just enough information to complete the current
segment of their journey — has been proven to make complex environments simpler
to navigate.

There is no single most effective wayfinding tool. Signs, maps, directories, kiosks,
apps, and websites must all work together in concert to provide information to visi-
tors in the platform and medium that they choose to consult. Visitors often use a
variety of tools on a single journey.

Best Practices
A. Provide wayfinding guidance along the visitor’s complete journey,
starting from home.
Example

On their websites, MD Anderson Cancer Center (access.mdanderson.org) and

UCSF Medical Center (pathway.ucsfmedicalcenter.org) provide driving, parking,
and walking directions to all public destinations. Directions are optimized to pro-
vide the best place to park to reach that destination. From their homes, visitors
can generate a customized, full direction set and print or email it to themselves.

Facilities that only provide on-site kiosks do not fulfill this need: getting from
home to the destination. VAMC staff report that Veterans may go to the wrong
facility for their appointment, since there is often more than one VHA facility in
the area. It is critical to provide accurate driving and transit directions in all com-
munications to the patient and on the medical center’s website.

The Integrated Wayfinding Experience Model described in the previous section

identifies all the steps of a journey and can help identify gaps.

B. People prefer to use familiar technology and common interaction

methods.
In 2014, the most familiar and most-utilized technologies are the web and the
smartphone. Touchscreen kiosks, such as ATMs, self - checkout at the super-
market, airport check-in, and gas station pumps are part of daily life too.

However, there are no standards in the user interface design for a kiosk, unlike
the codified user interface guidelines for an operating system. This means that
there is a learning curve associated with every interaction with a new touch-
screen kiosk. The user interface should be simply designed, tested at the pro-
totype stage, and revised during the design and development phases to ensure
high levels of usability.

12/2012 Page 2-12

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and The most successful kiosk implementations are built to serve a single, concise
Best Practices function that can be completed in about a minute or two. Information and com-
(continued) merce transactions should be simple and helpful.

C. Verbal directions are not enough — people need a guide.

Example

In a 2011 user research study at New York-Presbyterian Weill Cornell Medical

Center, researchers sat at the main information desk and asked visitors what
they brought with them to help them find their way. The abundance of hand-
written notes confirmed that the majority of directions were given verbally.
Directions were often inconsistent, incomplete or inaccurate, causing confusion
and anxiety. The medical center staff decided to publish a visitor guide and
distribute it to physicians’ offices, information desks, and clinics to arm patients
with a pocket-sized source of accurate information.

Whether it is an internally-produced one-page main floor map and directory or a

professionally printed reference guide, visitors appreciate and use paper guides
to navigate with confidence through unfamiliar places.
WHAT DO VISITORS
Mapping ACTUALLY
strategies BRING
are further TO THE in
described HOSPITAL?
the VA Signage Design Guide sec-
tion “You are Here Maps and Directories.”
Findings
The abundance of
notes confirms that
of instructions are g

Problems
Inconsistency, varie
inaccuracies occur
Info Desk staff mus
scribbles into actio
instructions

D. Mobile has emerged as the primary wayfinding platform.

As stated in the Department of Veterans Affairs FY 2014 - 2020 Strategic Plan:
NYP WAYFINDING COMMUNICATIONS JULY 14, 2011

We are an online and mobile society; physical proximity is no longer a con-

straint to communicating, whether to converse with family and friends or to
purchase goods and services… We are increasingly using mobile devices to
conduct our online interactions. Global mobile data traffic in 2012 was nearly
12 times greater than the total global Internet traffic in 2000. (pages 14 - 15)

As of January 2014, the Pew Research Internet Project reports that 90 percent
of American adults have a cell phone and 58 percent of American adults have a
smartphone. Age and economic factors are diminishing. Additionally, 74 percent
of adult smartphone owners ages 18 and older say they use their phone to get
directions or other information based on their current location.

12/2012 Page 2-13

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and

Best Practices
(continued)

74 percent of adult smartphone owners ages 18 and older say they use their phone to get directions or
other information based on their current location.

12/2012 Page 2-14

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and Guiding Principle 2: Maintain consistent nomenclature — 

Best Practices the system of names and symbols used to direct visitors to
(continued) destinations — across all wayfinding tools.
The importance of using consistent language, especially in a complex healthcare
environment, cannot be overstated. When the same destination is referred to as
“Diagnostic Imaging” on an appointment letter, “Radiology” on signs, “X-Ray” by the
information desk attendant, the visitor is sure to be confused. The deliberate act
of documenting and enforcing a single vocabulary of names yields great improve-
ments in wayfinding.

Inconsistent names arise from the lack of a centralized approach to wayfinding. An

interior designer or facilities manager may be responsible for signage and volunteer
services may manage the printed maps. A centralized database, or a single spread-
sheet for smaller facilities, can house the approved nomenclature, which can be
shared across the organization to use in all public communications.

Best Practices
A. Help people find what they are looking for by matching approved
nomenclature to common nicknames.
Example

At the UCSF Medical Centers, the wayfinding manager uses a custom-built

web-based application to manage all wayfinding content as well as the wayfind-
ing website and touchscreens. From her desk, she can run reports that list what
people searched for on the website and touchscreens but did not generate any
results. On a regular basis, she culls this report to find nicknames or aliases for
UCSF destinations and adds those to the database. Every official name of a
Help people find what they are looking for by matching your
destination can be associated with up to ten nicknames. This allows visitors to
nomenclature
get results and to common
directions, evennicknames
when they do not know the one official name of
the destination.

A search for... results in...

eyecare Ophthalmology
heart center Cardiac Center
xray Radiology
registration Admissions
coffee Starbucks
ENT Otolaryngology

This is a great advantage of using technology for wayfinding. Once the official
name is finalized, the system can also hold other names that refer to that
destination. © 2014 FD2S INC.

B. Use international symbols developed by the AIGA and ISO.

The AIGA (founded as the American Institute of Graphic Arts) and the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) have codified a set of
internationally recognizable symbols for objects, places, and navigation. While
other organizations have produced customized icons which may or may not
be understood easily the symbol sets from AIGA and ISO remain the standard
and should be used consistently in signage and all wayfinding technology
applications.

12/2012 Page 2-15

 38TH

A
HOW

ONT
3784

BROAD
Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

PIEDM
Broadway
MRI

WAY
Guiding Principles and C. Serve your community in relevant languages.
急診入口
Best Practices Example
(continued)
Kaiser Permanente Oakland Medical Center offers a printed visitor guide in
English, Chinese, and Spanish, 280the major languages of the populations they
serve. KP also 病人出院
chose to embed wayfinding touchscreens 3772
in the3779
two entrance
3701 W MacArthur Blvd
lobbies and at all elevator lobbies. The touchscreens offer
Howe St the same language
Piedmont
Ave
options. Multilingual offerings are a priority for KP, and their National
Broadway Facilities
Services manages all translations for patient communications.
LVD
ART HUR B
W MAC

路線
大樓入口
新醫院
3600 (訂於2014年夏季落成啟用) 醫院
Mosswood 急診部
Broadway
Park 診所
新專科診所
ical Center 問訊
藥房
Broadway 餐廳與販賣機
Mosswood Refresh咖啡座
禮品店
3505
停車設施
殘障通行入口

地圖未按實際比例

OaklandToMedical
offer multilingual
Center capabilities on websites, apps, and touchscreen kiosks,
the requirements must be detailed at the start of the project. Adding a second
280 W. MacArthur Blvd., Oakland, CA 94611
language to an existing English application is less efficient and more costly.
Machine translations, such as Google, are not yet at the level of accuracy to be
dependable. Interpreters and translators should be consulted on all language
and associated cultural issues.

Guiding Principle 3: From planning through implementation,

assure that the wayfinding system addresses the specific
needs of the facility and those of its visitors.
Buildings are planned to serve distinct purposes and to support specific activities
that are performed inside their walls. A hospital is designed to house all the people,
processes, and equipment engaged in the healing process. A business office is
designed to serve customers and process their transactions. A successful wayfind-
ing system is tailored to the flow of people in the environment and to the size and/or
complexity of the environment itself.

Best Practices
A. Gauge the complexity of your environment and develop relevant tools
accordingly.
It is important to understand how complicated a facility is before determining a
wayfinding strategy to help visitors navigate that environment. Some facilities
have simple visitor-flow patterns. A VA Regional Benefits Office, for example,
may simply consist of a waiting room and adjoining offices for meetings with
Veterans. Its wayfinding needs may be simple compared to a VA Medical
Center, where Veterans navigate to an average of three clinics or offices during
one visit.

A series of questions to help determine the relative complexity of a given facility

is provided in the section “Gauging the Complexity of the Environment.”

12/2012 Page 2-16

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and B. Design for the first-time visitor.

Best Practices Example
(continued)
A VHA Interior Designer noted that she and her colleagues have informally
tested the efficacy of their wayfinding systems by asking friends, family mem-
bers, and university students to find their way to destinations at VA medical
centers. Facility staff members know their environment so well, it is important
to find ways to see the lobbies, corridors, and clinics through the eyes of a first-
time visitor.

When it comes to employing wayfinding technology, it is even more important to

design for people who are new to the system. There is a certain wariness about
interacting with a new kiosk, device, or app for the first time, and if that interac-
tion is unsatisfying, the majority of users will not try it again.

C. A visitor-friendly map should be designed for every large - scale and/or

hard - to - navigate facility and provided as paper maps and downloadable
maps from the facility’s website.
Examples

Some VHA facilities have produced their own maps and visitor guides;
examples include VA Hudson Valley Healthcare System, Baltimore VA Medical
Center, and VA Palo Alto Healthcare System. These maps are offered as down-
loadable documents from the facilities’ websites as well as at information desks.

As noted above, research has proven that people navigate more confidently
when they have something to refer to, such as a map. As usage of smartphones
approaches ubiquity, that “something” may be their smartphone and the web,
but until that point, a paper map is a trusty aid.

Mapping strategies are further described in the VA Signage Design Guide sec-
tion “You are Here Maps and Directories.”

All wayfinding information, maps, and visitor guides require maintenance and
update planning, as explained in the following guiding principle.

It is also important to note that the size and complexity of a facility should
inform the relevance of wayfinding technology for that visitor population. A
series of questions to help determine the relative complexity of a given facility
is provided in the section “Gauging the Complexity of the Environment” later in
this section.

12/2012 Page 2-17

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and

Best Practices
(continued)

Basement
Floor Legend
Radiation Oncology
Information
Elevators
Stairs
Radiation Waiting Area
Oncology
Restrooms
Vending
Nurses Station
Restricted Access

First
Floor
Agent Cashier
DAV Transportation Emergency Dept.
Eligibility & Check In
Enrollment Center Emergency
Entrance
Emergency Department Only
Check-In Primary Care Primary Care Emergency Dept.
Check-In 2 Check-In 1 Waiting
Emergency Department
Waiting
Information Desk Outpatient
Primary Lab Agent Social Workers
Lab Check-In Care Check-In Eligibility &
Entrollment DAV Cashier
Waiting
Outpatient Social Workers Center Transportation
Information
Pharmacy Police Desk
Police Desk Service Parking
Radiology Garage Police Main
Police Service Waiting Elevators Desk Entrance

Primary Care Check-In 1

Radiology Check-In Escalator to
Primary Care Check-In 2 Cat Scan 2nd Floor
MRI
Primary Care Waiting Nuclear Medicine Patient & Visitor Pharmacy
Radiology Check-In Elevators

• CAT Scan
• MRI
• Nuclear Medicine
Radiology Waiting

4
Guiding Principle 4: Design a system that is sustainable,
easy to update, and extensible as facilities change and grow.
The one constant in healthcare environments is change, and VHA facilities are
no exception. Systems to support wayfinding technology must be designed to
evolve in tandem with the facilities they track and the visitors they serve. Closed,
proprietary products do not thrive in environments such as these. Solutions for VA
facilities must be modular and able to integrate into other systems so that data can
remain consistent across all the applications that use that data. For example, an

12/2012 Page 2-18

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and appointment management database should receive a feed of destination names
Best Practices and their locations from the wayfinding database. When a destination moves, its
(continued) destination will be automatically updated in patient appointment records.

Best Practices
A. Begin with a list of desired features, not a product - selection process:
determine needs first and then evaluate potential solutions based on
how they address the needs.
Example

As part of the development of a new campus-wide wayfinding program, New

York University (NYU) Langone Medical Center identified the need to add addi-
tional wayfinding support for non-English speakers. Printed maps in multiple
languages were available, but there was concern that the English-only signs on
the first floor provided little help to their large Russian, Chinese, and Spanish
speaking population. Instead of sourcing a product, such as a digital sign sys-
tem, the wayfinding team wrote the requirements as an Request for Proposal
(RFP). The winning bidder was a team that brought digital signage hardware
and software development capabilities to solve the unique problem. The result
is an interactive touchscreen embedded in a directional sign that scrolls direc-
tions to first floor destinations in the three languages plus English. Content is
pulled from the institution’s centralized database.

While some vendors have tried to productize wayfinding technology for specific
vertical markets, the market is young and their standard feature sets most likely
will be insufficient to match the needs of VA visitors and staff. In following VA’s
Veteran-centric approach, it is best to itemize the desired features of the system
and evaluate systems based on those criteria.

B. Develop an integrated wayfinding solution roadmap.

Example

The Veterans Point of Service (VPS) team manages the VetLink platform of
self-service kiosks at VHA facilities. The VPS Product manages a team of
project managers who draft requirements for new features and enhancements.
Approved features get scheduled into a series of upcoming releases (2 per
year for 2014 and 2015). This roadmap ensures that VetLink remains an integral
platform with increasing functionality and that it addresses a larger collection of
Veterans’ needs over time

12/2012 Page 2-19

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and

Best Practices
(continued)

Wayfinding technology is most successful when it is not a one-time project, but

an investment that is continually assessed and enhanced over time.

C. Focus on building a robust content repository, publishing to platforms

as they become viable.
Example

MD Anderson launched its integrated wayfinding system in 2004, three years

before the introduction of the iPhone. At launch, the centralized database drove
the wayfinding website and on-site touchscreen kiosks. In 2013, when MD
Anderson’s Marketing department started development of a mobile app, they
were able to integrate an existing data feed from the wayfinding database and
develop a “Get Directions” feature with relative ease.

12/2012 Page 2-20

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and It is difficult to plan for the adoption of new technologies and devices more than
Best Practices five years into the future. However, when the center of the system is a database
(continued) of accurate content, that content can be published to various devices as they
gain traction in the marketplace.

D. Prototype, test, monitor, and survey to find out what works and what
doesn’t.
Example

When designing the physical enclosure for their wayfinding kiosks, both MD
Anderson and NYU Langone Medical Center chose to create low-tech mock-
ups to test the accessibility and approachability of the kiosk. The foamcore
prototypes informed design refinements, such as ways to diminish glare and to
better broadcast the function of the kiosk.

Research activities, including user-testing and prototyping, are important dur-

ing the planning phase of technology projects. It is also critical to institutional-
ize some research methods so that ongoing performance can be measured.
Patient satisfaction surveys can be modified to include questions about way-
finding in general and about specific wayfinding tools.

Websites, apps, and kiosks allow for extensive usage reporting and other met-
rics. These reports can be helpful in determining the optimum number of kiosks.
If their usage is low, websites and apps may need to be promoted through
patient communication tools.

Guiding Principle 5: Use cost-effective high - impact

solutions, leveraging and extending assets and platforms as
possible.
Wayfinding is a small but impactful part of the Veteran’s experience at VA facilities.
As one VA staff member who is also a caregiver told us, “wayfinding is the differ-
ence between a good trip and a bad trip to the doctor.”

VA has invested in platforms and communication tools to serve Veterans and their
families. These same tools, because they were built to be extensible, offer great
opportunities to deliver wayfinding information in the context of the Veteran’s inter-
actions with VA.

Best Practices
A. Build upon VHA websites’ Location and Directions sections, VPS
VetLink platform, and the Google Indoors initiative.

12/2012 Page 2-21

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and Upon review of the related wayfinding and technology initiatives within VA,
Best Practices there are three platforms/assets that provide foundations for building wayfinding
(continued) resources for visitors.

VAMC websites already provide driving directions and links to maps to help
Veterans get to their facilities. These sections could be enhanced to provide
customized maps and information on interior wayfinding, consolidating all
wayfinding information for the facility in the one area. Implementing a system of
standardized destination nomenclature will be a key to a successful expansion
of directions on VAMC websites.

VetLink is positioned to be the centralized point of service for an expanding set

of Veteran interactions. Currently, VetLink includes an optional wayfinding mod-
ule with limited functionality. It has not been deployed in many sites. The VetLink
deployment currently numbers more than 3,315 kiosks in 95 VHA facilities. With
expanded directions capabilities, VetLink is poised to be the primary platform for
communicating on-site directions to Veterans and visitors.

Through the Google Indoors initiative VA has begun a working relationship with
the largest and most accurate provider of maps and directions. Google Indoors
is not yet marketed and promoted to Google users, so awareness of its features
is currently low. But, as Google achieves critical mass of floor plans, they are
sure to launch marketing and promotional efforts to introduce its capabilities to
their users.

B. Stand-alone, proprietary wayfinding kiosks and apps are not viable

solutions for large-scale organizations comparable to VA.
It is critical to understand the shortcomings of stand-alone wayfinding kiosks.
The majority of wayfinding kiosks that have been purchased on an ad hoc basis
by VAMCs are unsupported, not functioning and/or not providing up-to-date
information. It is recommended that VA consider a moratorium on the purchase
of proprietary wayfinding kiosks and instead invest in the expansion of current
systems to provide wayfinding functionality to Veterans and their families.

Guiding Principle 6: From the start, create a management

plan that identifies the people, processes, and tools to keep
wayfinding content accurate and technology operational.
As emphasized throughout this section, wayfinding content must be kept up-to-date
to be helpful to visitors. It is not a one-time project, but an institutional responsibility
that must be identified and supported with processes and tools. It is important to
begin any wayfinding project with this understanding and with a plan for keeping the
content accurate.

It is also relevant to note that wayfinding updates cannot only be project-driven or

scoped as part of funded construction projects. Wayfinding changes occur outside
construction projects, for example, name changes of destinations, relocations of
offices and clinics, and require constant supervision and consistent operational
support.

When wayfinding technology is a part of the overall wayfinding strategy, there are
additional maintenance responsibilities to keep the software, hardware, and net-
working components up and running.

Best Practices
A. Leverage currently-defined duties and consolidate similar responsibili-
ties into a wayfinding manager role.

12/2012 Page 2-22

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and A collection of responsibilities has been identified that support wayfinding:
Best Practices
• Interior designers at VAMCs are responsible for maintaining and updating
(continued) signage, including wayfinding signs.
• The Public Affairs Officer at VAMCs is responsible for keeping the VA.gov
website for their facility up to date, including driving directions, maps, and
parking information.
• Voluntary Services manages volunteers who give directions at information
desks and aid Veterans in using VetLink, among other responsibilities.
• For VHA facilities that are deploying VPS VetLink kiosks, there are integrated
project teams (IPTs) responsible for aiding in implementation, determining
kiosk locations, running kiosk reports, and managing any wayfinding content
that may be offered through VetLink.
• For the Google Indoors Initiative, IPTs have been assigned to gather floor
plans and department information to deliver to Google and are responsible
for updating that information as needed.
In evaluating non-VA institutions with robust wayfinding programs, those with
dedicated, centralized staff to manage the content and hardware/software have
proven to be the most successful and the most sustainable over time.

It is not within the scope of this document to recommend a staffing plan for way-
finding management, but it is important to understand that there is a collection
of responsibilities that must be identified and operationalized for the system to
be effective.
B. Train front-line staff how to give directions and how to use wayfinding
tools.
Example

At the UCSF Medical Center, a staff training program was introduced in con-
junction with the launch of the integrated wayfinding system. New employee
orientation includes a section entitled “How to give directions” and front-line
staff, such as information desk attendants, physician office receptionists, and
call center staff receive more in-depth training on the logic of the system and its
tools.

pathway.ucsfmedicalcenter.org

Wayfinding Website – Signs – Maps – Touchscreen Kiosks

12/2012 Page 2-23

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and

Best Practices
Building Name Changes
(continued) Parnassus Heights

Mount Zion

Wayfinding technology is not just patient-facing; staff members use wayfinding

websites and apps to help patients and visitors and also to navigate unfamiliar parts
of their own campus. Including staff in the launch process ensures their adoption of
the tools.

These six Guiding Principles and their associated Best Practices have been used
as the basis for specific recommended strategies that are detailed in the next
section.

12/2012 Page 2-24

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

An Integrated All of the guidance about wayfinding systems and technology in the previous sec-
Approach: Solution tions pertain to VA facilities as a whole. This section delves deeper into strategies
Strategy Model to deliver enhanced wayfinding information to visitors via relevant technologies — all
tuned to serve the specific needs of Veterans and their caregivers and families.

To begin, the Solution Strategy Model (shown as figure 4) demonstrates the pro-
posed strategies in the context of visitors and their needs along a journey to and
through a VA facility. Encircling the wayfinding information that they seek are the
tools and platforms that provide the relevant information.

VA.gov

Trip Planning
Pre- G

oo
What is the street address?

gle
Are there transit options?
ps

Where do I park? Can I valet?

Ma

Which building do I go in?

Is there a particular entrance I need to use?
What floor am I going to?
Indoors Printed

What’s the room name or number?

m.VA.
Getting to the

gov (mobile
Am I going the right way?
Veterans Did I miss the exit?
Am I in the right building?
& Visitors Is this the campus?
Where should I go? Where do I park? Valet?
ility

Which elevator should I take? Which building do I go in?

Am I in the right place? Which entrance?
Fac
ogle

Where’s the nearest restroom?

Where’s the canteen?

)
Fac
Where’s the pharmacy?
e
o

th

Where’s my next appointment?

ilit
G

Where’s the business office?

g

G
in

Where did I park?

o
at

og
vig
v

e
l
a
N go /G
A.
V PS
m. VPS
Figure 4 Wayfinding
Via cellular and Guest Wi-Fi
Solution Strategy Model

Illustrating the first Guiding Principle — Tell visitors what they need to know,
when they need to know it, and in the medium they prefer — the model includes
multiple media to answer the visitor’s questions. Not all tools and media are neces-
sary at every facility.

For example, a small CBOC or VBA office with one entrance and no elevators may
not have any on-site wayfinding issues; getting to the building may be the only
issue. In that case, having accurate driving directions as well as transit and park-
ing information on the VA.gov website may be the only enhancement to the current
offerings. The following section provides a questionnaire to help staff gauge how
complicated their facility is; a more complex facility requires more on-site wayfinding
guidance.

The Model is a framework to provide structured recommendations at a glance.

Detailed recommendations tied to each “slice” of the pie follow. Those strategies
have been categorized as:

12/2012 Page 2-25

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

An Integrated • Platform Strategies address the systems required to deliver wayfinding infor-
Approach: Solution mation and their integration and expansion points.
Strategy Model
• Design Strategies address planning, usability, and lists of recommended fea-
(continued) tures from the visitor’s point of view.
• Operational Strategies address recommendations on the roles, processes and
tools to maintain the system.
It is important to note that this Model represents technologies, including the web,
mobile devices, and self-service kiosks that are in use today and will continue to be
vital wayfinding tools for the next five years. The Model may be revised over time to
include emerging technologies as they gain traction in the marketplace and among
VA visitor demographics.

The Model divides the visitor’s journey into three sections, pre-trip planning, getting
to the facility, and navigating the facility.

Pre-Trip Planning
Today, the “Locations” section of VA.gov for medical centers and clinics offers street
addresses and, in some cases, driving directions and other details for VHA facili-
ties. The recommendation is to expand the information to answer all of the most
frequently-asked questions for every facility.

The NCA website “Locations” provides a map to all National Cemeteries with
the name of the cemetery by state and the street address, with directions from
the nearest airport. The National Gravesite Locator provides the Veteran’s name,
branch of service, rank, dates of birth and death, name and location of cemetery,
and the location of the burial site shown on a printable map.

As noted in the Integrated Wayfinding Experience Model (Figure 1), most people
who look for directions online start with Google (83 percent in December 2013),
so it is important that Google’s location information for VA facilities, beginning with
the each facility’s street address is accurate. As a byproduct of the Google Indoors
initiative street addresses will be checked for accuracy.

Getting to the Facility

Today, VA.gov is not optimized for mobile devices, meaning that it is hard to navi-
gate and read the website from a smartphone or tablet. The site displays the same
content in the same format, regardless of the size of the screen of the device that
is accessing it. A responsive website serves content and tools in the best format for
each device that accesses it. VA.gov is scheduled to re-launch as a responsively-
designed site in August 2014. At that time, visitors will be able to access and refer to
location information more easily.

Navigating the Facility

Once on site, the visitor should have access to wayfinding information in various
media. The VPS system provides a platform to support on-site wayfinding touch-
screens, relevant wayfinding information embedded in check-in kiosks, and other
devices such as tablets as the platform offerings grow. If the facility has adequate
cellular coverage, or even better, a guest wireless network, the visitor can con-
tinue to use his or her smartphone indoors to access VA.gov and Google Indoors.
Several VA Medical Centers have chosen to establish guest wireless networks
using facility funds, since there is not a national guest wireless strategy. For compli-
cated campuses or facilities, a printed map should be available at entrance lobbies
and major information desks.

12/2012 Page 2-26

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended The following strategies emphasize the “what” not the “how” for achieving the inte-
Strategies grated solution outlined in the Solution Strategy Model (Figure 4). However, some
thoughts on implementation have been raised to help visualize how the strategy
may be employed.

In other words, there are multiple ways to achieve these recommendations, and the
strategies below outline the major factors associated with designing, housing, and
delivering wayfinding information. In particular, the platform and operational strate-
gies should be interpreted as proposals for further exploration to determine their
viability within VA infrastructure, administration, and planning.

Strategies Matrix
PLATFORM DESIGN OPERATIONAL
STRATEGIES STRATEGIES STRATEGIES
Expand the current “Locations For each complex facility, one Adopt or further communicate
and Directions” sections of VHA map should be designed and a standard nomenclature
facility pages, NCA locations, published in all applicable of healthcare services and
and VBA offices on VA.gov wayfinding tools such as printed destinations to be used by
to offer enhanced wayfinding maps, visitor guides, website, all VHA facilities and in all
information. on-site touchscreens, on-site wayfinding information.
wayfinding signage.
Build wayfinding functionality All wayfinding technology Define the role of “wayfinding
into the VPS platform, including tools should meet the same manager” at all VA Medical
an enhanced wayfinding module standards of accessibility (ABA/ Centers and provide tools for
of VetLink and wayfinding ADA Specifications and Section those responsible to keep the
touchscreens for main lobbies of 508) that VA.gov and VetLink wayfinding information up to
complex VA Medical Centers. currently attain. date.
In recognition that the optimal On-site wayfinding touchscreens Train staff and volunteers how to
navigational device is the (as built on the VPS platform) give directions and how to use
smartphone, extend and should conform to a checklist of all wayfinding tools.
improve cellular service and usability requirements.
guest Wi - Fi networks at VA
Medical Centers.
Augment efforts of the Google To ensure the utility and Every wayfinding technology
Indoors initiative to map all VA adoption of wayfinding tool should be covered by
facilities. technology tools, it is helpful a service agreement and
to begin the design of each hardware refresh plans should
offering with participatory design be implemented for on-site tools.
sessions with Veterans and
visitors.
All wayfinding technology tools Discourage the procurement
should provide information in of proprietary wayfinding
the major languages of the technology such as
facility’s visitors. touchscreens and apps by
individual VA facilities.

Platform Strategies
The recommendations begin with platform strategies, as derived from the Guiding
Principle: Use cost-effective high-impact solutions, leveraging and extending
assets and platforms as possible. In this document, a platform is defined as a
software environment or system that delivers information to visitors and provides
management tools for VA staff to support the offering.

None of these strategies are based on the adoption or procurement of a new plat-
form. Current VA platforms can efficiently and effectively support the needs of an
integrated wayfinding system.

Platform Strategy 1: Expand the current “Locations and Directions”

sections of VHA facility pages, NCA locations, and VBA offices on
VA.gov to offer enhanced wayfinding information.

12/2012 Page 2-27

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended VA has implemented a template approach to organizing information on all of

Strategies its facilities. As described in the Related VA Initiatives section, VHA Media
(continued) Management oversees the national and local content for VA.gov and has designed
a series of templates for each VHA, VBA, and NCA facility to publish information.
Representatives at the facility level, such as the Public Affairs Officer at the VAMC,
manage the content on their pages, including the Locations section.

Today, the Locations section offers driving directions with the option to generate
customized directions and a map from any street address to the facility’s street
address via a Google Maps link. Links to see the facility’s location on Yahoo,
MapQuest, and Google are also provided.

An effort could be defined to expand the wayfinding information provided on the

Locations page. All facility website Location pages should include a site plan not-
ing entrances and major destinations. The map could be a Google Indoors map (or
Google’s standard map, if the facility hasn’t been mapped) to the facility. Options
could be provided to generate customized driving or transit, parking, and walking
directions to any destination at that facility. (The facility web pages list Healthcare
Services provided at each facility; those could also have links to generate complete
direction sets, using standard nomenclature.) Since all VBA, VHA and NCA facilities
have Location pages, this solution would be helpful for all VA visitors.

Additional functions to print, email, or text direction sets should be accessible from
every set of directions.

As the Solutions Model indicates, there is significant value in making VA.gov a more
helpful tool for smartphone and tablet users. Twenty-one percent of traffic to VA.gov
comes from smartphones and tablets. When the site is responsively designed in
August 2014, all visitors will essentially have a visitor guide to the complete network
of VA facilities in their pocket.

Platform Strategy 2: Build wayfinding functionality into the VPS

platform, including an enhanced wayfinding module of VetLink and
wayfinding touchscreens for main lobbies of complex VA Medical
Centers.
VPS was designed as a platform for self-service transactions at VHA facilities. It
debuted in May 2011 with VetLink kiosks, and their main function is patient check in.

Since inception, the VPS charter has been “device-agnostic” so that the platform
can run and manage any device, as needs are identified. Aside from the free-stand-
ing and desk-mounted VetLink kiosks, the VPS system currently supports many
different form-factors, including 42-inch touchscreens.

A process already exists by which new functions, such as facility/campus wayfind-

ing, can be defined, along with user interface and content requirements. With more
than 3,315 devices in use in VAMCs and CBOCs, the methodologies for deploy-
ment and operations have been honed and codified.

Platform Strategy 3: In recognition that the optimal navigational

device is the smartphone, extend and improve cellular service and
guest Wi-Fi networks at VA Medical Centers.
As explained in the first Guiding Principle’s Best Practice: Mobile has emerged as
the primary wayfinding platform, it is clear that the smartphone has become the
personal wayfinding device.It already is an aid to visitors in their journey to facilities.
But once inside, when cellular service is low or non-existent, and there is no guest
Wi-Fi network, the smartphone is of no help.

12/2012 Page 2-28

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended There are many reasons to pursue a guest Wi-Fi initiative. Significantly, there are
Strategies therapeutic benefits for patients in long-term confinement at VA medical centers, as
(continued) identified by VHA Office of Research & Development, Bioinformatics in a proposal
for a national Veterans guest internet access (VGIA) initiative.

Guest Wi-Fi may also be a key driver of patient satisfaction and, perhaps, even a
point of comparison as Veterans have more choices whether they seek care within
VA or in the new options offered by the Affordable Care Act.

Some VAMCs offer guest Wi-Fi today, and it is being considered by many others.
As business cases are drafted, it is important to note the benefits of delivering real-
time wayfinding information via Wi-Fi to visitors. However, a major constraint is that
VAMCs must finance this provision at the facility level since no separate funding is
available.

Indoor positioning technology offers the ability to locate the position of a user’s
smartphone indoors and deliver relevant information to that user based on his
or her position. The location of the smartphone can be pinpointed by triangulat-
ing nearby Wi-Fi signals or by more sophisticated sensors either in the phone or
embedded in the environment.

Cisco, the market leader in Wi-Fi networking hardware and software, is embedding
location intelligence in its access points (also known as wireless routers) so that
apps and websites can identify the position of the user indoors and deliver contex-
tual information (such as nearby restrooms and amenities or directions to a destina-
tion), regardless of whether the user’s smartphone is on the Wi-Fi network.

Cisco’s is a more proprietary approach than Google’s: Cisco is embedding location

information in the Cisco access point to be used by apps designed specifically to
access and process that data; Google is sensing any wireless signal and recording
where destinations are according to the user’s position as identified by surrounding
wireless signals.

Platform Strategy 4: Augment efforts of the Google Indoors initia-

tive to map all VA facilities.
By every measure, Google is the market leader in navigation. Google Maps for
Mobile is the world’s most popular app for smartphones, with over 54 percent of
global smartphone owners using it at least once during the month of August 2013.
Ninety-one percent of all U.S. smartphones have access to Google Maps. From
Street View to Google Earth, Google spends millions of dollars updating and grow-
ing its mapping data. Google launched Indoor Maps in 2011 and an estimated
25,000 facilities all over the world have been mapped, with malls, airports, and
museums in the lead. Google Indoors is accessible by any device that can access
Google Maps.

Google’s Indoor initiative is composed of two parts, (1) publishing indoor floor
plans with labeled destinations aligned to Google’s base maps and (2) walking the
space with Google’s proprietary tools to provide indoor location positioning on those
maps (linking the virtual maps to the physical environment via detection of wireless
signals’ strength and location). The destinations on the indoor maps are part of
Google’s database and are searchable, meaning that you can find directions from
your location at the hospital’s entrance lobby on Floor 1 to Dialysis on Floor 3. (Note
that destination names would best be standardized through a VA-wide nomencla-
ture initiative.)

If the facility has any visible Wi-Fi network (publicly accessible or staff-facing,
secure or open), then Google will survey the facility, using specialized software that

12/2012 Page 2-29

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended records the strength and location of access points to “stitch” the static floorplan to
Strategies locations in physical space.
(continued) Google Indoors works best when (1) the facility has given Google the floorplans to
publish and (2) the facility has a Wi-Fi network of any kind (public/private, secure/
open) and (3) the Google team has mapped that facility to record where destina-
tions are based on sensing the Wi-Fi signals. When all three are complete, then
people can see the “You are here” blue dot on the floorplan on Google Maps and
can navigate easily to any destination in the building, checking their progress on the
map.

If Google has published the floorplans (1) above, then people can see the floorplan
on Google Maps and can use the map to navigate, even though the map does not
show the “You are here” blue dot. In other words, they can refer to the indoor map to
navigate, but cannot see where they are on the map or check their progress toward
their destination. In this case, it does not matter whether the facility has a Wi-Fi
network.

Other companies are pursuing the “You are here” functionality indoors, but rely on
additional network infrastructure such as intelligent access points that track location
or installation of Bluetooth/iBeacon sensors.

Interior destinations labeled on Google Indoors maps are also searchable from
Google’s main search engine (www.google.com.) For example, if “Radiology” is a
labeled destination on the VA Pittsburgh H. J. Heinz Campus building floorplan, then
a visitor to Google search will find “Radiology, VA Pittsburgh H. J. Heinz Campus”
as a search result with a map to that destination. When a facility has been mapped,
Google will be able to offer more specific directions to destinations within that
facility.

Knowledge of Google Indoors is relatively low in the marketplace, meaning that

Google Maps users only stumble upon it when they happen to search for a destina-
tion that has indoor maps. As more and more locations have indoor maps, more
people will be exposed to the feature.

Google Indoors is now part of the developer toolkit, or API, that Google makes
available to third-party developers to make their own custom applications based
on the Google Map platform. That means that the functionality demonstrated on
the UCSF and MD Anderson websites (customized driving, transit, parking, walk-
ing directions to an interior destination) can be developed on VA.gov or in VA
Connected Health app, MyHealtheVet.

The recommendation to continue to pursue and expand this initiative is based on:

• Google’s dominance in mapping as the primary navigational tool.

• Functionality provided by Google Indoors, including “You are here.”
• Capability to embed Google Indoor maps in VA.gov location pages.
Design Strategies
Design strategies identify the major usability requirements for wayfinding tools.
While tuned for wayfinding technology tools, many of these design strategies may
be applied to more pervasive tools, such as printed communications.

Design Strategy 1: For each complex facility, one map should be

designed and published in all applicable wayfinding tools, including

12/2012 Page 2-30

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended printed maps, visitor guides, website, on-site touchscreens, and

Strategies on-site wayfinding signage.
(continued) As stated in the Guiding Principles Best Practice: Verbal directions are not
enough — people need a guide. Probably the most effective portable wayfinding
tool is a printed map.

Recommendations for map design are described in the VA Signage Design Guide
section on “You are here” Maps and Directories.

Whether they are produced by in-house designers or by outside consultants,

printed maps orient visitors and help them form a mental model of a complicated
environment.

Maps do need to be updated as facilities change and grow and should be overseen
by the wayfinding manager as described in Operational Strategies below.

Design Strategy 2: All wayfinding technology tools should provide

information in the major languages of the facility’s visitors.
Perhaps the greatest advantage of technology-based wayfinding information over
its traditional counterparts is that technology offers the capability to develop and
deliver content in multiple languages. Signs become unreadable when each mes-
sage is presented in more than one or two languages, but a visitor to a website or
using a touchscreen can simply click a button to translate its content to their pre-
ferred language.

Providing wayfinding content in multiple languages does add to the operational

efforts required to maintain the system. For example, a content management sys-
tem must track each destination and its multiple translations. As described in the
Best Practice above, professional interpreters and translators should be consulted
to ensure accuracy.

Design Strategy 3: All wayfinding technology tools should meet

the same standards of accessibility (ABA/ADA Specifications and
Section 508) that VA.gov and VetLink currently attain and that the
VA Signage Design Guide specifies.
For more information, see section508.va.gov and the ABA/ADA Specifications sec-
tion in the Design Elements chapter of this document.

Design Strategy 4: On-site wayfinding touchscreens (as built on the

VPS or NCA platforms) should conform to a checklist of usability
requirements.
The following checklist is based on the Best Practices from the Guiding Principles
above, site visit observation, and previously-performed user research.

1. For wayfinding, large-format touchscreens (32-inches and greater) work best

to display maps, directory information, and menus at sizes that are easy to
read.
2. Wayfinding touchscreens are best placed where visitors need wayfinding
guidance most, such as entrance lobbies and elevator lobbies.
3. Static signage such as a map and floor directory should flank every wayfind-
ing touchscreen to create a “wayfinding information station.”
4. When possible wayfinding touchscreens should be positioned near informa-
tion desks or other places where staff members or volunteers can help people

12/2012 Page 2-31

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended use them and monitor whether they are functioning properly. Staff should be
Strategies trained to help visually impaired people access wayfinding information.
(continued) 5. Each touchscreen needs an “attract mode” or screensaver to broadcast its
functionality — “Get directions here” or “Find gravesites here” — to passersby.
6. When positioned in portrait mode, touchscreens are more usable for people
of various heights and for those in wheelchairs.
7. The user interface should be simple and uncluttered, with a prominent func-
tion to search for a destination or browse through a list of destinations.
8. Touchscreens should use common gestures; for example, tap a button to acti-
vate it and pinch and stretch to zoom.
9. Buttons to change language or to move the active area of the screen down for
increased usability by those in wheelchairs should be prominently placed.
10. On-screen maps should be oriented to the user’s perspective (also known as
“heads-up” maps) and highlight the user’s current location.
11. Directions should be provided as step-by-step directions and a map, high-
lighted and even animated to show the journey from start to finish.
12. Touchscreens should offer the ability to text or email direction sets to visi-
tors. Research has shown that the ability to print customized directions at a
touchscreen is welcomed by visitors. However, printers (jamming, maintain-
ing or becoming inoperable) have been problematic in many installations.
NCA kiosk printers and VetLink kiosk printers operate well, perhaps because
operational policies have been put in place.
Design Strategy 5: To ensure the utility and adoption of wayfinding
technology tools, it is helpful to begin the design of each offering
with participatory design sessions with Veterans and visitors.
The aim of participatory design is to involve all stakeholders — in this case, Veterans
and their families and caregivers, VA staff, and volunteers — in the beginning phases
of the design process to support their needs and expectations in the final offering.

It is important to elicit the input from various user groups, such as aging Veterans,
those whose first language is not English, and those with limited mobility to ensure
that wayfinding tools meet their needs.

The outcomes of participatory design sessions are often illuminating. If one were
held to further define the checklist of usability requirements for touchscreens, per-
haps additional requirements would be discovered, more finely tuning the tool to the
specific needs of Veterans.

Operational Strategies
Operational strategies identify recommended procedures for supporting the inte-
grated wayfinding system and its technology components.

Operational Strategy 1: Adopt and communicate a standard nomen-

clature of healthcare services and destinations to be used by all
VHA facilities and in all wayfinding information.
This strategy addresses the Guiding Principle: Maintain consistent nomenclature
across all wayfinding tools. A facility must be internally consistent in its use of
language, but a more holistic and efficient approach would be to employ standard
nomenclature across all VA facilities. In that way, a Veteran who moves across the

12/2012 Page 2-32

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended country from Atlanta to Sacramento knows his appointment at his new VAMC will be
Strategies at “Prosthetics/Orthotics,” same as it was at the Atlanta VAMC.
(continued) As an official nomenclature evolves, it should be used as a companion to the VA
Signage Design Guide in developing all wayfinding content.

Operational Strategy 2: Define the role of “wayfinding manager” at

all VAMCs and provide tools for those responsible to keep the way-
finding information up to date.
This strategy is directly from the Best Practice: Leverage currently-defined duties
and consolidate similar responsibilities into a wayfinding manager role.

How these roles are identified and staffed is beyond the scope of this document, but
the requirement that resources be committed to manage the wayfinding system on
a regular basis is vital to sustaining a useful system.

The types of responsibilities that may be listed as part of a wayfinding manager’s

role are:

• Identify wayfinding changes due to construction and renovation projects and

department relocations.
• Keep the interior and exterior wayfinding signage up to date.
• Manage a centralized database to store all wayfinding information and ensure
that it is published accurately to the website and other tools.
• Monitor usage of wayfinding technology tools, such as website and on-site
touchscreens.
• Oversee design and production of printed maps, room identification signs, and
other regulatory and wayfinding signs.
• Serve as “product manager” of wayfinding technology at the facility, advancing
the integrated wayfinding solution roadmap.
Operational Strategy 3: Train staff and volunteers how to give
directions and how to use all wayfinding tools.
This strategy is directly from the Best Practice: Train front-line staff how to give
directions and how to use wayfinding tools.

Volunteers, registration clerks, and other front-line staff must be conversant in des-
tination nomenclature and the logic of the wayfinding system. They must be able to
assist Veterans and visitors as they navigate the facility, offering maps and guides
when available. A wayfinding module may be added to existing orientation and
ongoing training programs.

Operational Strategy 4: Every wayfinding technology tool should

be covered by a service agreement, and hardware refresh plans
should be implemented for on-site tools.
Hardware requires perpetual support. Just as desktop computers are maintained
on a regular basis by IT support staff, embedded touchscreens and the PCs or
media players that run them must be maintained. Service agreements, whether by
in-house arrangement or by outsourced contracts, are mandatory when it comes to
on-site wayfinding technology.

Hardware also requires a replacement strategy. Every hardware type has an

expected lifecycle that can be documented in budgeting and operational plans.

12/2012 Page 2-33

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended Operational Strategy 5: Discourage the procurement of proprietary

Strategies wayfinding technology such as touchscreens, kiosks, and apps by
(continued) individual VA facilities.
As the Best Practice states: Stand-alone, proprietary wayfinding kiosks and
apps are not viable solutions for large-scale organizations like to VA.

It should be clear from the platform recommendations above that VA’s current
enterprise-level systems VA.gov and VPS offer the most robust and efficient path to
delivering wayfinding information on the web and on site.

Funds spent procuring single-facility wayfinding devices would be better spent con-
tributing toward the solution strategy outlined previously in this document.

Gauging the Complexity of an Environment

The answers to the following questions indicate the relative complexity of a given
campus, site, or building. Generally, the more of these attributes a facility shares,
the more complicated the visitor’s journey becomes and the more helpful an inte-
grated wayfinding system will be.

1. Does the facility have:

multiple buildings?
multiple self-parking options?
multiple campus entries?
multiple transit stops?

2. Does the main building have:

multiple public entrances?
more than one public elevator bank?
If so, do the elevators serve different floors/areas?
more than two wings?

3. Is there a change in grade in public areas? For example are there entrances
on more than one floor, such as Ground Floor and Floor 1?
4. If more than one entrance, is the majority of parking closest to the main
entrance?
5. Are distinctions between public areas and back-of-house areas clearly
defined?
6. Are there frequent periods of construction and renovation inside or outside
the facility?
7. Have temporary signs and routes become permanent over time?
8. In the main lobby, can visitors get oriented and find destination information?
These indicators may uncover specific wayfinding challenge points as well as pro-
vide an overall picture of how simple or how complicated a given campus, site, or
building may be. Once the level of complexity is evaluated, the value of wayfinding
technology in that particular environment can be assessed.

To evaluate whether a facility may need to refresh its interior or exterior signage
program, please refer to “Need a Sign Program” in this document.

12/2012 Page 2-34

 Room & Floor
Renumbering

• Floor Level Numbering

• Room Renumbering

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Introduction

This section of the Sign and Graphic Design Guide covers two basic fundamental
foundations to an effective sign and wayfinding program: proper floor level identifica-
tion and logical, clear and consistent room numbers.

The foundation of wayfinding starts with floors functioning as the basic delineation
of the physical layout of the building. Once a patient or visitor enters the building,
the first question to be resolved is, “What floor level am I on and what floor level is
my destination?” The next question is “What is the room number or location of my
destination?” Following that question, the next question is, “How do I get there?”

An effective wayfinding system needs to answer these questions and provide other
information that people need to function in a building.

It is important to establish a clear and consistent identity for all floor levels as one of
the basic components of the building’s wayfinding system.

12/2012 Page 3-1

 Floor Level Renumbering

Initially, it is important to establish a clear and consistent identity for all floor levels in
a building. This is the basic foundation of a building’s wayfinding system.

Floor Level The first floor of a building is the level where patients and visitors enter the building,
Identification from grade, to the main lobby. It is people’s natural instinct to expect that when they
walk in the main lobby of a building, that is the building’s first level.

When labeling floor levels, designate the first level as Floor 1. Next, work down
through the lower floors, identifying all parking and basement levels. After labeling
the lower levels, work up the building, identifying all mezzanine, interstitial, and up-
per floors.

The established floor level identity should always be displayed at elevator lobbies,
elevator control buttons, directories and stairs. Buildings that have secondary and
service exterior entries on more than one level should display entry/exiting informa-
tion along with the level identity. This assists people entering a building to under-
stand they are not entering the building’s main level thus avoiding confusion and
disorientation.

Site Considerations Clear and consistent level identification is essential for buildings located on sloped
sites with portions of the levels partially above and below grade.

Adjacent or multiple buildings on a sloped site that have floors that do not align
should have clear level identification along with effective directional information.
Keep in mind the “front door to the medical center main lobby” defines the first floor
level.

On a sloped site condition, where buildings are connected with an enclosed walk-
way or corridor, and the building floor levels do not align, an evaluation must be
made regarding coordination of floor level identification. For example, a patient en-
ters the facility at the medical center main lobby and wants to go to a clinic that is
located in another building, which is physically connected to the hospital.

If the transition in walking from one building to the next is VISUALLY VERY CLEAR,
then the buildings can retain their individual floor level numbers. However, at the
entry points to each building, HIGHLY VISIBLE floor level identification must be dis-
played at the building entry points.

If the transition from one building to the next is NOT CLEAR and a person is not
aware they have entered another building, then the buildings floor level numbers
need to be coordinated and matched. This may mean renumbering the floors in the
secondary building in a nonconforming way.

12/2012 Page 3-2

 Floor Level Renumbering

Assigning Floor Level FIRST FLOOR R

Identification
The level patients and visitors enter the
building. 3
Label this floor as “1”.
2
1
B

UPPER LEVELS R
The building levels above the First Floor.
3
Upper building level identification should
be identified by the number ascending
from the first floor. The second floor is
2
numbered “2”, the third floor is numbered
“3” and so on. 1
BASEMENT

The building levels below the First Floor.

B1
Building level identification should be
identified by the letter “B”. Buildings with
B2
multiple basement levels should label
descending basement levels B1, B2, B3,
etc., in the order of descent.

MEZZANINE LEVELS R
Mezzanine level is the level that is be-
tween the first and second floors. Most 3
buildings do not have a mezzanine.

Label this floor level “M”.

2
M
1
B

12/2012 Page 3-3

 Floor Level Renumbering

INTERSTITIAL LEVELS R
Interstitial level is floor level that is not
accessible to the public. Generally these 3
types of levels have building support I2
equipment. Most buildings do not have
interstitial levels.
2
Label this floor level “I”. I1

1
B

When a building is on a sloping site, the R

first floor is the level which patient and
visitors enter the building, as a main
entrance, and enter into a main lobby
3
reception area.

The lower level is then designated a

2
1
basement, even though it is at grade.

Older buildings which were constructed

B
with a staircase leading up a flight or
partial flight of stairs to the main level,
typically had this level designated as the
first floor and the level below labeled as
the ground floor or basement.

If Ground Floor is used as a designation,

change it to Basement.
R

3
2
1
B

12/2012 Page 3-4

 Floor Level Renumbering

Older buildings which were constructed R

with a staircase leading up a full flight of
stairs to the main level, typically had this
level designated as the first floor and the
3
level below labeled as the ground floor
or basement. 2
If ground level has level access from
grade, the designation of that level
should be 1.
1

Sloped site condition, where buildings R

are connected with an enclosed walkway
or corridor, and the building floor levels
do not align, and the transition from one
3
building to the next is NOT CLEAR and
a person is not aware they have entered 2 2
another building, then the buildings floor
level numbers need to be coordinated
and matched based upon the level that
1
serves as the main entrance.
B1 B1
B2

Sloped site condition, where buildings are connected with an enclosed walkway or
corridor, and the building floor levels do not align, but the transition in walking from
one building to the next is VISUALLY VERY CLEAR, then the buildings can retain
their individual floor level numbers.

3
3 2
2 1
1 B
B

12/2012 Page 3-5

 Floor Level Renumbering

Implementation of PROCESS
Floor Number/Level • Conduct a survey of existing floor level identification and conditions.
Changes
• Develop revised floor level designations.
• Determine what needs to be changed in the sign program: elevator cars, eleva-
tor lobbies, stairwell signs, directories, automatic alarm annunciators, building
automation systems, etc.
• Coordinate with facility manager, engineering, dietary, information manage-
ment, safety, and nursing.
• Advise the on-site, and/or local Fire and Police Departments of this change in
the facility.
• Develop documentation necessary to implement the change. This will involve
changes to both the elevators and the sign program at the same time.
• Arrange for implementation through typical procedures.
• Alert all staff, prior to the conversion, via email and notifications posted through-
out the facility. Include actual conversion dates along with contact information
for either the department or individual(s) responsible for addressing relevant
inquiries.

WHEN
• Preferable during the completion of a renovation or remodeling project or as
part of the completion of a new construction project.
• Schedule the installation and change over during a weekend or holiday period.

CONSIDERATIONS
• Install the entire program at one time to avoid confusion.
• Create a translation sheet which indicates “old” and “new” level names. Widely
distribute this information, along with the date of change, to staff with plenty of
time before the change.
• After converting to the new level designations, in the elevator lobbies, display a
paper copy of the old vs. new floor levels for several weeks as staff and patients
adjust to the change.

12/2012 Page 3-6

 Room Renumbering

The room numbering system functions as one of the basic pieces of information in
the building’s wayfinding system.

The wayfinding system can be compared to the process people use when travel-
ing through a town or city to reach their destination. First they go to the right part
of town, next they find the right street, and finally they look for the right address. In
a building, they use a similar process by first going to the right floor level, next they
find the right corridor, and finally they look for the right room number. That room
number serves as the “address”.

Room Numbering as a Room number systems identify each room in a building using a consistent recogniz-
Wayfinding Tool able pattern. In addition to identifying the room, the room numbering system also
assists in orienting visitors, patients and employees and serves as a sequential
guide to help them navigate through sometimes complex building floor plans.

Room Numbering Room numbering systems in a medical center play a primary role in the function
Effects on Operations and operations of a facility. A room numbering system that is confusing, or unlike
typical addressing systems, will effect the ability of visitors, patients and employees
to quickly find their destinations. For example, a confusing numbering system will
effect planning and maintenance staff, dietary staff and others who are responsible
for pick up and deliveries within a building.

Importance of a Clear The assignment of a “beneficial” room number provides an opportunity for the
Room Numbering patient to create an immediate mental image of the actual space location in the
System building. By knowing a beneficial room number, a person can enter the building and
ascertain what floor, wing, and location on that wing the target space is, without ad-
ditional wayfinding tools such as directories, lines on floors, or directional signs.

Fixing “Broken” Room Most often room numbering systems that are “broken” are a result of new construc-
Numbering as a tion being added to existing facilities with the room numbers not being coordinated
Wayfinding Tool between the buildings. The other possibility is extensive or repeated remodeling has
been done when the existing numbering system was not flexible enough to accom-
modate change.

When embarking on a project to correct a “broken” room numbering system, several

things need to be taken into account. Many departments will be effected in a medi-
cal center and all departments need to participate in the development of the num-
bering system to facilitate a smooth and orderly transition.

Typical departments that are effected by room number changes are Facility
Management, Engineering, Environmental Management, Pharmacy, Medical
Administration, Nutrition and Food Service, Police Services, and Information
Resource Management.

Planning for a change will take time and should involve communication to as many
staff as possible long before the change is implemented.

12/2012 Page 3-7

 Room Renumbering

Method to Implement A new room numbering system can be implemented and the old number system
New Room Numbers retained.
While Retaining Old
Numbers The new room number system is put in place on the wall at the side of the door as
a part of a new sign program. The old room number can be put on a small sign (i.e.
1” X 4”) mounted on the top of the door frame on the hinge side. With this approach,
when a new corrected room numbering scheme is put in place, the old room num-
ber designation is not effected. The old room number on the plaque that is attached
to the door frame retains the old number for as long as necessary. The new room
number is then in place for the public and the wayfinding system.

While this approach may address the concerns of those who do not want to change
numbers, it does introduce two systems into a building. Typically the new system
will get adapted by people in a matter of just a couple of weeks. Then a decision will
need to be made regarding what departments will stay using the old system.

Although engineering may want to remain with the old system, it is not recom-
mended. There are ways for engineering to make room number revisions while
maintaining the integrity of their databases. For example, Computer Aided Facility
Management (CAFM) systems can include programs for old room numbers and
new room numbers that will electronically solve such concerns. The effort to in-
corporate the revisions in CAFM can also be included in the replacement signage
contract.

Criteria for Room The following is a guide for a door/room numbering system and a proposed method
Numbering to implement the system. They are intended for a starting point for developing an ef-
fective system.

General Wayfinding Building layout and shape play a significant role in the development of a room num-
Considerations ber system that functions correctly.

Review a site plan identifying the building entrances and access usage. Evaluate
the building floor plan and identify main features, primary entrance, exits, hallways,
elevators and determine major paths of travel. When determining the paths of travel,
also identify where these paths of travel originate.

Identify major and secondary corridors, waiting rooms, office suites, service and ac-
tivity rooms, open office areas, and mechanical/utility rooms and spaces.

Determine major, secondary and tertiary destinations such as clinics, reception ar-
eas, offices, nursing stations, pharmacy, rest rooms, and the like. Note locations of
vertical circulation elements (elevators, stairs).

Survey and make note of the building’s structural “grid”, beams, columns, windows,
and shear walls. Note corridor alignments and other architectural elements like atri-
ums, courtyards, and patios.

Note patterning in building construction: Do walls tend to follow a pattern of place-

ment? Do walls follow a pattern from floor to floor? Are corridors in the same lo-
cation from floor to floor? Are certain rooms in the same location on each floor?
Also, identify where existing room numbers function well and may not require any
revisions.

12/2012 Page 3-8

 Room Renumbering

Room numbers are a label of identification. They can convey identification of the
floor level, building area as well as the specific number of the room.

Room numbers would typically be formatted with the first digit(s) designating the
floor, the second digit (or letter) designating the building area, and depending on
the size of the building area, the next 2 or 3 digits are identifying the actual room.

Smaller buildings or building configurations that permit the use of 4 digits is a pre-
ferred system. The use of 4 digits for a room number tends to be easier for people
remember

Floor Number Floor Number

4 Digit Building Area/Wing 5 Digit Building Area/Wing

System System
Room Number Room Number

2D77 3B042
2477 32042
It is recommended that individual room numbers not exceed 5 numerals/characters.
Room numbers composed of more than 5 numerals/characters tend to be more dif-
ficult to remember. If a building is over 9 stories, exceeding the 5 character guide is
a natural progression of accommodation. Adding an additional digit designation for
a room within a room is also a natural progression. Inserting a hyphen between the
building area designation and room number is also acceptable.

Building Area Depending on the configuration of the building floor plan, there are several methods
Designation to use in order to designate areas or features to support a clear and coherent room
numbering system.

AREAS
Based on the floor plan, generate a key plan delineating blocks of rooms and ac-
cess corridors. Establish area symbols (A, B, C or 1, 2, 3, etc.) on a key plan. The
area identifier is then used as part of room number and corridor number. Use of
cardinal directions (N, S, E, W) are not beneficial in area designations as users lose
directional perspective once inside a building.

D or 4 E or 5
C or 3

F or 6
A or 1
B or 2

12/2012 Page 3-9

 Room Renumbering

Building Area LOBBY and WAITING AREA

Designation Lobby identification should follow the numbering sequence of rooms. Assign a num-
(continued) ber in sequence to the room adjacent too or nearest to the lobby entry.

CORRIDORS
Corridor identification can also follow the numbering sequence of rooms.

ZONES
Establishing zones is a method of assigning a “room number” to constantly chang-
ing space such as workstation areas located in open floor plans.

Create a reference grid based on an architectural feature such as column lines. Use
letters on one axis and numbers on the other axis to identify each location within
the grid.

Room Numbering When applying a room numbering scheme to a facility, it is helpful to think of the
Scenarios process as being similar to traveling to a new place in town. You move from the gen-
eral to the specific. You have to get to the right part of town, find the right street, and
finally the right address.

Depending on the architectural configuration of a building, certain room numbering

scenarios may prove to work better than others. The key is to provide a logical con-
sistent pattern that people can follow.

Many times, when renumbering a building, there might be several different ways of
patterning of numbers that might work. Chose a scheme that will have the ability
to adapt to future building additions with no disruption to what has been applied.
Often, the simplest system is the most practical.

In the following pages we will discuss two numbering systems. One numbering sce-
nario is based upon a grid applied to the building floor plan. The other scenario is
based upon sequential numbering.

Numbering off a grid allows for room numbers to be added and deleted without ef-
fecting the numbering system. It does mean that numbers appear to jump when go-
ing down a hallway where there are no doors.

Numbering in a sequential fashion has numbers following the sequence of the

doors along a corridor. Following this approach requires introducing numbers with
a “sub-set” designation when new rooms are created within an existing numbered
space.

12/2012 Page 3-10

 Room Renumbering

Odd / Even Grid With the odd/even grid scheme, analyze the floor plan and develop a grid based on
Room Numbering consistent architectural building elements such as columns, window patterns etc.
Scenario
After developing a grid, assign odd room numbers to one side of the corridor grid
and even room numbers to the opposite side of the corridor. This patterning follows
the common addressing pattern used in cities and towns.

FLOOR PLAN EXAMPLE FLOOR PLAN EXAMPLE WITH

GRID NUMBERS APPLIED

100 101

102 103

104 105

106 107

108 109

110 111

112 113

114 115

116 117

118 119

120 121

122 123

124 125

126 127

128 129

12/2012 Page 3-11

 Room Renumbering

Odd / Even Grid After applying the grid, assign room numbers based upon which grid area contains
Room Numbering the room door opening. The grid numbering always stays constant and if there are
Scenario no door openings in a grid area, then that grid number is not used.
(continued) A grid number system assigns a number to an area of the building and allows re-
modeling to occur with rooms being added or deleted without changes to the num-
ber system.

100 3B100 101

102 3B103 103

3B102
3B104
104 105

3B106A
106 107
3B106 3B107
3B108 3B109
108 109

110 111
3B110 3B111
3B112 3B113
112 3B110A
113

3B115
114 115

3B116 3B117A
116 117
3B117

118 119
3B119

120 3B121 121

3B123
122 123

3B124 3B125
*This room could be num- 124 125
bered 3B126 because it
could be easily remodelled
to have access off the hall.
126 * 3B127 127
Or, it could be numbered 3B128B
3B128B because it is
128 129
accessed off room 3B128. 3B128

12/2012 Page 3-12

 Room Renumbering

Odd / Even Grid After applying room numbers, based upon the room door opening on to the corridor,
Room Numbering within the grid area, address the numbering for rooms that are located within rooms.
Scenario
Typically these interior rooms are given a sub-set designation. This designation can
(continued) be in the form of a letter or number. Using a letter tends to be easier for people to
remember and use.

4B123 - Room with a corridor door in the assigned grid area

4B123A or 4B123a or 4B123.1 - Designation for a room accessed through the

room that is accessed from the corridor.

The preceding illustration shows several examples of how to address rooms within
rooms, rooms extending over several grid zones and two rooms opening in the
same grid zone.

Sequential With the sequential scheme, take the floor

Room Numbering plan and apply room numbers down the
Scenario corridor. 4B100

At logical breaks in the corridor, like at

stairs or elevators, some numbers can be 4B102 4B101
skipped. This will allow some flexibility with-
4B103
in the sequential system in case of future
room re-configurations and remodels.
4B106A
The same as the odd/even scenario, inte- 4B106 4B105
rior rooms, off rooms, are given a sub-set 4B107 4B108
designation.

This designation can be in the form of a

letter or number. Using a letter tends to be 4B109 4B110
easier for people to remember and use. 4B111 4B112
4B109A
NOTE: While the adjacent illustration is
showing the use of a number and letter 4B113
designation system (i.e., 4B109), a five
number designation works equally as well
4B114 4B115
(i.e., 42109). 4B116

4B117

4B118

4B119
4B120
4B121

4B123A
4B122
4B123B

4B123

12/2012 Page 3-13

 Room Renumbering

Every building has conditions that may require deviation from the room numbering
scenario being applied, but these deviations should be kept to a minimum. If there
are too many, then there is a problem with the scenario being applied.

Sometimes there are buildings, or floors, where it is virtually impossible to imple-

ment a logical numbering system. There may be to many disconnected corridors,
rooms within rooms within rooms or simply no defining pattern to the rooms in the
building or space.

Adding and Deleting A numbering system for existing rooms/spaces should allow for future additions or
Room Numbers subtractions to the original system.

Large rooms that have been sub-divided and remodeled to serve other functions
can be identified by adding a sequential sub-set letter or number to the original
room/space number.

Original Room/Space Number - 1A013 (Retain for 1 room/space)

Added Rooms/Space Number - 1A013A, 1A013B

Original Room/Space Number - 1A014 (Retain for 1 room/space)

Added Rooms/Space Number - 1A014.1, 1A014.2, 1A014.3

Groups of small rooms/spaces remodeled into larger rooms/spaces by removing

walls/partitions should retain one of the original room/space numbers that follows in
sequence to the numbers patterned off the entrance from the corridor.

A number that has not been used in the Existing Plan may be assigned within reno-
vated area/space or new area/space if it falls within the sequencing.

An available room number may be re-assigned to another room after plan change.

A room number should not change if the function or use of a room changes.

In the case where a room/space is served by more than one door, the room number
should follow a number designation based upon the access to the room from cor-
ridor, anteroom, or lobby in sequence.

Rooms/spaces that could be accessed by a multiple door conditions are usually

office suites, alcoves, secretarial area, closets, air/mechanical shafts, stairs, eleva-
tors, and mechanical/electrical rooms.

When deleting old room numbers keep existing numbers in place unless the de-
leted numbers create confusion.

12/2012 Page 3-14

 Room Renumbering

Adding and Deleting

Room Numbers 2322 2322
(continued) 2325 2325
2324 2324

2328 2329 2328 2329

2330 2333 2330 2333

2334 2335 2334 2335

2337

2340 2341

ORIGINAL ADDED ROOMS

Grid System Grid System

2322 2322
2324 2324
2323 2323

2325 2326 2325 2326

2327 2328 2327 2328

2329 2330 2329 2330

2329A 2330A

2331 2331 2332

ORIGINAL ADDED ROOMS

Sequential System Sequential System

12/2012 Page 3-15

 Room Renumbering

Open Office Plan Large rooms that have been sub-divided with open office systems can identify
Zone Numbers zones within the room by adding a sequential sub-set letter or number to the room/
(continued) space number.

Room Number - 1A013

Open Office Zone/Space Number - 1A013a1, 1A013a2

Room Number - 2334

Open Office Zone/Space Number - 2334b1, 2334b2

2322
2325
2324

2328 2329

2330 2333
a3 a2 a1
b3 b2 b1
2335
2334 c3 c2 c1
d3 d2 d1
e3 e2 e1

f3 f2 f1

Implementation of PROCESS
Room Number • Conduct survey of existing room locations, floor plans and conditions.
Changes
• Develop proposed room number scenarios
• Determine what requires change in the sign program.
• Develop preliminary sign location plans and message schedules for new signs.
• Coordinate with all department managers, facility management, engineering,
dietary, information management, safety, nursing, pharmacy, and fiscal.
• Develop final documentation necessary to implement the change. This will in-
volve implementing the changes to both the room identification signs and the
directional sign program at the same time.
• Arrange for implementation through typical procedures.

12/2012 Page 3-16

 Room Renumbering

Implementation of WHEN
Room Number • Preferable during the completion of a renovation or remodeling project or as
Changes part of the completion of a new construction project.
(continued)
• Schedule the change over during a weekend or holiday period.
• Schedule the change at an accounting milestone (end of the month, end of fis-
cal year, or other well defined milestone).

CONSIDERATIONS
• Install the entire program at one time to avoid confusion.
• Create a translation sheet that has “old” and “new” room numbers. Widely dis-
tribute this information, and the date of change, to staff with plenty of time be-
fore the change.
• Install entire new room renumbering program at one time to avoid confusion.
• A recommendation is to install all the signs with the new numbers and then
cover them up with paper signs showing the old number. On the day and time
of the change, remove all the paper signs. This way the entire building gets
changed out at once.
• Code requirements may require updating some sign types and/or locations.
• Directories and directional signs will need to be updated with the new room
numbers.
• New room signs will probably require existing wall surfaces to be cleaned and
freshened up or even painted prior to installation.
• Prior to converting to new room numbers, plan for impacting system changes,
such as alarm annunciators, building automation systems, telephones, fire
alarm systems, code blue, and other room number dependent information
systems.

Corridor Numbering Revising or developing a corridor number system is a task that is directly influenced
by the architectural configuration of the corridors within a building. Particularly in
relation to the shape and form of the building as well as the location of building en-
trances and circulation hubs like elevators, stairs and atriums. It is difficult to define
a simple method of identification that can be universally applicable.

Corridor numbers are very rarely used in wayfinding except in situations where the
architecture of a building, and it’s circulation, allow corridors to define a distinct pat-
tern of clear wayfinding. In this case, the corridors are given names, rather than
numbers, as the method of identification.

There are, however, a few general guidelines for corridor numbers:

• Corridor numbers and the number system need to be distinctly different from
room numbers and room number system. Yet, they need to have a relationship
to the room numbering system on the corridor.
• Corridor numbers need to include a digit that designates the floor level.
• Corridors do not need to be signed for wayfinding purposes.

12/2012 Page 3-17

 Room Renumbering

Stairwell Numbering Stairwell numbering needs to be coordinated with a facility life safety plan. The
identification needs to be consistent throughout a building and from building to
building.

Each stairwell designation needs to be unique and specific to each stairwell and the
designation not repeated within a building or even on a campus.

Stairwell numbers can have a digit that designates a building and a digit that desig-
nates it as an emergency exit or and inner-level circulation path.

Stairwells that have outside exits should have a sign on the outside, adjacent to or
on the door, identifying that this is a stairwell and its specific number. This allows
emergency personnel to be directed to a specific stairwell without confusion.

Elevator Numbering Elevator numbering is typically done for services purposes only.

However, if elevators are given a number, or a letter, and are referred to in the way-
finding system, then the numbers need to have a correlation to the circulation within
a building. For example, Elevator 4 needs to be down the hall, or around the corner
from Elevator 3; Elevator A needs to be the main elevator.

If two buildings are connect together, the elevator designations should not repeat.
Each elevator should have a distinct number as the people using the building may
have no reference that they have changed buildings.

12/2012 Page 3-18

 Exterior
Signs

• Directional
• Building Identification
• Wall Mounted
• Letters
• Traffic

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank
 Table of Contents

Section 4:
Exterior Signs
• Planning 4-2-1 – 4-2-8

• Helpful Hints 4-3-1 – 4-3-2

• Names 4-4-1 – 4-4-2

• Overview 4-5-1 – 4-5-9

• Illuminated Sign Types 4-6-1 – 4-6-44

• Non-illuminated Sign Types 4-7-1 – 4-7-62

• Specification 4-8-1

• Construction 4-9-1 – 4-9-17

• Installation 4-10-1 – 4-10-11

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank
 Planning Exterior Signs

Planning an Exterior An effective working exterior sign program includes different categories of signs;
Sign Program Building Identification, Vehicular, and Pedestrian signs. Signage for those visitors
approaching a site in a vehicle and first seeing the site from a great distance is different
in appearance and design than those signs on the sidewalks and pathways designed for
pedestrians.The differing signage needs are to be carefully considered in developing an
effective exterior sign program. The objective of all exterior signage is to clearly direct
visitors to their destination.

To begin a site evaluation, obtain a site plan of the campus. The plan needs to be to scale
with a notation of direction such as north.

The plan needs to identify all major and minor roadways, driveways, alleys and access
roads. The plan also needs to show accurate parking lot & parking structure locations.
The plan need to include landscape layout which indicates sidewalks, pathways, cross
walks, ramps and stairways. Obtain photographs of the site to give an indication of
building height, sight lines, landscape, and tree coverage.

Visit the site and drive and walk all major roads and pathways. Identify all major building
entrances. Approaching the site by private vehicle is vastly different than stepping off
the bus. Stairs, ramps, and changes in elevations are all critical pieces of information in
planning an exterior sign program.

While performing an evaluation, take into account the following elements associated
with the site:

Character and configuration of the roadway system.

1. How do visitors currently drive around the site?

2. Where will visitors park?
3. What is the desired path of travel on the roadway system for visitors?
4. What is the desired path of travel on the roadway system for employees and
deliveries?
5. Location of buildings on the facility campus in relation to roads, parking, and
walkways.
6. Location of building entrances.
7. Parking plan for visitors, disabled, and employees.
8. Weather conditions like wind and snow.
9. Tree growth including the canopy height; in the summer and spring, do plants and
trees cover the building(s)?
10. Location of electricity, its availability and voltage.
11. Landscaping and the irrigation system.
12. Adequate light on and around directional signs.
13. Placement of signs in locations where people are expecting them to be.
14. Which signs can have permanent messages and which ones need to be
changeable.
These elements help establish the basis of a clear sign program that communicates and
informs in a direct and simple manner.

An effective sign program for a campus is one that has been planned as an integrated
whole. To include the main identification sign, directional signs, building and building
entrance identification through to the parking lot signs.

12/2012 Page 4-2-1

 Planning Exterior Signs

Wayfinding “Wayfinding” is a term that in recent years has been used to describe the process
of finding a destination in the built environment. Signs play an active role in this
process by providing the primary form of communication in wayfinding.

In developing a wayfinding system for the exterior of a medical center campus or

the interior of a building, some common guidelines must be followed.

The paths of travel from originating points to destinations must be identified.

On the exterior of a campus this involves the roadway system from the main drive
entry to the campus to the main entrance of the building to which patients and visi-
tors are seeking a service. While this is a primary path, a secondary primary path
is from the visitor parking lot to the main entrance or the entrance with services
which the individual is seeking.

Identifying destinations people drive to, where they park, and where they walk to is
the process of identifying the paths of travel. Wayfinding is then communicating to
people along this pathway with appropriate directional signs.

The intersections along the vehicle roadway and pedestrian pathway system need
to be identified in their importance for communication. Major high traffic intersec-
tions will require more communication than smaller secondary intersections. The
environments in which these intersections present themselves also effects the
wayfinding program.

The path of travel and the decision points that are necessary to reach the end
point and where these decision points are located must be considered. At these
decision points, information must be communicated to the driver in a priority of
need.

The priority of need is defined as those departments or services that have the
highest percentage of people seeking them. This high demand information then
needs to be communicated with the highest priority on exterior directional signs.

Secondary information or information that applies to a small percentage of indi-

viduals that visit a campus also needs to be evaluated in regard to its importance.
Typically a driver can only read 2 to 4 messages on a directional sign. Any informa-
tion that is beyond or greater than this is simply not read. Prioritization of commu-
nication of information would then, in most cases, cause the secondary or minor
information to be left off the sign because it is not useful.

In planning a directional sign program for pedestrians, take into account similar
objectives that are done for a roadway directional sign program. Major walkways
need to be identified in their respective intersections where the paths of travel split
to reach various services and entrances.

Types of Signs The main identification sign for a medical center should be a large scale illumi-
nated sign. This can be an internally illuminated monolith sign or a masonry wall
with letters that are illuminated with floodlights. Urban facilities main identification
sign or letters may be directly on the building and should be directly illuminated as
well.

Internally illuminated signs should be considered for those locations where impor-
tant information and directions need to be communicated at night as well as during
the day. This would typically be the main identification sign, the main directional
signs at the entrance to the site and along the primary path of travel, buildings

12/2012 Page 4-2-2

 Planning Exterior Signs

and entrances that have public activity in the early morning, late afternoon, and
evening.

A sign that is illuminated with floodlights can be effective at night. Typically this is a
less expensive way to obtain an illuminated sign, but the ongoing maintenance will
be considerably higher as ground based lights frequently get damaged.

Non-illuminated signs with reflective letters will function quite well for secondary
signs at night. It is a good practice to make all the exterior signs have reflective
letters as that will ensure the best possibility of being read regardless of a signs
importance.

Every site has different climate conditions that effect an exterior sign program.
Considerations for snowfall and frost line will have an impact on post length and
footing depth. For areas where there is a lot of snow, the posts on signs should
be taller so the sign panels do not become covered with snow. How much taller
should be evaluated by site locations’ typical snow fall. Tree growth and the canopy
of trees, both winter and summer, need to be considered. A sign obscured by
plants has little to no value.

Monument signs should be typically reserved for use at the main entrance and
along the principal drive to the main entrance at the medical center. Monument
signs are more expensive than post and panel signs, but provide a more profes-
sional appearance at the main entrance. Use of post and panel signs throughout
the remaining campus for directional signs and building identification is the most
practical approach to signing.

Sizes of Signs Signs that are to be read from a moving car need to be larger than signs that are
read by a driver who is stopped or parked. As the speed of a car increases, the
size of a sign needs to increase. Signs with important messages also need to be
larger. Additionally, the further the distance the sign needs to be read, the larger it
needs to be.

A simple explanation on the importance of size. A sign that is too small is an

annoyance to everyone, because they can’t read it. A sign that is too large will
never be an annoyance because everyone can read it.

Signs directed to pedestrians can be smaller, but they still have to be large enough
to be read. Signs placed close to a walkway can be smaller in scale, but care must
be taken to not make them so small that people don’t notice them.

If in doubt regarding a size decision, choose the next larger size.

Size of Lettering Signs that are to be read from a moving car need to have larger lettering than
signs that are read by a driver that is stopped or parked. As the speed of a car
increases, the size of the lettering on a sign also needs to increase. Signs with
important messages need to have larger lettering.

Additionally, the further the distance the sign needs to be read, the larger the
lettering needs to be. Remember, lettering on a sign that is too small is an annoy-
ance, because it can’t be read.

Signs directed to pedestrians can have smaller text. But, the lettering still has to be
large enough to be read.

If in doubt regarding the size of lettering to use, choose the next larger size.

12/2012 Page 4-2-3

 Planning Exterior Signs

Viewing Distance The following charts provide assistance in determining the size of lettering to be used in
Guide relation to the distance that a sign is going to be read.

These charts are general and there may be situations that would require lettering larger
than what is indicated in the chart for a given distance of viewing.

Symbols
Text Symbols
Figure 1
Viewing Distance Letter Height Application Viewing Distance Letter Height
Viewing Distance Chart
Up To: Up To:

7.5 M 25' 25 mm 1" 7.5 M 25' 75 mm 3"

12 M 40' 40 mm 11/2 " 10.5 M 35' 100 mm 4"
15 M 50' 50 mm 2" 15 M 50' 125 mm 5"
24 M 80' 75 mm 3" 18 M 60' 150 mm 6"
33 M 110' 100 mm 4" 30 M 100' 200 mm 8"
48 M 160' 150 mm 6" 34.5 M 115' 225 mm 9"
75 M 250' 225 mm 9" 39 M 130' 250 mm 10"
97.5 M 325' 300 mm 12" 45 M 150' 300 mm 12"
150 M 500' 450 mm 18"

195 M 650' 600 mm 24"

Arrows The proper use of arrows on directional signs are important to ensure the reader quickly
understands the correct directional information. Grouping all the information together
that is in one direction and using one arrow is preferred. Using an arrow for each mes-
sage makes the sign difficult to read.

Figure 2 Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance

Main Entrance Main Entrance
Sign Face Layout Illustration Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305 Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305

Freight Entrance Freight Entrance

Buildings 314, 317 & 319 Buildings 314, 317 & 319

Preferred Not Recommended

Arrows should be placed in such a manner that they precede the message. This allows
the reader to understand direction first and information second. It also allows the arrows
to be visually separated from text.

Arrows should always be larger in size than the text they are affiliated with. For example,
a 4-1/2” arrow is what would be used with a 3” capital letter size text.

12/2012 Page 4-2-4

 Planning Exterior Signs

Figure 3
Arrow Direction Illustration

Straight Ahead Straight Ahead

To the Left To the Right

To the Left To the Right

Ahead Ahead
on Left on Right

Sign Placement Exterior signs function to communicate to both drivers and pedestrians and their place-
ment needs to be planned relative to the intended viewer. Sign visibility to the user is a
principal objective and that is the basis of correct sign placement.

Signs that are to be read from a car moving down a road need to be large and clearly vis-
ible. Poorly placed signs, that are intended to communicate to drivers, can actually create
traffic hazards. Also, remember that if a sign has too much information, the placement
will have to allow for a driver to stop or slow to a very low speed.

A sign that is directing pedestrians can be placed close to a walkway. Major pathway
intersections are important locations to assist people who are new to a site and are try-
ing to find their way around.

12/2012 Page 4-2-5

 Planning Exterior Signs

Correct placement of signs will usually mean fewer signs are required. Too many signs
can create a cluttered appearance and increase the difficulty for a viewer to find the par-
ticular information they are seeking. Colors and material finish of buildings need to be
taken into consideration as this impacts the visibility of signs.

Care also needs to be taken to place signs in a manner that allow clear viewing.
Placement of signs so trees and shrubs do not obscure them is critical. It is also critical
that signs are not placed in locations that obscure a driver’s visibility of vehicular traffic
and pedestrians.

Coordination needs to take place with things like irrigation systems, electrical service,
and other underground utilities. Proper placement is an important part of a well-
planned program.

Placement Guidelines The following are general guidelines for placing signs to viewed from an approaching
vehicle as well as for mounting signs for pedestrian viewing. Guidelines for specific sign
types are shown in their respective sections.

Straight Ahead: Sign placement must be within the approaching driver’s immedi-
ate cone-of-vision. Drivers cannot be expected to turn their heads to read a sign.
Signs mounted more than 12 M (40 feet) off the roadway because of special cir-
cumstances may require use of a larger panel to increase readability because the
sign is outside the normal cone-of-vision.

Perpendicular: The sign face should be perpendicular to the approaching viewer.

Never place a sign parallel to passing traffic.

Right Side: Place signs on the right side of the roadway whenever possible.
Drivers are not conditioned to look to the left side of the road for driving information.
An exception to this rule is the use of a double-face Standard Identification sign
mounted perpendicular to a facility entrance roadway sign should be sized and
placed with clear target value and readability from both directions.

Distance Legibility: All signs must be clearly legible from the distance at which
they are to be read. The viewing distance guide delineates the appropriate text size.

Advance Warning: Signs on roadways that communicate a desired reaction, must

be placed in advance of the intersection to afford a safe distance for reaction to and
execution of the maneuver.

Viewing Angle: Mount signs at eye level. The height of the average viewer’s eye-
level is 1650 mm (5’-6”) standing, and 1350 mm (4’-6”) driving a car. Signs placed
for viewing from long distances will be mounted higher than those in the immediate
foreground. Mounting height is measured from the ground level to the bottom edge
of the sign panel.

For signs mounted along roadways, the grade of the road is considered ground level.
When ground mounted signs on two posts are placed on sloping or inclined grades,
adjustments must be made to the post lengths and mounting heights. Extreme differ-
ences between post lengths should be minimized whenever possible.

Spacing: Signs must be located with respect to other signs. Mounting sites should
be carefully selected so that groups of signs are placed without creating a cluttered
appearance. Also, drivers must be given time to read and react to one sign before
another is presented.

12/2012 Page 4-2-6

 Planning Exterior Signs

Figure 4 Site Preparation: Placement must be carefully considered to ensure that the sign
Placement / Roadway Illustration fits the location without major regrading. It may be necessary to clear some shrubs
or bushes or relocate an obstruction.

Field Test: An effective way to determine a sign placement location is to place

the actual sign in the proposed location for verification. This is relatively simple for
pedestrian signs; they are viewed from relatively short distances. For signs viewed
from a moving vehicle, testing should include driving the approach from which it is
viewed to verify the appropriateness of the proposed location. A cardboard or brown
paper banner (which is the same size as the proposed sign) can be used instead of
the sign to check placement against the criteria listed above.

Primary cone of vision

Secondary cone of vision

This preferred placement

provides advance warning.

If directional message
faces driver, do not place
Do not place sign sign on the opposite side
parallel to roadway. of the road.

This placement is okay. This placement is preferred.

12/2012 Page 4-2-7

 Planning Exterior Signs

Figure 5
Building / Roadway Illustration

Parking Lot Main Entrance

VA Medical
Center

Main Entrance

Parking

Parking

Parking

Main Entrance

Existing Sign Before implementing a new sign program, perform a through evaluation of the demoli-
Program tion requirements of the current sign program and the effects and impact on the facili-
ties landscaping and irrigation system.

Old sign footings do not typically have to be totally removed. They should however be
demolished to at least 1 foot below grade.

Check to see what is required to patch, seal and repair building penetrations and sur-
faces exposed as a result of removal of signs or letters. Repairs should be planned to
match adjoining surface.

Make sure the sign demolition scope of work requires the contractor to close off any live
electrical connections. Remove existing conductors and conduit to the nearest junction
box and make it safe.

Be sure to clearly identify signs that are supposed to remain. It is especially important to
identify markers and signs that relate to special objects or displays that may be on the
medical center campus or on a building.

DO NOT remove any traffic signs without having the replacement signs available and
installed at the same time the old signs are removed.

12/2012 Page 4-2-8

 Helpful Hints Exterior Signs

The following are some general “Do’s and Don’ts” guidelines that should be referred to
when developing a exterior sign program. This is not intended to be a training section of
the guide, but to provide key information or instructions that will hopefully reduce com-
mon errors that are made when planning and programming an exterior sign program.

General Guidelines • Never use text smaller than 3” capital letter height when a sign is intended to be
read from a moving car.
• Text intended to be read by pedestrians should be a minimum of 1-1/2” capital letter
height.
• Signs do require maintenance. Cleaning and waxing will extend the life of a sign
program.
• Use text (words) which are familiar, easy to understand, and comfortable to the
viewer.
• Always use the same words throughout the sign program.
• All sign messages need to be a minimum of 24” above grade.
• When selecting a background color for the signs, seek a complementary color to the
buildings on campus.
• If overhead signs are used, make sure they have adequate clearance for trucks.
Adequate clearance can be interpreted to be 15’-0”.

Type of Sign to Use • Always consider the landscaping surrounding a sign when determining a sign’s size.
It is important that shrubs and other plants do not hide or obscure the sign.
• Stacking bar signs should always have a blank bar between two different sets of
directional information.
• Lettering and sign panel size should be appropriate for the distance and speed at
which a sign is viewed.

Size of Sign to Use • Signs intended to be seen from a moving vehicle need to be larger and require
larger text than a sign intended for pedestrians.
• Consideration should be given to the use of a facility (i.e., whether a department or
building offers night time services) when determining if a sign should be illuminated
or not.

Message Content • Keep sign messages brief.

• Unnecessary information on signs will confuse the viewer.
• Typically, all signs, with the exception of directional signs, should convey no more
than one concept or thought.
• Use text (words) that can be quickly read by the viewer. Use the same words
throughout the sign program.
• On directional and informational signs only provide information necessary to make
a decision at that particular location.
• When possible, messages should present positive information.

12/2012 Page 4-3-1

 Helpful Hints Exterior Signs

• On directional signs, do not anticipate decisions that can be made later.

Unnecessary or premature information will confuse the reader.
• Messages placed on signs should be concise, preferably with no more than
seven to ten words.
• For signs to be read from a moving vehicle, take into account the speed of
the vehicle. At a slow speed the driver may be able to read 7 or 8 words. At a
faster speed they will only be able to read 4 or 5.

Message Layout • Use upper and lower case text whenever possible. Upper and lower case text
is easier to read and understood faster than text in all capital letters.
• Line-spacing between two different messages should be greater than line-
spacing between lines of the same multiple-line message group.
• Text should not be run right up to the edge of the sign.
• If a line text needs to be reduced in order to fit on a sign, use only commonly
recognized abbreviations, reduce the number of words or reduce the size of
the type for the entire message. DO NOT condense the type face.
• The most important message should appear as the first line text and the most
important directional information should be at the top of the sign.

Placement of Signs • Signs should always be perpendicular to the intended viewer.

• Position signs with a clear line of sight from the viewing point to the sign face.
• Typically a driver gathers visual information by viewing to the right first.
• Keep directional signs on the same side of the street that the driver is driving.
• Always evaluate a sign’s location at night as well as in the daylight. Lighting
conditions and visibility may change at night making a particular location
unsuitable.
• All signs should be placed in a manner that will be clearly visible to a driver at
all times of the year. For example, make sure that snow or removal piles do not
bury signs.
• Signs that receive spray from irrigation sprinklers will show oxidation from the
minerals in the water resulting in a poor appearance. The life of the sign will
also be considerably shortened.
• Always consider the landscaping surrounding a sign when determining a sign’s
location. It is important that trees, shrubs and other plants do not obscure the
sign.
• Do not place signs in locations where people may walk into them. Don’t place
signs any closer than 12” to a walkway.
• Do not place signs too close to curbs. Car overhangs and door swings should
be taken into account.

12/2012 Page 4-3-2

 Names Exterior Signs

Description & Use Message Layout A

The following layouts depict the
various ways that facility names
are to be shown on the main
identification sign. In all cases,
note that there is a hierarchy in the
presentation. The “VA Logo” and
“Department of Veteran Affairs” is Baltimore VA Medical Center
always on the top of the sign and VA Maryland Health Care System
in larger letters than the rest of the
name. VISN identification is always VA Capitol Health Care Network
at the bottom of the sign and has
the smallest letters.

Message Layout A depicts

Consolidated Medical Center
locations. Message Layout B
Message Layout B depicts
congressionally mandated named
facilities.

Message Layout C depicts the typical

facility naming practice. William S. Middleton Memorial
Veterans Hospital
Message Layout D depicts the
combined VHA and VBA locations. Madison
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Message Layout C

Tomah VA Medical Center

VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Message Layout D

VA Medical Center
Regional Office
White River Junction
VA New England Health Care Network

12/2012 Page 4-4-1

 Names Exterior Signs

Message Layout E depicts the Message Layout E

independent VBA Regional Office
locations.

Message Layout F depicts the large

Outpatient Clinic locations.

Message Layout G depicts the VA Regional Office

Community Based Outpatient Clinic Phoenix
locations.

Message Layout F

VA Outpatient Clinic
Appleton

VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Message Layout G

Berverly Clinic
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

New Logo/Signature
The VA has developed a new logo/
signature for use in signage. It
replaces the old logo and name
presentation.

The old logo may remain in use on U.S. Department

existing signs, but all new signs shall
incorporate the new logo/signature. of Veterans Affairs
Adjacent are its application in a Horizontal Sign Format
horizontal format and a vertical
format.

The master art is available as an

electronic file, for downloading, in
the Technical Information Library.
www.cfm.va.gov/til/
U.S. Department
of Veterans Affairs
The master art and typography shall
not be altered. The font, the size
relationship between the elements,
and the letter spacing for the VA and Vertical Sign Format
name, shall remain as presented in
the master art .

12/2012 Page 4-4-2

 Overview Exterior Signs

This section of the VA Signage Guide covers the types of exterior signs that would be
necessary to sign a medical center campus or single building.

Included are illuminated and non-illuminated signs for identification and direction as
well as signs for traffic control and parking.

The following Overview illustrates the various types of signs in this section. The indi-
vidual pages on each Sign Type provide more specific information and detailed layouts.

Illuminated Exterior Each sign in the program guide has been given a specific sign type number designation.
Sign Designations This designation provides a common description that can be referenced when program-
ming a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign type designations
are derived.

EI - 03 .01 A
E Designates an exterior sign.
I Identifies that the sign is internally illuminated.
03 Two digit numbers identify a particular sign type family.
.01 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific sign
within the sign family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version, or

layout for graphics.

Non-Illuminated Each sign in the program has been given a specific sign type number designation. This
Exterior Sign designation provides a common description that can be referenced when programming
Designations a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign type designations are
derived.

EN - 12 .01 A
E Designates an exterior sign.
N Identifies that the sign is non-illuminated.
12 Two digit numbers identify a particular sign type family.
.01 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific sign
within the sign family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version, or

layout for graphics.

12/2012 Page 4-5-1

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EI-01

Illuminated Monument Sign for
Medical Center Identification

EI-01.01 Baltimore
Large horizontal monument sign Medical Center
VA Maryland
EI-01.02 Health Care System

Standard horizontal monument sign VA Capitol

Health Care System

EI-01.03 Baltimore VA Medical Center

Small horizontal monument sign VA Maryland Health Care System

VA Capitol Health Care Network

EI-01.04
Standard vertical monument sign

EI-01.05
Small vertical monument sign
EI-01.01 EI-01.04

Sign Type EI-02 Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance

Main Entrance Main Entrance
Illuminated Directional Monument Building 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, Building 137, 332,
Sign with Stacking Text Modules 305, 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, 323, 325, 303, 305,
T101 & T102 205, 647, 348, 349,

EI-02.01 350, T101 & T102

Freight Entrance
Large directional monument sign Building 314, 317 & 319 Freight Entrance
with stacking strips - 10 strips Building 314,
317 & 319

EI-02.02
Small directional monument sign
with stacking strips - 10 strips
EI-02.01
EI-02.02

Sign Type EI-03 Main Entrance

Visitor Information
Illuminated Post and Panel Sign for Building 101

Identification and Information Tomah VA Medical Center Visitor Parking

Buildings 222, 333, 323
233 & T444

EI-03.01 VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Post and panel sign for medical

center identification

EI-03.02
Standard auto oriented post and
EI-03.01 EI-03.02
panel sign

Sign Type EI-04 Outpatient Entrance

Main Entrance
Illuminated Post and Stacking Bar Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Sign for Directional Information 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102 Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
Freight Entrance 350, T101 & T102
EI-04.01 Buildings 314, 317 & 319

Large/long auto oriented stacking Freight Entrance

bar directional sign - 6 to 8 bars

EI-04.02
Standard auto oriented stacking bar EI-04.01 EI-04.02
directional sign - 5 to 8 bars

12/2012 Page 4-5-2

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EI-06

Illuminated Wall Mounted Signs

EI-06.01
Overhead wall mounted sign

EI-06.02 Outpatient
Center
Large size wall mounted sign

EI-06.01 EI-06.02

Sign Type EI-08 Ambulance

Ambulance Entrance Signs Entrance
EI-08.01
Overhead wall mounted sign
Ambulance
Entrance
EI-08.02
Wall mounted sign Ambulance
Entrance

EI-08.03
Post and panel sign

EI-08.01 EI-08.02 EI-08.03

Sign Type EI-09 Outpatient Entrance

Dimensional Letters and Logo

EI-09.06 Medical Center

Logo and dimensional letter

EI-09.07
Logo and dimensional letter Medical
EI-09.08
Logo and dimensional letter
EI-09.06
EI-09.09
Logo and dimensional letter

12/2012 Page 4-5-3

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EI-14

4 Sided Monument Sign for
Medical Center Identification

Baltimore
Medical Center
VA Maryland
Health Care System

VA Capitol
Health Care System

EI-14

Sign Type EI-15

4 Sided Monument Sign with
Directional Information for Medical
Center Identification
Baltimore
EI-15.01 Medical Center
William S. Middleton
Large 4-sided monument sign with VA Maryland Memorial
Health Care System Veterans Hospital
stacking directional panels
Madison
VA Capitol
Health Care System
EI-15.02 VA Great Lakes
Standard 4-sided monument sign Health Care System

with stacking directional panels

EI-15.03
Small 4-sided monument sign with Main Entrance
stacking directional panels Clinics
Outpatient Entrance Main Entrance
Freight Receiving Entrance Clinics
Outpatient Entrance

2500 Visitor Parking

Taylor Entrance
EI-15.01 Overlook Terrace EI-15.02

Sign Type EI-16

Monument Sign for Medical Center
Identification with Electronic
Message Center Baltimore
Medical Center

EI-16.01 VA Maryland
Health Care System
Large monument sign with
Electronic Message Center
VA Capitol
Health Care System

EI-16.02
Standard monument sign with Blood Baltimore VA Medical Center

Electronic Message Center Pressure

VA Maryland Health Care System

Screening VA Capitol Health Care Network

7/11
FLU SHOTS 10/17 - 20
2500 CLINIC A
Overlook Terrace

EI-16.01 EI-16.02

12/2012 Page 4-5-4

Blood FLU SHOTS 10/17 - 20

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EN-02

Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance
Directional Monument Sign with Main Entrance Main Entrance
Stacking Text Modules Building 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, Building 137, 332,
305, 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, 323, 325, 303, 305,
EN-02.01 T101 & T102 205, 647, 348, 349,
Large directional monument sign 350, T101 & T102
with stacking strips - 10 strips Freight Entrance
Building 314, 317 & 319 Freight Entrance
EN-02.02 Building 314,
317 & 319
Small directional monument sign
with stacking strips - 10 strips

Building
Admissions
Building
230
EN-02.01
230 EN-02.02
Outpatient
Rehabilitation
Dental Clinic
Eye Clinic

Sign Type EN-03 Main Entrance

Visitor Information
Post and Panel Sign for Main Entrance
Building 101

Identification and Information Building 101 Visitor Parking

Visitor Parking Buildings 222, 333, 323
233 & T444
EN-03.02 Buildings 222,
233 & T444
Standard auto oriented post and
panel sign

EN-03.03
Small auto oriented post and panel
sign
EN-03.02 EN-03.03
EN-03.04
Pedestrian oriented post and panel
sign

EN-03.05
Large auto oriented building
number / identification post and Building
Admissions
panel sign Building
230 230 Outpatient
Rehabilitation
Dental Clinic
Eye Clinic
EN-03.06
Pedestrian oriented building
number / identification post and
panel sign

EN-03.04 EN-03.05 EN-03.06

Main Entrance
Visitor Information
Building 101
Main Entrance
Building 101 Visitor Parking
Visitor Parking Buildings 222, 333, 323
Buildings 222, 233 & T444
12/2012 233 & T444 Page 4-5-5
 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EN-04 Outpatient Entrance

Main Entrance Outpatient Entrance
Post and Stacking Bar Sign for Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305, Main Entrance
Directional Information 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102 Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
EN-04.01 Freight Entrance 350, T101 & T102
Buildings 314, 317 & 319
Large/long auto oriented stacking
Freight Entrance
bar directional sign - 6 to 8 bars

EN-04.02
Standard auto oriented stacking bar
directional sign - 5 to 8 bars
EN-04.01 EN-04.02
EN-04.03
Small auto oriented stacking bar
Outpatient Entrance
directional sign - 4 to 6 bars Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Main Entrance
Buildings 137, 332,
EN-04.04 323, 325, 303, 305, Buildings 137 & 332

Pedestrian oriented stacking 205, 647, 348 & 349

directional bar sign - 2 to 4 bars

EN-04.03 EN-04.04

Sign Type EN-05

Freight Freight Freight
Single Post Identification, Loading
Loading Loading
Zone
Zone
Informational and Directional Sign Zone

EN-05.01
Large single post identification,
informational and directional sign

EN-05.02
Standard single post identification,
informational and directional sign

EN-05.03 EN-05.01 EN-05.02 EN-05.03

Small single post identification,
informational and directional sign

12/2012 Page 4-5-6

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EN-06

Spinal Rehabilitation
Wall Mounted Signs Clinic Entrance

EN-06.01
Overhead wall mounted sign
Building Building

EN-06.02
230
Admissions
230
Large size wall mounted sign Outpatient
Rehabilitation Admissions
Outpatient
Rehabilitation

EN-06.03
Dental Clinic

Large size wall mounted sign with

stacking strips

EN-06.04
Medium size wall mounted sign EN-06.01 EN-06.02 EN-06.03

EN-06.05
Medium size wall mounted sign
Building
with stacking strips Building Building
230 230 230
EN-06.06 Admissions
Outpatient

Regular size wall mounted sign Rehabilitation

Dental Clinic

EN-06.07
Small size wall mounted sign

EN-06.08
Minor informational wall mounted EN-06.04 EN-06.05 EN-06.06
sign

EN-06.09
Minor informational wall mounted Freight &
Delivery
Freight &
Delivery Visitor
sign
Entrance
Entrance Parking

EN-06.07 EN-06.08 EN-06.09

12/2012 Page 4-5-7

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EN-08

Ambulance Entrance Signs
Ambulance
Entrance
EN-08.01
Overhead wall mounted sign

EN-08.02 Ambulance
Entrance
Wall mounted sign
Ambulance
EN-08.03 Entrance
Post and panel sign

EN-08.01 EN-08.02 EN-08.03

Sign Type EN-09

Dimensional Letters and Logo

EN-09.01
Dimensional letter Outpatient Entrance

EN-09.02
Dimensional letter Medical Center

EN-09.03
Dimensional letter Medical Center
EN-09.04
Logo and dimensional letter

EN-09.05 EN-09
Logo and dimensional letter

Sign Type EN-10

Traffic Regulatory Signs

EN-10.01
Stop (R1-1)

EN-10.02
Do Not Enter (R5-1)

EN-10.03
Yield (R1-2)

EN-10.04
Speed Limit (R2-8)

EN-10.05
Keep Right (R4-7A)

EN-10.06 EN-10.01
One Way (R6-2L, R6-2R)

EN-10.07
No Right/Left Turn (R3-1R, R3-2L)

EN-10.08
No U Turn (R3-4)

EN-10.09
Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2A)

12/2012 Page 4-5-8

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EN-11

Street Name Street Name
Street Signs

EN-11.01
Tall double blade

Main Street
EN-11.02
Tall single blade

EN-11.03
Pylon

EN-11.01 EN-11.02 EN-11.03

Sign Type EN-14

Building Entrance Door
Identification

12/2012 Page 4-5-9

This page is intentionally left blank
 Exterior Signs

Illuminated Exterior
Signs

12/2012 Page 4-5-11

This page is intentionally left blank
 EI-01.01 Exterior Signs
Site Monument
Size
Sign Face:
1524 mm H x 3658 mm W x
305mm D
(5' 0" H x 12' 0" W x 1’ 0” D) Baltimore VA Medical Center
VA Maryland Health Care System
Description & Use
Internally illuminated large VA Capitol Health Care Network

horizontal free standing monument

sign for identifying a medical
center or the medical center’s main
entrance drive.

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center. Message Layout A Message Layout B

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Baltimore VA Medical Center William S. Middleton Memorial
VA Maryland Health Care System Veterans Hospital
Specific message configuration will Madison
vary depending on the particular VA Capitol Health Care Network VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

name of a facility. Variations to the

presentation of a facility’s name
will need special approval from Message Layout C Message Layout D
Washington DC.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed Tomah VA Medical Center VA Medical Center
with white translucent acrylic. Regional Office
White River Junction
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network VA New England Health Care Network
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart Message Layout E Message Layout F
Accent: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
VA Regional Office VA Outpatient Clinic
clear, unobstructed view of the
Phoenix Appleton
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low and position sprinklers so VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

they project away from the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-1

 EI-01.01 Exterior Signs
Site Monument
3657.6 mm (12'-0")

203.2 mm 2'-9" 303.4 mm

(8") (1'-0")

7"

533.4mm (1'-9")

214.7 mm (8 1/2")
1524.0 mm
(5'-0") 120.8 mm (4 3/4")
120.8 mm (4 3/4")
88.9 mm (3 1/2")
214.7 mm (8 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
25.4 mm (1")
76.2 mm (3")
609.6 mm 25.4 mm (1")
(2'-0")

Message Layout A & F

203.2 mm 2'-9"
(8")

7"

533.4mm (1'-9")

1524.0 mm 120.9 mm (4 3/4")

(5'-0") 74.8 mm (3")
120.9 mm (4 3/4")
95.3 mm (3 3/4")
88.9 mm (3 1/2")
127.0 mm (5")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

Message Layout B & D

203.2 mm 2'-9"
(8")

7"

533.4mm (1'-9")

1524.0 mm 214.7 mm (8 1/2")

(5'-0") 120.8 mm (4 3/4")

63.5 mm (2 1/2")
127.0 mm (5")

Message Layout C

203.2 mm 2'-9"
(8")

7"
533.4mm (1'-9")

214.7 mm (8 1/2")
1524.0 mm
(5'-0") 120.9 mm (4 3/4")
120.9 mm (4 3/4")
74.8 mm (3")

Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-6-2

 EI-01.02 Exterior Signs
Site Monument
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 3048 mm W x
305mm D
(4' 0" H x 10' 0" W x 1’ 0” D)

Description & Use Baltimore VA Medical Center

Internally illuminated horizontal
VA Maryland Health Care System
free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center or the VA Capitol Health Care Network

medical center’s main entrance

drive.

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions) Message Layout A Message Layout B

Specific message configuration will

vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the Baltimore VA Medical Center William S. Middleton Memorial
presentation of a facility’s name VA Maryland Health Care System Veterans Hospital
Madison
will need special approval from VA Capitol Health Care Network VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Washington DC.

Graphic Process Message Layout C Message Layout D

Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.
Tomah VA Medical Center VA Medical Center
Colors Regional Office
Text: White White River Junction

Background: Refer to color chart. VA Great Lakes Health Care Network VA New England Health Care Network

Accent: Refer to color chart.

Message Layout E Message Layout F
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the VA Regional Office VA Outpatient Clinic
sign low and position sprinklers so Phoenix Appleton

they project away from the sign. VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

12/2012 Page 4-6-3

 EI-01.02 Exterior Signs
Site Monument

3048 mm (10'-0")

152.4 mm 2'-3" 303.4 mm

(6") (1'-0")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")
95.2 mm (3 3/4")
76.2 mm (3 ")
165.1 mm (6 1/2")
57.1 mm (2 1/4")
25.4 mm (1")
76.2 mm (3")
609.6 mm 25.4 mm (1")
(2'-0")

Message Layout A & F

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

127 mm (5")
1219.2.0 mm
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
(4'-0") 57.1 mm (2 1/4")
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")

57.1 mm (2 1/4")

Message Layout B & D

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")

63.5 mm (2 1/2")
127.0 mm (5")

Message Layout C

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")
95.2 mm (3 3/4")
76.2 mm (3 ")

Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-6-4

 EI-01.03 Exterior Signs
Site Monument
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 2438 mm W x 305
mm D
(4' 0" H x 8' 0" W x 1’ 0” D)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated small Baltimore VA Medical Center
VA Maryland Health Care System
horizontal free standing monument
sign for identifying a medical center VA Capitol Health Care Network
where there is a space limitation.
This sign can also be used to
identify secondary drive entrances
to the medical center.

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.

Message Configuration Message Layout A Message Layout B

(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Specific message configuration will

Baltimore VA Medical Center William S. Middleton Memorial
vary depending on the particular VA Maryland Health Care System Veterans Hospital
name of a facility. Variations to the Madison
presentation of a facility’s name VA Capitol Health Care Network VA Great lakes Health Care Network

will need special approval from

Washington DC.
Message Layout C Message Layout D
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors Tomah VA Medical Center VA Medical Center

Text: White Regional Office
White River Junction
Background: Refer to color chart
Accent: Refer to color chart VA Great Lakes Health Care Network VA New England Health Care Network

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a Message Layout E Message Layout F
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low and position sprinklers so
they project away from the sign.
VA Regional Office VA Outpatient Clinic
Phoenix Appleton
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer, VA Great Lakes Health Care Network
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-5

 EI-01.03 Exterior Signs
Site Monument

2438.4 mm (8'-0")

152.4 mm 2'-3" 303.4 mm

(6") (1'-0")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")
95.2 mm (3 3/4")
76.2 mm (3 ")
165.1 mm (6 1/2")
57.1 mm (2 1/4")
25.4 mm (1")
76.2 mm (3")
609.6 mm 25.4 mm (1")
(2'-0")

Message Layout A & F

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

127 mm (5")
1219.2.0 mm
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
(4'-0") 57.1 mm (2 1/4")
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")

57.1 mm (2 1/4")

Message Layout B & D

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")

63.5 mm (2 1/2")
127.0 mm (5")

Message Layout C

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")
95.2 mm (3 3/4")
76.2 mm (3 ")

Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-6-6

 EI-01.04 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument
Size
Sign Face:
3658 mm H x 1524 mm W x 305
mm D
(12' 0" H x 5' 0" W x 1’ 0”)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated vertical
free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center or the Baltimore
medical center’s main entrance Medical Center
drive.
VA Maryland
Health Care System
The base can be constructed of
concrete or other masonry material in VA Capitol
Health Care System
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Specific message configuration will

vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name
will need special approval from
Washington DC.

Graphic Process Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Baltimore William S. Middleton Tomah
Background: Refer to color chart Medical Center Memorial VA Medical Center
Accent: Refer to color chart VA Maryland
Veterans Hospital
Health Care System Madison

Recommendations VA Capitol
Health Care System
VA Great Lakes Great Lakes
Health Care System Health Care System
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low and position sprinklers so
they project away from the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Message Layout D Message Layout E Message Layout F
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

VA Medical Center VA VA
Regional Office Regional Office Oupatient Clinic

White River Junction Phoenix Appleton

VA New England Great Lakes

Health Care System Health Care System

12/2012 Page 4-6-7

 EI-01.04 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument
1522.5 mm
(5'-0") 303.4 mm
228.6 mm (9") (1'-0")

266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
190.5 mm (7 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
3657.6 mm 76.2 mm (3")
(12'-0") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

1524.0 mm
(5'-0")

25.4 mm (1")
76.2 mm (3")
304.8 mm (1'-0")
25.4 mm (1")

Message Layout A
Message Layout A
228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")

50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
127.0 mm (5")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")

1524.0 mm 1524.0 mm
(5'-0") (5'-0")

Message
Message Layout
Layout B B Message
Message Layout
Layout C C

228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")

50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

76.2 mm (3") 76.2 mm (3")

63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

1524.0 mm
(5'-0")

Message
Message Layout
Layout D &D
F MessageLayout
Message Layout
E E
&F

12/2012 Page 4-6-8

 EI-01.05 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument
Size
Sign Face:
2440 mm H x 1220 mm W
x 305 mm D
(8' 0" H x 4' 0" W x 1'-0" D)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated small free Baltimore
standing vertical monument sign for Medical Center
identifying a medical center where
there is a space limitation. This VA Maryland
Health Care System
sign can also be used to identify
secondary drive entrances to the VA Capitol
Health Care System
medical center.

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Specific message configuration will Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C
vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name
will need special approval from
Washington DC.
Baltimore William S. Middleton Tomah
Graphic Process Medical Center Memorial VA Medical Center
Illuminated, routed out copy backed Veterans Hospital
with white translucent acrylic. VA Maryland
Health Care System Madison

Colors VA Capitol
Health Care System
VA Great Lakes
Health Care System
VA Great Lakes
Health Care System
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Accent: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low and position sprinklers so
they project away from the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be Message Layout D Message Layout E Message Layout F
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

VA Medical Center VA VA
Regional Office Regional Office Oupatient Clinic

White River Junction Phoenix Appleton

VA New England VA Great Lakes

Health Care System Health Care System

12/2012 Page 4-6-9

 EI-01.05 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument

1218.0 mm
(4'-0") 303.4 mm
177.8 mm (7") (1'-0")

215.9 mm (8 1/2")

406.4 mm (1'-4")

203.2 mm (8")
2438.4 mm
82.6 mm (3 1/4")
(8'-0")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
82.6 mm (3 1/4")
190.5 mm (7 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
31.8 mm (1 1/4")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
50.8 mm (2")
31.8 mm (1 1/4")
50.8 mm (2")

736.6 mm (2'-4")
25.4 mm (1")
76.2 mm (3")
304.8 mm (1'-0")
25.4 mm (1")

Message Layout A

177.8 mm (7") 177.8 mm (7")

215.9 mm (8 1/2") 215.9 mm (8 1/2")

406.4 mm (1'-4") 406.4 mm (1'-4")

203.2 mm (8") 203.2 mm (8")

82.6 mm (3 1/4") 82.6 mm (3 1/4")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2") 319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
82.6 mm (3 1/4") 82.6 mm (3 1/4")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
82.6 mm (3 1/4")
152.4 mm (6")
31.8 mm (1 1/4")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
31.8 mm (1 1/4") 31.8 mm (1 1/4")
50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")

736.6 mm (2'-4")
736.6 mm (2'-4")

Message Layout B Message Layout C

177.8 mm (7") 177.8 mm (7")

215.9 mm (8 1/2") 215.9 mm (8 1/2")

406.4 mm (1'-4") 406.4 mm (1'-4")

203.2 mm (8") 203.2 mm (8")

82.6 mm (3 1/4") 82.6 mm (3 1/4")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2") 319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
82.6 mm (3 1/4") 82.6 mm (3 1/4")
190.5 mm (7 1/2") 190.5 mm (7 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")

50.8 mm (2")
31.8 mm (1 1/4")
50.8 mm (2")

736.6 mm (2'-4")

Message Layout D & F Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-6-10

 EI-02.01 Exterior Signs
Monument Primary Directional
Size
Sign Face
1829 mm H x 1829 mm W x 305
Outpatient Entrance
mm D
(6' 0" H x 6' 0" W x 1’ 0” D) Main Entrance
Description & Use Building 137, 332, 323, 325, 303,
Internally Illuminated Large 305, 205, 647, 348, 349, 350,
directional monument sign with 10
stacking strips. Directional sign with T101 & T102
messages directed specifically to
drivers.
Freight Entrance
Internally illuminated sign should be Building 314, 317 & 319
used only in locations where there
is a heavy night time driver need for
directional information. Monument
type directional signs should only be
used on the main entrance drive and
in front of the medical center.
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Layout A is for the first line of text
with an arrow of direction.
Layout B is for message with no arrow
which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.
Layout C is for indented text. This is Message Layout A
for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.
Graphic Process
Outpatient Entrance
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.
Colors Message Layout B
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Recommendations
Building 440
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Message Layout C
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.
Administration
Always leave a blank copy strip
between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the ability
of the driver to quickly read grouped
directional information.
Always leave a blank strip at the top
of the sign. This strip is smaller than
the text strips.
Configure a sign with at least one
blank copy strip at the bottom of the
sign. This will aid in the ability of the
driver to read the sign.
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-11

 EI-02.01 Exterior Signs
Monument Primary Directional

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-6-12

 EI-02.02 Exterior Signs
Monument Secondary Directional
Size
Sign Face:
1829 mm H x 1219 mm W x 305
mm D
(6' 0" H x 4' 0" W x 1’ 0” D)
Outpatient Entrance
Description & Use
Internally Illuminated small Main Entrance
directional monument sign with 10 Building 137, 332,
stacking strips. Directional sign with
messages directed specifically to 323, 325, 303, 305,
drivers. 205, 647, 348, 349,
Internally illuminated sign should be 350, T101 & T102
used only in locations where there
is a heavy night time driver need for
directional information. Monument Freight Entrance
type directional signs should only be Building 314,
used on the main entrance drive and
in front of the medical center. 317 & 319
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Layout A is for the first line of text
with an arrow of direction.
Layout B is for message with no arrow
which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.
Layout C is for indented text. This is
for situations where the message has Message Layout A
to run over onto a second copy bar.
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed Outpatient Entrance
with white translucent acrylic.
Colors
Text: White Message Layout B
Background: Refer to color chart

Building 440
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of Message Layout C
the sign.
Always leave a blank copy strip
between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the
Administration
ability of the driver to read grouped
directional information more quickly.
Always leave a blank strip at the top
of the sign. This strip is smaller than
the text strips.
Configure a sign with at least one
blank copy strip at the bottom of the
sign. This will aid in the ability of the
driver to read the sign.
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-13

 EI-02.02 Exterior Signs
Monument Secondary Directional

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-6-14

 EI-03.01 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 2438 mm W
(4' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1981 mm (6' 6")

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated large post and
panel sign for identifying a medical
center where there is a space
limitation or there are other physical
restraints that prevent a monument
sign from being installed. This sign, Tomah VA Medical Center
in a non-illuminated version, can
also be used to identify secondary
drive entrances to the medical
center. VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

The specific message configuration

will vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name
will need special approval from
Washington DC.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic. Message Layout C Message Layout D

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Posts: Refer to color chart Tomah VA Medical Center VA Medical Center
Regional Office
White River Junction
Recommendations
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network VA New England Health Care Network
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Message Layout E Message Layout F
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use. VA Regional Office VA Outpatient Clinic
Phoenix Appleton

VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

12/2012 Page 4-6-15

 EI-03.01 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Building Identification
177.8 mm
(7")

76.2 mm (3")

685 mm (2'-3")
91.4 mm (3 1/2") 152.4 mm
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")

63.5 mm (2 1/2")
127.0 mm (5")

1979.6 mm
(6'-6")

Message Layout C

685 mm (2'-3")
152.4 mm
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

127 mm (5")
1219.2.0 mm
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
(4'-0") 57.1 mm (2 1/4")
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")

57.1 mm (2 1/4")

Message Layout D 685 mm (2'-3")

152.4 mm 685 mm (2'-3")

(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")
95.2 mm (3 3/4")
76.2 mm (3 ")

Message Layout E

685 mm (2'-3")

76.2 mm 381.0 mm (1'-3")

(3")
1218.1 mm 177.8 mm (7")
(4'-0") 91.4 mm (3 1/2")
91.4 mm (3 1/2")
61.7 mm (2 1/2")

50.8 mm (2")
127.0 mm (5")

Message Layout F

12/2012 Page 4-6-16

 EI-03.02 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Panel
Size
Sign Face:
1220 mm H x 1830 mm W
(4' 0" H x 6' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1981 mm (6' 6")

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated post and Main Entrance
panel directional sign with messages Visitor Information
directed specifically to drivers. Building 101
Message Configuration Visitor Parking
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Buildings 222, 333, 323
233 & T444
Message size and layout should
adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Layouts illustrated
show small, medium and large size
text. Smaller text than shown should
not be used as the messages will be
unreadable to drivers. Larger text
than shown will result in words that
may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart Message Layout A Message Layout B
Posts: Refer to color chart

Recommendations Main Entrance

Visitor Information
Main Entrance
This type of directional sign should
be used only when the particular Building 101 Visitor
message that it will contain is not
likely to change. Visitor Parking Information
Buildings 222, 333, 323
Directional information for services 233 & T444
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.

Always leave space between groups

of directional information. This will
aid in the ability of the driver to read Message Layout C
grouped directional information
more quickly.
Main Entrance
Generally, configure a sign with blank Visitor Information
space at the bottom of the sign. This
will aid in the ability of the driver to
Building 101
read the sign.
Visitor Parking
Position sign so drivers have a clear, Building 222, 333
unobstructed view of the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-17

 EI-03.02 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Panel

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-6-18

 EI-04.01 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Directional
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 2438 mm W
(4' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1981 mm (6' 6")
Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Description & Use
Internally Illuminated large/long
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
auto oriented stacking 8 directional 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102
sign strips with messages directed
specifically to drivers. Internally
illuminated sign to be used only Freight Entrance
in locations where there is a Buildings 314, 317 & 319
heavy night time driver need for
directional information.

Message Configuration
(Refer to construction drawing for
dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process Message Layout A

Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic. Outpatient Entrance
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart Message Layout B
Posts: Refer to color chart

Recommendations Building 440

Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Message Layout C
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of Administration Entrance
the sign.

Always leave a blank copy strip

between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with at

least one blank copy strip at the Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102
ability of the driver to read the sign. Freight Entrance
It will also allow for an additional line Buildings 314, 317 & 319

of text to be added to the sign in the

future.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer, EI-04.01A (8 Strip)
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-19

 EI-04.01 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Directional

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-6-20

 EI-04.02 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Directional
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 1829 mm W
(4' 0" H x 6' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0")
Outpatient Entrance
Description & Use
Main Entrance
Internally Illuminated standard
auto oriented stacking 8 strip bar Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
directional sign with messages
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
directed specifically to drivers.
Internally illuminated sign to be 350, T101 & T102
used only in locations where there
is a heavy night time driver need
for directional information. Freight Entrance

Message Configuration
(Refer to construction drawing for
dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed Message Layout A
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Outpatient Entrance
Background: Refer to color chart
Posts: Refer to color chart

Recommendations Message Layout B

Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Building 440
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign. Message Layout C
Always leave a blank copy strip
between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the
Administration Entrance
ability of the driver to read grouped
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with at

least one blank copy strip at the
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read the sign.
Outpatient Entrance
It will also allow for an additional Main Entrance
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
line of text to be added to the sign 303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
350, T101 & T102
in the future without having to order
Freight Entrance
another copy strip.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of EI-O4.02A (8 Strip)
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-21

 EI-04.02 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Directional

76 mm (3”)

178 mm (7”)

1829 mm (6’ - 0”)

1219 mm (4’ - 0”)

1829 mm (6’ - 0”)

114.3 mm (4’-1/2”)
76.2 mm (3”) 50.8 mm (2”)
EQ.

152.4 mm (6”) 76.2 mm (3”)

Message Layout A EQ.

241.3 mm (9’-1/2”)
EQ.

152.4 mm (6”) 76.2 mm (3”)

EQ.
Message Layout B

EQ.

76.2 mm (3”)

EQ.

12/2012 Page 4-6-22

 EI-06.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Overhead
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 2438 mm W
(2' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Description & Use

Internally illuminated overhead wall
mounted identification sign for a
stand alone building, that is not a

Nursing Home Care

medical center. This sign type can
also be used to identify an entrance
to a building.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message Layout A, B and C are for

identifying an entrance to a building.

Message Layout D is for identifying

a non-medical center, stand alone
building, typically off campus.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
For a stand alone non medical
center building, use this type of
sign when there is not place to
install a free standing sign.

Use this type of sign for “titling”

major building entrances that have
a very high volume of patient and
visitor traffic and need to be clearly Nursing Home Care Spinal Rehabilitation
distinguished.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch. D
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use. Spinal Rehabilitation
Clinic Entrance Beverly Clinic
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

12/2012 Page 4-6-23

 EI-06.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Overhead

179.5 mm
2438 mm (8’ - 0”) (7”)

610 mm (2’ - 0”)

177.8 mm
(7”)

Message Layout A

127 mm (5”)

Message Layout B

152.4 mm (6”)
127 mm (5”)
63.5 mm (2-1/2”)

Message Layout C

6.2 mm
304.8 mm (3")
(1'-0")
292 mm
(11 1/2")
73.02 mm (2 7/8")
114.3 mm (4 1/2") 88.9 mm (3 1/2")
44.5 mm (1 3/4")
146 mm (5 3/4") 88.9 mm (3 1/2")
53.9 mm (2 1/8")

82.5 mm (3 1/4")
60.3 mm (2 3/8")
44.5 mm (1 3/4")
Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-6-24

 EI-06.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated large wall
mounted sign type that can be
used to identify a building on a
medical center campus. It also can
be used for identification of a stand
alone building that is not a medical
center and there is no place to Outpatient
install a free standing sign. Center
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message Layout A is for identifying

a non-medical center stand alone
building, typically off campus.

Message Layout B and C are for

identifying building on a medical
center campus.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations Building
For a stand alone non medical
center building, use this type of
sign when there is not place to
install a free standing sign.
Outpatient
Center
230
Use this type of sign for “titling”
building entrances that have a
very high volume of patient and
visitor traffic and needs to be
clearly distinguished. It also can be
use on a building that is set back
a considerable distance from the
roadway.
Building
Position the sign adjacent the main
entrance, if possible. If the sign is not
readable in this position, then locate
230
on the corner of the building. Admissions
This large sign should not be used
Outpatient
on small buildings or buildings with Rehabilitation
minor uses.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-25

 EI-06.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification

178 mm (7”)

63.5 mm (2-1/2”)
82.3 mm (3 1/4")
114.3 mm (4 1/2")
41.27 mm (1 5/8")
1/8" 41.27 mm (1 5/8")
Rule
69.8 mm (2 3/4")

Message Layout A

63.5 mm (2-1/2”)
76.2 mm (3”)
76.2 mm (3”)
76.2 mm (3”)
254 mm (10”)

Message Layout B

1219 mm (4-0”)
63.5 mm (2-1/2”)
76.2 mm (3”)
76.2 mm (3”)
76.2 mm (3”)
203.2 mm (8”)
914 mm (3-0”) 76.2 mm (3”)
76.2 mm (3”)
63.5 mm (2-1/2”)

101.6 mm (4”)

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-6-26

 EI-08.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 2438 mm W
(2' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated overhead wall
mounted sign to be placed above
the ambulance entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Conform to the layout shown.
AMBULANCE
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
ENTRANCE
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Sign Background: Red

Recommendations
Place sign in a position of the
building where it clearly identifies
the “Ambulance Entrance” and
is visible to both vehicles and
pedestrians.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

Message Layout A

AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE

12/2012 Page 4-6-27

 EI-08.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification

178 mm (7”)

2438 mm (8’ - 0”)

457.2 mm (1’ - 6”)
152.4 mm (6”) 101.6 mm (4”)

EQ.
610 mm (2’ - 0”)
457.2 mm (1’ - 6”)

EQ.

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 4-6-28

 EI-08.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated wall mounted
sign to be placed on the wall
adjacent to the ambulance
entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Conform to the layouts shown.
AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Sign Background: Red .

Recommendations
Place sign in a position of the
building where it clearly identifies
the “Ambulance Entrance” and
is visible to both vehicles and
pedestrians.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

AMBULANCE AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE ENTRANCE

12/2012 Page 4-6-29

 EI-08.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-6-30

 EI-08.03 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1676 mm (5' 6")

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated post and
panel sign to be placed on
the roadway, adjacent to the
AMBULANCE
ambulance entrance to direct ENTRANCE
ambulance drivers to the correct
building entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Conform to the layouts shown.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Sign Background: Red
Post: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a Message Layout A Message Layout B
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer, AMBULANCE AMBULANCE
manual or photoelectric switch. ENTRANCE ENTRANCE
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-31

 EI-08.03 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Ambulance Entrance Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-6-32

 EI-09 Exterior Signs
Dimensional Building Identification Letters
Size
For the various sizes, refer to the
adjacent table.

Description & Use

Internal halo-illuminated, fabricated
metal dimensional letters and logo
Medical Center
for identifying a facility.

This sign should be placed on the

medical center building in a location
that is highly visible to the public.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
Medical
for dimensions)

Letters used with the logo should

Center
read “Medical Center”, “Outpatient
Center” or “Veterans Affairs”.

Graphic Process
Fabricated aluminum letters with
internal LED lighting. Letters are
pin mounted off wall to allow light
to wash wall and halo illuminate
W Z
letters.

Colors
White, black, silver or dark bronze.
Letter to have high contrast to the
building wall color or material. For
X

example use white on red brick, not

Y
black.

Illumination color is white light.

Recommendations
Large size letters and logo are
intended for use on the top of the
building as a skyline sign. Sign Type Y Z X W

These letters require clear access to 450 mm 150 mm 1050 mm 350 mm

the back (inside) of the wall on which EI09.6
(18") (6") (42") (19")
they will be installed.
600 mm 150 mm 1350 mm 475 mm
EI09.7
(24") (6") (56") (25")
On-off illumination of sign can be
750 mm 150 mm 1800 mm 575 mm
controlled through the use of a timer, EI09.8
(30") (6") (70") (31")
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of 900 mm 150 mm 2100 mm 700 mm
EI09.9
(36") (6") (84") (38")
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-33

 EI-09 Exterior Signs
Dimensional Building Identification Letters

Outpatient Entrance

Medical Center

Medical Center

12/2012 Page 4-6-34

 EI-14 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Site Monument Kiosk
Size
Sign Face:
4726 mm H x 1524 mm W x 1524
mm D (15' 6" H x 5' 0" W x 5’ 0” D)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated vertical
free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center or the Baltimore
medical center’s main entrance Medical Center
drive. VA Maryland
Health Care System
The base may be constructed of
concrete or other masonry material in
VA Capitol
Health Care System

a color and texture that will provide

a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Specific message configuration will

vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name will
need special approval from VACO,
Washington DC.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.
Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D
Colors
Text: White
Backgorund: Refer to color chart.
Accent: Refer to color chart.

Recommendations Baltimore William S. Middleton Tomah VA Medical Center

Medical Center Memorial VA Medical Center Regional Office
Position sign so drivers have a VA Maryland
Veterans Hospital

clear, unobstructed view of the Health Care System Madison White River Junction

sign. Keep landscaping around the VA Capitol

Health Care System
VA Great Lakes
Health Care System
Great Lakes
Health Care System
VA New England
Health Care System

sign low and position sprinklers so

they project away from the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual, or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-35

 EI-14 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Site Monument Kiosk

1522.5 mm
(5'-0")
228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
190.5 mm (7 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

4419.6 mm
(14'-6")

2286.0 mm
(7'-6")

304.8 mm (1'-0")

Message Layout A

228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")

50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2") 304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
127.0 mm (5") 76.2 mm (3")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")

4419.6 mm
(14'-6")

2286.0 mm 2286.0 mm 2286.0 mm

(7'-6") (7'-6") (7'-6")

Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-6-36

 EI-15.01 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Monument Kiosk with Directional
Size
Sign Face:
4572 mm H x 1524 mm W x 1524
mm D
(15' 0 " H x 5' 0" W x 5’ 0” D)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated vertical
free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center or the William S. Middleton
medical center’s main entrance Memorial
drive. Veterans Hospital
Madison
Lower section of sign has modular
changeable sign panels that can be VA Great Lakes
used for directional information. Health Care System

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical Main Entrance
Clinics
center.
Outpatient Entrance

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing Visitor Parking
for dimensions) Taylor Entrance
Freight Receiving Entrance
Specific message configuration will
vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name
will need special approval from
Washington DC.

Care is to be taken when preparing

directional text and arrow
direction. Pay particular attention
to the directional messages being
communicate relative to the signs
orientation.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.
Baltimore William S. Middleton Tomah VA Medical Center
Medical Center Memorial VA Medical Center Regional Office
Colors Veterans Hospital
Text: White VA Maryland
Health Care System Madison White River Junction
Background: Refer to color chart
Accent: Refer to color chart VA Capitol
Health Care System
VA Great Lakes
Health Care System
Great Lakes
Health Care System
VA New England
Health Care System

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
Main Entrance Main Entrance Main Entrance Main Entrance
sign. Keep landscaping around the Clinics Clinics Clinics Clinics
sign low and position sprinklers so Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance
they project away from the sign.
Visitor Parking Visitor Parking Visitor Parking Visitor Parking
Taylor Entrance Taylor Entrance Taylor Entrance Taylor Entrance
On-off illumination of sign can be Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-37

 EI-15.01 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Monument Kiosk with Directional

1522.5 mm
(5'-0")
228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
2995 mm (9'-6") 190.5 mm (7 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

762.0 mm (2'-6")

1370 mm (4'-6")

Message Layout A

228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2") 304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
127.0 mm (5") 76.2 mm (3")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")

762.0 mm (2'-6") 762.0 mm (2'-6") 762.0 mm (2'-6")

Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-6-38

 EI-15.02 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Monument Kiosk with Directional & Address
Size
Overall Sign:
4726 mm H x 1524 mm W x1524
mm D
(15' 6" H x 5' 0" W x 5’ 0” D)

Description & Use William S. Middleton

Internally Illuminated vertical Memorial
free standing monument sign for Veterans Hospital
identifying a medical center or the Madison
medical center’s main entrance
VA Great Lakes
drive. Health Care System

Lower section of sign has modular

changeable sign panels that can be
used for directional information.

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in Main Entrance
a color and texture that will provide Clinics
Outpatient Entrance
a coordinated architectural look with Freight Receiving Entrance
the building finishes of the medical
center.
2500
Overlook Terrace
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Specific message configuration will

vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name will
need special approval from VACO, Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D
Washington DC.

Care is to be taken when preparing

directional text and arrow
direction. Pay particular attention
Baltimore William S. Middleton Tomah VA Medical Center
to the directional messages being Medical Center Memorial VA Medical Center Regional Office
communicate relative to the signs VA Maryland
Veterans Hospital

orientation. Health Care System Madison White River Junction

VA Capitol VA Great Lakes Great Lakes VA New England

Health Care System Health Care System Health Care System Health Care System
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors Main Entrance Main Entrance

Main Entrance Main Entrance
Text: White Clinics Clinics Clinics Clinics
Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance
Background: Refer to color chart. Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance

Accent: Refer to color chart.

2500 2500 2500 2500
Recommendations Overlook Terrace Overlook Terrace Overlook Terrace Overlook Terrace

Position sign so drivers have a

clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low and position sprinklers so
they project away from the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual, or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-39

 EI-15.02 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Monument Kiosk with Directional & Address

1522.5 mm
(5'-0")
228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
2995 mm (9'-6") 190.5 mm (7 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

762.0 mm (2'-6")

406 mm (1'-4") 31 mm (1 1/4")

1370 mm (4'-6")

Message Layout A

228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2") 304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
127.0 mm (5") 76.2 mm (3")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")

762.0 mm (2'-6") 762.0 mm (2'-6") 762.0 mm (2'-6")

31 mm (1 1/4") 31 mm (1 1/4") 31 mm (1 1/4")

Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-6-40

 EI-16.01 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument with Electronic Message Center
Size
Sign Face:
3658 mm H x 1524 mm W
(15' 0" H x 5' 0" W)
Description & Use
Internally Illuminated vertical
free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center or the
medical center’s main entrance
drive. Baltimore
Medical Center
Electronic message centers are
available from several manufacturers. VA Maryland
These units are computer driven and Health Care System
require a data connection to the sign.
Contact a local sign company for site VA Capitol
Health Care System
evaluation and feasibility along with
the affiliated costs of connecting the
message center to a computer. Sign
face size may need to be adjusted
to match to message center size
constraints. Blood
Technology for electronic message Pressure
centers is consistently advancing. Screening
Evaluate several manufacturers by 7/11
examining the type of electronic
display they sell. Look at the display
in the same sun path orientation 2500
Overlook Terrace
that the sign will be installed. Direct
sunlight on a display can alter it’s
ability to be read clearly.
The base can be constructed of
concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.
Message Configuration
Refer to Sign Type EI-15.02 for
message layout and configuration.

Blood
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Pressure
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Screening
Accent: Refer to color chart
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low. Position sprinklers so they
do not spray the sign.
When evaluating electronic message
7/11
centers, consider a maintenance/
service contract and have several
people trained in operation and
message implementation.
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-41

 EI-16.01 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument with Electronic Message Center

1522.5 mm
(5'-0")
228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
2995 mm (9'-6") 190.5 mm (7 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

762.0 mm (2'-6")

762 mm (2'-6")

406 mm (1'-4") 31 mm (1 1/4")

1370 mm (4'-6")

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 4-6-42

 EI-16.02 Exterior Signs
Horizontal Site Monument with Electronic Message Center
Size
Sign Face:
2895 mm H x 3886 mm W x 535 mm D
(9' 6" H x 12' 9" W x 1' 9" D)
Description & Use
Internally Illuminated vertical
free standing monument sign for
Baltimore VA Medical Center
identifying a medical center or the
VA Maryland Health Care System
medical center’s main entrance
drive. VA Capitol Health Care Network

Electronic message centers are

available from several manufacturers. FLU SHOTS 10/17 - 20
These units are computer driven and
require a data connection to the sign. CLINIC A
Contact a local sign company for site
evaluation and feasibility along with
the affiliated costs of connecting the
message center to a computer. Sign
face size may need to be adjusted to
match message center constraints.
Technology for electronic message
centers is consistently advancing.
Evaluate several manufacturers by
examining the type of electronic
display they sell. Look at the display in
the same sun path orientation that the
sign will be installed. Direct sunlight
on a display can alter its ability to be
read clearly.
The base may be constructed of
concrete or other masonry material in
FLU SHOTS 10/17 - 20
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
CLINIC A
center.
Message Configuration
Refer to Sign Type EI-01.01 for
message layout and configuration.
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart.
Accent: Refer to color chart.
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the sign.
Keep landscaping around the sign
low and position sprinklers so they
project away from the sign.
When evaluating electronic message
centers, consider a maintenance/
service contract and have several
people trained in operation and
message implementation.
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-43

 EI-16.02 Exterior Signs
Horizontal Site Monument with Electronic Message Center

3886 mm (12'-9") 533 mm (1'-9")

203.2 mm 2'-9"
(8")
7"
533.4mm (1'-9")

1524.0 mm 214.7 mm (8 1/2")

(5'-0") 120.8 mm (4 3/4")
120.8 mm (4 3/4")
2895 mm 88.9 mm (3 1/2")
214.7 mm (8 1/2")
(9’ 6”)"
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

685 mm (2'-3")

18 mm (1'-6")

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 4-6-44

 Exterior Signs

Non-Illuminated
Exterior Signs

12/2012 Page 4-6-45

This page is intentionally left blank
 EN-02.01 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Monument
Size
Sign Face:
1829 mm H x 1829 mm W
(6' 0" H x 6' 0" W)

Description
Large, non-illuminated 10 strip
directional monument sign with
messages directed specifically to
drivers. Monument type directional
signs should only be used on the
main entrance drive and in front of
the medical center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy strip.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors Message Layout A

Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Message Layout B

Directional information for services

ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.

Always leave a blank copy strip

between groups of directional Message Layout C
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped
directional information more quickly.

Always leave a blank strip at the top This layout shows an indentation for a second line of copy
of the sign. This strip is smaller than
the text strips.

Configure a sign with at least one

blank copy strip at the bottom of the
sign. This will aid in the ability of the
driver to read the sign.

12/2012 Page 4-7-1

 EN-02.01 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Monument

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-2

 EN-02.02 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Monument
Size
Sign Face:
1829 mm H x 1219 mm W
(6' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Description
Small, non-illuminated 10 strip
directional monument sign with
messages directed specifically to
drivers. Monument type directional
signs should only be used on the
main entrance drive and in front of
the medical center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors Message Layout A

Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Message Layout B
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.

Always leave a blank copy strip

between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped Message Layout C
directional information more quickly.

Always leave a blank strip at the top

of the sign. This strip is smaller than
the text strips.
This layout shows an indentation for a second line of copy
Configure a sign with at least one
blank copy strip at the bottom of the
sign. This will aid in the ability of the
driver to read the sign.

12/2012 Page 4-7-3

 EN-02.02 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Monument

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-4

 EN-03.02 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Panel
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 1829 mm W
(4' 0" H x 6' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1981 mm (6' 6")
Main Entrance
Description Visitor Information
Standard non-illuminated auto Building 101
oriented post and panel sign with
messages directed specifically to Visitor Parking
drivers. Buildings 222, 333, 323
Message Configuration
233 & T444
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Layouts illustrated
show small, medium and large size
text. Smaller text than shown should
not be used as the messages will be
unreadable to drivers. Larger text
than shown will result in words that
may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart Message Layout A Message Layout B
Post: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Main Entrance
Visitor Information
Main Entrance
This type of directional sign should
be used only when the particular
Building 101 Visitor
message that it will contain is not Visitor Parking Information
likely to change. Buildings 222, 333, 323
Directional information for services 233 & T444
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.

Always leave space between groups

of directional information. This will
aid in the ability of the driver to read Message Layout C
grouped directional information
more quickly. Main Entrance
Generally, configure a sign with blank Visitor Information
space at the bottom of the sign. This Building 101
will aid in the ability of the driver to
read the sign. Visitor Parking
Position sign so drivers have a clear, Building 222, 333
unobstructed view of the sign.

12/2012 Page 4-7-5

 EN-03.02 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Panel

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-6

 EN-03.03 Exterior Signs
Secondary Post and Panel
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1676 mm (5' 6")

Description Main Entrance

Small non-illuminated post and Building 101
panel sign with messages directed
specifically to drivers. This sign can Visitor Parking
also be used to identify buildings. Buildings 222,
Message Configuration 233 & T444
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Layouts illustrated
show small, medium and large size
text. Smaller text than shown should
not be used as the messages will be
unreadable to drivers. Larger text
than shown will result in words that
may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Main Entrance Building

230
Post: Refer to color chart Building 101
Recommendations Visitor Parking
As a directional sign it should be Buildings 222,
used only when the particular 233 & T444
message that it will contain is not
likely to change and directional
information for services ahead
should always be at the top of the
sign.

Always leave space between groups Message Layout D

of directional information. This will
aid in the ability of the driver to read Building

230
grouped directional information
more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with blank Admissions

space at the bottom of the sign. This Outpatient
will aid in the ability of the driver to Beverly Clinic
read the sign.
Rehabilitation VA Great Lakes Health Care System

Position sign so drivers have a clear,

unobstructed view of the sign.

12/2012 Page 4-7-7

 EN-03.03 Exterior Signs
Secondary Post and Panel

Message Layout A

Message Layout B
Message Layout C

76.2 mm (3")
139.7 mm (5 1/2")
44.4 mm (1 3/4")
44.4 mm (1 3/4")
76.2 mm (3")
50.8 mm (2")
76.2 mm (3")
114.3 mm (4 1/2")
88.9 mm (3 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
38.7 mm (1 1/2")

Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-7-8

 EN-03.04 Exterior Signs
Secondary Post and Panel
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 914 mm W
(2' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1524 mm (5' 0")
Admissions
Description Outpatient
Rehabilitation
Non-illuminated, post and panel Dental Clinic
sign directional sign with messages Eye Clinic
directed specifically to pedestrians.
Also, the sign can be used to
identify buildings.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Smaller text than
shown should not be used as the
messages will be unreadable. Larger
text than shown will result in words
that may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Colors
Text: White

Building
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart Building
230 230
Recommendations
Position sign so pedestrians have
a clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Admissions
Outpatient Rehabilitation

Message Layout C

Admissions
Outpatient
Rehabilitation
Dental Clinic
Eye Clinic

12/2012 Page 4-7-9

 EN-03.04 Exterior Signs
Secondary Post and Panel

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-10

 EN-03.05 Exterior Signs
Primary Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 914 mm W
(3' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1676 mm (5' 6")
Building

230
Description
Large, non-illuminated auto
oriented building number/
identification post and panel sign
for identification of a building when
a large sign is needed because the
building is set back away from the
roadway or the architectural scale
(size) of the building warrants a
large sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Layouts illustrated
show small, medium and large size
text. Smaller text than shown should
not be used as the messages will be
unreadable to drivers. Larger text
than shown will result in words that
may not fit on the sign.
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.
Building Building
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart
230 230
Admissions
Outpatient
Recommendations Rehabilitation
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

12/2012 Page 4-7-11

 EN-03.05 Exterior Signs
Primary Building Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-12

 EN-03.06 Exterior Signs
Secondary Building Identification & Informational
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1524 mm (5' 0")
Building
Description
Non-illuminated, pedestrian
oriented building number/
230
identification post and panel
sign. This sign can be used for
other general applications from
information text to identifying
specific functions or activities.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Layouts illustrated
show various sizes of text. Smaller
text than shown should not be used
as the messages will be unreadable.
Larger text than shown will result in
words that may not fit on the sign.
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Graphic Process

Building Building
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart
230 230
Admissions
Recommendations Dental Clinic
Position sign so drivers and
pedestrians have a clear view. This
sign has a limited viewing range for
drivers because of its small size. Message Layout C Message Layout D

No Smoking Smoking
Area Area

Message Layout E

For after hours

information
& VA police
use telephone
located at
building 334.

12/2012 Page 4-7-13

 EN-03.06 Exterior Signs
Secondary Building Identification & Informational

Message Layout A

Message Layout B Message Layout C & D Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-7-14

 EN-04.01 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Stacking Bar
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 2438 mm W
(4' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height: Outpatient Entrance

1981 mm (6' 6")
Main Entrance
Description Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
Large/long, non-illuminated auto
205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102
oriented 6-8 stacking bar directional
sign.
Freight Entrance
Message Configuration
(Refer to construction drawing for Buildings 314, 317 & 319
dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Message Layout A
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the Message Layout B
sign.
Building 338
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.
Message Layout C
Always leave a blank copy bar
between groups of directional Outpatient Entrance
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with

at least one blank copy bar at the
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read the sign.
It will also allow for an additional
line of text to be added to the sign Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance

in the future without having to order Main Entrance

Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
Main Entrance
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
Main Entrance
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,

another copy strip. 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102

Freight Entrance Freight Entrance

Buildings 314, 317 & 319

EN-O4.01A (8 Bar) EN-O4.01B (7 Bar) EN-O4.01C (6 Bar)

12/2012 Page 4-7-15

 EN-04.01 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Stacking Bar

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-16

 EN-04.02 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 1829 mm W
(4' 0" H x 6' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0")
Outpatient Entrance
Description Main Entrance
Standard non-illuminated auto
oriented 5 to 8 stacking bar Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
directional sign. 303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
Message Configuration 350, T101 & T102
(Refer to construction drawing for
dimensions) Freight Entrance
Layout A is for the first line of text
with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.
Message Layout A
Colors

AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a Message Layout B
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Building 338
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.
Message Layout C
Always leave a blank copy bar
between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the
Outpatient Entrance
ability of the driver to read grouped
The layout shows an indentation for a second line of copy
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with

at least one blank copy bar at the
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read the sign.
It will also allow for an additional Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance

line of text to be added to the sign Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348 & 349

in the future without having to order 350, T101 & T102 350, T101 & T102 350, T101 & T102

another copy bar. Freight Entrance

EN-O4.02A (8 Bar) EN-O4.02B (7 Bar) EN-O4.02C (6 Bar) EN-O4.02D (5 Bar)

12/2012 Page 4-7-17

 EN-04.02 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-18

 EN-04.03 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height: Outpatient Entrance

1676 mm (5' 6")
Main Entrance
Description Buildings 137, 332,
Small, non-illuminated auto
323, 325, 303, 305,
oriented 4 to 6 stacking bar
directional sign. 205, 647, 348 & 349

Message Configuration
(Refer to construction drawing for
dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.
Message Layout A
Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.
AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart Message Layout B

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the Building 338
sign.

Directional information for services

ahead should always be at the top of Message Layout C
the sign.

Always leave a blank copy bar

between groups of directional
Outpatient Entrance
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped This layout shows an indentation for a second line of copy
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with

at least one blank copy bar at the
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read the sign.
It will also allow for an additional
Outpatient Outpatient Outpatient
line of text to be added to the sign Entrance Entrance Entrance
in the future without having to order Main Entrance Main Entrance Main Entrance
another copy bar. Buildings 137, 332, Buildings 137 & 332
323, 325, 303 & 305

EN-O4.03A (6 Bar) EN-O4.03B (5 Bar) EN-O4.03C (4 Bar)

12/2012 Page 4-7-19

 EN-04.03 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-20

 EN-04.04 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 914 mm W
(2' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1524 mm (5' 0")
Outpatient Entrance
Description Main Entrance
Non-illuminated, pedestrian
oriented 3 to 4 stacking directional Buildings 137 & 332
bar sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to construction drawing for
dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process Message Layout A

Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.
AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart Message Layout B
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the Building 383
sign.

Directional information for services

ahead should always be at the top of Message Layout C
the sign.

Always leave a blank copy bar

between groups of directional
Outpatient Entrance
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped This layout shows an indentation for a second line of copy
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with

at least one blank copy bar at the
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read the sign.
Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance
It will also allow for an additional
Main Entrance Main Entrance
line of text to be added to the sign
Buildings 137 & 332
in the future without having to order
another copy bar.

EN-O4.04A (4 Bar) EN-O4.04B (3 Bar)

12/2012 Page 4-7-21

 EN-04.04 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-22

 EN-05.01 Exterior Signs
Large Single Post Informational
Size
Sign Face:
762 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 6" H x 2' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0") Freight
Loading
Description Zone
Large, non-illuminated single post
identification, informational and
directional sign. This type of sign
is for miscellaneous uses and can
be utilized in landscape areas, at
the head of parking stalls, or in
other locations which have space
limitations.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message configurations shown

illustrate various adaptable uses for
this particular style of sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart Freight No
Recommendations Loading Smoking
Position sign so drivers have a Zone Medical Area
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Center
It is recommended that this type of
sign be placed in situations where a
smaller sign is required or a particular
situation precludes the use of a
double post and panel sign.
Message Layout D Message Layout E
When placing this type of sign
near curbs or parking places, be
sure the sign is set far enough back Authorized
Vehicles
No
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact Only Beyond Parking
with the sign post. This Point Patient
Pick Up &
Drop Off
Only

12/2012 Page 4-7-23

 EN-05.01 Exterior Signs
Large Single Post Informational

Message Layout A

1/8" Rule

50.8 mm (2")
101.6 mm (4")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
88.9 mm (3 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
146 mm (5 3/4")

Message Layout B Message Layout C

Message Layout D Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-7-24

 EN-05.02 Exterior Signs
Medium Single Post Informational
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 457 mm W
(2' 0" H x 1' 6" W)

Overall Sign Height:

Freight
1829 mm (6' 0") Loading
Zone
Description
Standard, non-illuminated single
post identification, informational
and directional sign. This type
of sign is the standard one for
miscellaneous uses. It can be
utilized in landscape areas, at
the head of parking stalls, or in
other locations which have space
limitations which preclude the use
of a double post and panel sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message configurations shown

illustrate various adaptable uses for
this particular style of sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl. Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Colors
Text: White Freight No
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart Loading Smoking
Recommendations
Zone Medical Area
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
Center
sign.

When placing this type of sign

near curbs or parking places, be
sure the sign is set far enough back
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact Message Layout D Message Layout E
with the sign post.
Authorized No
Vehicles
Only Parking
Beyond Patient
This Point Pick Up &
Drop Off
Only

12/2012 Page 4-7-25

 EN-05.02 Exterior Signs
Medium Single Post Informational

Message Layout A

1/8" Rule
44.5 mm (1 3/4")
82.55 mm (3 1/4")
28.57 mm (1 1/8")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
69.85 mm (2 3/4")

Message Layout B Message Layout C

Message Layout D Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-7-26

 EN-05.03 Exterior Signs
Small Single Post Informational
Size
Sign face:
457 mm H X 305 mm W
(1'6" H X 1'0" W)

Overall Sign High:

1829 mm (6' 0") Freight
Loading
Description Zone

Small, non-illuminated single post

identification and informational
sign. This type of sign is for
miscellaneous uses and can be
utilized in landscape areas at
the head of parking stalls, or in
other locations which have space
limitations. This type of sign would
be placed in situations where a
small sign is required.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message configurations shown,

Illustrate various adaptable uses for
this particular style of sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
Vinyl.
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart
Freight No
Loading Smoking
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a Zone Area
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

When placing this type of sign

near curbs or parking places, be
sure the sign is set far enough back
that over-hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
Message Layout C Message Layout D
with the sign post.

Authorized No
Vehicles
Only Parking
Beyond Patient
This Pick Up &
Point Drop Off
Only

12/2012 Page 4-7-27

 EN-05.03 Exterior Signs
Small Single Post Informational

Message Layout A

Message Layout B Message Layout C

Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-7-28

 EN-06.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Overhead
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 2438 mm W
(2' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated, overhead wall
mounted sign. Identification of a
stand alone building that is not a

Nursing Home Care

medical center. This sign type can
also be used to identify an entrance
to a building.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message Layout A, B and C are for

identifying an entrance to a building.

Message Layout D is for identifying

a non-medical center stand alone
building.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
For a stand alone non medical
center building, use this type of
sign when there is not place to
install a free standing sign.

Use this type of sign for “titling”

major building entrances that have
a very high volume of patient and
visitor traffic and need to be clearly
distinguished.

Nursing Home Care Spinal Rehabilitation

Spinal Rehabilitation
Clinic Entrance Beverly Clinic
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

12/2012 Page 4-7-29

 EN-06.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Overhead

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

6.2 mm
304.8 mm (3")
(1'-0")
292 mm
(11 1/2")
73.02 mm (2 7/8")
114.3 mm (4 1/2")
88.9 mm (3 1/2")
44.5 mm (1 3/4")
146 mm (5 3/4") 88.9 mm (3 1/2")
53.9 mm (2 1/8")
82.5 mm (3 1/4")
60.3 mm (2 3/8")
44.5 mm (1 3/4")
Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-7-30

 EN-06.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Description
Large, non-illuminated wall
mounted sign This sign type can
be used to identify a building on a
medical center campus. It also can
be used for identification of a stand Building
alone building that is not a medical
center and there is not place to 230
install a free standing sign. Admissions
Outpatient
Message Configuration Rehabilitation
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message Layout A is for identifying

a non-medical center, stand alone
building.

Message Layout B and C are for

identifying building on a medical
center campus.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
For a stand alone non-medical Message Layout A Message Layout B
center building, use this type of
sign when there is not place to Building

230
install a free standing sign.

Use this type of sign for “titling”

building entrances that have a
very high volume of patient and
visitor traffic and needs to be
clearly distinguished. It also can be
use on a building that is set back
a considerable distance from the
roadway.

Position the sign adjacent the main

entrance, if possible. If the sign is not Message Layout C
readable in this position, then locate
on the corner of the building. Building
This large sign should not be used
on small buildings or buildings with
minor uses.
230
Admissions
Outpatient
Rehabilitation

12/2012 Page 4-7-31

 EN-06.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification

82.3 mm (3 1/4")
114.3 mm (4 1/2")
41.27 mm (1 5/8")
1/8" 41.27 mm (1 5/8")
Rule
69.8 mm (2 3/4")

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-32

 EN-06.03 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 914 mm W
(4' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Description
Large, non-illuminated wall
mounted sign with separate name
panel. Building identification with
and without names of the occupant Building

230
or service. The secondary name
of the occupant or service is
on a changeable panel to allow
modification to the sign without
changing the entire sign.
Admissions
Message Configuration Outpatient
Rehabilitation
(Refer to message layout drawing
Dental Clinic
for dimensions)

Message layouts show application of

the sign with building identification
number and number with secondary
information.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Please Refer to color
chart

Recommendations Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Use on a building that is set back
a considerable distance from the
roadway. Building Building
Position the sign adjacent to or above
the main entrance, if possible. If the
sign is not readable in this position,
then locate on the corner of the
230 230
building.
Admissions Outpatient Center
This large sign should not be used Outpatient Los Angeles
on small buildings or buildings with
minor uses.
Rehabilitation
Dental Clinic

12/2012 Page 4-7-33

 EN-06.03 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

57.15 mm (2 1/4")

85.72 mm (3 3/8")
28.5 mm (1 1/8")
1/8" 28.5 mm (1 1/8")
Rule 60.3 mm (2 3/8")

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-34

 EN-06.04 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 914 mm W
(3' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Description
Medium, non-illuminated
wall mounted sign. Building
identification. When names of the
occupant or service are used along
Building
with the building number, it should
be text that will not likely change.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
230
for dimensions)

Message layouts show application of

the sign with building identification
number and number with secondary
information.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Use on a building that is set back
a considerable distance from the
roadway.

Position the sign adjacent to or above

the main entrance, if possible. If the Message Layout A Message Layout B
sign is not readable in this position,
then locate on the corner of the
building.
Building Building
This large sign should not be used
on small buildings or buildings with
minor uses. 230 230
Admissions
Outpatient
Rehabilitation

12/2012 Page 4-7-35

 EN-06.04 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-36

 EN-06.05 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 610 mm W
(3' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description
Standard size, non-illuminated wall
mounted sign with separate name
panel. Building identification with
and without names of the occupant
or service. The secondary name
of the occupant or service is Building
on a changeable panel to allow
modification to the sign without 230
changing the entire sign.
Admissions
Outpatient
Message Configuration Rehabilitation
(Refer to message layout drawing Dental Clinic
for dimensions)

Message layouts show application of

the sign with building identification
number and number with secondary
information.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Use on any building. Position the
sign adjacent to or above the main
entrance, if possible. If the sign is Message Layout A Message Layout B
not readable in this position, then
locate on the corner of the building.
Building Building
230 230
Admissions
Outpatient
Rehabilitation
Dental Clinic

12/2012 Page 4-7-37

 EN-06.05 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-38

 EN-06.06 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description
Standard size, non-illuminated
wall mounted sign. Building
identification with and without
names of the occupant or service.
Building
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
230
Message layouts show application of
the sign with building identification
number and number with secondary
information.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Use on any building. Position the
sign adjacent to or above the main
entrance, if possible. If the sign is
not readable in this position, then
locate on the corner of the building.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

Building Building
230 230
Admissions
Dental Clinic

Message Layout C

Freight
Receiving

12/2012 Page 4-7-39

 EN-06.06 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification Sign

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-40

 EN-06.07 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Informational
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 457 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 6" W)

Description
Small, non-illuminated wall
mounted sign. This sign is for
miscellaneous uses such as
identifying minor entrances,
information messages, identifying Freight &
sheds and equipment buildings, Delivery
Entrance
etc.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layouts show ideas of type

sizes relative to possible different
uses and application of the sign type.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Use for general purpose minor sign
needs.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

Freight &
Delivery
Entrance
T28

12/2012 Page 4-7-41

 EN-06.07 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Informational

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-42

 EN-06.08 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Informational
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 0" W)

Description
Minor informational, non-
illuminated wall mounted sign.This
sign is for miscellaneous uses such
as identifying minor entrances,
information messages, identifying
sheds and equipment buildings, Freight &
Delivery
etc. Entrance

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layouts show ideas of type

sizes relative to possible different
uses and application of the sign type.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Use for general purpose minor sign
needs.

Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Freight & No Parking

Delivery Idling for
Contractors
Entrance & Vendors
Shut Down
Engines

Message Layout D Message Layout E Message Layout F

Parking
for
Government
Employees

Ramp
Access

12/2012 Page 4-7-43

 EN-06.08 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Informational

Message Layout A Message Layout B

Message Layout C
Message Layout D

Message Layout E Message Layout F

12/2012 Page 4-7-44

 EN-08.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 2438 mm W
(2' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Description
Overhead, non-illuminated wall
mounted sign to be placed above
the ambulance entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
AMBULANCE
Conform to the layout shown.

Graphic Process
ENTRANCE
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Background: Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Background: Red .

Recommendations
Place sign in a position of the
building where it clearly identifies
the “Ambulance Entrance” and
is visible to both vehicles and
pedestrians.

Message Layout A

AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE

12/2012 Page 4-7-45

 EN-08.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 4-7-46

 EN-08.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated wall mounted sign
to be placed on the wall adjacent to
the ambulance entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Conform to the layouts shown.

AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE
Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Background: Red

Recommendations
Place sign in a position of the
building where it clearly identifies
the “Ambulance Entrance” and
is visible to both vehicles and
pedestrians.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

AMBULANCE AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE ENTRANCE

12/2012 Page 4-7-47

 EN-08.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-48

 EN-08.03 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1676 mm (5' 6")

Description
Non-illuminated post and panel
sign to be placed on the roadway, AMBULANCE
adjacent to the ambulance
entrance to direct ambulance
ENTRANCE
drivers to the correct building
entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Conform to the layouts shown.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Background: Red
Post: Refer to color chart

Recommendations Message Layout A Message Layout B

Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

AMBULANCE AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE ENTRANCE

12/2012 Page 4-7-49

 EN-08.03 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Ambulance Entrance Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-50

 EN-09 Exterior Signs
Dimensional Letters
Size
For the various sizes, refer to the Outpatient Entrance
adjacent table.

Description
Non-illuminated dimensional letters
for identifying a facility. Should be Medical Center

placed on the building in a location

that is highly visible to the public.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Fabricated or cut out of aluminum
letters

Colors
White, black, silver or dark bronze.
Letter to have high contrast to the
building wall color or material. For
example, use white on red brick,
not black.
W
Z
Recommendations
Dimensional letters can be used on

Out
a building to identify the building.
Large letters and logo are intended
X

Y
for use on the top of the building as
a skyline sign.

Sign Type Y Z X W

100 mm 10 mm
EN-09.01
(4") (3/8")

150 mm 10 mm
EN-09.02
(6") (3/8")
200 mm 13 mm
EN-09.03
(8") (1/2")
250 mm 13 mm 575 mm 190 mm
EN-09.04
(10") (1/2") (23") (10")
300 mm 19 mm 675 mm 225 mm
EN-09.05
(12") (3/4") (27") (12")

450 mm 25 mm 1050 mm 350 mm

EN-09.06
(18") (1") (42") (19")
600 mm 50 mm 1350 mm 475 mm
EN-09.07
(24") (2") (56") (25")
750 mm 65 mm 1800 mm 575 mm
EN-09.08
(30") (2 1/2") (70") (31")
900 mm 75 mm 2100 mm 700 mm
EN-09.09
(36") (3") (84") (38")

12/2012 Page 4-7-51

 EN-09 Exterior Signs
Dimensional Letters

Outpatient Entrance

Medical Center

Medical Center

Z
Y

Sign Type Y Z

100 mm 10 mm
EN-09.01
(4") (3/8")

150 mm 10 mm
EN-09.02
(6") (3/8")
200 mm 13 mm
EN-09.03
(8") (1/2")
250 mm 13 mm
EN-09.04
(10") (1/2")
300 mm 19 mm
EN-09.05
(12") (3/4")

450 mm 25 mm
EN-09.06
(18") (1")
600 mm 50 mm
EN-09.07
(24") (2")
750 mm 65 mm
EN-09.08
(30") (2 1/2")
900 mm 75 mm
EN-09.09
(36") (3")

12/2012 Page 4-7-52

 EN-10 Exterior Signs
Traffic Regulatory Signs
Size
EN-10.01: Stop (R1-1): 24", 30", 36"
EN-10.02: Do Not Enter (R5-1):
30", 36"
EN-10.03: Yield (R1-2): 30", 36"
EN-10.04: Speed Limit (R2-8)
EN-10.05: Keep Right (R4-7A)
EN-10.06: One Way (R6-2L,
R6-2R)
EN-10.07: No Right/Left Turn (R3-
1R, R3-2L)
EN-10.08: No U Turn (R3-4)
EN-10.09: Pedestrian Crossing
(W11-2A)
Description
Traffic regulatory signs

Sign Use & Application

The “Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices for Streets and
Highways” has been adopted as
the standard for all Regulatory
and Warning Signs used on the
Department of Veterans Affairs
roadways for vehicular traffic.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions) EN-10.01 EN-10.02 EN-10.03

Text, text size, text position and

color must conform with the Manual
on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(MUTCD)

Colors
Text & Background: “MUTCD”
standard colors;
Post: Refer to color chart. EN-10.04 EN-10.05 EN-10.06

Recommendations
Display the most commonly used
signs as indicated. If other Traffic
Regulatory and Warning Signs are
need, refer to MUTCD.

Position sign so drivers have a clear,

unobstructed view of the sign.

It should be noted that the decision

to use a particular traffic control EN-10.07 EN-10.08 EN-10.09
device at a specific location should
be made on the basis of a standard
traffic engineering study of the
location. Sign size should be based
on traffic conditions. Where these
conditions are the same, all signs of a
similar type should be the same size.

12/2012 Page 4-7-53

 EN-10 Exterior Signs
Traffic Regulatory Signs

EN-10.01 EN-10.02 EN-10.03

EN-10.04 EN-10.07 EN-10.10

EN-10.05 EN-10.08
EN-10.06

12/2012 Page 4-7-54

 EN-11.01 Exterior Signs
2 Blade Street Sign
Size
Blade: 152 mm H x 610 mm W
(6" H x 2'-0" W)
152 mm H x 762 mm W
(6" H x 2'-6" W) Street Name
152 mm H x 914 mm W
(6" H x 3'-0" W)
me
Description St et Na
rere
St et Na
Non-illuminated double blade name
sign for an intersection me
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Select size required for length of

name. Message will be the same
on both sides of the sign blade.
The following are some standard
abbreviations: Boulevard - BLVD;
Circle - CIR; Court - CT; Drive - DR;
Avenue - AVE; Lane - LN; Place - PL;
Road - RD;Street - ST;Terrace -TERR.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart
Message Layout A
Typography
Helvetica Bold Condensed

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Locate as close to intersection
as possible.
Main St.
Message Layout B

Main Street
Message Layout C

N. Main Street

12/2012 Page 4-7-55

 EN-11.01 Exterior Signs
2 Blade Street Sign

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-56

 EN-11.02 Exterior Signs
1 Blade Street Sign
Size
Blade: 152 mm H x 610 mm W
(6" H x 2' 0" W)
152 mm H x 762 mm W
(6" H x 2'-6" W) Street Name
152 mm H x 914 mm W
(6" H x 3'-0" W)

Description St
Tall, Non-illuminated single blade ree
tN
street name identification for a am
single street e

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Select size required for length of

name. Message will be the same
on both sides of the sign blade.
The following are some standard
abbreviations: Boulevard - BLVD;
Circle - CIR; Court - CT; Drive - DR;
Avenue - AVE; Lane - LN; Place - PL;
Road - RD;Street - ST;Terrace -TERR.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart
Message Layout A
Typography

Main St.
Helvetica Bold Condensed

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Locate as close to intersection
as possible.

Message Layout B

Main Street
Message Layout C

N. Main Street

12/2012 Page 4-7-57

 EN-11.02 Exterior Signs
1 Blade Street Sign

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-58

 EN-11.03 Exterior Signs
Pylon Street Sign
Size
Blade: 1524 mm H x 152 mm W x
152 mm D
(5' 0" H x 6" W x 6" D)

Description

Main Street
Non-illuminated Pylon type Street
Sign

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions) The same
message will be the opposite sides
of the post. The name always starts
at the top of the post and has
been rotated clockwise from the
horizontal to vertical. The following
are some standard abbreviations:
Boulevard - BLVD; Circle - CIR;
Court - CT; Drive - DR; Avenue -
AVE; Lane - LN; Place - PL; Road
- RD; Street - ST; Terrace - TERR.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors Message Layout

Post: Refer to color chart.

Typography Main Street

Helvetica Bold Condensed

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Locate as close to intersection
as possible.

12/2012 Page 4-7-59

 EN-11.03 Exterior Signs
Pylon Street Sign

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 4-7-60

 EN-14 Exterior Signs
Building Entrance Door Identification
Size
Sign Characters: See layout

Overall Sign Height:

1650 mm (5' 6")

Description
Non-illuminated, applied vinyl letter
identification sign with messages
directed specifically to pedestrians.
The sign can also be used to
identify buildings.
Baltimore
Message Configuration VA Medical Center
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should Building 16

adjust to the volume of information Main Entrance
being presented. Smaller text than
shown should not be used as the These doors are locked from 6 p.m. to 6 a.m.
When doors are locked, use Ambulance Entrance
messages will be unreadable. Larger
text than shown will result in words
that may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process Smoking is only

First surface applied white reflective permitted outside in
vinyl. designated areas.

Colors
Text: White
Do not use colored vinyl.

Recommendations
Position sign so pedestrians have
a clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ
1676 mm (5'-6")

1676 mm (5'-6")
1676 mm (5'-6")

Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-61

 EN-14 Exterior Signs
Building Entrance Door Identification

Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-62

 Specification Exterior Signs

The specifications for signs are available in the Master Construction Specifications
(PG-18-1) area of the VA Technical Information Library, which is available on the VA
web site under Office of Construction & Facilities Management.

www.cfm.va.gov/til/

Refer to Signage in the specifications, Division 10, Section 10 14 00.

For more information regarding specifications, contact the Office of Construction &
Facilities Management, Facility Standards Service.

The specifications require close coordination, taking into account the existing sign
program at a medical center, any sign demolition, sign maintenance and future
signing needs.

When preparing the specifications for a project, it will require editing to add and
indicate new signs or eliminate signs that are not needed. Also, it will be necessary
to adapt the specifications to project requirements required for the specific project in
which they are intended.

The sign message schedule is considered a part of the specifications and would
comprise a portion of the spec section. The configuration and format of the mes-
sage schedule may vary according to individual project requirements. The sign
message schedule format is shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide. It provides the method for identifying each sign location,
type and message along with other notations. The sign schedule contains important
information that the sign manufacturer and the sign installer will require for manu-
facturing and sign installation.

The sign message schedule must be coordinated with a sign location plan drawing
showing where signs are to be placed within a building or on the site. Refer to the
sign location plan example shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide.

For convenience, the sign type drawings can also be included in the specifications
as it own section.

12/2012 Page 4-8-1

This page is intentionally left blank
 Construction Exterior Signs

The type of exterior sign and sign system selected for a particular application or
facility, requires several decisions and involves different construction and compo-
nents to satisfy the desired requirements. This section provides an overview of the
intended criteria for exterior signs.

The details, showing the construction of the monument signs, post and panel signs,
wall mounted signs, and the stacking bar signs, are based on a concept of an
aluminum extrusion component system. Many sign manufacturers currently market
extrusions and component systems that will accomplish the illustrated objectives
of a exterior sign system. These extruded, molded, and fabricated components are
acceptable so long as the illustrated and stated specifications are adhered to. Once
a particular manufacturer’s system is selected for a sign program, ongoing main-
tenance and replacement signs will need to come from that same manufacturer’s
component system.

The illustrations are intended to show the desired configuration and intent of the
various sign types. Sections of the extrusions are for illustration purposes and have
not been engineered or configured for extruding and do not represent a finished
form or a particular manufacturer. Many manufacturers’ extrusion systems will
accomplish the illustrated objectives of the intended exterior sign system.

Creating a custom look for signs, with various shapes of posts and cabinets, is an
option that can create a specific look for a campus and can create a visual theme
that can be tied to the geographic region, neighborhood or architecture of the build-
ings. Once shapes are selected, it should become the standard for the entire medi-
cal center campus. Different shapes being used on the same campus will create a
disorganized appearance to the sign program.

In the following pages, further discussion of shape and sign design is discussed
along with examples.

Internally illuminated signs should have the electrical supply coordinated, and volt-
age confirmed, before a sign is ordered and fabricated. Illuminated signs should
contain a “UL” sticker that their construction conforms to UL Standard 48. Text for
illuminated signs should also be confirmed and finalized before the sign is ordered
and fabricated because revisions after fabracation, are very expensive and time
consuming.

Community reaction should be taken into account before large “skyline letters” are
installed on top of a medical center. Various communities have standards that may
not permit these types of signs and installing them could create a local controversy.
Also, when large letters are planned for a building, coordination should take place
to ensure issues of building skin integrity, structural loads, installation, electrical
service and maintenance access are evaluated.

Monument signs larger than those shown in the Guide may also create local com-
munity reaction. Check with the Planning Department of the local City or County
to see if they have a sign ordinance that may have guidelines for the type of sign
being proposed. Federal facilities are not required to obtain local sign permits, but
respecting the local ordinances will prevent possible controversy.

Particular care should be taken to ensure that sign footings and foundations are
correctly matched to the type of sign being installed.

12/2012 Page 4-9-1

 Construction Exterior Signs
Design Options
Detail 1 Posts: The illustration shows different post shape forms that can allow a sign pro-
gram to bring an image to a medical center campus. These forms can also create a
coordinated look with the architectural theme of buildings on a medical center cam-
pus. Additional post shapes are available and a sign designer can develop concepts
to illustrate various looks that incorporate different post structures that will work with
various cabinet designs.

Post: P1 Post: P2 Post: P3

Detail 2 Post Caps: Post caps (finials) can be used to create a theme or feeling enhanc-
ing a signs look. The caps can be round or pointed or even a decorative element
that is associated with the medical center’s architecture. There are companies
that manufacture finials and can be consulted of available options or even custom
applications.

12/2012 Page 4-9-2

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 3 Revels: The look of a component extrusion based exterior sign program allows for
signs to be assembled and installed with or without a revels. The extruded alumi-
num posts have the capability for interlocking with a reveal extrusion that allows for
the sign to have a large reveal, small reveal or no reveal. This reveal can also be
used to incorporate an accent color into the sign program.

Detail 4 Look of the Sign: By incorporating various simple enhancements to a sign a look
can be created that can be specific to a site or campus. Changing the post shape,
incorporating a reveal, having the posts and cabinet in two different colors, or hav-
ing an accent color in the reveal are all things that will give a sign a distinct look,
but not add to its costs. Using dimensional letters can also provide a more upscale
appearance for signs that identify buildings. Adding shape to the sign cabinet and a
distinct treatment to the top of the posts, adds cost to the sign, but these details can
“de-institutionalize” a sign program and allow it have a “personality” that aligns with
a hospitals architecture or a campus theme.

Plan View

Change Post
Add dimensional
letters

Add reveal

Basic Post & Panel Sign Modified Post & Panel Sign

Add post cap

Modify panel

Modified Post & Panel Sign

12/2012 Page 4-9-3

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 5
Sign Cabinet Shapes and Forms

This illustrates several examples of

expanding the design of the exterior
sign to incorporate different post,
cap, reveals and cabinet shapes.

Detail 6
Internally Illuminated Monument
Sign

This sign is constructed with an

illuminated double faced sign cabinet
mounted to a masonry base with
a reveal between the base and the
cabinet.

Sign face is aluminum with “routed

out” graphics backed with a
translucent diffuser.

Illumination is by internal fluorescent

lamping 225 mm (9") on center.

Sign face is held within a hinged/

removable frame which will allow for
replacement of the sign face without
disassembly or abandonment of
entire sign.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.

12/2012 Page 4-9-4

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 7
Internally Illuminated
Post & Panel Sign

This sign is constructed with an

illuminated double faced sign cabinet
mounted to extruded aluminum
posts with an adjustable reveal
between the posts and the cabinet.

Sign face is aluminum with “routed

out” graphics backed with a
translucent diffuser.

Illumination is by internal fluorescent

lamping 225 mm (9") on center.

Sign face is held within a hinged/

removable frame which will allow for
replacement of the sign face without
disassembly or abandonment of
entire sign.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.

Detail 8
LED’s attached to removable
LED Internally Illuminated
white aluminum panel
Sign Cabinet

Current trends are to replace

fluorescent lamping with LED
lighting. The initial cost for LED’s
will cause the sign to be slightly
more expense, but over the life of
the sign there will be considerable
savings realized. The saving come in
the form of lower energy costs and
considerably less maintenance.

There are several systems and

methods of installing LED lights in
sign cabinets and all will work, but
check with the sign company to make
sure the system the are using will
not result in pin prick hot light spots
that will be visible through the sign’s
diffuser.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.

12/2012 Page 4-9-5

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 9
Internally Illuminated
Wall Mounted Sign

This sign is constructed with a single

faced illuminated sign cabinet that
can be mounted to a wall. A complete
enclosed back is required.

Sign face is aluminum with “routed

out” graphics backed with a
translucent diffuser.

Illumination is by internal fluorescent

lamping 225 mm (9") on center.

Sign face is held within a hinged/

removable frame which will allow for
replacement of the sign face without
disassembly or abandonment of
entire sign.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.

Detail 10
Internally Illuminated Sign
Electrical

Electrical connections to illuminated

signs are to be made in a junction box
that is located adjacent to the sign.
Junction boxes are not to be installed
on the sides of cabinets or mounted
on posts.

Exposed conduit is not to be

mounted to the exterior of sign
cabinets or posts.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.
Electrical junction box
Shut off switch
Electrical feed inside post

12/2012 Page 4-9-6

 Exterior Signs

Detail 11 2 mm (.090") Aluminum Sign

Internally Illuminated Face With Routed Out Copy
Routed-out Graphics Compression Washer

Illuminated signs with routed out Aluminum Stud

aluminum sign faces require white Welded To Back
translucent diffusers. Of Sign Face

Translucent White Acrylic Backing

The translucent acrylic or
Plate. Stud Mount Acrylic With
polycarbonate diffusers are to be Slotted Holes To Allow For
mechanically fastened to the sign Expansion
face.

Letter voids of all upper case letters

“A B D O P Q R” and all lower case Stud Mount Aluminum
letters “a b d o p q r a b d e g o p q” Letter Voids
and number voids “4 6 8 9 0” are to
be mechanically fastened to the
diffuser.
Aluminum "Z" Clips
Welded To Back Of
Diffusers are not to be installed on Sign Face
a sign face using any type of tape
or adhesive system.

Detail 12
Internally Illuminated
4 Sided Monument Sign

This sign is constructed with an Sign Cabinet

illuminated 4 faced sign cabinet
mounted to a masonry base with Equal
a reveal between the base and the
cabinet.

Sign face is aluminum with “routed Satin Clear

Anodized Aluminum
out” graphics backed with a
translucent diffuser.
Masonry (Concrete,
Illumination is by internal metal Stone, Brick, Etc.)
halide lamping placed horizontally Footing. Color & Finish
on center. to Match Buildings
Equal
Sign face is held within a hinged/
removable frame which will allow for
replacement of the sign face without
disassembly or abandonment of
entire sign.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.

Vertical Section Horizontal Section

Internal View

12/2012 Page 4-9-7

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 13
Non-illuminated Post & Panel Sign

This sign is constructed with a non-

illuminated sign cabinet mounted
to extruded aluminum posts with an
adjustable reveal between the posts
and the cabinet.

The sign cabinet extrusion should

have the capability to hold the sign
faces and allow for the removal and
replacement of faces without total
en
sign disassembly or abandonment of
the sign.
cy
tra
nc
gy e

Detail 14
Non-illuminated Post & Stacking
Bar Sign

This sign is constructed with a series

of aluminum tubes mounted to
extruded aluminum posts with an
adjustable reveal between the posts
and the stacking tubes.

Tubes are to be flush and touching

with no gaps between them.
nc
e
Sign is constructed in a manner that
will allow the removal or addition of
faces at a future time.

en
cy

12/2012 Page 4-9-8

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 15
Internally Illuminated Strip Sign

A stacking strip illuminated sign

incorporates individual extruded
aluminum strips that enable the
panels to be removed and rearranged
as necessary.

The sign is constructed similar to the

internally illuminated monument or
post and panel sign.

The graphics on the strips are

constructed in the same manner as
an internally illuminated sign face.

Detail 16
Internally Illuminated
Changeable Strips

Modular illuminated sign strip

extrusions are to be interlocking in
such a manner as to prevent light
leaks and also provide flexibility for
replacement and rearrangement.

nc
e
en
cy

12/2012 Page 4-9-9

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 17
Exterior Sign Utilizing Component
Assembly

The illustration shows how a sign

is assembled which is constructed
using an aluminum extrusion
system of component parts. Several
manufacturers build signs in this
manner and this approach allows
for simplified manufacturing and a
consistent appearing product.

Detail 18
The exploded view illustration
shows how an exterior component
based sign can be installed to allow
for simple future modifications or
updating.
age
e ss
M

12/2012 Page 4-9-10

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 19
Basic aluminum post and panel
sign.

Detail 20
The simplest form of a post and
panel sign.

While this basic sign is functional and

inexpensive, it is critical the the sign
face be a thick aluminum panel that
will bend or twist.

12/2012 Page 4-9-11

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 23
Fluorescent light assembly

The drawings illustrate the use of

fluorescent lamping for illuminated
Fluorescent
signs. light fixtures
9" on center
Vertical or horizontal lamp
arrangements are usually selected
based upon the sign cabinet size
and shape. Typically common size
of bulbs are used that fit the shape
and enable even placement of tubes. 9"
Normal bulb spacing is approximately
9” on center. 9"

9"

9"
9"
9"
9"
9"

Fluorescent
light fixtures 9"
on center

12/2012 Page 4-9-12

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 24
Non-illuminated Wall Mounted Sign

This sign is constructed with an

aluminum panel mounted into an St
extruded aluminum frame configured
for wall mounting. ree
Sign face is held within a frame
which will allow for replacement of tN
the sign face without disassembly or
abandonment of entire sign. am
m e
N a
e t
St re

Detail 25
Single Post & Panel Sign

Aluminum sign panel mounted to a

square aluminum post with tamper
proof mechanical fasteners.

Sign panels have the corners eased

with a 6 mm (0.25") radius. The post
shall have a permanent top cap.

12/2012 Page 4-9-13

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 26
Traffic sign mounted
to a round post

Welded
Joints

Detail 27
Street Identification Sign

Cast or fabricated aluminum post cap

configured to hold aluminum name

St
panel.

ree
For double bladed signs there
is a cast or fabricated aluminum

tN
connector that is mounted to the
lower blade and holds the upper
blade.

am
m e
N a
e t
St re

12/2012 Page 4-9-14

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 28
Mounting: Letters spaced off wall to aid water drainage
Face Illuminated
Face Illuminated Letters
letters Internal Illumination with LED’s Trimcap paint to match letter return, attach with
Face Illumination with LED’s non-corrosive fasteners
Installation of these letters should
Installationbe
of these letters
done only by should be
a licensed Fasteners as required by the local jurisdiction
done only by a licensed
electrical signelectrical
company. sign
company. Low voltage white LED’s adhere to letter back with
Consult with a local electrical double-sided adhesive tape and silicone
sign
Consult with company
a local regarding the wall
electrical
surface,
sign company accessibility
regarding and method
the wall
of installation. Translucent white acrylic face to match sign-white.
surface, accessibility and method of
installation. LED General Guidlines
Pass-thru. Seal with exterior grade silicone
LED’s to be UL recognized and carry the
UL label. Power supply contained in metal inclosure.
Power supply may be located remotely
LED GENERAL GUIDE
Rated life of LED ‘sLINES
to exceed
40,000 hours.
Fabricated aluminum channel letter. Inside of letter
LED’s to be Color
UL recognized andto 6500k
temp to match 5000k to be painted high-reflecive white
carry the UL label
Low voltage 12v system
Weep holes in bottoms of letters, baffle over holes
Rated life of LED’s to exceed
40,000 hours Listed disconnect switch in primary to be within sight of sign
max 12.25m (40 ft.). Electrical to box and final hook-up
by electrician
Color temp to match 5000k to 6500k
Primary electrical source
Low voltage 12v system
SECTION DETAIL

Detail 29
Halo Illuminated
Letters
Halo Illumination with LED’s

Installation Mounting:
of these letters should be Letters spaced off wall minimum
done only by a licensed electrical sign
Halo Illuminated Letters
company.
Internal Illumination with LED’s Non-corrosive fasteners

Consult with a local electrical

sign companyInstallation
regardingof these letters should
the wall
be done only by a licensed Fasteners as required by the local jurisdiction
surface, accessibility and method of
electrical sign company.
installation.
Low voltage white LED’s adhered to clear polycarbonate
Consult with a local electrical back with double-sided adhesive tape and silicone
Low voltagesign
12vcompany
system regarding the wall
surface, accessibility and method
of installation. 3/16” clear polycarbonate back

1/2” diameter pass-thru. Seal with exterior grade silicone

Power supply contained in metal inclosure. Power supply may

be located remotely

Fabricated aluminum reverse channel letter. Inside of letter

to be painted high-reflecive white
LED Guidelines
Weep holes in bottoms of letters, baffle over holes
LED’s to be UL recognized and
carry the UL label Listed disconnect switch in primary to be within sight of sign
max 12.25m (40 ft.). Electrical to box and final hook-up by electrician
Rated life of LED’s to exceed
40,000 hours Primary electrical source

Color temp to match 5000k to 6500k

SECTION DETAIL

12/2012 Page 4-9-15

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 30
Illuminated Letters & Logo Fasteners as required by the local jurisdiction
Non-corrosive fasteners
Fabricated metal letters and logo are
intended for use on exterior building Tube support
applications.
Fabricated aluminum reverse channel letters
These letters are custom fabricated
to meet the size, illumination and Seal all penetrations to comply with applicable
mounting requirements for the building code requirements
intended location on a building.
White Neon tubing with spacing maintained
Clear access is required to backs
per spacing table
of the letters to allow installation
of electrical connections and for Electrode and wire covers for U/L installations
maintenance.
Clear polycarbonate back
Consult with a local exterior electrical
sign company regarding these letters, Metal pass thru in wall with conduit to remote
their construction and installation U/L listed ground fault transformer & to other letters
requirements before ordering Accessible grounded transformer enclosure suitable
illuminated letters. for damp, wet or outdoor locations unless marked for
dry indoor locations only. Mounted as required by
local jurisdiction
Non-corrosive standoffs
Listed flex (metal shown) and listed GTO cable
Listed disconnect switch in primary to be within sight,
max 12.25m (40ft.) of sign (electrical to box and final
hook-up by electrician)

Primary electrical source

SPACING TABLE

A. Between insulated high voltage and 1)primary wiring and 2)dead

metal where dead metal parallels high voltage wiring for more then
25mm(1") in length.

B. Between neon tubing and nearest surface.

C. Between uninsulated high voltage parts and 1) dead metal and

2) insulated high voltage or supply conductors.

D. Between uninsulated high voltage parts and 1) other uninsulated

high voltage parts and 2) uninsulated supply and low voltage parts.

Voltage A B C D

1001 to 5000 13 mm (1/2") 6 mm (1/4") 19 mm (3/4") 25 mm (1")

1 1
5001 to 10000 19 mm (3/4") 6 mm (1/4") 29 mm (1 ")
/
8 38 mm (1 /2")
1
10001 to 15000 25 mm (1") 6 mm (1/4") 38 mm (1 ")
/
2 54 mm (2")

12/2012 Page 4-9-16

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 31
Fabricated Metal Letter & Logo

Fabricated metal letters and logo are Stainless steel mounting clip
intended for use on exterior building and fasteners 2 mm (0.080") min.
applications.
Non-illuminated
These letters would be typically
fabricated aluminum
custom fabricated relative to the
letter.
placement position on a building.

2 mm (0.090") min.

Per structural engineering requirements,

mechanically fasten to wall, minimum
3 connections per letter.

Weep hole

Electrical
Raceway

12/2012 Page 4-9-17

This page is intentionally left blank
 Installation Exterior Signs

The installation of exterior signs requires coordination of several criteria. Careful

consideration should be given to the following:
Criteria • Character and configuration of the roadway system.
• Desired path of travel on the roadway system for visitors, staff and deliveries.
• Location of buildings on the facility campus in relation to roads, parking, and
walkways.
• Location of building entrances.
• Weather such as wind and snow.
• Utilities and landscaping.
• Adequate light on and around directional signs.
• Placement of signs in locations where people are expecting them to be.

Visibility These elements help establish the basis of a clear sign program.
Exterior signs function to communicate to both drivers and pedestrians and their
placements need to be planned relative to the intended viewer. Sign visibility to the
user is the principal objective and is the basis of correct sign placement.

Readability Signs that are to be read from a car moving down a road need to be installed in
locations that provide for clear readability without obstructions.
Equally important is the installation of signs, taking into account the potential effects
on drivers. Signs with too much information can cause a driver to stop or slow to a
very low speed, thus creating a traffic hazard.

Coordination Coordination needs to take place with things like irrigation systems, electrical
service and other underground utilities.
Climate Every site has different climate conditions that effect an exterior sign program. Wind
load on signs effects the footing requirements. Considerations for snowfall and frost
line will also have an impact on post length and footing depth.
Footing Within this installation section of the guide there is a table to provide assistance
in determining the size of a footing for various signs. This is a general guide and
structural engineering maybe required to adequately confirm that a particular
footing will be adequate for a sign in the required conditions, at site or sign location.

Engineering Structural engineering should be consulted to ensure building walls can adequately
support large “skyline letters and logo” before having them fabricated. Monument
signs should also have their bases designed by a structural engineer to ensure the
signs can withstand wind loads in the signs location.

Mounting Sign mounting methods have been standardized to create visual uniformity for
all signs placed around a facility. Mounting heights and locations have been
determined for ease of reading.
There are two principal methods of mounting signs. These are:
• Ground Mounted: Placing a sign panel on one or more posts fixed in the
ground or sign cabinets mounted to masonry or concrete bases.
• Wall Mounted: Placing a sign on a vertical surface such as the wall or
door of a building or fence.
Viewing Each type of sign utilizes a mounting method appropriate to the viewing
requirements.
During the course of installation, always ensure that the signs are positioned with a
clear line-of-sight from the viewing point to the sign face.
Planning A sign program for a campus that works well is one that has been planned as an
integrated whole. All the way from the main identification sign, directional signs,
building and building entrance identification through to the parking lot signs. Proper
placement is part of a well-planned program.

12/2012 Page 4-10-1

 Installation Exterior Signs

Placement:
Ground Mounted Signs
All signs should be located a
600 mm
minimum of 600 mm (2'-0") from
(2'-0") Min.
the curb. The exact location of a
sign will vary depending on the
type of sign and site conditions.

Sign placement must be carefully

considered to ensure that the
sign fits the location without major
regrading. It may be necessary to
clear some shrubs or bushes or
relocate an obstruction.

When ground mounted signs on

two posts are placed on sloping
or inclined grades, adjustments
must be made to the post lengths.
Extreme differences between post
lengths should be minimized.
Curb

600 mm
(2'-0") Min.

Curb
(1'-6") Min
450 mm

1200 mm (4'-0") Max

12/2012 Page 4-10-2

 Installation Exterior Signs

Placement:
Wall Mounted Signs
Signs are placed to alert and inform MOUNTING 3000 mm
in sufficient time to avoid a hazard HEIGHT (10'-0")
or take appropriate action. They 2700 mm
should be sized for easy reading (9'-0")
from the viewing distance required. 2400 mm
(8'-0")
A sign that is too small will be lost. 2100 mm
Conversely, an overly large sign (7'-0")
can overwhelm an area. 1800 mm
(6'-0")
Signs should be placed where they 1500 mm
will not create distractions. Care (5'-0")
should be taken to avoid grouping 1200 mm
too many signs together in one (4'-0")
location.

Small sign panels placed for close

viewing are appropriately placed
at eye level. Larger signs posted
in big spaces or for viewing at
greater distances should be placed VIEWING DISTANCES TO VIEWING DISTANCES TO
proportionally higher. 9 M (30'-0") 18 M (60'-0")

Signs should not be placed where

objects may obscure them.

Before ordering a sign, place a

cardboard panel in the proposed
location to verify the size and
placement location.

CL
(4") Min.
100 mm

100 mm (4") Min.

900 mm (3'-0") Min.

12/2012 Page 4-10-3

 Installation Exterior Signs

Placement:
Parking Stall

300 mm
Center Sign on Curb & Walk
Identification Parking Stall

(12")
This illustration indicates the
location of single post & panel
signs in relationship to both
handicapped and standard parking
stalls.

Signs should be visually centered

to the driver/vehicle at the head of
the stall.

Make sure that the sign post

cannot be struck by the bumper of
a vehicle.

If an area of parking stalls are

being signed with the same
message, the number of signs can 900 mm Center Sign on Curb &
be reduced. A single sign can be (3'-0") Parking Stall Landscaping
used to label multiple stalls. A good
guide is 1 sign for every 2 or 3
stalls. One sign for 4 stalls will not
work because the sign will be to far
from a drivers vision.

For handicapped parking stalls it

is best to provide a sign for each
individual stall and then there is no
opportunity for confusion.

Center Sign on Curb & Walk

300 mm

Parking Stall
(12")

Curb &
Center Sign on
900 mm

Landscaping
Parking Stall
(3'-0")

12/2012 Page 4-10-4

 Installation Exterior Signs

Placement:
Sight Triangle at
Intersections and
Driveways
Sign

For safety reasons, signs should

7500 mm (25'-0")
not be placed in the sight triangle
(shaded area) where they could
obscure a driver’s vision. Also,
make sure that a sign’s location Traffic
is not blocking a drivers vision of Regulatory Sign
pedestrians.

Ensuring that there are no signs

in the sight triangle applies to
roadway intersections as well as 7500 mm (25'-0")
driveways.
No sign to be installed
Traffic regulatory signs are an in this area except traffic
exception to this rule. Traffic regulatory signs
regulatory signs such as STOP and
YIELD signs should be placed at
the point at which compliance is to
be made.

Footing:
Size Configurations 3 13
4 38 44 50
90
19 8 9 16 60
45
1 45 38 45
Footing depth requirements vary 3 45
26
23 75 38
68
60
83
45 75 60 68
75
60
10 30
from location to location and size 60 83 60
45 60 68
66 68
16 89 11 53 75 105 51 45 38 11
of sign. 16
75 64
60 60 45 45
38
31
60 19 30 51 90 44 45 53
15
60 60 68 11 30 25
1 8 33 19 50
56 30 15 53 38
A large sign requires a larger 3 8 8
26 8 38
20
23
68
60 31 44 53 50 53 19
30 23 31
diameter and deeper footing or 4 5
8 15
8
45 38
44 3853 13
8 18 43 25
base to withstand higher wind 3 23
25 28 30 45 60 38
68 19
8
3 21 30
loads. Poor soil compaction will 6
1 46 16
23
20 23 38 75 31
3 15 26 25 4
also require larger footings. 1 1 18
26
8 15 19
13
13 38
8 6 23
34 8 15 13 8
The depth of winter frost 3
25
penetration also effects the size of 9 8
1
3
1 4 25 30 26 21
footing required. 19 8
4 16 8
1 45 23 5 11 4 4
Locate your area of the country on 15 13
4
the map and then refer to the chart 3
5
3 10

to determine the size of footings 1

required for the various sizes of 1
signs.

It is recommended for Sign Types

EI-01.01, EI-01.02, EI-01.04 and EI-
01.05, the sign base be designed
by a licensed structural engineer
providing “sealed and signed”
drawings. This is to ensure that the
base will structurally support the
sign taking into account wind loads,
the type of soil, and winter frost
penetration.

12/2012 Page 4-10-5

 2 1800 mm 1500 mm 2.7 sq M 2550 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

Installation Exterior Signs

Footing Configuration
Chart
0"-30" Frost Depth 30"-36" Frost Depth 36"-48" Frost Depth

Sign Sign Sign Overall Footing Footing Footing

Number Panel Panel Panel Sign Cross Footing Cross Footing Cross Footing
Of Posts Height Width Sq. Ft. Height Section Depth Section Depth Section Depth

1 1'-6" 1'-0" 1.5 sq ft 6'-0" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
1 2'-0" 1'-6" 3 sq ft 6'-0" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
1 2'-6" 2'-0" 5 sq ft 6'-0" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"

2 2'-0" 2'-0" 4 sq ft 5'-0" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"

2 2'-0" 3'-0" 6 sq ft 5'-0" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 3'-0" 3'-0" 9 sq ft 5'-6" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 3'-0" 4'-0" 12 sq ft 5'-6" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 4'-0" 3'-0" 12 sq ft 6'-6" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 4'-0" 6'-0" 24 sq ft 6'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 4'-0" 6'-0" 24 sq ft 6'-6" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 4'-0" 8'-0" 32 sq ft 6'-6" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 6'-0" 5'-0" 30 sq ft 8'-6" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"

Footing:
Metric Size
Configurations 0-762 Frost Depth 762-915 Frost Depth 915-1220 Frost Depth

Sign Sign Sign Overall Footing Footing Footing

Number Panel Panel Panel Sign Cross Footing Cross Footing Cross Footing
Of Posts Height Width Sq. M Height Section Depth Section Depth Section Depth

1 450 mm 300 mm .1 sq M 1800 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

1 600 mm 450 mm .2 sq M 1800 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

1 750 mm 600 mm .5 sq M 1800 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 600 mm 600 mm .4 sq M 1500 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 600 mm 900 mm .5 sq M 1500 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 900 mm 900 mm .8 sq M 1650 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 900 mm 1200 mm 1.1 sq M 1650 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 1200 mm 900 mm 1.1 sq M 1950 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 1200 mm 1800 mm 2.2 sq M 1800 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 1200 mm 1800 mm 2.2 sq M 1950 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 1200 mm 2400 mm 2.9 sq M 1950 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 1800 mm 1500 mm 2.7 sq M 2550 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

12/2012 Page 4-10-6

0"-30" Frost Depth 30"-36" Frost Depth 36"-48" Frost Depth

 Installation Exterior Signs

Footing:
Post & Panel Signs Style 1
All footings must meet width In landscaped areas, footing shall be
and depth requirements to boxed so as to extend 90mm (3 1/2")
accommodate height and size of above grade with 50mm (2") bevel. Sign Post
sign, soil conditions, wind loads Replace surrounding
landscaping to original condition.
and winter ground freezing.

50 mm
Style 1

90 mm
(31/2")

(2")
Permanent installation in
landscaped areas.

Signs installed in grass can

have the raised concrete collars
extended to cover the area
between posts. Apply protective coating to On illuminated signs, the electrical
aluminum post in concrete conduit runs inside the sign post,
Style 2 to prevent corrosion thru footing to the junction box
Permanent installation in paved Min concrete pier footing 450 mm (1'-6") Dia.
areas. Either core drill or surface 75 mm - 100 mm (3"-4") x 750 mm (2'-6") deep to be adjusted to be
Drain Rock larger if required by structural engineering
mount.
wind load calculations

Style 2
Core Drill
Sign Post
In sidewalk areas, core drill or
saw cut pier hole, fill flush and
match material, color and finish
on top surface of concrete pier.

On illuminated signs, the electrical

conduit runs inside the sign post,
Apply protective coating to thru footing to the junction box
aluminum post in concrete
to prevent corrosion
Min concrete pier footing 450 mm (1'-6") Dia.
75 mm - 100 mm (3"-4") x 750 mm (2'-6") deep to be adjusted to be
Drain Rock larger if required by structural engineering
wind load calculations

Style 2
Surface Mount Sign Post

4 anchors
minimum
per sign

12/2012 Page 4-10-7

 Installation Exterior Signs

Footing:
Post & Panel Signs
Style 3
All footings must meet width
and depth requirements to Aluminum Cover
accommodate height and size of Aluminum Sign Post
sign, soil conditions, wind loads Painted to Match
and winter ground freezing. Sign Post
Welded Aluminum Base Plate With
Style 3 Full Penetration Weld On All Sides
Semi-permanent installation in

90 mm
(31/2")
landscaped areas.
Non-shrink Grout Leveling Bed
Use this type of installation when
it is known that a sign will need to Finish Grade
be removed or replaced in the near
future.

Signs installed in grass can have

the raised concrete colors extended
to cover the area between the Galvanized Rebar
posts. Anchor Bolts
Concrete Pier Footing
Style 4
Semi-permanent installation.
Drain Rock
Use this type of installation when
it a sign will need to be removed or
replaced in the near future.

Style 4 Internal
Post Support

J Bolt

Concrete
Pier Footing

Drain Rock

12/2012 Page 4-10-8

 Installation Exterior Signs

Mounting:
Non-illuminated
Letters
Metal letters that are installed on
the exterior of the building should
be done with spacers behind the
letters. This will allow for rain to run
down the building surface without Mounting
creating streaking under the letters. surface

The size and length of the studs 10 mm

are to correlate to the size of the (3/8") spacer
letter and the depth that is required
for installation on a particular
building surface.

Plaster and stucco building Stud hole

surfaces should have complete Metal letter
adhesive sealant application drilled & tapped
around the stud, where it Stainless or
penetrates the building, to prevent bronze stud
water intrusion into the building.
Cement or
Letters that are installed on wall non-shrink grout
surfaces below 2438 mm (8 feet)
should be installed flush to the wall
with no spacers and additional
adhesive applied to the back of
the letters. This will increase the
security of the letters against
vandalism or theft.

50 mm (2") Min.

Finished wall
concrete
or solid masonry

Stud hole
Cast plaque
10 mm (3/8") threaded stainless or
bronze studs screwed into solid
metal portion at back of seal.

Cement or non-shrink grout

12/2012 Page 4-10-9

 Installation Exterior Signs

Mounting:
Non-illuminated
Fabricated Metal
Letters
Fabricated metal letters that are
installed on the exterior of the Stainless steel mounting clip
building should be done with slight and fasteners 2 mm (0.080") min.
space between the letter and the
wall. This will allow for rain to run
Non-illuminated
down the building surface without
fabricated aluminum
creating streaking under the letters.
letter.
Plaster and stucco building
surfaces should have complete 2 mm (0.090") min.
adhesive sealent application
around the mounting clip, where
its fastener penetrates the building. Per structural engineering requirements,
This is to prevent water intrusion mechanically fasten to wall, minimum
into the building. 3 connections per letter.

Letters that are installed on wall

surfaces below 2438 mm (8
feet) should be installed with
tamperproof fasteners. This will
increase the security of the letters Weep hole
against vandalism or theft.

Mounting: Fasteners as required by wall surface

Illuminated Letters Non-corrosive fasteners

Electrical
Installation of these letters should Raceway
be done only by a licensed Fabricated aluminum reverse channel letters
electrical sign company. Seal all penetrations to comply with applicable
building code requirements
Consult with a local electrical
sign company regarding the wall
surface, accessibility and method
of installation.

Clear polycarbonate back

Metal pass thru in wall with conduit to remote
U/L listed ground fault transformer & to other letters
Accessible grounded transformer enclosure suitable
for damp, wet or outdoor locations unless marked for
dry indoor locations only. Mounted as required by
local jurisdiction
Non-corrosive standoffs
Listed flex (metal shown) and listed GTO cable
Listed disconnect switch in primary to be within sight,
max. 12.25m (40 ft.) of sign (electrical to box and final hook-up
by electrician)
Primary electrical source

12/2012 Page 4-10-10

 Installation Exterior Signs

Wall Mounting:
Non-Illuminated Signs

Aluminum wall panel signs shall

be fastened with a minimum of 2
mechanical fasteners.

Anchors should be provided in

the wall that are suitable for the
particular type of wall surface
where the sign is being installed.

12/2012 Page 4-10-11

 Parking
Structures

• Directional
• Floor Level
• Entrance
• Informational
• Disabled Access
• Parking Structure Identification
• Parking Stall

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Table of Contents

Section 5
Parking Structure Signs
• Planning 5-2-1 – 5-2-2
• Helpful Hints 5-3-1 – 5-3-2
• Overview 5-4-1 – 5-4-8
• Parking Structure Signs 5-5-1 – 5-5-63
• Specification 5-6-1
• Construction 5-7-1 – 5-7-3
• Installation 5-8-1 – 5-8-3

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Planning Parking Structure Signs

Planning a Parking The development of an effective parking structure sign program requires the coordi-
Structure Sign nation of several interrelated criteria.
Program
An effective sign program must consider the following:

1. Circulation system in the parking structure.

2. How do visitors currently drive around in the parking structure?
3. Where do you want visitors to park? Where do you want staff to park?
4. What is the desired path of travel on the campus roadway system, for visitors
and staff?
5. What is the desired path of pedestrian travel from parked vehicles to building
entrances?
6. Location of building entrances on the facility campus in relation to parking.
7. Location of electricity, its availability, and voltage.
8. Adequacy of lighting on and around directional signs.
9. Placement of signs in locations where people expect signage.
These elements help establish the basis of a clear sign program that communicates
and informs in a direct and simple manner.

A parking structure sign program that works well is one that has been planned as
an integrated whole from the vehicle directional signs, pedestrian directional signs,
building, and building entrance identification, and parking exit signs.

Another important consideration is that a parking structure sign program needs to

be planned in accordance with a cohesive organized parking plan for both visitors
and staff. Visitors will need wayfinding information, whereas staff will not. In split use
parking facilities where a section will be designated as “visitor parking”and another
section will be designated as “staff parking”, only the visitor parking section will re-
quire wayfinding signage.

Types of Signs The main parking identification sign for a medical center parking structure should
be a large scale illuminated sign. Refer to the exterior sign section for illuminated
free standing signs.

Internally illuminated signs within a parking structure should be considered for

those locations where important information and directions need to be communicat-
ed at night or in low light conditions. A non-illuminated sign that is illuminated with
floodlights or a light fixture can also be used.

Non-illuminated signs with reflective letters will function well for secondary signs. It
is a good practice to make all non-illuminated exterior signs with reflective letters
and graphics that will ensure the best possibility of the sign being read.

12/2012 Page 5-2-1

 Planning Parking Structure Signs

Color Coding Options Examples of Color Coding, No Imagery

Parking structures over three
levels should consider color coding
the floor levels in different colors.
Colors should be distinctly different
from floor to floor. For example, if
floor one is blue, floor two should
be orange, floor three, green, etc.

In addition to color coding the

floors, one may also consider using
imagery to differentiate one floor
from the next. The various images
assigned to each floor should be
thematically related. For example,
one may choose trees or leaves
as a theme, where each floor is
associated with a distinctly different
looking leaf or tree image.

Imagery should consist of bold

graphics, that are easy to read and
interpret at a quick glance, such as
icons or silhouetted shapes. Sports
teams, city landmarks or other
types of local images can also be
used.

Examples of Combined Image & Color Coding

(illustrations intended to convey idea, NOT actual layout, colors or artwork)

12/2012 Page 5-2-2

 Helpful Hints Parking Structure Signs

The following are some general “Do’s and Don’ts” guidelines one can refer to when
developing a sign program: this is not intended to be a training section of the guide,
but to provide key information and suggestions that will hopefully reduce common
errors that are made when planning and programming a parking structure sign
program.

General Guidelines • Never use text smaller than 3” capital letter height when a sign is intended to be
read from a moving vehicle.
• Text intended to be read by pedestrians should be a minimum of 1-1/2” capital
letter height.
• Use text (words) which are familiar, easy to understand and comfortable to the
viewer.
• Always use the same words, names or titles throughout the sign program.
• All sign messages need to be a minimum of 24” above grade.
• When selecting a background color for the signs, select a complementary color
to the buildings on campus.
• Signs do require maintenance. Cleaning and waxing will extend the life of exte-
rior signs.

Size of Sign to Use • Always consider the landscaping surrounding a sign when determining a sign’s
size. It is important that shrubs and other plants do not hide or obscure the
sign.
• Lettering and sign panel size should be appropriate for the distance and speed
at which a sign is viewed.

Message Content • Keep sign messages brief.

• Unnecessary information on signs can confuse the viewer.
• Typically, all signs, with the exception of directional signs, should convey no
more than one concept or thought.
• Use text (words) that can be quickly read by the viewer. Use the same words
throughout the sign program.
• On directional and informational signs provide only the information necessary
to make a decision at that particular location.
• Whenever possible, messages should be presented using positive information.
• On directional signs, do not anticipate decisions that can be made later.
Unnecessary or premature information will confuse the reader.
• Messages placed on signs should be concise, preferably with no more than
seven to ten words.
• For signs to be read from a moving car, take into account the speed of the car.
At a slow speed the driver may be able to read seven or eight words. At a faster
speed they will only be able to read four or five.

12/2012 Page 5-3-1

 Helpful Hints Parking Structure Signs

Message Layout • Use upper and lower case text whenever possible. Upper and lower case text
is easier to read and can be understood faster than text in all capital letters.
• Line-spacing between two different messages should be greater than line-
spacing between lines of the same multiple-line message.
• Text should not be run right up to the edge of the sign.
• If a line text needs to be reduced in order to fit on a sign, use only commonly
recognized abbreviations, reduce the number of words or reduce the size of the
type for the entire message. DO NOT condense the type face.
• The most important message should appear as the first line text and the most
important directional information should be at the top of the sign on free stand-
ing signs. Signs mounted to the ceiling of a parking garage should have the
most important message at the bottom of the sign.

Placement of Signs • Signs should, always be perpendicular to the intended viewer.

• Position signs with a clear line of sight from the viewing point to the sign face.
• Always evaluate a sign's location at night as well as in the daylight. Lighting
conditions and visibility may change at night making a particular location
unsuitable.
• Signs should be placed in a manner that will be clearly visible to driver all times
of the year. For example, make sure that snow removal doesn't bury signs.
• Signs that receive spray from irrigation sprinklers will show staining from the
minerals in the water resulting in a poor appearance. The life of the sign will
also be considerably shortened.
• Always consider the landscaping surrounding a sign when determining a sign's
location. It is important that trees, shrubs and other plants do not obscure the
sign.
• Do not place signs in locations where people may walk into them. Don't place
signs any closer than 12" to a walkway.

12/2012 Page 5-3-2

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

This section of the VA Signage Design Guide provides guidelines for the various
types of parking structure signs necessary to sign a parking structure, regardless of
size or type of use.

The following overview illustrates the various types of signs in this section. The
individual pages on each sign type provide more specific information and detailed
layouts.

Parking Structure Sign Each sign in the program guide has been given a specific sign type number des-
Designation ignation. This designation provides a common description that can be referenced
when programming a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign
type designations are derived.

PS - 01.01 A
PS Designates a parking structure sign.
01 Two digit numbers identifies a particular sign type family.
.01 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific
sign within the sign family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version

and/or layout for graphics.

12/2012 Page 5-4-1

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Sign Type PS-01

Non-illuminated directional sign Elevator
Elevator Exit Stair
with vinyl lettering

PS-01.01
22" – Long ceiling hung vehicular
directional sign

PS-01.02
22" – Short ceiling hung vehicular
directional sign

PS-01.03
PS-01.01 PS-01.02
15" – Long ceiling hung vehicular
directional sign

PS-01.04 Exit Elevators Exit

15" – Short ceiling hung vehicular
directional sign

PS-01.03 PS-01.04

Sign Type PS-02 Elevator

Non-illuminated directional sign Elevator Exit Stair
with vinyl lettering

PS-02.01
22" – Long beam-mounted
vehicular directional sign

PS-02.02
22" – Short beam-mounted
vehicular directional sign

PS-02.03
15" – Long beam-mounted PS-02.01 PS-02.02
vehicular directional sign

PS-02.04
15" – Short beam-mounted Exit Elevators Exit
vehicular directional sign

PS-02.03 PS-02.04

12/2012 Page 5-4-2

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Sign Type PS-03

Wall-mounted directional

PS-03.01
Small pedestrian and vehicle Elevators

oriented sign North

PS-03.02
1 5

Level
Level
Large pedestrian and vehicle
oriented sign

PS-03.01 PS-03.02

Sign Type PS-04

Wall mounted warning sign
Watchfor
Watch for
Pedestrians
Pedestrians

Watch for
No Pedestrians
Pedestrians
on Ramp

PS-04

Sign Type PS-05

Vehicular oriented column level
marker
South

Level

5
North

5 5 5
PS-05.01
Square column marker

PS-05.02
Narrow column marker

PS-05.03
Round column marker PS-05.01 PS-05.02 PS-05.03 PS-05.04

PS-05.04
Small round column marker

12/2012 Page 5-4-3

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Sign Type PS-05.05

Blade sign mounted to light pole

Sign Type PS-06

Overhead wall-mounted

South
identification sign

5 Stairs

PS-05.05 PS-06

Sign Type PS-07

Elevator and stairwell
identification vinyls Stairs Elevator

2
Level Level

PS-07.01 2 IN CASE OF FIRE,

USE S TAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
2
Text and number

PS-07.02
Number only

PS-07.01 PS-07.02

Sign Type PS-08,

09 and 10 Exit Entrance
Entrance/occupancy signs
Clearance 7'- 0"
PS-08
10" Dimensional letters

PS-09
Clearance height "bang bar"

PS-10
Electronic lane use sign

PS-08 PS-09 PS-10

12/2012 Page 5-4-4

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

PS-11
Entrance/Exit sign

Exit Entrance
Clearance 8'-0" PS-09

PS-11

Sign Type PS-12.01

Panel informational signs

PS-12.03
Parking Stall Designation

PS-12.04
Handicapped parking stall

PS-12.05
Handicapped Parking Area

PS-12.07
Informational panel sign mounted
to wall

PS-12.03 PS-12.04

Parking
Only

PS-12.05 PS-12.07

12/2012 Page 5-4-5

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Sign Type PS-13

Electronic Stall Availability Sign

Entrance
Clearance 7'-0"

Spaces Available
LEVEL 5

LEVEL 4

LEVEL 3

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 1

PS-13

Sign Type PS-14

Exterior Building Mounted
Parking Directional/Availability Sign
P

PS-14

Sign Type PS-15

Painted Parking
Stall Identification

PS-15

12/2012 Page 5-4-6

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Parking Regulatory
See Exterior Sign Section for more Parking
detail. For
Government
Employees

Parking
Only

Informational Signs
See Interior Sign Section for
more detail. Elevator

NO
EXIT

44444
Mechanical
NO
IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
Room EXIT
USE ELEVATORS.

12/2012 Page 5-4-7

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Painted / Vinyl
Garage Core Graphics Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator

1
See page 5-5-18 for more details.
2

LEVEL
LEVEL
Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator
Level Level Level Level

1 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS. 1 2 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS. 2

Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator

Level Level

Stairs
Level

1
1 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
Elevator
Level

1
Stairs
Level

2
2 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
Elevator
Level

Painted Wayfinding
and Elevator
Area Identification Elevator Exit Stair
See page 5-5-19 for more details.

1 2 2

12/2012 Page 5-4-8

 PS-01.01 Parking Structure Signs
22" – Long Ceiling Hung Directional
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 3050 mm W
1' 10" H x 10' 0" W) Elevator Exit
Description
Non-illuminated, ceiling hung

North
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
5
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 2

message fields, 1 line of text at a
larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to 4

message fields, 2 lines of text, at a
smaller type size.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.
Message Layout A
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so visibility is not
obstructed by building support
Elevator Exit
beams. Align sign with flow of
traffic.
Message Layout B

Elevator
Stair Exit

12/2012 Page 5-5-1

 PS-01.01 Parking Structure Signs
Large Ceiling Hung Directional

3050 m m ( 10' - 0" )

EQ 2 642 m m ( 8' - 8 " ) EQ

559 m m ( 1'- 10" )

482.6 m m ( 1'- 7" )

38 m m ( 1- 1 /2 ")

152.4 mm (6") 177.8 mm (7 ")

63.5 mm (2-1/2") 50.8 mm (2 ")

EQ EQ
Message Layout A 152.4 m m ( 6" )

38 mm (1 -1 /2 ")
152.4 mm (6 ")
50.8 mm (2 ")

EQ EQ
Message Layout B 152.4 m m ( 6" )

12/2012 Page 5-5-2

 PS-01.02 Parking Structure Signs
22" – Short Ceiling Hung Directional
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 1830 mm W Elevator
(1' 10" H x 6' 0" W) Stair
Description
Non-illuminated, ceiling hung

North
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
5
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 1

message line at a larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to

2 message lines at a smaller type
size.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.
Message Layout A
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so invisibility is not
obstructed by building support
Elevator
beams. Align sign with flow of
traffic.
Message Layout B

Elevator
Stair

12/2012 Page 5-5-3

 PS-01.02 Parking Structure Signs
Small Ceiling Hung Directional

1829 m m ( 6 '-0 ")

EQ 142 2 m m ( 4 '-8 ") EQ

5 5 9 m m ( 1 '-1 0 ")
4 8 2 . 6 m m ( 1 '-7 ")

3 8 m m ( 1- 1/2")

1 5 2 .4 m m (6") 1 7 7 . 8 m m ( 7 ")
6 3 .5 m m (2 - 1/2") 5 0 . 8 m m ( 2 ")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")

Message Layout A

3 8 m m ( 1 -1 /2 ")
1 5 2 . 4 m m ( 6 ")
5 0 . 8 m m ( 2 ")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-4

 PS-01.03 Parking Structure Signs
15" – Long Ceiling Hung Directional
Size
Sign Face:
381 mm H x 3050 mm W
(1' 3" H x 10' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated, ceiling hung
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 2

message fields, 1 line of text, at a
larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to 4

message fields, 2 lines of text, at a
smaller type size.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.
Message Layout A
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Exit Elevators
Position sign so visibility is not
obstructed by building support
beams. Align sign with flow of
Message Layout B
traffic.

Elevator Exit
Stair Additional Parking

12/2012 Page 5-5-5

 PS-01.03 Parking Structure Signs
Large Ceiling Hung Directional

3050 mm (10'-0")
EQ 2642 mm (8'-8") EQ

381 mm (1'-3")
305 mm (1'-0")

38 mm (1-1/2")

152.4 mm (6")
50.8 mm (2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout A
152.4 mm (6")

32 mm (1-1/4")
101.6 mm (4")
38 mm (1-1/2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout B
152.4 mm (6")

12/2012 Page 5-5-6

 PS-01.04 Parking Structure Signs
15" – Short Ceiling Hung Directional
Size
Sign Face:
381 mm H x 1830 mm W
(1' 3" H x 6' 0" W)
Exit
Description
Non-illuminated, ceiling hung
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 1

message line at a larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to

2 message lines at a smaller type
size.

Graphic Process
Message Layout A
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.
Exit
Recommendations
Position sign so visibility is not
Message Layout B
obstructed by building support
beams. Align sign with flow of
traffic.
Exit
Additional Parking

12/2012 Page 5-5-7

 PS-01.04 Parking Structure Signs
Small Ceiling Hung Directional

1829 mm (6'-0")
EQ 1422 mm (4'-8") EQ

3 8 1 m m (1 '- 3 " )
3 0 5 m m (1 '- 0 " )

3 8 m m (1 - 1 /2 " )

1 5 2 .4 m m (6 " )
5 0 .8 m m (2 " )

EQ EQ
152. 4 m m ( 6 " )
Message Layout A

3 2 m m (1 - 1 / 4 " )
1 0 1 .6 m m (4 " )
3 8 m m (1 - 1 / 2 " )

EQ EQ
152. 4 m m ( 6 " )

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-8

 PS-02.01 Parking Structure Signs
22" – Long Beam Mounted Directional
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 3050 mm W
(1' 10" H x 10' 0" W)
Elevator Exit
Description
Non-illuminated, beam mounted
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 2

message fields, 1 line of text, at a
larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to 4

message fields, 2 lines of text, at a
smaller type size.

Graphic Process Message Layout A

Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Elevator Exit
Position sign on bottom edge of
beam/soffit and align sign with flow
of traffic.
Message Layout B

Elevator
Stair Exit

12/2012 Page 5-5-9

 PS-02.01 Parking Structure Signs
Large Beam Mounted Directional

3 0 5 0 mm (1 0 ' -0 ")
EQ 2 6 4 2 mm (8 ' -8 ") EQ

559 m m ( 1'- 10")

482.6 m m ( 1'- 7")

38 m m ( 1- 1 / 2")

1 52 . 4 m m (6 " ) 177.8 m m (7")

6 3 . 5 m m (2 - 1 / 2" ) 50.8 m m (2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout A
152.4 m m ( 6")

38 mm (1-1/ 2")
152.4 m m (6")
50.8 m m (2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout B
152.4 m m ( 6")

12/2012 Page 5-5-10

 PS-02.02 Parking Structure Signs
22" – Short Beam Mounted Directional
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 1830 mm W Elevator
(1' 10" H x 6' 0" W) Stair
Description
Non-illuminated, beam mounted
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 1

message line at a larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to

2 message lines at a smaller type
size.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.
Message Layout A
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign on bottom edge of
beam/soffit and align sign with flow
Elevator
of traffic.
Message Layout B

Elevator
Stair

12/2012 Page 5-5-11

 PS-02.02 Parking Structure Signs
Small Beam Mounted Directional

1829 mm (6'-0")
EQ 1422 mm (4'-8") EQ

559 mm (1'-10")
482.6 mm (1'-7")

38 mm (1-1/2")

152.4 mm (6") 177.8 mm (7")

63.5 mm (2-1/2") 50.8 mm (2")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")

Message Layout A

38 mm (1-1/2")
152.4 mm (6")
50.8 mm (2")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-12

 PS-02.03 Parking Structure Signs
15" – Long Beam Mounted Directional
Size
Sign Face:
381 mm H x 3050 mm W Exit Elevators
(1' 3" H x 10' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated, beam mounted
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 2

message fields, 2 lines of text, at a
larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to 4

message fields, 2 lines of text, at a
smaller type size.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl. Message Layout A

Colors

Exit
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart. Elevators
Recommendations
Position sign on bottom edge of
beam/soffit and align sign with flow
of traffic. Message Layout B

Elevator Exit
Stair Additional Parking

12/2012 Page 5-5-13

 PS-02.03 Parking Structure Signs
Large Beam Mounted Directional

3 0 5 0 m m ( 10' -0")
EQ 2 6 4 2 m m ( 8' -8") EQ

381 m m ( 1'- 3")

305 m m ( 1' -0")

38 m m ( 1 - 1/2")

152. 4 m m ( 6")
50. 8 m m ( 2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout A
152. 4 m m ( 6")

32 m m ( 1-1/ 4")
101. 6 m m ( 4")
38 m m ( 1-1/ 2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout B
152. 4 m m ( 6")

12/2012 Page 5-5-14

 PS-02.04 Parking Structure Signs
15" – Short Beam Mounted Directional
Size
Sign Face:
381 mm H x 1830 mm W Exit
(1' 3" H x 6' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated, beam mounted
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 1

message line at a larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to

2 message lines at a smaller type
size.

Graphic Process Message Layout A

Surface applied vinyl.

Exit
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Message Layout B
Position sign on bottom edge of
beam/soffit and align sign with flow
of traffic.
Exit
Additional Parking

12/2012 Page 5-5-15

 PS-02.04 Parking Structure Signs
Small Beam Mounted Directional

1 8 2 9 mm (6'- 0")
EQ 1 4 2 2 mm (4'- 8") EQ

381 mm (1'- 3")

305 mm (1'- 0")

38 mm (1- 1/2")

1 52.4 m m (6")
50.8 m m (2")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")
Message Layout A

32 mm (1- 1/ 4")
101.6 mm (4")
38 mm (1- 1/ 2")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-16

 PS-03.01 Parking Structure Signs
Small Wall Mounted Level and Directional
Size
Sign Face:
915 mm H x 610 mm W
(3' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description and Use

Floor identification and directional Stairs
information specifically targeted
to pedestrians. Floor identification North
signs to be placed next to or near

1
elevators, and exits.

Level
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A is used for

directional as well as floor level
information.

Message layout B is used for floor

level identification.

Message layout C is used to

provide directional information.

Graphic Process Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
Elevators North Elevators
chart.
Stairs

2 1
Recommendations
Position sign so pedestrians have Exit
a clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Level

Level

12/2012 Page 5-5-17

 PS-03.01 Parking Structure Signs
Small Wall Mounted Level and Directional

61 0 m m ( 2' - 0 " ) 3 mm (1/8")

45 7 m m ( 1' - 6 " )

914 mm (3'-0")

828 mm (2'-9")

1 0 1 . 6 m m ( 4" )
25.4 mm (1") 25 . 4 m m ( 1" )

95 mm (3-3/4")
38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2")
101.6 mm (4") 6 3 .5 m m ( 2 - 1 / 2 " ) 95 mm (3-3/4")

4 0 6 .4 m m ( 1 ' - 4 " ) 4 0 6 .4 m m ( 1 ' - 4 " )

50.8 mm (2") 5 0 .8 m m ( 2 " ) 5 0 .8 m m ( 2 " )

CL CL
3 8 m m ( 1- 1/ 2" ) 7 6 m m ( 3" ) 38 mm (1-1/2") 76 mm (3")

Message Layout A Message Layout B

1 0 1 . 6 m m ( 4" )
2 5 . 4 m m ( 1" ) 25 . 4 m m ( 1" )

95 mm (3-3/4")
38 mm (1-1/2")
101.6 mm (4") 6 3 .5 m m ( 2 - 1 / 2 " )
63.5 mm (2-1/2") 1 0 1 .6 m m ( 4 " )

4 4 .5 m m ( 1 - 3 / 4 " )

1220 mm (4'-0")

CL
Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 5-5-18

 PS-03.02 Parking Structure Signs
Large Wall Mounted Level and Directional
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 813 mm W
(4' 0" H x 2' 8" W)

Description and Use Elevators

Floor identification and directional

5
information specifically targeted to
vehicular traffic. Floor identification
signs to be placed next to or near

Level
elevators, and exits.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A is used for

directional as well as floor level
information.

Message layout B is used for floor

level identification.

Message layout C is used to

provide directional information.

Graphic Process Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
Elevators South Elevators

chart. Stairs

5 5
Exit
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
Level
Level

clear, unobstructed view of the

sign.

12/2012 Page 5-5-19

 PS-03.02 Parking Structure Signs
Large Wall Mounted Level and Directional

813 mm (2'-8") 3 m m (1 / 8 " )

610 mm (2'-0")

1219 mm (4'-0")

1118 mm (3'-8")

139.7 mm (5-1/2")
3 1 .8 m m ( 1 1 / 4 " ) 50.8 mm (2")

127 mm (5")
50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
139.7 mm (5-1/2") 8 9 m m (3 - 1 / 2 " ) 127 mm (5")

482.6 mm (1'-9") 482.6 mm (1'-9")

63.5 mm (2-1/2") 63.5 mm (2-1/2")

50.8 mm (2") EQ EQ CL
101.6 mm (4") 50.8 mm (2") 101.6 mm (4")

Message Layout A Message Layout B

139.7 mm (5-1/2")
31.8 mm (1-1/4") 50.8 mm (2")

127 mm (5")
5 0 . 8 m m (2 " )
139.7 mm (5-1/2") 89 mm (3-1/2")
76 mm (3") 133.4 mm (5-1/4")

50.8 mm (2")

1220 mm (4'-0")

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 5-5-20

 PS-04.01 Parking Structure Signs
Wall Mounted Warning
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 1067 mm W
(1' 6" H x 3' 3" W)

Description and Use

Precautionary information placed
strategically to avoid traffic conflict Watchfor
Watch for
Pedestrians
Pedestrians
or accidents.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions) No Pedestrians
on Ramp

Message layout A is pedestrian

regulatory sign.

Message layout B, C, D, E and F

are used primarily for vehicular
traffic.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl. Message Layout A Message Layout B

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart. No Pedestrians Watch for
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
on Ramp Pedestrians
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout C Message Layout D

Do Not
Merging Traffic
Enter
Message Layout E Message Layout F

EXIT One Way

12/2012 Page 5-5-21

 PS-04.01 Parking Structure Signs
Wall Mounted Warning
990 mm (3 ' -3 " ) 3 mm (1 / 8 " )
3 5 mm (1 -3 / 8 " )
CL
3 8 mm (1 -1 / 2 " )

76 mm (3")
8 2 . 5 mm (3 -1 / 4 " )
8 9 mm (3 -1 / 2 " )
457 m m (1'-6")
3 8 mm (1 -1 / 2 " )

Message Layout A & B

CL

1 2 7 mm (5 “)

3 8 mm (1 -1 / 2 " )

Message Layout C
355.6 mm (1'-2")
EQ EQ EQ
EQ
8 9 mm (3 -1 / 2 " )

1 1 4 mm (4 -1 / 2 " )
355. 6 mm (1'-2") 3 8 mm (1 -1 / 2 " )

EQ
Message Layout D

EQ 63.5 mm (2-1 / 2 " ) EQ

139. 7 mm (5-1/2")

165 m m (6-1/2") 1 9 0 . 5 mm (7 -1 / 2 " )

Message Layout E

EQ 38 m m (1 -1 / 2 " ) EQ

165 m m (6-1/2")

114 m m (4-1/2") 1 6 5 mm (6 -1 / 2 " )

Message Layout F
12/2012 Page 5-5-22
 PS-05.01 Parking Structure Signs
Square Column Marker
Size
Sign Face:
839 mm H x 559 mm W
(2' 9" H x 1' 10" W)

Description and Use

Floor level identification marker for
placement on the wide faces of the
column.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing

South
for dimensions)

5
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout A
South

5
12/2012 Page 5-5-23
 PS-05.01 Parking Structure Signs
Square Column Marker

559 mm (1'-10")
76 mm (3") 419 mm (1'-4 1/2") 3 mm (1/8")
EQ EQ

838 mm (2'-9")

762 mm (2'-6")

368.3 mm (1'-2 1/2")

57 mm (2-1/4")

EQ EQ

Message Layout A

1372 mm (4'-6")

12/2012 Page 5-5-24

 PS-05.02 Parking Structure Signs
Narrow Column Marker
Size
Sign Face:
839 mm H x 407 mm W
(2' 9" H x 1' 4" W)

Description and Use

Floor level identification marker for
placement on the faces of narrow
columns.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Level
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

5
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout A
Level

5
12/2012 Page 5-5-25
 PS-05.02 Parking Structure Signs
Narrow Column Marker

3 5 5 . 6 mm (1 '-4 ")
76 m m ( 3" ) 2 6 6 . 7 mm (1 0 -1 /2 ") 3 mm ( 1/ 8" )
EQ EQ

838 m m ( 2' -9" )

762 m m ( 2' -6" )

2 2 9 mm (9 ")

5 7 mm (2 -1 /4 ")

EQ EQ

Message Layout A

1 3 7 2 mm (4 '-6 ")

12/2012 Page 5-5-26

 PS-05.03 Parking Structure Signs
Round Column Marker
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description and Use

Floor level identification marker for
placement on round columns.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process North

Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
5
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 5-5-27

 PS-05.03 Parking Structure Signs
Round Column Marker

610 m m ( 2 '-0") 2 mm (1/6")

CL

50. 8 mm (2")
38 mm (1-1/2")
63. 5 mm (2-1/2")

89 mm (3-1/2")

6 1 0 m m ( 2' - 0" )

266. 7 mm (10-1/2")

50. 8 mm (2")

Message Layout A

1525 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 5-5-28

 PS-05.04 Parking Structure Signs
Small Round Column Marker
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 559 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 6" W)

Description and Use

Floor level identification marker for
placement on round columns.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process

5
Surface painted

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 5-5-29

 PS-05.4 Parking Structure Signs
Small Round Column Marker

454 mm (1'- 6" )

CL

EQ

4 5 4 mm ( 1 ' - 6" ) 305 mm (1'- 0" )

EQ

Message Layout A

1525 mm (5'- 0" )

12/2012 Page 5-5-30

 PS-05.05 Parking Structure Signs
Pole Mount Marker
Size
Sign Face:
839 mm H x 559 mm W
(2' 9" H x 1' 10" W)

Description

South
Floor Level identification marker for
placement on pole.
5
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the Sign Mounted in Front and Back of Pole
sign.
South

South

South

5 5 5

Single Flag Mounted Sign Double Flag Mounted Sign

South

Message Layout A
5
12/2012 Page 5-5-31
 PS-05.05 Parking Structure Signs
Pole Mounted Marker

559 mm (1'-10")
76 mm (3") 419 mm (1'-4 1/2") 3 mm (1/8")
EQ EQ

838 mm (2'-9")

762 mm (2'-6")

368.3 mm (1'-2 1/2")

57 mm (2-1/4")

EQ EQ

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 5-5-32

 PS-06.01 Parking Structure Signs
Wall Mounted Identification
Size
Sign Face:
305 mm H x 1067 mm W
(1' 0" H x 3' 6" W)

Description and Use

Stairwell and elevator identification
sign. Stairs Elevator

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process Signtype:

Surface applied vinyl. IN-01.04
IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so pedestrians have
a clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout A

Elevator

12/2012 Page 5-5-33

 PS-06.01 Parking Structure Signs
Wall Mounted Identification

1069 mm (3'-6")
3 mm (1/8")
889 mm (2'-11")
CL

305 mm (1'-0")
266.7 mm (10-1/2") 127 mm (5")

76 mm (3")

Message Layout A

CL

39 mm (1-1/2")

12/2012 Page 5-5-34

 PS-07.01 Parking Structure Signs
Floor Level Identification Vinyls
Size
Sign Face:
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Description and Use

Signtype:
Floor level identification for
placement on stairwell and elevator Stairs IN-01.04 Elevator
Level Level

2 2
doors.
IN CASE OF FIRE,

Message layout A is aligned flush

USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.

right and message layout B is

aligned flush left. Either layout can
be used to designate a stairwell or
an elevator. Text should be aligned
along the opening side of the door.
Use right aligned text on doors that
open from right to left and use left
aligned text on doors that open
from left to right.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process Message Layout A

Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.
Stairs
Level

Message Layout B
2
Elevator
Level

2
12/2012 Page 5-5-35
 PS-07.01 Parking Structure Signs
Floor Level Identification

Al i gn

89 m m (3-1/ 2")

50. 8 m m (2")

50. 8 m m (2")
25. 4 m m (1")

177. 8 m m (7" )

Message Layout A

Al i gn

8 9 m m ( 3 -1 /2 " )

5 0 .8 m m ( 2 " )

5 0 .8 m m ( 2 " )
2 5 .4 m m ( 1 " )

1 7 7 .8 m m ( 7 " )

Message Layout B

102 m m (4" )

1220 m m (4' -0")

12/2012 Page 5-5-36

 PS-07.02 Parking Structure Signs
Floor Level Identification Vinyls
Size
Sign Face:
25 mm H (1' 0" H)

Description and Use

Floor level identification for
placement inside stairwells.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
2
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: white, T2

2
Message Layout A

2
Message Layout B
LEVEL

12/2012 Page 5-5-37

 PS-07.02 Parking Structure Signs
Floor Level Identification Vinyls

305 mm (1'-0")

Message Layout A

102 mm (4")

1220 mm (4'-0")

12/2012 Page 5-5-38

 PS-08 Parking Structure Signs
Dimensional Letters
Size
254 mm H (10" H)
PS-10
Description Exit PS-08 Entrance PS-08
Individual letters to identify an
entrance or exit. Clearance 7'- 0" PS-09

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Fabricated or cut out painted
aluminum letters.

Colors
Text: Various

Message Layout A

Exit

12/2012 Page 5-5-39

 PS-08 Parking Structure Signs
Dimensional Letters

25.4 mm (1/2")
50.8 mm (1")

254 mm (10")

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 5-5-40

 PS-09 Parking Structure Signs
Clearance Height Bang Bar
Size
Sign Face:
152 mm H x various lengths
(6" H)

Description and Use

Ceiling hung vehicular clearance
identification marker to be placed
Clearance 7'-0"
at all entrances and at grade level PS-09.01 PS-09.02
changes.

Clearance height “bang bars” are

required within a parking structure
when clearance levels change on
ramps or between floors.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: black
Background: yellow, black

Recommendations
“Bang bars” made from PVC
provide sufficient clearance
notification and will not damage
vehicles upon contact. Aluminum or
steel pipe can damage vehicles.

Message Layout A

Clearance 7'- 0"

(Lengths will vary)

NOTE: Confirm actual clearance height in the parking structure.

Mount bottom of sign to match clearance height stated on sign.

12/2012 Page 5-5-41

 PS-09 Parking Structure Signs
Clearance Height Bang Bar

Va r ia b le
3 8 m m (1 -1 / 2 ")
3 8 m m (1 -1 / 2 ") CL

EQ
8 8 .9 m m ( 3 - 1 / 2 " )
EQ

152 mm (6") Ø

Message Layout A PS-09.01

152 mm (6")

PS-09.02

12/2012 Page 5-5-42

 PS-10 Parking Structure Signs
Electronic Lane Use Sign
Size
305 mm H x 2438 mm W
(1' 0" H x 8' 0" W) Messaging changes as use changes
Description
Sign to inform status of
alternating entrance / exit lane.

Sign Components
Sign cabinet with electronic
lane use information.

Graphic Process
Electronic (LED)

Mounting
Wall or beam mounted

Installation
It is recommended that this
sign be installed above entry to
alternating entrance/exit lane.
PS-08 PS-09

Exit Entrance
Clearance 7'-0"

Clearance 7'-0"

12/2012 Page 5-5-43

 PS-10 Parking Structure Signs
Electronic Lane Use Sign

138mm (5.5")

2438 mm (8'-0")

305 mm (1'-0")

Electronic (LED) messaging changes from “Parking” to “Lane Closed”

as use of lane changes from and entrance to an exit.

Exit Entrance
Clearance 7'- 0"
-6”

Clearance 7'- 0"

12/2012 Page 5-5-44

 PS-11 Parking Structure Signs
Entrance and Exit Identification
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 3050 mm W
(1' 3" H x 10' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated, free swinging
Exit Entrance
ceiling hung sign with, and without, Clearance 8’-0” PS-09
bang bar. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them entrance identification and
information.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Sign Face:
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Sign is for parking structure
entrances that are high or do not Message Layout
have a surface to mount letters or a
sign panel

Exit

12/2012 Page 5-5-45

 PS-11 Parking Structure Signs
Entrance and Exit Identification

3050 mm (10'-0")
EQ 2642 mm (8'-8") EQ 76 mm ( 3" )
CL

Va r ie s

3 81 mm (1 '-3 ")
3 0 5 mm ( 1'- 0" ) 203 mm (8")
50.8 mm (2")

S ee Sign Type
PS-09

12/2012 Page 5-5-46

 PS-12.03 Parking Structure Signs
Parking Stall Designation
Size
Sign Face: 457 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height: 1829 mm

(6' 0")

Description
Non-illuminated post or wall
mounted parking identification
and informational sign. This type
of sign is for use in identifying or
controlling specific parking areas,
spaces or stalls.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

This sign with symbol or title and

the appropriate text shall be used
as shown in the adjacent examples.

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: refer to color chart. Wall Mounted Option Post Mounted Option
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl

Recommendations Message Layout A Message Layout B

Position sign on wall so drivers
have a clear, unobstructed view of
the sign.

When placing this type of sign

near parking places, be sure the
sign is set far enough back that
over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

Other possible Other possible

messages for this layout messages for this layout

1) Visitors Only 1) Director

2) Buses Only 2) Chief of Staff
3) Authorized Vehicles Only 3) Volunteers
4) Staff Only 4) Consultant
5) Motorcycle Parking
6) Officer of the Day
7) Outpatient Only
8) Government Vehicle
9) Police Only
10) Employee of the Month
11) Car Pool

12/2012 Page 5-5-47

 PS-12.03 Parking Structure Signs
Parking Stall Designation

Message Layout A and B Message Layout A and B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 5-5-48

 PS-12.04 Parking Structure Signs
Handicapped Parking Stall
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1830 mm (6' 0")

Description
Wall mounted or single post, non-
illuminated handicapped parking
stall sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Symbol and text must conform to

layout as shown.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl.

Colors
Text: white
Background: handicap blue
Post: refer to color chart Wall Mounted Option Post Mounted Option

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

When placing this type of sign Message Layout A Message Layout B

near parking places, be sure the
sign is set far enough back that
over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 5-5-49

 PS-12.04 Parking Structure Signs
Handicapped Parking Stall

Message Layout A & C Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-50

 PS-12.05 Parking Structure Signs
Handicapped Parking Area
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1830 mm (6’ 0”)

Description
Wall mounted or single post,
non-illuminated handicapped
parking area sign. Identification of
handicapped parking areas and
directional information regarding
access. These signs can also
be used to provide direction
information to drivers to direct them
to handicapped parking that may
not be obvious.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Symbol is to remain constant.
Below symbol arrows, text or text
and arrows can be used.
Wall Mounted Option Post Mounted Option
Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl.

Colors
Text: white
Background: handicap blue
Post: refer to color chart
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

When placing this type of sign

near parking spaces, be sure the
sign is set far enough back that
over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

12/2012 Page 5-5-51

 PS-12.05 Parking Structure Signs
Handicapped Parking Area

Message Layout A Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-52

 PS-12.07 Parking Structure Signs
Informational Panel
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 610 mm W
(3' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated wall panel sign. Stairs PS-06
Sign used to communicate various
informational or instructional
messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart
Post: refer to color chart.

Recommendations
Position sign where message
needs to be conveyed.

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 5-5-53

 PS-12.07 Parking Structure Signs
Informational Panel

3 mm (1/8")

Message Layout A

1 2 2 0 mm (4 '- 0 ")

12/2012 Page 5-5-54

 PS-13 Parking Structure Signs
Electronic Stall Availability Sign
Size
Size to vary depending upon
number of levels and electronic Spaces Available Spaces Available
system used.
LEVEL 5 LEVEL 5
Description
Sign to inform visitors as to the LEVEL 4 LEVEL 4
number of available parking
spaces per floor. Electronic LEVEL 3 LEVEL 3
counting devices record the
number of cars that enter and LEVEL 2 LEVEL 2
exit the garage and floor levels.
This information changes as the LEVEL 1 LEVEL 1
corresponding number of parking
spaces per floor is reflected.

Sign Components
Sign cabinet with electronic
occupancy information.

Graphic Process
Painted, screened or vinyl type/ Post Mounted Option Wall Mounted Option
graphics with electronic (LED)
occupancy information.

Colors
Color and materials to match
rest of exterior parking structure
signage. Spaces Available Spaces Available
Mounting LEVEL 4 LEVEL 2
Either post mounted or wall
mounted LEVEL 3 LEVEL 1
Installation
It is recommended that this
LEVEL 2
sign be placed at entrance, or
approaching, parking structure LEVEL 1
entry.

Examples of signs for parking structures of various levels

Sign on the left illustrates the integration of a color coded system.

Entrance PS-08

Clearance 7'-0" PS-09

Spaces Available
LEVEL 5

LEVEL 4

LEVEL 3

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 1

12/2012 Page 5-5-55

 PS-13 Parking Structure Signs
Electronic Stall Availability Sign

Electronic (LED) numbers

to indicate number of
available spaces. Numbers
Painted aluminum posts change as vehicles enter
approx. and exit parking structure.
Painted aluminum sign cabinet 178 mm (7")
height to vary depending

Text: Vinyl

Minimum 127 mm (5")

upon number of levels

or Reflective
Vinyl

Post Mounted Option Wall Mounted Option

Entrance PS-08

Clearance 7’-0”
-6” PS-09

12/2012 Page 5-5-56

 PS-14 Parking Structure Signs
Exterior Building Mounted Parking Directional/Availability Sign
Size
Message
to vary
Layout A
approx.

P P
1270 mm H x 1016 mm W
(4' 2"H x 3' 4" W )

Description
Illuminated double sided parking
lot identification and parking stall
availability sign.

Sign Components
Framed sign cabinet with an
illuminated arrow and "parking"
identification message and an
electronic occupancy information
portion.

Graphic Process
Internally illuminated directional Side A Side B
arrow and "Parking" identification.
Electronic (LED) occupancy
information.
Message Message
Colors Layout B Layout C
"P" and arrow: white, background
color: blue to match T8.
VA Medical
Mounting
Mounted perpendicular to exterior
wall of parking structure.
Center VA

P
Installation
It is recommended that this sign
be placed above, or above and
Parking
adjacent to, the entrance to the
parking structure.

Layout Suggestions

P P

Side A Side B

12/2012 Page 5-5-57

 PS-14 Parking Structure Signs
Exterior Building Mounted Parking Directional/Availability Sign

approx. Internally Illuminated

965-1016 mm approx. “P” and arrow
(38˝-40˝) 178 mm (7˝)

approx. 1279 mm (50˝)

Message changes from

229 mm (9˝)
“Open” to “Full” depending
upon availability of parking

Side A Side B
Message Layout A

approx. 1219 mm (48˝)

203 mm (8˝)
VA Medical
Center
102 mm (4˝)

approx. 1626 mm 64˝)

approx. 1473 mm 58˝)

483 mm
(19˝)

229 mm (9˝)
229 mm (9˝)

Message Layout B Message Layout C

height to vary
bottom of sign minimum of
3048 mm (10') from ground

12/2012 Page 5-5-58

 PS-15 Parking Structure Signs
Stall Identification Number
Description
Painted parking stall numbers.

Recommendations
Stalls can be assigned a
designated number based on a
logical/sequential stall numbering
system. It is recommended that
each number be painted at the
isle facing end of each stall. The
ideal number height is 6 inches
(numbers should be no less than 4
inches in height).

Graphic Process
Painted stenciled numbers.

Colors
Colors need to contrast the
parking structure flooring. If the
floor is a light colored concrete, the
numbers should be black. If the
Center Painted
floor is a dark color, the numbers CL Number & Stall
should be white.

DRIVE AISLE

12/2012 Page 5-5-59

 Regulatory Parking Structure Signs
Regulatory Signs
Size
Sign Face:
Refer to Exterior Sign Types.

Description
Parking and traffic regulatory signs.

Recommendations
Display the most commonly used
signs as indicated. If other Traffic
Regulatory and Warning Signs
are needed, refer to MUTCD
(Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices).

Position sign so drivers have a

clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
See Sheet EN-06.08 for Details See Sheet EN-06.08 for Details
It should be noted that the decision
to use a particular traffic control Parking
device at a specific location
should be made on the basis of a For
standard traffic engineering study Government
of the location. Sign size should be Employees
based on traffic conditions. Where
these conditions are the same, all
signs of a similar type should be
the same size. Parking
Only

See Sheet EN10.1 for Other Traffic

Regulatory Signs and Details

12/2012 Page 5-5-60

 Parking Structure Signs
Identification Signs
Size
Sign Face:
Refer to Interior Sign Types.

Description
Information and room identification.
Elevator PS-06

NO
EXIT

44444
Mechanical
IN CASE OF FIRE, Room
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.

NO
EXIT

12/2012 Page 5-5-61

 Parking Structure Signs
Painted/Vinyl Floor, Wayfinding and Area Information Options
Description
Painted and/or vinyl options for Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator

1 2
garage core identification.

LEVEL

LEVEL
Graphic Process Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator
Painted or applied vinyl graphics. Level Level Level Level

1 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS. 1 2 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS. 2
Recommendations
It is recommended that all
painted graphics use contrasting
color combinations as well as
a color coding system to easily Garage core graphics:
differentiate one floor from the Light background color with graphics painted a darker color.
next. Color coding system should
be consistent amongst all signs
and graphics on a given floor.
For example, if a particular blue
is used to designate floor 1, Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator
that same blue should be used
throughout floor 1, on all signs
LEVEL 1 2

LEVEL
using a color coded system.
Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator
Level Level Level Level

Painted graphics may consist of 1 IN CASE OF FIRE,

USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
1 2 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
2
a light color on a dark painted
background or a dark color on
a light painted background.
Background color may extend the
entire length of a garage core wall
or may be limited to a designated Garage core graphics:
section surrounding the stair and Dark painted background color with graphics painted a lighter color.
elevator doors. Graphics should
be large enough to read from a
distance.

Vinyl Wraps may be applied to

stair and/or elevator doors. Vinyl
Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator
graphics include floor specific
imagery and color. Imagery may
1 3
LEVEL

LEVEL
be in the form of an illustrated
Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator
graphic, graphic pattern, or a Level Level Level

1
Level

photographic image. The vinyl may IN CASE OF FIRE,

USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
1 3 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
3
be applied to the entire surface of
a door or a selected portion.

In developing an approach to
applying a graphic language, to
distinguish one floor from the Vinyl graphic applied to stair and elevator doors.
next, one should be consistent Examples show applied graphic as a silhouetted image.
with the type of graphic treatment
throughout the parking structure.
For example, if on floor one a
photographic image covers the Stairs Elevator
Stairs Elevator
entire stair and elevator doors,
Level Level

1 2
a photographic image should be
applied in the same position on all
Stairs Stairs
subsequent floors. Imagery may Level
Elevator Level
Elevator

1 2
Level Level

change, however the approach IN CASE OF FIRE,

USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
1 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
2
and placement should remain
consistent.

Vinyl graphic applied to stair and elevator doors.

Examples show applied graphic as a photographic image.

12/2012 Page 5-5-62

 Parking Structure Signs
Painted Wayfinding and Area Information Options
Description
Painted Background
Options for painted columns /
column markers and overhead Painted Messaging
directional messaging.
Elevator
Graphic Process Elevator Exit Stair
Painted graphics/messaging.

Recommendations
It is recommended that all
painted graphics use contrasting
color combinations as well as
a color coding system to easily
differentiate one floor from the
next.

Messaging for painted overhead

Messaging with Single Line of Text Messaging with 2 Lines of Text
directional signage should be
placed on the bottom portion of
the beam (messaging on the top
portion of the beam is less visible).
Messaging should have a capital
height of no less than 4 inches.

Column graphics may consist of

a light color on a dark painted
background or a dark color on
a light painted background.
Background color may extend
the entire length of the column or
may be limited to a designated Painted Background Painted background

2
Painted Messaging showing entire
1 2
section behind the painted number.
Painted numbers need to be large column painted
enough to read from a distance.

3 4

12/2012 Page 5-5-63

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Specification Parking Structure Signs

The specifications for signs are available in the Master Construction Specifications
(PG-18-1) area of the VA Technical Information Library, which is available on the VA
web site under Office of Construction & Facilities Management.

www.cfm.va.gov/til/

Refer to Signage in the specifications, Division 10, Section 10 14 00.

For more information regarding specifications, contact the Office of Construction &
Facilities Management, Facility Standards Service.

The specifications require close coordination, taking into account the existing sign
program at a medical center, any sign demolition, sign maintenance and future
signing needs.

When preparing the specifications for a project, it will require editing to add and
indicate new signs or eliminate signs that are not needed. Also, it will be necessary
to adapt the specifications to project requirements required for the specific project in
which they are intended.

The sign message schedule is considered a part of the specifications and would
comprise a portion of the spec section. The configuration and format of the mes-
sage schedule may vary according to individual project requirements. The sign
message schedule format is shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide. It provides the method for identifying each sign location,
type and message along with other notations. The sign schedule contains important
information that the sign manufacturer and the sign installer will require for manu-
facturing and sign installation.

The sign message schedule must be coordinated with a sign location plan drawing
showing where signs are to be placed within a building or on the site. Refer to the
sign location plan example shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide.

For convenience, the sign type drawings can also be included in the specifications
as it own section.

12/2012 Page 5-6-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Construction Parking Structure Signs

PS Construction Detail 1
Sign Types: PS-01.01, PS-01.02,
PS-01.03, PS-01.04 Concrete joist

Stainless
Mounting bracketsteel cable
from inter
locking angle with set screw
Mechanical compression
attachment to sign panel
sleeve or swage as needed to
support weight of sign
All hardware used to be
Eye resistant
corrosion bolt as needed to
support weight of sign

Panels assembled with

tamper resistant mechanical
fasteners

Sign Support frame from aluminum

angle welded to sign panel

All hardware used shall be

corrosion resistant
Shallow hole expansion
anchor rated to support sign
weight.Sign panel
Depth with painted
of anchor not finish
to exceed 3/4” into concrete
3/4" Max

PS Construction Detail 2
Sign Types: PS-02.01, PS-02.02,
PS-02.03, PS-02.04
Shallow hole expansion
anchor rated to support
sign weight. Depth of
anchor not to exceed
3/4” into concrete

Sign panel with painted

finish

Mounting bracket from

aluminum angle
mechanically fastened
to concrete
Support frame from
aluminum angle welded
to sign panel

Panels assembled
together with tamper
resistant mechanical
fasteners

All hardware used to be

corrosion resistant

12/2012 Page 5-7-1

 Construction Parking Structure Signs

PS Construction Detail 3
Sign Types: PS-05.01, PS-05.02 Drive rivet nail-in anchor
PS-03 and PS-04 similar with heads painted to
match adjacent color.
Depth of anchor not to
exceed 3/4” into concrete

Painted aluminum sign

panel

PS Construction Detail 4
Sign Types: PS-05.03

Drive rivet nail-in anchor

with heads painted to
match adjacent color.
Depth of anchor not to
exceed 3/4” into concrete

Painted aluminum sign

panel at thickness panel as
needed to follow curve of
column

12/2012 Page 5-7-2

 Construction Parking Structure Signs

PS Construction Detail 5 Concrete

Sign Types: PS-09 and PS-11
Shallow hole expansion
anchor rated to support
sign weight. Depth of
anchor not to exceed
3/4” into concrete

Pivot point through bolt

with compression springs
as mounting point for sign
cabinet/bang bar
assembly

Galvanized steel channel

pivot/mounting bracket
mechanically fastened to
ceiling at two points with
bolts and expansion
anchors
CL Aluminum vertical
support welded to sign
cabinet with through
Front View hole for attachment to
anchored pivot bracket

Fabricated aluminum
sign cabinet painted all
sides welded to vertical
support

PS-11
All hardware used to be
corrosion resistant

Eye bolt as needed to

support weight of sign

Stainless steel cable

and mechanical
PS-09 compression sleeve or
swage as needed to
support weight of sign

Mechanical compression
sleeve or swage cable
stop as needed to
support weight of bang
bar

PVC Bang bar with

capped ends

1/8” dia. weep hole at

center of beam
CL

Side View

12/2012 Page 5-7-3

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Installation Parking Structure Signs

PS Installation Detail 1
Sign Types: PS-01.01, PS-01.02, Concrete
PS-01.03 and PS-01.04

3/4" Max
Shallow hole expansion
anchor rated to support
sign weight. Depth of
anchor not to exceed 3/4”
into concrete

Eye bolt as needed to

support weight of sign

Stainless steel cable with

mechanical compression
sleeve or swage as
needed to support weight
of sign

Eye bolt as needed to

support weight of sign

All hardware used to be

corrosion resistant

Sign

12/2012 Page 5-8-1

 Installation Parking Structure Signs

PS Installation Detail 2
Cross bracing cable hanging method to be used on all NOTE: Hanging signs subjected to
Sign Types: PS-01.01, PS-01.02, hanging signs where the ceiling to sign hang distance is windy conditions should be mounted
PS-01.03 and PS-01.04 2’-0” or greater or in areas of excessive wind. with 3 wires and trangulated.

Shallow hole expansion anchor rated to support sign

weight. Depth of anchor not to exceed 3/4” into concrete
Stainless steel cable cross bracing with mechanical
compression sleeve or swage as needed to support weight
of sign.
Concrete

PG Installation Detail 3
Sign Types: PS-02.01, PS-02.02,
PS-02.03 and PS-02.04
Concrete joist

Mounting bracket from inter

locking angle with set screw
attachment to sign panel

All hardware used to be

corrosion resistant

Sign

Shallow hole expansion

anchor rated to support sign
weight. Depth of anchor not
to exceed 3/4” into concrete
3/4" Max

12/2012 Page 5-8-2

 Installation Parking Structure Signs

PS Installation Detail 4
Sign Types: PS-05.01 and
PS-05.02
Concrete column

Drive rivet nail-in anchor

with heads painted to
match adjacent color.
Depth of anchor not to
exceed 3/4” into concrete

Painted aluminum sign

panel at thickness needed
to follow curve of column

PS Installation Detail 5
Sign Type: PS-05.03, PS-05.03

Concrete column

Drive rivet nail-in anchor

with heads painted to
match adjacent color.
Depth of anchor not to
exceed 3/4” into concrete

Painted aluminum sign

panel at thickness needed
to follow curve of column

Wall Mounting
Non-Illuminated Signs
Aluminum wall panel signs shall
be fastened with a minimum of 2
mechanical fasteners. Vandal-proof screws,
painted to match sign face
Anchors should be provided in
the wall that are suitable for the
particular type of wall surface
where the sign is being installed.

12/2012 Page 5-8-3

 Parking Lot
Signage

• Informational
• Disabled Access
• Parking Lot Identification
• Parking Stall

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Table of Contents

Section 6
Parking Lot Signage
• Planning Pages 6-2-1 – 6-2-2
• Helpful Hints Pages 6-3-1 – 6-3-2
• Overview Pages 6-4-1 – 6-4-3
• Parking Lot Signs Pages 6-5-1 – 6-5-19
• Specification Pages 6-6-1

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Planning Parking Lot Signs

Planning a Parking Lot The development of an effective parking lot sign program requires the coordination
Sign Program of several interrelated criteria.

An effective sign program must have to take into account the following:

1. Circulation system in the parking lot.

2. How do visitors currently drive around and through the parking lot?
3. Where do you want visitors to park? Where do you want staff to park? Where
is disabled access parking?
4. What is the desired path of travel on the roadway system, to parking, for visi-
tors and staff?
5. What is the desired path of pedestrian travel from parking to building
entrances?
6. Location of building entrances in relation to parking.
7. What is the availability and voltage of electricity at these areas?
8. Adequate light on and around directional signs.
9. Placement of signs in locations where people expect signage.
These elements help establish the basis of a clear sign program that communicates
and informs in a direct and simple manner.

A parking lot sign program that works well is one that has been planned as an
integrated whole from the vehicle directional signs, pedestrian directional signs,
building, and building entrance identification through parking lot exit signs.

Another important consideration is that a parking lot sign program needs to be

planned in accord with a cohesive organized parking plan for both visitors and staff.
The parking lot sign program needs to be coordinated with an organized parking
plan for both visitors and staff. Visitors will need wayfinding information, whereas
staff will not. In split use parking facilities where a section will be designated as
“visitor parking”and another section will be designated as “staff parking”, only the
visitor parking section will require wayfinding signage.

Types of Signs Non-illuminated signs with reflective letters will function well for secondary signs. It
is a good practice to make all non-illuminated exterior signs with reflective letters
and graphics as that will ensure the best possibility of the sign being read.

12/2012 Page 6-2-1

 Planning Parking Lot Signs

Color Coding Options Examples of Color Coding, No Imagery

Facilities with multiple parking
lots should consider color coding
lots by assigning each lot with a
specific color. Colors should be
distinctly different from one lot to
the next. For example, if one lot
is blue, the adjacent lot should be
an obvious different color, such as
orange or red.

Facilities that have one large

parking lot, or a few large parking
lots, should consider dividing those
lots into color coded zones to help
visitors remember the location
of their vehicle. Colors should be
distinctly different from one zone to
the next. For example, if one zone
is blue, the adjacent zone could be
orange, and another, green, etc.

In addition to color coding

parking lots or zones, one may
also consider using imagery to
differentiate one lot or zone, from
the next. The various images
assigned to each lot or zone
should be thematically related. For
example, one may choose trees
or leaves as a theme, where each
zone is associated with a distinctly
different looking leaf or tree image.
Imagery should consist of bold
graphics, that are easy to read and
interpret at a quick glance, such as
Examples of Combined Image and Color Coding
icons or silhouetted shapes.
(illustrations intended to convey idea, NOT actual layout, colors or artwork)
Zones can be designated either by
a number or letter, or a combination
of both.

A2 B2 C2

A2 B2 C2

12/2012 Page 6-2-2

 Helpful Hints Parking Lot Signs

The following are some general “Do’s and Don’ts” guidelines one can refer to when
developing a sign program: this is not intended to be a training section of the guide,
but to provide key information and suggestions that will hopefully reduce common
errors that are made when planning and programming a parking lot sign program.

General Guidelines • Never use text smaller than 3" capital letter height when a sign is intended to be
read from a moving vehicle.
• Text intended to be read by pedestrians should be a minimum of 1 1/2" capital
letter height.
• Use text which is familiar, easy to understand, and comfortable to the viewer.
• Always use the same words, names or titles throughout the sign program.
• All sign messages need to be a minimum of 24" above grade.
• When selecting a background color for the signs, select a complementary color
to the buildings on campus.
• Signs require maintenance. Cleaning and waxing will extend the life of exterior
signs.
• Landscaping around signs must be regularly trimmed to prevent plants from
obscuring signs.

Size of Sign to Use • Always consider the landscaping surrounding a sign when determining a sign's
size. It is important that shrubs and plants do not hide or obscure the sign.
• Lettering and sign panel size should be appropriate for the distance and speed
at which a sign is viewed.
• Signs to be read from vehicles need to be larger than signs for pedestrians.

Message Content • Keep sign messages brief.

• Unnecessary information on signs confuses the viewer.
• Typically, all signs, with the exception of directional signs, should convey no
more than one concept or thought.
• Use text (words) that can be quickly read by the viewer.
• Use the same wording throughout the sign program.
• On directional and informational signs provide only the information necessary
to make a decision at that particular location.
• Whenever possible, messages should be presented using positive information.
• On directional signs, do not anticipate decisions that can be made later.
Unnecessary or premature information will confuse the reader.
• Messages placed on signs should be concise, preferably with no more than
seven to eight words.
• For signs to be read from a moving vehicle, take into account the speed of the
car. At a slow speed the driver may be able to read 7 or 8 words. At a faster
speed they will only be able to read 4 or 5.
Message Layout • Use upper and lower case text whenever possible. Upper and lower case text is
easier to read and can be understood faster than text in all capital letters.

12/2012 Page 6-3-1

 Helpful Hints Parking Lot Signs

• Line-spacing between two different messages should be greater than line-

spacing between lines of the same multiple-line message.
• Text should not be run to the edge of the sign; always provide a margin.
• If a line text needs to be reduced in order to fit on a sign, use only commonly
recognized abbreviations, reduce the number of words, or reduce the size of
the type for the entire message. DO NOT condense the type face.
• The most important message should appear as the first line text and the most
important directional information should be at the top of the sign on free stand-
ing signs.

Placement of Signs • Signs should, if at all possible, always be perpendicular to the intended viewer.
• Position signs with a clear line of sight from the viewing point to the sign face.
• Always evaluate a sign's location at night as well as in the daylight. Lighting
conditions and visibility may change at night making a particular location
unsuitable.
• Signs should be placed in a manner that will be clearly visible to drivers at
all times of the year. For example, make sure that snow removal doesn't bury
signs.
• Signs that receive spray from irrigation sprinklers will show staining from the
minerals in the water resulting in a poor appearance. The life of the sign will
also be considerably shortened.
• Always consider the landscaping surrounding a sign when determining a sign's
location. It is important that trees, shrubs and other plants do not obscure the
sign.
• Do not place signs in locations where pedestrians may walk into them, or
where they will constrict disabled access paths of travel. Do not place signs any
closer than 12" to a walkway.
• Signs placed at the head of a parking stall need to be set far enough away that
the bumper of a car does not strike the sign (See PL-15).

12/2012 Page 6-3-2

 Overview Parking Lot Signs

This section of the VA Signage Design Guide provides sign guidelines for the vari-
ous types of parking lot signs necessary to sign any parking area, regardless of
size or type of use.

The following overview illustrates the various types of signs in this section. The
individual pages on each sign type provide more specific information and detailed
layouts.

Each sign in the program guide has been given a specific sign type number des-
Parking Lot Sign
ignation. This designation provides a common description that can be referenced
Designations
when programming a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign
type designations are derived.

PL - 12.03 A
PL Designates a Parking Lot sign.
12 Two digit numbers identify a particular sign type family like.
.03 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific
type of sign within the sign family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version

and/or layout for graphics.

12/2012 Page 6-4-1

 Overview Parking Lot Signs

Sign Type PL-12.01

Informational signs
P Notice
Motor vehicles parked in
Red zones, zones, reserved
spaces or in violation of V.A.
P
PL-12.01 Employee
parking regulations, will be
towed at owner's expense.
Vehicle Code. Sec. 1234567
Police Dept. 555-5555
Government
Vehicles

Post and panel sign

Only
Parking Persons entering government
property must consent upon
request, to the inspection of
all packages, luggage and
containers in their possession.
Lot 17 Refusal to consent to

PL-12.02
inspections is basis for
denial of admission.

Single post and panel sign

PL-12.03
Single post and panel sign

PL-12.04
Single post and panel sign

PL-12.05 PL-12.01 PL-12.02 PL-12.03

Single post and panel sign

PL-12.06
Blade sign mounted to light pole

PL-12.07
Panel sign mounted to wall
Employee
PL-12.08 Parking

Parking spinal cord stall Parking

Only Parking
M8
Only
PL-12.09
Spinal cord van parking stall

PL-12.04 PL-12.05 PL-12.06

PL-12.07 PL-12.08 PL-12.09

12/2012 Page 6-4-2

 Overview Parking Lot Signs

PL-13
Parking Availability Sign
Spaces Available

PL-13

PL-15
Painted Parking Stall Identification

PL-15

Parking
For
Government
Parking and Traffic Employees
Regulatory
See Exterior Sign Section for more
detail. Parking
Only

12/2012 Page 6-4-3

This page is intentionally left blank.
 PL-12.01 Parking Lot Signs
Post and Panel Informational
Size
Sign Face: 914 mm H x 610 mm W
(3' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height: 1982 mm

(6' 6")

Description
Large, non-illuminated post and
panel parking lot identification sign.
This sign type is for identifying
parking lots to drivers circulating on
a roadway system.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.)

Message Layout A is for identifying

visitor parking lots.

Message Layout B is to identify the

parking lot and label the lot with a
number or letter.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart
Post: refer to color chart Message Layout A Message Layout B

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Place signs in a highly visible

location adjacent to the driveway
entrance to a parking lot.

12/2012 Page 6-5-1

 PL-12.01 Parking Lot Signs
Post and Panel Informational

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 6-5-2

 PL-12.02 Parking Lot Signs
Single Post and Panel Informational
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 610 mm W
(3' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0")

Description
Non-illuminated single post and
panel sign with messages directed
specifically to drivers. This sign can
be used to communicate various
informational or instructional
messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.)

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart
Post: refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign where message Message Layout A
needs to be conveyed.

12/2012 Page 6-5-3

 PL-12.02 Parking Lot Signs
Single Post and Panel Informational

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 6-5-4

 PL-12.03 Parking Lot Signs
Parking Stall Designation
Size
Sign Face: 457 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0")

Description
Non-illuminated single post parking
identification and informational
sign. This type of sign is for use in
identifying or controlling specific
parking areas, spaces or stalls.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.)

This sign with symbol or title and

the appropriate text shall be used
as shown in the adjacent examples.

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart
Post: refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C
sign. When placing this type of sign
near curbs or parking places, be
sure the sign is set far enough back
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

Other possible messages Other possible messages Other possible messages

for this layout. for this layout. for this layout.

1) Visitors Only 1) Along Roadway 1) Director

2) Buses Only 2) Any Time 2) Chief of Staff
3) Authorized Vehicles Only 3) Fire Lane 3) Volunteers
4) On Paved Road Only 4) On the Grass 4) Consultant
5) Staff Only 5) 00am - 00pm 5) Motorcycle Parking
6) Officer of the Day
7) Outpatient Only
8) Government Vehicle
9) Police Only
10) Car Pool

12/2012 Page 6-5-5

 PL-12.03 Parking Lot Signs
Parking Stall Designation

Message Layout A and B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 6-5-6

 PL-12.04 Parking Lot Signs
Handicapped Parking Stall
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0")

Description
Single post, non-illuminated
handicapped parking stall sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.)

Symbol and text must conform to

layout as shown.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl

Colors
Text: white
Background: handicapped blue
Post: refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
Message Layout A Message Layout B
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

When placing this type of sign near

curbs or parking places, be sure
the sign is set far enough back
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 6-5-7

 PL-12.04 Parking Lot Signs
Handicapped Parking Stall

Message Layout A & C

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 6-5-8

 PL-12.05 Parking Lot Signs
Handicapped Parking Area
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0")

Description
Single post, non-illuminated
handicapped parking area sign.
Identification of handicapped
parking areas and directional
information regarding access.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.) Symbol is to
remain constant.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl

Colors
Text: white
Background: handicapped blue
Post: refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Message Layout A Message Layout B

When placing this type of sign near

curbs or parking spaces, be sure
the sign is set far enough back
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

12/2012 Page 6-5-9

 PL-12.05 Parking Lot Signs
Handicapped Parking Area

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 6-5-10

 PL-12.06 Parking Lot Signs
Pole Mounted Lot Identification or Area Sign
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description
Parking lot and parking area
identification sign for mounting
on light pole in parking lots and
parking areas where the size of
the parking lot is so large that zone
information is needed to assist the
drivers in locating their cars.

These signs should be double

faced (on each side of the pole)
and high enough to be clearly
visible throughout the parking lot.
Signs may be mounted in front of
the pole, or on either side of the
pole.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.) Message layouts
show various applications that
might be applicable.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl.

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart
Post: refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Install the signs in the position

that is clearly visible to drivers and
pedestrians up and down the path
of travel in the parking lot.

Single Flag Sign Double Flag Sign Side View

Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 6-5-11

 PL-12.06 Parking Lot Signs
Pole Mounted Lot Identification or Area Sign

Message Layout A

Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 6-5-12

 PL-12.07 Parking Lot Signs
Wall Informational Panel
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 610 mm W
(3' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated panel sign with
messages directed specifically
to drivers and pedestrian. This
sign can be used to communicate
various informational or
instructional messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.)

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl.

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart
Post: refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign where message
needs to be conveyed. Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 6-5-13

 PL-12.07 Parking Lot Signs
Wall Informational Panel

3 mm (1/8")

Message Layout A

1 2 2 0 mm (4 '- 0 ")

12/2012 Page 6-5-14

 PL-12.08 Parking Lot Signs
Spinal Cord / Permit Parking Sign
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 0" W)

Overall height:
1829 mm (6' 0")

Description
Non-illuminated single post permit
parking sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.)

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl

Colors
Text: white and black
Background: red and white
Post: refer to color chart

Installation
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

When placing this type of sign near

curbs or parking places, be sure
the sign is set far enough back
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 6-5-15

 PL-12.08 Parking Lot Signs
Spinal Cord / Permit Parking Sign

3"
(76.2 mm)
3"
(76.2 mm)

12"
(304.8 mm)

18"
(457 mm)

72"
(1828 mm)

12"
(304.8 mm)

1 1/4" (31.8 mm)

4 3/8" 1" (25.4 mm)

(110.0 mm) 5/8" (15.9 mm)

5/8" (15.9 mm)

6 1/8"
(155.6 mm) 1" (25.4 mm)

18"
(457.2 mm)

1" (25.4 mm)

7 1/2" 5/8" (15.9 mm)
(191.6 mm)

3 1/4" (82.6 mm)

1 1/4" (31.8 mm)

12/2012 Page 6-5-16

 PL-12.09 Parking Lot Signs
Spinal Cord / Permit Van Parking Sign
Size
Sign Face:
533 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 9" H x 1' 0" W)

Overall height:
1829 mm (6' 0")

Description
Non-illuminated single post permit
parking sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.)

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl

Colors
Text: white and black
Background: red and white
Post: refer to color chart

Installation
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

When placing this type of sign near

curbs or parking places, be sure
the sign is set far enough back
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 6-5-17

 PL-12.09 Parking Lot Signs
Spinal Cord / Permit Van Parking Sign
3"
(76.2 mm)
3"
(76.2 mm)

12"
(304.8 mm)

21"
(533.4 mm)

72"
(1828 mm)

12"
(304.8 mm)

1 1/4" (31.8 mm)

4 3/8" 1" (25.4 mm)

(110.0 mm) 5/8" (15.9 mm)

6 1/8" 5/8" (15.9 mm)

(155.6 mm) 1" (25.4 mm)

21"
(533.4 mm)

1" (25.4 mm)

7 1/2" 5/8" (15.9 mm)
(191.6 mm)

3 1/4" (82.6 mm)

1 1/4" (31.8 mm)

3"
(76.2 mm) 1" (25.4 mm)

12/2012 Page 6-5-18

 PL-13 Parking Lot Signs
Electronic Stall Availability Sign
Size
Size to vary depending upon CL
number of lots indicated and
electronic system used.

Description Spaces Available

Sign to inform visitors as to the
number of available parking
spaces per lot. Electronic counting
devices record the number of
cars that enter and exit the lot(s).
As this information changes, the
corresponding number of parking
stalls available per lot is reflected
on the sign.

An alternate to an electronic sign

that displays the actual number
of available parking spaces is an Example of single lot parking availability sign Alternate to parking space
electronic sign that only displays availability sign.
“open” when spaces are available
and “full” when NO spaces are
available.

Sign Components
Sign cabinet with electronic
occupancy information.
Spaces Available
Graphic Process
Painted, screened or vinyl graphics Spaces Available
with electronic (LED) occupancy LOT 1
information. LOT 1
Colors LOT 2
Color and materials to match rest LOT 2
of exterior parking signage.
LOT 3
Mounting
Post mounted

Installation
It is recommended that this sign be
placed at, or approaching, parking
lot entry.
Examples of signs indicating parking availability for multiple lots.
Sign on the right illustrates the integration of a color coded system.

Spaces Available

12/2012 Page 6-5-19

 PL-13 Parking Lot Signs
Electronic Stall Availability Sign

Painted aluminum posts Approx.

Painted aluminum Text:
178 mm (7")

127 mm (5")
sign cabinet Reflective Vinyl

Minimum
Height to vary depending
upon number of lots

Electronic (LED) numbers

to indicate number of
available spaces. Numbers
change as vehicles enter
and exit parking lot.

12/2012 Page 6-5-20

 PL-15 Parking Lot Signs
Stall Identification Number
Description
Painted parking stall numbers.

Recommendations
Stalls can be assigned a
designated number based
on a logical and sequential
stall numbering system. It is
recommended that each number
be painted at the isle facing end of
each stall. The ideal number height
is 6 inches (numbers should be no
less than 4 inches in height).

Graphic Process
Painted stenciled numbers.

Colors
Colors need to contrast the parking
lot pavement. If the pavement is
light in color, the numbers should
be black. If the pavement is a dark
color, the numbers should be white
Center Painted
or yellow. CL Number & Stall

DRIVE AISLE

12/2012 Page 6-5-21

 Parking Lot Signs
Regulatory
Size
Sign Face:
Refer to Exterior Sign Types.

Description
Parking and traffic regulatory signs.

Recommendations
Display the most commonly used
signs as indicated. If other Traffic
Regulatory and Warning Signs are
needed, refer to MUTCD (Manual
on Uniform Traffic Control Devices).

Position sign so drivers have a

clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

It should be noted that the decision See Sheet EN-10.1 for Other Traffic
to use a particular traffic control Regulatory Signs and Details
device at a specific location should
be made on the basis of a standard
traffic engineering study of the
location. Sign size should be based
on traffic conditions. Where these
conditions are the same, all signs
of a similar type should be the
same size.

12/2012 Page 6-5-22

 Parking Lot Signs
Flexible Sign Post
Description
Flexible single post sign

Recommendations
Flexible sign posts may be useful Extruded Metal
for signage located in front of a Sign Post
parking stall. There are occasions
when a driver may accidently hit/
bump these type of signs with their
vehicle. Having a flexible sign will
prevent damage to the sign as well
as reduce damage to the vehicle. Flexible
Component
Installation of Sign
There are different methods for
installing these types of signs.
The method of installation may
be dependent on the type of
flexible sign utilized as well as the
conditions of the pavement where
the sign is to be installed. A flexible
sign post vendor should be able to
provide installation instructions.

Flexible component at bottom of post allows Sign returns to upright position

sign to be pushed in a single direction if sufficient after pushing force is removed.
force is applied.

12/2012 Page 6-5-23

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Specification Parking Lot Signs

The specifications for signs are available in the Master Construction Specifications
(PG-18-1) area of the VA Technical Information Library, which is available on the VA
web site under Office of Construction & Facilities Management.

www.cfm.va.gov/til/

Refer to Signage in the specifications, Division 10, Section 10 14 00.

For more information regarding specifications, contact the Office of Construction &
Facilities Management, Facility Standards Service.

The specifications require close coordination, taking into account the existing sign
program at a medical center, any sign demolition, sign maintenance and future
signing needs.

When preparing the specifications for a project, it will require editing to add and
indicate new signs or eliminate signs that are not needed. Also, it will be necessary
to adapt the specifications to project requirements required for the specific project in
which they are intended.

The sign message schedule is considered a part of the specifications and would
comprise a portion of the spec section. The configuration and format of the mes-
sage schedule may vary according to individual project requirements. The sign
message schedule format is shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide. It provides the method for identifying each sign location,
type and message along with other notations. The sign schedule contains important
information that the sign manufacturer and the sign installer will require for manu-
facturing and sign installation.

The sign message schedule must be coordinated with a sign location plan drawing
showing where signs are to be placed within a building or on the site. Refer to the
sign location plan example shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide.

For convenience, the sign type drawings can also be included in the specifications
as it own section.

12/2012 Page 6-6-1

 Mandatory
VA Policy Signs
by Directive

• Consent to Inspection
• No Smoking
• No Weapons Permitted
• Business Hours
• Notice of Weapons Search
• Parking Notice
• Patient Rights and Responsibilities
• Policies and Directives
• No Weapons
• Security Notice

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Introduction

This section of the Sign and Graphic Design Guide is comprised of signs that
are REQUIRED to be posted by VA Policy Directive.

The text on each sign is specific and is not open to modification or revisions.
Placement of the signs is also specifically directed in the Policy Directive.

12/2012 Page 7-2-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Overview Mandatory Policy Signs

Mandatory Policy Sign Designations

Each sign in the program guide has been given a specific sign type number des-
ignation. This designation provides a common description that can be referenced
when programming a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign
type designations are derived:

IN - 02.03 A
I Designates an interior sign.
N Identifies the sign is non-illuminated.
02 Two digit number identifies a particular sign type family.
.03 The two digit number, following the period, identifies a specific
sign within the sign family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version

and/or layout for graphics.

Sign Type IN-02

Policy Signs
Introduction of weapons, unauthorized drugs and alcoholic
beverages on this property is prohibited (title 18 USC Section 930
and title 38 CFR Section 1.218) Persons entering this property
consent to an inspection of all packages, luggage and containers in
their possession when arriving. Refusal of content to search is
basis for denial of admittance. Violators are subject to arrest and
prosecution. Refusal of consent to an authorized search by

IN-02.01
medical personel is basis for discharge.

No Smoking
For the sake of your health & comfort of
others, smoking is prohibited in this
Medical Center. If you must smoke,
please do so only in designated areas.

"Consent to Inspection" sign

IN-02.02
"No Smoking" sign

IN-02.03
"No Weapons" sign

IN-02.01 IN-02.02

Introduction of weapons, unauthorized drugs and alcoholic

beverages on this property is prohibited (title 18 USC Section 930
and title 38 CFR Section 1.218) Persons entering this property
consent to an inspection of all packages, luggage and containers in
their possession when arriving. Refusal of content to search is
basis for denial of admittance. Violators are subject to arrest and
prosecution. Refusal of consent to an authorized search by
medical personel is basis for discharge.

IN-02.03

12/2012 Page 7-3-1

 Overview Mandatory Policy Signs

Sign Type IN-02

"Policy" Signs

IN-02.04
"Hours of Operation" sign
NOTICE OF
WEAPONS SEARCH
The possession of any weapon by persons

IN-02.05
entering this building is prohibited by law
(38 cfr & 1.218 (a)(13)). Persons entering
the building consent to a personal search
by metal detector and to the inspection of
Business Hours all packages, luggage and all containers in
their possession. Metal detector cannot
7:30 a.m. - 4:00 p.m. harm you and will not affect pacemakers,
Monday - Friday hearing aids, or film. Refusal of consent to
search is basis for denial of admittance.

"Notice of Weapons Search" sign

Visiting Hours Person legally authorized to possess
firearms must report to the center police.
7:30 a.m. - 4:00 p.m. Medical Center Director.
Monday - Friday
Closed for Regularly
Scheduled Holidays

IN-02.06
"Parking Restriction" sign

IN-02.07
"Patient Rights and
Responsibilities" sign

IN-02.08
"Policies and Directives" sign
IN-02.04 IN-02.05

PATIENT RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Veterans Health Administration (VHA) employees will respect and support your rights as a patient.
We are pleased you have selected us to provide your health care. We plan to make your visit or stay
as pleasant for you as possible. Your basic rights and responsibilities are outlined in this document.

NOTICE NOTICE
Please talk with VA treatment team members or a paitient advocate if you have any questions or would
like more information about your rights.
I. Respect and Nondiscrimination
• You will be treated with dignity, compassion and respect as an individual. Your privacy will be protected. You will receive
care in a safe environment. We will seek to honor your personal and religious values.

• You or someone you choose has the right to keep and spend your own money. You have the right to receive an
accounting of VA held funds.
• Treatment will respect your professional freedoms. In rare cases, the use of medication and physical restraints may be
used if all other efforts to keep you or others free from harm have not worked.
• As an inpatient or long term care resident you may wear your own clothes and keep personal items. This depends
on your medical condition.

• As an inpatient or long-term care resident, you have the right to social interaction and regular exercise. You will have the
opportunity for religious worship and spiritual support. You may decide whether or not to participate in these activities.

Parking restrictions Parking restrictions

You may decide whether or not to perform tasks in or for the Medical Center.
• As an inpatient or long-term care resident, you have the right to communicate freely and privately. You may have or refuse
visitors. You will have access to public telephones. You may participate in civic rights.
• As a long-term care resident, you can organize and take part in resident groups in the facility. Your family also can
meet with the families of other residents.

• In order to provide a safe treatment environment for all patients and staff, you are asked to respect other patients and

are enforced daily are enforced daily

staff and to follow the facility's rules. Avoid unsafe acts that place others at risk for accidents or injuries. Please
immediately report any condition you believe to be unsafe.

II. Information Disclosure and Confidentiality

• You will be given information about the health benefits that you can receive. The information will be provided in a
way you can understand.

by VA Police. by VA Police.
• You will receive information about the costs of your care, if any, before you are treated. You are responsible for paying
for your portion of the costs associated with your care.
• Your medical record will be kept confidential. Information about you will not be released without your consent
unless authorized by law (for example, State public health reporting). You have the right to information in your
medical record and may request a copyof your records. This will be provided except in rare situations where
your VA physician feels the information will be harmful to you. In that situation, you have the right to have this
discussed with you by your VA provider.

Violators are Violators are

• You will be informed of all outcomes of care, including any injuries caused by your medical care. You will be informed
about how to request compensation for injuries.

III. Participation in Treatment Decisions

• You, and any persons you choose, will be involved in all decisions about your care. You will be given information
you can understand about the benefits and risks of treatment. You will be given other options. You can agree to

subject to citation subject to citation

or refuse treatment. Refusing treatment will not affect your rights to future care but you have the responsibility
to understand the possible results to your health. If you believe you cannot follow the treatment plan, you have a
responsibility to notify the treatment team.

• As an inpatient or long-term care resident, you will be provided any transportation necessary for your treatment plan.
• You will be given in writing, the name and professional title of the provider in charge of your care. As a partner in the
healthcare process, you have the right to be involved in choosing your provider. You will be educated about your role and
responsibilities as a patient. This includes your participation in decision-making and care at the end of life.

and tow at owner’s and tow at owner’s

• Tell your provider about your current condition, medicines (including over-the-counter and herbals) and medical history.
Also, share any other information that affects your health. You should ask questions when you don't understand
something about your care. This will help in providing you the best care possible.

• You have the right to have your pain assessed and to receive treatment to manage your pain. You and your treatment
team will develop a pain management plan together. You are expected to help the treatment team by telling them if
you have pain and if the treatment is working.

expense. expense.
• You have the right to choose whether or not you will participate in any research project. Any research will be clearly
identified. Potential risks of the research will be identified and there will be no pressure for you to participate.

• You will be included in resolving any ethical issues about your care. You may consult with the Medical Center's Ethics
Committee and/or other staff knowledgeable about health care ethics.
• If you or the Medical Center believes that you have been neglected, abused or exploited, you will receive help.

(38 CFR Section (38 CFR Section

IV. Complaints
• You are encouraged and expected to seek help from your treatment team and/or a patient advocate if you have problems
or complaints. You will be given understandable information about the complaint process avaliable to you. You may
complain verbally or in writing, without fear of retaliation.

1.218) 1.218)

IN-02.06 single post wall mounted IN-02.07

option option

IN-02.08

12/2012 Page 7-3-2

 Overview Mandatory Policy Signs

Sign Type IN-02

"Policy" Signs

IN-02.10
"No Weapons" sign – small

IN-02.11
"No Weapons" sign – large

IN-02.12
"Security Notice" sign

IN-02.10

IN-02.11 Single Post Option Wall Mounted Option

IN-02.12

12/2012 Page 7-3-3

This page is intentionally left blank.
 IN-02.01
Mandatory Policy Signs
Consent to Inspection

Size
Sign Face:

152 mm H x 508 mm W

(6" H x 20" W)

Description
"Consent to Inspection" sign Introduction of weapons, unauthorized drugs and alcoholic

beverages on this property is prohibited (title 18 USC Section 930

is required to be placed at the and title 38 CFR Section 1.218). Persons entering this property

entrance of a building. consent to an inspection of all packages, luggage and containers
in
their possession when arriving. Refusal of consent to search
is

Message Configuration basis for denial of admittance. Violators are subject to arrest and

(Refer to message layout drawing prosecution. Refusal of consent to an authorized search by

medical personnel is basis for discharge.

for dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
For background and type colors,
refer to VA color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold Introduction of weapons, unauthorized drugs and alcoholic

beverages on this property is prohibited (title 18 USC Section

930

Mounting and title 38 CFR Section 1.218). Persons entering this property

Double sided foam tape or silastic consent to an inspection of all packages, luggage and containers
adhesive in
their possession when arriving. Refusal of consent to search
is

basis for denial of admittance. Violators are subject to arrest
and

Installation prosecution. Refusal of consent to an authorized search by

Sign can be coordinated to be

medical personnel is basis for discharge.

placed with other policy signs, IN­

02.2 and IN-02.3 that are required
at the entrance.
IN-02.01

1702 mm (5'-7")

12/2012 Page 7-4-1

 IN-02.01 Mandatory Policy Signs
Consent to Inspection

508 mm (20”)

Align
38 mm (1-1/2”)

22 mm (7/8”)
25 mm (3/8”)
5 mm (3/16”)

152 mm (6”)

3 mm (1/8”)

12/2012 Page 7-4-2

 IN-02.02 Mandatory Policy Signs
No Smoking
Size
Sign Face:
152 mm H x 508 mm W
(6" H x 20" W)

Description
"No Smoking" sign is required to be
placed at the entrance of a building.
No Smoking
For the sake of your health & comfort of
Message Configuration
others, smoking is prohibited in this
(Refer to message layout drawing
Medical Center. If you must smoke,
for dimensions).
please do so only in designated areas.
Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
For background and type colors,
refer to VA color chart.

Typography

No Smoking
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive For the sake of your health & comfort of
Installation
others, smoking is prohibited in this
Sign can be coordinated to be Medical Center. If you must smoke,
placed with other policy signs, please do so only in designated areas.
IN-02.01 and IN-02.03 that are
required at the entrance.
IN-02.02

1702 mm (5'-7")

12/2012 Page 7-4-3

 IN-02.02 Mandatory Policy Signs
No Smoking

508 mm (20”)

Align
38 mm (1-1/2”)

16 mm (5/8”)
30 mm (1-3/16”)

19 mm (3/4”)
152 mm (6”) 13 mm (1/2”)
5 mm (3/16”)
73 mm (2 - 7/8”) 13 mm (1/2”)
5 mm (3/16”)

3 mm (1/8”)

12/2012 Page 7-4-4

 IN-02.03 Mandatory Policy Signs
No Weapons Permitted
Size
Sign Face:
152 mm H x 508 mm W
(6" H x 20" W)
Whoever knowingly possesses or causes the presence of a firearm
Description or other dangerous weapon on the grounds or buildings of this
facility, or attempts to do so, is subject to fine or imprisonment of
"No Weapons" sign is required not more than one year, or both. 18 U.S.C. Section 930a. Whoever
to be placed at the entrance of a intends that a firearm or other dangerous weapon be used in the
commission of a crime and knowingly possesses or causes the
building. presence of a firearm or other dangerous weapon on the grounds or
buildings of this facility, or attempts to do so, is subject to fine or
Message Configuration imprisonment of not more than five years, or both. 18 U.S.C. Section
930b.
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic Plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
For background and type colors,
refer to VA color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold Whoever knowingly possesses or causes the presence of a firearm
or other dangerous weapon on the grounds or buildings of this
Mounting facility, or attempts to do so, is subject to fine or imprisonment of
Double sided foam tape or silastic not more than one year, or both. 18 U.S.C. Section 930a. Whoever
adhesive intends that a firearm or other dangerous weapon be used in the
commission of a crime and knowingly possesses or causes the
Installation presence of a firearm or other dangerous weapon on the grounds or
Sign can be coordinated to be
buildings of this facility, or attempts to do so, is subject to fine or
imprisonment of not more than five years, or both. 18 U.S.C. Section
placed with other policy signs,
930b.
IN-02.01 and IN-02.02 that are
required at the entrance. 1702 mm (5'-7")
IN-02.03

12/2012 Page 7-4-5

 IN-02.03 Mandatory Policy Signs
No Weapons Permitted

508 mm (20”)

Align
38 mm (1-1/2”)

16 mm (5/8”)
25 mm (3/8”)
3 mm (1/8”)

152 mm (6”)

3 mm (1/8”)

12/2012 Page 7-4-6

 IN-02.04 Mandatory Policy Signs
Business Hours
Size
Sign Face:
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description

Business Hours
"Hours of Operation" sign is
required to be placed at the
entrance of a building.

Message Configuration 7:30 a.m. - 4:00 p.m.

Monday - Friday
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

NOTE:
Hours and days of operation are
to be established on a facility by
facility basis.
Visiting Hours
Sign Components 7:30 a.m. - 4:00 p.m.
Acrylic plaque
Monday - Friday
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl
Closed for Regularly
Colors
For background and type colors, Scheduled Holidays
refer to VA color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
On wall, 1600 mm (63") to top of
sign, at the entrance.
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 7-4-7

 IN-02.04 Mandatory Policy Signs
Business Hours

229 mm (9”)

Align
19 mm (3/4”)

19 mm (3/4”)

15.9 mm (5/8”)

9.5 mm (3/8”)

12.7 mm (1/2”)
6.4 mm (1/4”)

13 mm (1/2”)

19 mm (3/4”)

15.9 mm (5/8”)
229mm (9”)
9.5 mm (3/8”)
12.7 mm (1/2”)
6.4 mm (1/4”)
12.7 mm (1/2”)

19 mm (3/4”)

9.5 mm (3/8”)
4.8 mm (3/16”)

3.2 mm (1/8”)

12/2012 Page 7-4-8

 IN-02.05 Mandatory Policy Signs
Notice of Weapons Search
Size
Sign Face:
381 mm H x 381 mm W
(15" H x 15" W)

Description
This is only required at metal
NotICe oF
detector screening devices and
is to be installed next to the WeaPoNS SeaRCH
detector and in a location that is
visible before passing through the
the possession of any weapon by persons
machine.
entering this building is prohibited by law
Message Configuration (38 cfr & 1.218 (a)(13)). Persons entering
(Refer to message layout drawing the building consent to a personal search
for dimensions).
by metal detector and to the inspection of
Sign Components all packages, luggage and all containers in
Acrylic plaque their possession. Metal detector cannot
harm you and will not affect pacemakers,
Graphic Process
hearing aids, or film. Refusal of consent to
Silk-screened
search is basis for denial of admittance.
Colors Person legally authorized to possess
For background and type colors, firearms must report to the center police.
refer to VA color chart.
Medical Center Director.
Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
On wall, adjacent to metal detector/
screening device, 1702 mm (67") to
top of sign

NOTICE OF
WEAPONS SEARCH
The possession of any weapon by persons
entering this building is prohibited by law
(38 cfr & 1.218 (a)(13)). Persons entering
the building consent to a personal search
by metal detector and to the inspection of
all packages, luggage and all containers in
their possession. Metal detector cannot
harm you and will not affect pacemakers,
1702 mm (5'-7")

hearing aids, or film. Refusal of consent to

search is basis for denial of admittance.
Person legally authorized to possess
firearms must report to the center police.
Medical Center Director.

Metal Detector

12/2012 Page 7-4-9

 IN-02.05 Mandatory Policy Signs
Notice of Weapons Search

381 mm (15”)

Align
31 mm (1 - 1/4”)

32 mm (1-1/4”)
25 mm (1”)
6 mm (1/4”)
25 mm (1”)

47 mm (1- 7/8”)

13 mm (1/2”)
6 mm (1/4”)
13 mm (1/2”)

381 mm (15”)

3 mm (1/8”)

12/2012 Page 7-4-10

 IN-02.06 Mandatory Policy Signs
Single Post Parking Notice
Size
Sign Face:
762 mm H x 610 mm W
(30" H x 24" W)

Description
Large, non-illuminated single
NOTICE NOTICE
Parking restrictions
post or wall mounted tow away are enforced daily
Parking restrictions
are enforced daily
by VA Police.
informational sign. Violators are
by VA Police.
Violators are
subject to citation subject to citation
and tow at and tow at
Sign is similar to sign type EN- owner’s expense.
(38 CFR Section 1.218)
owner s expense.
(38 CFR Section 1.218)
05.01. See exterior sign section for
construction and installation details.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: refer to color chart.

Installation Single Post Option Wall Mounted Option

It is recommended that this sign be
placed at the entrance drive to the
VA site.

Position sign so drivers have a

clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Message Layout
When placing this type of sign near
curbs or parking places, be sure
the sign is set far enough back

NOTICE
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

Parking restrictions
are enforced daily
by VA Police.
Violators are
subject to citation
and tow at
owner’s expense.
(38 CFR Section 1.218)

12/2012 Page 7-4-11

 IN-02.06 Mandatory Policy Signs
Parking Notice Sign: Single Post and Wall Mounted Options

76 mm (3”)
Sign Panel Mounted
to Wall with Adhesive

76 mm (3”)

1779 mm (5’ - 10”) 1779 mm (5’ - 10”)

610 mm (2’ - 0”)

Align

38 mm (1 - 1/2”)

73 mm (2 - 7/8”)

168 mm (3 - 5/8”)

76 mm (3”)

35 mm (1-3/8”)
25 mm (1”)
35 mm (1-3/8”)

762 mm (2’ - 6”)

3 mm (1/8”)

12/2012 Page 7-4-12

 IN-02.07 Mandatory Policy Signs
Patient Rights and Responsibilities
Size
Display Window:
Minimum size to fit graphic insert:
914 mm H x 610 mm W
(36" H x 24" W )
PATIENT RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Frame Size / Outer Dimensions: Veterans Health Administration (VHA) employees will respect and support your rights as a patient.
We are pleased you have selected us to provide your health care. We plan to make your visit or stay
as pleasant for you as possible. Your basic rights and responsibilities are outlined in this document.

to vary. Please talk with VA treatment team members or a paitient advocate if you have any questions or would
like more information about your rights.
I. Respect and Nondiscrimination
• You will be treated with dignity, compassion and respect as an individual. Your privacy will be protected. You will receive

Description
care in a safe environment. We will seek to honor your personal and religious values.
• You or someone you choose has the right to keep and spend your own money. You have the right to receive an
accounting of VA held funds.
Non-illuminated enclosed display • Treatment will respect your professional freedoms. In rare cases, the use of medication and physical restraints may be
used if all other efforts to keep you or others free from harm have not worked.
case / frame to accommodate foam • As an inpatient or long term care resident you may wear your own clothes and keep personal items. This depends
on your medical condition.

core mounted paper print behind • As an inpatient or long-term care resident, you have the right to social interaction and regular exercise. You will have the
opportunity for religious worship and spiritual support. You may decide whether or not to participate in these activities.

glass or acrylic. You may decide whether or not to perform tasks in or for the Medical Center.
• As an inpatient or long-term care resident, you have the right to communicate freely and privately. You may have or refuse
visitors. You will have access to public telephones. You may participate in civic rights.
• As a long-term care resident, you can organize and take part in resident groups in the facility. Your family also can
meet with the families of other residents.
• In order to provide a safe treatment environment for all patients and staff, you are asked to respect other patients and
staff and to follow the facility's rules. Avoid unsafe acts that place others at risk for accidents or injuries. Please
Options to include: immediately report any condition you believe to be unsafe.

II. Information Disclosure and Confidentiality

Swing frame (frame/case with • You will be given information about the health benefits that you can receive. The information will be provided in a
way you can understand.
hinged glass door) or front loading • You will receive information about the costs of your care, if any, before you are treated. You are responsible for paying
for your portion of the costs associated with your care.
snap/clip frame. • Your medical record will be kept confidential. Information about you will not be released without your consent
unless authorized by law (for example, State public health reporting). You have the right to information in your
medical record and may request a copyof your records. This will be provided except in rare situations where
your VA physician feels the information will be harmful to you. In that situation, you have the right to have this
discussed with you by your VA provider.

Sign Components • You will be informed of all outcomes of care, including any injuries caused by your medical care. You will be informed
about how to request compensation for injuries.

Non-illuminated III. Participation in Treatment Decisions

• You, and any persons you choose, will be involved in all decisions about your care. You will be given information
you can understand about the benefits and risks of treatment. You will be given other options. You can agree to

Graphic Process
or refuse treatment. Refusing treatment will not affect your rights to future care but you have the responsibility
to understand the possible results to your health. If you believe you cannot follow the treatment plan, you have a
responsibility to notify the treatment team.

VA provided poster • As an inpatient or long-term care resident, you will be provided any transportation necessary for your treatment plan.

• You will be given in writing, the name and professional title of the provider in charge of your care. As a partner in the
healthcare process, you have the right to be involved in choosing your provider. You will be educated about your role and
responsibilities as a patient. This includes your participation in decision-making and care at the end of life.

Colors • Tell your provider about your current condition, medicines (including over-the-counter and herbals) and medical history.
Also, share any other information that affects your health. You should ask questions when you don't understand
something about your care. This will help in providing you the best care possible.

Finish and colors: To match or • You have the right to have your pain assessed and to receive treatment to manage your pain. You and your treatment
team will develop a pain management plan together. You are expected to help the treatment team by telling them if

complement any existing or

you have pain and if the treatment is working.
• You have the right to choose whether or not you will participate in any research project. Any research will be clearly
identified. Potential risks of the research will be identified and there will be no pressure for you to participate.
designated color and material • You will be included in resolving any ethical issues about your care. You may consult with the Medical Center's Ethics
Committee and/or other staff knowledgeable about health care ethics.
palette. • If you or the Medical Center believes that you have been neglected, abused or exploited, you will receive help.

IV. Complaints

Mounting
• You are encouraged and expected to seek help from your treatment team and/or a patient advocate if you have problems
or complaints. You will be given understandable information about the complaint process avaliable to you. You may
complain verbally or in writing, without fear of retaliation.

Wall mounted with bolts into heavy

duty wall anchors.

Installation
It is recommended that this sign be
placed at building entrances or in
lobbies.

Position display so visitors have

a clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
1981 mm (6'-6")

12/2012 Page 7-4-13

 IN-02.07 Mandatory Policy Signs
Patient Rights and Responsibilities

to vary
minimum 610 mm (24”) to vary

to vary

minimum
915 mm (36”)

12/2012 Page 7-4-14

 IN-02.08 Mandatory Policy Signs
Policies and Directives
Size
Display Window:
Minimum size to fit graphic insert:
610 mm H x 457 mm W Rules and Regulations
(24" H x 18" W ) Governing Conduct on Veterans Affairs Property DECEMBER, 2009

TITLE 38 - PENSIONS, BONUSES, AND VETERANS' RELIEF, CHAPTER I - DEPARTMENT OF VETERANS AFFAIRS

Frame Size / Outer Dimensions: TITLE 38 CFR 1.218 - SECURITY AND LAW ENFORCEMENT AT VA FACILITIES

(6) Gambling. Participating in games for money or for tangible reserved for other persons or contrary to the direction of

to vary
(a) Authority and rules of conduct. Pursuant to 38 U.S.C. 901,
or intangible things, or the operating of gambling devices, the posted signs is prohibited. Creating excessive noise on hospi-
the following rules and regulations apply at all property under the
conduct of a lottery or pool, or the selling or purchasing of tal or cemetery premises by muffler cut out, the excessive use
charge and control of VA (and not under the charge and control
numbers tickets, in or on property is prohibited. of a horn, or other means is prohibited. Operation of a vehicle
of the General Services Administration) and to all persons enter-
in a reckless or unsafe manner, drag racing, bumping, overrid-
ing in or on such property. The head of the facility is charged with
(7) Alcoholic beverages and narcotics. Operating a motor ing curbs, or leaving the roadway is prohibited.
the responsibility for the enforcement of these rules and regula-
vehicle on property by a person under the influence of alcoholic

Description
tions and shall cause these rules and regulations to be posted in
beverages, narcotic drugs, hallucinogens, marijuana, barbitu- (13) Weapons and explosives. No person while on property
a conspicuous place on the property.
rates, or amphetamines is prohibited. Entering property under shall carry firearms, other dangerous or deadly weapons, or
the influence of any narcotic drug, hallucinogen, marijuana, explosives, either openly or concealed, except for official

Non-illuminated enclosed display

(1) Closing property to public. The head of the facility, or desig-
barbiturate, amphetamine, or alcoholic beverage (unless pre- purposes.
nee, shall establish visiting hours for the convenience of the
scribed by a physician) is prohibited. The use on property of any
public and shall establish specific hours for the transaction of
narcotic drug, hallucinogen, marijuana, barbiturate, or ampheta- (14) Demonstrations. (i) All visitors are expected to observe
business with the public. The property shall be closed to the

case / frame to accommodate foam

mine (unless prescribed by a physician) is prohibited. The proper standards of decorum and decency while on VA prop-
public during other than the hours so established. In emergency
introduction or possession of alcoholic beverages or any nar- erty. Toward this end, any service, ceremony, or demonstra-
situations, the property shall be closed to the public when rea-
cotic drug, hallucinogen, marijuana, barbiturate, and ampheta- tion, except as authorized by the head of the facility or desig-
sonably necessary to ensure the orderly conduct of Government

core mounted paper print behind

mine on property is prohibited, except for liquor or drugs pre- nee, is prohibited. Jogging, bicycling, sledding and other forms
business. The decision to close a property during an emergency
scribed for use by medical authority for medical purposes. of physical recreation on cemetery grounds is prohibited.
shall be made by the head of the facility or designee. The head of
Provided such possession is consistent with the laws of the
the facility or designee shall have authority to designate areas
State in which the facility is located, liquor may be used and (ii) For the purpose of the prohibition expressed in this para-

glass or acrylic.
within a facility as closed to the public.
maintained in quarters assigned to employees as their normal graph, unauthorized demonstrations or services shall be
abode, and away from the abode with the written consent of the defined as, but not limited to, picketing, or similar conduct on
(2) Recording presence. Admission to property during periods
head of the facility which specifies a special occasion for use VA property; any oration or similar conduct to assembled
when such property is closed to the public will be limited to
and limits the area and period for the authorized use. groups of people, unless the oration is part of an authorized
persons authorized by the head of the facility or designee. Such
service; the display of any placards, banners, or foreign flags
persons may be required to sign a register and/or display identifi-
(8) Soliciting, vending, and debt collection. Soliciting alms and on VA property unless approved by the head of the facility or
cation documents when requested to do so by VA police, or other
contributions, commercial soliciting and vending of all kinds, designee; disorderly conduct such as fighting, threatening,
authorized individual. No person, without authorization, shall
displaying or distributing commercial advertising, or collecting violent, or tumultuous behavior, unreasonable noise or coarse
enter upon or remain on such property while the property is
private debts in or on property is prohibited. This rule does not utterance, gesture or display or the use of abusive language to

Options to include:
closed. Failure to leave such premises by unauthorized persons
apply to (i) national or local drives for funds for welfare, health, any person present; and partisan activities, i.e., those involving
shall constitute an offense under this paragraph.
or other purposes as authorized under Executive Order 12353, commentary or actions in support of, or in opposition to, or
Charitable Fund Raising (March 23, 1982), as amended by attempting to influence, any current policy of the Government
(3) Preservation of property. The improper disposal of rubbish

Swing frame (frame/case with

Executive Order 12404 (February 10, 1983), and regulations of the United States, or any private group, association, or
on property; the spitting on the property; the creation of any
issued by the Office of Personnel Management implementing enterprise.
hazard on property to persons or things; the throwing of articles
these Executive Orders; (ii) concessions or personal notices
of any kind from a building; the climbing upon the roof or any part
posted by employees on authorized bulletin boards; and (iii) (15) Key security. The head of the facility of designee, will

hinged glass door) or front loading

of the building, without permission; or the willful destruction,
solicitation of labor organization membership or dues under 5 determine which employees, by virtue of their duties, shall
damage, or removal of Government property or any part thereof,
U.S.C. chapter 71. have access to keys or barrier-card keys which operate locks
without authorization, is prohibited. The destruction, mutilation,
to rooms or areas on the property.

snap/clip frame.
defacement, injury, or removal of any monument, gravestone, or
(9) Distribution of handbills. The distributing of materials such
other structure within the limits of any national cemetery is pro-
as pamphlets, handbills, and/or flyers, and the displaying of The unauthorized possession, manufacture, and/or use of
hibited.
placards or posting of materials on bulletin boards or elsewhere such keys or barrier cards is prohibited. The surreptitious
on property is prohibited, except as authorized by the head of opening or attempted opening of locks or card-operated barrier
(4) Conformity with signs and emergency conditions. The head
the facility or designee or when such distributions or displays are mechanisms is prohibited.
of the facility, or designee, shall have authority to post signs of a
conducted as part of authorized Government activities.

Sign Components
prohibitory and directory nature. Persons, in and on property,
(16) Sexual misconduct. Any act of sexual gratification on VA
shall comply with such signs of a prohibitory or directory nature,
(10) Photographs for news, advertising, or commercial pur- property involving two or more persons, who do not reside in
and during emergencies, with the direction of police authorities
poses. quarters on the property, is prohibited. Acts of prostitution or
and other authorized officials. Tampering with, destruction,

Non-illuminated
solicitation for acts of prostitution on VA property is prohibited.
marring, or removal of such posted signs is prohibited.
Photographs for advertising or commercial purposes may be For the purposes of this paragraph, an act of prostitution is
taken only with the written consent of the head of the facility or defined as the performance or the offer or agreement to per-
(5) Disturbances. Conduct on property which creates loud or
designee. form any sexual act for money or payment.
unusual noise; which unreasonably obstructs the usual use of
entrances, foyers, lobbies, corridors, offices, elevators, stairways,
Photographs for news purposes may be taken at entrances, Schedule of offenses and penalties. Conduct in violation of the
or parking lots; which otherwise impedes or disrupts the perform-

Graphic Process
lobbies, foyers, or in other places designated by the head of the rules and regulations set forth in paragraph (a) of this section
ance of official duties by Government employees; which prevents
facility or designee. subjects an offender to arrest and removal from the premises.
one from obtaining medical or other services provided on the
Whomever shall be found guilty of violating these rules and
property in a timely manner; or the use of loud, abusive, or
(11) Dogs and other animals. Dogs and other animals, except regulations while on any property under the charge and control

VA provided poster
otherwise improper language; or unwarranted loitering, sleeping,
seeing-eye dogs, shall not be brought upon property except as of VA is to the payment of a fixed sum in lieu of appearance
or assembly is prohibited. In addition to measures designed to
authorized by the head of the facility or designee. (forfeiture of collateral) as may be provided for in rules of the
secure voluntary terminations of violations of this paragraph the
local United States District Court. Violations included in the
head of the facility or designee may cause the issuance of orders
(12) Vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Drivers of all vehicles in or schedule of offenses and penalties may also subject an of-
for persons who are creating a disturbance to depart the prop-
on property shall drive in a careful and safe manner at all times fender to a term of imprisonment of not more than six months,
erty. Failure to leave the premises when so ordered constitutes a
and shall comply with the signals and directions of police and all as may be determined appropriate by a magistrate or judge of

Colors
further disturbance within the meaning of this rule, and the of-
posted traffic signs. The blocking of entrances, driveways, the United States District Court
fender is subject to arrest and removal from the premises.
walks, loading platforms, or fire hydrants in or on property is
prohibited; parking in unauthorized locations or in locations

Finish and Colors: To match WARNING

or complement any existing or WEAPONS PROHIBITED
Federal law prohibits the possession of firearms or other dangerous weapons in Federal facilities by all persons not specifically authorized by Title 18, United States Code, Section 930.
Violators will be subject to fine and/or imprisonment for periods up to five (5) years.

designated color and material

palette.

Mounting
Wall mounted with bolts into heavy
duty wall anchors.

Installation
It is recommended that this sign be
placed at building entrances or in
lobbies.

Position display so visitors have

a clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
1981 mm
1980 (6'-6")
mm (6'-6")

12/2012 Page 7-4-15

 IN-02.08 Mandatory Policy Signs
Policies and Directives

to vary

457 mm (18”)
to vary

to vary

minimum
610 mm (24”)

12/2012 Page 7-4-16

 IN-02.10 Mandatory Policy Signs
No Weapons Sign: Small
Size
152 mm H x 508 mm W
(6" H x 20" W )

Description
"No Weapons" sign to be placed at
all public building entrances.

Message Configuration
Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Background: white
Graphics: red, white, blue, and
black

Typography
Helvetica Medium Condensed:
Regular Condensed

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive.

Installation English Version

On wall, 1676 mm (66") to top of
top sign. When placed adjacent to
door, sign should be mounted on
hinged side of door.

Spanish Version
1676 mm (5'-6")

1676 mm (5'-6")

1676 mm (5'-6")

12/2012 Page 7-4-17

 IN-02.10 Mandatory Policy Signs
No Weapons Sign: Small

20"
(508 mm)

3/4" (19 mm)

1 1/2"
(38 mm)

6" 4"
(152 mm) (101 mm)
1" (25 mm)

1" (25 mm)

12/2012 Page 7-4-18

 IN-02.11 Mandatory Policy Signs
No Weapons Sign: Large
Size
762 mm H x 610 mm W
(30" H x 24" W )

Description
Non-illuminated wall mounted or
single post “No Weapons” sign.
To be placed at all public drive
entrances to site.

Message Configuration
Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.

Sign Components
Aluminum sign panel

Graphic Process
Silk-screened or surface applied
vinyl

Colors
Background: white
Graphics: red, white, blue, and
black

Typography Single Post Option Wall Mounted Option

Helvetica Medium
Helvetica Regular Italic

Installation
It is recommended that this sign be
placed at all public drive entrances
to site.

Position signs so drivers have a

clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

When placing this type of sign near

curbs or parking places, be sure
the sign is set far enough back
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

Message Layout: English Version Message Layout: Spanish Version

12/2012 Page 7-4-19

 IN-02.11 Mandatory Policy Signs
No Weapons Sign: Large

12/2012 Page 7-4-20

 IN-02.12 Mandatory Policy Signs
Security Notice Sign
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 457 mm W
(24" H x 18" W)

Description
Large, non-illuminated single post
or informational sign

Sign is similar to sign type

EN-05.01. See exterior sign section
for construction and installation
details.

Message Configuration
Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: refer to color chart.

Installation Single Post Option

It is recommended that this sign be
placed at hospital entrances, exits,
and building ventilation intakes.

Message Layout

12/2012 Page 7-4-21

 IN-02.12 Mandatory Policy Signs
Security Notice Sign

12/2012 Page 7-4-22

 Installation Mandatory Policy Signs

The VA Policy required sign types, for both the interior and exterior, are to be in-
stalled in a standard manner as shown in the interior and exterior sign section of
the Signage Design Guide. Refer to the installation drawings pages for specific
placement for each type of sign.

Interior
The interior policy required signs are acrylic and are to be installed using the same
techniques as described in the interior sign installation section of the Signage
Design Guide.

Exterior
The details showing the construction and installation of the exterior policy required
signs are covered in the exterior sign construction section of the Signage Design
Guide.

12/2012 Page 7-5-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Construction Mandatory Policy Signs

The VA Policy required sign types, for both the interior and exterior, are construct -
ed in a standard manner with the only variable being color. This section provides
an overview of the construction criteria.

Interior

The interior signs are acrylic with silk-screened text.

Detail 1: Hinged Swing Frame

Poster
Aluminum Case

Glazed Door

Detail 2: Snap/Clip Frame

Glass or Clear Acrylic Face

Poster Mounted to Foam Core

Exterior
The details showing the construction of the Policy signs are based on a concept of
an aluminum sign system. Refer to the Exterior Sign Section of the Signage Design
Guide. The illustrations are intended to show the desired configuration and intent of
the sign type.

12/2012 Page 7-6-1

 Code and
Life Safety
Signs

• Fire
• Evacuation
• Elevator
• Exit
• Door
• Caution
• Warning

12/2012 rev 10/01/2013

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Table of Contents

Section 8:
Code and Life Safety Signs
• Planning Pages 8-2-1 – 8-2-2
• Helpful Hints Pages 8-3-1
• Overview Pages 8-4-1 – 8-4-4
• Code and Life Safety Signs Pages 8-5-1 – 8-5-70
• Specification Pages 8-6-1
• Construction Pages 8-7-1
• Installation Pages 8-8-1 – 8-8-5

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Planning Code and Life Safety Signs

Planning a Code and The development of an effective Code and Life Safety sign program requires the co-
Life Safety Sign ordination of several related criteria and take in to account the following:
Program
1. Location of building entrances, exits, and elevators.
2. Character and configuration of the corridor system.
3. Normal circulation patterns of people moving within and around the facility.
4. Code required path of emergency egress travel within the building for visitors,
patients, and staff.
5. Location of emergency and fire equipment.
6. Placement of signs in locations where users customarily expect them or
where they are required by codes.
7. OSHA and other regulatory agency sign requirements.
8. Which signs can have permanent messages and which ones need to be
changeable.
9. Locations of other signs necessary for VA facility operations.
These elements help establish the basis of a clear code and life safety sign pro-
gram that communicates and informs in a direct and simple manner.

Types of Signs Code and Life Safety signs have been identified on each page with a description
of use and application. These signs are in the color, size, and shape to conform
with their respective function and application requirement. Some colors, sizes, and
shapes are determined by code.

This section covers the known required signs at the time of publication. Regulations
are constantly changing and revised signs may be required for code compliance.

Consult with the facility Safety Officer for the most current sign requirements.

Sizes of Signs Code and Life Safety sign sizes that are illustrated in this section have been deter-
and Lettering mined to work in most situations and conform to regulations.

The text and its size, as shown, has been determined to conform to regulations.

Placement of Signs Correct placement of signs is required for Code and Life Safety signs. Refer to the
detailed drawings and instructions covered in the Installation pages for each sign
type showing the placement position required for its use.

Care needs to be taken to place Code and Life Safety signs in a location that allow
clear viewing. Place signs so they are not obscured by furniture or equipment.

The placement of code and life safety signs takes priority over placement of items
such as chart holders, bulletin boards, pictures and art work. These types of items
will have to be relocated to meet the installation requirements of Code and Life
Safety signs.

12/2012 Page 8-2-1

 Planning Code and Life Safety Signs

Existing Sign Program Before implementing a new Code and Life Safety sign program, perform a
thourough evaluation of the demolition requirements of the current sign program
and the effects and impact on the facilities walls, doors and ceilings.

Check to see what is required to patch, seal and repair the building surfaces as a
result of removal of old signs. Repairs should be planned to match adjoining sur-
face. Evaluate if tile or stone surfaces are going to require repair or refurbishment.
Doors will need to be refinished or repainted.

Confirm that if the sign demolition scope of work requires the contractor to close off
any live electrical connections, make sure existing conductors and conduits are re-
moved to the nearest junction box and disconnected.

Do not remove any Code and Life Safety signs without having the replacement
signs available and installed at the same time the old signs are removed.

12/2012 Page 8-2-2

 Helpful Hints Code and Life Safety Signs

This is not intended to be a training section of the guide, but to provide key informa-
tion or instructions that will hopefully reduce some common errors that are made
when working out a Code and Life Safety sign program.

The following are some general “Do’s and Don’ts” that can be referred to when de-
veloping a Code and Life Safety sign program.

General Guidelines • Some Code and Life Safety signs have specific color requirements and they are
not to be altered.
• When selecting a background color for the signs that do not have a specific
color requirement, seek a complementary color to the building wall colors and a
color that conforms to the master sign program color.
• Signs do require maintenance. Cleaning will extend the life of a sign program.

Message Content • Code and Life Safety signs have specific text requirements and can not be
altered.
• Some signs will require specific text developed for each sign location. Refer to
the sign type drawings.

Message Layout • Some Code and Life Safety signs have specific text layout and text size require-
ments, and they are not to be altered.

Size of Sign to Use • Some Code and Life Safety signs have specific size requirements and they are
not to be altered.

Placement of Signs • Some Code and Life Safety signs have specific placement and location require-
ments and they are not to be altered.
• Be mindful when coordinating ceiling mounted signs so they do not obstruct or
block fire sprinkler systems, exit signs, or other signage.

12/2012 Page 8-3-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Overview Code and Life Safety Signs

This section of the VA Signage Design Guide provides sign guidelines for all the
types of Code and Life Safety signs that are necessary to sign any individual build-
ing, regardless of size or type of use.

The following Overview illustrates the various types of signs in this section. The
individual pages on each Sign Type provide more specific information and detailed
layouts.

Interior Sign Designations

Each sign in the program guide has been give a specific sign type number designa-
tion. This designation provides a common description that can be referenced when
programming a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign type
designations are derived.

IN - 01.28.03C
IN Designates an interior sign.
01 Two digit number identifies the Code and Life Safety Sign Family.
.28 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific sign
type within the sign family.

.03 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific
sub–group of sign within the sign family.

C The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version

and/or layout for graphics or symbols.

12/2012 Page 8-4-1

 Overview Code and Life Safety Signs

IN-01.01.01
Large Emergency Exit Plan

IN-01.01.03
Small Emergency Exit Plan,Hoptel
Room Emergency Exit Plan

IN-01.02
Fire Equipment Identification Sign

IN-01.03
Fire Procedure Sign

IN-01.01.01 & .03 IN-01.02 IN-01.03

IN-01.04
Elevator Call Button

IN-01.05
Fire Door Sign

IN-01.06
No Exit Sign

IN-01.04 IN-01.05 IN-01.06

IN-01.07.01
Exit Sign

IN-01.07.02
Exit Sign (Right Arrow)

IN-01.07.03
Exit Sign (Left Arrow)

IN-01.07.04
Exit Sign (Left and Right Arrows)

IN-01.08 IN-01.07.01, .02, .03, & .04 IN-01.08 IN-01.09

Automatic Fire Door (Hinged) Sign

IN-01.09
Automatic Fire Door (Roll Up) Sign

IN-01.10
Stair Identification Sign

IN-01.11
Stairwell Identification Sign

IN-01.12
Area of Refuge
(Evacuation Assistance)

IN-01.10 IN-01.11 IN-01.12

12/2012 Page 8-4-2

 Overview Code and Life Safety Signs

IN-01.13
Push Alarm Identification Sign

IN-01.14
Open Door Fire Safety Sign

IN-01.13 IN-01.14

IN-01.15
Hazard Material Information Sign

IN-01.16
Oxygen In Use Warning Sign

IN-01.17
Compressed Gas Warning Sign

IN-01.15 IN-01.16 IN-01.17

IN-01.18
Nonflammable Anesthesia
Restriction Sign

IN-01.19
Radioactive Material Warning Sign

IN-01.20
Radioactive Area Warning Sign
IN-01.18 IN-01.19 IN-01.20

IN-01.21
High Voltage Warning Sign

IN-01.22
CAUTION
Biohazard Warning Sign

IN-01.23
Laser Warning Sign
IN-01.21 IN-01.22 IN-01.23

12/2012 Page 8-4-3

 Overview Code and Life Safety Signs

IN-01.24
Occupational Exposure Area
Warning Sign

IN-01.25
No Re-Entry Floor Sign

IN-01.26
Push to Exit Sign IN-01.24 IN-01.25 IN-01.26

IN-01.27
Emergency Push to Open Sign

IN-01.28
Emergency Slide to Open Sign Exit Direction Up

IN-01.29
Direction of Exit Sign
IN-01.27 IN-01.28 IN-01.29

IN-01.30
No Re-entry Sign

IN-01.31
Fire Equipment Identification Sign

IN-01.32
Pregnancy Notification Sign
IN-01.30 IN-01.31 IN-01.32

IN-01.33
Re-entry Sign

IN-01.33

12/2012 Page 8-4-4

 IN-01.01.01 Code and Life Safety Signs
Emergency Exit Plan
Sign
508 mm H x 508 mm W
(20" H x 20" W)

Description and Use

NOTE: This sign type is optional
except for hoptels when they are
considered a hotel/dormitory type
Fire & Emergency
occupancy. Exit Plan
Warning: Do not use elevators in case of fire or
Evacuation Map/Fire Exit Plan other electrical emergencies. Use marked exits.
with pocket to accept map insert is
to be placed at points of exit and Insert
transition in a building (all elevators,
exits, and exiting stairwell doors);
other locations as needed. Use
this large size sign when large size
maps are necessary.

Evacuation maps can be created

by the medical center and inserted
into the sign in accord with the
facilities evacuation plan. The map
must be oriented relative to the
specific location of the sign i.e.,
(what is to the right on the drawing
should be to the right of the
viewer). Refer to the You Are Here
section (Section 10) for additional
information regarding maps.

Local fire departments may

request these signs be installed.
If requested, coordinate locations
with their requirements.

Message Configuration
Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions.

Sign Components
Face: clear 1.5 mm (1/16") non-
glare acrylic with subsurface
background color creating a clear
window.

Spacer to receive a clear 0.4 mm

(1/64") insert. Backing plaque:
surface painted 6 mm (1/4") acrylic.

Graphic Process
Sign: silk-screened. Insert: printed

Colors
Type: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
IN-01.01.1
Helvetica Bold
20" H x 20" W
Mounting
11"sided
x 17" Insert
1600mm (5'-3")

Double foam tape or silastic

1575 mm (5'-3")

adhesive.

Installation
11/17/03
On wall, 1600 mm (63") to top of
sign

12/2012 Page 8-5-1

 IN-01.01.01 Code and Life Safety Signs
Emergency Exit Plan

1600mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-2

 IN-01.01.03 Code and Life Safety Signs
Emergency Exit Plan and Hoptel Door Emergency Exit Plan
Sign
330 mm H x 330 mm W
13" H x 13" W)

Description and Use

NOTE: This sign type is optional
except for hoptels when they are Fire & Emergency
considered a hotel/dormitory type
occupancy.
Exit Plan
Warning: Do not use elevators in case of fire or
other electrical emergencies. Use marked exits.
Evacuation Map/Fire Exit Plan Insert
with pocket to accept map insert is
to be placed at points of exit and
transition in a building (all elevators,
exits and exiting stairwell doors);
other locations as needed.

Evacuation maps can be created by

the medical center and inserted into
the sign in accord with the facilities
evacuation plan. The map must
be oriented relative to the specific
location of the sign i.e., (what is to
the right on the drawing should be to
the right of the viewer). Refer to the
You Are Here section for additional
information regarding maps.

Local fire departments may request

these signs be installed. If so,
coordinate locations with their
requirements.

For hoptel use, install on door inside

every patient room with map insert
to correspond with each location.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Face: clear 1.5 mm (1/16") non-glare
acrylic with subsurface background
color creating a clear window.

Spacer to receive a clear 0.4 mm

(1/64") insert. Backing plaque:
surface painted 6 mm (1/4") acrylic

Graphic Process
Sign: silk-screened. Insert: printed

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.
1575 mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

Typography CL
Helvetica Bold
1600mm (5'-3")

Mounting
1600 mm (5'-3")

Double sided foam tape or silastic

adhesive

Installation Hoptel Installation Only

On wall, 1600 mm (63") to top of Install sign on the door,
sign. For hoptel: on back of door to be read from inside the room.
inside room, 1600 mm (63") to
center of sign

12/2012 Page 8-5-3

 IN-01.01.03 Code and Life Safety Signs
Emergency Exit Plan and Hoptel Door Emergency Exit Plan

Align
30 mm (1-3/16”)
16 mm (5/8”)
5.6 mm (7/32”)
16 mm (5/8”)
8.4 mm (21/64”)
6 mm (1/4”)
4 mm (5/32”)
6 mm (1/4”)

330 mm (1’-1”)

169 mm (6-11/16”) 178 mm (7”)

Window Pocket

5 mm (3/16”)
25 mm (1”) 23 mm (57/64”)

EQ. 285 mm (11-1/4”) Window EQ.

1.6 mm (1/16”)
330 mm (1’-1”) 1.6 mm (1/16”)
3.2 mm (1/8”)

CL
1575 mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600mm (5'-3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

Hoptel Installation Only

Install sign on the door,
to be read from inside the room.

12/2012 Page 8-5-4

 IN-01.02 Code and Life Safety Signs
Fire Equipment Identification Sign
Sign
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Fire equipment identification sign
is used to locate and identify fire
equipment cabinets.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text and symbol: white
Background: red

Typography
Helvetica Bold
Fire Equipment
Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
On wall, 1829 mm (72") to top of
sign, perpindicular to wall: 2032
mm (80") clear above floor.

NOTE
Code requirements for identifying
fire equipment state this sign
is to be mounted above the fire
equipment cabinet, flat against
the wall. An alternate option for
displaying this sign is to mount
it in the same location, but
perpendicular to the wall centered
above the cabinent. Refer to sign
type IN–01.31 for perpendicular/
blade mounted option.
1829 mm (6'-0")
1800 mm (6'-0")

FIRE
EQUIPMENT
FIRE CABINET
EQUIPMENT
CABINET

12/2012 Page 8-5-5

 IN-01.02 Code and Life Safety Signs
Fire Equipment Identification Sign

1829 mm (6'-0")

FIRE
EQUIPMENT
CABINET

12/2012 Page 8-5-6

 IN-01.03 Code and Life Safety Signs
Fire Procedure Sign
Sign
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Fire procedure sign to be installed
at elevators, adjacent to stairwell
doors, nurse stations, and other
locations as needed.
IN CASE OF FIRE
This sign is optional.
1. Rescue patients & visitors
Some facilities indicate that “E"
is to extinguish or evacuate. All of
from room.
the information provided on these
signs should be coordinated with
2. Activate fire alarm pull
the facility personnel who are station & contact
responsible for the facility fire plan.
emergency forces.
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering 3. Close all doors to rooms.
sizes and dimensions).
4. Extinguish fire with
Sign Components
Acrylic plaque portable fire extinguisher
Graphic Process
only if fire is small.
Silk-screened

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
On wall, 1600 mm (63") to top of
sign

EQ. EQ.
51mm (2")
1600mm (5'-3")

1575 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-7

 IN-01.03 Code and Life Safety Signs
Fire Procedure Sign

EQ. EQ.
51mm (2")
1600mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-8

 IN-01.04 Code and Life Safety Signs
Elevator Call Button
Sign
152 mm H x 229 mm W
(6" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Elevator call button fire procedure
sign to be installed at elevators.
Position above type IN-01.03.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque IN CASE OF FIRE,
Graphic Process
Silk-screened
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
Colors
USE ELEVATORS.
Text and symbols: white
Background: red

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered 51 mm (2") directly above
elevator call button

EQ. EQ.
EQ. EQ.
50mm (2")

51mm (2")

12/2012 Page 8-5-9

 IN-01.04 Code and Life Safety Signs
Elevator Call Button

EQ. EQ.
51mm (2")

12/2012 Page 8-5-10

 IN-01.05 Code and Life Safety Signs
Fire Door Sign
Sign
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Fire Door sign is used to identify a
fire door. Exception: signs shall not
be provided for fire doors that are
held open by automatic devices.

This sign is optional and not Fire

Door
required by the Life Safety Code.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened Keep closed
Colors
Text: white
Background: red
at all times.
Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign.

CL
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-11

 IN-01.05 Code and Life Safety Signs
Fire Door Sign

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-12

 IN-01.06 Code and Life Safety Signs
No Exit Sign
Sign
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

NO
Description and Use
No Exit sign used to identify a door
in a stairwell or other locations that
are not exits.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions). Letters in
"NO" must be 2" high and 3/8"
stroke width; letters in "EXIT" must
be 1" high and below "NO" per

EXIT
NFPA 101.

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign.

CL CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-13

 IN-01.06 Code and Life Safety Signs
No Exit Sign

CL CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-14

 IN-01.07 Code and Life Safety Signs
Exit Sign
Size
IN-01.07.01
229 mm x 559 mm

EXIT
(9" x 22")

IN-01.07.02
229 mm x 559 mm
(9" x 22")

IN-01.07.03
229 mm x 559 mm
(9" x 22")

IN0-1.07.04
229 mm x 712 mm
(9" x 28")

Description and Use

Non-illuminated exit sign used to
identify exit or direction to exit.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions). Letters IN-01.07.01 IN-01.07.02
must be no less than 6" in height

EXIT EXIT
per NFPA 101. Principal stroke of
letters must be no less than 3/4"
wide. Each letter must have a width
of no less than 2" except the letter
“I”. Minimum spacing between
letters must be no less than 3/8".

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque
IN-01.07.03 IN-01.07.04
Graphic Process

EXIT EXIT
Silk-screened

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Medium Condensed

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive
EXIT
EXIT
Installation
2032 mm (6'-8") max.

Center on soffit area directly above

2030 mm (6'-8") max.

door frame.

CL
CL
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 8-5-15

 IN-01.07 Code and Life Safety Signs
Exit Sign

IN01.07.01

IN01.07.02

IN01.07.03

IN01.07.04

CL
EQ

12/2012 Page 8-5-16

 IN-01.08 Code and Life Safety Signs
Automatic Fire Door Sign - Hinged Door
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Automatic
Do Not Block information to be
communicated at hinged fire doors
held open by automatic devices.

Message Configuration

Fire Door
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened
DO NOT BLOCK
Colors This fire door is arranged to
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.
swing closed automatically.
Typography Do not block the doorway or
Helvetica Bold
place any article in contact
Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
with the door.
adhesive

Installation
On door, 1600 mm (63") to top of
sign and 76 mm (3") over from door
edge. Install signs on both leaves
of double doors.

75 mm (3") 75 mm (3")

76 mm (3") 76 mm (3")
1575 mm (5'-3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-17

 IN-01.08 Code and Life Safety Signs
Automatic Fire Door Sign - Hinged Door

76 mm (3") 76 mm (3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-18

 IN-01.09 Code and Life Safety Signs
Automatic Fire Door Sign - Roll Up
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Do Not Block information to be

Automatic
communicated at roll down fire
doors held open by automatic
devices.

Fire Door
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
DO NOT BLOCK
Silk-screened
This fire door is arranged to
Colors
Text: refer to color chart. drop automatically.
Background: refer to color chart.
Do not block this area or
Typography
Helvetica Bold place any article under the
Mounting
door.
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
On wall, adjacent to door, 1600 mm
(63") to top of sign.

75 mm (3")

76 mm (3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-19

 IN-01.09 Code and Life Safety Signs
Automatic Fire Door - Roll Up

76 mm (3")

75 mm (3")
1600 mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-20

 IN-01.10 Code and Life Safety Signs
Stair Identification Sign
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W) Message Layout A

Description and Use

Identifies stairwell doors that are
fire exits. STAIR (#)
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering LEVEL 1
sizes and dimensions).
Stair level1
Sign Components
exit
Etched sign face laminated to
acrylic backing plaque

Graphic Process
Tactile text with accompanying
Braille

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Keep Door Closed
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography Layout A: To be used out side stairs access

Helvetica Bold door at ground level.
Grade 2 Braille

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic Message Layout B Message Layout C
adhesive

Installation STAIR 3 STAIR 3

Knob side of door, 1600 mm (63") LEVEL B LEVEL 2
to top of sign and 51 mm (2") over EXIT EXIT
from door frame STAIR UP STAIR DOWN
Stairs level (x) Stairs level(x)
For sign placement refer to the Exit stair up Exit stair down
Stairwell Guide in the Installation
Keep Door Closed Keep Door Closed
section.

Message Layout D Message Layout E

STAIR 3 STAIR 3
LEVEL 1 LEVEL 4
EXIT NOT AN EXIT
ROUTE Stairs level(x)
NOT AN EXIT
Stairs level (x)
Exit route

Keep Door Closed Keep Door Closed

Layouts B, C, D, E: To be used out side stairs access door

50 mm (2")
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-21

 IN-01.10 Code and Life Safety Signs
Stair Identification Sign

Message Layout A

Message Layouts B, C & D Message Layout E

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-22

 IN-01.11 Code and Life Safety Signs
Stairwell Identification Sign
Size
457 mm H x 457 mm W
(18" H x 18" W) Message Layout A

Description and Use

Stairwell, floor level and egress
information. Sign is located within
STAIR 5
the stair enclosure at each floor
landing and must be readily visible NO ROOF ACCESS

14
when stair door is in open or closed
position. Per NFPA 101, Section
7.2.2.5.4, Stairwell Identification
signs are required only at new
enclosed stairs serving three
or more stories and at existing
enclosed stairs serving five or more
stories.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
EXIT DOWN
Etched sign face laminated to
acrylic backing plaque.
TO FLOOR 1
Graphic Process
Silk-screened text. Dimensional
B2 THROUGH 14
floor number. Tactile text with
accompanying Braille.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.
Message Layout B Message Layout C
Typography
Helvetica Bold NORTH STAIR STAIR 5
Mounting ROOF ACCESS NO ROOF ACCESS

B1 1
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
1524 mm (60") to bottom of sign

For sign placement refer to the

Stairwell Guide in the Installation
section. EXIT UP
TO FLOOR 1 EXIT THIS FLOOR

B2 THROUGH 14 B2 THROUGH 14

51 mm (2")
1500mm
1524 (5'-0")
mm(5'-0")

12/2012 Page 8-5-23

 IN-01.11 Code and Life Safety Signs
Stairwell Identification Sign

25 mm (1”)

31 mm (1-1/4”)
13 mm (1/2”)
31 mm (1-1/4”)
11 mm (7/16”)
3.5 mm (9/64”)
25 mm (1”)

337 mm (1’-1-1/4”)

30 mm (1-3/16”) 13 mm (1/2”)
3.5 mm (9/64”)
30 mm (1-3/16”)
31 mm (1-1/4”)
115 mm (4-1/2”) 10 mm (3/8”)
31 mm (1-1/4”)
13 mm (1/2”)
3.5 mm (9/64”)
13 mm (1/2”)
31 mm (1-1/4”)

35 mm (1-3/8”)

381 mm (1’ 3”)

51 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")
1500 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 8-5-24

 IN-01.12 Code and Life Safety Signs
Area of Refuge (Evacuation Assistance)
Size
152 mm H x 229 mm W Message Layout A
(6" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Disabled evacuation assistance
directional sign indicating area of
refuge for evacuation assistance. AREA OF
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions). Position
REFUGE
arrow to communicate direction
in relation to the placement of the
sign in the building.

Sign Components
Etched sign face laminated to
acrylic backing plaque Area of Refuge

Graphic Process
Tactile text with accompanying
Braille

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold Message Layout B
Grade 2 Braille

Mounting

EXIT
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Knob side of door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign and 51 mm (2") over
from door frame or on wall
ROUTE
1600 mm (63") to top of sign.

exit route

50Cmm (2")
L
1600mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-25

 IN-01.12 Code and Life Safety Signs
Area of Refuge (Evacuation Assistance)

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

CL
1600mm (5'-3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-26

 IN-01.13 Code and Life Safety Signs
Push Alarm Identification Sign
Size
229 mm H x 381 mm W
(9" H x 15" W)

PUSH UNTIL
Description and Use
Push alarm identification sign is an
instructional sign for push alarmed
doors.

Message Configuration
ALARM SOUNDS
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).
DOOR CAN BE
OPENED IN 15
Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened SECONDS
Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

CL
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-27

 IN-01.13 Code and Life Safety Signs
Push Alarm Identification Sign

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-28

 IN-01.14 Code and Life Safety Signs
Open Door Fire Safety Sign
Size
77 mm H x 508 mm W
(3" H x 20" W)

Description and Use

Open door fire safety sign is used
to identify a particular door is a fire
safety door and is to remain open
at certain times.

Message Configuration
THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) WHEN THE BUILDING IS OCCUPIED
Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background: Refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered above door and 51 mm
(2") above door frame

EQ EQ
50 mm (2")

EQ EQ
51 mm (2")

12/2012 Page 8-5-29

 IN-01.14 Code and Life Safety Signs
Open Door Fire Safety Sign

508 mm (1’ 8”)

13 mm (1/2”)
19 mm (3/4”)
13 mm (1/2”)
19 mm (3/4”)
13 mm (1/2”)

16 mm (5/8”)

12/2012 Page 8-5-30

 IN-01.15 Code and Life Safety Signs
Hazardous Material Information Sign
Size
305 mm H x 305 mm W
(12" H x 12" W)

Description and Use

Hazardous materials information
C
sign used to easily identify specific

4
hazards within room, storage
cabinet or locker.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) Numbers
shown on this drawing are for
illustration purposes only. Provide
correct numbers, text and colors D

3 3
to correctly identify the hazardous
materials within a room. Refer to
NFPA (National Fire Protection
Association) or material data
sheet relating to materials for more
information regarding message.
A Identifies specific hazard
B Identifies health hazard
C Identifies fire hazard
D identifies reactivity
B

OX
Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened.

Colors
Text: black
Background: A
A white
B safety blue (OSHA)
C safety red (OSHA)
D safety yellow (OSHA)

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door and 1524 mm
(60") to center of sign

CL
4
3 3
OX
1500 mm (5'-0")

CL
4
3 3
OX
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 8-5-31

 IN-01.15 Code and Life Safety Signs
Hazardous Material Information Sign

CL
4
3 3
OX
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 8-5-32

 IN-01.16 Code and Life Safety Signs
Oxygen In Use Warning Sign
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Caution information regarding
oxygen in use. Sign must be
installed on all doors to rooms in
CAUTION
which oxygen is in use.

Messaging Configuration
OXYGEN IN USE
NO SMOKING
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque NO OPEN FLAMES
Graphic Process
Silk-screened.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

CL
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-33

 IN-01.16 Code and Life Safety Signs
Oxygen In Use Warning Sign

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-34

 IN-01.17 Code and Life Safety Signs
Compressed Gas Warning Sign
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Caution information regarding
gases in use. Sign must be
installed on all doors to rooms that
contain the listed gases. Adjust the
Warning
listing of gases to reflect the actual
gases being used in the laboratory. The following gases
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
in compressed
sizes and dimensions). cylinders are present
Sign Components
Acrylic plaque
in this laboratory:
Graphic Process
Silk-screened Acetylene Helium
Colors
Nitrogen Nitric Oxide
Text: refer to color chart. Argon Hydrogen
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

CL
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-35

 IN.01.17 Code and Life Safety Signs
Compressed Gas Warning Sign

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-36

 IN-01.18 Code and Life Safety Signs
Nonflammable Anesthesia Restriction Sign
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

RESTRICTED TO
Caution information regarding
anesthetic agents in use. Sign is
to be installed on the doors to all
operating rooms.

Message Configuration
NONFLAMMABLE
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions). INHALATION
Sign Components
Acrylic plaque ANESTHETIC
Graphic Process
Silk-screened.
AGENTS
Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

CL
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-37

 IN-01.18 Code and Life Safety Signs
Nonflammable Anesthesia Restriction Sign

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-38

 IN-01.19 Code and Life Safety Signs
Radioactive Material Warning Sign
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Caution information regarding
radioactive material. Sign is to be
installed on the doors to all rooms
where radioactive materials are in
use or stored.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

CAUTION
Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text and symbol: purple
Background: yellow Radioactive
Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Materials
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-39

 IN-01.19 Code and Life Safety Signs
Radioactive Material Warning Sign

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-40

 IN-01.20 Code and Life Safety Signs
Radioactive Area Warning Sign
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Caution information regarding area
with radioactive material. Sign
must be installed in areas where
radioactive materials are used or
stored.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

CAUTION
Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text and symbol: purple
Background: yellow Radioactive
Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Area
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

CL
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-41

 IN-01.20 Code and Life Safety Signs
Radioactive Area Warning Sign

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-42

 IN-01.21 Code and Life Safety Signs
High Voltage Warning Sign
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Caution information regarding high
electrical voltage. Sign must be
installed on the doors to all rooms
with high voltage (over 600 volt)
equipment.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text and symbol: black
Background: yellow
CAUTION
Typography
Helvetica Bold
High Voltage
Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

CL
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-43

 IN-01.21 Code and Life Safety Signs
High Voltage Warning Sign

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-44

 IN-01.22 Code and Life Safety Signs
Biohazard Warning Sign
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Caution information regarding
biohazard materials. Sign must be
installed on the doors of all rooms
where there is biohazard materials.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text and symbol: black
Background: orange CAUTION
Typography
Helvetica Bold Biohazard
Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

CL
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-45

 IN-01.22 Code and Life Safety Signs
Biohazard Warning Sign

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-46

 IN-01.23 Code and Life Safety Signs
Laser Warning Sign
Size
254 mm H x 356 mm W
(10" H x 14" W)

Description and Use

Caution information regarding
lasers. Sign must be installed

CAUTION
on the doors to all rooms where
lasers are used. Refer to the
Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) Manual for
more information on laser type and
class.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text and symbol: black
Background: yellow
Additional Colors:
Text and Symbol: Black, White,
Red, Blue Class II or Class IIIA Areas
Background: White

Typography
Helvetica Bold

DANGER NOTICE
Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation LASER REPAIR IN PROGRESS

Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign
Do not Enter When Light is Flashing
EYE PROTECTION REQUIRED

Class IIIA, IIIB, and IV Areas Temporary Laser-Controlled

Areas

CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-47

 IN-01.23 Code and Life Safety Signs
Laser Warning Sign

Class II, IIIA, IIIB and IV Areas

Temporary Laser-Controlled
Areas

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-48

 IN-01.24 Code and Life Safety Signs
Occupational Exposure Area Warning Sign
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

CAUTION
Caution information regarding
occupational exposure. Sign is
to be installed on doors to all
rooms where there is occupational
exposure.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).
Occupational
Sign Components
Acrylic plaque
Exposure
Graphic Process
Silk-screened
Area
Colors
Text: black
Background: yellow

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

CL CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-49

 IN-01.24 Code and Life Safety Signs
Occupational Exposure Area Warning Sign

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-50

 IN-01.25 Code and Life Safety Signs
No Re-Entry Floor Sign
Sign Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

No re-entry floor sign is used to
identify a door to a stairwell or
other locations, which locks will not
allow re-entry.
NO RE-ENTRY
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
FROM THIS
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
FLOOR
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Nearest unlocked
Silk-screened stair door above is
Colors Floor X
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart. Nearest unlocked
Typography stair door below is
Helvetica Bold
Floor Y
Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

CL
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")
stair side

12/2012 Page 8-5-51

 IN-01.25 Code and Life Safety Signs
No Re-Entry Floor Sign

229 mm (9”)

Align
22 mm (7/8”)

19 mm (3/4”)

19 mm (3/4”)

8 mm (5/16”)

19 mm (3/4”)

8 mm (5/16”)

19 mm (3/4”)

16 mm (5/8”)
229 mm (9”)
10 mm (3/8”)
6 mm (1/4”)
10 mm (3/8”)
6 mm (1/4”)
10 mm (3/8”)

13 mm (1/2”)

3 mm (1/8”)

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-52

 IN-01.26 Code and Life Safety Signs
Push To Exit Sign
Size
152 mm H x 152 mm W
(6" H x 6" W)

Description and Use

Push to exit sign is used to inform

Push
type of action needed to activate
door. Sign is to be installed on
doors to all exits where push

to
motion is needed to activate door.

Message Configuration

Exit
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
1600 mm (63") to top of sign and
51 mm (2") over from door frame

75 mm (3")
76 mm (3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-53

 IN-01.26 Code and Life Safety Signs
Push To Exit Sign

152 mm (6”)

Align
13 mm (1/2”)

16 mm (5/8”)

22 mm (7/8”)

6 mm (1/4”)

22 mm (7/8”)

152 mm (6”) 6 mm (1/4”)

22 mm (7/8”)

3 mm (1/8”)

7576mm
mm(3")
(3")
1600 mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-54

 IN-01.27 Code and Life Safety Signs
Emergency Push To Open Sign
Size
76 mm H x 229 mm W
(3" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

In emergency
Emergency push to open sign
is used to inform type of action
needed to activate door in case

push to open
of an emergency. Sign is to be
installed next to doors at all exits
where push motion is needed to
activate door.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart

Typography
Helvetica Condensed Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
1600 mm (63") to top of sign and
51 mm (2") over from door frame
1575 mm (5'-3")

1575 mm (5'-3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-55

 IN-01.27 Code and Life Safety Signs
Emergency Push To Open Sign

229 mm (9”)

Align
19 mm (3/4”)

6 mm (1/4”)

25 mm (1”)

6 mm (1/4”)
76 mm (3”)

25 mm (1”)

13 mm (1/2”)

3 mm (1/8”)
1600 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

1575 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-56

 IN-01.28 Code and Life Safety Signs
Emergency Slide To Open Sign
Size
76 mm H x 229 mm W
(3" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

In emergency
Emergency slide to open sign
is used to inform type of action
needed to activate door in case

slide to open
of an emergency. Sign is to be
installed next to doors at all exits
where slide motion is needed to
activate door.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart

Typography
Helvetica Condensed Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Knob side of door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign and 51 mm (2") over
from door frame

50 mm (2")
51 mm (2")
1575 mm (5'-3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-57

 IN-01.28 Code and Life Safety Signs
Emergency Slide To Open Sign

229 mm (9”)

Align
19 mm (3/4”)

6 mm (1/4”)

25 mm (1”)

6 mm (1/4”)
76 mm (3”)

25 mm (1”)

13 mm (1/2”)

3 mm (1/8”)

51 mm (2")
50 mm (2")
1600 mm (5'-3")

1575 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-58

 IN-01.29 Code and Life Safety Signs
Direction Of Exit Sign
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W Message Layout A
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Direction of exit sign used to
indicate direction egress. Sign is to
be installed next to doors at all exits
where direction is needed to exit.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components EXIT DIRECTION

Acrylic plaque
UP
Graphic Process
Tactile text with accompanying
Braille.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography Message Layout B Message Layout C

Helvetica Bold
Grade 2 Braille

Mounting
EXIT
Double sided foam tape or silastic EXIT

adhesive.

Installation
Knob side of door, 1600 mm (63") EXIT DIRECTION
to top of sign and 51 mm (2") over UP
from door frame

For sign placement refer to the

stairwell guide in the installation
section
Message Layout D

EXIT
ROUTE
EXIT ROUTE

50 mm (2")
CL
1600 mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'’-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-59

 IN-01.29 Code and Life Safety Signs
Direction Of Exit Sign
229 mm (9”)

Align
19 mm (3/4”)

22 mm (7/8”)

22 mm (7/8”)

13 mm (1/2”)

22 mm (7/8”)

19 mm
229 mm (9”)
(3/4”)
4.8 mm (3/16”)

22 mm (7/8”)

12.7 mm (1/2)
Braille

Braille

Message Layout A & B 3 mm (1/8”)

229 mm (9”) 229 mm (9”)

Align

19 mm (3/4”)
Align

19 mm (3/4”)

22 mm (7/8”) 22 mm (7/8”)

22 mm (7/8”) 22 mm (7/8”)

13 mm (1/2”) 13 mm (1/2”)

12.7 mm (1/2) Braille 22 mm (7/8”)

229 mm (9”) 12.7 mm (1/2)

12.7 mm (1/2) Braille

229 mm (9”)

Message Layout C Message Layout D

C
50 mmL (2")
1600 mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-60

 IN-01.30 Code and Life Safety Signs
No Re-entry Sign
Sign Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

NO
Description and Use
No re-entry sign is used to identify
an exit door which will lock and not
allow re-entry into room, floor or
building.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components

Re-entry
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1600 mm (63")
to top of sign

For sign placement refer to the

stairwell guide in the installation
section.

CL

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-61

 IN-01.30 Code and Life Safety Signs
No Re-entry Sign

229 mm (9”)

Align
19 mm (3/4”)

19 mm (3/4”)

70 mm (2-3/4”)

16 mm (5/8”)
229 mm (9”)

33 mm (1-5/16”)

CL

CL
1575 mm (5'-0")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-62

 IN-01.31 Code and Life Safety Signs
Fire Equipment Identification Sign
Sign Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Fire equipment identification sign
is a flag sign used to identify a fire
equipment cabinet.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque with aluminum
bracket for flag mounting

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text and symbol: white
Background: red
Bracket: aluminum

Typography
Fire Equipment
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Mechanical fasteners with anchors

Installation
Centered above fire equipment
cabinet a 2129 mm (7'-0") to bottom
of sign; mechanically fastened to
wall with expandable anchors as
needed for wall type.
Side A Side B
NOTE
Code requires that signage
identifying fire equipment needs
to be mounted above the fire
equipment cabinet, flat against
the wall. This perpendicular /
blade mounted variation is an
alternate option for displaying this Fire Equipment Fire Equipment
information. Refer to sign type
IN–01.02 for a wall mounted version
of this sign.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.
2100 mm (7'-0") MIN.

FIRE
FIRE EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT
CABINET
CABINET

12/2012 Page 8-5-63

 IN-01.31 Code and Life Safety Signs
Fire Equipment Identification Sign

229 mm (9”) 51 mm (2”)

CL

30 mm (1-3/16”)

127 mm (5”)

229 mm (9”)

19 mm (3/4”)

20 mm (13/16”)
2134 mmMIN.(7'-0") MIN.

FIRE
2100 mm (7'-0")

EQUIPMENT
CABINET

FIRE
EQUIPMENT
CABINET

12/2012 Page 8-5-64

 IN-01.32 Code and Life Safety Signs
Pregnancy Notification Sign
Sign Size
152 mm H x 152 mm W
(6" H x 6" W)

Description and Use

If you are
Pregnancy notification sign is used
to convey a request for patient
information. Sign is placed in
patient waiting areas, treatment
rooms and dressing rooms.
pregnant or
Message Configuration think you are
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions). pregnant,
Sign Components
Acrylic plaque
notify the
Graphic Process
technician.
Silk-screened

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
1600 mm (63") to top of sign
1600mm (5'-3")

1575 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-65

 IN-01.32 Code and Life Safety Signs
Pregnant Notification Sign

152 mm (6”)

Align
13 mm (1/2”)

13 mm (1/2”)

13 mm (1/2”)
6 mm (1/4”)
13 mm (1/2”)
6 mm (1/4”)
13 mm (1/2”)
152 mm (6”) 6 mm (1/4”)
13 mm (1/2”)
6 mm (1/4”)
13 mm (1/2”)
6 mm (1/4”)

3 mm (1/8”)
1600mm (5'-3")

1575 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-66

 IN-01.33 Code and Life Safety Signs
Re-entry Sign
Sign Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Re-entry Sign is used to identify an
entry door which will allow re-entry
into room, floor, or building.

Re-entry
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
Centered on door, 1575 mm (63")
to top of sign

For sign placement refer to the

stairwell guide in the installation
section.

50 mm (2")
CL
1575 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-67

 IN-01.33 Code and Life Safety Signs
Re-entry Sign

229 mm (9”)

Align
19 mm (3/4”)

51 mm (2”)

35 mm (1-3/8”)

229 mm (9”)

3 mm (1/8”)

CL 50 mm (2")
1600 mm (5'-3")
1575 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 8-5-68

 Specifications Code and Life Safety Signs

The specifications for signs are available in the Master Construction Specifications
(PG-18-1) area of the VA Technical Information Library, which is available on the VA
web site under Office of Construction & Facilities Management.

www.cfm.va.gov/til/

Refer to Signage in the specifications, Division 10, Section 10 14 00.

For more information regarding specifications, contact the Office of Construction &
Facilities Management, Facility Standards Service.

The specifications require close coordination, taking into account the existing sign
program at a medical center, any sign demolition, sign maintenance and future sign-
ing needs.

When preparing the specifications for a project, it will require editing to add and in-
dicate new signs or eliminate signs that are not needed. Also, it will be necessary to
adapt the specifications to project requirements required for the specific project in
which they are intended.

The sign message schedule is considered a part of the specifications and would
comprise a portion of the spec section. The configuration and format of the mes-
sage schedule may vary according to individual project requirements. The sign
message schedule format is shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide. It provides the method for identifying each sign location,
type and message along with other notations. The sign schedule contains important
information that the sign manufacturer and the sign installer will require for manufac-
turing and sign installation.

The sign message schedule must be coordinated with a sign location plan drawing
showing where signs are to be placed within a building or on the site. Refer to the
sign location plan example shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide.

For convenience, the sign type drawings can also be included in the specifications
as it own section.

12/2012 Page 8-6-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Construction Code and Life Safety Signs

The Code and Life Safety sign types are constructed from painted acrylic panels
with screened arrows, symbols and copy.

For Braille and assembled signs see Construction section from the Interior Signs
section of the guide for more information.

12/2012 Page 8-7-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Installation Code and Life Safety Signs

Placement:
Wall and Door Mounted CL 51 mm (2")
Signs

1829 mm (6'-0")
1600mm (5'-3")
The location and placement of

1600 mm (5'-3")
Code and Life Safety signs are
very specific and based upon
their use, function, and code FIRE
requirements. EQUIPMENT
CABINET
Each type of sign should be
installed as shown in the following Detail: 1 Detail: 2
illustration, without deviation.
This may require that furniture
be moved, bulletin boards be
relocated, etc. to ensure the Code
and Life Safety sign is installed in
its correct location.
CL
Refer to Interior Sign section for EQ. EQ.

EQ
installation method and materials.

LS Installation Detail 1
Sign types: IN-01.01, IN-01.03, IN-
51mm (2")

01.05, IN-01.06, IN-01.10, IN-01.12,

IN-01.16, IN-01.17, IN-01.18, IN-
01.19, IN-01.20, IN-01.21, IN-01.22,
IN-01.23, IN-01.24, IN-01.25, IN-01.
29, IN-01.30, IN-01.32, IN-01.33

LS Installation Detail 2
Sign type: IN-01.02 Detail: 3 Detail: 4
LS Installation Detail 3
Sign type: IN-01.04

LS Installation Detail 4
Sign type: IN-01.07 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3")

LS Installation Detail 5
Sign type: IN-01.08

LS Installation Detail 6
1600mm (5'-3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

Sign type: IN-01.09

LS Installation Detail 7
Sign type: IN-01.11

LS Installation Detail 8
Sign type: IN-01.14
Detail: 5 Detail: 6

EQ EQ
51 mm (2")

51 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

Detail: 7 Detail: 8

12/2012 Page 8-8-1

 Installation Code and Life Safety Signs

LS Installation Detail 9
76 mm (3")
Sign types: IN-01.15

LS Installation Detail 10 CL
Sign type: IN-01.26 3
4
3
OX

1600 mm (5'-3")
1524 mm (5'-0")
LS Installation Detail 11
Sign type: IN-01.27

LS Installation Detail 12
Sign type: IN-01.28

LS Installation Detail 13
Sign type: IN-01.31 Detail: 9 Detail: 10

1600 mm (5'-3")

1600 mm (5'-3")
Detail: 11

51 mm (2")
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.
1600 mm (5'-3")

FIRE
EQUIPMENT
CABINET

Detail: 12 Detail: 13

12/2012 Page 8-8-2

 Installation Code and Life Safety Signs

Glass Back Up
Certain signs may require that they
be installed on glass because there
is no available wall surface.
Glass
When this situation occurs, a blank,
opaque glass back up is required to
be placed on the opposite side of
the glass exactly behind sign being
installed.

This blank opaque glass back up Blank Opaque Glass

is to be the same size and color Back-Up
as the sign being installed so it Double Sided
effectively covers and hides the Mounting Tape
mounting of the sign to the glass.

Sign Plaque

12/2012 Page 8-8-3

 Installation Code and Life Safety Signs

Stairwell Guide
Certain signs relating to stairs Illustration 1
require that they be installed at
specific locations as defined by
what floor they are located on.

Illustration 1
Exit Level with
Exterior Exit EXIT THIS LEVEL

UP
IN-01.11

IN-01.05
STAIR #
LEVEL 1 NO or
Re-entry
Stair level1
exit
Re-entry
Keep Door Closed

IN-01.30 IN-01.33
IN-01.10
(select sign which reflects
EXIT
EXIT
security condition)
EXIT
Keep Door
Closed PATH

IN-01.29

Illustration 2 Illustration 2
Exit Level with
Interior Exit EXIT
ROUTE
exit route

Keep Door
Closed

IN-01.29
STAIR #
LEVEL 1

Stair level1

EXIT
exit

Keep Door Closed

PATH
IN-01.01.01 IN-01.10 IN-01.05
(Optional. See sign
type drawing for
when required)

NO or
Re-entry
Re-entry

IN-01.30 IN-01.33
(select sign which reflects
security condition)

UP

EXIT THIS LEVEL

IN-01.11

12/2012 Page 8-8-4

 Installation Code and Life Safety Signs

Illustration 3 Illustration 3 STAIR #

Exit Level with

LEVEL 1

& NOT AN EXIT

Stairs level(x0
NOT AN EXIT

Two Exit Doors Keep Door Closed

IN-01.05
IN-01.06 IN-01.29
(Optional. See
sign type drawing STAIR #
LEVEL 1
NO or
Re-entry
Re-entry
for when required) EXIT ROUTE
Stair level1
exit

Keep Door Closed

IN-01.30 IN-01.33
IN-01.10 (select sign which reflects
IN-01.01.01
security condition)

UP EXIT THIS LEVEL

IN-01.11

IN-01.05

STAIRS NO or
Re-entry
LEVEL 1
EXIT
Re-entry
Stairs level(x0
NOT AN EXIT

IN-01.30 IN-01.33
Keep Door Closed

EXIT PATH (select sign which reflects

security condition)

Illustration 4 Illustration 4
STAIR #
LEVEL 1

&
Exit Level with
NOT AN EXIT
Stairs level(x0
NOT AN EXIT

Exit Path thru

Keep Door Closed

IN-01.06 IN-01.29
Interior Space
(Optional. See
sign type drawing STAIRS
LEVEL 1
for when required) EXIT
ROUTE
Stairs level (x)
Exit route
IN-01.05
Keep Door Closed

IN-01.10
IN-01.01.01
Layout D

IN-01.06

UP NO or
Re-entry
Re-entry

IN-01.30 IN-01.33
(select sign which reflects
security condition)
EXIT ROUTE
exit route

Keep Door
Closed

IN-01.29
EXIT THIS LEVEL

IN-01.10 STAIRS
LEVEL 1
NOT AN EXIT
Stairs level(x0
NOT AN EXIT
IN-01.11
Keep Door Closed

NO or
Re-entry
Re-entry
IN-01.29 EXIT
EXIT

Keep Door
Closed IN-01.30 IN-01.33
(select sign which reflects
security condition)

EXIT
PATH
IN-01.05

12/2012 Page 8-8-5

 Installation Code and Life Safety Signs

Illustration 5
Exit Level with Illustration 5 STAIR #
LEVEL 1
EXIT ROUTE
Stair level1
STAIR #
LEVEL 1
NOT AN EXIT

Basement Stairs
exit Stairs level (x)
Exit route

Keep Door Closed

Keep Door Closed

IN-01.10 IN-01.05
IN-01.10
(Optional. See sign
or
NO or
Re-entry
type drawing for Re-entry
when required)
IN-01.25 IN-01.30 IN-01.33
IN-01.01.01
(select sign which reflects
security condition)

Gate
DOWN
IN-01.06
IN-01.06

UP
EXIT THIS LEVEL

IN-01.11

STAIR #
LEVEL 1
Stairs level(x0
IN-01.05
NOT AN EXIT

Keep Door Closed

NO or
Re-entry
Re-entry
EXIT
EXIT

Keep Door
IN-01.30 IN-01.33
(select sign which reflects
Closed

EXIT
IN-01.29 PATH security condition)

Illustration 6 Illustration 6
Intermediate
Floor Levels

DOWN
IN-01.11C
EXIT
PATH
TBD
UP
or
NO or
Re-entry
Re-entry

IN-01.25 IN-01.30 IN-01.33

(select sign which reflects
security condition)
STAIRS STAIRS
LEVEL (X) LEVEL (X)
EXIT
STAIR UP
or EXIT
STAIR DOWN
Stairs level (x) Stairs level(x0
Exit stair up Exit stair down

Keep Door Closed Keep Door Closed

IN-01.01.01
IN-01.05
(Optional. See sign
LEVEL (X) LEVEL (X)
type drawing for
or
EXIT EXIT
STAIR UP STAIR DOWN
when required) Stairs level (x)
Exit stair up
Stairs level(x0
Exit stair down

Keep Door Closed Keep Door Closed

12/2012 Page 8-8-6

 Installation Code and Life Safety Signs

Illustration 7 Illustration 7
Roof Level

IN-01.11C

EXIT NO Re-entry
PATH TBD or Re-entry or

IN-01.25 IN-01.30 IN-01.33

DOWN
(select sign which reflects
security condition)

STAIRS STAIRS
LEVEL ROOF LEVEL ROOF
NOT AN
EXIT
or EXIT
STAIR DOWN
Stairs level(x0 Stairs level(x0
Exit stair down Exit stair down

Keep Door Closed Keep Door Closed

IN-01.05
LEVEL ROOF LEVEL ROOF
EXIT EXIT
ROUTE
Stairs level (x)
Exit stair up
or STAIR DOWN
Stairs level(x0
Exit stair down

Keep Door Closed Keep Door Closed

12/2012 Page 8-8-7

 Interior
Signs

• Room Identification
• Conference Room
• Wall Directional
• Ceiling Directional
• Department Identification
• Building Entrance
• Letters

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Table of Contents

Section 9
Interior Signs
• Products 9-1-1

• Planning 9-2-1 – 9-2-14

• Helpful Hints 9-3-1 – 9-3-2

• Historical 9-3-3
• Overview 9-4-1 – 9-4-9

• Sign Type Drawings 9-5-1 – 9-5-110

• Specifications 9-6-1

• Construction 9-7-1 – 9-7-9

• Installation 9-8-1 – 9-8-11

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Products Interior Signs

The interior sign section of the VA Signage Design Guide has incorporated styles
of signs based upon new and evolving interior sign products.

Component Signs The style of interior signs for VA facilities is based upon component sign systems
that allow for easy and inexpensive updates and changes. The new styles of
component sign systems can be updated with inserts that are printed on digital
printers, allowing for immediate message replacements that can be created at the
facility, rather than having to be ordered from a sign manufacturer. This approach
applies to room signs as well as directional signs.

Various sign products are illustrated in this section showing flat signs as well as
curved signs. Both styles work well in a medical facility, but it is STRONGLY rec-
ommended NOT to mix the two styles within the same facility.

A style of patient room signs is illustrated that can be custom tailored to support
specific nursing operations related to patient care and safety is illustrated in this
section.

Leaving the Past The old style 80’s VA acrylic signs, both framed and unframed, are no longer rec-
ommend for use.

They are expensive to replace or update. They do not meet ABA/ADA, and delivery
of product can take considerable time. The old style of signs, with radius corners,
is also no longer recommended.

The acrylic sign systems of the past provide a “dated” look to VA facilities and are
not in appropriate in presenting a progressive health care environment.

Types of Signing Within this section, interior signs have been identified on each page with a descrip-
tion of their use and application. Layouts for application of various messages are
also shown along with recommended text sizes.

All rooms, with certain exceptions, in a facility should be labeled with a room num-
ber sign. Rooms such as toilet rooms within a patient room, closets, lockers, and
cabinet style rooms can forgo a room number sign.

A room number sign can be substituted with another style of sign that incorporates
the room number along with the capability of identifying the rooms use, function,
service, or “content”. For example: a “Soiled Utility” room would be labeled with a
sign having a portion that includes text identifying the room, along with the room
number; a “Conference Room”, in addition to the room number would have a por-
tion of the sign that contains the text identifying the room, as well as a slider to
indicate whether the room is in use or not.

Wall, soffit, and ceiling mounted directional signs provide solutions for communi-
cating wayfinding information in differing building conditions. Typically, ceiling or
soffit mounted directional signs are used to display directional information for high
traffic destinations such as the Pharmacy or Clinics.

Directories in lobbies and at elevator landings serve to assist people in locat-

ing or confirming the location of services within a building or in other buildings.
Directories, because of their capacity to handle a large number of service list-
ings, can include all of the departments or services within a facility. Refer to the
Directories Section of the Guide for more information regarding directories.

12/2012 Page 9-1-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Planning Interior Signs

Figure 1
Refer to the “Need A Sign Program
Section” of the Signage Guide for
additional supporting information
on the process of developing,
replacing or upgrading an interior
sign program.

Site Review The first step in programming and planning is reviewing all the buildings. Obtain
Obtain drawings architectural drawings showing the floor plans of the entire building. Most facili-
ties have building plans on file with the Engineering or Facilities Management
Department. If the building has been remodeled or has additions obtaining current
drawings may be a challenge. Drawings can be paper blueprints or electronic CAD
“.dwg” files. Request the document format that matches your software capabilities.
(Note: CAD drawings can be saved as PDF drawings and imported into Adobe
Illustrator or other similar programs).

Floor plans that show hallways, rooms, and doors will be needed. Use the archi-
tectural plan of the facility to identify points of entry, destinations, paths of travel
(horizontal and vertical), intersections of hallways, and decision-making locations,
such as lobbies.

Where are you going? Look at the buildings from the perspective of a first time visitor and what they en-
counter when they come to a building.

Points of Entry and Destinations

• Identify the primary entry and exit points of the building.
• Identify the secondary entry and exit points of the building.
• Identify the destination points of primary departments and services.
• Identify the secondary destination points of departments and services.
• Identify the various points of vertical transition within the building. (elevators,
stairs, ramps)
• Identify the various points of horizontal transition, within the building, that lead
to other buildings (ramps, tunnels, tramways).
Paths of Travel Primary paths of travel are from originating points or main entries to destinations.
A secondary travel path is from a service or location to another service or location,
within the building, for example, from “Clinic B” to the “Pharmacy”. Paths of travel
are both horizontal, e.g., along a hallway, and vertical, e.g., traveling up and down
on elevator or stairs.

Intersections and Identify Hallways and Horizontal and Vertical Paths of Travel.
Decision Making Intersections are locations where a visitor needs to make decisions whether to turn
or continue forward. At intersections, wayfinding directional signs need to be post-
ed leading the visitor in the proper direction. Major high traffic corridor intersections
require more communication than smaller secondary intersections. Whether the
signs are wall mounted or overhead will depend on the importance of the depart-
ment or service and the architectural environment and conditions. Sight lines, is-
sues of visibility, availability of wall space, ceiling height, lighting, and sprinklers all
play into the type of sign solution selected for communication.

12/2012 Page 9-2-1

 Planning Interior Signs

figure 2

Pharmacy Dept.
B
Exit
to
Parking
Dept. Clinic
A

Main
Entry

Evaluating a Site and When Points of Entry, Destinations, Primary Paths of Travel (horizontal and verti-
Programming Sign cal), and Intersections, have been identified, review the locations to identify a vari-
Location ety of additional environmental considerations.

Evaluate the site and ask, are the location of building entrances and elevators
easily found? What is the character and configuration of the corridor system? Are
the hallways wide or narrow and are they properly illuminated? Is there adequate
lighting around intersections and Elevator Lobbies? What is the desired path of
travel within the building for visitors and patients? Does a visitor walk around or
through the building? Existing Pathways are not always the preferred and safest
paths of travel. Do the employees access the building differently than the public?
What is the desired path of travel within the building for employees? Is the building
room and floor numbering system effective? Does each location have a unique and
distinct number? Does the room numbering system follow a clear, understandable
pattern? Are placements of signs in locations where people are expecting them
to be? Which signs can have permanent messages, and which ones need to be
changeable?

These considerations help establish the basis for a clear sign program that com-
municates information in a direct and simple manner.

Sign Types A sign program for a building, that works well, is one that has been planned as an
integrated whole. This means signs are coordinated from the main entrance, to the
directional signs and department identification to room identification signs.

Interior Signs fall into various categories. This section covers Identification and
Directional signs. Directories, Code, VA Mandatory and Specialty. Directories,
Code, VA Mandatory and Specialty, signs are in other sections of this Guide.

Room Identification: All rooms in a facility should be labeled with a room number
sign in tactile raised text and matching Braille to ABA/ADA specifications. Non-
public rooms, not accessed by the public can have a simple sign. Signs communi-
cating the room activity to the patient and public, such as identifying offices, exam
rooms, and services need to able to accommodate additional text.

Department Identification: All department rooms in a facility should be labeled

with a room number sign in tactile raised text and matching Braille to ABA/ADA

12/2012 Page 9-2-2

 Planning Interior Signs

specifications as well as be to able to accommodate additional text and description

of services. Departments that occupy larger areas, such as with waiting rooms, re-
quire additional identification designed to provide high visibility identification.

Directional: Wall, soffit, and ceiling mounted directional signs provide solutions
for communicating wayfinding information in differing building conditions. Typically,
ceiling or soffit mounted directional signs are used to display directional informa-
tion for high traffic destinations like the Pharmacy or Clinics. Wall directional signs
need to be obvious and present information in the order people will encounter the
service or destination.

Directories: Directories in lobbies and at elevator landings serve to assist people

in finding or confirming the location of services within a building or in other build-
ings. Directories, because of their capability to handle a large number of service
listings, can include all of the departments or services within the facility. See infor-
mation on directories in another section of this Guide.

Programming Once the building review is complete, you can begin to program the building.

Programming is the Where? What? and How? of signage. The Sign Location Plan
establishes “where” a sign is located, The Sign Message Schedule establishes
“what” text message on the sign is to say. The Sign Type Drawings show the type
of sign and establish how the information is displayed. These three documents are
the main components of signage programming. To create the Sign Location Plan
place a mark and a location number on the plan document as a placeholder for a
sign type and sign message associated with the particular location.

In the Message Schedule spreadsheet enter the Location Plan number, cor-
responding Sign Type designation, and establish the text message of what that
particular sign is to say. Sign type drawings are design documents that describe
the sign size, text layouts and fabrication information. The VA has established sign
types described in this section. This Programming process can be done for Code
signs, Room/Department Identification and Wayfinding. These three categories of
interior signs can be programmed concurrently or separately.

Wayfinding “Wayfinding” is the term, that in recent years has been used to describe the pro-
cess of finding a destination in the built environment. Signs play an active role in
the process by providing the primary form of communication in wayfinding.

In developing a wayfinding system for the interior of a medical center, or the inte-
rior of a support building, follow some common guidelines. In the interior of a build-
ing it involves the corridor system from all the building entrances to the locations
where patients and visitors are seeking a service. Wayfinding is then the process
of communicating to people along the pathway, with appropriate directories, direc-
tional signs and service identification.

It is important to understand who will be using the wayfinding system. VA facilities

will have a diverse clientele. A wayfinding system must take into account not only
veterans of all ages and genders but family and friends that will need to locate
patient rooms, departments, and services. Consideration of mobility, eye sight, the
elderly walking stooped, or individuals using wheel chairs will effect sign position,
location, and size of lettering.

12/2012 Page 9-2-3

 Planning Interior Signs

It is new visitors who will depend the most on signs to navigate a facility. Be cau-
tious, avoid information overload. Remember, once the viewer leaves the Directory,
Map or Directional Sign, this new information will quickly fade. In the case of a “You
Are Here” map, once they make the first turn, all their orientation will be lost.

When developing the information for directional signs, keep in mind that high traf-
fic destinations should take top priority for being listed. Secondary services that
are closest to the location of the sign then become the next group of items to list.
Typically when including more that 6 to 8 destinations, people will stop reading a
sign because of information overload.

The architectural environment will affect the wayfinding system. If the hall system is
a maze, create a differentiation of floors and hallways. The colors of walls, memo-
rable art work or unique interior details can help distinguish one floor from the
next and one long corridor from another. Color and graphic treatments, changes in
types of flooring and bright lighting at elevator lobbies and major intersections will
aid in orienting the visitor.

Some older facilities that have been remodeled several times may
have paths of travel that are blocked or inaccessible. The wayfind-
ing path must catch and direct the visitor before they reach a blocked
or limited path of travel. Signage cannot solve architectural problems.

Wayfinding Start planning from the main lobby or entry. In this main entry area an overview
Where to Start map of the facility and the main directory must be located. Select a primary wall,
one easily visible from the entry door or elevator lobby for the main directory loca-
tion. The directory should list primary services and departments alphabetically,
NOT by floors. A new visitor usually knows what they are looking for so Directories
and Directional signs need to tell the visitor where the department, room or service
is located.

Additional Elevator Lobby Directories can be used at the elevator lobbies. These
directories should list the services found on that floor and that are accessible from
that elevator.

“You Are Here” maps can sometimes aide in the wayfinding process but care must
be taken to make sure the map is very simple and configured in a manner that
makes it very easy to understand. It is important that “You Are Here” maps are
placed in strategic locations where the viewer has a clear orientation to the build-
ing based upon the view of the map they are seeing. The orientation of a map, and
the simple amount of information on it, play a critical role in assisting the viewer to
understand what they are looking at.
You are Here Map
figure 3 Floor 1
You Are Here
Stairs

Elevator

1 Pharmacy

2 Registration

Restrooms

12/2012 Page 9-2-4

 Planning Interior Signs

Placement must also be at a location in the building where the viewer can make
connection with major visuals objects like an atrium, or large “art” work, or a per-
manent architectural feature of the building.

Directional signs should be used on walls and overhead along the path of travel.
In the path of travel there will be decision points at each intersection of hallways or
when encountering building exits or transitions. At these decision points, informa-
tion must be communicated in a priority of need. The priority of need is defined as
those departments or services that have the highest percentage of people seeking
them. The destinations with high demand for information must be communicated
with the highest priority on directional signs along the most direct path of travel.

Overhead signs generally provide emphasis to high priority directional or destina-

tion information. Care must be taken with overhead signs to ensure that these
signs can be seen from a distance. If the viewing distance is too short, those who
walk stooped, are in walkers, or wheelchairs may have trouble viewing these signs.
Also, the placement of overhead signs needs to take into account items that might
obscure them, such as exit signs. Possible blocking of fire sprinklers also needs to
be considered.

Secondary information or information that applies to a small percentage of indi-

viduals needs to be evaluated in regard to its importance. Secondary information
should be relegated to the bottom of the signs and not be included if the space on
the sign is limited.

Typically a person only reads 4 to 8 messages on a directional sign. Any informa-

tion greater than this is simply not read. Prioritization of communication of infor-
mation would then in most cases result in secondary or minor information left off
the sign because it is not useful.

People that are walking have the opportunity to read more messages than an
automobile driver, therefore interior directional signs can contain more listings of
information. But more than 8 listings on a sign results in a sign so large that it is
no longer readable. The viewer simply cannot comprehend all the information pre-
sented. Or they will not stand there long enough to read everything. When large
amounts of information must be presented, break it down into smaller groups of
information. Use 2 directional signs instead of 1. Place all the directional informa-
tion for one direction on one sign, and then use another sign to covey the other
directional information.

12/2012 Page 9-2-5

 Planning Interior Signs

Sign Placement When evaluating intersections, remember to look at the location as if you are both
General entering and exiting the building. A path of travel may seem simple when enter-
ing, but complex or confusing to exit. Path of travel is a two way street. Placement
of directional signs should be perpendicular to the path of travel. If a wall is not
available at an intersection, use an overhead sign. Where a door to a department,
restroom, phone or stairwell is recessed or not easily seen a Flag type sign can be
used.
figure 4

This preferred placement

provides advance warning.
perpendicular to the path
of travel.

Placement on the Wall Correct placement of signs is required for all interior room identification signs.

Refer to the detailed drawings and instructions covered both on the sign type page
and in the Installation Section. These drawings, for each sign type, show the place-
ment position required for its use.

Room identification signs are required to be installed in specific locations and

conform to specific dimension parameters. Refer to the discussion on ABA/ADA
requirements in the Design Elements Section of the Guide.

Correct placement of signs will result in the use of fewer signs. Too many signs in
one location can create a cluttered appearance, cause confusion and increase the
difficulty for a viewer to find the particular information they are seeking.

Interior lighting, wall colors and material finishes need to be taken into consider-
ation because of their effect on the visibility of signs. Locations of glass sidelights,
and their width, can affect the placement of the sign. Preferred location is to install
the sign directly on the glass and install a blank glass back up panel on the oppo-
site side to hide the adhesive.

Coordination must take into account items such as chart holders, bulletin boards,
memory boxes, pictures, and artwork. These items may require relocation to meet
the installation requirements of signs. Coordination must also take place with Code
and Life Safety signs.

Care must be taken to locate signs in a manner that allows clear viewing.
Placement of signs so they are not obscured by furniture or equipment is critical.

Conspicuous Signs should be located where a user expects to find information. Signs contrast-
ing with their surroundings aid those who are vision impaired. This particularly
holds true for department identification and wayfinding signage.

12/2012 Page 9-2-6

 Planning Interior Signs

As a general guide, is the sign conspicuous and does it stand out from visual clut-
ter and its environment?

Legibility The text size needs to be an appropriate height for the distance from which the
message is being viewed and what’s being communicated. Directional signs need
to have text larger than room identification signs. Overhead signs and low light
conditions require larger text size. ABA/ADA has certain text size requirements that
must be met as well.

In general, a person with 20/20 vision requires a minimum of 1 inch capital letter
height to be able to be read at 58 feet. The MUTCD recommends using 30 feet of
legibility for each inch of letter height, as a design goal.

Line of Sight
Vision Field approx.
135 Degrees
60 Degrees Up
75 Degree Down

EXIT

Line of sight

A complete evaluation of the building and site is important prior to placing signs.
For an existing building, the evaluation of sign locations should be performed by
actually visiting each sign location. For new buildings, in addition to evaluating the
floor plans, one must study the elevation drawings and the reflected ceiling plans.

In addition to a location of a sign at a wayfinding decision point, the legibility of the

message at that location must be considered. Evaluate sign locations for visibility
from afar. Is the sign big enough and the text height adequate for the distance
at which the sign will be read. Often times hallway ceilings have soffits and door
openings which restrict visibility. Are there competing elements such as door way
illuminated exit signs, pipes, ducts, and wall mounted devices? Existing equipment
and architectural elements may effect the legibility of the sign as well.

Evaluate the lighting conditions at walls and ceiling. The available light at each
location must be considered. Is the light level high enough to see the sign from a
distance? Does existing lighting create a silhouette of the hanging sign? If the sign
location was changed, could existing light indirectly illuminate a sign? Do the con-
ditions change at night?

Surfaces and areas for proper sign placement do not always exist. Either the ceil-
ing is too low to install an over head sign or the wall space is not available in the
normal line of sight. Select the next best location. Overhead obstructions, narrow
or irregular hallways with poor lighting are not ideal for effective signage.

12/2012 Page 9-2-7

 Planning Interior Signs

Arrows The proper use of arrows on directional signs is important to ensure that the reader
quickly understands correct directional information.

Grouping all the information together that is in one direction and using one arrow is pre-
ferred. Using an arrow for each message makes the sign confusing and difficult to read.

Arrows should be placed to visually precede the message. This allows the reader to un-
derstand direction first and information second. It also allows the arrows to be visually
separated from text.

Arrows should always be larger in size than the text they are affiliated with. For example,
wall directional signs have a 2-1/2” arrow and the text has a 1-3/8” capital letter size.

Orientation of arrows is important to effectively communicate direction. The following

illustrations give examples of the many varied conditions that can be encountered when
providing direction information.

12/2012 Page 9-2-8

 Planning Interior Signs

Arrows
figure 6 Number Location Plan Number Location Plan
Orientation Interpretation Orientation Interpretation

1 Straight 7 Right
Ahead

2 Up 8 Down
on Right

3 Ahead 9 Left
on Left

4 Up 10 Down
on Left on Left

5 Ahead 11 Down
on Right

6 Up 12 Straight
on Right Ahead

12/2012 Page 9-2-9

 Planning Interior Signs

Color and Design All the signs in a sign program do not have to be uniform in color.
Continuity
A variety of color combinations will work well together. For example, the wayfinding
portion of the sign program can be in a color that is different from the room identi-
fication signs. Color is a strong design element helping to establish the mood and
tone of an environment. Warm colors and cool colors as well as bright, saturated
palettes can establish different styles and feelings for the interior environment. Also
sign backer panels with contrasting color, finishes, patterns, or even photos can
accent the desired color palette.

In the Design Elements section of the Guide a palette of colors has been prepared
that work with most interior wall colors and finishes. If a color is selected that is not
a part of the VA palette, it must meet the contrast requirements with the sign text
that is called for by ABA/ADA.

12/2012 Page 9-2-10

 Planning Interior Signs

figure 7

Base Color

Accent Pattern
Receptionist
Code Color RESTROOM
Restroom

Sample Color pallets

Pattern with Cool colors Pharmacy

Base & Accent

Color Code Color

Accent Photo Receptionist

RESTROOM
Restroom

Accent Color

Pharmacy
Sample Color Pallet:
Photo header accent with
warm colors

Accent Pattern

Accent Color Receptionist

RESTROOM
Restroom

Code Color

Pharmacy
Sample Color Pallet:
Pattern backer panel with accent
and base neutral colors

The above examples show the integration of photographic imagery, patterns or accent
colors for a header or backer.

A bold color can be used for the directional signs and a soft neutral color for the code
and room signs. This will allow the room signs to blend with the environment and the
directional signs to pop off the walls.

The use of images or patterns, related to a common theme is another approach.This can
be useful when implementing a sign system in a facility where different areas of that fa-
cility have been assigned different color and material palettes.

NOTE: Not all VA colors work well together. Consult your signage specialist to verify that
the colors selected will work with your interior pallette and that signage readability is
maintained.

12/2012 Page 9-2-11

 Planning Interior Signs

Sizes of Signs and Interior sign sizes that are illustrated in this section have been determined to work in
Lettering most situations.The size of text shown has also been determined to be the best compro-
mise between readability and being able to fit text on the sign.

When planning a sign program, look for conditions that are within the building where
signs will not fit. All buildings have these conditions. When encountered, have the spe-
cific sign, at that location, modified in size to fit the specific condition requirements.

Text size on signs has also been predetermined to meet ABA/ADA requirements for the
vision impaired. Overhead signs require large size lettering and lettering on directional
signs should be larger than on room identification signs.

12/2012 Page 9-2-12

 Planning Interior Signs

figure 8

*
Outpatient Outpatient
Contrast Pharmacy Pharmacy

Blood Draw Blood Draw

* *

Select the proper text and field color to achieve a high level of contrast. In addition
to the contrast and readability of a sign, the sign should also contrast with its
surroundings. The color elements need to have adequate contrast for readability in
low light levels. A sign with mid tone text and mid tone field color in low light levels
is NOT effective.

Concise

*
Outpatient Pharmacy
Pharmacy &
Prescription
Refills

Simplify text and department names for a quick and easy read. Visitors and
patients are not likely to spend more than a few seconds looking at a sign. The
information presented needs to be simple, relevant and apply to the current
location. The sign should also be located where a user expects to find information.
It is very important to use words and terminology that the average person under-
stands. The words and terminology must be consistent throughout a sign program.
Complex medical terms, titles and names are generally NOT familiar to most
people, so use terms easily understood by visitors and patients. And, acronyms are
even less understood by visitors, patients and staff.
* *

Readability
*

OUTPATIENT Outpatient
SURGERY Surgery
STAFF ONLY

STAFF ONLY

Use “initial caps” (upper and lower case). The initial cap text form is the most
readable layout for messages. Save the use of “all capital letters” for warnings and
emphasis.
Text layout and choice of words is critical to the readability and usefulness of a
sign. Forgo the use of phrases like “Please” and “Thank you”. Do not use redun-
dant words when labeling a room. For example, use Soiled Utility” not “Soiled
Utility Room”.
Placing several signs with the same message creates visual clutter. State your
message once as simply and concisely as possible. Though there may be a
temptation to fill empty space on a sign with extra words, don’t. This will lessen the
effectiveness and readability of a sign. Remember, visual clutter creates a visual
overload similar to a loud noisy environment.

12/2012 Page 9-2-13

 Planning Interior Signs

Existing Sign Program Before implementing a new interior sign program, perform a thorough evaluation of the
Removal demolition requirements of the current sign program and impact on the facility’s walls,
doors and ceilings.

Determine what is required to patch, seal and repair the building surfaces exposed
as a result of removal of old signs or letters. Repairs should match adjoining surfaces.
Evaluate if tile or stone surfaces require repair or refurbishment.Are doors going to need
to be refinished or painted?

Make sure the sign removal scope of work requires the contractor to disconnect and
remove any live electrical connections. Make sure existing conductors and conduit are
removed to the nearest junction box and are made safe.

Be sure to clearly identify any signs that are to remain. It is especially important to save
signs and plaques that relate to special dedications, donors or displays that may be of
historical importance. Cover or protect signs that are to remain or catalogue, remove,
safely store and then reinstall as necessary.

12/2012 Page 9-2-14

 Helpful Hints Interior Signs

The following are some general “Dos and Don’ts” guidelines that one can use to develop
a sign program.

The following is not intended to be a training section of the Guide, but to provide key
information that will hopefully reduce the common errors made when developing an
interior sign program.

General Guidelines • All tactile room number signs or other tactile room identification signs are required
to meet ABA/ADA requirement for height and Braille text.
• Signs require maintenance. Periodic cleaning will extend the life of a sign program.
• If overhead signs are used, make sure they have a minimum 84 inches of clearance
from the bottom of the sign to the floor.
• Signs identifying electrical closets, mechanical rooms and telecommunication rooms
should consist of the room number only, which should follow the master building
room numbering system. No descriptive name or title should be used nor should
they have a unique number system.
• Overhead signs must not visually block EXIT signs and shall not block fire sprinkler
spray patterns.

Message Content • Keep sign messages brief. Unnecessary information confuses the viewer.Typically,
all signs, with the exception of directional signs, should convey no more than one
name, title, concept, or thought.
• Use words which are familiar and comfortable to the viewer, and use the same words
consistently throughout the sign program.
• On directional and informational signs, provide only information necessary to make
a decision at that particular location.
• Whenever possible, messages should be presented using positive information.
• On directional signs, do not anticipate decisions that can be made later.Unnecessary
or premature information will confuse the reader.
• Messages placed on signs should be concise, preferably with no more than seven to
ten words.

Message Layout • Use upper and lower case text whenever possible. Upper and lower case text is easi-
er to read and is understood faster than text in all capital letters.
• Line spacing between two different messages should be greater than line spacing
between lines of the same multi-line message group.
• Generally sign text should be a minimum of 1/2” capital letter height. ABA/ADA tac-
tile text is a minimum 5/8”.
• Text should not go right up to the edge of the sign.
• If a line of text needs to be reduced in order to fit on a sign, use only commonly
understood abbreviations or reduce the size of the type for the entire message. DO
NOT condense the type face.
• The most important message should appear as the first line of text.

12/2012 Page 9-3-1

 Helpful Hints Interior Signs

• On wall mounted directional signs, the most important directional information

should be at the top of the sign.
• On a ceiling mounted directional sign, the most important directional information
should be at the bottom of the sign.

Placement of Signs • Signs should, if at all possible, always be perpendicular to the intended viewer.
• Position signs with a clear line of sight from the viewing point to the sign face.
• Always evaluate the lighting at a sign’s location. Lighting conditions can have a sig-
nificant effect on visibility, possibly making a particular location unsuitable.
• Evaluate the sign color selections for effective contrast and readability in the actual
building condition or location where the sign will be installed.
• All signs should be placed in a location that will be clearly visible at all times.
• Signs may be installed on glass when there is no available wall surface.A blank glass
back up is necessary on the opposite side of the glass, exactly behind the sign being
installed.

12/2012 Page 9-3-2

 Historical Interior Signs

Historic VA Buildings Letting people know where they are and where they need to go is just as important
in historical buildings.

In a historic building, if original signs exist, they should be used as a starting point
for developing a new sign program that respects the original design look, but
meets the current requirements for interior signs.

Sensitivity to colors, materials, finishes, building detail, and the original architects
intent for the look of the building should be incorporated into the look and design
of a new sign program. The sign product for a new sign program should be of the
type that allows for updating and text changes to be conducted with out complete
sign removal and reinstallation.

Care must be taken to not harm building materials when removing old signs and
installing new ones. Placement of wayfinding signs in a historic building must take
into account circulation constraints that are sometimes a part of older corridor sys-
tems, as well as vertical movement within a building. Glass doors, special doors,
high wainscot, special paneling, carvings, and trim detail may require compromise
on sign placement, but locating signs should follow the interior sign installation
guidelines as closely as possible.

Keep signs to a minimum and consolidate them whenever possible. Signs in lob-
bies should be kept to a minimum and consist of only those necessary for people
to find their way in the building. Announcement banners, notices and other “pro-
motional” type items should be discouraged in lobbies and throughout the corridor
system.

Additional assistance with sign programs for historical building is available from the
Office of Construction & Facilities Management.

12/2012 Page 9-3-3

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Overview Interior Signs

This section of the VA Signage Design Guide covers interior signs that would be neces-
sary to sign an individual buildings, off site clinics or a complete medical center campus.

This Overview Section gives general illustrations of the sign type groups. Page section
9.5 identifies all interior room signs, identification, directional, wayfinding and infor-
mational signs. The sign type drawings are on two pages with the front page showing
the general description and the back page illustrating the sign dimensions and graphic
layouts.

Interior Sign Designations

Each sign in the program guide has been given a specific sign type number des-
ignation. This designation provides a description that can be referenced when pro-
gramming a building and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign type
designations are derived.

IN - 03 .01 A
IN Designates an interior sign.
03 Two digit numbers identify a particular sign type family.
.01 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific
sign within the sign family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version or

layout for graphics

12/2012 Page 9-4-1

 Overview Interior Signs

IN-03.01
Room Number Identification 25244
2A244
25244
2A244
25244
2A244

IN-04.01
Primary Room Identification Nurse Soiled
(Large) Supervisor Utility
IN-04.02
Secondary Room Identification
(Small)
IN-03.01 IN-04.01 IN-04.02
Room Office (Large) Office (Small)

IN-04.03
Primary Room Identification
(Large with paper Insert and lens)
25244 25244
2A244
2A244

IN-04.04
Secondary Room Identification Soiled
Outpatient
(Small with paper Insert and lens) Utility
Conference
Room

IN-04.03 IN-04.04
Room (Large Insert) Room (Small Insert)

IN-05.06
Patient Room Identification 25286
25286
25286
5282
B
25286
5624-1
25286
2286

IN-05.07
A A
Patient Room Identification BED BED
NPO
with Patient Condition pull outs NPO
A B
Door Window
IN-05.08
Double Patient Room Identification

IN-05.06 IN-05.07 IN-05.08

Patient Room Sign Patient Room Sign Double Patient
(With Patient Conditions Room Sign
Pull outs ) (With Patient Conditions
Pull outs)

12/2012 Page 9-4-2

 Overview Interior Signs

IN-06.05
Patient Bed Sign BED BED
IN-06.06 2 2
Patient Bed Sign with dry erase
board, push pin surface, or A A
A
magnetic board
NPO

IN-06.05 IN-06.06

IN-07.01, .02 and .03/

IN-07.05, .06 and .07
Conference/Meeting Room Sign /
25286 25286
25286
25286

Room Sign with Indicator and Paper

Insert Outpatient Exam
Conference
Room
A
In Use
In Use

IN-07.01, and .03 / IN-07.02 / IN-07.06

IN-07.05, and .07 Slider (Small)
Slider

IN-08.01
No Smoking

IN-08.02
Prohibit, Instructional and Control
Sign
Authorized
No Smoking Personnel Only

IN-08.01 IN-08.02-4

IN-09.01, .02, .03, .04, .05,

.06 and .07
Restroom Signs 25286
5282
B 5624-1
25286
25286
5282
B 5624-1
25286
25286
5282
B 5624-1
25286

MEN WOMEN RESTROOM

IN-09.01 IN-09.02 IN-09.03

12/2012 Page 9-4-3

 Overview Interior Signs

IN-09.08, .09
Pictogram and Symbol Sign For Patient
Information
IN-10.01, .02, .03, .04, .05 Please use
and .06 telephones located
at the information
Sign Frame desk in the main
lobby.
IN-11.01, .02, .03 and .04 Telephone
Informational / Instructional Sign

IN-09.08, .09 IN-10.01, .02, .03, .04, .05, .06 IN-11.01, .02, .03
Pocket Insert .04, .05, .06

IN-12.01, .02, .03 and .04

Desk, Counter Sign
Clinic B
IN-13.01
Perpendicular (Flag) Mount Sign Check In
Restrooms

IN-12.01, .02, .03, .04 IN-13.01

Desk Top Flag

IN-14.01, .02, .03, .04, .05

Wall Directional Sign (Strips)

IN-14.06, .07, .08, .09, 10 Receptionist

Wall Directional Sign Receptionist
(Digital Insert) PTSD
PTSD

Surgery
Surgery
Pharmacy
Pharmacy
Canteen
Canteen

IN-14.01, .02, .03, .04, .05 IN-14.06, .07, .08, .09, .10
Wall Directional Wall Directional
(strips) (Digital print insert)

12/2012 Page 9-4-4

 Overview Interior Signs

IN-14.11, .12, .13, .14

Elevator/Floor Directional Sign

4 4
(Strips)

IN-14.15, .16, .17, .18

Elevator/Floor Directional Sign FLOOR FLOOR
(Digital Insert)
FOUR FOUR

Reception Reception

Surgery Surgery
Patient Rooms Patient Rooms
4235 Thru 4357 4235 Thru 4357

IN-14.11, .12, .13, .14 IN-14.15, .16, .17, .18

Elevator Directional Elevator DIrectional
(strips) (Digital print insert)

4 4
IN-14.20, .21
Elevator/Floor Directional Sign
FLOOR FLOOR
(Strips with Map)
FOUR FOUR
IN-14.25, .26
Elevator/Floor Directional Sign
(Digital Insert with Map)

Pharmacy Pharmacy

Surgery Surgery

Pharmacy Pharmacy

You Are Here You Are Here

Surgery Surgery

IN-14.20, .21 IN-14.25, .26

Elevator DIrectional Elevator DIrectional
(strips with map) (digital print insert)

12/2012 Page 9-4-5

 Overview Interior Signs

IN-15.51 (strips)
IN-15.55 (insert)
Ceiling Mounted Directional and

Registration
Department ID signs
6" H x 40" W
text size and layouts vary A–C
Example: IN-15.51A Component slats with 3" text

IN-15.52 (strips)
IN-15.56 (insert)
Ceiling Mounted Directional and
Department ID signs
12" H x 40" W Outpatient Receptionist
text size and layouts vary A–E
& Registration
Example: IN-15.56B digital print insert with 3" text

IN-15.53 (strips)
IN-15.57 (insert)
Ceiling Mounted Directional and

Registration
Department ID signs
18" H x 40" W
text size and layouts vary A–E

Patient Checkout
Accounting & Medical Records

Example: IN-15.57E digital insert with 2" & 3" text

IN-15.61 (strips)
IN-15.65 (insert)
Ceiling Mounted Directional and
Department ID signs
6" H x 80" W
Canteen Pharmacy
text size and layouts vary A–D
Example: IN-15.61 Component slats with 3" text

IN-15.62 (strips)
IN-15.66 (insert)
Ceiling Mounted Directional and
Department ID signs
12" H x 80" W
Ear, Nose & Throat
text size and layouts vary A–E
Registration Scheduling
Example: IN-15.66 digital print insert with 3" text

IN-15.63 (strips)
IN-15.67 (insert)
Ceiling Mounted Directional and
Department ID signs Financial Management Occupational Therapy
18" H x 80" W
text size and layouts vary A–E
CLC Dining Imaging Center - Radiology
Veteran’s Business Center Blood Draw
EMERGENCY Main Elevators
Example: IN-15.67 digital insert with 2" & 3" text

12/2012 Page 9-4-6

 Overview Interior Signs

OVERHEAD Hanging N15 series can be used for BOTH Directional and Department Identification.
Series See specification page for directional and ID text layouts
IN-15.50-60

Panel Text Directional Department

Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID

Component/Strips
Family
IN-15.51 A-C 40" 6" 3" & 2" All x x
IN-15.55 A-C 40" 6" 3" & 2" Insert x x
Ca
nte
Sp en IN-15.52 A-E 40" 12" 3" & 2" All x x
ina IN-15.56 A-E
lR 40" 12" 3" & 2" Insert x x
e ha
b IN-15.53 A-E 40" 18" 3" & 2" All x x
IN-15.57 A-E 40" 18" 3" & 2" Insert x x

IN-15.61 A-C 80" 6" 3" & 2" All x x

Flat Insert
IN-15.65 A-C 80" 6" 3" & 2" Insert x x
Family
IN-15.62 A-E 80" 12" 3" & 2" All x x
IN-15.66 A-E 80" 12" 3" & 2" Insert x x
Sp
Reinal IN-15.63 A-E 80" 18" 3" & 2" All x x
ha
bil IN-15.67 A-E 80" 18" 3" & 2" Insert x x
itati
on

Curve Insert
Family

NOTE: Overhead sign IN15 series are double sided hanging signs.To determine sign
type and size required at a specific location, Verify project sign family, ceiling height,
distance the sign is to be viewed and quantity of text. 2" high copy is NOT recom-
mended for long hallways or for a sign that will be read at a great distance.

12/2012 Page 9-4-7

 Overview Interior Signs

IN-16.51 / IN-16.55
Soffit Mounted Directional and
Department ID signs Canteen
6" H x 40" W
text size and layouts vary A–C Example: IN-16.51A Component slats with 3" text
Single sided soffit mount

IN-16.52 / IN-16.56
Soffit Mounted Directional and
Department ID signs
Canteen
12" H x 40" W
text size and layouts vary A–E Spinal Rehab
Example: IN-16.56B digital print insert with 3" text
Single sided soffit mount

IN-16.53 / IN-16.57
Soffit Mounted Directional and
Department ID signs Emergency
18" H x 40" W
text size and layouts vary A–E
Patient Checkout
Accounting & Medical Records

Example: IN-16.57E digital insert with 2" & 3" text

Single sided soffit mount

IN-16.61 / IN-16.65
Soffit Mounted Directional and
Department ID signs Canteen Pharmacy
6" H x 80" W
text size and layouts vary A–D Example: IN-16.61 Component slats with 3" text
Single sided soffit mount

IN-16.62 / IN-16.66
Soffit Mounted Directional and
Department ID signs
Outpatient Surgery
12" H x 80" W
text size and layouts vary A–E Registration Scheduling
Example: IN-16.66B digital print insert with 3" text
Single sided soffit mount

IN-16.63 / IN-16.67
Soffit Mounted Directional and Financial Management Occupational Therapy
Department ID signs
18" H x 80" W CLC Dining Imaging Center - Radiology
text size and layouts vary A-E
Veteran’s Business Center Blood Draw
EMERGENCY Main Elevators
Example: IN-16.67C digital insert with 2" & 3" text
Single sided soffit mount

12/2012 Page 9-4-8

 Overview Interior Signs

OVERHEAD Soffit Soffit mounted BOTH Directional and Department Identification. Single sided sign to
Series identify and direct. See specification page for directional and ID text layouts
IN-16.50–60

Panel Text Directional Department

Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID

Component/Strips
Family
IN-16.51 A-C 40" 6" 3" & 2" All x x
IN-16.55 A-C 40" 6" 3" & 2" Insert x x
Ca
nte
Sp en IN-16.52 A-E 40" 12" 3" & 2" All x x
ina IN-16.56 A-E
lR 40" 12" 3" & 2" Insert x x
e ha
b IN-16.53 A-E 40" 18" 3" & 2" All x x
IN-16.57 A-E 40" 18" 3" & 2" Insert x x

IN-16.61 A-D 80" 6" 3" & 2" All x x

Flat Insert
IN-16.65 A-D 80" 6" 3" & 2" Insert x x
Family
IN-16.62 A-E 80" 12" 3" & 2" All x x
IN-16.66 A-E 80" 12" 3" & 2" Insert x x
Sp
Reinal IN-16.63 A-E 80" 18" 3" & 2" All x x
ha
bil IN-16.67 A-E 80" 18" 3" & 2" Insert x x
itati
on

Curve Insert
Family

NOTE: Overhead sign IN16 series are soffit or wall mounted signs.To determine sign
type and size required at a specific location, Verify project sign family, ceiling height,
distance the sign is to be viewed and quantity of text. 2" high copy is NOT recom-
mended for long hallways or for a sign that will be read at a great distance.

12/2012 Page 9-4-9

This page is intentionally left blank.
 IN-03.01 Interior Signs
Room Number Identification
Size
76 mm H x 229 mm W
(3" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

25286
Sign is to be used to identify rooms

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)
25286
Sign Components
Varies by sign family component
sign system, rails, curved and flat
frames.

Graphic Process
Tactile room number with
accompanying Braille.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart

Typography Message Layout A

Helvetica
Grade 2 Braille

25286
Mounting
Double sided foam tape, silastic
adhesive or screw.

Installation
Knob side of door, 1524 mm (60") 25286
to top of sign and 50 mm (2") over
from door frame.

Recommendations
This sign is to be used for all
rooms, but can also be used to
identify corridors and alcoves as
necessary. Do not use on exterior
and stairwell doors.

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-1

 IN-03.01 Interior Signs
Room Number Identification

229 mm (9”)
3/4"

1/2"

1 1/4"
3"
3/8"
1/4" Braille

3/8"

3/8” Min 1/8” Min

clear space 3/8” Min
Letter Spacing clear space
3/8” Min
clear space

1/2” Raised

25286
Letters
1 1/4”
height

Baseline Spacing
3/8” Min. clear space
Braille
Approx 1/4” A-2578

3/8” Min. clear space

Braille Copy
Grade 2 Helvetica Medium
Domed raised tactile text

Front View End View

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-2

 IN-04.01 Interior Signs
Primary Room Identification
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

This sign has tactile number and
Braille on the top sign component.
The sign is to identify the occupant
or activity within a room.
25286
25286
25286

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) Layout
A is suggested for department Outpatient
Pharmacy
identification. Layout B for rooms
and departments with long words
or names. Layout C for rooms with
a common name but need specific
identification.

Sign Components
Vary by sign family, sliding rail
component systems, curved and
flat. Top section raised text and
Braille. Lower section can be digital
print, ,silkscreen or vinyl applied
graphics.

Graphic Process
Tactile raised text and Braille on Message Layout A Message Layout B
top section. Surface applied vinyl or
insert in lower sign section.
44444 44444
Colors
44444 44444

Text: refer to color chart. Outpatient Oncology

Background: refer to color chart Pharmacy Diagnostic
Imaging
Typography
Helvetica Bold
Clinic
Grade 2 Braille

Mounting
Double sided foam tape, silastic
adhesive or screw. Message Layout C Message Layout D

Installation
Knob side of door, 1524 mm (60") 44444
44444
44444
44444
44444
to top of sign and 50 mm (2") over
from door frame. Outpatient
Laboratory
Conference
Recommendations
It is recommended that this
particular sign type become the
Room
C
"building standard" for identification
of all rooms.

Signs identifying electrical

closets, mechanical rooms and
telecommunication rooms should
consist of only the room number
(Sign type IN-03.01). The room 50 mm (2")
number should follow the master
building room numbering system. No
descriptive name or title should be
1524 mm (5'-0")

used nor should they have a unique

number system.

12/2012 Page 9-5-3

 IN-04.01 Interior Signs
Primary Room Identification

Message Layout A & B

Message Layout C Message Layout D

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-4

 IN-04.02 Interior Signs
Secondary Room Identification
Sign Size
152 mm H x 229 mm W
(6" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

This sign always has a tactile
number and Braille in its top sign

25286
component. This sign is used to
identify secondary rooms or rooms
that have short names. 25286
25286
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering

Retail
sizes and dimensions) Layout A is
suggested for short titles. Layout B
and C is for longer names or titles.
Layout D is specific identification by
number or letter. Store
Sign Components
Vary by sign family, sliding rail
component systems, curved and
flat. Top section raised text and
Braille. Lower section can be digital
print, silkscreen or vinyl applied
graphics.

Graphic Process
Tactile raised text and Braille on
top section. Surface applied vinyl, Message Layout A Message Layout B
silkscreen or digital print in lower
sign section.

Colors
25286
25286
25286
25286

Text: refer to color chart.

Background: refer to color chart Office Nursing
Supervisor
Typography
Helvetica Bold
Grade 2 Braille

Mounting
Double sided foam tape, silastic Message Layout C Message Layout D
adhesive or screw.

Installation
Knob side of door, 1524 mm (60") 25286
25286
25286
25286
to top of sign and 50 mm (2") over

C
from door frame. No Admittance
Do Not Enter without
Recommendations Using Intercom
This sign is for rooms that do not
require long or large text.

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-5

 IN-04.02 Interior Signs
Secondary Room Identification

Message Layout A & B

Message Layout C Message Layout D

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-6

 IN-04.03 Interior Signs
Primary Room Identification with Insert
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

This sign always has tactile
number and Braille as its top sign
component. Lower section is for
insert. Use this sign to identify the
occupant or activity within a room.
25286
25286

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) Layout
A is suggested for department Blood
Draw
identification. Layout B for rooms
and departments with long words or
names. Layout C and D for rooms
with a common name but need
specific identification.

Sign Components
Vary by sign family, sliding rail
component systems, curved and flat.
Top section raised text and Braille.
Lower section can be inserted
graphics.

Graphic Process
Tactile raised text and Braille on top
Message Layout A Message Layout B
section. Insert with clear protector
cover with surface applied vinyl on
substrate or paper printed insert in
lower sign section.
78900
44444
78900
44444

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Dental Intensive
Background: refer to color chart Clinic Care
Waiting
Typography Room
Helvetica Bold
Grade 2 Braille
Lettering size is adaptable to allow
messages to fit on to the sign. Refer
Message Layout C Message Layout D
to various layouts for reference.

Mounting
Double sided foam tape, silastic
44444
44444
44444
44444

adhesive or screw.

Installation Outpatient X-ray

Outpatient
2
Knob side of door, 1524 mm (60") to Conference
top of sign and 50 mm (2") over from Conference
Room
door frame. Room

Recommendations
It is recommended that this
particular sign type become the
"building standard" for identification
of all rooms.

Signs identifying electrical 50 mm (2")

closets, mechanical rooms and
telecommunication rooms should
1524 mm (5'-0")

consist of only the room number

(Sign type IN-03.01). The room
number should follow the master
building room numbering system. No
descriptive name or title should be
used nor should they have a unique
number system.

12/2012 Page 9-5-7

 IN-04.03 Interior Signs
Primary Room Identification with Insert

Message Layout A & B

Message Layout C Message Layout D

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-8

 IN-04.04 Interior Signs
Secondary Room Identification with Insert
Sign Size
152 mm H x 229 mm W
(6" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

This sign always has a tactile
number and Braille in its top

25286
sign component. Use this sign to
secondary rooms or rooms that
have short names.
25286
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering

Retail
sizes and dimensions) Layout A is
suggested for short titles. Layout B
and C is for longer names or titles.
Layout D is specific identification by
number or letter. Store
Sign Components
Vary by sign family, sliding rail
component systems, curved and
flat. Top section raised text and
Braille. Lower section is an inserted
graphic.

Graphic Process
Tactile raised text and Braille on top
section. Insert with clear protector
covering insert with surface applied Message Layout A Message Layout B
vinyl on substrate or paper printed
insert in lower sign section.
25286 25286
25286

Colors 25286

Text: refer to color chart.

Background: refer to color chart
Office Soiled
Typography
Utilities
Helvetica Bold
Grade 2 Braille

Mounting
Double sided foam tape, silastic Message Layout C Message Layout D
adhesive or screw.

Installation
Knob side of door, 1524 mm (60")
25286
25286
25286
25286

to top of sign and 50 mm (2") over

from door frame.

Recommendations
This sign is for rooms that do not
No Admittance
Do Not Enter without
Using Intercom
C
require long or large text.

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-9

 IN-04.04 Interior Signs
Secondary Room Identification with Insert

Message Layout A & B

Message Layout C Message Layout D

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-10

 IN-05.06 Interior Signs
Patient Room Identification with Paper Holder
Size
229 mm x 152 mm
(9"H x 6"W)

Description and Use

Use this sign to identify patient
room.

Message Configuration
25286
25286
Refer to drawings for lettering and
sizes and dimensions.

Sign Components
Top section with raised tactile room
number with accompanying Braille.
Bottom sign section to be dry erase
board or corkboard or push pin
material. Bottom of sign to have a
paper holder.

Color and Text

Text: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart

Typography
Helvetica
Grade 2 Braille

Mounting
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners.

Installation
Knob side of Door 2" from door
frame. Top of tactile Braille sign Message Layout A Message Layout B
section to be max. 1524 mm (60")
from floor.

Recommendations
This sign is for Patient Rooms with
25286
25286
25286
25286

one or two beds.

50 mm (2")
C5282
B 5624-1
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-11

 IN-05.06 Interior Signs
Patient Room Identification

6 1/2"
6"

Primary
tactile
braille
panel typ.
3"

Middle Section
9 3/8" OPTION FINISHES:
Custome paint,
Photo image
Push pin surface
6 1/4" White board/
Dry-erase surface

3/4" profile
“grip-a-strp”
Message Layout A holder

1 1/4"
3"
3/8"
1/4"

1 1/2"

3/4"
1/4"

1 1/4"

1/4"
5/8"

Message Layout B

50 mm (2")
C5282
B 5624-1
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-12

 IN-05.07 Interior Signs
Patient Room Identification with Patient Condition Pullouts
Size
IN-05.07
229 mm x 152 mm
(9" H x 6" W)

25286
(With Pull Out)

Description and Use

Sign is to be placed at patient
rooms.
5282
B 5624-1
25286

Message Configuration
Refer to drawings for lettering and
sizes and dimensions. A
Sign Components
Top section with raised tactile room
number with accompanying Braille.
NPO
Bottom sign section to be dry erase
board or corkboard or push pin
material in front of patient condition
pullouts. Bottom to have a paper
holder.

Color and Text

Text: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart

Typography
Helvetica
Grade 2 Braille
Patient Condition Call Outs Tab Examples
Mounting Examples
Secure to wall with Physical
Allergies
fasteners. Each medical department should
determine the symbols and icons to be
A Dizzy
Do Not Disturb
Installation displayed outside their departments Fall Risk
Knob side of door 3" from door patient room. Use colors, letters, numbers Flight Risk/ Tends to Wander
frame. Top of tactile Braille sign and symbols to establish a code for staff Gown & Gloves required
section to be max. 60" from floor. and visitors. Beware that icons or text Latex Hearing Impaired /TTY
does not infringe on patient medical Interpreter Required
Recommendations
privacy as stated by (HIPPA) Health Latex Allergy
This sign is for Patient Rooms with
single beds with various conditions
which need to be identified.
Insurance Portability and Accountability
Act. Do Not describe a specific medical NPO Nothing by mouth
No Flowers
condition No Fluids
No Visitors
NPO
Oxygen
Security
Security Risk
Risk
See Nurse Prior to Entry
Quarantine
Quiet Please

76 mm (3") 76 mm (3")
2825C
1-4265 B
C5282
B 5624-1

A A
1524 mm (5'-0")

N N
1524 mm (5'-0")

Left and Right configutations

12/2012 Page 9-5-13

 IN-05.07 Interior Signs
Patient Room Identification with Patient Condition Pullouts

6 1/2"
6"

25286
Primary tactile
braille panel typ.
3"

25286

1 3/8"
9 3/8"

1 3/8"
6"
1 3/8"

1 3/8"

(4) Message bands 2"

slide in & out

3/4"
3"
1 1/4"
3/8"
1/4"
25286
25286

76 mm (3") 76 mm (3")
2825C
1- 4 2 6 5 B
C5282
B 5624-1

A A
1524 mm (5'-0")

N N
1524 mm (5'-0")

Left and Right configutations

12/2012 Page 9-5-14

 IN-05.08 Interior Signs
Patient Room Identification (Two Bed Room)
Size
IN-05.08
229 mm x 152 mm
(9" H x 6" W)

Description and Use

Sign is to be placed at patient

25286
rooms.

Message Configuration
Refer to drawings for lettering and 2286
sizes and dimensions.

Sign Components
Top section with raised tactile room
A
number with accompanying Braille.
Middle sign section to be printed
paper insert behind clear lens.
NPO
Bottom of sign section to have a
paper grip strip. Message bands
located at side.

Color and Text

Text: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart

Typography
Helvetica Condensed
Grade 2 Braille

Mounting
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners. Message Layout A

Installation

25286
Knob side of door 3" from door
frame. Top of tactile Braille sign
section to be max. 60" from floor. 2286

Recommendations A
This sign is for two bed patient
rooms with various patient
conditions that need to be
NPO
identified.

Note
Pull out tab icon examples shown
with sign type IN-05.07

76 mm (3")
28C25C
5282
B 5624-1 1-4265 B

A A
N N
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-15

 IN-05.08 Interior Signs
Patient Room Identification (Two Bed Room)

extruded
1/2" frame typ.

Primary tactile
braille panel typ.

3"
25286
2286
(4) Message bands
each side,
slide in & out

9 3/8"

Digital print
6" Insert with
Image & Bed
Numbers.

6"
6 3/4" 2"
1/2"

1 1/4"
3"
3/8"
1/4"

2"

3/4"

1/4"
1 1/4"

1/4"
5/8"

Text Layout

76 mm (3")
28C25C
5282
B 5624-1 1-4265 B

A A
N N
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-16

 IN-06.05-.06 Interior Signs
Patient Bed Sign
Size
IN-06.05
101 mm x 101 mm
(4" H x 4" W)

IN-06.06
229 mm x 101 mm
(9" H x 4" W) BED
Description and Use
Use this sign above patient beds to
identify the bed.
2
Message Configuration
A
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)
Bed number and location

Sign Components
Top section with bed number
middle section to be determined.
Option: photo, paint accent color,
push pin surface, or dry erase dry
erase board. Bottom with paper
holder.

Graphic Process IN-06.05 IN-06.06

Vinyl text surface applied.
BED BED
2 2
Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart

Typography
A A
A
Helvetica Bold
NPO
Mounting
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners.

Installation
On head wall above bed.

Recommendations 3/4" profile

This sign is for use in patient rooms “paper” holder
and is to be coordinated with the
needs and function with nursing
services.

Note
Pull out tab icon examples shown
with sign type IN-05.07

Install Above Bed

When Bed is Fully Elevated
Height TBD

12/2012 Page 9-5-17

 IN-06.05-.06 Interior Signs
Patient Bed Sign

3/8"
7/8"
1/4"
BED
2
3"
1 1/4"

1/2"

4 3/4"

3/8"
7/8"
1/4" BED
2
3"
1 1/4"

9 7/8"
A 1 3/8"

NPO 1 3/8"
6"
1 3/8"

1 3/8"

1/2"
3/4" profile
“grip-a-strp”
holder
4 3/4"

4 3/4" 2"

12/2012 Page 9-5-18

 IN-07.01-.03 Interior Signs
Room Sign with Indicator
Size / Sign Size
IN-07.01
229 mm x 229 mm (9" H x 9" W)

25286
IN-07.02
152 mm x 229 mm (6" H x 9" W))

IN-07.03
203 mm x 229 mm (8" H x 9" W) 25286

Description and Use

This sign always has tactile and
Braille section at the top of the Outpatient
sign component. Use this sign for
conference rooms, meeting rooms. Conference
Room
This type of sign can also be used
for exam rooms, treatment rooms,
and offices where the occupants
want to indicate that room is in use.

Message Configuration In Use

(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) IN07.1,
Layout A is for conference rooms,
Layout B is for exam or treatment
rooms. N07.3 Insert messages are
prepared and removed based upon
occupancy of the room. Selection IN-07.01 IN-07.01
of the text to appear behind the (Message Layout A) (Message Layout B)
slider is to be determined by the
sign users.

Sign Components 25286 25286

Vary by sign family, sliding rail 25286 25286

component systems, curved and Outpatient

flat. Top section raised text and Exam
Conference
Braille. Mid section can be digital
print or vinyl applied graphics. Room A
Lower section moving slider with
graphic reveal. In Use In Use

Graphic Process
Slider section surface applied
vinyl. Text behind slider is second IN-07.02 IN-07.03
surface.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
25286
25286
25286
25286

Background: refer to color chart

Exam A Conference
Typography In Use Room
Helvetica Bold
Grade 2 Braille In Use
Mounting
Double sided foam tape, silastic
adhesive or screw.

Installation
Knob side of door, 1524 mm (60")
to top of sign and 50 mm (2") over 50 mm (2")
from door frame.

Recommendations
1524 mm (5'-0")

This sign is for use on rooms where

and indication is needed in the
hallway that the room is occupied
or an activity is taking place in
the room which should not be
disturbed.

12/2012 Page 9-5-19

 IN-07.01-.03 Interior Signs
Room Sign with Indicator

IN-07.01 (Message Layout A)

IN-07.01 (Message Layout B)

IN-07.02
IN-07.03

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-20

 IN-07.05-.07 Interior Signs
Room Sign with Indicator and Paper Insert
Size
Sign Size
IN-07.05
229 mm x 229 mm (9" H x 9" W)

IN-07.06
152 mm x 229 mm (6" H x 9" W)) 25286
25286
IN-07.07
203 mm x 229 mm (8" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

This sign always has tactile and
Outpatient
Braille section at the top of the
sign component. Use this sign for Conference
conference rooms, meeting rooms.
This type of sign can also be used Room
for exam rooms, treatment rooms,
and offices where the occupants
want to indicate that room is in use. In Use
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)
IN07.5, Layout A is for conference
rooms, Layout B is for exam or
treatment rooms. N07.7 Insert
messages are prepared and removed IN-07.05 IN-07.05
based upon occupancy of the room. (Message Layout A) (Message Layout B)
Selection of the text to appear behind
the slider is to be determined by the
sign users. 25286
25286
25286
25286
Sign Components
Vary by sign family, sliding rail Outpatient Exam
component systems, curved and Conference
flat. Top section raised text and
Braille. Mid section can be digital
Room A
print insert. Lower section moving In Use In Use
slider with graphic reveal.

Graphic Process
Slider section surface applied
vinyl. Text behind slider is second IN-07.06 IN-07.07
surface.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
25286
25286
25286
25286

Background: refer to color chart

Exam A Conference
Typography Room
Helvetica Bold In Use
Grade 2 Braille In Use
Mounting
Double sided foam tape, silastic
adhesive or screw.

Installation
Knob side of door, 1524 mm (60”)
to top of sign and 50 mm (2”) over
50 mm (2")
from door frame.

Recommendations
1524 mm (5'-0")

This sign is for use on rooms where

and indication is needed in the
hallway that the room is occupied
or an activity is taking place in
the room which should not be
disturbed.

12/2012 Page 9-5-21

 IN-07.05-.07 Interior Signs
Room Sign with Indicator and Paper Insert

IN-07.05 (Message Layout A)

IN-07.05 (Message Layout B)

IN-07.06
IN-07.07

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-22

 IN-08.01 Interior Signs
No Smoking
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Use these signs to inform "No
Smoking" in a bold manner.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque.

Graphic Process
Silk-screened or surface applied
vinyl.
No Smoking
Colors
Text: Black
Symbol: Red and Black Background:
White

Typography Message Layout A Message Layout B

Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive.

Installation
On wall or door 1600 mm (63") to This is a Smoke Free
top of sign and on door, center.
Campus. Smoking is
Recommendations No Smoking Permitted in Designated
This sign is for use when a strong
communication of no smoking
Off Campus Areas Only
information is necessary.

Message Layout C Message Layout D

No Smoking
in this Area

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 9-5-23

 IN-08.01 Interior Signs
No Smoking

19 mm 3/4”

101mm (4”)

16mm 5/8“”
16mm 5/8”
9mm 3/8”

Message Layout A Message Layout B

28.5 mm (1 1/8") 19mm 3/4”

101mm 4”
165 mm
(6 1/2")
16mm 5/8”
16mm 5/8”
19mm 3/4”

Message Layout C Message Layout D

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 9-5-24

 IN-08.02 Interior Signs
Prohibit Instructional and Control
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Use these signs to inform in a bold
manner.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque.

Graphic Process
Silk-screened or surface applied
vinyl. No Admittance
Colors
Text: Black
Symbol: Red and Black Background:
White

Typography Message Layout A Message Layout B

Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive.

Installation
On wall or door 1600 mm (63") to
top of sign and on door, center.
No
Recommendations
This sign is for use when a strong
Staff Only Admittance
communication of information is
necessary. IN08.4 should be used
carefully as it may have a negative Message Layout C Message Layout D
reaction on the part of patients and
visitors.

Authorized
Personnel
Only

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 9-5-25

 IN-08.02 Interior Signs
Prohibit, Instructional and Control

19 mm 3/4”

101mm (4”)

16mm 5/8“”
16mm 5/8”
9mm 3/8”

Message Layout A Message Layout B

19mm 3/4” 28.5 mm (1 1/8")

101mm 4”
165 mm
(6 1/2")
16mm 5/8”
16mm 5/8”
19mm 3/4”

Message Layout C Message Layout D

CL
1600 mm (5'-3")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 9-5-26

 IN-09.01-.06 Interior Signs
Restroom Identification
Size
311 mm H x 229 mm W
(12 1/4" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Use these signs to inform with
24244
2A244
a symbol, tactile raised text and
Braille.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family, component
systems, curved and flat. Top
section raised text and Braille.
Lower section to be raised graphic
symbol.

Graphic Process
Tactile symbol and text with MEN
accompanying Braille.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart

Typography IN-09.01 IN-09.02 IN-09.03

Helvetica Bold
Grade 2 Braille 24244
2A244
24244
2A244
24244
2A244

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive.

Installation
On wall or door 1524 mm (60") to
top of sign and on door, center. MEN WOMEN RESTROOM
Recommendations
These signs are for use to identify
IN-09.04 IN-09.05 IN-09.06
restrooms.

24244
2A244
24244
2A244
24244
2A244

MEN WOMEN RESTROOM

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (60")

Wall mounted

12/2012 Page 9-5-27

 IN-09.01-.06 Interior Signs
Restroom Identification

Braille

235 mm
(9-1/4”) 152.4
mm
Symbol
6” Icon
Area

25 mm
(1”)

50 mm (2")
1524 mm (60")

12/2012 Page 9-5-28

 IN-09.08 Interior Signs
Pictogram and Symbol
Size
229 mm H x 229 mm W
(9" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Use these signs to inform with a
symbol as well as text.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family, sliding rail
component systems, curved and

TELEPHONE
flat. Sign is a digital print, silkscreen
or vinyl applied graphics.

Graphic Process
Silk-screened or surface applied
vinyl.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart
Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C
Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive.
TELEPHONE ACCESSIBLE INFORMATION
Installation
On wall or door 1524 mm (60") to
top of sign and on door, center.
Message Layout D Message Layout E Message Layout F
Recommendations
These signs are for use when a
symbol will help communicate.

BABY CHANGING
STAIRS ELEVATOR STATION

CL
1524 mm (5'-0")

1524 mm (5'-0")

Door mounted Wall mounted

12/2012 Page 9-5-29

 IN-09.08 Interior Signs
Pictogram and Symbol

Message Layout A-E

Message Layout F

CL
1524 mm (5'-0")

1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-30

 IN-10.01-.06 Interior Signs
Sign Frame
Size
IN-10.02
547 mm x 407 mm
(21 1/2" H x 16" W)

IN-10.03
457 mm x 305 mm
(18" H x 12" W)

IN-10.04
305 mm x 457 mm
(12" H x 18" W)

IN-10.05
305 mm x 242 mm
(12" H x 9 1/2" W)

IN-10.06
242 mm x 305 mm
(9 1/2" H x 12" W)

Description and Use

Use these signs to hold posters,
fire alarm bell schedules, maps or
other information sheets.
10.02 14" x 20" paper poster IN-10.02
10.03 11" x 17" paper, vertical
10.04 11" x 17" paper, horizontal IN-10.03
10.05 81/2" x 11" paper, vertical
10.06 81/2" x 11" paper, horizontal

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background and Accent Bar: refer to
color chart

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive.

Installation
IN-10.04 IN-10.05
On wall
IN-10.06
Recommendations
These signs are for use to hold
papers and posters vertically or
horizontally.
1676 mm (5'-6")
1524 mm (5'-0")

IN-10.04 IN-10.02
IN-10.05 IN-10.03
IN-10.06

12/2012 Page 9-5-31

 IN-10.01-.06 Interior Signs
Sign Frame

IN-10.04

IN-10.02 IN-10.03

IN-10.05 IN-10.06
1676 mm (5'-6")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-32

 IN-11.01-.04 Interior Signs
Informational or Instructional
Size
IN-11.01
229 mm x 229 mm
(9" H x 9" W)

IN-11.02
381 mm x 381 mm For Patient
Information
(15" H x 15" W)

IN-11.03
508 mm x 508 mm
(20"H x 20"W)
Please use
IN-11.04
152 mm H x 152 mm W telephones located
(6" H x 6" W)
at the information
Description and Use
Use this sign to communicate
miscellaneous information.
desk in the main
Message Configuration
lobby.
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) Layouts
relate to the size and importance of
message.

Sign Components
Vary by sign family, sliding rail
component systems, curved and
flat. Can be digital print, silkscreen
or vinyl applied graphics.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl. IN-11.01 IN-11.02 IN-11.03

Colors For Your

Text: refer to color chart. Information For Your Be Informed
Background and Accent Bar: refer to
Ojnf naleotj nalihlie
aklndfa majroepa.
Information Lakeiea nahei naoiw anowh amwirj ajshr
Halweo nahia aneio Fraoerjej nongini niorngi ni usdhon aiwjrioan. Bakwoa iehaoi ksaw aw
color chart aojoja marjap naohr aoingonio rij n. Goaohr diohionn;dn ejfaj naowurih eian. Amakej airhaoinfieao fnia
asoow. jfa'opwej oijoan au ef esij ej kanfli aienfioa naiw aie aieh. O aoh aebfaui naie
ohaoifhan. HAouhei feihfiia0t0 aiehaoih ahiw awioh eraponf aheioa aniowa
awhaioh hai aw9u awiohroahfa.
Typography sjjji. Hajkseh ioawul abshrioa.
IAhowrhihi auhfau aihof ainia Si usted es un paciente que esta recibiendo tratamiento por cualquier forma de cancer de la prostata, o antes

Helvetica Bold aoijwo abwiriougs. Kajwhr kkjgo

aihwoaho. Jlaofn eijaj amwirja
de llevarse a cabo una biopsia para cancer de la prostata, se le urge a su medico y cirujano que le den
un sumario escrito de metodos alternativos de tratamiento eficaz, segun la Seccion 1704.7 del Codigo
de Salud y Seguridad de California.

awnapj anwkorjopa.

Mounting IN-11.04
Double sided foam tape, silastic
adhesive or screw. For Your
Information
Ojnf naleotj nalihlie

Installation
aklndfa majroepa.
Halweo nahia aneio

On wall aojoja marjap naohr

asoow.

Recommendations
These sign are for use to present
brief general messages. Text
should be limited to as few a words
as possible. Long messages are
generally not read.
1676 mm (5'-6")
1524 mm (5'-0")

IN-11.01 IN-11.03
IN-11.02
IN-11.04

12/2012 Page 9-5-33

 IN-11.01-.04 Interior Signs
Informational or Instructional

IN-11.01

IN-11.02

IN-11.03

13 mm 152 mm (1/2”)
(1/2”) 13 mm
(1/2”)
1676 mm (5'-6")

16 mm (5/8”)
1524 mm (5'-0")

13 mm (1/2”)
8 mm (3/16”)
152 mm 9.6 mm (3/8”)
(1/2”)

IN-11.01 IN-11.03
IN-11.04 IN-11.02
IN-11.04

12/2012 Page 9-5-34

 IN-12.01-.04 Interior Signs
Desk or Counter
Size
IN-12.01
152 mm x 229 mm
(6" H x 9" W)

Clinic B
IN-12.02
229 mm x 229 mm
(9" H x 9" W)

Check In
IN-12.03-04
76 mm x 229 mm
(3" H x 9" W)

Description and Use

Use this sign for messages to be
communicated at counters and
desks.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) IN-12.01
is for titles or titles with a short
informational text. IN-12.02 is
for long titles or titles with a long
informational text. IN-12.03 is
suggested for use as a desk plaque
with and individuals name.
IN-12.02
Sign Components
Sliding rail component systems,
Curved and flat inserts vinyl
applied graphics. Visitors
IN-12.01
Lorem ipsum dolor sit
Graphic Process amet, consectetur
Surface applied vinyl.
Visitors adipisicing elit, sed do
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, eiusmod tempor
Colors consectetur adipisicing elit, incididunt ut labore
Text: Refer to color chart. sed do eiusmod tempor et dolore magna aliqua.
Background : refer to color chart incididunt ut labore et dolore
Ut enim ad minim
Base: refer to color chart magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim
veniam, quis nostrud. veniam, quis nostrud.
Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Freestanding.

Installation
On counter or desk. IN-12.03 IN-12.04
Recommendations
This sign is for use if information Eugene J.
does not require long or large Mark Durst
text and needs to be removed or Fitzsimmon Jr.
relocated based on the function of
the counter.

12/2012 Page 9-5-35

 IN-12.01-.04 Interior Signs
Desk or Counter Sign

IN-12.01

IN-12.02

IN-12.03 IN-12.04

12/2012 Page 9-5-36

 IN-13 Interior Signs
Perpendicular (Flag) Mount
Size
229 mm H x 305 mm W
(9" H x 12" W)

Cardiac
Description and Use
Use this sign for messages to be
communicated in corridors on the
wall, above doors.

Intervention
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) Layout A is
for symbols and title / informational

Unit
text. Layout B is for directional
information. Layout C is for a
department name.

Sign Components
Sliding rail component systems,
Curved and flat inserts vinyl
applied graphics.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.
Side A Side B
Colors
Text and Symbols: Refer to color Message Layout A
chart.
Background: refer to color chart
Base: refer to color chart

Typography
Restrooms Restrooms
Helvetica Bold Condensed

Mounting Side A Side B

Wall mount with screws.
Message Layout B
Installation
Install on wall above the height of This Way This Way
doors, 2134 mm (84") minimum to
bottom of sign. Out Out
Recommendations
This sign is for use when the
service or department is a high
Side A Side B
traffic area or the service or
department door is hard to find. Message Layout C
Cardiac Cardiac
Intervention Intervention
Unit Unit
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-37

 IN-13 Interior Signs
Perpendicular (Flag) Mount

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-38

 IN-14.01-.05 Interior Signs
Wall Directional
Size
IN-14.01
610 mm x 508 mm
(24"H x 20"W)

IN-14.02
762 mm x 508 mm

Reception
(30"H x 20"W)

IN-14.03
914 mm x 508 mm
(36"H x 20"W)

IN-14.04
457 mm x 508 mm
(18"H x 20"W)

IN-14.05
305 mm x 508 mm
(12"H x 20"W)

Sign Use and Application

Use this sign for directional
information.
Surgery
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family, sliding rail
component systems, curved and IN-14.01 IN-14.02 IN-14.03
flat with vinyl applied graphics.

Graphic Process Receptionist Receptionist Receptionist

Surface applied vinyl.
PTSD PTSD PTSD
Colors Podiatry Podiatry
Text and Arrows: refer to color
chart.
Background and Accent Bar: refer to Surgery
color chart Pharmacy Surgery Surgery
Typography Canteen Pharmacy Pharmacy
Helvetica Bold Canteen Canteen
IN-14.04 Retail Store
Mounting
Secure to wall with physical Elevators
fasteners. IN-14.05
Receptionist
Installation
On wall.
Receptionist
Recommendations Surgery PTSD
This sign is for use in corridors to Canteen
direct patients and public through
the building.
1981 mm (6'-6")
1829 mm (6'-0")
1676 mm (5'-6")

IN-14.04 IN-14.01 IN-14.03

IN-14.05 IN-14.02

12/2012 Page 9-5-39

 IN-14.01-.05 Interior Signs
Wall Directional

IN-14.04

IN-14.01

IN-14.02

IN-14.05

IN-14.03
1981 mm (6'-6")
1829 mm (6'-0")
1676 mm (5'-6")

ARROW: Refer to
standards for arrow
positioning relative to
text.

IN-14.04 IN-14.01 IN-14.03

IN-14.05 IN-14.02

12/2012 Page 9-5-40

 IN-14.06-.10 Interior Signs
Wall Directional with Insert
Size
IN-14.06
610 mm x 508 mm
(24"H x 20"W)

IN-14.07
762 mm x 508 mm
(30"H x 20"W)

IN-14.08 Reception
914 mm x 508 mm
(36"H x 20"W)

IN-14.09
457 mm x 508 mm
(18"H x 20"W)

IN-14.10
305 mm x 508 mm
(12"H x 20"W)
Surgery
Sign Use and Application
Use this sign for directional
information.
IN-14.09
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family component IN-14.06 IN-14.07 IN-14.08
systems, curved and flat.

Graphic Process
Digital print with clear lens cover. Receptionist Receptionist
Receptionist
PTSD PTSD PTSD
Colors
Text and Arrows: refer to color Podiatry Podiatry
chart.
Background: refer to color chart Surgery
Pharmacy Surgery Surgery
Typography
Canteen Pharmacy Pharmacy
Helvetica Bold
Canteen Canteen
Mounting Retail Store
Secure to wall with physical IN-14.09 Elevators
fasteners.

Installation IN-14.10
On wall. Receptionist

Recommendations Receptionist
This sign is for use in corridors to Surgery PTSD
direct patients and public through
the building. Canteen

IN-14.06 IN-14.08
IN-14.09 IN-14.07
IN-14.10
1981 mm (6'-6")
1829 mm (6'-0")
1676 mm (5'-6")

12/2012 Page 9-5-41

 IN-14.06-.10 Interior Signs
Wall Directional with Insert

IN-14.09

IN-14.06

IN-14.07

IN-14.10

IN-14.08

IN-14.06 IN-14.08
IN-14.09 IN-14.07
IN-14.10
1981 mm (6'-6")
1829 mm (6'-0")

ARROW: Refer to
1676 mm (5'-6")

standards for arrow

positioning relative
to text.

12/2012 Page 9-5-42

 IN-14.11-.14 Interior Signs
Floor Level Directional
Size

4
229 mm H x 508 mm W
(Various H x 20" W)
FLOOR
Description and Use
Use this sign for directional FOUR
information in a elevator lobby or
stairwell landing. This sign is always
a top sign component to designate
floor level.

Message Configuration Reception

(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family component
systems, curved and flat.
Surgery
Graphic Process
Patient Rooms
Surface applied vinyl and/or digital 4235 Thru 4357
print

Colors
Text: refer to color chart. IN-14.13
Background and Accent Bar: refer to Elevator DIrectional
color chart

Typography
Helvetica Bold

4 4 4
Mounting
FLOOR FLOOR
Secure to wall with physical FLOOR
FOUR FOUR
fasteners. FOUR

Installation
On wall.
Pharmacy Pharmacy Reception
Recommendations
Use in elevator lobbies, across from Surgery
the elevators, to direct patients and
public. Use at stair landings, across Surgery
from the door to direct patients and Surgery IN-14.11
public. Patient Rooms Floor
4235 Thru 4357 DIrectional
IN-14.12
Urology Floor
Wound Care DIrectional

IN-14.14
Elevator Lobby
Directional
1981 mm (6'-6")
1829 mm (6'-0")
1676 mm (5'-6")

12/2012 Page 9-5-43

 IN-14.11-.14 Interior Signs
Floor Level Directional

IN-14.13
IN-14.14

IN-14.11
IN-14.12

IN-14.12 IN-14.14
IN-14.13
IN-14.11
1981 mm (6'-6")

ARROW: Refer to
1829 mm (6'-0")
1676 mm (5'-6")

standards for arrow

positioning relative
to text.

12/2012 Page 9-5-44

 IN-14.15-.18 Interior Signs
Floor Level Directional with Inserts

4
Size
229 mm H x 508 mm W
(Various H x 20" W)
FLOOR
Description and Use FOUR
Use this sign for directional
information in a elevator lobby or
stairwell landing. This sign always
has floor designation on the top of
the signs to designate floor level.
Reception
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family component Surgery
systems, curved and flat.
Patient Rooms
Graphic Process
Digital print with clear lens cover.
4235 Thru 4357
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color
chart. IN-14.17
Background: refer to color chart Elevator DIrectional

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Secure to wall with physical FLOOR FLOOR
fasteners. FLOOR FOUR FOUR
FOUR

Installation
On wall.
Pharmacy Pharmacy
Recommendations Pharmacy
Reception
Use in elevator lobbies, across from
the elevators, to direct patients and
public. Use at stair landings, across Reception
Reception
from the door to direct patients and
Surgery
public. IN-14.15
Floor
IN-14.16 DIrectional
Floor
DIrectional

IN-14.18
Elevator Lobby
Directional
1981 mm (6'-6")
1829 mm (6'-0")
1676 mm (5'-6")

12/2012 Page 9-5-45

 IN-14.15-.18 Interior Signs
Floor Level Directional with Inserts

IN-14.15
IN-14.16

IN-14.18
IN-14.17

IN-14.17
IN-14.18
IN-14.16
IN-14.15
1981 mm (6'-6")

ARROW: Refer to
1829 mm (6'-0")
1676 mm (5'-6")

standards for arrow

positioning relative
to text.

12/2012 Page 9-5-46

 IN-14.20-.21 Interior Signs
Elevator Lobby Directional with Strips and Map

4
Size
229 mm H x 508 mm W
(Various H x 20" W)
FLOOR
Description and Use FOUR
Use this sign for directional
information in an elevator lobby or
stairwell landing. This sign always
has floor designation and a "You
are Here Map".
Pharmacy
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Surgery
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail Pharmacy
component systems, curved and
flat, with vinyl applied graphics. You Are Here
Surgery

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart. IN-14.20
Background and accent bar: refer to Elevator DIrectional
color chart

Typography

4 4
Helvetica Bold
FLOOR FLOOR
Mounting
FOUR FOUR
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners.

Installation
On wall. Pharmacy Pharmacy
Recommendations Surgery
Use in elevator lobbies, across from
the elevators, to direct patients and Surgery
public. Use at stair landings, across Pharmacy
from the door to direct patients and You Are Here
public. Pharmacy
Surgery

You Are Here

Surgery

IN-14.21 IN-14.20
Elevator DIrectional Elevator DIrectional
with Map with Map
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-47

 IN-14.20-.21 Interior Signs
Elevator Lobby Directional with Strips and Map

43”
1067 mm
37”
940 mm

Digital Print
“ You Are Digital Print
Here” Map “ You Are
Here” Map

IN-14.20
IN-14.21

1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-48

 IN-14.25-.26 Interior Signs
Elevator Lobby Directional with Digital Print Insert
Size
229 mm H x 508 mm W

4
(Various H x 20" W)

Description and Use FLOOR

Use this sign for directional FOUR
information in a elevator lobby or
stairwell landing. This sign always
has floor designation and a “You
are Here Map”.

Message Configuration Pharmacy

(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components Surgery

Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved and Pharmacy
flat, with digital print graphics
You Are Here
behind a clear lens. Surgery

Graphic Process
Digital print graphics.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart. IN-14.25
Background: refer to color chart Elevator DIrectional

Typography
Helvetica Bold

4 4
Mounting
Secure to wall with Physical FLOOR FLOOR
fasteners. FOUR FOUR

Installation
On wall.

Recommendations Pharmacy Pharmacy

Use in elevator lobbies, across from
the elevators, to direct patients and
public. Use at stair landings, across Surgery
from the door to direct patients and Surgery
public. Pharmacy

You Are Here

Surgery
Pharmacy

You Are Here

Surgery

IN-14.25
Elevator DIrectional
with Map
IN-14.26
Elevator DIrectional
with Map
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-49

 IN-14.25-.26 Interior Signs
Elevator Lobby Directional with Digital Print Insert

37”
940 mm

Digital Print
“You Are
Here” Map

IN-14.25

43”
1067 mm

Digital Print
“You Are
Here” Map

IN-14.26
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-50

 IN-15.51 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Identification
Size
IN-15.51A
152 mm x 1016 mm
(6" x 40") 3" and 2" text with Text Sign Directional Department
directional arrows Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
Description and Use
Use this sign for directional IN-15.51 A 40" 6" 3" All x
and department identification IN-15.51 B 40" 6" 3" All x
information that needs to be IN-15.51 C 40" 6" 2" All x x
communicated overhead. Sign is
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).
Message Layout A (Directional with Arrows)
Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved Canteen
and flat panels with vinyl applied
graphics.
Message Layout B (Department I.D.)
Graphic Process

EMERGENCY
Surface applied vinyl or digital print.

Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color
chart.
Background: refer to color chart. Message Layout C

Typography
Helvetica Bold
Outpatient Services
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap
height text.

Mounting
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7'-0") from
floor.

Installation
From the ceiling. Braided stainless
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be
attached directly to "T Grid" or lift
out ceiling tile.

Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height, there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
number of messages. EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ
Verify that ceiling height will
accommodate sign height.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

(84").

12/2012 Page 9-5-51

 IN-15.51 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-52

 IN-15.52 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID
Size
IN-15.52 Text Sign Directional Department

305 mm x 1016 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(12" x 40") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-15.52 A 40" 12" 3" All x
IN-15.52 B 40" 12" 3" All x
Description and Use
Use this sign for directional
IN-15.52 C 40" 12" 2" All x
information that needs to be IN-15.52 D 40" 12" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Sign is IN-15.52 E 40" 12" 2" & 3" Insert Only x x
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
Vending
Canteen
component systems, curved
and flat panels with vinyl applied
graphics.
Message Layout A
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors Outpatient Receptionist

Text and arrows: refer to color
chart.
Background: refer to color chart
& Registration
Message Layout B
Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed Patient
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap
height text. Elevators
Mounting. Main Lobby Restrooms
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7'-0") from
Message Layout C
floor.

Installation
From the ceiling. Braided stainless Outpatient Receptionist
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be
attached directly to “T Grid” or lift & Registration
out ceiling tile.

Recommendations Message Layout D

This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required Outpatient Receptionist
letter height, there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
number of messages. & Registration
Verify that ceiling height will Message Layout E
accommodate sign height.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm
(84"). EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-53

 IN-15.52 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

63.5 mm 2-1/2

Message Layout D

63.5 mm 2-1/2

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-54

 IN-15.53 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID
Size
IN-15.53 Text Sign Directional Department

457 mm x 1016 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(18" x 40") 3" and 2" text
IN-15.53 A 40" 18" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-15.53 B 40" 18" 3" All x
Use this sign for directional
information that needs to be IN-15.53 C 40" 18" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Sign is IN-15.53 D 40" 18" 2" All x
double sided and both sides can be IN-15.53 E 40" 18" 2" & 3" All x x
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail

Outpatient Receptionist
component systems, curved and
flat vinyl applied graphics.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl. & Registration
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color
Check-In
chart.
Message Layout E
Background: refer to color chart

Typography Message Layout A Message Layout B

Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3”) and 51 mm (2”) cap
height required for text per layout
Canteen Canteen
Mounting Retail Store Retail Store
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7'-0") from
floor.
ATM & Vending ATM & Vending
Installation
From the ceiling. Braided stainless
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be
Message Layout C Message Layout D
attached directly to “T Grid” or lift
out ceiling tile.
Canteen Occupational Therapy
Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to Deli Take Out Conference Center
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required Blood Draw
letter height, there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to Pick-up Order Medical Records
number of messages.

Verify that ceiling height will

accommodate sign height.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm
EQ. EQ.
(84"). EQ EQ
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-55

 IN-15.53 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID

6"

457

Message Layout A

6"

457

Message Layout B & E

1 - 1/4
457

Message Layout C

1 - 1/4
457

Message Layout D

EQ. EQ.

ARROW: Refer to
standards for arrow
positioning relative to
text.
Sign clearance
requires a high ceiling
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN. verify ceiling height

12/2012 Page 9-5-56

 IN-15.55 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert
Size
IN-15.55 Text Sign Directional Department
152 mm x 1016 mm Arrows ID
Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family
(6” x 40”) 3” text with Directional
Arrows
IN-15.55 A 40" 6" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-15.55 B 40" 6" 3" All x
Use this sign for directional IN-15.55 C 40" 6" 2" All x x
and Department Identification
information that needs to be
communicated overhead. Sign is
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.
Message Layout A (Directional with Arrows)
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) Canteen
Sign Components
Vary by Sign Family. Sliding Rail
component systems, Curved and
Message Layout B (Department I.D.)
Flat inserts with digital print insert
and clear lens cover.

Graphic Process EMERGENCY

Surface applied vinyl or digital print

Colors
Text and Arrows: refer to Color Message Layout C
Chart.
Background: refer to Color Chart
Outpatient Services
Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") or 51 mm 2"cap height
required for all text.

Mounting
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7’-0”) from
floor.

Installation
From the ceiling. Braided stainless
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be
attached directly to “T Grid” or lift
out ceiling tile.

Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height, there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
number of messages.
EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ
Verify that ceiling height will
accommodate sign height.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm
(84").
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-57

 IN-15.55 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-58

 IN-15.56 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID with Insert
Size
Text Sign Directional Department
IN-15.56 Arrows ID
305 mm x 1016 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family
(12" x 40") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-15.56 A 40" 12" 3" All x
IN-15.56 B 40" 12" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-15.56 C 40" 12" 2" All x
Use this sign for directional
IN-15.56 D 40" 12" 2" All x
information that needs to be
communicated overhead. Sign is IN-15.56 E 40" 12" 2" & 3" All x x
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vending
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved and Canteen
flat inserts digital print with clear
lens cover. Message Layout A

Graphic Process
Digital print
Outpatient Receptionist
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color
chart.
& Registration
Background: refer to color chart Message Layout B
Typography
Helvetica Bold Outpatient Services
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap Elevators
height required for all text.
Main Lobby Restrooms
Mounting
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7'-0") from Message Layout C
floor.

Installation
From the ceiling. Braided stainless Outpatient Receptionist
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be
attached directly to “T Grid” or lift
& Registration
out ceiling tile.
Message Layout D
Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required Outpatient Receptionist
letter height, there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
number of messages.
& Registration
Verify that ceiling height will Message Layout E
accommodate sign height.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm EQ. EQ.
(84"). EQ EQ
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-59

 IN-15.56 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID with Insert

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

Message Layout D

63.5 mm 2-1/2

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-60

 IN-15.57 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID with Insert
Size
IN-15.57
Text Sign Directional Department
457 mm x 1016 mm Arrows ID
(18" x 40") 3" and 2" text Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family

Description and Use IN-15.57 A 40" 18" 3" All x

Use this sign for directional IN-15.57 B 40" 18" 3" All x
information that needs to be IN-15.57 C 40" 18" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Sign is
IN-15.57 D 40" 18" 2" All x
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages. IN-15.57 E 40" 18" 2" & 3" All x x

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved and
flat graphic insert with clear lens
Outpatient Receptionist
cover.
& Registration
Graphic Process
Digital print insert. Check-In
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color Message Layout E
chart.
Background: refer to color chart
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed
Canteen Canteen
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap
height required for text per layout Retail Store Retail Store
Mounting
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7'-0") from
ATM & Vending ATM & Vending
floor.

Installation
From the ceiling. Braided stainless
Message Layout C Message Layout D
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be
attached directly to “T Grid” or lift
out ceiling tile. Canteen Occupational Therapy
Recommendations Deli Take-Out Conference Center
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
Blood Draw
the building. Because of required Pick-up Order Medical Records
letter height, there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
number of messages.

Verify that ceiling height will

accommodate sign height.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm EQ. EQ. EQ EQ
(84").
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-61

 IN-15.57 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID with Insert

6"

457

Message Layout A

6"

457

Message Layout B & E

1 - 1/2

63.5 2 - 1/2
457

Message Layout C

457

Message Layout D

ARROW: Refer to
EQ. EQ. EQ EQ standards for arrow
positioning relative
to text.

Sign clearance
requires a high ceiling.
Verify ceiling height.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-62

 IN-15.61 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID
Size
IN-15.61 Text Sign Directional Department

152 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(6" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-15.61 A 80" 6" 3" All x
IN-15.61 B 80" 6" 3" All x
Description and Use
Use this sign for directional IN-15.61 C 80" 6" 2" All x
information that needs to be IN-15.61 D 80" 6" 3" & 2" All x
communicated overhead. Sign is
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail Canteen Pharmacy
component systems, curved
and flat panel with vinyl applied Message Layout A
graphics.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl. Ear, Nose & Throat Clinic
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color Message Layout B
chart.
Background: refer to color chart

Typography Financial Managment Occupational Therapy

Helvetica Bold CLC Dining Hall Imaging Center - Radiology
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap Message Layout C
height required for all text.

Mounting
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7'-0") from
floor. Waiting Area 1 Imaging Services Waiting Area 2
Installation Message Layout D
From the ceiling. Braided stainless
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be
attached directly to “T Grid” or lift
out ceiling tile.

Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height, there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
number of messages.
EQ. EQ.
Verify that ceiling height will
accommodate sign height.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm
(84").
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-63

 IN-15.61 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout C

Message Layout D

ARROW: Refer to
standards for arrow
positioning relative
EQ. EQ. to text.

Sign clearance
requires a high ceiling.
Verify ceiling height.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-64

 IN-15.62 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID
Size
IN-15.62 Text Sign Directional Department

305 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(12" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-15.62 A 80" 12" 3" All x
IN-15.62 B 80" 12" 3" All x
Description and Use
IN-15.62 C 80" 12" 2" All x
Use this sign for directional
information that needs to be IN-15.62 D 80" 12" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Sign is IN-15.62 E 80" 12" 2" & 3" Insert Only x x
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Canteen Pharmacy
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved
and flat panels with vinyl applied
Spinal Rehab Urology
graphics. Message Layout A

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl
Ear, Nose & Throat
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart
Check-In Check-Out
Message Layout B
Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed Financial Management Occupational Therapy
76 mm (3”) and 51 mm (2”) cap
height required for all text. CLC Dining Hall Imaging Center - Radiology
Mounting. Veterans Business Center Blood Draw
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7'-0") from
Message Layout C
floor.

Installation Imaging Services

From the ceiling. Braided stainless
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be Waiting Area 1 Waiting Area 2
attached directly to “T Grid” or lift
out ceiling tile. PET Scan - CT Scan Radiology - X Ray
Recommendations Message Layout D
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
Occupational Therapy
letter height, there is a limit to the Financial Management Imaging Center - Radiology
length of messages and a limit to
number of messages. EMERGENCY Blood Draw
Verify that ceiling height will Message Layout E
accommodate sign height.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm
(84"). EQ. EQ.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-65

 IN-15.62 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID

2032 mm (6’-8”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout A
2032 mm (6’-8”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout B
2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

25.4 mm (1”)
304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout C

2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

25.4 mm (1”)
304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout D

2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

25.4 mm (1”)
304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-66

 IN-15.63 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID
Size
IN-15.63 Text Sign Directional Department

457 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(18" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-15.63 A 80" 18" 3" All x
IN-15.63 B 80" 18" 3" All x
Description and Use
Use this sign for directional IN-15.63 C 80" 18" 2" All x
information that needs to be IN-15.63 D 80" 18" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Sign is IN-15.63 E 80" 18" 2" & 3" All x x
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Canteen Pharmacy
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved Spinal Rehab Urology
and flat panels with vinyl applied
graphics.
Main Lobby Restrooms
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl. Message Layout A

Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart
Community Services
Typography
Helvetica Bold
CLC Veterans Business
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm and 51 mm (3" and 2") cap Dining Hall Center
height required for text per layout
Message Layout B
Mounting
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7'-0") from
floor. Mental Health
Installation Security Occupational Therapy
From the ceiling. Braided stainless
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be Accounting - Cashier Imaging Center - Radiology
attached directly to “T Grid” or lift
out ceiling tile. Pharmacy Blood Draw
Recommendations Message Layout C
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height, there is a limit to the
Security Alert
length of messages and a limit to
number of messages. Persons entering this property consent to an inspection of all packages,

Verify that ceiling height will

luggage & containers in their possession. Refusal of consent to search is basis
accommodate sign height. for denial of admittance. See Security Officers for detail of security policy.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm
(84").
Message Layout D

Imaging Services
Registration Waiting Area 2
All Visitors Must Check in Wait for Number to be Called

Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 9-5-67

 IN-15.63 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID
2032 mm (6’-8”)

6"

457

Message Layout A
2032 mm (6’-8”)

CL

457

Message Layout B
2032 mm (6’-8”)

457

1 - 1/4

Message Layout C
2032 mm (6’-8”)
CL

457

1 - 1/4

Message Layout D
2134 mm (6’-8")
CL

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

Verify ceiling height

for sign clearance

12/2012 Page 9-5-68

 IN-15.65 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID with Insert
Size
Text Sign Directional Department
IN-15.65 Arrows ID
152 mm x 2032 mm
Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family
(6" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-15.65 A 80" 6" 3" All x
IN-15.65 B 80" 6" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-15.65 C 80" 6" 2" All x
Use this sign for directional
IN-15.65 D 80" 6" 3" & 2" All x
information that needs to be
communicated overhead. Sign is
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
Canteen Pharmacy
component systems, curved and
Message Layout A
flat with inserts digital print.

Graphic Process
Digital print with clear lens cover

Colors Ear, Nose & Throat Clinic

Text and arrows: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart Message Layout B

Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap
Financial Management Occupational Therapy
height required for all text. CLC Dining Hall Imaging Center - Radiology
Installation Message Layout C
Hang from ceiling 2134 mm (7'-0")
from floor

Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
Waiting Area 1 Imaging Services Waiting Area 2
the building. Because of required
Message Layout D
letter height, there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
number of messages.

Verify that ceiling height will

accommodate sign height.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm
(84").

EQ. EQ.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-69

 IN-15.65 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID with Insert

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout A

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout B

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout C

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout D

EQ. EQ.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-70

 IN-15.66 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID with Insert
Size
Text Sign Directional Department
IN-15.66 Arrows ID
305 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family
(12" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-15.66 A 80" 12" 3" All x
IN-15.66 B 80" 12" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-15.66 C 80" 12" 2" All x
Use this sign for directional
IN-15.66 D 80" 12" 2" All x
information that needs to be
communicated overhead. Sign is IN-15.66 E 80" 12" 2" & 3" All x x
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Canteen Pharmacy
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved and Spinal Rehab Urology
flat panels with digital print inserts.
Message Layout A
Graphic Process
Digital print insert with clear lens
cover.
Ear, Nose & Throat
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart
Check-In Check-Out
Typography Message Layout B
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and/or (2") cap height Financial Management Occupational Therapy
required for text per layout.
CLC Dining Hall Imaging Center - Radiology
Mounting
Veterans Business Center Blood Draw
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7'-0") from
floor. Message Layout C

Installation
From the ceiling. Braided stainless Imaging Services
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be
attached directly to “T Grid” or lift Waiting Area 1 Waiting Area 2
out ceiling tile.
PET Scan - CT Scan Radiology - X Ray
Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to Message Layout D
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height, there is a limit to the Occupational Therapy
length of messages and a limit to Financial Management Imaging Center - Radiology
number of messages.

Verify that ceiling height will

EMERGENCY Blood Draw
accommodate sign height. Message Layout E
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm
(84").
EQ. EQ.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-71

 IN-15.66 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID with Insert

2032 mm (6’-8”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout A
2032 mm (6’-8”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout B

2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout C

2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout D

2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

12/2012 Page 9-5-72

 IN-15.67 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID with Insert
Size
IN-15.67 Text Sign Directional Department

457 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(18" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-15.67 A 80" 18" 3" All x
Description and Use
IN-15.67 B 80" 18" 3" All x
Use this sign for directional IN-15.67 C 80" 18" 2" All x
information that needs to be IN-15.67 D 80" 18" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Sign is IN-15.67 E 80" 18" 2" & 3" All x x
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components Canteen Pharmacy

Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved and
flat panels with digital print graphic. Spinal Rehab Urology
Graphic Process
Digital print insert with clear lens
Main Lobby Restrooms
cover.
Message Layout A
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart Community Services
Typography
Helvetica Bold Community Living Veterans Business
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and/or (2") cap height
required for text per layout.
Dining Hall Center
Mounting Message Layout B
Ceiling hung 2134 mm (7'-0") from
floor.
Mental Health
Installation
From the ceiling. Braided stainless Security Occupational Therapy
steel wire or rod. Sign must not be
attached directly to “T Grid” or lift Accounting - Cashier Imaging Center - Radiology
out ceiling tile.
Pharmacy Blood Draw
Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to Message Layout C
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height, there is a limit to the Security Alert
length of messages and a limit to
number of messages. Persons entering this property consent to an inspection of all packages,
Verify that ceiling height will luggage & container in their possession. Refusal of consent to search is basis
accommodate sign height. for denial of admittance. See Security Officers for detail of security policy.
Clearance requirement is 2134 mm
(84").
Message Layout D

Imaging Services
Registration Waiting Area 2
All Visitor Must Check in Wait for Number to be Called

Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 9-5-73

 IN-15.67 Interior Signs
Ceiling Mounted Directional and Department ID with Insert

2032 mm (6’-8”)

457

Message Layout A
2032 mm (6’-8”)

457

Message Layout B
2032 mm (6’-8”)

457

Message Layout C
2032 mm (6’-8”)

457

Message Layout D
2134 mm (6’-8")

1 - 1/2

Message Layout E
EQ. EQ.
2134 mm (7'-0") MIN.

Verify ceiling height

for sign clearance

12/2012 Page 9-5-74

 IN-16.51 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification
Size
IN-16.51 Text Sign Directional Department
152 mm x 1016 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(6" x 40") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows
IN-16.51 A 40" 6" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-16.51 B 40" 6" 3" All x
Use this sign for directional IN-16.51 C 40" 6" 2" All x x
and department identification
information that needs to be
communicated overhead. Sign is
single sided mounted on wall or
over doorway.
Message Layout A (Directional with Arrows)
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Registration
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved
and flat panels with vinyl applied
graphics. Message Layout B (Department I.D.)

Surgery
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl

Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color
chart.
Background: refer to color chart
Message Layout C
Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap Outpatient Pharmacy
height.

Installation
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners

Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
the number of messages.

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-75

 IN-16.51 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-76

 IN-16.52 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification
Size
IN-16.52 Text Sign Directional Department
305 mm x 1016 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(12" x 40") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows
IN-16.52 A 40" 12" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-16.52 B 40" 12" 3" All x
Use this sign for directional IN-16.52 C 40" 12" 2" All x
information that needs to be IN-16.52 D 40" 12" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Sign is IN-16.52 E 40" 12" 2" & 3" All x x
single sided soffit mount

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)
Pharmacy
Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved
Cashier
and flat panels with vinyl applied Message Layout A
graphics.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl, Outpatient Surgery
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color & Check-in
chart.
Background color: refer to color chart Message Layout B

Typography
Helvetica Bold Patient Rooms
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap Elevators
height
Main Lobby Restrooms
Installation Message Layout C
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners.

Recommendations Outpatient Surgery

This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through & Check-In
the building. Because of required
letter height there is a limit to the
Message Layout D
length of messages and a limit to
the number of messages.

Outpatient Surgery

& Registration
Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-77

 IN-16.52 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

Message Layout D

63.5 mm 2-1/2

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-78

 IN-16.53 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification
Size
IN-16.53 Text Sign Directional Department

457 mm x 1016 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(18" x 40") 76 mm (3") and 51 mm
(2") text with and without directional IN-16.53 A 40" 18" 3" All x
arrows IN-16.53 B 40" 18" 3" All x
Description and Use
IN-16.53 C 40" 18" 2" All x
Use this sign for directional IN-16.53 D 40" 18" 2" All x
information that needs to be IN-16.53 E 40" 18" 2" & 3" All x x
communicated overhead. Sign
is single sided wall mount over
header or doorway.

Message Configuration Message Layout A Message Layout B

(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) Dining Commons Dining Commons
Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved and
Barber Shop Barber Shop
flat vinyl applied graphics.
ATM & Vending ATM & Vending
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors Message Layout C Message Layout D

Text and arrows: refer to color
chart.
Background: refer to color chart. Canteen Community Living Center
Typography Deli Take Out Dining Commons
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed Barber Shop
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap
height required for text per layout. Pick-up Order Canteen
Installation
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners. Message Layout E

Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to Outpatient Receptionist
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height there is a limit to the & Registration
length of messages and a limit to
the number of messages. Check In

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-79

 IN-16.53 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification

6"

457

Message Layout A

6"

457

(3” or 2”)

Message Layout B & E

1 - 1/4
4 1/2"
1 - 1/4
457

Message Layout C

1 - 1/4
4 1/2"
1 - 1/4
457

Message Layout D

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-80

 IN-16.55 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert
Size
IN-16.55
152 mm x 1016 mm Text Sign Directional Department

(6" x 40") 3" and 2" text with and Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
without directional arrows
IN-16.55 A 40" 6" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-16.55 B 40" 6" 3" All x
Use this sign for directional
IN-16.55 C 40" 6" 2" All x x
and department identification
information that needs to be
communicated overhead. Sign is
single sided mounted on wall or
over doorway

Message Configuration Message Layout A (Directional with Arrows)

(Refer to layout drawing for lettering

Registration
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved and
flat panels with digital graphic
insert.

Graphic Process Message Layout B (Department ID)

Digital print graphic insert with

Surgery
clear lens cover.

Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart

Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed Message Layout C
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap
height.

Installation
Outpatient Pharmacy
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners.

Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
the number of messages.

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-81

 IN-16.55 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

51 mm (2”) 51 mm (2”)

12/2012 Page 9-5-82

 IN-16.56 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert
Size
IN-16.56 Text Sign Directional Department
305 mm x 1016 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(12" x 40") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows
IN-16.56 A 40" 12" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-16.56 B 40" 12" 3" All x
Use this sign for directional IN-16.56 C 40" 12" 2" All x
information that needs to be IN-16.56 D 40" 12" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Sign is IN-16.56 E 40" 12" 2" & 3" All x x
single sided soffit mount.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering

Pharmacy
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved Cashier
and flat panels with digital insert
graphics. Message Layout A

Graphic Process
Digital print with clear lens cover.
Outpatient Surgery
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color
chart.
& Check-in
Background: refer to color chart. Message Layout B
Typography
Helvetica Bold Patient Rooms
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap Elevators
height
Main Lobby Restrooms
Installation
Secure to wall with physical Message Layout C
fasteners.

Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to Outpatient Surgery
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required & Check-In
letter height there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to Message Layout D
the number of messages.

Outpatient Surgery

& Registration
Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-83

 IN-16.56 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

Message Layout D

63.5 mm 2-1/2

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-84

 IN-16.57 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert
Size
Text Sign Directional Department
N-16.57 Arrows ID
457 mm x 1016 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family
(18" x 40") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows. IN-16.57 A 40" 18" 3" All x
IN-16.57 B 40" 18" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-16.57 C 40" 18" 2" All x
Use this sign for directional
IN-16.57 D 40" 18" 2" All x
information that needs to be
communicated overhead. Sign IN-16.57 E 40" 18" 2" & 3" All x x
is single sided wall mount over
header or doorway.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Message Layout A Message Layout B
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components Dining Commons Dining Commons

Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
component systems, curved and
flat panels with digital print inserts.
Barber Shop Barber Shop
Graphic Process ATM & Vending ATM & Vending
Digital print insert with clear lens
cover.

Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color chart Message Layout C Message Layout D
Background: refer to color chart
Canteen Community Living Center
Typography
Helvetica Bold Deli Take Out Dining Commons
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap Barber Shop
height text
Pick-up Order Canteen
Installation
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners.
Message Layout E
Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through Outpatient Receptionist
the building. Because of required
letter height there is a limit to the & Registration
length of messages and a limit to
the number of messages. Check In

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-85

 IN-16.57 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert

6"

457

Message Layout A

6"

457

Message Layout B & E

1 - 1/2

63.5 2 - 1/2
457

Message Layout C

457

Message Layout D

EQ. EQ.
EQ EQ

12/2012 Page 9-5-86

 IN-16.61 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification
Size
IN-16.61 Text Sign Directional Department

152 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(6" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-16.61 A 80" 6" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-16.61 B 80" 6" 3" All x
Use this sign for directional IN-16.61 C 80" 6" 2" All x
information that needs to be IN-16.61 D 80" 6" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Single
sided wall mount over header or
doorway.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Canteen Pharmacy
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
Message Layout A
component systems, curved
and flat panels with vinyl applied
graphics.

Graphic Process Ear, Nose & Throat Clinic

Surface applied vinyl.
Message Layout B
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color chart
Background: refer to color chart
Financial Managment Occupational Therapy
Typography
Helvetica Bold CLC Dining Hall Imaging Center - Radiology
Helvetica Bold Condensed Message Layout C
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap
height.

Installation
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners.
Waiting Area 1 Imaging Services Waiting Area 2

Message Layout D
Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
the number of messages.

EQ. EQ.

12/2012 Page 9-5-87

 IN-16.61 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout C

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout D

EQ. EQ.

12/2012 Page 9-5-88

 IN-16.62 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification
Size
IN-16.62 Text Sign Directional Department
305 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(12" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows
IN-16.62 A 80" 12" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-16.62 B 80" 12" 3" All x
Use this sign for directional IN-16.62 C 80" 12" 2" All x
information that needs to be IN-16.62 D 80" 12" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Single
sided wall mount over header or
doorway.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)
Canteen Pharmacy
Sign Components
Varies by sign family. Sliding
rail component systems, curved
Spinal Rehab Urology
and flat panels with vinyl applied
graphics. Message Layout A

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.
Ear, Nose & Throat
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color
chart.
Check-In Check-Out
Background: refer to color chart.
Message Layout B
Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed Occupational Therapy
75 mm (3") and or 50.8 mm (2") cap
Financial Management
height CLC Dining Hall Imaging Center - Radiology
Installation Veteran’s Business Center Blood Draw
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners. Message Layout C

Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to Imaging Services
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required Waiting Area 1 Waiting Area 2
letter height there is a limit to the PET Scan - CT Scan Radiology - X Ray
length of messages and a limit to
the number of messages.
Message Layout D

EQ. EQ.

12/2012 Page 9-5-89

 IN-16.62 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification
2032 mm (6’-8”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout A

2032 mm (6’-8”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout B
2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

25.4 mm (1”)
304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout C

2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

25.4 mm (1”)
304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout D
2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

25.4 mm (1”)
304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.

12/2012 Page 9-5-90

 IN-16.63 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification
Size
Text Sign Directional Department
IN-16.63 Arrows ID
457 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family
(18" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-16.63 A 80" 18" 3" All x
IN-16.63 B 80" 18" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-16.63 C 80" 18" 2" All x
Use this sign for directional
IN-16.63 D 80" 18" 2" All x
information that needs to be
communicated overhead. Single IN-16.63 E 80" 18" 2" & 3" All x x
sided wall mount over header or
doorway.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) Canteen Pharmacy
Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
Spinal Rehab Urology
component systems, curved
and flat panels with vinyl applied
graphics.
Main Lobby Restrooms
Message Layout A
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors Community Services

Text and arrows: Refer to color

Community Living Veterans Business

chart
Background: Refer to color chart

Typography
Helvetica Bold
Dining Hall Center
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap Message Layout B
height

Installation Mental Health

Secure to wall with physical
fasteners. Security Occupational Therapy
Recommendations Accounting - Cashier Imaging Center - Radiology
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through Pharmacy Blood Draw
the building. Because of required
letter height there is a limit to the Message Layout C
length of messages and a limit to
the number of messages.
Security Alert
Persons entering this property consent to an inspection of all packages,
luggage & containers in their possession. Refusal of consent to search is basis
for denial of admittance. See Security Officers for details of security policy.

Message Layout D

Imaging Services
Registration Waiting Area 2
All Visitor Must Check in Wait for Number to be Called

Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 9-5-91

 IN-16.63 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification
2032 mm (6’-8”)

6"

457

Message Layout A
2032 mm (6’-8”)

CL

457

Message Layout B
2032 mm (6’-8”)

457

1 - 1/4

Message Layout C
2032 mm (6’-8”)
CL

457

1 - 1/4

Message Layout D
2134 mm (6’-8")
CL

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.

This sign
requires
a high ceiling
Verify
clearance

12/2012 Page 9-5-92

 IN-16.65 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert
Size
IN-16.65 Text Sign Directional Department

152 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(6" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-16.65 A 80" 6" 3" All x
IN-16.65 B 80" 6" 3" All x
Description and Use
IN-16.65 C 80" 6" 2" All x
Use this sign for directional
information that needs to be IN-16.65 D 80" 6" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Single
sided wall mount over header or
doorway.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering

Canteen Pharmacy
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail Message Layout A
component systems, curved and
flat panels with digital print insert.

Graphic Process
Digital print insert with clear lens
cover.
Ear, Nose & Throat Clinic
Colors Message Layout B
Text and arrows: Refer to color
chart.
Background: Refer to color chart.

Typography CLC Dining Hall Imaging Center - Radiology

Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed Message Layout C
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap
height

Installation
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners.
Waiting Area 1 Imaging Services Waiting Area 2

Message Layout D
Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
letter height there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to
the number of messages.

EQ. EQ.

12/2012 Page 9-5-93

 IN-16.65 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout A

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout B

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout C

2032 mm (6’-8”)

Message Layout D

EQ. EQ.

12/2012 Page 9-5-94

 IN-16.66 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert
Size
IN-16.66 Text Sign Directional Department

305 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family Arrows ID
(12" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-16.66 A 80" 12" 3" All x
IN-16.66 B 80" 12" 3" All x
Description and Use
Use this sign for directional IN-16.66 C 80" 12" 2" All x
information that needs to be IN-16.66 D 80" 12" 2" All x
communicated overhead. Single IN-16.66 E 80" 12" 2" & 3" Insert Only x x
sided wall mount over header or
doorway.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions). Canteen Pharmacy
Sign Components
Varies by sign family. Sliding rail Spinal Rehab Urology
component systems, curved and
flat panels with digital print insert. Message Layout A

Graphic Process
Digital print Insert with clear lens
cover. Ear, Nose & Throat
Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color
Check-In Check-Out
chart.
Message Layout B
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold Financial Management Occupational Therapy
Helvetica Bold Condensed
76 mm (3") and or 51 mm (2") cap CLC Dining Hall Imaging Center - Radiology
height Veteran’s Business Center Blood Draw
Installation Message Layout C
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners.
Imaging Services
Recommendations
This sign is for use in corridors to Waiting Area 1 Waiting Area 2
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required
PET Scan - CT Scan Radiology - X Ray
letter height there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to Message Layout D
the number of messages.

Financial Management Occupational Therapy

Imaging Center - Radiology
EMERGENCY Blood Draw
Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.

12/2012 Page 9-5-95

 IN-16.66 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert

2032 mm (6’-8”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout A

2032 mm (6’-8”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout B
2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout C

2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout D
2032 mm (6’-8”)

25.4 mm (1”)

304 mm
(12”)

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.

12/2012 Page 9-5-96

 IN-16.67 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert
Size
Text Sign Directional Department
IN-16.67 Arrows ID
457 mm x 2032 mm Sign Type Layout Width Height Size Family
(18" x 80") 3" and 2" text with and
without directional arrows IN-16.67 A 80" 18" 3" All x
IN-16.67 B 80" 18" 3" All x
Description and Use IN-16.67 C 80" 18" 2" All x
Use this sign for directional
IN-16.67 D 80" 18" 2" All x
information that needs to be
communicated overhead. Sign is IN-16.67 E 80" 18" 2" & 3" All x x
double sided and both sides can be
used for messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).
Canteen Pharmacy
Sign Components
Vary by sign family. Sliding rail
Spinal Rehab Urology
component systems, curved and
flat panels with digital print. Main Lobby Restrooms
Graphic Process Message Layout A
Digital print with clear lens cover.

Colors
Text and arrows: refer to color
chart.
Community Services
Background: refer to color chart.
CLC Veteran’s Business
Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed
Dining Hall Center
76 mm (3") and 51 mm (2") cap
height Message Layout B

Installation
Secure to wall with physical
fasteners. Mental Health
Recommendations
Security Occupational Therapy
This sign is for use in corridors to Accounting - Cashier Imaging Center - Radiology
direct patients and public through
the building. Because of required Pharmacy Blood Draw
letter height there is a limit to the
length of messages and a limit to Message Layout C
the number of messages.

Security Alert
Persons entering this property consent to an inspection of all packages,
luggage & containers in their possession. Refusal of consent to search is basis
for denial of admittance. See Security Officers for details of security policy.

Message Layout D

Imaging Services
Registration Waiting Area 2
All visitors must check in Wait for number to be called

Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 9-5-97

 IN-16.67 Interior Signs
Soffit Mounted Directional and Identification with Insert

2032 mm (6’-8”)

457

Message Layout A
2032 mm (6’-8”)

457

Message Layout B
2032 mm (6’-8”)

457

Message Layout C
2032 mm (6’-8”)

457

Message Layout D
2134 mm (6’-8")

1 - 1/2

Message Layout E

EQ. EQ.

12/2012 Page 9-5-98

 IN-18.01 Interior Signs
Glass Door and Side Light Graphics
Sign
38 mm H
(1 1/2" H)
51 mm H
(2" H)
(Other sizes as needed)

Description and Use

This sign is for use at glass entry
doors to rooms or departments that
are used by patients and public. ENT Clinic
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Graphic Process
Surface applied white vinyl.

Colors
Text: White - T1
Do not use black or colors.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Glass side light and glass doors.

Installation
Apply to front reading surface of
glass or second surface of glass
with reverse (backward) cut letters.

EQ EQ

ENT Clinic
1676 mm (5'-6")

EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ

ENT Clinic ENT Clinic ENT Clinic

1676 mm (5'-6")
1676 mm (5'-6")

1676 mm (5'-6")

12/2012 Page 9-5-99

 IN-18.01 Interior Signs
Side Light Graphics

38 mm (1-1/2”)

51 mm (2”)

12/2012 Page 9-5-100

 IN-18.04-.05 Interior Signs
Applied Digital Image and Graphic Text
Size
Digital image to cover elevator,
door size TBD

Description and Use

The sign is for use at the elevator
doors that are used by patients and
public.

Message Configuration
Refer to drawings for lettering sizes
and dimensions.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl and digital
print.

Colors and Image

Text: per floor level
Image per elevator

Typography
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Condensed

Installation
Applied first surface of elevator
doors. Wrap image on overlapping
doors so that full image is visible
when doors are closed.

IN-18.05

IN-18.04

12/2012 Page 9-5-101

 IN-18.04-.05 Interior Signs

Verify Door Witdth

54” to 44” range

Break in door panel

to fall between
letters

Digitally printed
graphic. Oversize
8" graphic to cover
door. verify in field
Image per Zone

to be determined
49-1/2" Applied Vinyl Letter
Text Mid and Light
Tone

IN-18.05

8"
to be determined

49-1/2"

12/2012 Page 9-5-102

IN-18.04
 IN-19.01-.03 Interior Signs
Dimensional Letters
Size
IN-19.01
76 mm H x 10 mm D

Medi
(3" H x 3/8" D)

IN-19.02
102 mm H x 10 mm D
(4" H x 3/8" D)

IN-19.03
152 mm H x 10 mm D
(6" H x 3/8" D)

Description and Use

Identification of information
counters, major departments or
services.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Painted acrylic

Graphic Process
Cut out acrylic dimensional letters.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart
Color should have a high contrast
with surrounding wall color and
surface.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Silastic adhesive and studs.

Installation
On walls or soffits.

Recommendations
Dimensional letters provide high
impact, high visibility and formal
identification. Do not use for
departments or services that have
frequent relocation’s or name
changes. Suggested typical uses
would be for Information, Check In,
Canteen, Pharmacy, etc.

EQ EQ
76 mm (3")

Pharmacy

Admitting
1524 mm MINIMUM
(5'-0")

12/2012 Page 9-5-103

 IN-19.01-.03 Interior Signs
Dimensional Letters

IN-19.01

IN-19.02

IN-19.03

12/2012 Page 9-5-104

 IN-20.01 Interior Signs
Instructional Sign
Size
152 mm x 152 mm
(6" H x 6" W)

Description and Use

Use this sign above handicap
accessible automatic door opening
buttons.

Message Configuration
Push
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions) Button to
Open Door
Sign Components
Painted acrylic

Graphic Process
Silk-screened or surface applied
vinyl.

Colors
Text: Refer to color chart
Background: Refer to color chart

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive.

Installation
On wall 6" above automatic door
opening button.

Recommendations
These signs help bring attention
and provide direction to doors with
automatic opening capability.

CL

PUSH
Push
BUTTON
Button toTO
OPEN
Open DOOR
Door

152 mm (6)"

12/2012 Page 9-5-105

 IN-20.01 Interior Signs
Instructional Sign

152 mm (6”)

Align
13 mm (1/2”)

25 mm (1”)

16 mm (5/8”)

13 mm (1/2”)

16 mm (5/8”)
152 mm (6”)
13 mm (1/2”)

16 mm (5/8”)

3.2 mm (1/8”)

12/2012 Page 9-5-106

 IN-27.01 Interior Signs

Size
2286 mm x 152 mm
(7' 6" H x 6" W)

Description and Use

Free Standing kiosk Identifies
Information station or floor
directory. Used where wall is not
available.

INFORMATION
Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions.)

Sign Components
Frame system with digital or
applied graphics.

Graphic Process
Digital print or surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold Condensed

Mounting
Free standing weighted base or
secure to floor as needed.

Installation
In main entry area where traffic
patterns allow.

Recommendations
These signs help bring attention
and provide identification to
Information stations or registration.

IN-27.01
INFORMATION

12/2012 Page 9-5-107

 IN-27.01 Interior Signs

Weighted Base
12” DIA

6"
1"
9"

1/2” thick letters

6" satin alluminum finish

3/8” aluminum bar w/ brushed

satin finish

Structure frame system

brushed satin aluminum
with digital print
insert

42”

6'-6"

7'-6”

1’-0"

Elevation

12/2012 Page 9-5-108

 Specifications Interior Signs

The specifications for signs are available in the Master Construction Specifications
(PG-18-1) area of the VA Technical Information Library, which is available on the VA
web site under Office of Construction & Facilities Management.

www.cfm.va.gov/til/

Refer to Signage in the specifications, Division 10, Section 10 14 00.

For more information regarding specifications, contact the Office of Construction &
Facilities Management, Facility Standards Service.

The specifications require close coordination, taking into account the existing sign
program at a medical center, any sign demolition, sign maintenance and future signing
needs.

When preparing the specifications for a project, it will require editing to add and
indicate new signs or eliminate signs that are not needed. Also, it will be necessary
to adapt the specifications to project requirements required for the specific project in
which they are intended.

The sign message schedule is considered a part of the specifications and would comprise
a portion of the spec section. The configuration and format of the message schedule
may vary according to individual project requirements. The sign message schedule for-
mat is shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA Signage Design Guide. It pro-
vides the method for identifying each sign location, type and message along with other
notations. The sign schedule contains important information that the sign manufacturer
and the sign installer will require for manufacturing and sign installation.

The sign message schedule must be coordinated with a sign location plan drawing
showing where signs are to be placed within a building or on the site. Refer to the
sign location plan example shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide.

For convenience, the sign type drawings can also be included in the specifications as it
own section.

12/2012 Page 9-6-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Construction Interior Signs

The type of interior sign and sign system being selected for a particular application or fa-
cility requires several decisions and involves different construction and assembly compo-
nents to meet desired requirements. This section provides an overview of the intended
criteria for interior sign programs.

Many sign manufacturers currently market extrusions, standard parts and component
sign systems that meet the objectives of the intended interior sign system. These ex-
truded, molded and fabricated component sign systems are acceptable as long as they
conform to the illustrated and stated specifications.

The acrylic interior sign program, that has been in use since the 80’s, can easily be re-
placed with a component system. A component sign program brings new products and
solutions to meet various needs of the medical centers and are available from GSA ap-
proved sign manufacturers and sign manufacturers in the open market place.

The details showing the construction of the component sign system sign types are based
on a system of standard parts. The illustrations are intended to show desired configura-
tions and the intent of various sign types.

Sections of the extrusions and various parts are for illustration purposes and have not
been engineered or configured for extruding, and do not represent a finished form.

With the component system, variations such as beveled and radius shapes in the accent
rails and end caps do not conform to the VA sign program.

Elimination of the old style radius corners reduces costs, provides more flexibility and al-
low for the inter-changing of components.

Once a component system from a manufacturer is selected, it should become the stan-
dard for the facility. The component system has been designed to be compatible with an
existing old style acrylic system in size, however there will be a significant difference in
appearance.

A component system encourages the ongoing updating and maintenance of the sign
program to be done by the facility. The component system uses vinyl letters as the meth-
od of producing the lettering. Engraving can also be used, but this increases the costs of
the signs and the added cost does not provide significant benefits.

Using an insert style component system allows for the sign updates to be made by the
facility using a digital or laser printer, allowing quick inexpensive updates.

The Specification section of the Guide should be read in conjunction with the
Construction Details section. This will provide an overview of the interior sign construc-
tion requirements, materials and finishes.

12/2012 Page 9-7-1

 Construction Interior Signs

The Guide illustrates component based sign systems for interior sign type families.
Component systems use various interlocking elements which, when assembled,
create a sign. They are available from several manufacturers and these general
illustrations represent component systems that slide or snap together. The VA en-
courages each facility to select the same component system to be used through-
out all the buildings.

A benefit of the component system is that it provides flexibility and simplicity in

maintaining and adapting signs to ever changing needs. Components from one
sign can be interchanged with components from another sign, of the same sign
type, quickly and easily. Existing signs can be added to, or modified to perform
another function. Changing directional signs is simple and adding new text and ar-
rows and rearranging messages is always possible.

Implementation of a component system requires commitment to a specific manu-

facturer’s system. Carefully review the advantages and disadvantages of various
components systems from different manufacturer’s, and contact facilities that have
installed the system that is being considered.

In the following pages, the guide illustrates these sign systems:

• Sliding Rail Component System

• Frame Component Systems
• Insert and Frame Systems
• Curved Frame System

12/2012 Page 9-7-2

 Construction Interior Signs

Sliding Rail Sliding Rail Component systems use various interlocking elements which, when assem-
Component System bled, create a sign. The sign is framed with sides, top and bottom extrusions with sign
panels secured to a back rail. The width and height of the frame varies with each sign
type.

A benefit of the component system is that it provides flexibility and simplicity in

maintaining and adapting signs to ever changing needs. Components from one sign
can be interchanged with components from another sign quickly and easily. Existing
signs can be added to or modified to perform another function.

Changing directional signs is simple. Adding new text and arrows and rearranging mes-
sages is always possible.

2A
24
4

Ph
2A
24
4
Waarma
itin cy
Ph g
Waarma
itin cy
g

Assembled Sign

2A
24
4

Ph
Waarma
itin cy
g

12/2012 Page 9-7-3

 Construction Interior Signs

Snap Frame Snap Frame Component systems use various interlocking elements which, when as-
Component System sembled, create a sign. Clip or rails are secured to the back of the sign panels and side
rails cap off the edges of the panels and secure the stacked configuration.The width and
height of the frame varies with each sign type.

A benefit of the Snap Frame Component system is that it provides flexibility and
simplicity in maintaining and adapting signs to ever changing needs. Components
from one sign can be interchanged with components from another sign quickly and
easily. Existing signs can be added to or modified to perform another function.

Changing directional signs is simple. Adding new text and arrows and rearranging mes-
sages is always possible.

2A
24
4

Ph
2A
24
4
Waarma
itin cy
Ph g
Waarma
itin cy
g

Assembled Sign

2A
24
4

Ph
Waarma
itin cy
g

12/2012 Page 9-7-4

 Construction Interior Signs

Frame and Insert Frame and Insert Component systems use various interlocking elements which, when
Component System assembled, create a sign. Side, top and bottom rails are secured together to hold in place
the insert panels. The width and height of the frame varies with each sign type.

A benefit of the Frame and Insert Component systems is that it provides flex-
ibility and simplicity in maintaining and adapting signs to ever changing needs.
Components from one sign can be interchanged with components from another
sign quickly and easily. Existing signs can be added to or modified to perform an-
other function. A major advantage to this type of sign is that inserts can be fabricat-
ed inside at the facility or paper inserts can be printed "In House" on a laser printer.

Changing directional signs is simple. Adding new text and arrows and rearranging mes-
sages is always possible.

2A
24
4

Ph
Waarma
itin cy
g
2A
24
4

Ph
Waarma
itin cy
g

Assembled Sign
2A
24
4

Ph
Waarma
itin cy
g

12/2012 Page 9-7-5

 Construction Interior Signs

Curved Frame and Curved Frame and Insert Component systems use various interlocking elements which,
Insert Component when assembled, create a sign. Side, top and bottom rails are secured together to hold in
System place the insert panels. The width and height of the frame varies with each sign type.

A benefit of the Curved Frame and Insert Component system is that it provides flex-
ibility and simplicity in maintaining and adapting signs to ever changing needs. A
major advantage is that inserts can be fabricated inside the facility, or paper inserts
can be printed "In House" on a laser printer.

Changing directional signs is simple. Adding new text and arrows and rearranging mes-
sages is always possible.

2
A
2
4
4

2
A
2
4
4

Assembled Sign

2
A
2
4
4

2
A
2
4
4

12/2012 Page 9-7-6

 Construction Interior Signs

Sliding Rail The sliding rail component system uses various interlocking elements that slide together
Component Sign to create a sign. Room signs in the sliding rail type system are similar to the Snap Frame
Family and Insert Frame systems.

2A
24
4

Ph
Waarma
C
Int ardia
itin cy
g
erv
ent c
Room
Sign
ion
Flag
Un
Sign
it

Re
ce
pti
on

Ph
arm
ac
y
Wall
Directional

Ca
nte
Sp en
ina
Overhead
lR
Directional
e ha
b

12/2012 Page 9-7-7

 Construction Interior Signs

Snap Frame and Once assembled the Snap Frame and Insert systems will look quite similar.The main dif-
Frame and Insert ference between the systems will be how the sign insert/panels are produced. In house
Component Sign production will allow quick changes, if staff is assigned and trained to make inserts. If
Family personnel in house are not available to maintain and produce graphics on site, sign
maintenance should be performed by an outside service which may incur additional
costs.

2A
24
4

Ph
Waarma
itin cy
g Ca
nte
Sp en
Room ina
Sign
lR
Over Head
Directional e ha
b

C
Int ardia Re
erv ce
ent c pti
on
ion
Flag
Un Ph
Sign
it arm
ac
y
Wall
Directional

12/2012 Page 9-7-8

 Construction Interior Signs

Curved Frame and Curved Frame and Insert component systems are available to support a variety of
Insert Sign Family sign types required to program a facility. Shapes and assembly methods vary by
manufacturer. The style of frames also varies, therefore research the desired "look"
before proceeding to order.

2
A
2
4
4

Room
Sign
Flag
Sign

Wall
Directional

Over Head
Directional

12/2012 Page 9-7-9

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Installation Interior Signs

The installation of interior signs requires coordination of several interlaced criteria.

Interior signs, especially directional signs, require coordination and careful consideration
of the following:

Criteria • Location of building entrances and elevators.

• Configuration of the corridor system.
• Desired path of travel within the building for visitors, patients and employees.
• Location of departments and clinics.
• A simple clear room numbering system that follows a clear,understandable pattern.
• Adequate light on and around directional signs.
Placement of signs in locations where people are expecting them to be.

Visibility These elements help establish the basis of a clear sign program that communicates and
informs in a direct and simple manner.

Interior signs function to communicate to both patients, visitors and staff. Their place-
ments must be planned relative to the intended viewer, particularly the directional signs.
Sign visibility to the intended user is a principal objective that forms the basis of correct
sign placement.

Placement Proper sign placement is part of a well-planned interior sign program.

In order to meet ABA/ADA guidelines, tactile room number signs must now always be
specifically placed on the wall, on the strike/knob side of the door. Ceiling mounted
signs require large lettering size, therefore, only short selective messages can be
communicated.

Correct placement of signs will usually require fewer signs. Too many signs can create
clutter and increase the difficulty for a viewer to find the particular information they are
seeking. Placement of signs where there is sufficient lighting is critical.

Color selection is an element of the wayfinding system that effects the visibility of signs.
Putting directional signs in a color that is different from room identification signs can be
helpful to patients and visitors. Consistent use of sign color for a particular type of mes-
sage reinforces the effectiveness of the sign program.

Planning A sign program for a building, that works well, is one that has been planned as an inte-
grated whole. All the way from the main entrance sign, to directional signs, room identifi-
cation signs, informational signs, code required signs and life safety signs.

12/2012 Page 9-8-1

 Installation Interior Signs

Installation Methods Different types of signs require different installation techniques, depending on their ap-
and Techniques plication or use, weight or size and whether the sign needs to be removed at some point
Buildings in the future. Wall surfaces and materials need to be taken into consideration when de-
ciding on the method to use.

Types of ceilings can have an impact on signage installation, particularly in regard to

accessibility. Hard ceiling access to sign locations can be a problem if there is not an ac-
cess door close to the sign location. Interlocking tile and T bar ceiling should not have
signs directly attached to them as they are not designed to carry the weight of a sign.
Additionally, they are not stable with additional sign loads in the event of earthquakes or
severe storms.

Wall Signs Double Sided Tape: is a common method to adhere small signs to an interior wall. The
tape is quick, inexpensive and durable for most interior signs. There are two types of
double sided tape. Double sided foam tape for light to medium duty applications and
VHB (very high bond) double-sided acrylic tape heavy duty applications. Double-sided
tape will stick to most surfaces with one exception. When adhering a sign to vinyl wall
covering it is necessary to add a silicone adhesive to the back of the sign. The problem
with using double sided tape is often the painted surface, or wall papered surface, will
be damaged when a sign is removed.

Silastic Adhesive: is another quick and inexpensive way to install interior signs. A small
piece of double sided tape is applied to the back of the sign or masking tape adhered to
the front of the sign is used to hold the sign in place until the silicone sets. The drawback
of using silicone is the odor the silicone emits until it has completely cured and hard-
ened. A small amount of wall damage can be expected when removing the sign.

Mechanical fastener or screw mounting: is the strongest method for installing interior
signs. Typically interior signs are lightweight enough and do not require this. When using
wall anchors it is suggested that the fasteners penetrate a stud or backer behind the wall.
An alternative to this would be using a hollow wall anchor. Screw mounting can pro-
hibit vandalism to a certain degree, which can be taken one step further if tamper-proof
fasteners are used. A benefit of using fasteners is it is only necessary to patch the small
holes that remain when a sign is removed.

Flag Mounted Projecting signs must always be mechanically fastened to the wall with wall anchors
Projecting Signs penetrating a solid substrate such as a stud or backing material behind the wall. In cor-
ridors a flag mounted sign shall always be placed with the bottom of the sign height at
84" for clearance of pedestrians and equipment.

Ceiling Mounted Signs Signs mounted above the pedestrian path of travel shall always be mechanically fas-
tened to a solid substrate. These signs shall not be attached to the drop down T-bar ceil-
ing grid. Typically, the placement of ceiling mounted signs are in the center of a corridor
or over the pedestrian path of travel. Proper overhead clearance (84" minimum) must be
maintained for clear path of travel for pedestrians and equipment.

Illuminated exit signs should not be blocked by ceiling signs and fire sprinkler heads
should not have their spray pattern impacted by a ceiling sign. Sprinkler systems, exit
signs, and other ceiling mounted items also must not block the clear viewing area of the
sign. The sign should be relocated in any of these situations.

12/2012 Page 9-8-2

 Installation Interior Signs

Vinyl Lettering and Vinyl lettering can be installed on most hard clean surfaces. Plastic and glass
Graphics should be cleaned and any dry matter, such as tape or glue, removed. Freshly
painted surfaces should be allowed to dry for at least 72 hours prior to the appli-
cation of vinyl graphics. This will allow any vapors to dissipate from the paint as it
cures.

Dimensional Letters Dimensional letters can be installed on most hard clean surfaces. Letters can be
mounted with double sided tape or an adhesive appropriate for the wall surface.
Typically letters larger that 4 inches also have studs attached to the back. These
studs are imbedded into the wall surface to support the weight of the letters. Studs
must be used when a surface is rough and high textured

Room Identification Height of tactile signs with Braille require specific placement and must conform to
Signs the Americans with Disabilities Act. Please refer to Accessibility requirements in
another section of this Guide, and refer to the interior installation drawings at the
rear of this chapter

12/2012 Page 9-8-3

 Installation Interior Signs

Detail 1
Installation detail sign type 03, 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2")
building standard, room number.

Detail 2

1524 mm (5'-0")

1524 mm (5'-0")
Installation detail sign types
04.01, 04.02, 04.03, 04.04, 05.06,
05.07, 05.08, 05.09, 07.01, 07.02,
07.03, 07.05, 07.06, 07.07. Building
standard room number and name.

Detail 1 Detail 2

Detail 3
Installation detail sign types 08.01,
08.02, 09.01, 09.02, 09.03, 09.04, 51 mm (2")
CL
09.05, 09.06, 09.07, 09.08, 11.01,
11.02, 11.04 Building standard.
1600 mm (5'-0")

1600 mm (5'-0")

1524 mm (5'-0")
Detail 4
Installation detail sign types 10.04,
10.05, 10.06.

Detail 3 Detail 4

Detail 5
Installation detail sign types 10.02,
10.03, 11.03, 14.04, 14.05, 14.09,
14.10
1829 mm (6'-0")
1676 mm (5'-6")

Detail 6
Installation detail sign types 10.01,
14.01, 14.02, 14.06, 14.07, 14.20,
14.21, 14.25, 14.26,

Detail 5 Detail 6

12/2012 Page 9-8-4

 Installation Interior Signs

Detail 7
Installation detail sign types 14.03,
14.08, 14.11, 14.12, 14.13, 14.14,
14.15, 14.16, 14.17, 14.18.

2133 mm (7'-0") MIN.

Detail 8

1981 mm (6'-6")
Installation detail sign types 13

Detail 7 Detail 8

EQ. EQ.
EQ. EQ.

Detail 9
Installation detail sign types 15.51,
15.52, 15.53, 15.55, 15.56, 15.57

2133 mm (7'-0") MIN.

2133 mm (7'-0") MIN.

Detail 10
Installation detail sign types 15.61,
15,62, 15.63, 15.65, 15.66, 15.67

Detail 9 Detail 10

EQ EQ EQ EQ

Detail 11
Installation detail sign types, 16.51,
16.52, 16.53, 16.55, 16.56, 16.57

Detail 12
Installation detail sign types 16.61,
16.62, 16.63, 16.65, 16.66, 16.67

Detail 11 Detail 12

EQ EQ

Detail 13
Installation detail sign types 15.51, ALIGN EXIT
15.52, 15.53

Detail 14
Installation detail sign types 06.05,
06.06.

Detail 13 Detail 14

12/2012 Page 9-8-5

 Installation Interior Signs

Detail 16 EQ EQ
Installation detail sign type 18.01

ENT Clinic

1676 mm (5'-6")
Detail 16

EQ EQ EQ EQ
Detail 17
Installation detail sign type 18.01
ENT Clinic ENT Clinic

Detail 18

1676 mm (5'-6")

1676 mm (5'-6")
Installation detail sign type 18.01

Detail 17 Detail 18

Detail 19
Installation detail sign types 19.01, 76 mm (3")
19.02, 19.03.

Detail 20
Installation detail sign type 08.02. Admitting
1524 mm MIN.
(5'-0")

Detail 19 Detail 20

Detail 21
Installation detail sign types 19.01, EQ EQ EQ EQ
76 mm (3")
76 mm (3")

19.02, 19.03
DO NOT place 10" letters on 12" Pharmacy Pharmacy
header

Detail 21 Detail 21: Small Header

12/2012 Page 9-8-6

 Installation Interior Signs

Detail 22
Tile wainscot wall installation guide 51 mm (2")
for room identification signs.
Correct Incorrect
Detail 23 Align to top
Room identification sign installation edge of tile
guide for spinal rehabilitation and
nursing home facilities.

1143 mm (3’ 9")

Detail 22 Detail 23

Detail 24
Overhead sign installation over EQ EQ
76 mm (3")

counter or registration desk.

Minimum 6'8" off the floor on a free
hanging header. Check-In
2129 mm (6’-8”)

Detail 24 Detail 24: Side View

Header over counter only

Do not extend over walk way
CL Or pass through
Detail 25
76 mm (3")

Overhead sign installation over

opening with walk through and
counter or registration desk Pharmacy
minimum DO NOT place hanging
header over opening. DO NOT
place 10" letters on 12" header
2129 mm (6’-8”)

Detail 25
Hanging Header at counter with opening/pass through

12/2012 Page 9-8-7

 Installation Interior Signs

Detail 26
Overhead hanging sign
Lobby or waiting room with high
ceiling. DO NOT install hanging
sign in areas with ceilings higher Maximum ceiling
than 12'-0”. Use a wall mount flag height of 12’ for
sign. Check-In overhead hung
Check-In signs.
Distance from
bottom of sign to
Minimum floor to be
distance from max. 8”-0”
bottom of sign
to floor
7’-4” 8'-0"

Overhead sign with installed in

Lobby or Waiting areas with valted
ceiling.

12/2012 Page 9-8-8

 Installation Interior Signs

Interior wall bracing Notch Backing

for heavy signs, Stud Flange.
Wall Stud Is Continuous Wall Stud Is
directories and cast Continuous
plaques.

Stud Backing Plate A

1. Maximum Weight- 25 lbs. point
load. If sign load exceeds this use (2) #12 S.M.S. Typical (3) #8 S.M.S.
Stud Backing Plate B. At Each Stud Typical At
2. Attach plates to 3 studs minimum. Each Stud
3. Verify length, height, location and 16 Ga 6" Pl Unpunched 4"
number required. W.F. Stud
4. Use #12 Self Tapping Screws when Wall Studs Backing Plate
attaching items to backing, U.O.N.
Wall Studs
Stud Backing Plate B
1. Maximum Weight- 50 lbs. point
load. If sign load exceeds this use Stud Backing Plate A Stud Backing Plate B
Stud Backing Plate C.
2. Attach plates to 3 studs minimum.
3. Verify length, height, location and
number required.
4. Use double stud when stud is Typ. Each Notch Backing
supporting more than 2 backing Flange Stud Flange.
1/8"3/8" Ea End (2) #12
plates Wall Stud Is 1/8" 2" 21 S.M.S. Typical
Continuous /2" At Each Stud
Stud Backing Plate C
1. Maximum Weight- 200 lbs./ft.
2. Attach plates to 3 studs minimum. Ea End
1/8" 2"
3. Verify length, height, location and
number required. 3/16" Or
4. Use double stud when stud is Unpunched 7 Ga x 7 1/2"
supporting more than 2 backing 4" W.F. Stud Bent PC
plates. Backing Plate Grade 50
Steel
Stud Backing Plate D 1/16"11/4"
1. Maximum Weight- 300 lbs. point Wall Studs Orient Stud Wall Studs
load. Webs Back
2. Attach plates to 3 studs minimum. To Back
3. Verify length, height, location and
number required. Stud Backing Plate C Stud Backing Plate D

Glass

Glass Back Up
Certain signs may require
installation on glass because there
is no available wall surface.
Blank Glass
When this situation occurs, a blank Back-Up
glass back up is required on the Double Sided
opposite side of glass exactly behind Mounting Tape
sign being installed.

This blank opaque glass back up is to

be the same size and color as the sign
being installed to effectively cover
Sign Plaque
and hide the mounting of the sign to
the glass.

12/2012 Page 9-8-9

 Installation Interior Signs

Ceiling Mounted Sign Detail 16 Ga. Astm A510

Use for signs that weigh over 20 Wire Bracing
pounds and are mounted from a To Deck Concrete Roof Deck
suspended ceiling system.

Phillips Red Head Wedge

Anchors
Threaded Coupling
10 mm (3/8") Threaded Rod
Steel Channel
Suspending Ceiling System
2 mm (1/16") 7 X 7 Braided
Stainless Cable

Ceiling
Mounted Sign
Front View

Concrete Roof Deck

Phillips Red Head Wedge

Anchors
Threaded Coupling
Wire Bracing
To Deck Threaded Rod

Suspending Ceiling System

Braided
Stainless Cable Steel Channel

Ceiling Mounted Sign

Side View

12/2012 Page 9-8-10

 Installation Interior Signs

Ceiling Mounted Sign Detail

Use for signs that weigh over 20
lbs. and are mounted from above 1-5/8" Unistrut
a suspended ceiling system
where attachment to ceiling is
not possible. Sign support to be
distributed to load bearing walls 1" Eye-bolt
additional unistrut beam may be
required.
Compression Fitting

Suspended T-bar Ceiling System

1/16" Dia. Stainless Steel Cable

3/4" Eye-bolt

Hanging Sign

Section

Unistrut To Span From

Wall To Wall

Mechanical Connection
To Load Bearing Wall

Suspended T-bar Ceiling System

Hanging Sign

Existing Wall

Elevation

12/2012 Page 9-8-11

 You Are Here Maps
and Directories

• Section Overview
• Presentation of Information
• Vehicular Maps
• Exterior Pedestrian Maps
• Interior Maps
• Evacuation Map
• Electronic Directories and Digital
Signage
• Directories

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Overview You Are Here Maps

This section of the Sign and Graphic Design Guide will explain the different
types of wayfinding / “You Are Here” maps and provide the basic information
necessary to develop and correctly place these types of maps.

Every campus needs wayfinding and “You Are Here” maps throughout the site.
Wayfinding maps fall into two basic categories, Visitor Orientation Maps and
Evacuation Maps.

Visitor orientation maps are often incorporated into a directory and are de-
signed to assist visitors in site and building navigation. Visitor orientation maps
can be further divided into three subcategories, Vehicular Wayfinding Maps,
Exterior Pedestrian Wayfinding Maps, and Interior Wayfinding Maps.

1. Exterior Pedestrian Wayfinding Maps provide exterior wayfinding informa-

tion to pedestrians and are typically placed outside of the buildings, along
pedestrian paths, leading to the facility. These maps include information
related to the entire campus, such as roads, parking lots, walkways and
specific buildings.
2. Vehicular Maps provide wayfinding information to motorists and are placed
along roads within the site. These are simplistic and only provide wayfind-
ing information related to vehicular paths of travel. Such information would
include roads, points of entry and exit, designation of campus buildings
and associated parking areas.
3. Interior Wayfinding Maps provide wayfinding information within a particular
building. These types of maps provide information regarding the location
of various departments and visitor related facilities, such as restrooms,
patient rooms, and canteen, to name a few.
4. Evacuation maps are designed to provide emergency exit information in
the event of a fire or disaster, where it may be necessary to evacuate a
building quickly. Evacuation maps are located at building entrances, stair-
wells, elevators, and along intersecting corridors and provide only wayfind-
ing information necessary to exit a building. These types of maps do not
depict specific rooms or departments, instead they are simplified diagram-
matic plans showing exit routes as well as the location of fire alarm pulls
and fire extinguishers.

Following the discussion of "You Are Here Maps", there is a subsection on

directories. Many of the directories show inserts containing maps. These direc-
tories are in different sizes and have different applications. They can contain
maps of a campus, building, or floors depending on their location.

Today’s technology allows for maps in a directory to be produced for moderate

costs. Maintenance and map upgrades to directories are now easy to do as the
same artwork used for web sites and brochures can be easily be produced as
inserts for directories.

12/2012 Page 10-2-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 You Are Here Maps
Visitor Orientation Maps: Presentation Methods
There are different methods for displaying/presenting visitor orientation map in-
formation. Maps can be limited to a diagrammatic plan view of the site or building
interior, or they can be more complex, including isometric, three dimensional or
exploded views where multiple floors of a building are depicted in a single diagram.

Visitor orientation maps are often color coded to distinguish one area of a site or
building from another. In addition to color coding, hatch patterns can be used to aid
the color blind.

Plan View Diagram: This is the most common presentation method for depicting
a visitor orientation map. This method displays the map information as a diagram-
matic plan view of either the site or building interior.

Plan Diagram: Site Wayfinding Map Plan Diagram: site wayfinding map with color
(simplified version) coded directory information

Plan Diagram: interior wayfinding map Plan Diagram: site wayfinding map, simplified
and color coded

12/2012 Page 10-3-1

 You Are Here Maps
Visitor Orientation Maps: Presentation Methods

Isometric View / Three Dimensional Illustration: This is a more complex method

of depicting a map. The advantages of implementing this type of map is that it pro-
vides a more accurate visual representation of the site. This helps visitors translate
orientation information. The disadvantage of this type of map is that the complexity
of the illustration adds to the time and cost of development. Changes can also be
difficult.

Isometric / Three Dimensional Rendering: Site Isometric / Three Dimensional Illustration: Site map with three
map dimensional color coded simplified building forms

Exploded View; This method is useful when depicting wayfinding information on

various levels of a multi level building in one diagram. This type of map has the
same advantages and disadvantages as an isometric view.

Exploded View: Color coded interior wayfinding Exploded View: Interior wayfinding map showing three floors of
map showing two floors of a single building. a single building along with a corresponding plan view of each
floor.

12/2012 Page 10-3-2

 You Are Here Maps
Visitor Orientation Maps: Orientation
Orientation: All wayfinding / “You Are Here” maps should be positioned in the direc-
tion that the viewer is facing. This holds true for both Visitor Orientation Maps as
well as Evacuation Maps. For example, if the map is situated so that the viewer is
looking east, the map should be positioned so that the top of the map is also facing
east.

Map/Sign

Viewing Direction

Person Viewing Map/Sign

(represent viewer with star)

Diagram illustrates how maps should be oriented. Each map shows the “You Are Here” star in the same
location, with the orange line indicating the location of the map. In each example, the map has been
rotated to reflect the orientation of the map.

12/2012 Page 10-3-3

 You Are Here Maps
Visitor Orientation Maps: Placement, Sizing, Mounting, and Content
Placement: Wayfinding maps need to be located along paths of travel or at points
of decision making. Maps should be strategically placed so as visitors travel from
one area of the site towards their destination there are maps along the way to pro-
vide orientation information.

Sizing and Mounting: All information should be presented at a size large enough
to be easily readable and visible from the distance of the intended viewer.

Maps can be produced as a digital print on a variety of substrates such as vinyl,

paper, or a laminated graphic. The method of production needs to be compatible
with the environmental conditions as well as with the structure that the map is to be
integrated with. For example, a digital print on paper will be suitable for an interior
environment and placement under glass or acrylic. However, it will not be suitable
for an exposed exterior application.

Freestanding Vehicular Wayfinding Map

Map Displayed on a Map Displayed on a Podium Wall Mounted Map

Freestanding Kiosk Type of Structure

The three examples above could be used for either pedestrian wayfinding maps or interior wayfinding
maps

Content: Visitor orientation maps should only include information that is relevant
to visitors. Areas such as a loading dock, laundry facility or utility rooms should be
excluded.

Areas such as loading docks, laundry facilities, or utility buildings should not be
identified on campus maps. Non-public buildings can be shown on a campus map,
however, they should not be labeled or referenced. If buildings are identified by
number, then the map should clearly show the number.

Symbols: Typical symbols that are shown on orientation maps are ones that are
simple and common. These symols should be reproduced in a size that is easy to
identify and locate on a map.

BLDG

12
North Bus Stop Building You are Here Parking Restroom
Arrow Symbol Identification Symbol Symbol Symbol
Symbol

12/2012 Page 10-3-4

 You Are Here Maps
Exterior Vehicular Maps
There are several considerations to address when developing vehicular wayfinding
maps: as follows:

Orientation: Vehicle oriented “Campus You Are Here” maps should always be
positioned in the direction that a vehicle is facing. For example, if the map is situ-
ated so that the viewer is looking down the main campus road, the map should be
positioned so that the top of the map is also facing that direction.

If there are significant geographic or architectural features that will help a drivers
orientation, these should be included on the map (e.g., a river that runs along the
campus, an adjacent Interstate highway).

Placement: Vehicular wayfinding maps are intended to direct motorists from the site
entry to the parking facility associated with their destination. Maps that are directed
to drivers must be placed in a location where a driver can safely pull over and stop
to read the map. Maps should not be read while driving.

A small campus will need only one map, but a large campus with a complex road-
way system may need several maps at different locations. These maps are to be
located along vehicular paths of travel. The maps should be strategically placed
so that as visitors drive from one area of the site towards their destination there
are additional maps and directional signage along the way to provide orientation
information.

Sizing and Mounting: All information should be presented large enough so that it
is easily readable and visible from an approaching vehicle. Because the map will be
viewed from a vehicle, the information needs to be as simplified as possible. These
types of maps are typically freestanding and should not obstruct the view of the
motorist.

Content: Vehicular wayfinding maps should only include information that is relevant
to vehicular wayfinding, no extraneous information should be included.

Information to include is as follows: site entries and exits, “You are Here” symbol,
visitor accessible roads, and visitor related buildings, along with associated parking
areas.

It may be helpful to color code maps to visually distinguish one area from another.

Directory: Campus maps that are directed toward vehicular viewing, or that
contain a directory, require restraint when assembling the directory listings. Only
the MAJOR destination should be listed in the directory – Main Entrance, Visitor
Parking, Clinic Entrance, Hospital, Community Living Center, etc. Limiting the list-
ings to only the important destinations will shorten the driver's viewing time and
allow quicker decisions to be made as to where to go.

Directory listings need to be a minimum of 2-1/2" capital letter height to be able to

be read from a car parked near a map.

VA Medical Center - North

DIRECTORY 200 You
You Are
Are PATIENT PICK-UP
200 Here
Here MAIN HOSPITAL 700 500
700 500 PHARMACY
URGENT CARE
PARKING GARAGE 600 400 300
600 400 300

12/2012 Page 10-3-5

 You Are Here Maps
Exterior Pedestrian Maps
There are a few considerations to address when developing exterior pedestrian
wayfinding maps: as follows:

Orientation: Pedestrian oriented “You Are Here” maps should always be positioned
in the direction that the walker or viewer is facing. For example, if the map is situ-
ated so that the viewer is looking down a pathway, toward a specific building, the
map should be positioned so that the top of the map has that particular building
and is also facing that direction.

If there are significant geographic or architectural features that will help pedestrian
orientation, these should be included on the map (such as a river that runs along
the campus, a building with a clock tower, a large sculpture).

Placement: Pedestrian wayfinding maps need to be located along paths of travel

or at points of decision making. Maps should be strategically placed so that as visi-
tors walk from one area of the site towards their destination there are maps along
the way to provide orientation information. Exterior site maps should be placed
along walkways leading from parking areas to the facility as well as along pathways
leading from one building to another.

Sizing and Mounting: All information should be presented large enough so that
it is easily readable/visible from a distance of approximately 3 to 5 feet. Pedestrian
wayfinding maps may be freestanding, wall mounted, mounted to a vertically free-
standing structure or kiosk, or podium mounted.

Content: Exterior wayfinding maps should only include information that is relevant
to visitors. Areas such as a loading dock or administrative offices need not be
labeled.

Information to include is as follows: “You Are Here” symbol, restrooms, main build-
ing entries, parking areas, various campus visitor related departments, and bus
stops.

It may also be helpful to color code maps to visually distinguish one area from
another.

CAMPUS MAP

BLDG Main You

400 Hospital Are
Here

BLDG g
kin
200 Clinic Par rage
Ga

BLDG Main You

400 Hospital Are
Here

VA Medical Center - North BLDG

200 Clinic Par kinge
Garag

12/2012 Page 10-3-6

 You Are Here Maps
Interior Maps
There are a few considerations to address when developing interior wayfinding
maps: as follows:

Orientation: Interior pedestrian oriented “You Are Here” maps should always be
positioned in the direction that the walker or viewer is facing. For example, if the
map is situated so that the viewer is looking toward a hallway or elevator, the map
should be positioned so that the top of the map has that particular elevator or hall-
way. If the viewer needs to turn left to get to the elevators, then the elevators should
be shown to the left on the map.

If there are significant architectural features that will help pedestrian orientation in
a building, these should be included on the map (e.g., an atrium, a piece of sculp-
ture, elevators, etc.).

Placement: Interior wayfinding maps are to be located at building entry lobbies

and at elevator lobbies on each visitor accessible floor.

Sizing and Mounting: All information should be presented large enough so that
it is easily readable and visible from a distance of approximately 2 to 3 feet. These
types of maps are typically wall mounted, however, they may also be free standing
or podium mounted, depending upon the surrounding conditions.

Content: All interior wayfinding maps are to include “You Are Here” symbol. Those
maps located at lobby entries are to included general information for the entire
building, such as location of restrooms and various building departments (like
Pharmacy, Blood Draw, Waiting Room, Clinics) as well as visitor related facilities
(such as Canteen, Retail Store, vending machines).

Interior wayfinding maps found at elevator lobbies are to include more specific
information regarding that particular floor. This information may include patient
room numbers, and offices within a given department. Again, only information that
is relevant to visitors is to be included. Areas such as laundry facilities, utility rooms,
and other non public areas should not be shown.

Intensive ICU
Care Unit Waiting

Surgery

Restroom

Patient Rooms

3rd Floor
Intensive
Care Unit

Restroom

Patient Rooms 4th. Floor

Inpatient
Intensive
Care Unit
ICU
Waiting

Pharmacy Diagnostic Imaging

Restroom
Surgery

Mental
Patient Rooms 3rd. Floor
Health
Services
Inpatient
Pharmacy Diagnostic Imaging
Mental
Health
Services
Restroom

Restroom
Blood
Chapel Draw Dental
Dietician Clinic
2nd. Floor

Emergency
Blood
Draw Dental
Physical
Restroom Therapy

Patient
Chapel
Clinic
Benefits Pathology
Outpatient 1st. Floor
Dietician
Clinic Lab

You Are Here

2nd Floor
Emergency

Physical
Restroom Therapy

Patient
Benefits Pathology
Outpatient
Clinic Lab

1st Floor
You Are Here

12/2012 Page 10-3-7

 You Are Here Maps
Evacuation Maps
Evacuation maps are designed to provide exit information in the event of a fire or
emergency. The only wayfinding information that is necessary are exit routes and
main hallways or corridors leading to the exit routes. No additional wayfinding infor-
mation is to be included.

Layout, Colors and Typography: Evacuation maps need not conform to a specific
layout or color palette. The maps must contain the necessary content discussed
above and be easily readable from a distance of 18–24 inches. It is important
that all elements are in a contrasting value to the background on which they are
placed (darker colors on lighter colors and vice versa). It is also important that the
layout, typography and colors are consistent from one evacuation map to the next.
Typography should be limited to a sans serif typeface, preferably Helvetica Bold.

Location Information
(Address, Building 567 Elm Street
Identification and Floor Bldg 4
number). Floor 6
You Are Here

Primary Route

Identification Symbols Secondary Route

(see diagram below for Fire Extinguisher

details) Fire Alarm

Pull Station

Stairs

Elevator

You Are
Here

Plan / Diagram of
Location
Plan shows a simplified
diagrammatic representation
of main exit routes and
primary connecting hallways.

Exit routes are in colors of

high contrast to the building
plan.

Evacuation Map: Not to Scale, Approx 1/3 of full size

12/2012 Page 10-3-8

 You Are Here Maps
Evacuation Maps
Symbols and Necessary Content: The following information must be included
on all evacuation maps: Location information such as address, building number
and floor level (if applicable), “You Are Here” symbol, location of fire extinguishers
and fire alarm pulls, location of stairwells and elevators (in multi-level buildings), a
designated path of travel for a primary exit route, and an alternate (secondary) exit
route.

You Are Here Symbol: To be placed Fire Alarm Pull Symbol: To be placed
on map at location of specific map. on map at location of fire alarm pull

Primary Exit Route: Used to show

most direct route from location of map Stair Symbol: To be placed on map at
to exit. location of stairwells.

Secondary Exit Route: Used to show

Elevator Symbol: To be placed on map
alternate exit route from map location.
at location of elevators.
Fire Extinguisher: To be placed on
map at location of fire extinguishers.

Evacuation Map Symbols: Full Size (symbols should be no smaller than those shown above)

Orientation and Placement: Evacuation maps are to be placed at any building

transition: building exits, exiting doors, elevators and entrances to stairwells. In
Hoptels they are also to be installed on the door, on the interior room side of the
door.

NOTE: Evacuation maps are required in Hoptels or dormitories. They are optional
in other types of buildings.

If a facility elects to install evacuation maps, the local Fire Department should
be contacted for their specific requirements regarding content, size and layout
of evacuation map information. These requirements should be obtained prior to
developing and installing evacuation maps.

CL
1524 mm
(60˝)

Evacuation Map Placement

12/2012 Page 10-3-9

 You Are Here Maps
Electronic Directories and Digital Signage
Electronic digital signage is a form of signage that involves the presentation of in-
formation through the use of an electronic display. This type of communication can
be in the form of a static presentation such as a menu board or interactive involving
a person touching and interacting with the images and messages on an electronic
screen.

The following will focus on the use of electronic digital signage, in the form of
directories.

Directories provide an important information resource for any wayfinding plan and
they are often the first destination and interactive points for visitors and patients.
Directories function to assist a person to find where they need to go within a build-
ing or complex of several buildings. In addition to providing a listing of information,
directories can also display maps and provide a cross reference between the list-
ings and a location on a map.

With the electronic technologies readily available today, directories can show a
viewer the pathway on a map taking them from where they are located to the desti-
nation they are seeking. Directories must make a positive impression with a pleas-
ing design, clear and simple operation with easy to read and understand graphics
and provide CURRENT and CORRECT information.

Electronic directories can be wall-mounted, custom free standing kiosks, or

displays. They should be placed in locations where they are readily visible. The
location also needs to allow a user to interact with the unit without being in the way
people trying to circulate. It is also critically important that the directories have their
information coordinated with the exact location and orientation of the directory

Electronic directories are now the best way to present directory type information
to patients and visitors. They can take many forms from a static display to those
that are interactive, and others that can accommodate interactive activities such as
patient registration.

Hand sanitizers should be provided in close proximity to interactive directories,

along with instructions for their use. Considering the numbers of patients and visi-
tors who would use these directories, the use of hand sanitizers would be a major
help for maintin

Static Electronic A simple static electronic directory can be a LCD screen that displays a listing of
Digital Display the services and their location in the manner of an alphabetical listing as has been
typically done for the last 100 years. This would be presenting the same information
as a traditional and typical strip directory. With a static electronic directory it is very
easy to move up a level of communication by add additional static images such as
building floor plans to accompany the listings.

Computer programs are readily available for these type of directories and they are
the cheapest to purchase, and simplest to maintain. Development of the content
and its maintenance can be done by anyone with basic computer skills.

The next step with static electronic directories is adding images that create a visual
theme and can provide a visually interesting background or theme. Banner ele-
ments can be run across the bottom of the screen to display the weather or activi-
ties taking place at the facility.

Computer programs are readily available to do this as well and they are inexpensive
to purchase, and simple to maintain, but do require regular daily updating if they are

12/2012 Page 10-3-10

 You Are Here Maps
Electronic Directories and Digital Signage
displaying event messages. Development of the content and its maintenance can
be done by anyone with basic computer skills.

There are companies that will install static directory displays, develop the content,
and maintain them for minimal charge or even at no charge. They in turn sell adver-
tising on the display to recoup their costs.

Interactive Electronic Interactive displays allow a user to interact with a touch screen monitor to obtain
Digital Display information that is available from the facility's website or a computer. The screens
are typically place in a kiosk arrangement where the person can stand in front of
the screen and look for information by touching on messages, icons or images to
gather the information they are seeking. The information can be the location of an
individual in a building or the receptionist for a department. It can be the location
of a restrooms or the pathway to a department or service. The information request
is specific to the individual interacting with the screen and thus the information
custom tailor to that individual.

When developing an interactive electronic directory system for a medical center,

flexibility, intuitiveness, and functionality are critical. Several elements are neces-
sary for a interactive system to be developed for a facility. The elements all need to
be developed together to ensure the system works as a whole.

The dynamic interactive display will contain a directory listing of all departments
and services within the hospital that are to be able to be accessed in a directory.
These will be identified by name, area or building, floor and room number.

Not all departments or services should be listed. For example, departments such
as the Morgue, Boiler Room, Kitchens, and other similar non-public departments,
rooms, and services. Some services or departments should be identified not
necessarly by their location, but rather where people are to be directed. For ex-
ample, to the Surgery Waiting Room, not the Surgical Department.

The interactive display will need to illustrate a map of the entire medical center
campus showing all the buildings that contain services and departments that are to
be accessed. The map will need to clearly show parking lots and structures as well
as pathways to all the buildings.

The interactive display should also illustrate the different floor levels of each of the
buildings. The map will need to clearly show the elevators servicing the floors as
well as the public circulation stairs, entrances, lobbies, and significant architectural
elements such as atriums and courtyards.

The maps will need to be oriented to the direction the user is facing the touch
screen and in relation to the building orientation. When directories are located
in multiple locations and if they are two sided, map orientations may need to be
provided for four viewing directions. Consider all the locations and their orientation
when planning for a interactive electronic directory system.

Operationally, when a user touches the directory listing for the department or
service they are seeking, a route from the location of the kiosk to the department
that has been touched, will be displayed on the map. This route will identify the
“You Are Here” starting point, the path of travel, the elevator (if required), the path
of travel from the elevator to the end destination, the name of the department at the
end destination, and the room number. Systems are available that will also print out
this route, thus giving the individual a “hard copy” map of the route; these require
periodic paper replacement.

12/2012 Page 10-3-11

 You Are Here Maps
Electronic Directories and Digital Signage
Future Interactive Interactive directories can be completely developed by outside “consultants”. The
Directories and Check consultants can provide regular maintenance as well as host the systems, off site,
In Systems using the Internet and Cloud support.

A-B L-N
Accounting D-2xxx Lab C-2xxx
Addictive Disorders ?-Xxxx Laundry ?-Xxxx
Administration ?-Xxxx Library ?-Xxxx
Ambulatory Care B-1xxx Medical Records ?-Xxxx
America Legion Medical Surgical ?-Xxxx
Officer ?-Xxxx Mental Health Clinic B-6xxx
Anesthesiology ?-Xxxx MRI H-2xxx
Audiology C-6xxx Neurology ?-Xxxx
Barber L-1xxx Nuclear Medicine ?-Xxxx
Behavioral Medicine B-6-xxx
Benefits D-2xxx O
BioMed-Engin eering S-2xxx OB / GYN ?-Xxxx
Blood Draw C-2xxx Occupational
Canteen L-1xxx Therapist ?-Xxxx
Oncology ?-Xxxx
C Operating Rooms ?-Xxxx
Cardiac Cath Lab G-2xxx Ophthalmologist ?-Xxxx
Cardiology H-3xxx Optometry ?-Xxxx
Cashier H-1xxx Orthopedics ?-Xxxx
Chapel B-2xxx
Chaplain B-2xxx P-R ?-Xxxx
Community Living M-1xxx Patient Rooms B-4xxx
Compensation & Pathology C-1xxx
Pension ?-Xxxx PATPU ?-Xxxx
Conference Room ?-Xxxx Pharmacy H-1xxx
Physical Therapy ?-Xxxx
D-E Podiatrist ?-Xxxx
Dental Clinic C-2xxx Police G-1xxx
Diagnostic Imaging G-2xxx POW Consultant ?-Xxxx
Dietician C-2xxx Primary Care ?-Xxxx
Dining Room L-1xxx Prosthetics ?-Xxxx
EKG/ Echo H-3xxx Psychiatry ?-Xxxx
Emergency J-1xxx Psychology ?-Xxxx
Endocrinology ?-Xxxx Puchasing ?-Xxxx
Environmetal Care ?-Xxxx Pulmonary Care ?-Xxxx
Eye Clinic ?-Xxxx Quality Management ?-Xxxx

F-G R

TOUCH THE
Facilities ?-Xxxx Radiology G-2xxx
Food Services ?-Xxxx Rehabilitation G-1xxx
Gastroenterology ?-Xxxx Respiratory G-3xxx
Restroom ?-Xxxx
H

DIRECTORY
Rheumatology ?-Xxxx
Health Benefits
Advisor ?-Xxxx S-T
Health Care of Security ?-Xxxx
Homeless Veterans ?-Xxxx Sleep Study ?-Xxxx

TO LOCATE
Hematology ?-Xxxx Social Work ?-Xxxx
Hospice & Palliative Speech Pathology ?-Xxxx
Care ?-Xxxx Staffing-Nurse
Housekeeping ?-Xxxx Manager ?-Xxxx
Human Resources D-2xxx Suicide prevention ?-Xxxx

SERVICES
Surgery G-3xxx
I-L Toxicology ?-Xxxx
Imaging Services G-2xxx
Infectious Disease ?-Xxxx U-Z
Information Ultrasound ?-Xxxx
Technology ?-Xxxx Urgent Care ?-Xxxx
Infusion ?-Xxxx Urology ?-Xxxx
Intensive Care Unit G-3xxx Women's Center ?-Xxxx
Internal Medicine ?-Xxxx

In the immediate future, systems and technology will allow a patient to go on the
Internet through their home computer or smartphone, confirm their appointment,
find a map illustrationLinefor the facility showing where to park, view the pathway from
of Sight
Men
parking to a electronic check
Line of Sight
in5'-9"kiosk, then view the pathway to the department or
service within the building.
Women
Reach
Line of Sight 48"
Seated Max
When a visitor or patient arrives at a facility they will be able to interact, in the
lobby, with a kiosk and check in. The electronic digital check in will function as a
directory and show the patient the pathway to their department. This pathway can
then be printed out giving them aMinmap they can carry. The map and route informa-
32”

tion can contain references to key physical Minfeatures within the building to aid in
15"

wayfinding, such as, “Turn right at the first corridor and walk past the atrium to the
first corridor on the left”.

For those who are seeking a department or an individual and do not require an
appointment check in, they too will be able to look up a service listing or individual
and interact with the touch screen display to find the pathway to the service,
department or individual using the same wayfinding tools as an electronic patient
check in procedure.

The information provided in this section is an overview. The intent has been to
introduce options, systems, and products which are currently available. As with all
technology, the development of new equipment, software and approaches to con-
veying information change rapidly, therefore, it is recommended that research be
conducted to find a system that best fits the requirements of the facility and can be
compatible with newer technologies as they become available.

12/2012 Page 10-3-12

 Overview Directories

This section of the VA Signage Design Guide provides for the types of directories
that can be used for individual buildings.

This Overview Section gives general illustrations of directory sign type groups. Sign
type drawings are on two pages with the front page illustrating the general descrip-
tions and the second page providing the dimensions and graphic layouts.

IN - 17.01 A
IN Designates an interior sign.
17 Two digit number identify a particular directory family.
.01 The two digit number, following the period, identifies a specific
directory within the directory family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version

and/or layout for graphics.

12/2012 Page 10-4-1

 Overview Directories

IN-17.01
Strip Directory

IN-17.02
Large Strip Directory

IN-17.01 IN-17.02

IN-17.03
Strip Directory with Map

IN-17.03

IN-17.04
Large Strip Directory with Map

IN-17.04

IN-17.05
Strip Floor Directory

IN-17.06
Large Strip Floor Directory

IN-17.05 IN-17.06

12/2012 Page 10-4-2

 Overview Directories

IN-17.11
Directory with Insert

IN-17.12
Large Directory with Insert

IN-17.11 IN-17.12

IN-17.13
Directory with Map
and Listing Insert

IN-17.13

IN-17.14
Large Directory with Map
and Listing Insert

IN-17.14

IN-17.15
Floor Directory with Insert

IN-17.16
Large Floor Directory with Insert

IN-17.15 IN-17.16

12/2012 Page 10-4-3

 Overview Directories

IN-27.01
Freestanding Information Kiosk

IN-27.01

IN-27.02
Wall Mounted Touch Screen
Directory

IN-27.03
Freestanding Touch Screen
Directory

IN-27.02 IN-27.03

12/2012 Page 10-4-4

 IN-17.01 Directories
Strip Directory
Size
762 mm H x 610 mm W
(2'-6" H x 2'-0" W)

Description and Use

Small size main lobby directory with
Directory
48 directory strips
Title Title
Subtitle 1A74 Subtitle 2A42
Message Configuration Subtitle 1A76 Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1A77
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Subtitle 1A78
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
sizes and dimensions). Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2A44
Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2A45
Subtitle 2A46
Header Layout A is for a basic Title Subtitle 2A48
directory header. Header Layout B Subtitle 1B48 Subtitle 2A52

is for a directory header to contain Subtitle

Subtitle
1B49
1B52 Title
the name of the facility. Copy Strip Subtitle 2B32
A is for use with the main listings. Title Subtitle 2B34
Subtitle 1C32
Copy Strip B is for a secondary Subtitle 1C33 Title
listing under a main listing or when Subtitle 1C36 Subtitle 3A54
the name is too long to fit on Strip A. Subtitle 1C38 Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Sign Components Subtitle 3A55

Sliding rail back; copy panel; top Subtitle 3A56

accent bar; end caps

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl
Header (Message Layout A)
Colors
Text: Refer to color chart.

Directory
Background and accent bar: Refer
to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica

Mounting
Mechanical fastener Header (Message Layout B)

Installation VA Medical Center Gainesville

Wall mounted

Recommendations
This directory is for use in the main
Directory
lobby of small buildings which would
typically have no more than 30 to
40 listings. All listings in a directory Copy Strip A Copy Strip B
should be done in alphabetical Title 1A74 Subtitle 1B48
order. List in the directory only
services or departments which have
contact with patients and public. Copy Strip C
Distribute any blank directory strips Sub-Subtitle 1C49
throughout the directory to provide
spacing between groups of listings.
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-1

 IN-17.01 Directories
Strip Directory

Header Layout A

Header Layout B

Copy Strip A

Copy Strip B

Copy Strip C
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-2

 IN-17.02 Directories
Large Strip Directory
Size
914 mm H x 914 mm W
(3'-0" H x 3'-0" W)

Description and Use Directory

Main lobby directory with 90
directory strips Title Title Title
Subtitle 1A74 Subtitle 2B37 Subtitle 2B37
Subtitle 1A75 Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
Message Configuration Subtitle 1A77 Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1A78 Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2B40 Subtitle 2B40
sizes and dimensions) Sub-Subtitle Subtitle
Subtitle
2B41
2B42
Subtitle 2B41

Title Subtitle 2B44 Title

Header Layout A is for a basic Subtitle
Subtitle
1B48
1B49
Subtitle 2B45 Subtitle
Subtitle
2C50
2C55
directory header. Header Layout B Subtitle 1B51 Title
Subtitle 2C50 Title
is for a directory header to contain Title Subtitle 2C55 Subtitle 2C60
the name of the facility. Copy Strip Subtitle 1C34 Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1C37 Title Sub-Subtitle
A is for use with the main listings. Subtitle 1C38 Subtitle 2C60 Sub-Subtitle
Copy Strip B is for a secondary Subtitle 1C42 Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2C61
Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2C62
listing under a main listing or when Sub-Subtitle
the name is too long to fit on Strip A. Subtitle
Subtitle
2C61
2C62

Sign Components
Sliding rail back; copy panel; top
accent bar; end caps

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl

Colors
Header (Message Layout A)
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background and accent bar: Refer

Directory
to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Mechanical fasteners
Header (Message Layout B)
Installation
Wall mounted

Recommendations
VA Medical Center Houston
This directory is for use in the main
lobby of small buildings which would
Directory
typically have no more than 60 to
80 listings. All listings in a directory
should be done in alphabetical Copy Strip A Copy Strip B
order. List in the directory only
services or departments which have Title 1A74 Subtitle 1B48
contact with patients and public.
Distribute any blank directory strips Copy Strip C
throughout the directory to provide
spacing between groups of listings. Sub-Subtitle 1C49
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-3

 IN-17.02 Directories
Large Strip Directory

Header Layout A

Header Layout B

Copy Strip A

Copy Strip B

Copy Strip C
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-4

 IN-17.03 Directories
Strip Directory with Map
Size
762 mm H x 1219 mm W
(2'-6" H x 4'-0" W)
VA Medical Center Togus
Description and Use Directory
Small size main lobby directory
with 48 directory strips and map of Title Title
Subtitle 1A74 Subtitle 2A42
building Subtitle 1A76 Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1A77 Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1A78 Sub-Subtitle
Message Configuration Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2A44
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2A45
Subtitle 2A46
sizes and dimensions) Title Subtitle 2A48
Header Layout A is for a basic Subtitle
Subtitle
1B48
1B49
Subtitle 2A52

directory header. Header Layout B Subtitle 1B52 Title

Subtitle 2B32
is for a directory header to contain Title Subtitle 2B34
the name of the facility. Copy Strip Subtitle 1C32
Subtitle 1C33 Title
A is for use with the main listings. Subtitle 1C36 Subtitle 3A54
Copy Strip B is for a secondary Subtitle 1C38 Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
listing under a main listing or when Sub-Subtitle
the name is too long to fit on Strip A. Subtitle
Subtitle
3A55
3A56

Sign Components
Sliding rail back; copy panel; top
accent bar; end caps

Graphic Process Header (Message Layout A)

Surface applied vinyl

Colors
Text: Refer to color chart.
Directory
Background and accent bar: Refer
to color chart.
Header (Message Layout B)
Typography
Helvetica Bold
VA Medical Center Togus
Mounting Directory
Mechanical fastener

Installation
Wall mounted Map Copy Strip A
Title 1A74
Recommendations
This directory is for use in the main
lobby of small buildings which would
typically have no more than 30 to
Copy Strip B
40 listings. All listings in a directory
should be done in alphabetical Subtitle 1B48
order. List in the directory only
services or departments which have
contact with patients and the public.
Distribute any blank directory strips Copy Strip C
throughout the directory to provide
spacing between groups of listings. Sub-Subtitle 1C49

Maps should be simple and

show the corridor system, major
departments and locations of
elevators. If a building has multiple
floors, then all floors should
be shown. Orient floor plans to
represent the building in the same
direction as the map is being
1829 mm (6'-0")

viewed.

12/2012 Page 10-5-5

 IN-17.03 Directories
Strip Directory with Map

Header Layout A

Header Layout B

Copy Strip A

Copy Strip B

Copy Strip C

Map
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-6

 IN-17.04 Directories
Large Strip Directory with Map
Size
914 mm H x 1524 mm W
(3'-0" H x 5'-0" W) Directory
VA Medical Center Regional Milwaukee
Description and Use
Title Title Title
Main lobby directory with 90 Subtitle
Subtitle
1A74
1A76
Subtitle 2A42 Subtitle
Subtitle
1A74
1A76
Sub-Subtitle
directory strips and a map of the Subtitle
Subtitle
1A77
1A78
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle
Subtitle
1A77
1A78
building. Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle
Subtitle
2A44
2A45 Title
Subtitle 2A46 Subtitle 1B48
Title Subtitle 2A48 Subtitle 1B49
Message Configuration Subtitle
Subtitle
1B48
1B49
Subtitle 2A52 Subtitle
Subtitle
1B52
1B52

(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Subtitle 1B52 Title

Subtitle 2B32 Title

sizes and dimensions) Title

Subtitle 1C32
Subtitle 2B34 Subtitle
Subtitle
1C32
1C33
Subtitle 1C33 Title Subtitle 1C36
Subtitle 1C36 Subtitle 3A54 Subtitle 1C38

Header Layout A is for a basic Subtitle 1C38 Sub-Subtitle

Sub-Subtitle

directory header. Header Layout B Sub-Subtitle

Subtitle 3A55

is for a directory header to contain Subtitle 3A56

the name of the facility. Copy Strip

A is for use with the main listings.
Copy Strip B is for a secondary
listing under a main listing or when
the name is too long to fit on Strip A.

Sign Components
Sliding rail back; copy panel; top Header (Message Layout A)
accent bar; end caps

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl
Directory
Colors Header (Message Layout B)
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background and accent bar: Refer Directory
to color chart
VA Medical Center Regional Milwaukee
Typography
Helvetica Bold Map
Mounting
Mechanical fastener
Copy Strip A
Installation
Wall mounted Title 1A74

Recommendations
This directory is for use in the main
lobby of small buildings which would Copy Strip B
typically have no more than 60 to
Subtitle 1B48
80 listings. All listings in a directory
should be done in alphabetical
order. List in the directory only
services or departments which have
contact with patients and the public. Copy Strip C
Distribute any blank directory strips Sub-Subtitle 1C49
throughout the directory to provide
spacing between groups of listings.

Maps should be simple and

show the corridor system, major
departments and locations of
elevators. If a building has multiple
floors, then all floors should
be shown. Orient floor plans to
represent the building in the same
1829 mm (6'-0")

direction as the map is being

viewed.

12/2012 Page 10-5-7

 IN-17.04 Directories
Large Strip Directory with Map

Header Layout A

Header Layout B

Copy Strip A

Copy Strip B

Copy Strip C

Map
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-8

 IN-17.05 Directories
Strip Floor Directory
Size

4
762 mm H x 305 mm W
(2'-6" H x 12" W)

Description and Use FLOOR

Small size elevator lobby directory
FOUR
with 24 directory strips

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions). Title 1A47
Subtitle 1A49
Header Layout A is for a single Subtitle 1A50
digit floor. Header Layout B is for Sub-Subtitle
a double digit floor. Copy Strip A is Sub-Subtitle
for use with the main listings. Copy
Title 1A62
Strip B is for a secondary listing
Subtitle 1A63
under a main listing or when the
Subtitle 1A64
name is too long to fit on Strip A.
Subtitle 1A65
Subtitle 1A66
Sign Components
Sliding rail back; copy panel; top Title 1B45
accent bar; end caps Subtitle 1B46
Subtitle 1B46
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl

Colors
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background and accent bar: Refer
to color chart.

Typography

4 12
Helvetica

Mounting
Mechanical fastener Header (Message Layout A) Header (Message Layout B)

Installation
On wall adjacent to elevator FLOOR
Recommendations FOUR
This directory is for use in FLOOR
the elevator lobbies of small
buildings which would typically
TWELVE
have no more than 20 listings.
All listings in a directory should
be done in alphabetical order.
List in the directory only services Copy Strip A Copy Strip C
or departments which have Title 1A74 Sub-Subtitle 1C49
contact with patients and public.
Distribute any blank directory strips
throughout the directory to provide Copy Strip B
spacing between groups of listings.
Subtitle 1B48
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-9

 IN-17.05 Directories
Strip Floor Directory

Header Layout A

Header Layout B

Directory Strip A

Directory Strip B

Directory Strip C
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-10

 IN-17.06 Directories
Large Strip Floor Directory
Size
762 mm H x 610 mm W
(2'-6" H x 2'-0" W)

Description and Use FLOOR

Elevator lobby directory with 48 FOUR

directory strips.
Title 1A47 Title 1A47
Subtitle 1A49 Subtitle 1A49
Message Configuration Subtitle 1A50 Subtitle 1A50
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle

sizes and dimensions). Title 1A62

Sub-Subtitle

Subtitle 1A63 Title 2A62

Header Layout A is for a single Subtitle 1A64 Subtitle 2A63
Subtitle 1A65 Subtitle 2A64
digit floor. Header Layout B is for Subtitle 1A66 Subtitle 2A65
a double digit floor. Copy Strip A is Subtitle 1A63 Subtitle 2A66

for use with the main listings. Copy Subtitle

Subtitle
1A64
1A65 Title 2B45
Strip B is for a secondary listing Subtitle 2B46
under a main listing or when the Title 1A62 Subtitle 2B46
Subtitle 1A63
name is too long to fit on Strip A. Subtitle 1A64
Subtitle 1A65
Sign Components Subtitle 1A66

Sliding rail back; copy panel; top

accent bar; end caps

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl

Colors

4
Text: Refer to color chart. Header (Message Layout A)
Background and accent bar: Refer
to color chart.
FLOOR
Typography FOUR
Helvetica

Mounting
Mechanical fastener

12
Installation Header (Message Layout B)
On wall adjacent to elevator

Recommendations
This directory is for use in FLOOR
the elevator lobbies of small T W E LV E
buildings which would typically
have no more than 40 listings.
All listings in a directory should
be done in alphabetical order. Copy Strip A Copy Strip C
List in the directory only services
or departments which have
Title 1A74 Sub-Subtitle 1C49
contact with patients and public.
Distribute any blank directory strips
Copy Strip B
throughout the directory to provide
spacing between groups of listings. Subtitle 1B48
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-11

 IN-17.06 Directories
Large Strip Floor Directory

Header Layout A

Header Layout B

Directory Strip A

Directory Strip B

Directory Strip C
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-12

 IN-17.11 Directories
Directory with Insert
Size
762 mm H x 610 mm W
(2'-6" H x 2'-0" W)

Description and Use

Small size main lobby directory
Directory
header and digital print insert.
Title Title
Subtitle 1A74 Subtitle 2A42
Message Configuration Subtitle 1A76 Sub-Subtitle
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Subtitle 1A77 Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1A78 Sub-Subtitle
sizes and dimensions). Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2A44
Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2A45

Header Layout A is for a basic Subtitle 2A46

Title Subtitle 2A48
directory header. Lower listing area Subtitle 1B48 Subtitle 2A52
is a digital print. Subtitle 1B49
Subtitle 1B52 Title
Subtitle 2B32
Sign Components Title Subtitle 2B34
Fame sign system Subtitle 1C32
Subtitle 1C33 Title
Subtitle 1C36 Subtitle 3A54
Graphic Process Subtitle 1C38 Sub-Subtitle
Surface applied vinyl or digital print Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
insert Subtitle 3A55
Subtitle 3A56

Colors
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background and accent bar: Refer
to color chart.
Header (Message Layout A)
Typography
Helvetica

Mounting
Mechanical fastner
Directory
Installation
Wall mounted
Directory Listing (Digital Print)
Recommendations
Title Title
This directory is for use in the Subtitle 1A74 Subtitle 2A42
main lobby of small buildings Subtitle
Subtitle
1A76
1A77
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
which would typically have no Subtitle 1A78 Sub-Subtitle

more than 30 to 40 listings. All Sub-Subtitle

Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle
Subtitle
2A44
2A45
listings in a directory should be Subtitle 2A46

done in alphabetical order. List Title

Subtitle 1B48
Subtitle
Subtitle
2A48
2A52
in the directory only services or Subtitle 1B49
Subtitle 1B52 Title
departments which have contact Subtitle 2B32
with patients and public. Title Subtitle 2B34
Subtitle 1C32
Subtitle 1C33 Title
Subtitle 1C36 Subtitle 3A54
Subtitle 1C38 Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 3A55
Subtitle 3A56
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-13

 IN-17.11 Directories
Directory with Insert

762mm
(2’-6”)

Header Layout A 1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-14

 IN-17.12 Directories
Large Directory with Insert
Size
914 mm H x 914 mm W
(3'-0" H x 3'-0" W)

Description and Use

Directory
Large size main lobby directory Title Title Title

header and digital print. Subtitle

Subtitle
1A74
1A75
Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
2B37 Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
2B37

Subtitle 1A77 Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle

Subtitle 1A78 Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
Message Configuration Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2B40 Subtitle 2B40

(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Sub-Subtitle Subtitle

Subtitle
2B41
2B42
Subtitle 2B41

sizes and dimensions) Header Title

Subtitle 1B48
Subtitle
Subtitle
2B44
2B45
Title
Subtitle 2C50
Layout A is for a basic directory Subtitle 1B49 Subtitle 2C55
Subtitle 1B51 Title
header. Lower listing area is a Subtitle 2C50 Title

digital print. Title

Subtitle 1C34
Subtitle 2C55 Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
2C60

Subtitle 1C37 Title Sub-Subtitle

Subtitle 1C38 Subtitle 2C60 Sub-Subtitle
Sign Components Subtitle 1C42 Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2C61

Fame sign system Sub-Subtitle

Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 2C62

Subtitle 2C61
Subtitle 2C62
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl or digital print
insert

Colors
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background and accent bar: Refer
to color chart.
Header (Message Layout A)
Typography
Helvetica
Directory
Mounting
Mechanical fastener
Header (Message Layout B)
Installation
Wall mounted VA Medical
VA Medical Center
Center TogusTogus
Recommendations Directory
Directory
This directory is for use in the
main lobby of small buildings
which would typically have no Directory Listing (Digital Print)
more than 60 to 80 listings. All Title Title Title

listings in a directory should be Subtitle

Subtitle
1A74
1A75
Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
2B37 Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
2B37

done in alphabetical order. List Subtitle 1A77 Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle

Subtitle 1A78 Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
in the directory only services or Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2B40 Subtitle 2B40

departments which have contact Sub-Subtitle Subtitle

Subtitle
2B41
2B42
Subtitle 2B41

with patients and public. Title Subtitle 2B44 Title

Subtitle 1B48 Subtitle 2B45 Subtitle 2C50
Subtitle 1B49 Subtitle 2C55
Subtitle 1B51 Title
Subtitle 2C50 Title
Title Subtitle 2C55 Subtitle 2C60
Subtitle 1C34 Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1C37 Title Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1C38 Subtitle 2C60 Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1C42 Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2C61
Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2C62
Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 2C61
Subtitle 2C62
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-15

 IN-17.12 Directories
Large Directory with Insert

Header Layout A

Header Layout B
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-16

 IN-17.13 Directories
Directory with Map and Listing Insert
Size
762 mm H x 1219 mm W
(2'-6" H x 4'-0" W) VA Medical Center Togus
Description and Use Directory
Small size main lobby directory
header and digital print inserts. Title
Subtitle 1A74
Title
Subtitle 2A42
Subtitle 1A76 Sub-Subtitle

Message Configuration Subtitle

Subtitle
1A77
1A78
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2A44
Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2A45
sizes and dimensions). Subtitle 2A46
Title Subtitle 2A48
Subtitle 1B48 Subtitle 2A52
Header Layout A is for a basic Subtitle 1B49
directory header. Header Layout B Subtitle 1B52 Title
Subtitle 2B32
is for a directory header to contain Title Subtitle 2B34

the name of the facility. Lower Subtitle

Subtitle
1C32
1C33 Title
listing area digital print. Subtitle 1C36 Subtitle 3A54
Subtitle 1C38 Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Sign Components Sub-Subtitle

Fame sign system Subtitle

Subtitle
3A55
3A56

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl or digital print
insert for map and listings
Header (Message Layout A)
Colors
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background and accent bar: Refer
to color chart.
Directory
Typography
Helvetica Header (Message Layout B)

Mounting VA Medical Center Togus

Mechanical fastener
Directory
Installation
Wall mounted
Map Directory (Digital Print)
Recommendations
Title Title
This directory is for use in the Subtitle 1A74 Subtitle 2A42

main lobby of small buildings Subtitle

Subtitle
1A76
1A77
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
which would typically have no Subtitle 1A78 Sub-Subtitle

more than 30 to 40 listings. All Sub-Subtitle

Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle
Subtitle
2A44
2A45
listings in a directory should be Subtitle 2A46
Title Subtitle 2A48
done in alphabetical order. List Subtitle 1B48 Subtitle 2A52
in the directory only services or Subtitle 1B49
Subtitle 1B52 Title
departments which have contact Subtitle 2B32
with patients and public. Title Subtitle 2B34
Subtitle 1C32
Subtitle 1C33 Title
Subtitle 1C36 Subtitle 3A54
Subtitle 1C38 Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 3A55
Subtitle 3A56
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-17

 IN-17.13 Directories
Directory with Map and Listing Insert

Header Layout A

Header Layout B

Map
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-18

 IN-17.14 Directories
Large Directory with Map and Listing Insert
Size
914 mm H x 1524 mm W
(3'-0" H x 5'-0" W)
Directory
Description and Use Title Title Title

Main lobby directory header and Subtitle

Subtitle
1A74
1A75
Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
2B37 Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
2B37

digital print with 90 directory Subtitle

Subtitle
1A77
1A78
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle

listings. Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle
Subtitle
2B40
2B41
Subtitle
Subtitle
2B40
2B41
Subtitle 2B42
Title Subtitle 2B44 Title

Message Configuration Subtitle

Subtitle
1B48
1B49
Subtitle 2B45 Subtitle
Subtitle
2C50
2C55

(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Subtitle 1B51 Title

Subtitle 2C50 Title

sizes and dimensions). Title

Subtitle 1C34
Subtitle 2C55 Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
2C60

Subtitle 1C37 Title Sub-Subtitle

Subtitle 1C38 Subtitle 2C60 Sub-Subtitle

Header Layout A is for a basic

Subtitle 1C42 Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2C61
Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2C62

directory header. Header Layout B

Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 2C61
Subtitle 2C62
is for a directory header to contain
the name of the facility. Lower
listing area digital print.

Sign Components
Fame sign system

Graphic Process Header (Message Layout A)

Surface applied vinyl or digital print
insert for map and listings

Colors
Directory
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background and accent bar: Refer Header (Message Layout B)
to color chart.

Typography
VA Medical Center Togus
Helvetica Directory
Mounting
Mechanical fastener
Map Directory Listing (Digital Print)
Installation Title Title Title
Wall mounted Subtitle
Subtitle
1A74
1A75
Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
2B37 Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
2B37

Subtitle 1A77 Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle

Recommendations Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
1A78 Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 2B40
Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 2B40
This directory is for use in the main Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2B41 Subtitle 2B41
Subtitle 2B42
lobby of small buildings which Title Subtitle 2B44 Title

would typically have no more than Subtitle

Subtitle
1B48
1B49
Subtitle 2B45 Subtitle
Subtitle
2C50
2C55
90 listings. All listings in a directory Subtitle 1B51 Title
Subtitle 2C50 Title
should be done in alphabetical Title Subtitle 2C55 Subtitle 2C60

order. List in the directory only Subtitle

Subtitle
1C34
1C37 Title
Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle
services or departments which Subtitle 1C38 Subtitle 2C60 Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1C42 Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2C61
have contact with patients and Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2C62

public. Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 2C61
Subtitle 2C62
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-19

 IN-17.14 Directories
Large Directory with Map and Listing Insert

Directory

Title
Subtitle Title
Subtitle 1A74 Subtitle Title
Subtitle 1A75 2B37
Sub-Subtitle Subtitle
Subtitle 1A77 2B37
Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle 1A78
Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 2B40 Subtitle
Title Subtitle 2B41 Subtitle 2B40
Subtitle Subtitle 2B42 2B41

914mm
Subtitle 1B48 Subtitle 2B44 Title
Subtitle 1B49 2B45 Subtitle

(3’)
1B51 Title 2C50
Subtitle
Title Subtitle 2C55
Subtitle Subtitle 2C50 Title
Subtitle 1C34 2C55 Subtitle
Subtitle 1C37 Title 2C60
Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1C38 Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
1C42 2C60
Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 2C61
Subtitle 2C62
Subtitle 2C61
2C62

1524 mm (5’)

152 mm
(6”) 76 mm(3”)
38 mm(1.5”)

Header A
1524 mm (5’)

152 mm 44 mm(1.75”)
(6”) 19 mm(.75”)
44 mm(1.75”)
22 mm(.875”)

Header B
279 mm (11”)
25 mm(1”)
8 mm(.5”)
25 mm(1”)
8 mm(.5”)

38 mm(1.5”)

762 mm
(30”)

610 mm (24”)

Map
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-20

 IN-17.15 Directories
Floor Directory with Insert

4
Size
762 mm H x 305 mm W
(2'-6" H x 1'-0" W) FLOOR
FOUR
Description and Use
Small size elevator lobby directory.
Directory header and digital print
with 24 listings.
Title 1A47
Subtitle 1A49
Message Configuration
Subtitle 1A50
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Sub-Subtitle
sizes and dimensions). Header is Sub-Subtitle
for floor level identification. Lower
listing area is a digital print. Title 1A62
Subtitle 1A63
Sign Components Subtitle 1A64
Subtitle 1A65
Fame sign system
Subtitle 1A66

Graphic Process Title 1B45

Surface applied vinyl or digital print Subtitle 1B46
Subtitle 1B46
Colors
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background and accent bar: Refer
to color chart

Typography
Helvetica

Mounting

4 4
Mechanical fastener

Installation FLOOR FLOOR

Wall mounted FOUR FOUR

Recommendations
This directory is for use in elevator Title 1A47 Title 1A47
lobbies of small buildings which Subtitle
Subtitle
1A49
1A50
Subtitle 1A49
Subtitle 1A50
would typically have no more than Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
24 listings. All listings in a directory Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle

should be done in alphabetical Title 1A62 Title 1A62

order. List in the directory only Subtitle 1A63 Subtitle 1A63
Subtitle 1A64 Subtitle 1A64
services or departments which Subtitle 1A65 Subtitle 1A65
have contact with patients and Subtitle 1A66 Subtitle 1A66

public. Title 1B45 Title 1B45

Subtitle 1B46 Subtitle 1B46
Subtitle 1B46 Subtitle 1B46

Pharmacy

You Are Here

Surgery

IN-17.15 IN-17.17
Elevator Directory Elevator Directory
with Map
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-21

 IN-17.15 Directories
Floor Directory with Insert

4
FLOO
R
FOUR

Title
Subtitle
1A47
Subtitle
1A49
Sub-Sub
title 1A50
Sub-Sub
title
Title
Subtitle
1A62
Subtitle
1A63
Subtitle
1A64
Subtitle
1A65
1A66

Pharmacy
Surgery You Are
Here

Header Layout

305mm (12”)

406 mm
(16")

Map 203 mm
(8")
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-22

 IN-17.16 Directories
Large Floor Directory with Insert
Size
762 mm H x 610 mm W

4
(2'-6" H x 2'-0" W)

Description and Use FLOOR

Elevator lobby directory. Directory FOUR
header and digital print with 48
listings
Title 1A47
Title 1A47
Message Configuration Subtitle 1A49
Subtitle 1A50 Subtitle 1A49
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Sub-Subtitle Subtitle 1A50
sizes and dimensions). Header is Sub-Subtitle
for floor level identification. Lower Title 1A62 Sub-Subtitle
Subtitle 1A63
listing area is a digital print. Subtitle 1A64
Title 1A62
Subtitle 1A65
Subtitle 1A63
Sign Components Subtitle
Subtitle
1A66
1A63 Subtitle 1A64
Fame sign system Subtitle 1A64 Subtitle 1A65
Subtitle 1A65 Subtitle 1A66
Graphic Process Title 1A62 Title 1B45
Surface applied vinyl or digital print Subtitle 1A63
Subtitle 1B46
insert Subtitle 1A64
Subtitle 1B46
Subtitle 1A65
Subtitle 1A66
Colors
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background and accent bar: refer
to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica

4 4
Mounting
Mechanical fastener FLOOR FLOOR
FOUR FOUR
Installation
Wall mounted
Title 1A47
Recommendations Title 1A47
Subtitle 1A49
Title
Subtitle
1A47
1A49
Title 1A47
Subtitle 1A49
This directory is for use in the Subtitle 1A49
Subtitle 1A50 Subtitle 1A50 Subtitle 1A50
Subtitle 1A50
elevator lobbies of small buildings Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle Sub-Subtitle
which would typically have no Sub-Subtitle

more than 30 to 40 listings. All Title 1A62

Title 1A62 Title 1A62 Title 1A62
Subtitle 1A63 Subtitle 1A63
listings in a directory should be Subtitle 1A63
Subtitle 1A64 Subtitle 1A64
Subtitle 1A63
Subtitle 1A64
done in alphabetical order. List Subtitle 1A64
Subtitle 1A65 Subtitle 1A65 Subtitle 1A65
Subtitle 1A65
in the directory only services or Subtitle 1A66
Subtitle 1A66 Subtitle 1A66 Subtitle 1A66

departments which have contact Title 1B45 Title 1B45

with patients and public. Subtitle 1B46 Subtitle 1B46
Subtitle 1B46 Subtitle 1B46 Pharmacy

You Are Here

Surgery

IN-17.16 IN-17.18
Elevator Directory Elevator Directory
with Map
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-23

 IN-17.16 Directories
Large Floor Directory

4
FLOO
R
FOUR

Title
Subtitl
e 1A47
Subtitl
e 1A49
Sub-Su Title
btitle 1A50
Sub-Su Subtitl
btitle e 1A47
Subtitl
e 1A49
Title Sub-Su
btitle 1A50
Subtitl Sub-Su
e 1A62 btitle
Subtitl
e 1A63
Subtitl Title
e 1A64
Subtitl Subtitl
e e 1A62
1A65 Subtitl
1A66 e 1A63
Title Subtitl
e 1A64
Subtitl Subtitl
e e 1A65
1B45
Subtitl
e 1B46 1A66
1B46

Pharmac
y
Surgery You Are
Here

Header Layout A

305mm (12”)

406 mm
(16")
610 mm
(24")

Map 203 mm
(8")
1829 mm (6'-0")

12/2012 Page 10-5-24

 IN-27.01 Directories
Freestanding Information Kiosk
Size
1067 mm H x 229 mm W x 152
mm D
(42" H x 9" W x 6" D)

Description and Use

Free Standing kiosk Identifies
Information station or floor
directory. Used where wall is not

INFORMATION
available.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Frame system with digital or
applied graphics

Graphic Process
Digital print or surface applied vinyl

Colors
Text: Refer to color chart.
Background: Refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Condensed

Mounting
Free standing weighted base or
secure to floor as needed.

Installation
In main entry area where traffic
patterns allow

Recommendations
These signs bring attention and
identification to Information or
Registration stations.
INFORMATION

12/2012 Page 10-5-25

 IN-27.01 Directories
Freestanding Information Kiosk

Weighted Base
12” DIA

6"
9"

Double sided information icon:

3/8" thick round acrylic
panels with vinyl or dimensional
information symbols. Panels attached
to center bracket via adhesive.

Structure frame system

brushed satin aluminum
with digital print
insert

42”

6'-6"

1'-0"

12/2012 Page 10-5-26

 IN-27.02 Directories
Wall Mounted Touch Screen Directory
Size
1295 mm H x 711 mm W
(4'-3" H x 2'-4" W)

Description and Use

Wall mounted interactive
information station for identification
of information service and
department location. Monitor
content is a separate project. A-B L-N
Accounting D-2xxx Lab C-2xxx
Addictive Disorders ?-Xxxx Laundry ?-Xxxx

Message
Administration ?-Xxxx Library ?-Xxxx
Ambulatory Care B-1xxx Medical Records ?-Xxxx
America Legion Medical Surgical ?-Xxxx

(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Officer

Anesthesiology
Audiology
?-Xxxx
?-Xxxx
C-6xxx
Mental Health Clinic
MRI
Neurology
B-6xxx
H-2xxx
?-Xxxx

sizes and dimensions). Barber L-1xxx

Behavioral Medicine B-6-xxx
Benefits D-2xxx
Nuclear Medicine

O
?-Xxxx

BioMed-Engin eering S-2xxx OB / GYN ?-Xxxx

Blood Draw C-2xxx Occupational

Colors
Canteen L-1xxx Therapist ?-Xxxx
Oncology ?-Xxxx
C Operating Rooms ?-Xxxx

Text: Refer to color chart for entry Cardiac Cath Lab

Cardiology
Cashier
G-2xxx
H-3xxx
H-1xxx
Ophthalmologist
Optometry
Orthopedics
?-Xxxx
?-Xxxx
?-Xxxx

area. Color should have a high Chapel

Chaplain
B-2xxx
B-2xxx P-R ?-Xxxx
Community Living M-1xxx Patient Rooms B-4xxx
contrast with surrounding wall color Compensation &
Pension ?-Xxxx
Pathology
PATPU ?-Xxxx
C-1xxx

and surface. Conference Room

D-E
?-Xxxx Pharmacy
Physical Therapy
Podiatrist
H-1xxx
?-Xxxx
?-Xxxx
Dental Clinic C-2xxx Police G-1xxx
Diagnostic Imaging G-2xxx POW Consultant ?-Xxxx

Typography
Dietician C-2xxx Primary Care ?-Xxxx
Dining Room L-1xxx Prosthetics ?-Xxxx
EKG/ Echo H-3xxx Psychiatry ?-Xxxx

Helvetica Condensed
Emergency J-1xxx Psychology ?-Xxxx
Endocrinology ?-Xxxx Puchasing ?-Xxxx
Environmetal Care ?-Xxxx Pulmonary Care ?-Xxxx
Eye Clinic ?-Xxxx Quality Management ?-Xxxx

F-G R
Installation
TOUCH THE
Facilities ?-Xxxx Radiology G-2xxx
Food Services ?-Xxxx Rehabilitation G-1xxx

Wall mounted
Gastroenterology ?-Xxxx Respiratory G-3xxx
Restroom ?-Xxxx
H

DIRECTORY
Rheumatology ?-Xxxx
Health Benefits
Advisor ?-Xxxx S-T
Health Care of Security ?-Xxxx
Recommendations Homeless Veterans ?-Xxxx Sleep Study ?-Xxxx

TO LOCATE
Hematology ?-Xxxx Social Work ?-Xxxx
Hospice & Palliative
Use appropriate mounting
Speech Pathology ?-Xxxx
Care ?-Xxxx Staffing-Nurse
Housekeeping ?-Xxxx Manager ?-Xxxx

methods and hardware to Human Resources D-2xxx Suicide prevention ?-Xxxx

SERVICES
Surgery G-3xxx
I-L Toxicology ?-Xxxx

accommodate weight of unit. Imaging Services

Infectious Disease
G-2xxx
?-Xxxx U-Z
Information Ultrasound ?-Xxxx
Wireless network connections and Technology
Infusion
?-Xxxx
?-Xxxx
Urgent Care
Urology
?-Xxxx
?-Xxxx

power are required. Software and

Intensive Care Unit G-3xxx Women's Center ?-Xxxx
Internal Medicine ?-Xxxx

programming are necessary and

require separate development.
Monitor size and cabinet can vary.

A-B L-N
Accounting D-2xxx Lab C-2xxx
Addictive Disorders ?-Xxxx Laundry ?-Xxxx
Administration ?-Xxxx Library ?-Xxxx
Ambulatory Care B-1xxx Medical Records ?-Xxxx
America Legion Medical Surgical ?-Xxxx
Officer ?-Xxxx Mental Health Clinic B-6xxx
Anesthesiology ?-Xxxx MRI H-2xxx
Audiology C-6xxx Neurology ?-Xxxx
Barber L-1xxx Nuclear Medicine ?-Xxxx
Behavioral Medicine B-6-xxx
Benefits D-2xxx O
BioMed-Engin eering S-2xxx OB / GYN ?-Xxxx
Blood Draw C-2xxx Occupational
Canteen L-1xxx Therapist ?-Xxxx
Oncology ?-Xxxx
C Operating Rooms ?-Xxxx
Cardiac Cath Lab G-2xxx Ophthalmologist ?-Xxxx
Cardiology H-3xxx Optometry ?-Xxxx
Cashier H-1xxx Orthopedics ?-Xxxx
Chapel B-2xxx
Chaplain B-2xxx P-R ?-Xxxx
Community Living M-1xxx Patient Rooms B-4xxx
Compensation & Pathology C-1xxx
Pension ?-Xxxx PATPU ?-Xxxx
Conference Room ?-Xxxx Pharmacy H-1xxx
Physical Therapy ?-Xxxx
D-E Podiatrist ?-Xxxx
Dental Clinic C-2xxx Police G-1xxx
Diagnostic Imaging G-2xxx POW Consultant ?-Xxxx
Dietician C-2xxx Primary Care ?-Xxxx
Dining Room L-1xxx Prosthetics ?-Xxxx
EKG/ Echo H-3xxx Psychiatry ?-Xxxx
Emergency J-1xxx Psychology ?-Xxxx
Endocrinology ?-Xxxx Puchasing ?-Xxxx
Environmetal Care ?-Xxxx Pulmonary Care ?-Xxxx
Eye Clinic ?-Xxxx Quality Management ?-Xxxx

F-G R

TOUCH THE
Facilities ?-Xxxx Radiology G-2xxx
Food Services ?-Xxxx Rehabilitation G-1xxx
Gastroenterology ?-Xxxx Respiratory G-3xxx
Restroom ?-Xxxx
H

DIRECTORY
Rheumatology ?-Xxxx
Health Benefits
Advisor ?-Xxxx S-T
Health Care of Security ?-Xxxx
Homeless Veterans ?-Xxxx Sleep Study ?-Xxxx

TO LOCATE
Hematology ?-Xxxx Social Work ?-Xxxx
Hospice & Palliative Speech Pathology ?-Xxxx
Care ?-Xxxx Staffing-Nurse
Housekeeping ?-Xxxx Manager ?-Xxxx
Human Resources D-2xxx Suicide prevention ?-Xxxx

SERVICES
Surgery G-3xxx
I-L Toxicology ?-Xxxx
Imaging Services G-2xxx
Infectious Disease ?-Xxxx U-Z
Information Ultrasound ?-Xxxx
Technology ?-Xxxx Urgent Care ?-Xxxx
Infusion ?-Xxxx Urology ?-Xxxx
Intensive Care Unit G-3xxx Women's Center ?-Xxxx
Internal Medicine ?-Xxxx

12/2012 Page 10-5-27

 IN-27.02 Directories
Wall Mounted Touch Screen Directory

Top view

711.2mm (28")

95.2mm
(3-3/4")
114.3mm
228.6mm (4-1/2")
(9")

Touch screen
interactive
990.6mm monitor each side
(39") Monitor cabinet size
can vary
1981.2mm
(79’)

69.8mm
(2-3/4")
685mm
(27")

Front view Side view

12/2012 Page 10-5-28

 IN-27.03 Directories
Freestanding Touch Screen Directory
Size
2134 mm H x 914 mm W x 381
mm D
(7'-0" H x 3'-0" W x 1'-3" D)

Description and Use

Freestanding interactive information
station for identification of A-B
Accounting D-2xxx
L-N
Lab C-2xxx

information service and department

Addictive Disorders ?-Xxxx Laundry ?-Xxxx
Administration ?-Xxxx Library ?-Xxxx
Ambulatory Care B-1xxx Medical Records ?-Xxxx
America Legion Medical Surgical ?-Xxxx

location. Monitor content is a

Officer ?-Xxxx Mental Health Clinic B-6xxx
Anesthesiology ?-Xxxx MRI H-2xxx
Audiology C-6xxx Neurology ?-Xxxx
Barber L-1xxx Nuclear Medicine ?-Xxxx

separate project. Behavioral Medicine B-6-xxx

Benefits D-2xxx
BioMed-Engin eering S-2xxx
Blood Draw C-2xxx
O
OB / GYN
Occupational
?-Xxxx

Canteen L-1xxx Therapist ?-Xxxx

Oncology ?-Xxxx
C Operating Rooms ?-Xxxx

Message
Cardiac Cath Lab G-2xxx Ophthalmologist ?-Xxxx
Cardiology H-3xxx Optometry ?-Xxxx
Cashier H-1xxx Orthopedics ?-Xxxx
Chapel B-2xxx
P-R
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
Chaplain B-2xxx ?-Xxxx
Community Living M-1xxx Patient Rooms B-4xxx
Compensation & Pathology C-1xxx
Pension ?-Xxxx PATPU ?-Xxxx

sizes and dimensions).

Conference Room ?-Xxxx Pharmacy H-1xxx
Physical Therapy ?-Xxxx
D-E Podiatrist ?-Xxxx
Dental Clinic C-2xxx Police G-1xxx
Diagnostic Imaging G-2xxx POW Consultant ?-Xxxx
Dietician C-2xxx Primary Care ?-Xxxx
Dining Room L-1xxx Prosthetics ?-Xxxx

Colors
EKG/ Echo H-3xxx Psychiatry ?-Xxxx
Emergency J-1xxx Psychology ?-Xxxx
Endocrinology ?-Xxxx Puchasing ?-Xxxx
Environmetal Care ?-Xxxx Pulmonary Care ?-Xxxx
Eye Clinic ?-Xxxx Quality Management ?-Xxxx

Text: Refer to color chart for entry F-G R

TOUCH THE
Facilities ?-Xxxx Radiology G-2xxx

area. Color should have a high

Food Services ?-Xxxx Rehabilitation G-1xxx
Gastroenterology ?-Xxxx Respiratory G-3xxx
Restroom ?-Xxxx
H

DIRECTORY
Rheumatology ?-Xxxx

contrast with surrounding wall color

Health Benefits
Advisor ?-Xxxx S-T
Health Care of Security ?-Xxxx
Homeless Veterans ?-Xxxx Sleep Study ?-Xxxx

and surface. TO LOCATE

Hematology ?-Xxxx Social Work ?-Xxxx
Hospice & Palliative Speech Pathology ?-Xxxx
Care ?-Xxxx Staffing-Nurse
Housekeeping ?-Xxxx Manager ?-Xxxx
Human Resources D-2xxx Suicide prevention ?-Xxxx

SERVICES
Surgery G-3xxx
I-L Toxicology ?-Xxxx

Typography
Imaging Services G-2xxx
Infectious Disease ?-Xxxx U-Z
Information Ultrasound ?-Xxxx
Technology ?-Xxxx Urgent Care ?-Xxxx
Infusion ?-Xxxx Urology ?-Xxxx

Helvetica Intensive Care Unit

Internal Medicine
G-3xxx
?-Xxxx
Women's Center ?-Xxxx

Installation
Secure to floor.

Recommendations
Floor mount unit for security
and stability. Wireless network
connections and power
are required. Software and
programming is necessary and
requires separate development.
Monitor size and cabinet can vary.

Provide hand sanitizer in close

proximity.

Line of Sight
Men
5'-9"
Line of Sight
Women
Reach
Line of Sight 48"
Seated Max

32”
Min
15"
Min

12/2012 Page 10-5-29

 IN-27.03 Directories
Freestanding Touch Screen Directory

Top view

19mm
711.2mm (28") (3/4”)

95.2mm
(3-3/4") 241.3mm
114.3mm (9-1/2”)
228.6mm (4-1/2")
(9")

Touch screen
interactive
990.6mm monitor each side
(39") Monitor cabinet size
can vary
1981.2mm 1289mm
(78”) (50-3/4”)

Identical
Directory
on other side
69.8mm
(2-3/4")
685mm
(27")

635mm
(25") 381mm
(15”)
139.7mm
(5-1/2")

82.5mm
(3-1/4”)

508mm (20")
508mm (20")

762mm (30")

Front view Side view

12/2012 Page 10-5-30

 Specification Directories

The specifications for signs are available in the Master Construction Specifications
(PG-18-1) area of the VA Technical Information Library, which is available on the VA
web site under Office of Construction & Facilities Management.

www.cfm.va.gov/til/

Refer to Signage in the specifications, Division 10, Section 10 14 00.

For more information regarding specifications, contact the Office of Construction &
Facilities Management, Facility Standards Service.

The specifications require close coordination, taking into account the existing sign
program at a medical center, any sign demolition, sign maintenance and future
signing needs.

When preparing the specifications for a project, it will require editing to add and
indicate new signs or eliminate signs that are not needed. Also, it will be necessary
to adapt the specifications to project requirements required for the specific project in
which they are intended.

The sign message schedule is considered a part of the specifications and would
comprise a portion of the spec section. The configuration and format of the mes-
sage schedule may vary according to individual project requirements. The sign
message schedule format is shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide. It provides the method for identifying each sign location,
type and message along with other notations. The sign schedule contains important
information that the sign manufacturer and the sign installer will require for manu-
facturing and sign installation.

The sign message schedule must be coordinated with a sign location plan drawing
showing where signs are to be placed within a building or on the site. Refer to the
sign location plan example shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide.

For convenience, the sign type drawings can also be included in the specifications
as it own section.

12/2012 Page 10-6-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Construction Directories

The type of interior directory system selected for a particular application or facility
requires several decisions and involves different construction and assembly compo-
nents to meet the desired results. This section provides an overview of the recom-
mended criteria for interior directories.

Many sign manufacturers currently market extrusions, standard parts and compo-
nent systems that will accomplish the illustrated objectives of the intended interior
directory system. These extruded, molded, and fabricated component systems are
acceptable as long as they adhere to the illustrated and stated specifications.

When a directory system is selected from a manufacturer, it will be necessary to

continue a relationship with that manufacturer for regular directory updating with
new strips and inserts. Component elements from directory manufacturer “A” will
generally not work or fit in manufacturer “B’s” directories. Component directory sys-
tems are available from many GSA approved sign manufacturers and sign manufac-
turers in the open market place.

Refer to the Interior Signs section of the Guide for details showing the construction
of sign component systems and various sign types based on a component system.
The illustrations are intended to show the desired configuration and intent of the
various sign types. Sections of the extrusions and various parts are for illustration
purposes only and have not been engineered or configured for extruding and do not
represent a finished product.

The Interior Signs, Exterior Signs, and Specifications sections of the Guide should
be read in conjunction with this section to provide an overview of the construction
requirements, materials, and finishes.

12/2012 Page 10-7-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Installation Directories

Detail 1
Installation detail for sign types:
17.01, 17.02, 17.03, 17.04, 17.11,
17.12, 17.13, 17.14

1829 mm (6'-0")
Detail 2

1829 mm (6'-0")
Installation detail for sign types:
17.05, 17.06, 17.15, 17.16

Detail 1 Detail 2

12/2012 Page 10-8-1

 Installation Directories

Wall Mounted Sign Notch Backing

Detail Wall Stud Is Continuous
Stud Flange.
Interior wall bracing for directories Wall Stud Is
Continuous
Stud Backing Plate A
1. Maximum weight- 25 lbs. point
load. If sign load exceeds this use
Stud Backing Plate B.
2. Attach plates to 3 studs (2) #12 S.M.S. Typical (3) #8 S.M.S.
minimum. At Each Stud Typical At
3. Verify length, height, location Each Stud
and number required. 16 Ga 6" Pl Unpunched 4"
4. Use #12 Self Tapping Screws W.F. Stud
when attaching items to backing, Wall Studs Backing Plate
U.O.N.
Wall Studs
Stud Backing Plate B
1. Maximum weight- 50 lbs. point
load. If sign load exceeds this use
Stud Backing Plate C. Stud Backing Plate A Stud Backing Plate B
2. Attach plates to 3 studs
minimum.
3. Verify length, height, location
and number required. Typ. Each Notch Backing
4. Use double stud when stud is Flange Stud Flange.
1/8" 3/8" Ea End (2) #12
supporting more than 2 backing Wall Stud Is 1/8" 2" 21 S.M.S. Typical
plates. Continuous /2"
At Each Stud

Stud Backing Plate C

1. Maximum weight- 200 lbs./ft. Ea End
1/8" 2"
2. Attach plates to 3 studs
minimum. 3/16"
Or
3. Verify length, height, location Unpunched 7 Ga x 7 1/2"
and number required. 4" W.F. Stud Bent PC
4. Use double stud when stud is Backing Plate Grade 50
supporting more than 2 backing Steel
1/16" 11/4"
plates.
Wall Studs Orient Stud Wall Studs
Stud Backing Plate D Webs Back
1. Maximum weight- 300 lbs. point To Back
load.
2. Attach plates to 3 studs
Stud Backing Plate C Stud Backing Plate D
minimum.
3. Verify length, height, location
and number required.

12/2012 Page 10-8-2

 Specialty Signs

• Freestanding Stanchion Sign

• Freestanding Informational Signs

• Infection Control Sign

• Card or Paper Holder
• Chart, File, or Binder Holder
• Door Knob Hanger
• Frangible Room Number Sign
• Secure Facility Sign
• Reality Orientation Sign
• Memory Box
• LCD Memory Moniter
• Banners
• Construction Signs
• Construction Safety Sign

12/2012 rev 04/01/2017

This page is intentionally left blank.

 Table of Contents

Section 11:
Specialty Signs
• Introduction 11-2-1
• Overview 11-3-1 – 11-3-3
• Specialty Signs 11-4-1 – 11-4-36
• Installation 11-5-1

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.

 Introduction
Specialty Signs

This section of the Signage Design guide describes signs that are for special applications,
both inside and outside of a facility.

One group of signs are freestanding signs used to display a variety of information, both
permanent and temporary. Some signs relate to or advise on room usage. Other signs
are for specific types of room identification or building conditions.

Signs include those related to operational conditions such as sanitation or patient infor­
mation memory boxes displaying information about a patient.

Signs are provided for construction projects, and banners to highlight events, promo­
tions, or seasonal themes.

Discuss requirements with sign manufacturers because many of these items are standard
products which are illustrated in their catalogs and can be easily ordered.

This section is not all inclusive and specific conditions or situations may warrant design
of sign solutions that are not shown.

12/2012 Page 11-2-1

This page is intentionally left blank.

 Overview
Specialty Signs

SPeCIaLty SIgN DeSIgNatIONS

Each sign in the program guide has been given a specific sign type number desig­
nation. These designations provide a common description that can be referenced
when programming a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign
type designations are derived:

SP - 21.03A
SP Designates a Specialty Sign.
21 Two digit number identifies a particular sign type family.
.03 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific
sign within the sign family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version

and/or layout for graphics.

Sign Type SP-21

Specialty Signs
Line New Today's Meetings
Begins Patients
SP-21.01 Here For your laboratory work you may receive
two bills. One for tests performed
here and one for those tests performed
at a reference lab.

Freestanding Stanchion Sign

If office is empty, press button once.

SP-21.02
Freestanding Informational Sign

SP-21.03
Freestanding Informational Sign

SP-21.04
SP-21.01 SP-21.02 SP-21.03
Freestanding Informational Sign

SP-21.05
Infection Control

SP-21.04 SP-21.05

12/2012 Page 11-3-1

 Overview
Specialty Signs

Sign Type SP-22

Specialty Signs

SP-22.01 No liquids after

Card or Paper Holder 8:00 p.m.
SP-22.02
Chart, or File Holder Education
SP-22.03 Information
Binder Holder

SP-22.04
Door Knob Hanger SP-22.01 SP-22.02 / SP-22.03

SP-22.05
Tangible Room Number Sign

SP-22.06
Secure Facility Sign

2A244
2A244
Session
In
Progress

SP-22.04 SP-22.05

1E243

SP-22.06

12/2012 Page 11-3-2

 Overview
Specialty Signs

Sign Type SP-22

Specialty Signs

SP-22.07 My Nurse
Today is
Room #
1E 2 4 3

Reality Orientation
Weather

SP-22.08
Memory Box

SP-22.09
LCD Memory Monitor

SP-23.01
Banners
SP-22.07 SP-22.08 SP-22.09
SP-24.01
Construction Sign:
Coming Soon, Text Only

SP-24.02
Construction Sign:

Coming Soon with Rendering

SP-24.03
Construction Sign: Rendering

SP-24.04
Construction Sign: Safety

San Francisco
Your Town VA Medical Center
VA Medical Center
GENER AL C ONT RACTOR AR CH ITECT / EN GIN EERIN G FIR M
GEN ER AL C ONTR AC TOR

Construction Firm Name Name of General Contactor Name of Architect/ Engineering

City, State City, State City, State
ARC HITECT E NGINEER

Architect/ Engineering Firm Name

VA Office of Construction & Facilites Management
City, State
VA Office of Construction & Facilities Management

SP-23.01 SP-24.01 SP-24.02

This Project Has Worked 0 0 0 Days

Without a Lost Time Accident
T H E L I F E YO U S A V E M AY B E YO U R O W N

General Contacting Firm Name

SP-24.03 SP-24.04

12/2012 Page 11-3-3

This page is intentionally left blank.

 SP-21.01
Specialty Signs
Small Freestanding Stanchion Sign

Size
Sign Face:

457 mm H x 381 mm W

(18" H x 15" W)

Description
Small freestanding identification, Line
information, and directional sign to Begins
provide temporary information or Here
queuing for lines.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque and polished
aluminum tube stanchion post and
weighted base

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl letters

Colors
For background, type and post
colors, refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Movable, weighted base
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Installation
Use for aiding in temporary
directions, designating waiting Line
areas or directing people needing
to line up for a service. Begins Temporary
Exit
Here

Pocket Sign

Paper Insert slides

into frame opening.

12/2012 Page 11-4-1

 SP-21.01
Specialty Signs
Small Freestanding Stanchion Sign

Message Layout A

Paper Insert slides

into frame opening.

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 11-4-2

 SP-21.02
Specialty Signs
Freestanding Informational Sign
Size
Sign Face:

610 mm H x 610 mm W

(24" H x 24" W)

Description
Freestanding identification, New
information, and directional sign to Patients
provide temporary information. For your laboratory work you may receive
two bills. One for tests performed
here and one for those tests performed
at a reference lab.
If office is empty, press button once.
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions). Layout A is for
bold, short information. Layout B is
for titles and text information.

Sign Components
Acrylic sign plaque on metal frame:
Polished aluminum tube frame and
weighted base

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl letters

Colors
For background, type and post
colors, refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Movable, weighted base

Installation
Use for aiding in temporary This entrance New
information and directions,
designating waiting or directing is closed Patients
people needing to line up for a
service. temporarily For your laboratory work you may receive
two bills. One for tests performed
here and one for those tests performed
at a reference lab.
If office is empty, press button once.

12/2012 Page 11-4-3

 SP-21.02 Specialty Signs
Freestanding Informational Sign

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 11-4-4

 SP-21.03
Specialty Signs
Freestanding Informational Sign for Changeable Messages

Size
Sign Face:

610 mm H x 610 mm W

(24" H x 24" W)

Description
Small freestanding information sign
to provide temporary information.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing

for dimensions).

Layout A is changeable letters.

Layout B is a tackboard with a title

header.

Sign Components
Polished aluminum case with glass
locking door. Interior surface is a
grooved felt covered changeable
letterboard or a vinyl impregnated
tackboard. Polished aluminum tube
frame with weighted base.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl to header
above tack board

Colors
For header background, type
colors, post, base, and case: refer
to color chart.
Changeable letterboard felt: select Message Layout A Message Layout B
from manufacturer’s list. (Changeable Letter Board) (Tack Surface)

Typography
Helvetica Bold Today's Meetings
Staff Meeting
Mounting 1:00 12/9
Movable, weighted base
Conference Room A
Recommendations
Use for aiding in temporary
information and announcing events
and meetings.

12/2012 Page 11-4-5

 SP-21.03
Specialty Signs
Freestanding Informational Sign for Changeable Messages

Changeable Letterboard
or Tack Surface

Message Layout A Message Layout B

(Tack Surface)
(Changeable Letter Board)

12/2012 Page 11-4-6

 SP-21.04 Specialty Signs
Large Freestanding Informational Sign for Changeable Messages

Size
Sign Face:

914 mm H x 762 mm W

(36" H x 30" W)

Description
Freestanding information sign to
provide temporary information.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing

for dimensions).

Layout A is changeable letters.

Layout B is a tackboard with a title

header.

Sign Components
Polished aluminum case with glass
locking door. Interior surface is a
grooved felt covered changeable
letterboard or a vinyl impregnated
tackboard. Polished aluminum tube
frame with weighted base.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl to header
above tack board

Colors
For header background, type
colors, post, base and case: refer to
color chart.
Changeable letterboard felt: select
from manufacturer’s list of available
colors. Message Layout A Message Layout B
(Changeable Letter Board) (Tack Surface)
Typography
Helvetica Bold Today's
Mounting TODAY'S MENU Meetings
Movable, weighted base Ham Sandwich $2.50
Turkey Sandwich $2.75
Recommendations Cheese Pizza $2.00
Use for aiding in temporary Macaroni & Cheese $1.70
information and announcing events Garden Salad $1.10
and meetings. Tomato Soup $1.00
Vanilla Pudding $0.50
Ice Cream Sandwich $0.75
Chocolate Cookie $0.75

12/2012 Page 11-4-7

 SP-21.04
Specialty Signs
Large Freestanding Informational Sign for Changeable Messages

Message Layout A Message Layout B

(Tack Surface)
(Changeable Letter Board)

12/2012 Page 11-4-8

 SP-21.05 Specialty Signs
Infection Control Sign
Size
approximately
1524 mm H x 381 mm W
(60" H x 15" W )

Description
Non-illuminated, freestanding,
single sided kiosk to provide Area For
hand sanitizer, tissues, gloves, Graphic
information regarding infection Insert
control and (possibly) face-masks.

Sign Components
Freestanding kiosk structure
with compartments to hold
hand sanitizer dispenser, tissue
dispenser, waste recepticle (for
tissues), gloves, and acrylic sleeve
to insert (11" x 17") printed graphic/
instructions.

Graphic Process
Printed paper

Colors
Colors and materials to match or
compliment existing palette.

Mounting
Movable weighted base

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Installation
It is recommended that this sign be
placed at building entries and high
traffic areas such as the Canteen,
Lobby, and Gift Shop.

Area For
Graphic Insert
or Solid Color

Front Back

12/2012 Page 11-4-9

 SP-21.05 Specialty Signs
Infection Control Sign

Approx.
381 mm (15˝)

Acrylic Face Sleeve to

Insert Printed Graphic

Hand Sanitizer
Dispenser
Approx.
1524 mm (60˝) Tissue Dispenser Back of Kiosk:
Acrylic Face Sleve to
Insert Printed Graphic
or Solid Color Panel

Waste Receptacle

12/2012 Page 11-4-10

 SP-22.01
Specialty Signs
Card or Paper Holder

Size
Size to vary depending upon
messaging requirement. Holders
are available to accommodate
small size inserts that are
approximately 229 mm (9") W to
larger/poster sized inserts, approx.

No liquids after
611 mm (24") W.

Description
Card or paper holder to temporarily
hold paper or notices 8:00 p.m.
Sign Components
Aluminum extrusion with ball or
cylinder pinch roller

Colors
Per manufacturer

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive

Installation
On wall directly under sign

Recommendations
Can be installed under a patient
room sign or a patient bed sign to No liquids after
8:00 p.m.
hold miscellaneous pieces of paper. R
Can be installed under office sign PE RT R
PA SE PE RT
for use as a message placement R IN PA SE
holder or used at conference rooms A PE RT IN
P SE
to hold room schedules.
IN

R
A PE RT
P SE
IN R
A PE RT
P S E
IN

Above:
Examples of paper insert holders of various lengths
to accommodate various sizes of paper inserts.

SIGN TYPE
IN-22.01
SIGN TYPE
IN-22.01

12/2012 Page 11-4-11

 SP-22.01
Specialty Signs
Card or Paper Holder

229 mm (9”) to 610mm (24”)

SIGN TYPE
IN-22.01
SIGN TYPE
IN-22.01

12/2012 Page 11-4-12

 SP-22.02, .03 Specialty Signs
Chart, File, or Binder Holder
Size
Holder size:
IN22.02
298 mm x 381 mm x 64 mm
(11 3/4" x 15" x 2 1/2")

IN22.03
298 mm x 381 mm x 102 mm
(11 3/4" x 15" x 4")

Description
Chart, file or binder holder

Sign Components
Painted, formed metal

Colors
For background and type colors,
refer to color chart.
Education
Mounting
Mechanical fasteners
Information
Installation
On wall

Recommendations
Multipurpose

IN-22.02 IN-22.03

12/2012 Page 11-4-13

 SP-22.02, .03 Specialty Signs
Chart, File, or Binder Holder

IN-22.02 IN-22.03

12/2012 Page 11-4-14

 SP-22.04 Specialty Signs
Door Knob Hanger
Size
Sign Face:

254 mm H x 115 mm W

(10" H x 4 1/2" W)

Description
Door knob hanger used to indicate
room is in use.

Graphic Process
Silkscreened on styrene

Colors
Background: white
Text: red Session
Mounting In
Hang over door handle.
Progress
Installation
Temporary Front Back

Message Layout A Message Layout B

Session In
Session Progress
In Do Not
Progress Disturb

Do Not
Disturb

12/2012 Page 11-4-15

 SP-22.04 Specialty Signs
Door Knob Hanger

115 mm (4-1/2”)
84 mm (3-21/64”)

CL CL

19 mm (3/4”) 19 mm (3/4”)

84 mm (3-21/64”)
84 mm
(3-21/64”) 11 mm (7/16”)

254 mm
(10”)
38 mm (1-1/2”)
57 mm
(2-1/4”)

16 mm (5/8”)
8 mm (5/16”)
16 mm (5/8”) 16 mm (5/8”)
11 mm (7/16”)
16 mm (5/8”)
16 mm (5/8”)
16 mm (5/8”)
11 mm (7/16”)
11 mm (7/16”)
16 mm (5/8”)
16 mm (5/8”)

Message Layout A Message Layout B

1 mm (1/32”)

12/2012 Page 11-4-16

 SP-22.05 Specialty Signs
tangible Room Number Sign
Size
Sign Face:
76 mm H x 229 mm W
(3" H x 9" W)

2A244
Description
Room number sign to be placed on
all rooms that require identification.

Sign Construction
Polymer sign face laminated to
polyester backing plate with full 2A244
coverage application of VHB tape

Graphic Process
Tactile room number with
accompanying Braille

A244
Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Mounting
Flush mounted with double sided

A244
foam tape or silastic adhesive.

Installation
Knob side of door, 1575 mm (63")
to top of sign and 50 mm (2") clear
from door frame.

Recommendations
This sign is to be used for
psychiatric areas or other secured
areas where signs are required
for license compliance and where
signs cannot be used as weapons.

50 mm (2")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 11-4-17

 SP-22.05
Specialty Signs
Frangible Room Number Sign

50 mm (2")
1600 mm (5'-3")

12/2012 Page 11-4-18

 SP-22.06
Specialty Signs
Secure Facility Sign

Size
76 mm H (4")

Description
Painted or screened room number,
or name, at room entrance

Message Configuration

1E243
Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.

Graphic Process
Painted background field with
painted stenciled lettering

Colors
Colors to vary. Color scheme
should match or complement
existing palette. Background and
type colors should have enough
contrast to be easily readable.
Background can be a dark color
with light type, or the type could
be a dark color on a light colored
background.

Typography
AG Book Stencil

Installation
Painted sign background field to
be positioned above door frame.
The painted background field to
be the width of the door frame
and it’s height as necessary
to accommodate a 1 or 2 line
message.

Recommendations
It is recommended that this sign
be placed above door/entrance to
room.

1E243 SOILED UTILIT Y

12/2012 Page 11-4-19

 SP-22.06 Specialty Signs
Secure Facility Sign

Painted Stenciled Letters Painted Background

1E243
EQ

4˝ 2˝

EQ

Align edges of painted rectangle

with outside of door frame

CL room number & door CL

1E243 SOILED UTILIT Y

2˝

12/2012 Page 11-4-20

 SP-22.07 Specialty Signs
Reality Orientation Sign

Size
Varies to fit application.

Description Room #
Message board on which staff
members can display information Phone #
such as time, place, and personnel
information to persons with Nurse
dementia.
Today Is
Sign Components
Framed, erasable marker board Weather
with an adjacent pin tack surface
and shelf for holding markers and
push pins.

Alternate option: framed sign

with glass face and a sleeve to
accommodate a printed 11 x 17 inch
paper insert.The glass face functions
as an erasable writing surface.

Colors
Colors and materials to match or
complement existing palette. Option 1

Mounting
Wall mounted

Installation
Welcome to S M T W T F S
It is recommended that this sign
be placed in patient’s room visible Room
Doctor
from the patient’s bed. Phone
Nurse Date
Today Is Weather
Weather Patient
Room # Doctor
Nurse(s)

Allergies
Questions

Option 2 Option 3
Write and Wipe Reality Orientation sign Reality Orientation sign may be designed as a
dimensions and messaging tailored to framed sign with a glass face and a sleeve to
facility needs. Board may, or may not accommodate a printed 11x17 inch paper
require a pin-tac surface. insert. The glass face functions as an erasable
writing surface.

CL
1524 mm
(60˝)

12/2012 Page 11-4-21

 SP-22.07 Specialty Signs
Reality Orientation Sign

Option 2
Approx. 24"

Pin Tack Surface Dry Erase Board

Room #
Phone #
Nurse
Today Is

Approx. Weather
16"

Option 1
Tray for Markers and Push Pins

Approx. 11"

S M T W T F S
Room Printed 11x17
Phone Paper Insert
Date Behind Glass.
Weather
Glass Functions
Approx. Patient as a Erasable
17" Writing Surface.
Doctor
Nurse(s)
Paper Slips into
Frame either
Allergies from the Side
Questions or Top.

Option 3
Tray for Markers and Push Pins

CL
1524 mm
(60˝)

12/2012 Page 11-4-22

 SP-22.08
Specialty Signs
Memory Box

Size
Single Box, Approximately

406 mm H x 305 mm W

(16" H x 12" W)
1E 24 3 1E 24 3
76 mm - 102 mm deep (3"-4")

Double Box, Approximately

406 mm H x 610 mm W

(16" H x 24" W))

76 mm - 102 mm deep (3"-4")

Description
Non-illuminated display case
to allow display pictures,
cards, mementos, etc. Box can
accommodate one person (a single
box) or two people (a double box).
Box can be designed to incorporate Front Accessible Double Box Front Accessible
room number (this is optional, Single Box
room number may be a separate
sign). Box can be designed to be
accessible from the front or from
the back (from opposite side of
wall)

Sign Components
Display case with one or two
adjustable shelves and framed
glass or acrylic. Front accessible 1E 24 3 1E 24 3
box option to contain hinged door
with possible lock.

Mounting
Recessed into wall.

Colors
Colors and materials of structure
to match or compliment existing
interior palette.

Installation
It is recommended that this sign
be placed outside patient’s room, Rear Accessible Double Box Rear Accessible
adjacent to room sign next to entry Single Box
door.

76 mm (3˝)

C
L
1524 mm
(60˝)

12/2012 Page 11-4-23

 SP-22.08
Specialty Signs
Memory Box

Approx.
12˝

Outer Frame

1E 243 Room Number

Framed Glass or
Acrylic, Hinged Door

Display Box
Recessed in Wall

Approx.
16˝

Adustable Shelf

Front Accessible
Wall
Single Box

1E 243 Outer Frame

with Room Number

Door to Access
Display Box Box (door shown
Recessed in Wall flush with wall).

Adustable Shelf

Wall
Rear Accessible
Single Box

12/2012 Page 11-4-24

 SP-22.09
Specialty Signs
LCD Memory Monitor
Size
Approximately

152 mm H x 228 mm W x 76 mm D (6"

H x 9" W x 3" D)

Description
LCD monitor set in wall with front
access cover. LCD Screen to
display resident’s pictures.

Use
Memory Monitors allow residents
to display pictures and images of
their life, family, and interests. The
monitor can be positioned outside
their doors to let others know a little
bit about them and their families.
Unit bezel can be finished to match Small Memory Monitor Box
the interior materials and finishes. (Inset Into Wall)
Sign Components
Recessed display space monitor
and images by others.

Mounting
Recessed into wall.

Colors
Colors and materials of structure
to match or complement existing
interior palette.

Installation
It is recommended that this case
with monitor be placed outside
patient’s room, adjacent to room
sign next to entry door.

Recommendations
Small LCD screens are available,
178mm size are recommended.
Small Memory Monitor Box
(Surface mount to Wall)

51 mm (2˝)
Memory Monitor
small LCD screen
placed above
CL room sign
1524 mm
(60˝)

12/2012 Page 11-4-25

 SP-22.09 Specialty Signs
LCD Memory Monitor

Front load Bezel

Screen opening custom to fit
monitor / screen

9"

Wall

Bezel
Spring Clips

Power
Monitor
6"

Small Memory Monitor Box Display Box

(Reset Into Wall) Recessed in Wall

Pyhsical fasten box

to wall
tamper proof set screw
secure box and bezel
Front load Bezel
Screen opening custom to fit Spring Clips 2"- 3"
monitor / screen secure screen to bezel
9"

Bezel

Power
Monitor
6"

Box
Small Memory Monitor Box Wall
(Surface mount to Wall)

12/2012 Page 11-4-26

 SP-23.01 Specialty Signs
Banners: Pole Mounted
Size
Sizes to vary. Typical banner arm
lengths are:
610 mm (24")
762 mm (30")
914 mm (36")
VA CORE VA CORE VA CORE
Typical banner widths are: VALUES VALUES CHARACTISTICS
610 mm (24")
Integrity Integrity Trustworthy
762 mm (30") Accessible
Commitment Commitment
914 mm (36") Quality
Advocacy Advocacy
Inovative
Description Respect Respect Agile
Changeable exterior banners Excellence Excellence Integrated
mounted perpendicular to light
poles (or other existing poles or
posts). Banners may be vinyl,
canvas or nylon with printed or
screened graphic imagery. Graphic
imagery to vary. Banners may
contain graphics on front and back Single Banner Bracket Double Banner Bracket
sides of banner. Graphics may be
informational or decorative.

Sign Components
Top and bottom pole mounted
banner brackets, top and bottom
banner bracket arms and banners.
Brackets are available to hold a
single banner or a double banner.

Mounting
Brackets mount to pole with heavy
duty steel banding that wraps the
pole to secure the bracket. Brackets
can be mounted to a round, fluted
or square pole. An arm is attached Banner Bracket
to each bracket. Banners contain Detail Photo
top and bottom pockets that slip
over bracket arms to secure
placement.

Installation
On light pole or other exterior poles
or posts at a minimum height of
3048 mm (10 feet) from the bottom
of the banner to the ground.
ER

ER

ER
NN

NN

NN
BA

BA

BA

Single Banner Bracket Double Banner Bracket

12/2012 Page 11-4-27

 SP-23.01 Specialty Signs
Banners: Pole Mounted

Plan Vw. for Square Post Plan Vw. for Square Post

Plan Vw. for Round Pole Plan Vw. for Round Pole

660-965 mm
(26˝-38˝)
1219-2133 mm

ER

ER
ER
(48˝-84˝)

NN

NN
NN

BA

BA
BA

610-914 mm
(24˝-36˝)

Single Banner Bracket: Double Banner Bracket

For Round Pole or Square Post For Round Pole or Square Post
3048 mm (10'-0")
minimum

Single Banner Bracket Double Banner Bracket

12/2012 Page 11-4-28

 SP-24.01
Specialty Signs
Construction Sign: text Only

Size
Sign Panel:
1829 mm H x 2438 mm W
6' H x 8' W

Description
Sign used construction sites to
provide information designating the
specific “Department of Veterans
Affairs” project under construction
as well as the name of the general Your Town
contractor and other project specific
consultants. VA Medical Center
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
Message Configuration
Construction Firm Name
Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions. City, State
ARCHITECT ENGINEER

Sign Components Architect/ Engineering Firm Name

Posts (metal or wood) and framed City, State
MDO plywood or aluminum sign
panel
VA Office of Construction & Facilities Management
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl or screened
graphics

Colors
Background: VA blue and white
Type: black
Refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Post mounted framed sign panel

Installation
It is recommended that this sign
be placed at the entry, or a visible
location, on a construction site.

12/2012 Page 11-4-29

 SP-24.01 Specialty Signs
Construction Sign: Coming Soon, text Only

2” x 4” framing

4” x 6” Posts

PLAN VIEW Face

96" 6"
(2438 mm) (152 mm)

CL All visible surfaces

to be primed and painted
Equal

19" 11" Sign attached together

(482 mm) (283 mm) (Logo) Department of Veterans Affairs
with wood screws & lag bolts
Equal

72"
4-1/2” (114 mm) Location Face panel to be an exterior grade.
(1828 mm)
MDO sheet or an aluminum skin
4-1/2” (114 mm) Project title laminated to a wood or plastic core is
preferred with edges physically sealed.
53"
(1386 mm)
This space for listing of
• General Contactor
24"(609 mm) • Prime A/E Firm
• VA Office of Construction & Facilities
Management

4” x 6” Posts
Varies
24"(609 mm)
to 36”(914mm) Grade

Depth & type

of footing determined
by existing soil conditions

ELEVATION END VIEW

12/2012 Page 11-4-30

 SP-24.02 Specialty Signs
Construction Sign: text with Rendering
Size
Sign Panel:
2438 mm H x 2438 mm W
8' H x 8' W

Description
Sign used at construction sites to
provide information designating the
specific “Department of Veterans
Affairs” project under construction
as well as the name of the general
contractor and other project specific
consultants.

Message Configuration Your Town

Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions. VA Medical Center
Sign Components GENERAL CONTRACTOR ARCHITECT / ENGINEERING FIRM

Posts (metal or wood) and framed Name of General Contactor Name of Architect/ Engineering
MDO plywood or aluminum sign City, State City, State
panel
VA Office of Construction & Facilites Management
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl or screened
graphics

Colors
Background: VA blue and white
Type: black
Refer to color chart

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Post mounted framed sign panel.

Installation
It is recommended that this sign
be placed at the entry to the
construction site or along site
perimeter at a major street.

12/2012 Page 11-4-31

 SP-24.02 Specialty Signs
Construction Sign: Coming Soon with Rendering

2” x 4” framing

4” x 6” Posts

PLAN VIEW Face

96" 6"
(2438 mm) (152 mm)

CL

12" All visible surfaces

(304 mm)
8" (203 mm) Department of Veterans Affairs Logo to be primed and painted

Sign attached together

with wood screws & lag bolts
36"
(914 mm) Project image here
Face panel to be an exterior grade.
MDO sheet or an aluminum skin
96"
laminated to a wood or plastic core is
(2438 mm) preferred with edges physically sealed.
12"
(304 mm) 8" (203 mm) Project name & location here

Copy
18"
size General Contractor Prime A/E Firm
(457 mm)
varies

18" Copy
size
(457 mm) VA Office of Construction & Facilities Managment
varies

24"(609 mm) 4” x 6” Posts

Depth & type

of footing determined
by existing soil conditions

ELEVATION END VIEW

12/2012 Page 11-4-32

 SP-24.03 Specialty Signs
Construction Sign: Rendering
Size
Sign Panel:

1829 mm H x 2438 mm W

4' H x 8' W

Description
Sign used at construction sites to
provide visual information specific
to the “Department of Veterans
Affairs” project under construction.

Message Configuration
Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions.

Sign Components
Posts (metal or wood) and framed
MDO plywood or aluminum sign
panel.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl or screened
graphics

Colors
For background, type and graphic
colors, refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Post mounted framed sign panel

Installation
It is recommended that this sign
be placed at the entry to the
construction site or along site
perimeter at a major street.

12/2012 Page 11-4-33

 SP-24.03 Specialty Signs
Construction Sign: Rendering

2” x 4” framing

4” x 6” Posts

PLAN VIEW Face

6"
(152 mm)

96"
(2438 mm)

CL
All visible surfaces
to be primed and painted
12"
(304 mm)
8" (203 mm) Department of Veterans Affairs Logo Sign attached together
with wood screws & lag bolts

36"
(914 mm) Face panel to be an exterior grade.
Project image here MDO sheet or an aluminum skin
48"
(1218 mm)
laminated to a wood or plastic core is
preferred with edges physically sealed.

48"(1218 mm)

4” x 6” Posts

Depth & type

of footing determined
by existing soil conditions

ELEVATION END VIEW

12/2012 Page 11-4-34

 SP-24.04
Specialty Signs
Construction Sign: Safety

Size
Sign Panel:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
3' H x 4' W

Description
Sign used in construction sights
to provide information regarding
frequency of on site construction
related accidents. Sign panel
is built with a region to display
changeable numbers to indicate the This Project Has Worked 0 0 0 Days
number of days since time was lost
due to a construction accident. Without a Lost Time Accident
THE LIFE YOU SAVE MAY BE YOUR OWN
Message Configuration
Refer to message layout drawing General Contactors Firm Name
for dimensions.

Sign Components
Posts (metal or wood) and MDO
plywood or aluminium sign panel.
Sign panel may or may not be
framed. Sign panel is equipped
with a region to display changeable
numbers.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl or screened
graphics

Colors
For background, type and graphic
colors, refer to color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting
Post mounted sign panel

Installation
It is recommended that this sign
be placed at a visible location on a
construction site near field office.

12/2012 Page 11-4-35

 SP-24.04
Specialty Signs
Construction Sign: Safety

2” x 4” framing

4” x 4” Posts

PLAN VIEW Face

4"
48"
(101 mm)
(1219 mm)

CL
All visible surfaces
4" (101 mm) to be primed and painted
Sign attached together
9" (228 mm) with wood screws & lag bolts
36" (914 mm)
1-1/2" (38 mm) Changeable Numbers
3/4" (19 mm)
1-1/2" (38 mm)

Face panel to be an exterior grade.

MDO sheet or an aluminum skin
laminated to a wood or plastic core is
preferred with edges physically sealed.
36" (914 mm)

4” x 4” Posts

Depth & type

of footing determined
by existing soil conditions

ELEVATION END VIEW

12/2012 Page 11-4-36

 Specialty Signs

Photoluminescent exit & Directional Signs

Description
Photoluminescent products are
often used as egress marking
systems to provide building
occupants with a continuous
pathway delineation for egress
under all emergency conditions.
Such markings, can address
certain deficiencies in the
traditional approach of energy
lighting associated with power
failure or smoke obscuration of
high-mounted lighting.

Photoluminescent exit markinigs

absorb light rays as it stores energy.
Upon removal of the light source,
the stored light is released, providing
highly visible surface

Photoluminescent wayfinding system

Apply
appear as a cost-effective addition
low on wall
to, or even a potential replacement
for, traditional emergency lighting.
Advantages are no additional
consumption of energy, no additional
wiring, minimal maintenance, and
complete reliability when installed
appropriately.

Photoluminescent egress path

markings inside staircases are now
detailed in the 2012 NFPA 101­
Life Safety Code and 2009 NFPA
5000-Building Construction and
Safety Code
Graphic Process
Applied decals

Colors
Colors are typically Green or Yellow

Installation

It is recommended that this

be applied to:
•All doors entering a stairwell
•Obstacles in a stairwell
•Markings on each stair
•Markings on the leading edge of all
landings
•Markings around the frame of final
exit doors
•Along walls leading to the exit path

12/2012 rev 04/01/2017 Page 11-4-37

 Installation Specialty Signs

Size
Correct placement of signs will 51 mm (2")
usually mean that fewer signs
are required. Too many signs can
create a cluttered appearance and
increase the difficulty for a viewer to Sign Type
IN-22.01
find the particular information they
are seeking.

Detail 1
Installation detail sign type
SP-22.01
Detail: 1
Detail 2
Installation detail sign type
SP-22.02 / SP-22.03

Detail 3
Installation detail sign type 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2")
Align
SP-22.05
Align
51mm (2")
Detail 4

1600 mm (63")
Installation detail sign type
SP-22.06

Detail 5
Installation detail sign type
SP-22.09

Detail 6 Detail: 2 Detail: 3

Installation detail sign type
SP-23.01

Detail 7 CL CL
Installation detail sign type
SP-22.08 2˝
1E243 SOILED UTILIT Y

CL 1524 mm
(60˝)

Detail: 4 Detail: 5

76 mm (3˝)

CL
3048 mm (10'-0")

1524 mm
minimum

(60˝)

Detail: 6 Detail: 7

12/2012 Page 11-5-1

 National
Cemetery
Signs

• Design
• Exterior Signs
• Interior Signs
• Construction
• Specifications
• Installation

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 National Cemetery Signs

Section 12:
National Cemetery Signs
• Planning 12-2-1 – 12-2-4
• Overview 12-3-1 – 12-3-7
• Exterior Signs 12-4-1 – 12-4-40
• Interior Signs 12-4-41 – 12-4-46
• Specifications 12-5-1
• Installation 12-6-1 – 12-6-13

12/2012 Page 12-0-3

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Planning National Cemetery Signs

Sign Post Family

The first step in selecting signs for
a site is selecting the sign family
or look. The sign type illustrations
included in this section illustrate
the different post families and
styles. When establishing the
signage for a site, select either
metal family or precast concrete
family to provide a consistent look
through out the site. Once a post
family and style is selected, they
become the standard for all signs Post: c1 Concrete Post Family - Square Style
in the cemetery.
Concrete c1 - Pre Cast Concrete post with square detail in 5 1/2" and 7-1/2"
When selecting a sign post one with square recess
should consider choosing an
option that is reflective of the
regional aesthetic of the particular
cemetery.

The examples to the right illustrate

the standard sign posts used in
National Cemeteries.

Once Family and Style have

been established, specific sign
types can be selected. Sign
type numbers specify use, such
as Directional, Informational,
Identification, or Traffic signs. Post: c2 Concrete Post Family - Round Style
Concrete c2 - Pre Cast Concrete post with round detail in 5 1/2" and 7-1/2"
with rounded recess

Post: m1 Metal Post Family - Square Style

Square m1 - Metal post in square size. 2" x 2", 6" x 6", 8" x 8"
Metal

Post: m2 Metal Post Family - Rectangle Style

Rectangular m2 - Metal post in rectangle size. 2" x 4"
Metal

12/2012 Page 12-2-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Planning National Cemetery Signs
Design Elements
Typeface National Cemetery Prefered Typeface - Optima Bold
The preferred typefaces for the
National Cemetery System are
Optima Bold and Times Roman
Bold. Helvetica Bold is the standard
typeface for the VA sign program
and can be used throughout the
sign program.

Signs identifying permanent National Cemetery Prefered Typeface - Times Roman Bold
rooms shall be ABA compliant, to
accommodate the visually impaired.
ABA compliant signs must have
tactile letters in all caps with
accompanying Grade 2 Braille.

All non-ABA signs are to maintain

an upper and lower case (Initial
Caps) format.
VA Building Standard - Helvetica Bold
National Cemetery projects may
use Optima Bold or Times Roman
Bold for dimensional letters on
entry and columbarium walls.

VA Second Language - Helvetica Regular

Signs with fit issues - Helvetica Bold Condensed

Arrows
Illustrations show the prescribed
arrow for use in the sign program.

Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position 5

1/3" Cap Height

Arrow Alignment with Text
The arrow is always positioned in
such a manner that it is centered
EQ.

Text Line
in relationship to the capital letter
that it precedes. The arrow size is
1.5 x

one and one half 1 1/2) times the

capital letter height.
EQ.

12/2012 Page 12-2-3

 Planning National Cemetery Signs
Design Elements
Seal
The Seal is for use on the main
entry wall. The seal shall be bas
relief in cast bronze only.

Refer to VA Technical Information

Library on the VA web site for
more information on the seal. All
seals must conform to master art
work which is available from the
Department of Veterans Affairs.

Exterior Sign Background Colors

Color
Background color of sign panels:
Type
bronze/dark brown, dark green or Color # Color Description Matthews #
black unless noted otherwise. Color
Concrete color: Natural or other Cast Bronze MP07458 White
integrally colored concrete as
selected on a case by case basis.
Wells Fargo Black MP26309 White
Traffic sign colors will comply with
U.S. Department of Transportation
(DOT) Standard Highway Signs Gaeta Olive MP15178 White
Copy color: Reflective white, equal
to engineering grade 3M Scotchlite

NOTE: Color samples are for

representational purposes only.
The actual paint colors may vary Cast Bronze MP07458 White
drastically from the corresponding
swatches shown in this document.
Colors will appear differently when
Ship Yard Grey MP12416 White
viewed on different computer
monitors and/or printed from Trendy Grey Metallic MP30896 White
different printers. For a true color
sample, it is best to obtain a paint
sample of the desired color from a
vendor.

B1 Dark Brown Anodized MP20190 White

B2 Handicapped Blue MP15085 White

B3 Red (OSHA) MP55153 White

B4 VA Blue MP09144 White

B7 White MP32071 Black

B8 Yellow (OSHA) MP55391 Black

12/2012 Page 12-2-4

 Overview National Cemetery Signs

This section of the VA Signage Design Guide provides guidelines for the types of
signs required to properly sign a National Cemetery.

The following Overview illustrates the various types of signs in this section. The
individual pages on each sign type provide more specific information and detailed
layouts.

National Cemetery Sign Designations

Each sign in the program guide has been given a specific sign type number des-
ignation. This designation provides a common description that can be referenced
when programming a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign
type designations are derived.

NC - 07.01 A - m1
NC Designates a National Cemetery sign.
07 Two digit numbers identify a particular sign type.
.01 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific
sign size within the sign type.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version

and/or layout for graphics.

m1 The letter and number designates the post family and

style.
c1 denotes concrete family with square insert style
c2 denotes concrete family with round insert style
m1 denotes metal family with square style
m2 denotes metal family with rectangle style

12/2012 Page 12-3-1

 Overview National Cemetery Signs

NC-01.01 VISITOR INFORMATION

Visitor Information/Regulations
We welcome you to these hallowed grounds. To preserve the dignity, beauty and serenity of the
cemetery, we ask you to observe our cemetery restrictions. Thank you for your cooperation.

The following activities are prohibited:

Any form of sports or recreation, include, but not limited to jogging bicycling skating and picnicking.
Public gathering of a partisan nature.

Medium
Littering of grounds.
Cutting, breaking of injuring trees, shrubs, grass or other plantings.
Allowing pets to run loose.
Boisterous actions

CEMETERY HOURS

Daily 8 am - 5 pm
Memorial Day 8 am - 7 pm

A - Layout Information
Floral Regulations Floral Regulations
Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
Metal temporary containers are available. Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
Metal temporary containers are available.
Floral items will be removed from graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.
Floral items will be removed from graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.
Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October
Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October

Planting will not be permitted on graves at any time. Potted plants will be permitted on
Graves only during the period 10 days before and 10 days after Easter Sunday and Planting will not be permitted on graves at any time. Potted plants will be permitted on
Graves only during the period 10 days before and 10 days after Easter Sunday and
Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during
season and will be removed not later than January 20 of each year. Grave floral blankets Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during
maynot be larger in size than two by three feet. season and will be removed not later than January 20 of each year. Grave floral blankets
maynot be larger in size than two by three feet.
During the lawn mowing and ground maintenance season, all floral items will be removed
from graves on and of each month. During the lawn mowing and ground maintenance season, all floral items will be removed
from graves on and of each month.
Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items
are not permitted on graves at any time. Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items
are not permitted on graves at any time.
Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones or markers.
Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones or markers.
Floral Regulations
Please contact Cemetery Director for information regarding installation of a permanent Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
Please contact Cemetery Director for information regarding installation of a permanent
Metal temporary containers are available.
Floral items will be removed from graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.
Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October

Planting will not be permitted on graves at any time. Potted plants will be permitted on
Graves only during the period 10 days before and 10 days after Easter Sunday and

Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during

season and will be removed not later than January 20 of each year. Grave floral blankets
maynot be larger in size than two by three feet.
During the lawn mowing and ground maintenance season, all floral items will be removed
from graves on and of each month.
Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items
are not permitted on graves at any time.
Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones or markers.
Please contact Cemetery Director for information regarding installation of a permanent

NC-01.01-m1&m2 NC-01.01-c1&c2 B - Layout Floral

2' x 3' panel x 3'-6" tall 2' x 3' panel 3'-6" tall Regulations
Metal post Concrete post

NC-01.02
Visitor Information/Regulations
Large

NC-01.02-m1&m2 NC-01.02-c1&c2
2'-6" x 4' panel x 3'-6" tall 2'-6" x 4' panel x 3'-6" tall
Metal post Concrete post

NC-01.03 Authorized

Small double post

Authorized Authorized
Vehicles Vehicles Vehicles
Only Only Only

NC-01.13
Small single post

NC-01.03-m1&m2 NC-01.03-c1&c2 NC-01.13-c1&c2

1'-6" x 1'-6" panel x 3'-6" tall 5/2” posts 71/2 “ post
1'-6" x 1'-6" panel x 3'-6" tall 1'-6" x 1'-6" panel x 3'-6" tall

12/2012 Page 12-3-2

 Overview National Cemetery Signs

NC-02.01
Horizontal Orientation Map

324
T132
324

407
411
407
411
Tau

510
510

Here 322
409
Here 322
409
MAP MAP

You
You

Are
Are
ER ER
OLD OLD

T130

321
321

408
Tau

408

410

406
410

406

323
EH

323
EH
P LAC P LAC

505
505
NC-02.01- m1&m2 NC-02.01- c1&c2
3' x 4' panel x 5'-0" tall 3' x 4' panel x 5'-0" tall
Metal post Concrete post

NC-02.02
Vertical Orientation Map 505 505

510 510

MAP MAP
DER DER
HOL Tau
Tau
CE410 HOL T132
T130
CE410
PLA PLA
411 411

408 409 408 409

406 407 406 407

You You
323 Are 324 323 Are 324
321 Here 322 321 Here 322

NC-02.02 - m1&m2 NC-02.02 - c1&c2

4' x 3' panel x 5'-0" tall 4' x 3' panel x 5'-0" tall
Metal post Concrete post

NC-03.01
Traffic Regulatory
Post and single panel Left

NC-03.02
Traffic Regulatory
Single post and panel
NC-03.01A-m1&m2 NC-03.01A-c1&c2 NC-03.02A-c1&c2

NC-03.09
Traffic Regulatory
Tall Single 2” x 2” post

NC-03.09-m1

12/2012 Page 12-3-3

 Overview National Cemetery Signs

C-04.01
Post and panel
One line of text

NC-04.01-m1&m2 NC-04.01-c1&c2

NC-04.02
Post and panel
Two lines of text

NC-04.02-m1&m2 NC-04.02-c1&c2

NC-04.03
Post and panel
Three lines of text

NC-04.03-m1&m2 NC-04.03-c1&c2

NC-06.01
Pylon Street marker
4'-0" tall

NC-06.01-m2 NC-06.01-c1&c2

12/2012 Page 12-3-4

 Overview National Cemetery Signs

NC-06.02
Lincoln Drive Lincoln Drive
Street marker
4’ Flag type

NC-06.03
Street marker
6’ Flag type

NC-06.02-A-m1 NC-06.02-A-c1&c2 NC-06.03-A-m2 NC-06.03-A-c1&c2

NC-07.01
Pylon section marker

NC-07.02
Water Spigot instructions

NC-07.03 DO
NOT
DRINK
DO
NOT
DRINK

66
Standard Granite Section Marker

NC-07.01-m2 NC-07.01-c1&c2 NC-07.02-A-m1 NC-07.02-A-c1&c2 NC-07.03

NC-08.01
Wall Mount Informational sign
Floral Regulations
Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
Metal temporary containers are available.
Floral items will be removed from graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.
Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October
10 through April 15.
Plantings will not be permitted on graves at any time. Potted plants will be permitted on Floral Regulations
graves only during the period 10 days before and 10 days after Easter Sunday and
Memorial Day. Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during the Christmas Metal temporary containers are available.
season and will be removed not later than January 20 of each year. Grave floral blankets Floral items will be removed from graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.
maynot be larger in size than two by three feet.
Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October
During the lawn mowing and ground maintenance season, all floral items will be removed 10 through April 15.
from graves on and of each month.
Plantings will not be permitted on graves at any time. Potted plants will be permitted on
Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items graves only during the period 10 days before and 10 days after Easter Sunday and
are not permitted on graves at any time. Memorial Day.
Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones or markers. Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during the Christmas
season and will be removed not later than January 20 of each year. Grave floral blankets
Please contact Cemetery Director for information regarding installation of a permanent
maynot be larger in size than two by three feet.
flower container.
During the lawn mowing and ground maintenance season, all floral items will be removed
from graves on and of each month.
Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items
are not permitted on graves at any time.
Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones or markers.
Please contact Cemetery Director for information regarding installation of a permanent
flower container.

A - Layout
Floral
Regulations

NC-08.01

12/2012 Page 12-3-5

 Overview National Cemetery Signs

NC-09.01
Incised letter 8" 1"
1/2" 3/4"

NC-0902
ABC ABC

12"
ABC

10"
Incised letter 10"

8"
8" Letter 10" Letter 12" High Letter
NC-09.03 1 1/2" Deep 2" Deep 2 1/2" Deep
Incised letter 12"
NC-09.03 NC-09.04 NC-09.05

NC-10.01 2" 2 1/2/"

1 1/2"
Dimentional letter 8"

NC-10.02
ABC ABC

12"
ABC
10"
8"

Dimentional letter 10" 8" Letter 10" Letter 12" High Letter
1 1/2" Deep 2" Deep 2 1/2" Deep
NC-10.03
Dimentional letter 12" NC-10.01 NC-10.02 NC-10.03

NC-11.01
24"diameter cast bronze seal
bas relief
2' Dia Seal
1" Deep

NC-11.01

12/2012 Page 12-3-6

 Overview National Cemetery Signs

NC-14.01
Primary Room identification

NC-14.01

NC-15.01-3
ADA/ABA compliant
Restroom identification

MEN WOMEN
women
RESTROOM
MEN RESTROOM

NC-15.01 NC-15.02 NC-15.03

NC-15.04-6
Restroom identification

MEN WOMEN RESTROOM

MEN WOMEN RESTROOM

NC-15.04 NC-15.05 NC-15.06

NC-16.01
Information sign NO THIS IS A
Gravesite SMOKING SMOKE-FREE
NC-16.02 FACILITY
Gravesite Locator sign
Locator
NC-16.03-4 INFORMATION
No Smoking signs
NC-16.01 NC-16.02 NC-16.03 NC-16.04

NC-16.05
Caution Flammable AUTHORIZED
Material warning PERSONNEL
ONLY
NC-16.06 CAUTION
High Voltage warning FLAMMABLE CAUTION
MATERIAL HIGH VOLTAGE
NC-16.07
Authorized Personnel NC-16.05 NC-16.06 NC-16.07
Only sign

12/2012 Page 12-3-7

This page is intentionally left blank.
 NC-01.01 National Cemetery Signs
Information / Regulations
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 1016 mm W
(2' 0" H x 3' 4" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1067 mm (3'-6")
VISITOR INFORMATION

Description
We welcome you to these hallowed grounds. To preserve the dignity, beauty and serenity of the
cemetery, we ask you to observe our cemetery restrictions. Thank you for your cooperation.

The following activities are prohibited:

Any form of sports or recreation, include, but not limited to jogging bicycling skating and
picnicking.

National Cemetery non-illuminated, Public gathering of a partisan nature.

Littering of grounds.
Cutting, breaking of injuring trees, shrubs, grass or other plantings.

post and panel. Informative sign

Allowing pets to run loose.
Boisterous actions

CEMETERY HOURS

with visitor instructions and hours.

Daily 8 am - 5 pm
Memorial Day 8 am - 7 pm

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

be adjusted to the volume of
information presented. Smaller
fonts than shown should not be
used because the messages will
be unreadable. Larger fonts than
shown will result in messages that
may not fit on the sign.
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Graphic Process
VISITOR INFORMATION Floral Regulations
Surface applied vinyl Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
We welcome you to these hallowed grounds. To preserve the dignity, beauty and serenity of the Temporary flower containers are available.
cemetery, we ask you to observe our cemetery restrictions. Thank you for your cooperation.

Colors
Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October through March.
The following activities are prohibited:
Any form of sports or recreation, including, but not limited to jogging, bicycling, skating, and Plantings will not be permitted on graves at any times.
Text: White picnicking.
Plotted plants will be permitted on graves only during the period ten days before and ten days
Public gathering of a partisan nature.
Background: refer to color chart.
after both Easter and Memorial Day.
Littering of grounds.
Floral items will be removed form graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.
Post: refer to color chart. Cutting, breaking of injuring trees, shrubs, grass or other plantings.
Allowing pets to run loose.
Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during the Christmas season and
will be removed not later than January 20. Grave floral blankets may not be larger than two feet
Boisterous actions by three feet.

Recommendations CEMETERY HOURS Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones and markers.

Position sign to provide viewers Daily

Memorial Day
8 am - 5 pm
8 am - 7 pm
Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items are not
permitted on graves at any time.

with a clear, unobstructed view of During the mowing season, all floral items will be removed from the graves every two weeks.

the sign.

Metal Post and Panel Precast Concrete Post and Panel

NC-01.01-m1&m2 NC-01.01-c1&c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-1

 NC-01.01 National Cemetery Signs
Information / Regulations

140 mm (5 1/2”)
51 mm (2”)
140 mm
(5 1/2”)
101 mm (4”)

1016 mm
25 mm (1”) 1016 mm (3’-0”)
(3’-0”)
51 mm 51 mm (2”)
(2”)

610 mm 610 mm
(2’-0”) (2’-0”)

1067 mm
(3’-6”)
1067 mm
(3’-6”)
9"

Metal Post Sign Post and Panel Precast Concrete Post and Panel

28 mm (1 1/2”)

1" 1 1/2"
VISITOR INFORMATION
1 1/2"
5/8" We welcome you to these hallowed grounds. To preserve the dignity, beauty and serenity of the
1/2" cemetery, we ask you to observe our cemetery restrictions. Thank you for your cooperation.
5/8"
1 1/2"
The following activities are prohibited:
5/8" Any form of sports or recreation, include, but not limited to jogging, bicycling, skating and
picnicking.
Public gathering of a partisan nature.
Littering of grounds.
Cutting, breaking of injuring trees, shrubs, grass or other plantings.
Allowing pets to run loose.
Boisterous actions.

CEMETERY HOURS

Daily 8 am - 5 pm
Memorial Day 8 am - 7 pm

Message Layout A

28 mm (1 1/2”)

1 1/2"
1"
1 1/2" Floral Regulations
5/8"
1/2" Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
5/8" Temporary flower containers are available.
1 1/2"
Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October through March.
5/8"
Plantings will not be permitted on graves at any times.

Plotted plants will be permitted on graves only during the period of ten days before and ten days
after both Easter and Memorial Day.

Floral items will be removed from graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.

Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during the Christmas season and
will be removed not later than January 20. Grave floral blankets may not be larger than two feet
by three feet.

Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones and markers.

Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items are not
permitted on graves at any time.

During the mowing season, all floral items will be removed from the graves very two weeks.

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 12-4-2

 NC-01.02 National Cemetery Signs
Information / Regulations
Size
Sign Face:
677 mm H x 1016 mm W
(2' 6" H x 4' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1067 mm (3' 6")
VISITOR INFORMATION
We welcome you to these hallowed grounds. To preserve the dignity, beauty and serenity of the

Description
cemetery, we ask you to observe our cemetery restrictions. Thank you for your cooperation.

The following activities are prohibited:

Any form of sports or recreation, include, but not limited to jogging bicycling skating and

National Cemetery non-illuminated, picnicking.

Public gathering of a partisan nature.

post and panel informative sign

Littering of grounds.
Cutting, breaking of injuring trees, shrubs, grass or other plantings.
Allowing pets to run loose.

with visitor instructions and hours Boisterous actions

CEMETERY HOURS

Daily 8 am - 5 pm
Memorial Day 8 am - 7 pm

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

be adjusted to the volume of
information being presented.
Smaller fonts than shown should
not be used because the messages
will be unreadable. Larger fonts
than shown will result in messages
that may not fit on the sign.
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl Floral Regulations
VISITOR INFORMATION
Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
Colors
We welcome you to these hallowed grounds. To preserve the dignity, beauty and serenity of the Temporary flower containers are available.
cemetery, we ask you to observe our cemetery restrictions. Thank you for your cooperation.
Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October through March.
Text: White The following activities are prohibited:
Any form of sports or recreation, include, but not limited to jogging bicycling skating and Plantings will not be permitted on graves at any times.
Background: refer to color chart. picnicking.
Public gathering of a partisan nature.
Plotted plants will be permitted on graves only during the period ten days before and ten days
after both Easter and Memorial Day.
Post: refer to color chart. Littering of grounds.
Floral items will be removed form graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.
Cutting, breaking of injuring trees, shrubs, grass or other plantings.
Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during the Christmas season and
Allowing pets to run loose.
Recommendations
will be removed not later than January 20. Grave floral blankets may not be larger than two feet
Boisterous actions by three feet.

Position sign to provide viewers CEMETERY HOURS Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones and markers.

with a clear, unobstructed view of

Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items are not
Daily 8 am - 5 pm permitted on graves at any time.
Memorial Day 8 am - 7 pm
the sign. During the mowing season, all floral items will be removed form the graves every two weeks.

Metal Post & Panel Precast Concrete Post & Panel

NC-01.02-m1&m2 NC-01.02-c1&c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-3

 NC-01.02 National Cemetery Signs
Information / Regulations

51 mm (2”) 140 mm (5 1/2”)

140 mm
101 mm (4”)
(5 1/2”)

1016mm 1016 mm
(4’-0”) 25 mm (1”)
(4’-0”)
51 mm 51 mm (2”)
(2”)

762 mm 762 mm
(2’-6”) (2’-6”)

1067 mm
1067 mm (3’-6”)
(3’-6”)
9"

Metal Post Sign Post and Panel Precast Concrete Post and Panel

28 mm (1 1/8”)

1 3/4" 1 3/4"
VISITOR INFORMATION
2 1/4"
1 1/4" We welcome you to these hallowed grounds. To preserve the dignity, beauty and serenity of the
3/4" cemetery, we ask you to observe our cemetery restrictions. Thank you for your cooperation.
1 1/4"
2 1/4"
The following activities are prohibited:
1 1/4" Any form of sports or recreation, include, but not limited to jogging, bicycling, skating and
picnicking.
Public gathering of a partisan nature.
Littering of grounds.
Cutting, breaking of injuring trees, shrubs, grass or other plantings.
Allowing pets to run loose.
Boisterous actions.

CEMETERY HOURS

Daily 8 am - 5 pm
Memorial Day 8 am - 7 pm

Message Layout A

28 mm (1 1/8”)

1 3/4" 1 3/4"
Floral Regulations
2 1/4"
1 1/4" Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
3/4" Temporary flower containers are available.
1 1/4"
2 1/4" Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October through March.
1 1/4"
Plantings will not be permitted on graves at any times.

Plotted plants will be permitted on graves only during the period of ten days before and ten days
after both Easter and Memorial Day.

Floral items will be removed from graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.

Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during the Christmas season and
will be removed not later than January 20. Grave floral blankets may not be larger than two feet
by three feet.

Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones and markers.

Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items are not
permitted on graves at any time.

During the mowing season, all floral items will be removed from the graves every two weeks.

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 12-4-4

 NC-01.03 National Cemetery Signs
Information / Regulations
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 457 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 6" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1067 mm (3' 6")

Description
National Cemetery non-illuminated,
post and panel informative sign
with visitor instructions.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

be adjusted to the volume of
information being presented.
Smaller fonts than shown should
not be used because the messages
will be unreadable. Larger fonts
than shown will result in messages
that may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl Message Layout A Message Layout B

Colors
Text: White Authorized All
Background: refer to color chart.
Vehicles
Post: refer to color chart.
Only Funerals
Recommendations
Position sign to provide viewers
with a clear, unobstructed view of
Wait Here
the sign.

Message Layout C Message Layout D Message Layout E

Park Cortege

2
Only On
Pavement

Metal Post & Panel Precast Concrete Post

NC-01.03-m1&m2 NC-01.03-c3

12/2012 Page 12-4-5

 NC-01.03 National Cemetery Signs
Information / Regulations

51 mm (2”)

51 mm (2")
7 1/2"
51 mm (2”)
7 1/2"
8 mm (3 1/4")

457 mm (1’-6”) 457 mm

1" (1’-6”)
2" 2"

457 mm 1’-6”"
457 mm
(1’-6”)
1067 mm 1067 mm
(3’-6”) (3’-6”)

6"

CL
51mm (2”)

44 mm (1 3/4") 51 mm (2 ”)
44 mm (1 3/4")
51 mm (2”)
44 mm (1 3/4")

44 mm (1 3/4") 44 mm
(1 3/4”)

5 1/2"

Message Layout A Message Layout B and C

CL

51 mm
(2 ”)
2 1/8" 3"
51 mm
(2 ”)
5 1/8"

1 1/8" 7”
3/8"

Message Layout D Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 12-4-6

 NC-02.01 National Cemetery Signs
Horizontal You Are Here Map
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1524 mm (5' 0")

MAP

324
T132

407
411
Description

510

Here 322
409
ER
O LD

You
Are
Horizontal non-illuminated
CE H

T130
PL A

321
408
410

406

323
cemetery orientation map “You Are
Here" sign with map and messages

505
directed specifically to pedestrians.
Position to provide pedestrians with
an unobstructed view of the sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Map art is custom to each site

and should be made as large as
possible on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl for
text. Map is surface silk-screened
or large format “printer/plotter” print
on vinyl with UV resistant ink and
clear UV resistant overcoat.

Colors
Text: White and necessary colors to Message Layout A
create map
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: refer to color chart.
Map to be
Recommendations Inserted Here
Use this type of sign for maps that 324
T132

are to be viewed by pedestrians.

407
411
510

Here 322
409

Use North arrow, entry and

AP
special features for orienting.
RM
You
Are

DE
HOL
The campus map should be
CE
T130

321

simple showing streets, burial

408

PL A
410

406

323

sections with numbering of

sections, columbarium walls,
courts, buildings streets and
505

memorial walkway. Labeling shows

features such as assembly area
large memorials. Map should be
positioned and oriented in the
direction that is being viewed.

12/2012 Page 12-4-7

 NC-02.01 National Cemetery Signs
Horizontal You Are Here Map

AREA FOR MAP OF

CEMETERY SITE PLAN

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 12-4-8

 NC-02.02 National Cemetery Signs
Vertical You Are Here Map
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm W x 1219 mm H
(3' 0" W x 4' 0" H)

Overall Sign Height:

1830 mm (6' 0") 322 You 321
324 Are 323
Here

PL
Description 406

AC
407

Vertical, non-illuminated cemetery 409

408

E
410
orientation sign, “You Are Here”
411

HO
T132 T130

map and messages directed

LD
specifically to pedestrians. Position

ER
510
to provide pedestrians with an

MA
unobstructed view of the sign.
505

P
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Map art is custom to each site

and should be made as large as
possible on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl for
text. Map is surface silkscreened or
large format “printer/plotter” print on
vinyl with UV resistant ink and clear
UV resistant overcoat.

Colors
Text: White and necessary colors to
create map Message Layout A
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: refer to color chart.

Recommendations
Use this type of sign for maps that
322 You 321
are to be viewed by pedestrians.
324 Are 323
Use North arrow, entry and Here
PL

special features for orienting.

The campus map should be
406
AC

407
simple showing streets, burial Map to be
408
409
sections with numbering of Inserted Here
E

sections, columbarium walls,

411 410
HO

courts, buildings streets and T132 T130

memorial walkway. Labeling shows
LD

features such as assembly area

large memorials. Map should be
ER

positioned and oriented in the

510
direction that is being viewed.
MA

505
P

12/2012 Page 12-4-9

 NC-02.02 National Cemetery Signs
Vertical You Are Here Map

813

AREA FOR
MAP OF CEMETERY 1118
SITE PLAN

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 12-4-10

 NC-03.01-.08 National Cemetery Signs
Low Profile Traffic Regulatory
Size
Sign Face: 7 1/2"
457 mm H x 457 mm W 5 1/2"
(1' 6" H x 1’ 6” W)

Overall Sign Height:

1067 mm (3' 6")

Description
National Cemetery post and panel
traffic regulatory sign

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

be adjusted to the volume of
information being presented. Metal Precast Concrete Precast Concrete
Smaller fonts than shown should Post & Panel Sign Post & Panel Post & Panel
not be used because the messages NC-03.01-A-m1&m2 NC-03.01-A-c1&c2 NC-03.02-A-c1&c2
will be unreadable. Larger fonts
than shown will result in messages
that may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: refer to color chart.

Recommendations
Position sign to provide viewers Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C
with a clear, unobstructed view of
the sign.
Speed Limit

15
Message Layout D Message Layout E Message Layout F

Authorized No Park
Vehicles
Only Parking Only On
Pavement
Message Layout G Message Layout H Message Layout J

Parking Only
Message Layout K

12/2012 Page 12-4-11

 NC-03.01 National Cemetery Signs
Low Profile Traffic Regulatory

51 mm (2")
7 1/2"
51 mm 5 1/2"
101mm (4") (2")

457 mm (1'-6")
457 mm (1'-6") 457 mm (1'-6")
EQ. EQ.
EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.
51 mm (2")
51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 5 1/2"

EQ. EQ. EQ.

304mm 457 mm 304mm 304mm
457 mm (12”) (1'-6") (12”) 457 mm (12”)
(1'-6") (1'-6")
EQ.
EQ. 1066 mm EQ.
1066 mm 1066 mm
(3'-6") (3'-6") (3'-6")

Metal Precast Concrete Precast Concrete

Post & Panel Sign Post & Panel Post & Panel
NC-03.01-A-m1&m2 NC-03.01-A-c1&c2 NC-03.02-A-c1&c2

457 mm (1'-6") 457 mm (1'-6") 457 mm (1'-6")

EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.
304 mm (1'-0")

EQ. 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2")

76 mm (3 ") 76 mm (3 ")
38 mm (1.5") 38 mm (1.5")
457 mm 76 mm (3 ") 76 mm (3 ")
(1'-6")
51 mm (2") 51 mm (2")
114 mm
76 mm (3 ")
(4 1/2"arrow)
127 mm
EQ.
( 6’ symbol)
Message Layout A. B Message Layout C, D, E,H Message Layout G

457 mm (1'-6") 457 mm (1'-6") 457 mm (1'-6")

EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.

51 mm (2") 38 mm (1.5") 38 mm (1.5")

76 mm (3")
76 mm (3 ")
76 mm (3")
38 mm (1.5") 241 mm (9.5")
76 mm (3 ") 165 mm (6 .5 ")
51 mm (2")
57 mm (2.25")
76 mm (3 ")
57 mm (2.25")

Message Layout J Message Layout F Message Layout K

12/2012 Page 12-4-12

 NC-03.09 National Cemetery Signs
Traffic Regulatory - Tall
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 6" H x 12" W)

NC-03.09
Overall Sign Height:
2590 mm (8' 6")

Description
National Cemetery non-illuminated,
post sign identifying accessible
parking and pathways

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl

Colors
Text: White
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: refer to color chart.

Recommendations
Position sign to provide viewers
with a clear, unobstructed view
of the sign. ABA/ADA regulations
require bottom of sign be at 7'-0"
from grade.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

Parking Van
Only Accessible

Message Layout C

Accessible
Route

12/2012 Page 12-4-13

 NC-03.09 National Cemetery Signs
Traffic Regulatory - Tall

Handicapped
1'-0" Parking Stall
Sign

1'-6"
7'-0"

NC03.08 UBC

1'-0"
Eased corner

5 1/2"
10"
1'-6"

2"

2"

Message Layout A & B Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 12-4-14

 NC-04.01 National Cemetery Signs
Post and Panel: One Line of Text
Size
Sign Face:
203 mm H x 914 mm W
(8" H x 3' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1067 mm (3' 6")
Memorial Path
Description
National Cemetery non-illuminated,
post and panel directional sign with
messages with one line of text. The
sign can also be used to identify
buildings.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

be adjusted to the volume of
information being presented.
Smaller fonts than shown should Message Layout A Message Layout C
not be used because the messages
will be unreadable. Larger fonts
than shown will result in messages
Restrooms Committal Shelter
that may not fit on the sign.
Message Layout B
Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl Committal Shelter Memorial Pathway
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart.
Post: Refer to color chart. Exit Office
Recommendations
Position sign to provide pedestrians
with a clear, unobstructed view of
the sign. Administration

Metal Post & Panel Sign Precast Concrete Post & Panel
NC-04.01-A-m1&m2 NC-04.01-A-c1&c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-15

 NC-04.01 National Cemetery Signs
Post and Panel: One Line of Text

51 mm (2”)
51 mm (2”)

140 mm (5 1/2”)
51 mm (2”)
140 mm
(5 1/2”)
101 mm (4”)

914 mm (3’-0”) 25 mm (1”) 914 mm (3’-0”)

51 mm (2”) 51 mm (2”)

203 mm 203 mm
(8”) (8”)

1067 mm (3’-6”) 1067 mm (3’-6”)

Metal Post Sign Post & Panel Precast Concrete Post & Panel

70 mm (2 3/4”)
44 mm (1 3/4") 38 mm (1 1/2")
61 mm (2 3/8")
EQ.
EQ. 95 mm 203 mm
64 mm (2 1/2") (8")
(3 3/4")
EQ.
EQ.
Message Layout A

70 mm (2 3/4”)
44 mm (1 3/4") 38 mm (1 1/2")

EQ.
64 mm (2 1/2")
EQ.

Message Layout B

61 mm (2 3/8")

EQ.
64 mm (2 1/2")
EQ.

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 12-4-16

 NC-04.02 National Cemetery Signs
Post and Panel: Two Lines of Text
Size
Sign Face:
305 mm H x 914 mm W
(1' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1067 mm (3' 6")

Description Office
National Cemetery non-illuminated,
post and panel directional sign All Funerals
with messages with two lines of
text. The sign can also be used to
identify buildings.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).
Scale: 3/8” = 1’ 0”

Message size and layout should

be adjusted to the volume of
information being presented.
Smaller fonts than shown should
not be used because the messages
will be unreadable. Larger fonts
than shown will result in messages
that may not fit on the sign. Message Layout A

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl
Burial Sections:
Colors
Text: White
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: refer to color chart.
1-4 5 -10
Recommendations
Position sign to provide pedestrians
with a clear, unobstructed view of Message Layout B
the sign.

Office
All Funerals

Metal Post & Panel Precast Concrete Post & Panel

NC-04.02-m1&m2 NC-04.02-c1&c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-17

 NC-04.02 National Cemetery Signs
Post and Panel: Two Lines of Text

51 mm (2”)
51 mm
(2”)

140 mm (5 1/2”)
51 mm (2”)
140 mm
(5 1/2”)
101 mm (4”)

914 mm (3’-0”) 25 mm (1”) 914 mm (3’-0”)

51 mm (2”) 51 mm (2”)

305 mm 305 mm
(12”) (12”)

1067mm
1067 mm (3’-6”) (3’-6”)

Metal Post Sign Post & Panel Precast Concrete Post & Panel

152 mm (6")

44 mm (1 3/4")

64 mm (2 1/2")

64 mm (2 1/2")

70 mm (2 3/4")

38 mm (1 1/2") 44 mm (1 3/4")
38 mm (1 1/2") 51 mm (2")
51 mm (2") 38 mm (1 1/2")

Message Layout A

152 mm (6")

38 mm (1 1/2") 44 mm (1 3/4")
70 mm (2 3/4") 64 mm (2 1/2")

61 mm (2 3/8") 89 mm (3 1/2")

70 mm (2 3/4") 64 mm (2 1/2")
38 mm (1 1/2") 44 mm (1 3/4")

38 mm (1 1/2")
51 mm (2")

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 12-4-18

 NC-04.03 National Cemetery Signs
Post and Panel: Three lines of Text
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 914 mm W
(1' 6" H x 3' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1067 mm (3' 6")

Description
National Cemetery non-illuminated,
post and panel directional sign with
messages in three lines of text.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Message size and layout should

be adjusted to the volume of
information being presented.
Smaller fonts than shown should
not be used because the messages
will be unreadable. Larger fonts
than shown will result in messages
that may not fit on the sign. Message Layout A

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart.
Post: Refer to color chart.

Recommendations
Position sign to provide vehicles
and pedestrians with a clear,
unobstructed view of the sign.
Message Layout B

Office
Restrooms
Committal Shelter

Metal Post & Panel Precast Concrete Post & Panel

NC-04.03-m1 &m2 NC-04.03-c1 & c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-19

 NC-04.03 National Cemetery Signs
Post and Panel: Three Lines of Text

51 mm (2”)

51 mm (2”) 140 mm (5 1/2”)

51 mm (2”)
140 mm
(5 1/2”)
101 mm (4”)

914 mm (3’-0”) 25 mm (1”) 914 mm (3’-0”)

51 mm (2”) 51 mm (2”)

457 mm
(1-6”) 457 mm
(1’-6”)

1067 mm 1067 mm
(3’-6”) (3’-6”)

Metal Post & Panel Precast Concrete Post & Panel

152 mm (6")

38 mm (1 1/2") 44 mm (1 3/4")
70 mm (2 3/4") 64 mm (2 1/2")

61 mm (2 3/8") 89 mm (3 1/2")
89 mm
70 mm (2 3/4") 64 mm (2 1/2")
CL

(3 1/2")

61 mm (2 3/8") 89 mm (3 1/2")

70 mm (2 3/4") 64 mm (2 1/2")
38 mm (1 1/2") 44 mm (1 3/4")

38 mm (1 1/2")
51 mm (2")

Message Layout A & B

12/2012 Page 12-4-20

 NC-06.01 National Cemetery Signs
Pylon Street Sign
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 95 mm W
(3' 0" H x 3 3/4" W)

Metal Post:
4' 0" H x 6" W x 6" D

Concrete Post:
4' 0" H x 7 1/2" W x 7 1/2" D

Main Street
Overall Sign Height:
1219 mm (4' 0")

Description
National Cemetery non-illuminated,
Street post with messages directed
specifically to vehicles.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

fit in small text area. Smaller fonts
than shown should not be used
because the messages will be
unreadable. A long text line may not
fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl.
Adams Street

Adams Street

Colors

Adams Street
Text: White
Background: refer to color chart
Post: refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign to provide vehicles
and pedestrians with a clear,
unobstructed view of the sign.

Metal post Concrete post Concrete post

NC-06.01-m1 NC-06.01-c1 NC-06.01-c2
(6" x 6" Metal Post) (7 1/2" x 7 1/2" Concrete Post) (7 1/2" x 7 1/2" Concrete Post)

12/2012 Page 12-4-21

 NC-06.01 National Cemetery Signs
Pylon Street Sign

152 mm (6")

95 mm
(3 3/4")
EQ. EQ.

64 mm
(2 1/2")

1219 mm (4’-0”)

927mm
(36 1/2")

Message Layout A

190 mm 190 mm
(7 1/2") (7 1/2")

(4") (4")
opening opening
EQ. EQ. EQ. EQ.

95 mm 3 3/4” panel 3 3/4” panel

(3")
95 mm
Text height (3")
1219 mm (4’-0”) Text height
63 mm 63 mm
(2 1/2") (2 1/2")

1219 mm (4’-0”)

22 mm
(9")

C1 Square Text Layout B C2 Round Text Layout B

12/2012 Page 12-4-22

 NC-06.02 National Cemetery Signs
Flag Type Street Sign
Size
Sign Face:
152 mm H x Various Widths
(6" H x Various Widths)

Overall Sign Height:

1219 mm (4' 0")

Description
National Cemetery non-illuminated,
post and flag panel street
Lincoln Drive
identification sign with messages
directed specifically at vehicles and
pedestrians. The sign may also be
used to identify buildings.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Street name will determine panel

size. Smaller fonts than shown
should not be used because the
messages will be unreadable.
Larger fonts than shown will result
in messages that may not fit on the
sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl

Colors
Text: White
Background: refer to color chart. Message Layout A Message Layout C
Post: refer to color chart.

Recommendations Stonewall Jackson Drive Lincoln Drive

Position sign to provide vehicles
and pedestrians with a clear,
unobstructed view of the sign.

Message Layout B

Washington Drive

NC-06.02-A-m1 NC-06.02-A-c1&c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-23

 NC-06.02 National Cemetery Signs
Flag Type Street Sign

138 mm
102 mm (4")
(5 1/2")

610 mm (2') 138 mm

102 mm (4")
(5 1/2")

51 mm (2") 254 mm
152 mm (6") 152 mm (6") (10")
51 mm (2")

1219 mm
(4'-0")
965 mm
(3'-2")

Metal Post Concrete Post

914 mm (3'-0")
76 mm (3")

152 mm EQ.
(6") 51 mm (2")
EQ.

Message Layout A

762 mm (2'-6")
76 mm (3")

EQ.
152 mm 51 mm
(6") (2") EQ.

Message Layout B

610 mm (2'-0")
76 mm (3")

EQ.
152 mm 51 mm
(6") (2") EQ.

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 12-4-24

 NC-06.03 National Cemetery Signs
Tall Flag Street Sign

Size
Sign Face:
152 mm H x Various Widths
(6" H x Various Widths)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0")

Description
National Cemetery non-illuminated, Lincoln Drive
post and flag panel street
identification sign with messages
directed specifically at vehicles.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Street name will determine panel

size. Smaller fonts than shown
should not be used because the
messages will be unreadable.
Larger fonts than shown will result
in messages that may not fit on the
sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl

Colors
Text: White
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: refer to color chart.

Recommendations
Position sign to provide vehicles
with a clear, unobstructed view of Message Layout A Message Layout C
the sign.
Stonewall Jackson Drive Lincoln Drive

Message Layout B

Washington Drive

NC-06.03-A-m1 NC-06.03-A-c1&c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-25

 NC-06.03 National Cemetery Signs
Tall Flag Street Sign

102 mm (4")

610 mm (2')
102 mm (4")
51 mm (2")

152 mm
10"
(6")

1829 mm (6'-0") 1829 mm

2'-0"
(6'-0")
Precast
Concrete

3'-2"

Metal Post Precast Concrete Post

914 mm (3'-0")
76 mm (3")

152 mm EQ.
(6") 51 mm (2")
EQ.

Message Layout A

762 mm (2'-6")
76 mm (3")

EQ.
152 mm 51 mm
(6") (2") EQ.

Message Layout B

610 mm (2'-0")
76 mm (3")

EQ.
152 mm 51 mm
(6") (2") EQ.

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 12-4-26

 NC-07.01 National Cemetery Signs
Pylon Section Marker
Size
Overall Sign Height:
407 mm (1' 4")

Sign Face:
203 mm (8" square metal post) or,
190 mm (7 1/2" Square concrete
post with metal panel / insert)

Description
National Cemetery non-illuminated,
pylon sign with messages directed
specifically at pedestrians.

Message Configuration 66
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Markers can present a maximum of

three characters on a side. Smaller
fonts than shown should not be
used because the messages will
be unreadable. Larger fonts than
shown will result in messages or
text that may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl

Colors
Text: White
66 456 A34
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: Refer to color chart.

Recommendations
Position sign to provide vehicles
and pedestrians with a clear,
unobstructed view of the sign. Layout A Layout B Layout C

Metal Post (8" Square)

NC-07.01-A-m1

Graphic
Required
All Four Sides

59 59
Layout D Layout D
Square edge Round edge
panel panel

Precast Concrete Post

(7 1/2" Square)
NC-07.01-A-c1&c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-27

 NC-07.01 National Cemetery Signs
Pylon Section Marker

203 mm (8")

7 1/2"
203 mm
(8 ") 7 1/2"

1"
2"

407 mm 7”
407 mm
(1’-4”)
(1’-4”)
6"

Metal Post Precast Concrete Post

EQ. EQ.

67 mm (2 5/8")
92 mm (3 5/8")

Message Layout A, B & C

7 1/2"

Graphic
Required
7 1/2" All Four Sides

3 3/4"
Wide
plaque
4" opening
3 3/4" 63 mm
Wide (2 1/2") 63 mm Radius to match
panel (2 1/2") inset off set

7" 76 mm
76 mm (3")
7"
(3")
Layout D Layout D
Square edge Round edge
panel panel

Precast Concrete Post

(7 1/2" Square)
NC-07.01-A-c1&c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-28

 NC-07.02 National Cemetery Signs
Faucet Post with Sign Panel
Size
Overall Sign Height:
711 mm (2' 4")

Sign Face:
203 mm (8" square metal post) or,
190 mm (7 1/2" Square concrete
post with metal panel insert)

Description
National Cemetery non-illuminated,
pylon sign with messages directed
specifically at pedestrians.
DO
NOT
These posts contain the faucet DRINK

for public use to obtain water for

flowers placed in the cemetery.

The posts house the water pipe

and the faucet. The posts are never
used solely as sign posts.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl

Colors
Text: White
DO
Background: refer to color chart. NOT
Post and Panel: Refer to color DRINK

chart.

Recommendations Decal Layout C

Position sign to provide pedestrians Round
with a clear, unobstructed view of Edge panel
the sign.

Surround post with gravel opening

DO
to prevent splash from faucet. NOT
DRINK DO DO
NOT NOT
DRINK DRINK

Layout B
Square
Edge panel

Layout A Layout B &C

Metal Post (8" Square) Precast Concrete Post
NC-07.02-A-m1 (7 1/2" Square)
NC-07.02-A-c1&c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-29

 NC-07.02 National Cemetery Signs
Faucet Post with Sign Panel

Decal has Clear back ground

with White text and black
EQ. EQ. Decal and red symbol
127 mm Spanish translation recommended
(5")
51 mm (2")

127 mm (5")

32 mm (1 1/4")
32 mm (1 1/4")
32 mm (1 1/4")

9.5 mm
2’-0"

DO
(3/8")
711 mm (2'-4")

NOT
DRINK
Message Layout A

7 1/2"

4 1/4" 4 1/4"
4" 4"
3 3/4"
3 3/4"
5" 5" 1 1/4"
1 1/4"
3"
3"
3/4"
3/4" DO
DO NOT 3/4"
NOT
3/4" DRINK
DRINK 1'-3 3/4"
1'-4" 1'-3 3/4" 1'-4"
2'-4" 2'-4"

2’-0"

Layout B Layout C
6"
Square Round
Edge panel Edge Panel

Layout B Layout C
Precast Concrete Post Precast Concrete Post
(7 1/2" Square) (7 1/2" Round)
NC-07.02-B-c1 NC-07.02-C-c2

12/2012 Page 12-4-30

 NC-07.03 National Cemetery Signs
Standard Granite Section Marker
Size
Overall Sign Dimensions:
H: 607 m (2' 0")
W:152 mm (6")
D: 152 mm (6")

Sign Face:
203 mm x 152 mm (8" x 6")

Description
National Cemetery granite section
marker.
C
Honed smooth inscription face, all
SE
36
other surfaces to be smooth saw-
cut finish.

All corners and edges including

2” below ground level shall be
rounded to 3/8” radius.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Graphic Process
“SEC” shall be engraved letters; 1
1/2” ht., 3/15” depth, 3/16” stems
& bars; text for section ID numbers Ground
shall be as shown on plan, Level
approved by the VA & be engraved
2” ht., 3/16” depth, 3/8” stems &
bars.

Recommendations
Position sign to provide pedestrians
with a clear, unobstructed view of
the sign.

12/2012 Page 12-4-31

 NC-07.03 National Cemetery Signs
Standard Granite Section Marker

2”

61

8”
/2”
/2”
11

21
C

/4”
SE
7”
2”

36
2’-0”

Ground
Level
2”
2’-0”

6”
6”

12/2012 Page 12-4-32

 NC-08.01 National Cemetery Signs
Wall Sign - Small
Size
305 mm H x 457 mm W
(12" H x 18" W)

Description and Use

This sign has applied graphics and
is informational.
Floral Regulations
Message Configuration
Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering Metal temporary containers are available.
sizes and dimensions) Floral items will be removed from graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.
Layout A
Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October
10 through April 15.
Sign Components Plantings will not be permitted on graves at any time. Potted plants will be permitted on
Vary by sign system. graves only during the period 10 days before and 10 days after Easter Sunday and
Memorial Day.
Graphic Process Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during the Christmas
season and will be removed not later than January 20 of each year. Grave floral blankets
Applied graphics may not be larger in size than two by three feet.
During the lawn mowing and ground maintenance season, all floral items will be removed
Colors from graves on and of each month.
Text: refer to color chart. Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items
Background: refer to color chart. are not permitted on graves at any time.
Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones or markers.
Typography and Size Please contact Cemetery Director for information regarding installation of a permanent
Helvetica Bold flower container.

Mounting
Double sided foam tape, silastic
adhesive or screw.
NC-08.01
Installation
Secure to wall 60” above floor. A- Layout Floral Regulations

NOTE: Text to be verified at time of

project / need.

Floral Regulations
Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
Metal temporary containers are available.
Floral items will be removed from graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.
Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October
10 through April 15.
Plantings will not be permitted on graves at any time. Potted plants will be permitted on
graves only during the period 10 days before and 10 days after Easter Sunday and
Memorial Day.
Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during the Christmas
season and will be removed not later than January 20 of each year. Grave floral blankets
maynot be larger in size than two by three feet.
During the lawn mowing and ground maintenance season, all floral items will be removed
from graves on and of each month.
Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items
are not permitted on graves at any time.
Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones or markers.
Please contact Cemetery Director for information regarding installation of a permanent
flower container.
1524 mm (60")

Wall mounted

12/2012 Page 12-4-33

 NC-08.01 National Cemetery Signs
Wall Sign - Small

457 mm (18")

14 mm (3/4")

1/2" 3/4"
Floral Regulations
3/4"
5/16" Fresh cut flowers may be placed on graves at any time.
1/2" Metal temporary containers are available.
5/16"
3/4" Floral items will be removed from graves as soon as they become faded and unsightly.
5/16" Artificial flowers may be placed on graves only during the period of October
10 through April 15.
Plantings will not be permitted on graves at any time. Potted plants will be permitted on
graves only during the period 10 days before and 10 days after Easter Sunday and
Memorial Day.
305 mm (12") Christmas wreaths or grave blankets are permitted on graves during the Christmas
season and will be removed not later than January 20 of each year. Grave floral blankets
may not be larger in size than two by three feet.
During the lawn mowing and ground maintenance season, all floral items will be removed
from graves on and of each month.
Statues, vigil lights, breakable objects of any nature, and similar commemorative items
are not permitted on graves at any time.
Floral items and other types of decorations will not be secured to headstones or markers.
Please contact Cemetery Director for information regarding installation of a permanent
flower container.

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 12-4-34

 NC-09.01 National Cemetery Signs
Incised Letters
Size
NC-09.01: 203 mm H x 13 mm D
(8" H x 1/2" D)

NC-09.02: 254 mm H x 51 mm
(10" H x 2"-0” D)

NC-09.03: 305 mm H x 25 mm D
(12" H x 1" D)

Description
ABC
NC-09.01
ABC
NC-09.02
ABC
NC-09.03
8" Letter 10" Letter
Incised letters cast into wall. 12" High Letter
1/2" Deep 3/4" Deep
1" Deep
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions) National Cemetery
can be one or two lines depending
on wall size. Design and fabrication
of entry wall by others.

Typography
Times New Roman Regular

Colors
Refer to color chart.

Recommendations
Position sign to provide vehicles
and pedestrians with a clear,
unobstructed view of the sign.
When used on Lithichrome, incised
letter size may be considered on a
project specific basis.

12/2012 Page 12-4-35

 NC-10.01 National Cemetery Signs
Incised Letters

1/2"

8"
8” Letter
1/2” Deep
NC-09.01

3/4"

10"
10” Letter
3/4 “ Deep
NC-09.02

12" 1"

12 “ High Letter
1” Deep
NC-09.03

Letter incised angle can vary.

90˚ to 5% draft angle determined
by letters size & material

12/2012 Page 12-4-36

 NC-10.01-.03 National Cemetery Signs
Dimensional Letters
Size
NC10.01: 203 mm H x 38 mm D
(8" H x 1 1/2" D)

ABC ABC
NC10.02: 254 mm H x 51 mm D

ABC
(10" H x 2" D)

NC10.03: 305 mm H x 64mm D

(12" H x 2.5" D)
NC-10.01 NC-10.02 NC-10.03
Description 8" Letter 10" Letter 12" High Letter
Cast metal dimensional letters. 1 1/2" Deep 2" Deep 2 1/2" Deep
Surface mounted, tight to wall.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions). National Cemetery
may be one or two lines depending
on wall size. Design and fabrication
of entry wall by others.

Typography
Times New Roman Regular

Colors
Refer to color chart.
Florida
Recommendations National Cemetery
Position sign to provide vehicles
and pedestrians with a clear,
unobstructed view of the sign.
Scale: 3/8” = 1’ 0”

Dimensional Letters

12/2012 Page 12-4-37

 NC-10.01 National Cemetery Signs
Dimensional Letters/Seal

1 1/2"

8"
NC-10.01

8" Letter
1 1/2" Deep

2"

10"
NC-10.02
10" Letter
2" Deep

2 1/2"
12"

NC-10.03

12" High Letter

2 1/2" Deep

12/2012 Page 12-4-38

 NC-11.01 National Cemetery Signs
Dimensional Seal
Size
NC-11.01: Diameter varies as
needed for entry wall x 25 mm (1”)
deep for small diameter plaques
and 38 mm (1 1/2") for large
diameter plaques.

Description
Cast metal seal inset or applied to
entry wall.

Colors
Refer to specifications for bronze.
2' Diameter Seal
Recommendations 1" Deep
Position sign to provide vehicles
and pedestrians with a clear,
unobstructed view of the sign.

VA Seal

Standard size used on entry wall is 2'-0" dia.

Sizes up to 4'-0" dia. may be considered on project specific basis.
Bas relief (not flat relief) cast in bronze. Only use VA approved artwork and bronze
specifications.

12/2012 Page 12-4-39

 NC-11.01 National Cemetery Signs
Dimensional Seal

1"

24"

2' Diameter Seal

2' Diameter Seal
1" Deep
1" Deep

12/2012 Page 12-4-40

 NC-14.01 National Cemetery Signs
Primary Room Identification
Size
152 mm H x 152 mm W
(6" H x 6" W)

Description and Use

This sign must always be tactile ADMINISTRATION
and Braille. Use this sign to identify
the occupant or activity within a
OFFICE
Admin Office
room.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)
Layout A is suggested for
department identification. Layout
B for rooms and departments with
long words or names. Layout C for
rooms with a common name but
are in need of specific identification.

Sign Components Message Layout A

Vary by sign system.

Graphic Process ADMINISTRATION MULTIPURPOSE

Tactile raised text and Braille OFFICE ROOM
Admin Office Multipurpose room

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background: refer to color chart.

Typography and Size

ADA/ABA compliant
Helvetica Bold, Upper Case
Grade 2 Braille Message Layout B

Mounting OFFICE
CEMETERY
C
Double sided foam tape, silastic
adhesive or screw DIRECTOR
Cemetery Directior
Office C

Installation
Knob side of door, 1524 mm (60")
to top of sign and 51 mm (2") over
from door frame.

Message Layout C

CEMETERY CEMETERY
DIRECTOR PERSONNEL
OFFICE ONLY
Cemetery Directior c emetery personnel

51 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 12-4-41

 NC-14.01 National Cemetery Signs
Primary Room Identification

(6”)
152 mm

(6”)
152 mm

Message Layout A

(6”) (6”)
152 mm 152 mm

(6”) (6”)
152 mm 152 mm

Message Layout B Message Layout C

51 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

1524 mm (5’-0”)

12/2012 Page 12-4-42

 NC-15.01-06 National Cemetery Signs
Restroom Identification
Size
203 mm H x 152 mm W
(8" H x 6" W)

Description and Use

Use these signs to inform with a
symbol as well as text.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions).

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Tactile symbol and text with MEN
accompanying Braille is required MEN

Colors
Text: refer to color chart.
Background and accent bar: refer
to color chart.

Typography and Size

ADA/ABA compliant
Helvetica Bold, Upper Case
Grade 2 Braille

Mounting
Double sided foam tape or silastic
adhesive
MEN
MEN WOMEN RESTROOM
Installation MEN
MEN WOMEN MEN
restroom

On wall or door 1524 mm (60") to

top of sign and on door, center. NC-15.01 NC-15.02 NC-15.03

Recommendations
These signs are for use at
restrooms

MEN
MEN WOMEN MEN
RESTROOM
MEN
restroom
MEN
MEN WOMEN

NC-15.04 NC-15.05 NC-15.06

51 mm (2")
1524 mm (5'-0")

Wall mounted

12/2012 Page 12-4-43

 NC-15.01-06 National Cemetery Signs
Restroom Identification

1/32"
152 mm Raised
(6") Icon
& text

152 mm (6”) sq
icon area

ICON
203 mm
(8")

19 mm (3/4")
9.5 mm (3/8") TEXT
6.3 mm (1/4") MEN
Braille
12 mm (1/2")
Domed
Braille

51 mm (2") 50
1524 mm (5'-0")

1254

12/2012 Page 12-4-44

 NC-16.01-07 National Cemetery Signs
Pictogram and Symbol Signs
Size
152 mm H x 152 mm W
(6" H x 6" W)

Description and Use

Use these signs to inform with a
symbol as well as text.

Message Configuration
(Refer to layout drawing for lettering
sizes and dimensions)

Sign Components
Acrylic plaque

Graphic Process
Silk-screened or surface applied
INFORMATION
vinyl

Colors
Background &Text: refer to Interior NC-16.01
color chart.

Typography
Helvetica Bold

Mounting NO THIS IS A
Double sided foam tape or silastic
Gravesite SMOKING SMOKE-FREE
adhesive FACILITY
Locator
Installation
On wall or door 1524 mm (60") to
top of sign and centered on door.

Recommendations NC-16.02 NC-16.03 NC-16.04

These signs are for use when a
symbol will help communicate.

AUTHORIZED
PERSONNEL
ONLY
CAUTION
FLAMMABLE CAUTION
MATERIAL HIGH VOLTAGE

NC-16.05 NC-16.06 NC-16.07

51 mm (2")
CL
1524 mm (5'-0")

1524 mm (5'-0")

1524 mm (5'-0")

Door mounted Wall mounted

12/2012 Page 12-4-45

 NC-16.01-7 National Cemetery Signs
Pictogram and Symbol Signs

152 mm (6")

104 mm (4”) sq ICON

152 mm
icon area
(6")

9.5 mm (3/8")
16 mm (5/8") TEXT

NC-16.01

152 mm (6") 152 mm (6")

16 mm (5/8")
50 mm (2")
19 mm (3/4") TEXT
152 mm 152 mm
(6") 19 mm (3/4") TEXT (6") 19 mm (3/4") TEXT
19 mm (3/4") TEXT 9.5 mm (3/8")

70 mm (2 3/4")

NC-16.02 NC-16.03

152 mm (6") 152 mm (6")

16 mm (5/8") 16 mm (5/8")
16 mm (5/8") TEXT
152 mm 152 mm 70 mm
(6") 16 mm (5/8") TEXT (6") (2 3/4")
16 mm (5/8") TEXT
9.5 mm (3/8") 19 mm (3/4") TEXT
50 mm (2") 7 mm (1/4") TEXT
12mm (1/2")
TEXT

NC-16.04 NC-16.07 NC-16.05

51 mm (2")
CL
1524 mm (5'-0")

1524 mm (5'-0")

1524 mm (5'-0")

1524 mm (5'-0") 1524 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 12-4-46

 Specifications National Cemetery Signs

The specifications for signs are available in the Master Construction Specifications
(PG-18-1) area of the VA Technical Information Library which is available on the VA
web site under Office of Construction & Facilities Management.

www.cfm.va.gov/til/

Refer to Signage in the specifications, Division 10, Section 10 14 00.

For more information regarding specifications, contact the Office of Construction &
Facilities Management, Facility Standards Service.

12/2012 Page 12-5-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Installation National Cemetery Signs

The installation of exterior signs throughout a cemetery requires coordination of

several criteria and objectives. Careful consideration should be given to the follow-
ing in the development of coordinated sign program. These elements help establish
the basis of a clear sign program:

• Character and configuration of the roadway system.

• Desired path of travel on the roadway system for visitors, staff, and deliveries.
• Location of buildings on the cemetery in relation to roads, parking, and
walkways.
• Location of building entrances.
• Inclement weather, such as wind, rain, or snow.
• Utilities and landscaping.
• Placement of signs in locations where people are expecting them to be.
Visibility Exterior signs communicate to both drivers and pedestrians and their placements
must be planned considering the intended viewer. Sign visibility to the user is a
principal objective, which is the basis of correct sign placement.

Reability Signs that are to be read from a moving car must to be installed in locations that
provide for clear readability without obstructions. Equally important is that the instal-
lation of signs must consider the potential effects on drivers. Signs with too much
information or too small font size can cause a driver to stop, or slow, creating a traf-
fic hazard.

Coordination Coordination must consider irrigation systems, landscaping and underground

utilities.

Climate Each site has different climate conditions which effect an exterior sign program.
Wind load on signs affects the footing requirements. Considerations for snowfall and
frost line will have an affect upon post length and footing depth.

Footings Within the installation section of the Guide, general information provides assistance
in determining the size and type of footing for various signs. For site identification
signs, structural engineering may be required to confirm the footing size for a sign
in a specific condition at a particular location. Monument signs should have their
bases designed by a structural engineer to ensure the signs can withstand wind
loads at a particular location.

Mounting Sign mounting methods have been standardized to create visual uniformity for all
signs placed around a facility. Mounting heights and locations have been deter-
mined for ease of reading and conformance to ADA/ABA requirements.

There are two principal methods of mounting signs. These are:

• Ground Mounted: Placing a sign panel on one or more posts fixed in the
ground.
• Wall Mounted: Placing a sign on a vertical surface such as a wall, fence, or on
a door.

12/2012 Page 12-6-1

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 1
Precast Concrete Double Post and
Panel

Size
Post size:
140 mm (5 1/2" square double PLAN - Sign Panel Finish both sides
post). Height to vary as needed

Description and Use

Post support for sign Painted 1” sq. aluminum
frame sign panel secure with
Sign Components Precast concrete post
adhesive.
Use with 1" square framed sign chamfer top reinforced bar stock Round or square inset
panels. 5 1/2" precast inset detail. Square or corners. Post to have
1/8" round top. Recessed inset on light sand blast finish
three sides only, positioned 2”
Colors down from chamfer edge and 9”

2" 1"
Precast concrete off grade.

Installation
In ground installation in accordance
with local jurisdiction guidelines
2'-0"
2'-6"
3'-6 "

Precast concrete collar

9"

ELEVATION - Precast Concrete Post & Panel

Precast concrete post with

3 - #3 rebar equally
5 1/2" spaced. Light sand blast.
1" chamfer at top of post
1" 5/8" 2 1/4"
1/8" thick aluminum sign
panel weld to frame
1/8"
paint all exposed surfaces
Reveal
color (TBD) satin finish
5 1/2"

3/16" dia. Minimum

3" Stainless steel bolt
and shield

1" x 1" aluminum tube

11 gauge with mitered
corners. Weld and grind
smooth paint all exposed
surfaces to match sign panel

12/2012 Page 12-6-2

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 2
Precast Concrete Single Post and
Panel

Size
Sign Post size 190 mm (7 1/2"
square). Height to vary as needed.

Description and Use

Post support for sign PLAN - Double Sign Panel
Colors
Precast concrete

Installation 7 1/2" Precast Concrete post

chamfer top reinforced with 3 #3
In ground installation in accordance bar stock
with local jurisdiction guidelines

2" 1"
Break corner, 1/8" radius
no sharp edges

Painted 1" sq. aluminum

frame sign panel
1'-6"
3'- 6 "

2"

Pre cast inset detail.

Square or round top recessed
detail positioned 2" down from
chamfer edge and 6" off grade.
11”

Precast concrete collar

6"

ELEVATION - Precast Concrete Single Post

1" chamfer top and edges

7 1/2"
3/4" Precast concrete post with
1" 4 1/4"
3 - #3 rebar equally
spaced. Light sand blast
1" chamfer at top of post
1"

1/8" thick aluminum sign

panel weld to frame
paint all exposed surfaces
color (TBD) satin finish
7 1/2"

1" x 1" aluminum tube

11 gauge with mitered
corners. Weld and grind
smooth paint all exposed
surfaces to match sign panel

3/16" dia. x 2" Minimum

3" stainless steel bolt
and shield

12/2012 Page 12-6-3

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 3 Painted Aluminum panel with

Precast Concrete Street Sign Tall reflective white vinyl text 2" height
Post
Various lengths, 2'-0" typical
Size
Sign Post size 140 mm
(5 1/2") square 6'-0" height

6"

2"
Description and Use 3/4"
Post support for street sign CL

Colors
Precast concrete
Provide 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" painted
Installation aluminum cover plate.
In ground installation in accordance
with local jurisdiction guidelines
1/8" thk painted aluminum sign panel
attach to aluminum tube with stainless steel
bolts paint all exposed surfaces satin finish.

5 1/2"

Various sizes
10"

6"
2"

2" x 2" Aluminum sign post

2'-0"

embedded into concrete post

6'-0"

2 " 1"

Precast Concrete with

light Sand blast finish

Recess on 4 Sides
3'-2"

Precast Concrete Collar

9"

Street
Sign Post
NC-15.10

12/2012 Page 12-6-4

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 4
DRILL (3) - 1 1/2” [38mm]
Bronze VA Seal
ROUND HOLES. MOUNT SEAL ON
Size SOLID MASONRY OR CONCRETE.
size 609 mm (2') diameter ANCHOR WITH NON-SHRINK MORTAR.

Description and Use 3/8” [10mm] THREADED

Identifies National Cemetery as a BRONZE STUDS, SCREW
US Government Facility ANCHOR INTO SOLID METAL PORTION
BOLTS AT BACK OF SEAL.
Sign Components
Used with dimensional or Incised
letters
FIN. WALL
Material CONCRETE OR
The plaque shall be cast of a lead SOLID
free tin bronze, such as C90300 MASONRY
(Navy “G” Bronze) or similar alloy
approved by VA.

Bas relief casting based on VA

Drawing, shall be of uniform quality
and condition, free from injurious
blow holes and porosity, cracks and RAISED
other defects and not warped or Back EDGE OF LETTERS
distorted, well finished, free from ELEVATION SEAL
burrs, sharp edges, scratches and
defects that may affect appearance SECTION @ FASTENER
or service ability. Casting shall
not be repaired, plugged, welded
or burned. Finish to be detailed,
hand chased for true alignment,
filed, belt polished, sides ground
GENERAL NOTES:
smooth, raised surfaces and
borders to be polished and buffed 1. SEALS LOCATION SHOULD BE TAKEN
to a bright satin finish, background FROM CONTRACT DRAWINGS.
textures to be reverse medium
pebble background, fine pebble 2. 2’-0” DIA.
background, moss as cast. Bronze UNLESS OTHERWISE DETERMINED
to be chemically oxidized to a
statuary medium color and finish
3. MATERIAL IS CAST BRONZE.
with one coat of clear protective
exterior metal lacquer. Fasteners
to be corrosion resistant metal 4. DETAIL OF ANCHORAGE MUST BE PROVIDED
compatible with material or casting BY A/E FOR ANCHORAGE IN ANY MATERIAL
Front OTHER THAN SOLID MASONRY OR CONCRETE.
ELEVATION

12/2012 Page 12-6-5

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 5
Precast Post and Panel

Sign is precast concrete post of

required height and width either 5-
1/2" square or 7 1/2" square. 1" sq.
framed panel either double sided
or single sided depending on the
sign type. Precast collar is used to
create mow base.

Detail 6
Metal Post and Panel sign

Sign is constructed with a non-

illuminated sign cabinet mounted
to extruded aluminum posts with
an adjustable reveal between the
posts and the cabinet.

The sign cabinet extrusion should

have the capability to hold the sign
faces and allow for the removal and
replacement of faces without total
sign disassembly or abandonment
of the sign. en
cy
tra
nc
gy e

12/2012 Page 12-6-6

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 7
Precast Street sign

Aluminum sign panel mounted to a

square aluminum post with tamper
proof mechanical fasteners. Set in
to precast concrete post.

Sign panels have the corners

eased with a 6 mm (1/4") radius.
The post shall have a permanent
top cap.

Detail 8
Single Post and Panel sign

Aluminum sign panel mounted to a

square aluminum post with tamper
proof mechanical fasteners.

Sign panels have the corners

eased with a 6 mm (1/4") radius.
The top of the post shall be closed
with a permanently applied top cap.

12/2012 Page 12-6-7

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

The installation of exterior signs throughout a cemetery requires coordination of

several criteria and objectives. Careful consideration should be given to the follow-
ing in the development of coordinated sign program. These elements help establish
the basis of a clear sign program:
• Character and configuration of the roadway system.
• Desired path of travel on the roadway system for visitors, staff, and deliveries.
• Location of buildings on the cemetery in relation to roads, parking, and
walkways.
• Location of building entrances.
• Inclement weather, such as wind, rain, or snow.
• Utilities and landscaping.
• Placement of signs in locations where people are expecting them to be.
Visibility Exterior signs communicate to both drivers and pedestrians and their placements
must be planned considering the intended viewer. Sign visibility to the user is a
principal objective, which is the basis of correct sign placement.

Reability Signs that are to be read from a moving car must to be installed in locations that
provide for clear readability without obstructions. Equally important is that the instal-
lation of signs must consider the potential effects on drivers. Signs with too much
information or too small font size can cause a driver to stop, or slow, creating a traf-
fic hazard.

Coordination Coordination must consider irrigation systems, landscaping and underground

utilities.

Climate Each site has different climate conditions which effect an exterior sign program.
Wind load on signs affects the footing requirements. Considerations for snowfall and
frost line will have an affect upon post length and footing depth.

Footings Within the installation section of the Guide, general information provides assistance
in determining the size and type of footing for various signs. For site identification
signs, structural engineering may be required to confirm the footing size for a sign
in a specific condition at a particular location. Monument signs should have their
bases designed by a structural engineer to ensure the signs can withstand wind
loads at a particular location.

Mounting Sign mounting methods have been standardized to create visual uniformity for all
signs placed around a facility. Mounting heights and locations have been deter-
mined for ease of reading and conformance to ADA/ABA requirements.

There are two principal methods of mounting signs. These are:

• Ground Mounted: Placing a sign panel on one or more posts fixed in the
ground.
• Wall Mounted: Placing a sign on a vertical surface such as a wall, fence, or on
a door. Each type of sign utilizes a mounting method appropriate to the viewing
requirements.
During the course of installation, always ensure the signs are positioned with a
clear line-of-sight from the viewing point to the sign face.

Planning A sign program, that works well, is one that has been planned as an integrated
whole. From the main identification sign, to visitor information, directional signs,
burial section markers, street signs and building identification, all components must
be considered and their “place” within the wayfinding system. Proper placement as
well as consistent design, consistent and appropriate messages are all part of a
well-planned signage program.
12/2012 Page 12-6-8
 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 8
600 mm
Placement:
(2'-0") Min.
Ground Mounted Signs

All signs should be located a

minimum of 607 mm (2'-0") from a
curb. The exact location of a sign
will differ depending on the type of
sign and site conditions.

Sign placement must be carefully

considered to ensure the sign
fits the location without major
regrading. It may be necessary to
clear some landscaping or remove
an obstruction.

When ground mounted signs on

two posts are placed on sloping
or inclined grades, adjustments Back of Curb
must be made to the post lengths.
Extreme differences between post
lengths should be minimized.
607 mm
(2'-0") Min.

Back of Curb

1219 mm (4'-0") Max

457 mm
(1'-6") Min

12/2012 Page 12-6-9

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 9
Placement:
Sight Triangle at Intersections
and Driveways

For safety reasons, signs should

not be placed in the sight triangle
(shaded area) where they could Street Sign
obscure a driver's vision. Also,

3048 mm (10'-0")
ensure the location of a sign
does not block a driver’s vision of Section
pedestrians. Marker

Ensuring that there are no signs

in the sight triangle applies to Back of curb (B.O.C.)

2'-0"
roadway intersections as well as
driveways.
Traffic
Traffic regulatory signs such as Regulatory Sign
Stop, Yield, Street, and Pedestrian
3048 mm (10'-0")
Crossing are an exception to this
rule.
signs should not be installed
in this area except traffic Driveway
When installing signs adjust Roadway
locations for utilities, irrigation lines regulatory and street signs
and street trees. Back of curb (B.O.C.)

2'-0"

Directional Sign

2'-0"

Back of curb (B.O.C.)

12/2012 Page 12-6-10

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 10
Metal Post Footings: Style 1
In landscaped areas, footing
All footings must meet width shall be boxed so as to extend
and depth requirements to 90 mm (3 1/2") above grade with
accommodate height and size of 50 mm (2") bevel. Replace
sign, soil conditions, wind loads surrounding landscaping to
and winter ground freezing. original condition. Metal
Sign Post
Style 1
Permanent installation in
51 mm
landscaped areas: Signs installed (2")
in turf should have the raised
89 mm
concrete collar extended to cover (31/2")
the area between posts.

Style 2
Walkway installation. Location
which requires post base to be
flush with paving material.. Apply protective coating to
aluminum post in concrete
NOTE; Foundation and footings to prevent corrosion
must extend to frost line. Crushed rock footing 457 mm
Crushed Rock (1'-6") Dia. x 750 mm (2'-6") deep
to be adjusted to be larger if
required by structural
engineering wind load
calculations

Metal
Style 2
Post Support
weld to base plate

J Bolt

Concrete
Pier Footing

12/2012 Page 12-6-11

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 11
Concrete Post Footing:

All footings must meet width Style 1

and depth requirements to
accommodate height and size of In landscaped areas, footing
sign, soil conditions, wind loads, shall be boxed so as to extend
and winter ground freezing. 90 mm (3 1/2") above grade with
50 mm (2") bevel. Replace
Style 3
Permanent collar cast in place
surrounding landscaping to
installation in landscaped areas. original condition. Metal
Sign Post
Signs installed in turf to have the
raised concrete collars extended to
cover the area between the posts. 51 mm
(2")
Style 4 89 mm
Permanent installation for precast (31/2")
concrete post and collars.

Apply protective coating to

aluminum post in concrete
to prevent corrosion
Crushed rock footing 457 mm
Crushed Rock (1'-6") Dia. x 750 mm (2'-6") deep
to be adjusted to be larger if
required by structural
engineering wind load
calculations

Metal
Style 2
Post Support
weld to base plate

J Bolt

Concrete
Pier Footing

12/2012 Page 12-6-12

 Installation National Cemetery Signs

Detail 12
Mounting: Dimensional Letters

Metal letters that are installed on

an exterior wall: Letters that are
installed on all wall surfaces should 51 mm (2") Min.
be installed tight to the wall with no
spacers and additional adhesive
applied to the back of the letters.
This will increase the security of
the letters against vandalism or
Fin. Wall Concrete
theft.
Or Solid Masonry
The size and length of the studs Stud Hole
are to correlate to the size of the
letter and the depth required for Bolt to prevent removal
installation on a particular building Cast Plaque
surface. 10 mm (3/8") Threaded Stainless Or
Bronze Studs Screwed Into Solid
Plaster and stucco building Metal Portion At Back Of Seal
surfaces should have complete
adhesive sealant applied around
the stud, where it penetrates the
building, to prevent water intrusion
into the building.

Cement or Non-Shrink Mortar

Detail 13
Wall Mounting: Non-Illuminated
Signs

Aluminum wall panel signs shall

be fastened with a minimum of
4 tamper resistant mechanical
fasteners.

Anchors should be suitable for

the particular type of wall surface
where the sign is being installed.

12/2012 Page 12-6-13

 Glossary

• Definitions of Terms

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Glossary

This glossary includes some words which have established meanings in conversa-
tional English, but which have very specific meanings in the sign industry and sign
fabrication.

A A.B.A. Architectural Barriers Act. Legislation (Public Law 90-480) enacted

by the federal government in 1968 requiring that all buildings
designed, constructed, renovated or leased with federal funds meet
the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), and be acces-
sible to the public. Some departments have, as a matter of privacy,
also required compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act
Accessibility Guidelines, which otherwise DO NOT apply to the fed-
eral sector, in addition to the UFAS. VA now follows GSA and other
standard-setting agencies in replacing UFAS with the Architectural
Barriers Act Accessibility Standards (ABAAS) for Federal Facilities. In
addition, VA uses the Barrier Free Design Guide (PG-18-13) to meet
the needs of the Department of Veterans Affairs in its Healthcare
Facilities.

A.B.A.A.S. Architectural Barriers Act Accessability Standards. National stan-

dards enacted in 2006-07 to insure accessibility to federally funded
facilities for all persons in America.

Access Panel A door or panel that provides access to concealed equipment for
inspection, maintenance and repair.

Acetate A thin flexible plastic sheet that is durable and stretch-resistant. This
clear material can be used as a substrate for inserts in pocket signs.

Acid Etching A method similar to sandblasting, used primarily for marking glass
and metal. A stencil of the artwork is applied to the material, which is
then brushed with an acid mixture. After a length of time, the surface
is washed and the stencil removed.

Acrylic A generic term for plastics used in sign making. Acrylic is a specific
type of plastic characterized by clarity, as well as transparent and
opaque color ranges. It also has excellent machinability. Cast and
extruded acrylics have different qualities and tolerances.

A.D.A. Americans with Disabilities Act: Legislation enacted by the federal

government in 1990 to remove barriers that limit any individual’s
ability to function in the physical environment. ADA standards govern
the construction and alteration of places of public accomodation,
commercial facilities, and state and local government facilities. The
Department of Justice (DOJ) maintains ADA standards that apply to
all ADA facilities except transportation facilities, which are subject to
similar standards issued by the Department of Transportation (DOT).
Federal facilities are covered by standards consistent with those of
the ADA issued under a different law, the Architectural Barriers Act
(ABA). Within the five titles of the ADA, Title III pertains to signs.

A.D.A.A.G. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines:

National standards put into place in 1990 to ensure equal access
for all persons in America. The Access Board’s ADA Accessibility
Guidelines (ADAAG) serve as the minimum baseline for the ADA
standards. The guidelines and standards are very similar, but only
the standards have legal authority. However, the guidance provided
is relevant to the standards. ADAAG specifies legible letter forms,
letter heights, Braille, and tactile lettering, as well as materials and
finishes.

12/2012 Page 13-2-1

 Glossary

Advance Notice A sign used to provide an advance notice prior to a roadway, street,
Sign or building entrance. Similar to a directional sign, however, this sign
usually announces a single destination. Also called an “approach
sign”.

Aluminum Alloy A combination of the soft metal aluminum with one or more metals
such copper, manganese, silicon magnesium, or zinc to make alu-
minum harder. Aluminum alloys are graded by number from softest,
1100, to hardest, 7075. Alloy numbers 6061 and 6063 are typically
used in general construction.

Ambient Light The general level of light, direct and indirect, or background light, in a
given environment emitted by natural and/or man made sources at a
given time. Ambient light can affect the legibility of signs.

Anchor Any device that firmly secures an object in position, or firmly secures
one object to another.

Anodized Finish An electrochemical coating applied to the surface of aluminum, to

harden, protect, and enhance the beauty and durability of a metal
surface. The finish may be clear or include tints and colors.

Approach The area from where a sign first becomes visible until the sign is no
long readable as the viewer passes by.

Architectural A term that was developed in the 1960’s to identify signs, visual com-
Signage munications, and wayfinding information in the built environment.

Area of Rescue A safe location where physically challenged individuals are to wait for
assistance in case of emergency.

Art or Artwork Copy, images, graphics, and logos used in preparing a job. See also
COPY, also ELECTRONIC ART.

Ascender In a typeface, the portions of the lower case letters b, d, f, h, k,

and l that extend above the height of the lower case x. See also
DESCENDER

Aspect Ratio The relationship between an image’s horizontal length and vertical
height.

B Back Lit Sign A sign consisting of a cabinet containing a light source and one or
more translucent faces, which are illuminated for night visibility.

Baked Enamel A type of paint with a special finish. Special enamel paint is sprayed
or screen-printed on a surface, dried, and then cured with heat or
light resulting in an extremely durable surface.

Ballast A device designed to provide sufficient starting voltage for fluores-

cent lighting. The ballast may also heat the lamp electrodes and,
once the tube is in operation, limit the amount of electrical energy
passing through the lamp.

Bead Braille Small beads that are inserted into sign faces to create Braille text,
as required by ABA/ADA. These beads can be clear, plastic or metal
depending on the material into which they are inserted.

Banding In a color gradation, visibly distinct differences, or sequential pat-

terns between color levels, instead of a smooth transition of colors or
other effects. Applies to an imperfect printed, screened, airbrushed
or painted gradation.

12/2012 Page 13-2-2

 Glossary

Banner A sign made of fabric, plastic, or other flexible material which has
no enclosing framework. It may be painted, screen-printed, digitally
printed, or decorated with vinyl appliques. Typically used as a
temporary sign.

Base 1
The trim beneath the bottom molding of a sign. 2 The foundation or
support of a freestanding sign. See also FOOTING.

Blade Sign / Flag A type of projecting sign mounted perpendicular to the sign’s surface
Sign and the normal flow of traffic. These signs are typically double sided
and mounted to a building wall, façade, storefront, or pole.

Blank 1
A painted sign face without copy or graphics applied. 2 An undeco-
rated sign face with no cabinet. 3 An undecorated insert.

Blind Fasteners/ Mechanical attachment devices hidden from view that are used to
Concealed assemble a sign, attach letters, attach a signs face or mount a sign.
Fasteners Can be tamper-proof, removable, or permanent.

Blistering The end result of poor adhesion by either paint or vinyl to a sub-
strate, leaving the surface covered with bumps of various sizes and
indeterminate shapes similar to blisters on human skin.

Border Commonly a line or repetitive design used to emphasize or set apart

all or portions of a sign’s art. In electric signs, illuminated tubes or
decorative molding may serve as borders.

Braille A form of written language for the blind, in which characters are
represented by patterns of raised dots that are felt with the fingertips.
Grade 2 Braille is a type of Braille and is required by ABA/ADA, on
interior signs that identify (label) a room.

Break Away A type of sign post or footing designed to give way on impact. Used
Sign Mount on along roadways to reduce damage to automobiles in accidents.

Bronze An alloy of copper and tin with traces of other metals (zinc, nickel,
and lead), used for sculpture, sign plaques, and dimensional
letters. Letters or plaques can be cut out of solid material, can be
cast and even be fabricated from thin sheets to create dimensional
letters (fabricated and soldered). Bronze plaques and letters may
be lacquered to prevent oxidation, pre-oxidized, or left to oxidize
naturally. Finishes can be painted, oil-rubbed, clear-lacquer, polished,
brushed, etc.

Brushed Finish A non-reflective, abraded finish applied to metal surfaces for deco-
rative purposes. This process can be produced mechanically or
chemically, resulting in a texture consisting of tiny scratches which
form a visible directional pattern.

Burning In The process to bring a neon tube to its proper brilliance. This is done
by connecting the completed tube to the type of transformer which
will be used in the installation, and allowing it to remain illuminated
until proper brightness, color, and electrical properties are achieved.
Also called aging.

Burnish To polish or shine by rubbing.

Butt Joint A type of seam.

C Camera Ready Art Artwork that was once prepared for production via a photographic
process. This term is still used however it now refers to scanned and
digital imagery.

12/2012 Page 13-2-3

 Glossary

Can An informal term for a cabinet sign.

Carved Letters V-carved, U-carved, or squared-carved into wood or stone. Created

by hand-carving with chisel and mallet, sandblasting technique, or
by a computer-controlled router or engraver. Bas-relief and incised
carved letters are usually done by hand.

Carved Signs Letters or shapes incised or relieved into sign substrate surface. Can
refer to routing process.

Cast Acrylic A type of plastic sheeting formed by spreading a molten acrylic

mixture on a carrier sheet or web, then baking at high temperatures
to remove solvents and to fuse the material into a film/sheet.

Cast Dimensional Typically cast in aluminum, bronze, acrylic, or resin.

Letter or Number

Cast Metal Plaque A solid metal plaque or sculptural element. Aluminum or bronze are
typical metals used for casting.

Changeable Copy A sign in which the copy can be changed, either manually through
(message) Sign the use of attachable letters, mechanically using rotating panel
elements, or electronically using computer-controlled incandescent
bulbs, light-emitting diodes (LEDs), liquid crystal displays (LCDs), or
plasma screens.

Channel An extruded length of material, typically plastic, aluminum, or steel,

in the shape of a squared-off U.

Channel Letter A fabricated letter, with metal returns, into which a neon tube or
LEDs is placed. The depth of the channel may vary, depending on
the size of the letter, viewing angle, and type of illumination. The
channel letter may be open-faced, translucent plastic-faced, or a
reverse channel letter with halo (indirect) illumination.

Character A symbol or mark used in a writing system.

Chrome Plate An electrochemical process to plate steel, brass, or aluminum, most

commonly with a mirror chrome finish- such as automobile trim.
It can also be brushed or dulled down to create a less reflective
surface.

Cladding A facade or decorative cover added to an existing sign pole or base

after it is installed.

Clearance The distance between the lowest portion of a sign and the finished
grade level.

Component One of the parts or pieces that together make a complete sign,
system or design.

Concrete Sign A poured-in-place, precast sign made of concrete. It is the substrate

to which plaques, letters, or panels are attached, painted on, cast
into, incised into, or sandblasted into, to create an identifying device.

Condensed Font A font which has been altered by reducing the width of the let-
ters, numbers, and symbols to bring them closer together, thereby
shortening the line.

Conduit A tube of various materials for protecting electrical wiring.

12/2012 Page 13-2-4

 Glossary

Construction Site Announces a construction project credits and information regarding

Sign the type of project, architect, consultants, contractor, and others
associated with the project. Typically painted, vinyl, or digital print
mounted onto exterior-grade plywood substrate.

Contrast The use of opposing elements such as colors, forms, or the like, in
proximity to one another to produce an intensified effect. See LIGHT
REFLECTIVE VALUE (LRV)

Contract Written specifications and design drawings used to establish a con-

Documents tract and to define the deliverable sign products between two parties.

Copy Most commonly, the words or message to be displayed on a sign.

Craze Thin cracks or breaks in paint, plastic, or vinyl. The main cause of
crazing is weathering, but it may also be caused by the incompat-
ibility of paint layers or solvents.

Curing The process of effecting a chemical change in some inks and paints
by the application of heat or ultraviolet light.

Current The rate of flow, of electrical charge in a conductor. A unit of current

is typically referred to in amperes or milliamps.

Cut-Off Switch See KILL SWITCH.

Cut-Out Copy Letters that have be removed out of a sign panel via routing, laser
or water-jet methods leaving a hole in the shape of the letter form,
generally to allow light to show through.

D Deboss The process of producing depressed letters in a surface, particularly

those produced by engraving dies or plates.

Decal An applique of words, graphics, or a combination of the two, printed

on the non-adhesive side of a film, then cut to a specified shape
using a plotter or die. Decals are created when a large number of
identical pieces are required.

Delamination The separation of layers in a laminated substrate. This is usually the

result of adhesive failure.

Descender In a given typeface, the portions of the lowercase g, j, p, q, y, and in

some fonts f as well as uppercase J that extend below the baseline
of the letter. See also ASCENDER.

Design Intent Drawings that show only the size, profile, and basic relationship of
Drawings parts, but no specific details of material or construction.

Directional Sign An interior or exterior sign intended to provide directional information.

Directory A sign that contains a list of names of people, offices, or destina-

tions at a specific building, facility, or public venue. May provide text
listings or include maps, site plans, or diagrams.

Double Sided Two or more sign faces mounted on a common structure but facing
in opposite directions.

Dynamic Sign General term for any sign where the message or graphic is adjust-
able automatically through electronic or mechanical means.

E Edge The frame, or part of the sign that encloses the back and face/faces.

12/2012 Page 13-2-5

 Glossary

Edge Lighting A technique used to illuminate (by internal refraction) carved, incised,
or sandblasted lettering and images, by lighting the edge of the
transparent material. This technique is typically used with glass or
acrylic.

Egg Crate A patterned piece of plastic installed below a light source in illu-
minated awnings or light fixtures to protect the light source from
damage or direct visibility. Also used to soften and evenly distribute
the transmitted light.

Electric Sign A sign that contains electrical fixtures or connections and has some
method of illumination.

Electrode A terminal that conducts an electrical current between two conduct-

ing substances. Electrodes are found at both of the ends of a neon
unit.

Electronic Art Computer software generated artwork files (sometimes called

“camera-ready art”) used in production of signs and graphic elements.

Electronic Sign or A sign that utilizes computer-generated messages or other electric

Message Center means of changing text. Changeable message displays or signs may
use incandescent lamps, LEDs, LCDs, and other technologies.

Electrostatic Film Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sheet treated with a small charge of static
electricity enabling the sheet to temporarily, but firmly, adhere to
glass and similar smooth substrates.

Embellishments Any addition to a sign face that provides a three-dimensional effect.

Cut-outs, push-through shapes/letters, lighting strips, and clocks are
all examples of embellishments.

Embossing The process of producing raised letters, particularly those produced

by engraving dies or plates.

Engraving A method of cutting shallow, negative relief graphics or lettering into

metal, plastic, or glass utilizing a bit or graver. Engraving may be
achieved using a pantograph, or by computer-driven equipment. The
engraved area may be filled to create greater contrast.

Environmental The planning, design, and execution of graphic elements in the built
Graphics and natural environment. Environmental graphics includes com-
munication systems that identify, direct, inform, interpret, and visually
enhance the environment.

Etched or Engraved Etched (chemically) or engraved/incised (mechanically) and then

and Paint Filled filled with color to create a desired contrast and appearance.

Etching See ACID-ETCHING.

Extended Font A font in which the proportion of the letters, numbers, and symbols,
has been altered by increasing their width.

Extrusion General term for pre-manufactured bars, rods, tubes and channels
created by forcing raw material through a die to create a desired
shape. Extruded stock typically made from aluminum or plastic is
often used in sign fabrication.

F Fabricate The manufacturing of a sign from components, raw materials or

parts.

Fabricated Letter / A dimensional letter usually fabricated from thin metal, which is
Numeral joined and soldered to appear solid.

12/2012 Page 13-2-6

 Glossary

Facade The front or principal entrance of a building.

Face See SIGN FACE.

Fascia Mounted A wall mounted sign in which the sign face is parallel to the wall. Also
Sign see WALL SIGN.

Fasteners Mechanical items, including rivets, screws, nuts, and bolts, that are
used to assemble a sign or attach a sign to a surface.

Fiber Optic Display A type of sign that transmits the message utilizing light directed
through thread like fibers of glass or plastic.

Flag A piece of plastic or cloth suspended from one side. The cloth may or
may not be decorated.

Flag Sign / Blade A type of projecting sign mounted perpendicular to the sign’s surface
Sign and the normal flow of traffic. These signs are typically double sided
and mounted to a building wall, façade, storefront, or pole.

Flasher A mechanical device designed to interrupt the electrical current in a

sign at regular intervals, thus turning the light source on and off to
create a flashing image.

Flush Text aligned at a right margin (flush right) or left margin (flush left).
When copy is flushed both right and left, it is referred to as justified.

Foam Board A type of lightweight, rigid board used for interior signs. Foam board
consists of plastic foam sheet laminated on both sides with paper or
plastic substrates.

Foam Tape Double-sided adhesive tape used for mounting sign plaques, letters,
or other sign materials to smooth surfaces. It is available in vari-
ous thicknesses, widths, and adhesives. Foam tape with a special
adhesive is necessary for mounting signs to vinyl wall covering.

Font A specific style and group of letterforms consisting of one complete

set of letters, numerals, symbols, and punctuation used for compos-
ing written communications in a given typeface. Fonts come in
various weights, italic formats, condensed or extended.

Footing The projecting base of a sign pole or pylon, including the portion
buried in the ground. The footing bears all the weight of the sign,
while anchoring it against overturning momentum. Also called
FOUNDATION.

Form A mold or shape into which concrete is poured to harden. When

referring to signage, the term typically is associated with the making
of an exterior sign footing.

Formed A material such as metal or plastic that has been shaped into a
dimensional object or letter.

Foundation See FOOTING.

Frangible Sign See BREAK-AWAY SIGN.

Mount

Frisket An adhesive masking of paper or plastic used for (stencil-like meth-

ods of) painting, sandblasting, silkscreening, and other processes.
Friskets may be hand or digitally cut.

12/2012 Page 13-2-7

 Glossary

G Galvanize A process by which steel or iron is protected by a zinc coating

or plating. This process is achieved by hot-dipping the metal into
molten zinc utilizing electrolysis. The galvanized coating protects the
underlying metal from corrosion.

Gateway Sign A sign announcing the entrance to a neighborhood or large facility.

Gauge A measurement indicating the thickness of sheet metal. Also used to

denote size of wire.

Gilding/Gilt The application of thin metal sheets such as gold, silver, and copper
to glass, signs, and vehicles. A protective clear coat is sometimes
applied when used in an outdoor application.

Glass Signs Signs fabricated from glass. Painting, carving, sandblasting and/or
etching are the most popular ways to decorate glass for signage.

Gold Leaf Gold procesed into very thin sheets. The gold is used in gilding and
is available in a variety of colors and karats. Fourteen to eighteen
karat leaf is used for interior applications, such as glass. Twenty
three karat leaf is used for outdoor applications, such as vehicles
and exterior signs, and architectural elements.

Goose Neck The curved support for a light fixture. This element is normally
constructed out of steel conduit and typically used on billboard and
storefront signs.

Gradation / Steps of transition between two colors or two values, created by mix-
Gradient ing varying percentages of each of those two colors and/or values.

Grade The contour of the ground surface, whether in its natural state or
after development. Signs are often measured in height above grade.

Grade 2 Braille Grade 2 Braille is similar to Grade 1 Braille, however, it includes

additional characters and character combinations representing con-
tractions of certain words and word components such as “the” and
“-ation”. Considerable care must be taken to translate Grade 2 Braille
correctly, using a computer-based, or other, translation program. All
Braille should be proofread by a Braille proofreader, prior to approval
of all final artwork.

Grayscale A series of neutral colors, ranging from black to white, or the other
way around. Each step’s color value is usually shifted by constant
amounts. A grayscale color can be determined by a value of a
one-dimensional color space: On a white surface (e.g., paper)
the grayscale’s color value equals to the relative intensity of black
(ink) applied to the medium. On a black surface (e.g., monitor) the
grayscale color’s value equals to the relative intensity of white (light)
applied to the medium.

Grommet In banners, a reinforced metal eyelet used to receive cords or other

fasteners.

H Halo Lighting Typically used for back-lit letters (reverse-pan channel letters) to cre-
ate a glow of light around the letter by illuminating the wall surface,
behind the letter, via a light source located within the letterform.

Hanging Sign A sign that hangs from a bracket or support and projects from a wall,
building, or pole. See also PROJECTING SIGN.

Header A separate panel, often containing a block of headline text, placed

above the supporting sign copy.

12/2012 Page 13-2-8

 Glossary

Height Above The vertical distance from the grade to the highest point of the sign
Grade (face).

Hinged Side The face on a double-face sign that swings open for service.

Hue Pure color in terms of “red”, “green” or “magenta. Also defines mix-
tures of two pure colors like “red-yellow”(~”orange”) or “yellow-green”.

I Identification Sign A sign providing the name of the business, building or service for
purposes of identification.

Illuminated Sign A sign which is illuminated by either an internal or indirect, external

light source.

Incidental Sign Signs, usually smaller in size and of a noncommercial nature, which
appear in almost every location where the public may be found.
Examples of incidental signs include hours of operation, location of
rest rooms, as well as entrance and exit signs.

Incised Cutting into or indenting the surface of a material. Incised letters

are carved or engraved into the surface of stone, wood, plastic, or
sandblasted into glass or stone.

Indirect Illumination that is provided from a light source separate from the
Illumination sign itself, such as a floodlight.

Insert A paper sign message intended to be inserted into a pocket on a

manufactured sign. Inserts can be easily removed or changed as
necessary.

International Symbol used to communicate disabled-accessible routes and

Symbol of entrances consisting of a stylised figure seated in a wheelchair.
Accessibility (ISA)

International Symbol used to communicate hook up location or availability of

Symbol of TTY a TTY device of a representation of a typewriter keyboard with a
telephone headset above.

Internally A sign that is illuminated through the use of internal lighting. See
Illuminated also BACK-LIGHTED SIGN.

Interactive Two-way electronic or communications system in which response is

direct and continual. Interactive displays incorporate a touch screen,
buttons or switches, or a keyboard to generate a signal that activates
an information display.

Interpretive Sign or A free-standing sign that provides cultural or historic information.

Kiosk

J J-bolt An angled rod, usually steel, embedded in a concrete footing, or

anchor, and threaded at the exposed top end for attachment to a
freestanding sign.

Job Site Sign See CONSTRUCTION SITE SIGN.

Justified Describes copy that is set with even margins on the left and right
(often resulting in irregular word and letter spacing).

K Kerning The process of moving pairs of letters farther apart or closer together
to make words in a line or block of text appear more evenly spaced.

Kick Plate A plate or strip that runs along the bottom edge of a sign structure or
kiosk to protect it from being marred.

12/2012 Page 13-2-9

 Glossary

Kill Switch A switch found on or next to an electrical sign that can be used to
turn off a sign.

Kiosk A portable or permanent freestanding structure onto (and into) which

messages and pertinent information can be housed and displayed.
Kiosks can also have interactive elements such as touch screen
monitors.

L Lamp Bank Typically refers to the lighting on the inside of a sign used to illumi-
nate the sign face.

Laser Cutting Use of a laser to cut letters and shapes out of various flat materials,
such as acrylic, glass and metal.

Layout The total arrangement of a sign’s graphic elements. Indicates the

overall plan of how copy, and possible imagery, will be arranged on
the face.

Leading A typographic term referring to the space between lines of text.

Typically measured from baseline to baseline. Also see Line
Spacing.

LCD Sign A type of changeable copy sign utilizing liquid crystals.

Liquid crystal
display

LED A semiconductor diode that emits light when voltage is applied.

Light-emitting
diode

LED sign Electronic “message” sign using light-emitting diodes.

Legibility The clarity of a typeface, used on a sign, which allows it to be easily

read and deciphered. See also readability.

Letterspacing The amount of space between a group of letters to affect the visual
density in a line or block of text. Also see tracking and kerning.

Letter Form The development or design of the shape of an alphabet letter.

Letter Styles Variations of a font, such as: serif, sans serif, slab serif, italic, light,
Roman, medium, demi-bold, bold, extra bold.

Letter Visibility An established set of numbers representing approximate visibility of

Chart letters over a range of distances. Readable distances vary with vari-
ous color combinations and typefaces as well as with surrounding
visual busyness and whether the observer is still or in motion.

Letter Void The enclosed areas within letterforms or symbols, such as those
found in the letters a, b, d, e, g, o, p and q.

Life Safety Signs Signs for fire, security, evacuation, and other life safety information,
subject to code enforcement and review. Sign locations are defined
by code.

Light Reflective The degree of contrast expressed as a percentage between sign

Value (LRV) text and background colors. VA requires a minimum LRV of 70%
for signage. This value is an industry “rule of thumb” and is not a
requirement of ABA/ADA codes.

Lightness A range from dark (0%) to fully illuminated (100%). Any original hue
has the average lightness level of 50%. A painter may say lightness
is the range from fully shaded to fully tinted.

12/2012 Page 13-2-10

 Glossary

Line Spacing A typographic term referring to the space between lines of text.
Typically measured from baseline to baseline. Also see Leading.

Logo An often stylized group of letters, words, symbols or shapes used to

represent a business or product.

Lumen The SI derived unit of luminous flux, a measure of the total “amount”
of visible light emitted by a source.

M Magnesium Plate A metal sign material which can be acid-etched with fine detail for
use in interior and exterior signs. Good for exterior-grade ABA/ADA
signs and more durable than photopolymer.

Magnetic Sheeting Magnetized sheet material laminated to a flexible plastic sheet and
available in rolls.

Marquee A type of canopy, sign, or architectural element protruding from a

building face that projects over the public street or sidewalk.

Masonite® A brand of hardboard made from wood chips that have been pressed
into sheets of varying thickness.

Matrix A term used in lighting to refer to a regular array of lighting units in

the display area of an electronic changeable message sign.

Matte / Matte Finish A dull surface that is not shiny or reflective.

Medex® A chemically treated, exterior-grade particle board used in sign

manufacturing as a substrate.

Medium-Density A type or particle board made from wood dust mixed with a binder
Fiberboard (MDF) and heat pressed into a panel. MDF has a smooth finish which
paints well. Typically produced in 4' x 8' sheets of varying thickness.

Medium-Density A type of plywood overlaid with a paper face. MDO is designed to

Overlay (MDO) have a smooth, paint receptive surface. Typically produced in 4' x 8'
sheets.

Memorial Sign A building sign or plaque noting such information as the name of
the building or structure, when it was built, and by whom or who it
honors.

Menu Board A changeable point-of-purchase advertising display which accom-

modates a listing of products and prices.

Message Center Any sign that displays changeable copy through electronic or
mechanical means.

Message Controller In an electronic sign, the device that stores messages entered by
the operator and conveys them to the display area of the sign in the
proper order.

Message Schedule A list of signs programmed for a given facility providing location, sign
type, message (text), and notations regarding installation, location
conditions, or other information. This document is used with the sign
location plan and sign type drawings.

Metal Finishes Typically include: mill, polished, brushed, satin, matte, painted, anod-
ized, antique, oxidized, galvanized, chrome-plated, nickel-plated,
engine-turned, and many others. Also refers to the levels of finishes
relating to gloss and reflectance including: matte, satin, grained,
abraded, brushed, and mirror.

12/2012 Page 13-2-11

 Glossary

Metals Metals used in sign making include: aluminum, brass, bronze, cast
iron, copper, gold, iridium, lead, magnesium, mild steel, Muntz metal,
nickel, pewter, platinum, silver, stainless steel, tin, titanium, weather-
ing steel, zinc.

Mild Steel Steel containing less than three-tenths of one percent (0.003) carbon.
Not used in structural applications due to its relatively low strength.

Mill Finish The natural finish of a material resulting from the manufacturing
process.

Mirror 1.
Function of reversing type or an image in design. Used mainly
for cutting copy or images to be installed on the inside surface of a
transparent substrate such as a window. 2. Highly polished, virtually
specular finish on a surface or material.

Mock-Up Typically a full-size model used to test scale, color, appearance, leg-
ibility and/or aesthetic aspects; and made to simulate final construc-
tion materials and finishes.

Model Typically a smaller-scale, proportionally reduced version of a larger

element.

Moire An interference pattern created by the overlay of two regular patterns.

In screen-printing, the undesirable pattern on halftones caused by
incorrect screen angles.

Moulding A trim, commonly of wood or metal, used as detail on different types

of signs. Molding is available in a variety of shapes and profiles.

Monument Sign A freestanding sign which sits directly on the ground or is mounted
on a low base. This type of sign typically identifies a facility, building,
or entrance.

Muntz Metal An alloy of copper and zinc with a very small amount of lead. This
metal has a “brass” appearance and is highly malleable. It is used for
sign plaques and letters.

Mural A wall surface that has been treated with a paint, tile, or vinyl graphic
pattern, image, or shape. Murals can be achieved using large-format
digital prints that can emulate any material or finish desired.

M.U.T.C.D. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices from the US Department

of Transportation. Defines highway sign standards and traffic control
graphics.

N Name Plate A sign that identifies only the name, occupation, and/or professional
title of the occupant of a desk, office, or building.

National Electrical Electrical safety code adopted by many, but not all states, coun-
Code (NEC) ties, and cities in the United States. Published by the National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) as NFPA 70.

Negative Space The background of a sign. The area around and within the art and
copy. Also called “white space” or “positive space”.

Neon Tubing Glass tubing filled with various gases and charged with electricity
to create an illuminated tubular sign or decorative element. Different
gases and coatings create different colors. Neon itself is an inert gas
which produces a reddish-orange glow when an electric current is
discharged through it. This term is also often used to describe a type
of luminous tube sign, which may contain other gasses.

12/2012 Page 13-2-12

 Glossary

Nickel Plate A thin layer of nickel that has been electroplated onto another metal.
See also metal finishes.

Numeral A symbol or mark used to represent a number.

O Oil-Canning Typically used to refer to a metal surface that shows uneven deflec-
tion from unsuitable inner structure, poor attachment, or insufficient
thickness of face material.

Outline / Inline In computer graphics, a closed-loop path that copies an original’s

shape. Following outside the shape is an outline, inside the original
shape is an inline.

P Paint Finish In descending order of reflectance: gloss, semigloss, 20 percent

gloss (preferred by the ABA/ADA), eggshell, and matte (dead flat
finish).

Pantone Matching A standardized color reproducing system, primarily used in the

System® (PMS) printing industry. Colors are assigned identification numbers which
correspond with specific color formulations.

Patina A finish applied, or achieved by age, to metal surfaces called “verdi-

gris”- the blue green patina that forms on metals, especially copper,
brasses, and bronze.

Pavement Graphics Typically white or yellow graphics applied to asphalt or concrete

roadways and parking areas to supplement traffic markings.

Pennant A piece of plastic or cloth, pointed at the bottom and suspended by

its top. Often undecorated, it is a temporary attention-getting device.

Photopolymer A specialized plastic with light sensitive coating which is masked and
photo etched to create tactile graphics. Used primarily for ABA/ADA
signage requiring tactile copy and Braille.

Pictogram A pictorial representation or graphic symbol identifying a location,

action, activity, or a warning.

Pin Mount Letters have “pins” or “studs” on their back and these protrude into
the surface of the wall on which the letters are mounted. Used to
keep letters aligned on a rough surface or used to stand letters off
(float) on a wall surface.

Plastic Faced Channel letters in which the front of the channel is covered by a
Letters translucent plastic face, diffusing the lighting within.

Plexiglas® The trade name for a brand of acrylic sheeting, which is often used
as a generic term.

Pole Sign A freestanding sign, mounted on a round or square tube, or other

fabricated member without any type of secondary support. Pole
signs are typically double-faced.

Polycarbonate A specific thermosetting resin characterized by its durability, flex-

ibility, machinery, and endurance under UV exposure. Lexan® is a
polycarbonate.

Polypropylene A type of plastic sheet used in banners, noted for its flexibility at low
temperatures and its resistance to chemicals.

Polyurethane A type of hard thermoset plastic foam used in sign production. It has
the density and characteristics of wood, with only one-third of the
weight. It can be used for carving and sandblasting signs.

12/2012 Page 13-2-13

 Glossary

Polyvinyl Chloride A specific thermoset plastic which is weather and chemical resistant.
(PVC) It can be extruded into many forms or cast as sheets in a variety of
colors and thicknesses.

Porcelain Enamel / A process to coat metal with a ceramic slip, which is fired at
Porcelain Sign extremely high heat, to create a durable, glass like surface impervi-
ous to degradation from environmental conditions.

Portable Sign A freestanding sign not intended to be permanently affixed in place.

Poster A sign typically printed on paper and intended for indoor use.

Poured in Place Refers to concrete footings for signs.

Powder Coating A process for applying paint to a surface to creates a durable protec-
tive surface without the use of solvents.

Precast Concrete A concrete product produced by casting concrete into a reusable

mold. After the concrete has cured, the cast product is transported to
the site where it is lifted into place.

Prime To coat a substrate prior to the application of paint or adhesive.

Projecting Sign A type of projecting sign mounted perpendicular to the sign’s surface
and normal flow of traffic. These signs are typically double sided and
mounted to a building wall, façade, storefront or pole. See blade
sign.

Prototype Typically, a full-sized sample using intended materials, fasteners,

and finishes, as well as methods of construction, to test assembly,
design, construction, and appearance issues. See MOCK-UP.

Push Through A letter or graphic which has been cut out, then pushed through a
corresponding space that has been removed from a sign substrate.
Typically used with a sign cabinet which has an opaque sign face
and internal lighting. “Push-thru letters” are most often translucent
acrylic and flush with, or slightly protruding through, the front surface
of the sign face.

Pylon A free standing sign monolithic in shape. Does not refer to a pole
sign or a low profile monument sign.

Q Quarter Round Wood or metal molding, and trim, with a profile in the shape of a
quarter circle.

R Raceway A metal structure enclosing the electrical wiring and sign

components.

Raster Graphics The representation of images generally as an array of pixels or

points of color. Typically used for the representation of photographic
images. See BITMAP

Readability The quality of a sign’s overall design which allows the viewer to
correctly interpret the presented information within an optimum time
and distance.

Reflective Vinyl Film with very small glass or glasslike bead material encapsulated
below the surface, creating the ability to reflect light back to its
source, such as from a car headlight back to the driver.

Regulatory Signs Signs required by various government bodies to inform the public of
traffic laws and other regulations.

12/2012 Page 13-2-14

 Glossary

Relief The projection of art from a flat surface. The shortened form of
“bas-relief.”

Rendering An artistic sketch or representation of a design concept.

Resolution The number of pixels per inch designated to a digital image. A higher
pixel ratio, i.e., the greater the density of pixels, will yield a more
precise and detailed image.

Retainer The projecting rim or trim around the sign face which holds the sign
face in place.

Reverse Channel An illuminated backless channel letter, with opaque face and sides,
Letter pin mounted on a background surface. The interior of the letter form
contains a light source (LED, neon) which when illuminated, will
produce a halo effect of reflected light around the letter.

Revolving Sign A sign which has the ability to turn 360 degrees via an electric motor
which drives its movable parts.

Roof Sign A sign structure which is erected on or above a roof, or installed

directly on a roof’s surface.

Router Cut Sign Describing a sign cut with a hand or computerized router, using
various shaped cutting bits.

S Sandblasting A method for creating an etched image on a material. Typically used

on glass, wood, and stone.

Sans Serif Any typeface that lacks serifs. Helvetica is a familiar sans serif font.

Saturation A range from pure color (100%) to gray (0%) at a constant lightness
level. A pure color is fully saturated. From a perceptional point of
view, saturation influences the grade of purity or vividness of a
color/image. A desaturated image is said to be dull, less colorful, or
washed out but can also make the impression of being softer.

Schematic Design A conceptual design developed at the beginning of a project which

demonstrates a design approach or strategy.

Screen Printing A print made using a squeegee to force ink through a stencil or
emulsion that is supported by fabric which has been stretched over
a frame to create a screen. A photographic process can be used to
create and control the resist for more precise imaging.

Seam A line formed by the joining together of two separate pieces of the
same or different materials along their edges.

Second Surface Refers to a sign made of a clear substrate, such as acrylic, where
the graphics and background color are applied on the reverse (or
inside) side of a sign face to provide extra protection from environ-
mental conditions and tampering. Some exterior signs are painted in
this manner, as are many interior signs.

Serif A small line or embellishment finishing off the strokes of letters in

some fonts. Times New Roman is a familiar serif font.

Service The general maintenance of a sign which may include: cleaning,

repainting, replacement of bulbs or lamps, and repairs on a regular
basis, and sometimes covered under a contract.

Service Cover A panel in an electric sign cabinet which allows access to electrical
components and fixtures for maintenance, repair and replacement of
bulbs and lamps.

12/2012 Page 13-2-15

 Glossary

Setback The distance between the sign and the property line or right of way.

Shadow Duplication of an image which is slightly offset. Also referred to as a

“drop shadow”.

Shade A color made darker than the original by adding black.

Shop Drawings In signage, this refers to fabricator prepared drawings which describe
intended methods of construction as well as sequence of assembly.
Shop drawings are to be reviewed by the designer and owner
for approval prior to construction or fabrication to ensure that the
intended design concepts are accurately implemented throughout
the construction process.

Sign Any device, structure, display, or placard, on, in, or near a building,
to attract the attention of the public for the purposes of advertising,
identifying, or communicating information about goods and services.

Signage / Signing Interchangeable terms used to describe signs.

Sign Cabinet The enclosure of an electric sign, not including the components and
mounting structure.

Sign Can An informal term for SIGN CABINET.

Sign Categories Signs are typically used for the following purposes: life safety or fire
code, directional, identification, informational, orientation, ornamen-
tation, regulatory, wayfinding.

Sign Face The front surface of a sign (in elevation), onto which graphics are
applied.

Sign Location Plan Usually a site plan, or floor plan, indicating where signs will be
placed (called “sign locations”).

Sign Schedule / A list of signs programmed for a given facility to include information
Sign Message regarding: location, sign type, and message (text) as well as nota-
Schedule tions regarding: installation, location conditions, and/or other informa-
tion. This document is used in conjunction with the sign location plan
and sign type drawings to implement a sign program.

Sign Type Defines the design, use or style of each unique sign in a system.
Sign types are individually determined in each sign project to meet
the specific need(s) or function at a particular location.

Sign-Foam® A brand of specialized polymer foam cell products designed for

three-dimensional signage applications, available in different densi-
ties and strengths.

Silastic See SILICONE ADHESIVE. A combination of “Silicone” and “Plastic”

for flexible, inert silicone elastomer.

Silicone Adhesive General term for an adhesive used in the installation of letters and
signs. Silicone is a popular product due to its elasticity, strength,
reasonable curing time, and its impermeable nature.

Silkscreening See SCREEN PRINTING.

Single Face A sign consisting of one face, rather than back-to-back faces on a
common frame or back-to-back messages on the same piece of
material.

Skeleton The frame onto which a sign is installed.

12/2012 Page 13-2-16

 Glossary

Spacer Any device used in mounting letters or signs which separates those
components from the surface to which they are applied.

Spinner Sign A sign, either freestanding or wall-mounted, with messages that

rotate in the wind. A spinner sign is not considered an animated sign.

Spotlight A source of illumination for an externally illuminated sign; a lamp with

a strong focused beam directed toward a sign.

Star The five pointed star symbol indicating the main EXIT level in a build-
ing. Required next to floor level indication on elevator control panels
and on elevator door jambs.

Stone Signs Typically sandstone, granite, marble, limestone, or other common

decorative stone material. Letters can be stud-mounted to stone or
carved/incised into the face.

Stroke A single movement of a hand, arm, or marking tool. Stroke can

also refer to: a pass of the squeegee in screen-printing, a pass of
the brush in painting, as well as a line making up a letter. See also
stroke width.

Stroke Width The width of the major lines comprising a letterform. Wide strokes
are used to create a bold letter whereas narrow stokes are used to
create a light letter.

Structure In the sign industry, a fabrication designed for, and capable of, sup-
porting a sign. Can refer to internal or external skeleton (exoskeleton)
of sign as well as support pole or mechanism.

Subsurface See SECOND SURFACE.

Substrate The material out of which the face is made. Wood, metal sheeting,
paper, and acrylic are some examples of sign substrates.

Symbol A letter, number, or other character or mark, or a combination of

letters or the like, used to designate something, e.g.: the algebraic
symbol χ; the chemical symbol Au.

T Tactile Sign A sign, or an area within a larger sign, where a message is conveyed
through raised or engraved artwork, thus creating accessibility for
the visually impaired. Required by ABA/ADA for all permanently
identified rooms.

Tamper Resistant Any screw, bolt, nut and fastener that require specialized tooling
Hardware to install and remove. Used to discourage theft, vandalism and
tampering.

TDD Telecommunications Device for the Deaf. An electronic device, for

text communicating over a telephone line that is designed for use by
persons with hearing or speech difficulties. Also known as a tele-
printer or teletypewriter. See TTY.

Template A full-sized pattern, layout, or computerized printout showing the

exact size and placement of letters. Typically used for installing
dimensional letters, signs, or architectural elements.

Temporary Sign Any sign that is not intended to be permanently installed.

Thermoforming A process by which a dimensional object is created from a flat sheet

of material which has been heated to a pliable temperature and
formed into shape through a mold. This process can be achieved
either mechanically or pneumatically. See also vacuum-forming.

12/2012 Page 13-2-17

 Glossary

Thumbnail A type of rough sketch of a design made prior to developing more

finalized presentations.

Time Switch A switch which utilizes a clock or timer to automatically turn an

electric sign on and off at set times each day.

Tint A color made lighter than the original by adding white.

Tone 1) A result of mixing a pure color with any neutral/grayscale color

including the two extremes white and black. By this definition all tints
and shades are also to be considered tones.
2) A result of mixing a pure color with any grayscale color excluding
white amd black. By this definition a certain amount of white and
black must have been added to the original color. Furthermore, the
following is true: If changing the tonal value of a color, gray has been
added (any ratio of mixture) to the original color.

Touch Screen Computerized CRT or LCD screen directory, or information station,

activated by touching the screen.

Tracking The ability of a computer to add or subtract minute increments of

space between letters throughout a single word or block of text.
Should not be confused with kerning. See also letterspacing.

Transformer In electric signs, the mechanical or electronic component that

changes voltage supplied to the sign into a higher or lower voltage
necessary to run the sign.

Translucence The property of a material such as glass, vinyl, paint, or ink that
allows the passage of some light through it without being transparent.

Triple Message A type of sign consisting of rotating triangular louvers. The louvers
Sign turn in unison displaying three successive messages as each of
the three faces are exposed, thus tripling the static communication
power at one location.

TTY Teletypewriter (originally), or a text display device, as used by the

hearing or speech impaired to read voice communication converted
to text by a Communication Assisstant Device (CAD). Digital TTYs
have largely replaced analog TDDs.

Typeface The design of a given set of letters, numbers, symbols, and punctua-
tion, without reference to its size or width. See also FONT.

Typographic Terms Terminology associated with typesetting, as utilized in the sign

industry: ascender, condensed, counter, descender, extended, flush,
font, kerning, leading, letterspacing, line spacing, sans serif, serif,
stroke width, tracking, typeface, word spacing, etc.

U Ultraviolet light
(UV)
That part of the light spectrum ranging from 185 to 450 nanometers.
UV has several influences on the sign industry. When UV strikes
certain surfaces, such as the phosphors in neon and fluorescent
tubes, it is transformed into visible light. UV is used for curing some
screen-printing inks and paints. UV light is the prime cause of pig-
ment failure in some paints and vinyls, especially red colors.

Underwriters A nationally recognized private organization responsible for safety

Laboratory (UL) testing, and certification of, electrical devices, for fire rating materials
and assemblies, and other related activities.

12/2012 Page 13-2-18

 Glossary

Vacuum Forming A process, for constructing a sign face, by which dimensional imag-

V ery and letters are created from a flat sheet of material. The material
is heated to a pliable temperature and formed into shape through
a mold from which air is drawn out of. The force from the vacuum
presses the material against the contours of the mold, thus forming
the desired dimensional shape(s).

Value Engineering Designing and developing a desired product or sign to be as

inexpensive to produce as possible without sacrificing the quality or
visual integrity of the final item.

VHB High strength double sided tape. The tape can be applied between
parts to eliminate the need for mechanical fasteners or welds. This
(Very High Bond)
tape is available in many grades and thicknesses.

Vinyl Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) film that, in sign making, is backed with an
adhesive that creates a strong bond to a surface when pressure is
applied. Different integral colors are available with adhesives having
varying levels of aggressiveness (adhesion) for various applications
from permanent to semi-permanent to temporary.

Vinyl letters Letters cut from an adhesive-backed material, available in dozens of

W
opaque, translucent, metallic, and transparent colors and patterns.

Wall Mount A sign mounted on a wall. Another name for a WALL SIGN.

Wall Sign A interior or exterior sign painted on a wall or attached to the wall of
a building.

Water Resistant Describing a sign, or sign face, that has been chemically treated to
make it impervious to any damage or deterioration caused by water

Waterjet Cutting Computerized high-pressure stream of water used to cut stone and
metal up to 2” thick. Also called “hydro-cutting”.

Wayfinding The ability of a person to find their way to a given destination in a

built, or planned, environment, using information provided through
out that environment.
This process can involve signs, colors, objects, materials, and
architecture. The term can also be used to describe the process
to establish or improve the function of a particular environment.
Wayfinding is not a separate or different activity from traditional sig-
nage design, but rather a broader, more inclusive way of assessing
all the environmental issues which affect our ability to find our way.

Weathering Steel A steel alloy that forms a tenacious, self-protecting rust layer when
exposed to the atmosphere.

Weed The process of peeling extraneous file (vinyl or matrix) away from a
plotter cut, leaving only the sections representing the final image or
letter.

Weep Hole A small, water drainage hole, placed at the lowest point in the bottom
of a fabricated letter or a sign cabinet.

Wet Location A watertight electrical or light fixture which is sealed to protect

Fixture against moisture.

Window Sign A sign mounted for display in or on a window and viewed from the
outside.

X x-height In any typeface, the height of the lowercase letters which do not have
ascenders or descenders. Normally referring to the lower case x.

12/2012 Page 13-2-19

 Glossary

Y Yield 1
In vehicular traffic, a regulatory sign pertaining to traffic flow,
conceding right of way. 2 In manufacturing, the amount of material
utilized versus what is waste or discarded.

Z Zinc A malleable metal which has a gray appearance and can be used
raw, or painted, in exterior applications.

12/2012 Page 13-2-20

 Appendix

• Emerging Technologies

• Sustainability
• Sign Index

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.

 Emerging
Technologies

• Resources
• Communication Technologies
• Manufacturing Advances
Illumination
Printing
Fabrication

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.

 Introduction Emerging Technologies

Technological
This section in the Design Guide delves into emerging technologies in relation to a
Advancements
point in time, late 2012. With the fast pace of developing products and manufactur­
ing, the following gives a brief overview and projections that will only be valid for
a short period of time forward. To gain a current look at the items discussed, it is
recommended that additional research be conducted on the subjects, at the time of
reading.

In preparing this section, various comments, descriptions, topics, and write-ups

from informational, news sources, internet sources, and company sources function
as resources and are put forth to provide an overview, but, with all types of emerg­
ing technologies, change is constant, so this sections purpose is just to create an
awareness. In addition, in the upcoming months and years, new devices and meth­
odologies will come forth that are totally unknown at the present time, so one needs
to constantly keep researching what’s new. The following section is to help one get
started.

Advancements in various industries continue to improve the quality and effective­

ness of signage. It is not necessarily technological advancements in any one
singular industry, but the overlapping convergence of different technologies in com­
bination with one another that have allowed for large improvements in the signage
industry. Innovations in material science, such as the development of UV resistant
materials or improvement in L.E.D.- lighting technology, have a positive effect on
product durability and reduce power consumption. Animated and interactive way-
finding systems have seen marked change due to technological advances in the
computer and telecommunications industries. As these various industries continue
to provide innovative solutions for complex wayfinding issues, signage solutions
and designs will become more efficient, effective and less expensive than in the
past.

Various and diverse industries often evolve towards similar goals. As a result
convergence of previously separate technologies such as voice (and telephony
features), data (and productivity applications), and GPS technology create new effi­
ciencies. These emerging technologies represent progressive development that can
separately and together yield innovative and a creative wayfinding solutions and
create a positive and efficient visits to the VA. At the time of this writing, computer
tablet and innovative software technologies are producing interesting products and
applications that may influence and effect wayfinding.

Psychology and
Though research and psychological studies, behavioral science continues to gain
Human Behavior
a better understanding of human behavior. Being lost or not being able to find
your destination is a stressful and undesirable experience in any medical facility.
Integrating an advanced understanding of human behavior with emerging technolo­
gies may yield appropriate solution for some wayfinding issues. Not all VA visitors
and patients feel comfortable navigating hallways using GPS rather than asking for
help and directions. Interactive kiosks may be effective with one demographic group
of users and not other. Each VA site will need to evaluate the best signage solution
for its visitors and patients. Technology is not intended to replace volunteers and tra­
ditional signage, but may assist with an alternative method of delivering information
and directions.

12/2012 Page A1–1

 Resources Emerging Technologies

Resources Sign societies are a source of information on new and emerging technologies. The
International Sign Society holds national and regional tradeshows that are excellent
events to research and connect with new and innovative manufactures. The Society
for Environmental Graphic Design has seminars, conferences, and online educa­
tional forums and “webinars” that keep members up to date with emerging technolo­
gies, changes to codes and legislation.

ISA The International Sign Association (ISA) is a worldwide organization devoted to

supporting, promoting, and improving the sign industry through government advo­
International Sign
cacy, education and training programs, technical resources, stakeholder outreach
Association
and industry networking events. Members are manufacturers, users and suppliers
of on-premise signs and other visual communications systems. ISA has a strategic
partnership with affiliated organizations and business partners and offers its mem­
bers programs and services to grow their business. ISA International Sign Expo is
the largest sign show in the world is held annually to promote, strengthen, and unify
the sign industry.

International Sign Association/ ISA

707 North Saint Asaph Street
Alexandria VA 22314
(703) 836-4012

SEGD Society for Environmental Graphic Design (SEGD) is the global community of peo­
ple working at the intersection of communication design and the built environment
Society for Environmental
that aspires to:
Graphics Design
• Promote public awareness of our community and its role in shaping experience.
• Nurture demand for design excellence within the built environment.
• Serve as a source of education and inspiration for our community.
• Continue to define and refine our standards of practice.
• Foster relevant, well informed research to enhance our knowledge base.
• Sponsor peer recognition programs that inspire excellence.
• Promote collaboration across multiple design disciplines.
• Strengthen ties with educational programs that provide the academic underpin­
nings of our field.
Society for Environmental Graphics Design’ SEGD
401 F Street NW Suite 3333
Washington DC 20001
(202) 638-0891

USGBC The Washington, D.C.-based U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) is a 501 c3
non-profit organization committed to a prosperous and sustainable future for our
U.S. Green Building Council
nation through cost-efficient and energy-saving green buildings. The USGBC is re­
sponsible for developing the LEED® Green Building Rating System™.

12/2012 Page A1–2

 Resources Emerging Technologies

LEED® LEED® is an acronym for Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design. The
LEED® green building certification system is the preeminent program for rating
Leadership in Energy and
the design, construction, and operation of green buildings. LEED® is a voluntary,
Environmental Design
consensus-based national standard for developing high-performance, sustainable
(“green”) buildings.

By using less energy, LEED®-certified buildings save money for individuals, busi­
nesses, and taxpayers; reduce greenhouse gas emissions; and contribute to a
healthier environment for residents, workers and the larger community. Emerging
Technology is continually being challenged to meet the building industries “green”
goal. The demand for green products is driving changes in material and fabrication.
Sustainable or “green building” design and construction is the opportunity to use
our resources more efficiently, while creating healthier and more energy-efficient
homes. Although there is no magic formula, success comes in the form of leaving
a lighter footprint on the environment through conservation of resources, while at
the same time balancing energy-efficient, cost-effective, low-maintenance products
for our construction needs. In other words, green building design involves achieving
the delicate balance between building and the sustainable environment.

Obtaining LEED® certification requires compliance with a minimum number of cri­

teria affecting many aspects of a project, from site selection to the recycled content
of building materials. While participation in the LEED® program has been mostly
voluntary, some government entities require that publicly funded projects apply for
LEED® certification and other states and communities are considering this.

Sustainable Design Sign materials and fabrication methods can be “green”. Use of recycled materials for
the substrate will help reduce environmental impact. If a sign substrate is manufac­
tured from recyclable materials such as: glass, metal and some photo polymers en­
vironmental impact can be reduced. Selection of Low VOC Matthews Acrylic Base
Paint offers eco friendly paint solution. Paint that is applied through a specialized
high volume low pressure (HVLP) paint applicator sprayer. It provides superior color
coating with minimal overspray reducing waste and VOCs or volatile organic com­
pounds. Power reduction can be made by the use of LED lighting. LED illumination
creates a high brightness that offers reliable illumination providing long lasting light.
LEDs consume very little energy and are effective in both interior and exterior illumi­
nated signage.

Magazines and Web Below are a few online and printed publications specific to signage and information
Resources graphics

• DigitalSignagetoday.com
• Kioskmarketplace.com
• Signs of the Times (print publication ST Media Group, www.stmediagroup.com)
• SignWeb.com

12/2012 Page A1–3

 Technologies Emerging Technologies
Communication Technology

Web Based Technology Web-based technologies can have a significant impact on how people interact with
VA services and Medical Facilities. A web search for services and general informa­
tion is often the first step for a visit of the facility. Integration of the website with GPS
Technology such as driving directions and pedestrian wayfinding and navigation
can help to create a positive visit to the VA. Web bases tools are changing the way
we gather information, plan a doctor visit, scheduling appointments, and fill pre­
scriptions. A VA Visit can be organized from finding a parking space, arriving at the
proper entrance, to walking to a doctor’s office or medical department. This tech­
nology will only assist thoughts clients with web access. If a client does not have
personal web access, an interactive kiosk could be located at the main entry of the
facility to provide navigational instructions or print out a map.

Bar CodeTechnology Bar code technology could be utilized to assist with wayfinding. For example; a
barcoded printed appointment card or patient identity card could be scanned at a
barcode reader at the point of entry to the building to assist with navigation, provide
information as to appointment wait times, lab work required or just directions to a
specific office or departments. If the barcode were on a smart phone, the phones
barcode image could be scanned, and through text to speech technology, the
phone could continue to issue navigational information until the patient arrived at
the destination.

Mobile Devices / “In the Fall of 2011, approximately 25% of cell phone users had smart phones. It
Smart Phones is projected that by 2113, 50% of phones will be smartphones. A growing number
of applications (apps) for smart phones have a direct impact on wayfinding and
signage. Though this technology may not reach all VA patients and visitors, cell
phones are a growing segment of VA users. Mobile apps can assist with directions,
appointments, health information, events and medical education.”
– Wikipedia

GPS GPS navigation software for Tablets Smartphones, Pocket phones and personal
digital assistants (PDAs) is revolutionizing the way people navigate. These smart
Global Positioning Systems
phones powered with apps for GPS and mapping technology can assist with way-
finding needs. One such solution is specifically designed to serve as a navigation
aid for mobile devices. Though it is a separately licensed product, the mobile app is
seamlessly integrated with popular screen readers. The Loadstone project, Mobile
Geo and Code Factory’s GPS navigation software are developing software for sat­
ellite navigation for blind and visually impaired users. The software runs currently
on many different Nokia devices with the S60 platform under all versions of the
Symbian operating system. A GPS receiver must be connected to the cell phone
by Bluetooth. Blind and visually impaired people around the world are using cell
phones because there are two screen reader products for the S60 Symbian plat­
form: Talks from Nuance Communications and Mobile Speak from Code Factory,
making these devices accessible by output of synthetic speech.

Along with the use of speech recognition and translation software GPS technology
can pinpoint your location, assist in learning about the points of interest (POIs), in
your immediate vicinity, plan a route between specified points of origin and destina­
tion, and get instructions on maneuvers to make, as well as information about way-
points along a route that you are following.

12/2012 Page A1–4

 Technologies Emerging Technologies
Communication Technology
RFID “Radio Frequency Identification Device (RFID) tag is a small electronic tag that
stores, transmits and receives information. The RFID tag includes a small RF trans­
Radio-Frequency
mitter and receiver. An RFID reader transmits an encoded radio signal to interrogate
Identification Device
the tag. The tag receives the message and responds with its identification informa­
tion. Many RFID tags do not use a battery. Instead, the tag uses the radio energy
transmitted by the reader as its energy source. The RFID system design includes
a method of discriminating several tags that might be within the range of the RFID
reader.”
– Wikipedia

Radio-frequency identification (RFID) is a technology that uses radio waves to

transfer data from an electronic tag, called RFID tag or label, attached to an object,
through a reader for the purpose of identifying and tracking the object. Some RFID
tags can be read from several meters away and beyond the line of sight of the read­
er. The application of bulk reading enables an almost-parallel reading of tags.

Appointment cards could be issued with RFI tags. RFID readers could be installed
at key intersections with in the Hospital. An appointment card is scanned and direc­
tional instructions are issued to help patients navigate the facility. A central scanner
could be located at a main Info desk to issue directional instructions.

“Radio frequency identification is a powerful emerging technology that enables

companies to achieve total business visibility. By knowing the identity, location and
conditions of assets, tools, inventory, people and more, companies can optimize
business processes and reduce operational costs.”
– RFID Journal, Mark Roberti

Speech/Voice Voice recognition in combinaton with GPS technologies are creating new and inter­
Recognition esting technological advances. It is speculated that Google’s Android phone will ad­
dress a number of common mobile phone issues, including the user interface that
enables online searches. This is a hot topic as many users find it difficult to navigate
through the array of expansive menus on today’s handsets. Additionally, smaller
keypads often add frustration to text messaging, creating a problem for Internet us­
age. Experts have recently declared that voice recognition GPS could be the key
element in Google’s mobile online strategy.

“Speech recognition (also known as automatic speech recognition or computer

speech recognition) converts spoken words to text. The improvement of mobile pro­
cessor speeds made feasible the speech-enabled Symbian and Windows Mobile
Smartphones. Speech is used mostly as a part of User Interface, for creating pre­
defined or custom speech commands. In 2011 the leading software vendors in this
field are: Microsoft Corporation (Microsoft Voice Command), Digital Syphon (Sonic
Extractor), Nuance Communications (Nuance Voice Control), Speech Technology
Center, Vito Technology (VITO Voice2Go), Speereo Software (Speereo Voice
Translator), and SVOX.”
– Wikipedia

12/2012 Page A1–5

 Technologies Emerging Technologies
Communication Technology

Digital Signage Continual advances in LCD and LED plasma screens for electronic displays have
allowed screens to be utilized as wayfinding displays, directory listing, facility in­
formation and advertising. Monitors are smaller less expensive and capable of
features associated with computer capabilities. Changeable messages and large
amounts of information can cost effectively be displayed on digital signs. Digital
signage displays are not a stand-alone technology but work in conjunction with soft­
ware driven on personal computers or servers. Digital signage is cost effective and
becoming easier to use and operate.

Digital signage such as LCD, LED, plasma displays, or projected images can be
used for a variety of signage needs.

• Wayfinding: Custom maps ensure visitors and guests are easily directed to
their desired location, while avoiding secure areas. Using a digital signage net­
work as a wayfinding tool reduces staff interruptions and increases operational
efficiency.
• Event Directories: Display daily event schedules on a digital reader board.
Computer programs can be created to seamlessly update wall monitors in­
stalled in the facilities whenever a change is made in the event management
system.
• Meeting Room Boards: Digital displays outside of each meeting room dynami­
cally update with meeting room information. Eliminate wasted paper and time
by printing and distributing paper signs every day. Computer software can dis­
play corporate logos, upcoming events, the time, weather and much more.
• Physician Directories: Use the digital signage network as a physician direc­
tory to help visitors easily locate their doctor. Digital signage is the perfect solu­
tion for a healthcare facility that experiences a turnover in personnel. Signage
software keeps the directory up-to-date and instantaneous.
• Building Directories: Maintaining a building directory has never been easier.
Change tenant or department names in the software and instantly push the
changed content out to the displays. Digital signage software eliminates days of
waiting for proofs and printing to update the directory.
• Donor Boards:
“Use Interactive touch screens or a digital display to recognize and say thank you to
the community members whose generosity helps you continue your work. Digital
donor boards eliminate the cost and time associated with printing traditional donor
plaques and allow you to thank your donors faster than ever before.”
– Janus Displays

Touch Screen Displays Touch Screen Display can be an integral part of an informational kiosk by allowing
dynamic interaction with a map, directory or other informational displays.

Touch Screen technology can also be found in tablets monitors and Smart phones.
A touchscreen electronic visual displays can detect the presence and location of a
touch within the display area. The touchscreen enables one to interact directly with
what is displayed without requiring any intermediate device that would need to be
held in the hand. Such displays can be attached to computers, or to networks as
terminals. The size other displays will vary with the application. Smartphone screen,
Interactive kiosks or other custom user interfaces all could be part of a wayfinding
signage program. There are a variety of touchscreen technologies.

12/2012 Page A1–6

 Technologies Emerging Technologies

Communication Technology

Touch Screen Displays • Resistive: A resistive touchscreen panel is composed of several layers, the
(continued) most important of which are two thin, electrically conductive layers separated
by a narrow gap. When an object, such as a finger, presses down on a point
on the panel’s outer surface the two metallic layers become connected at that
point: the panel then behaves as a pair of voltage dividers with connected
outputs. This causes a change in the electrical current, which is registered as
a touch event and sent to the controller for processing. The cover sheet con­
sists of a hard outer surface with a coated inner side. When the outer layer
is touched it causes the conductive layers to touch creating a signal that the
analog controller can interpret and determine what the user wants to be done.
Resistive touch is used in restaurants, factories and hospitals due to its high re­
sistance to liquids and contaminants. A major benefit of resistive touch technol­
ogy is it is extremely cost-effective. One disadvantage of resistive technology is
its vulnerability of being damaged by sharp objects.
• Surface acoustic wave: Surface acoustic wave (SAW) technology uses ultra­
sonic waves that pass over the touchscreen panel. When the panel is touched,
a portion of the wave is absorbed. This change in the ultrasonic waves registers
the position of the touch event and sends this information to the controller for
processing. Surface wave touchscreen panels can be damaged by outside ele­
ments. Contaminants on the surface can also interfere with the functionality of
the touchscreen.
• Capacitive touchscreen of a mobile phone: A capacitive touchscreen panel
consists of an insulator such as glass, coated with a transparent conductor
such as indium tin oxide. As the human body is also an electrical conductor,
touching the surface of the screen results in a distortion of the screen’s electro­
static field, measurable as a change in capacitance. Different technologies may
be used to determine the location of the touch. The location is then sent to the
controller for processing. Unlike a resistive touchscreen, one cannot use a ca­
pacitive touchscreen through most types of electrically insulating material, such
as gloves; one requires a special capacitive stylus, or a special-application
glove with fingertips that generate static electricity. This disadvantage espe­
cially affects usability in consumer electronics, such as touch tablet PCs and
capacitive smartphones in cold weather.

Touch Screen
An Interactive Kiosk has a touch screen requiring a visitor’s interaction. The com­
Applications
bination of voice recognition technology and 3-D animation a kiosk can contain a
virtual attendant or an Avatar. The Avatar in a kiosk can dispense directional infor­
mation in more of an active interaction. The Avatar may be programed to “reach out
to the visitor and offer assistance prior to a request for information. Equipped with
speakers, receivers and motion sensor, the avatar can “reach out” and offer assis­
tant and information.

Interactive kiosk with a paper print out can provide “old School” maps or directions
for visitors. As well as maps, an interactive kiosk can print marketing material and
event schedules. Self-service kiosk solution combines cutting edge LCD technology,
progressive design and proprietary software. With virtual Concierge software, an
unlimited amount of brochures can be displayed on your kiosk as well as a solution
for multilingual issues.

12/2012 Page A1–7

 Illumination
Emerging Technologies
Lighting
The signage industry has been effected by the Energy Independence and Security
Act of 2007 (EISA) and the energy reduction goals for federal agencies put forth
in Executive Order 13423 to be adopted in 2012. These new federal standards
introduces more aggressive requirements for three key provisions: the Corporate
Average Fuel Economy Standards, the Renewable Fuel Standard, and the appli­
ance/lighting efficiency standards. To comply with these regulations the lighting
industry has made advances and changes to illumination products in order to meet
lighting efficiency standards. Signage fabricators have adopted new illumination
products offered by the lighting industry, by shifting from the use of incandescent
and fluorescent illumination to the more efficient halogen or LED illumination to
meet economic, ecological and regulatory goals.

LED LEDs present many advantages over incandescent light sources including lower
Light Emitting Diode energy consumption, longer lifetime, improved robustness, smaller size, faster
switching, and greater durability and reliability. LEDs powerful enough for room
lighting are relatively expensive and require more precise current and heat manage­
ment than compact fluorescent lamp sources of comparable output.

LED flood lights powered by solar and battery back up are a good solutions for ex­
terior signage and DOT road sign illumination. LED, solar with battery backup and
power control systems technologies continues to make improvements in brightness,
longevity, reliability, and durability. As these technologies advance more products
will become available for commercial exterior illuminated signage applications. The
solar power systems with battery backup will extend illumination capabilities be­
yond 6 to 8 hour run times even on cloudy days. LED illumination with solar power
require no line voltage, digging, trenching and can be located in remote locations
with limited scheduled maintenance for up to five years. The ultra light bright and
efficient LED fixtures continue to yield economic and safety benefits to illuminated
exterior signage.

Solar Illumination Current and emergent photovoltaic technologies make solar powered sign illumina­
tion possible and practical.

Photovoltaic Solar power supply in conjunction with LED illumination and electronic
controls systems which integrated multi power sources can lend to a reliable and
predictable power supply for illuminated signage. Advancements are continually
being made in both photovoltaic technology and sophisticated power management
systems. Battery backup of solar power source can be effective solution for remote
stand-alone signage needs.

While utilizing solar for powering illuminated signage can currently be accom­
plished, there are certain challenges to be addressed for real time practical applica­
tion, particularly in the form of batteries. As energy collection with solar panels im­
proves and new power management systems are developed, along with LED’s with
higher light output and low electrical consumption, batteries are, and will remain,
the cornerstone of the system that needs development to allow installations to be­
come truly viable. Look for many changes in this area in the upcoming years.

12/2012 Page A1–8

 Printing
Emerging Technologies
Digital Printing
In the past signage was painted or silk-screened graphics. Advancements in digital
printing continue to be make an impact on how signage is produced and designed.
Digital prints of maps for directories can be more colorful and pictorial. The low cost
of digital prints makes updates and changeable graphics possible. Temporary signs
and banners are cost effective, weatherproof and can be produced quickly.

The combination of technological advances in; the materials or substrates to print

on, the inks and dyes to print with, the digital printers and cutting equipment with-
which to produce graphic, continues to make marked improvement and increased
signage capabilities. The substrates in which stable images can be printed on, has
expanded. Premium cast vinyl film designed for long-term outdoor signage is a
flexible material for vehicle wraps. Perforated material having a see through quality
for window/bus wraps allow graphic to be placed on busses, buildings, windows,
elevator doors and almost any surface. The difference of this enhanced resolution
by high quality printers is unmistakable. High-definition output is both brilliant and
eye-catching. Die sublimation is a printing process that allows for ink to penetrate
various fabrics from very sheer see-through silks to UV stable inks on heavy aw­
ning canvas. The Die-sub process has again expanded how and where a designer
is able to place graphics.

Large format printers, printers with increasing resolution DPI (dots per inch), and
printer speed impact graphic solutions and cost of on site graphics. Large format
printers can print on rolled paper or fabric of increasing widths. Where once bill­
boards where painted by hand now digital graphics can wrap an entire buildings.
Fabrication and computer controlled cutting technology allows for high production
fabrication runs of fairly complex shapes. All these production technologies are
continually changing and advancing, allowing for design solutions for signage to be
cost effective and more creative.

Wide Format Printers “Wide Format printers (contrast to vector-rendering plotters) are generally accepted
to be any printer with a print width between 17" and 100" Printers over the 100”
mark may be called Super-Wide or Grand format. Wide format printers are used to
print banners, posters and general signage and in some cases may be more eco­
nomical than short-run methods such as screen-printing. Wide format printers gen­
erally use a roll of print material rather than individual sheets and may incorporate
hot-air dryers to prevent prints from sticking to themselves as they are produced.”
–Wikipedia

Digital Printing Digital printing is categorized according to ink used:

Categories
• Aqueous: Thermal or Piezo inkjet printers using ink known as aqueous or
water-based. The term “water base” is a generally accepted misnomer. The
pigment is held in a non-reactive carrier solution that is sometimes water and
other times a substitute liquid, including a soy based liquid used by Kodak.
Aqueous ink generally comes in two flavors, Dye and UV (alternatively known
as pigment). Dye ink is high color, low UV-resistant variety that offers the widest
color gamut. UV ink is generally duller in color but withstands fading from UV
rays. Similar in general principal to desktop inkjet printers. Finished prints us­
ing dye inks must be laminated to protect them if they are to be used outdoors
while prints using UV inks can be used outdoors un-laminated for a limited time.
Various materials are available, including canvases, banners, metabolized plas­
tic, and cloth. Aqueous technology requires that all materials be properly coated
to accept and hold the ink.

12/2012 Page A1–9

 Printing
Emerging Technologies
Digital Printing and Laminates
• Solvent ink: This term is used to describe any ink that is not water-based.
Piezo inkjet printers whose inks use petroleum or a petroleum by-product such
as acetone as its carrier liquid. “Eco-solvent” inks usually contain glycol esters
or glycol ether esters and are slower drying. The resulting prints are waterproof.
Solvent inks may be used to print directly on uncoated vinyl and other media as
well as ridged substrates such as Foam Board and PVC.
• Dye sublimation: Inks are diffused into the special print media to produce
continuous-tone prints of photographic quality.
• UV:
Piezo inkjet printers whose inks are UV-curable (dry when cured with UV light). The
resulting prints are waterproof, embossed and vibrant. Any media material can be
used in this technology, polymer made media are best. Ceramics, glass, metals,
and woods are also used with printing with this technology. Important features of
these UV-stable polyester films include: low transmission of ultraviolet light, high
mechanical strength, and good dimensional stability. They also enable good
adhesive bond strength to be achieved in coating, printing and laminating. The UV
resistant “HOSTAPHAN® Protective Films” from Mitsubishi Polyester Film GmbH
are biaxially oriented films made from polyethylene terephthalate (PET). These
polyester films offer good weathering resistance and very high absorption of UV
radiation.
– Alpha Imaging Wikipedia

Laminate Types The end result of digital printing is not always a flexible product. Digital prints can

be laminated on substrates to produce ridged panel graphics. This type of product

is excellent for out door use or interior high traffic wall panel installations. Graphics

with laminate protection extends the durability of a graphic panel with vandal resis­
tant, UV stable, and waterproof qualities. Below are some of the laminate options
available in the sign industry.
– Artcraft

• Matte laminates: Matte laminates provide the most protection against surface
glare from lights. The frosted surface, however, can make colors appear less
intense and some brands are more susceptible to scratching. Gloss laminates
make colors appear vivid and bright, but have serious glare problems and can
scratch easily as well. Often the best compromise is a lustre (satin) laminate. It
allows good color quality and minimizes glare.
• Graffiti-resistant laminates: Graffiti-resistant laminates are made of a Teflon-
like substance and allow for spray paint and felt pens to be washed right off.
The toughest come in high-gloss only. These products cannot be used in con­
junction with any plastic substrates. There are serious compatibility issues.
• Scratch-resistant laminates: Scratch-resistant laminates have textured sur­
faces. The greater the texture, the tougher the laminate, but the more the color
and image quality are compromised. Polycarbonate laminates are the toughest
of these but are too thick for edge-wrapping.
• Hot laminates: Hot laminates become rigid when they cool. The thicker the
film, the more rigid it becomes. Standard thicknesses are 3 mil, 5 mil and 10 mil.
10 mil on both sides of a print becomes 20 mil when heated together. These
laminates have no UV rating, don’t work well outdoors, and don’t stick well to
many types of digital prints. This necessitates leaving an overlap of laminate
around the edge of the print to seal it all in (known as encapsulation). Hot lami­
nates are also available in matte or gloss.

12/2012 Page A1–10

 Printing Emerging Technologies
Advancements in Cutting, Routing, and Milling
Graphic Image /
By far the most advanced technologically, Graphic Imaging is a custom print option
Digital Laminate
that captures full color, photographic images. Graphic Imaging can replicate images
created on computer or designs that can be scanned electronically. Since graphic
image process is a full color reproduction, the appearance of the print presents
itself in a digital format. Image resolution of 300 d.p.i. or higher can produce clear
images on a large finished replication. One of the key factors to keep in mind about
graphic image production is that a vendor can only reproduce the quality of what is
given to then. For example, if the only available artwork is a faxed copy of a copy,
then our finished laminate will only duplicate that art. In some cases, Some vendors
can recreate artwork images, however, this is time consuming and expensive to
accomplish.
– Tape-Ease 620; Green Bay Rd. Denmark, WI

Graphic panels do not need to be rectangles any more. With the advancement in
computer numerical controlled (CNC) cutting systems the complexity of the cut
shape is no longer a major design concern. Most production runs for ridged panel
substrates are done on various CNC cutting tables with plasma, waterjet, or milling
and routing capabilities

Routing A CNC Router is a numerical control tool that cuts objects from wood or plastic.
Parts of a project can be designed in the computer with a CAD/CAM program, and
then cut automatically using a router to produce a finished part. The CNC router
works like a printer. Work is composed on a computer and then the design or draw­
ing is sent to the CNC router for the hard copy. This outputs a 3-dimensional copy
of the work. The CNC router uses a cutting tool following the vector based computer
instructions in Cartesian coordinate system (X, Y, Z) for 3D motion control. This
gives the computer a printer-like ability to drive a CNC machine to make dimension­
al letters and other sign parts.

Cutting Plasma Cutting is a process that is used to cut steel and other metals of different
thicknesses (or sometimes other materials) using a plasma torch. In this process,
an inert gas (in some units, compressed air) is blown at high speed out of a nozzle;
at the same time an electrical arc is formed through that gas from the nozzle to the
surface being cut, turning some of that gas to plasma. The plasma is sufficiently hot
to melt the metal being cut and moves sufficiently fast to blow molten metal away
from the cut. Plasma is an effective means of cutting thin and thick materials alike.
Hand-held torches can usually cut up to 2 inches (51 mm) thick steel plate, and
stronger computer-controlled torches can cut steel up to 6 inches (150 mm) thick.
Since plasma cutters produce a very hot and very localized “cone” to cut with, they
are extremely useful for cutting sheet metal in curved or angled shapes.

Freehand Cut of a Thick Steel Plate The HF Contact type uses a high frequency,
high-voltage spark to ionize the air through the torch head and initiate an arc. These
require the torch to be in contact with the job material when starting, and so are not
suitable for applications involving computer numerical controlled (CNC) cutting.

The Pilot Arc type uses a two-cycle approach to producing plasma, avoiding the
need for initial contact. First, a high-voltage, low current circuit is used to initialize
a very small high-intensity spark within the torch body, thereby generating a small
pocket of plasma gas. This is referred to as the pilot arc. The pilot arc has a return
electrical path built into the torch head. The pilot arc will maintain itself until it is
brought into proximity of the work piece where it ignites the main plasma-cutting arc.
Plasma arcs are extremely hot and are in the range of 25,000 °C (45,000 °F).

12/2012 Page A1–11

 Fabrication
Emerging Technologies
Advancements in Cutting, Routing, and Milling
Water Jet Cutting
“The water jet is unparalleled in many aspects of cutting and has changed the way
many products are manufactured. Many types of water jets exist today, including
pure water jets (water only), abrasive water jets, percussive water jets, cavitation
jets and hybrid jets. Operation of the cutter is commonly connected to a high-pres­
sure water pump where the water is then ejected from the nozzle, cutting through
the material by spraying it with the jet of high-speed water. Additives in the form of
suspended grit or other abrasives, such as garnet and aluminum oxide, can assist
in this process.

An important benefit of the water jet cutter is the ability to cut material without inter­
fering with the material’s inherent structure as there is no “heat-affected zone”. Water
jet cutters are also capable of producing rather intricate cuts in material. With spe­
cialized software and 3-D machining heads, complex 3-D shapes can be produced.

Advances in control and motion technology, 5-axis water jet cutting (abrasive and
pure) has become a reality.

Water jet is considered a “green” technology. Water jets produce no hazardous

waste, reducing waste disposal costs. They can cut off large pieces of reusable
scrap material that might have been lost using traditional cutting methods. Parts
can be closely nested to maximize material use, and the water jet saves material by
creating very little kerf. Water jets use very little water (a half gallon to approximately
one gallon per minute depending on cutting head orifice size), and the water that is
used can be recycled using a closed-looped system. Wastewater usually is clean
enough to filter and dispose of down a drain. The garnet abrasive is a non-toxic
natural substance that can be recycled for repeated use. Garnet usually can be
disposed of in a landfill. Water jets also eliminate airborne dust particles, smoke,
fumes, and contaminants from cutting materials such as asbestos and fiberglass.
This greatly improves the work environment and reduces problems arising from
operator exposure.”
–Wikipedia

Advancements in Materials

Photo Polymer “A photopolymer is a polymer that changes its properties when exposed to light,
often in the ultraviolet spectrum. These polymers are useful in dentistry for fillings
and in rapid prototyping in the stereo lithography and 3D printing processes. In the
past this material was also used in the creation of ABA/ADA compliant Architectural
Signage. However the photo polymer does NOT produce a domed Braille dot. And
an application of paint to form the dome is required. This material also used as a
relief plate for flexographic printing, can be used in plastics, paper, labels and sign
inserts. Some commercial brands worldwide include DuPont Cyrel, BASF Nyloflex,
Novacryl, Elaslon, McDermid and Soleflex Exaprint.

The basic material is soft and light sensitive. A selective exposure to UV lamps is
then applied, then developed and cured. the procedure involves exposing image
wise a photopolymerizable element to actinic radiation emitting at a wavelength in
the range of 365 nm. removing the unexposed or unpolymerized areas of the plate
with solvent, drying the resulting plate. The photopolymerized element can then
be detackified by exposing the element to U.V. radiation emitting a wavelength in
the range of 254 nm. To ensure final plate hardening and photopolymerization, the
printing element can be further post-exposed to radiation emitting at wavelengths in
the range of 365 nm.

12/2012 Page A1–12

 Fabrication Emerging Technologies

Advancements in Cutting, Routing, and Milling

Current platemaking processes utilize various sources of radiation for developing
relief images and maximizing plate hardening. For example, actinic radiation from
a variety of sources can be used, including commercial ultraviolet fluorescent
tubes, medium, high, and low pressure mercury vapor lamps, argon glow lamps,
photographic flood lamps, pulsed xenon lamps, carbon arc lamps, etc. Called
photopolymeric flexographic relief printing plates in the flexographic printing plate
industry because maximum consistent print quality will be obtained using plates
with reduced shrinkage.”
–Wikipedia

12/2012 Page A1–13

This page is intentionally left blank.

 Sustainability

• Sustainability
• Green Strategies for Signs

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.

 Introduction Sustainability

Sustainability Executive Order (EO) 13514, “Federal Leadership in Environmental, Energy, and
Economic Performance,” was signed by President Obama on 5 October 2009. This
EO does not rescind/eliminate the requirements of EO 13423. Instead, it expands
on the energy reduction and environmental performance requirements for Federal
agencies identified in EO 13423.

The goal of EO 13514 is “to establish an integrated strategy towards sustainability

in the Federal Government and to make reduction of greenhouse gas emissions
(GHG) a priority for Federal agencies.”

Towards meeting that goal, Federal agencies are required to meet a series of dead­
lines critical to achieving the GHG reduction goals of the EO. This EO also sets
non-numerical targets that agencies must reach. The full text of the required targets
and strategies can be found within Executive Order 13514.

Green Strategies for Signs, in and of themselves, are not an item that can be considered “green” or a
Signs LEED® product, or product created from materials that are recycled. However, there
are many elements related to signs that can contribute to accomplishing a green
strategy for signs.

• Look into working with a sign company that does environmentally responsible
production.

Ask what programs a company has in place for things like solvent use reduc­
tion, water conservation, disposal and recycling of manufacturing waste and by
products. Do they use low VOC paints, do they use T5 or T8 bulbs in building il­
luminated signs; do they build illuminated signs and letters with LED lighting, do
they install signs on the wall with mechanical fasteners instead of glue?
• Analyze the various elements of the design, fabrication, installation and product
life cycle to eliminate materials and methods that are contrary to the intent of
sustainability.

Look toward the use of durable materials that fit a signs application or location
in order to extend the life of the sign. Implement a design that allows for signing
to be updated with discarding the entire sign. Select materials that will not dete­
riate from weather or environmental conditions.

Utilize signs that are constructed from a component based system that allows
for message modification and that can incorporate changes without have to re­
place the entire sign. Recycle signs whenever possible.
• A sign program can aid in the qualifications of a building for a LEED® rating.

A sign program can be developed that educates the public on the benefits of a
green building. It can highlight and identify elements, systems and materials of
a building that specifically contribute to the LEED® rating.
• Look specifically at materials involved in producing signs.

A material such as aluminum is commonly used in signs can be recycled. This

is a better material selection than say wood, even considering that wood is also
a product that can be recycled. The life cycle of a wood sign is considerably
shorter than a sign made of aluminum so it enters the “waste stream” sooner.

12/2012 Page A2-1

This page is intentionally left blank.

Sign Index

• Introduction
• List of Signs
This page is intentionally left blank.

 Introduction Sign Index

Sign Numbering Each sign in this guide is given a specific index number that can be used to easily
System identify each individual sign. Signs are named based on the sign type, the family
of sign they belong to, and then given a specific number. Signs are grouped based
on their purpose, configuration, layout, and installation specifications. Certain sign
families may have only one sign, whereas others may have several signs assigned
to them.

Certain signs that have been used in the past may have been moved, renamed or
have been removed from the guide altogether; when determining which signs are
needed, consult the guide to obtain the appropriate number for each necessary
sign. If planning on updating any or all signs, refer to Section 2- “Need a Sign”
Program of the Guide for more information.

Signs are named in the following manner:

IN - 17.01 A
XX Designates the type of sign:

IN= Interior Signs

SP= Specialty Signs

EI= Exterior Illuminated Signs

EN= Exterior Non-Illuminated Signs

PS= Parking Structure Signs

PL= Parking Lot Signs

NC= Cemetery Signs

17 Two digit number identify a particular directory family.

.01 The two digit number, following the period, identifies a specific sign within the
directory family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version and/or layout for
graphics.

Example Sign The following sign is an example of how this numbering system is used:

IN-04.03: Primary Room Identification with Insert

IN- Designates that this sign is an Interior Sign

25286
25286
04- Designates that this sign is a Primary Room
Identification sign.
Blood .03- Identifies this specific sign in the Room
Draw Identification sign family. (Sign with Insert)

Message Layout A Message Layout B

12/2012 Page A3-1

78900
44444
78900
44444

Dental Intensive
 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

CODE AND LIFE SAFETY SIGNS

IN-01.01.01 Emergency Exit Plan Evacuation Map/Fire Exit Plan with pocket Page 8-5-1
to accept map insert is to be placed at
points of exit and transition in a building
(all elevators, exits, and exiting stairwell
doors); other locations as needed. Use
this large size sign when large size maps
are necessary.

IN-01.01.03 Emergency Exit Plan and Hoptel Evacuation Map/Fire Exit Plan with pocket Page 8-5-3
Door Emergency Exit Plan to accept map insert is to be placed at
points of exit and transition in a building
(all elevators, exits and exiting stairwell
doors); other locations as needed.

IN-01.02 Fire Equipment Identification Sign Fire equipment identification sign is used Page 8-5-5
to locate and identify fire equipment
cabinets.

IN-01.03 Fire Procedure Sign Fire procedure sign to be installed at Page 8-5-7
elevators, adjacent to stairwell doors,
nurse stations, and other locations as
needed. This sign is optional.

IN-01.04 Elevator Call Button Elevator call button fire procedure sign to Page 8-5-9
be installed at elevators. Position above
type IN01.3.

IN-01.05 Fire Door Sign Fire Door sign is used to identify a fire Page 8-5-11
door. Exception: signs shall not be
provided for fire doors that are held open
by automatic devices.

IN-01.06 No Exit Sign No Exit sign used to identify a door in a Page 8-5-13
stairwell or other locations that are not
exits.

IN-01.07 Exit Sign Non-illuminated exit sign used to identify Page 8-5-15

exit or direction to exit.

IN-01.08 Automatic Fire Door Sign ­ Do Not Block information to be Page 8-5-17

Hinged Door communicated at hinged fire doors held

open by automatic devices.

IN-01.09 Automatic Fire Door Sign - Roll Do Not Block information to be Page 8-5-19

Up communicated at roll down fire doors held

open by automatic devices.

12/2012 Page A3-2

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

IN-01.10 Stair Identification Sign Identifies stairwell doors that are fire exits. Page 8-5-21

IN-01.11 Stairwell Identification Sign Stairwell, floor level and egress Page 8-5-23

information. Sign is located within the stair

enclosure at each floor landing and must
be readily visible when stair door is in
open or closed position. Per NFPA 101,
Section 7.2.2.5.4, Stairwell Identification
signs are required only at new enclosed
stairs serving three or more stories and at
existing enclosed stairs serving five or
more stories.

Disabled evacuation assistance

Area of Refuge (evacuation
IN-01.12 directional sign indicating area of refuge Page 8-5-25
Assistance)
for evacuation assistance.

Push alarm identification sign is an

IN-01.13 Push Alarm Identification Sign Page 8-5-27
instructional sign for push alarmed doors.

Open door fire safety sign is used to

identify a particular door is a fire safety
IN-01.14 Open Door Fire Safety Sign Page 8-5-29
door and is to remain open at certain
times.

Hazardous materials information sign

Hazardous Material Information
IN-01.15 used to easily identify specific hazards Page 8-5-31
Sign
within room, storage cabinet or locker.

Caution information regarding oxygen in

IN-01.16 Oxygen In Use Warning Sign use. Sign must be installed on all doors to Page 8-5-33
rooms in which oxygen is in use.

Caution information regarding gases in

use. Sign must be installed on all doors to
IN-01.17 Compressed gas Warning Sign rooms that contain the listed gases. Page 8-5-35
Adjust the listing of gases to reflect the
actual gases being used in the laboratory.

Caution information regarding anesthetic

Nonflammable Anesthesia
IN-01.18 agents in use. Sign is to be installed on Page 8-5-37
Restriction Sign
the doors to all operating rooms.

Caution information regarding radioactive

Radioactive Material Warning material. Sign is to be installed on the
IN-01.19 Page 8-5-39
Sign doors to all rooms where radioactive
materials are in use or stored.

12/2012 Page A3-3

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Caution information regarding area with

radioactive material. Sign must be
IN-01.20 Radioactive Area Warning Sign Page 8-5-41
installed in areas where radioactive
materials are used or stored.

Caution information regarding high

electrical voltage. Sign must be installed
IN-01.21 High Voltage Warning Sign Page 8-5-43
on the doors to all rooms with high
voltage (over 600 volt) equipment.

Caution information regarding biohazard

materials. Sign must be installed on the
IN-01.22 Biohazard Warning Sign Page 8-5-45
doors of all rooms where there are
biohazard materials.

Caution information regarding lasers. Sign

IN-01.23 Laser Warning Sign must be installed on the doors to all Page 8-5-47
rooms where lasers are used.

Caution information regarding

Occupational Exposure Area occupational exposure. Sign is to be
IN-01.24 Page 8-5-49
Warning Sign installed on doors to all rooms where
there is occupational exposure.

No re-entry floor sign is used to identify a

IN-01.25 No Re-Entry Floor Sign door to a stairwell or other locations, Page 8-5-51
which locks will not allow re-entry.

Push to exit sign is used to inform type of

action needed to activate door. Sign is to
IN-01.26 Push To Exit Sign Page 8-5-53
be installed on doors to all exits where
push motion is needed to activate door.

Emergency push to open sign is used to

inform type of action needed to activate
door in case of an emergency. Sign is to
IN-01.27 Emergency Push To Open Sign Page 8-5-55
be installed next to doors at all exits
where push motion is needed to activate
door.

Emergency slide to open sign is used to

inform type of action needed to activate
door in case of an emergency. Sign is to
IN-01.28 Emergency Slide To Open Sign Page 8-5-57
be installed next to doors at all exits
where slide motion is needed to activate
door.

IN-01.29 Direction Of Exit Sign Direction of exit sign used to indicate Page 8-5-59
direction egress. Sign is to be installed
12/2012 Page A3-4
 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

next to doors at all exits where direction is

needed to exit.

No re-entry sign is used to identify an exit

IN-01.30 No Re-Entry Sign door which will lock and not allow re-entry Page 8-5-61
into room, floor or building.

Fire equipment identification sign is a flag

IN-01.31 Fire Equipment Identification Sign sign used to identify a fire equipment Page 8-5-63
cabinet.

Pregnancy notification sign is used to

convey a request for patient information.
IN-01.32 Pregnancy Notification Sign Page 8-5-65
Sign is placed in patient waiting areas,
treatment rooms and dressing rooms.

Re-entry Sign is used to identify an entry

IN-01.33 Re-Entry Sign door which will allow re-entry into room, Page 8-5-67
floor, or building.

MANDATORY VA POLICY SIGNS

Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

No Smoking sign is required to be placed

IN-02.02 No Smoking Page 7-4-3
at the entrance of a building.

No Weapons sign is required to be placed

IN-02.03 No Weapons Permitted Page 7-4-5
at the entrance of a building.

Hours of Operation sign is required to be

IN-02.04 Business Hours Page 7-4-7
placed at the entrance of a building.

This is only required at metal detector

screening devices and is to be installed
IN-02.05 Notice of Weapons Search next to the detector and in a location that Page 7-4-9
is visible before passing through the
machine.

Large, non-illuminated single post or wall

IN-02.06 Single Post Parking Notice Page 7-4-11
mounted tow away informational sign.

Non-illuminated enclosed display case /

Patient Rights and frame to accommodate foam core
IN-02.07 Page 7-4-13
Responsibilities mounted paper print behind glass or
acrylic.

Non-illuminated enclosed display case /

IN-02.08 Policies and Directives Page 7-4-15
frame to accommodate foam core
mounted paper print behind glass or

12/2012 Page A3-5

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

acrylic.

No Weapons sign to be placed at all

IN-02.10 No Weapons Sign: Small Page 7-4-17
public building entrances.

Non-illuminated wall mounted or single

IN-02.11 No Weapons Sign: Large post “No Weapons” sign. To be placed at Page 7-4-19
all public drive entrances to site.

Large, non-illuminated single post or

IN-02.12 Security Notice Sign Page 7-4-21
informational sign

INTERIOR SIGNS

This sign has tactile number and Braille

PRIMARY ROOM
on the top sign component. The sign is
IN-04.01 Page 9-5-3
IDENTIFICATION
to identify the occupant or activity within
a room.

This sign always has a tactile number

SECONDARY ROOM
and Braille in its top sign component.
IN-04.02 Page 9-5-5
IDENTIFICATION
This sign is used to identify secondary
rooms or rooms that have short names.

This sign always has tactile number and

Braille as its top sign component. Lower
PRIMARY ROOM

IN-04.03 section is for insert. Use this sign to Page 9-5-7

IDENTIFICATION WITH INSERT

identify the occupant or activity within a

room.

This sign always has tactile number and

Braille as its top sign component. Lower
SECONDARY ROOM

IN-04.04 section is for insert. Use this sign to Page 9-5-9

IDENTIFICATION WITH INSERT

identify the occupant or activity within a

room.

PATIENT ROOM

IN-05.06 IDENTIFICATION WITH PAPER

Use this sign to identify patient room. Page 9-5-11
HOLDER

PATIENT ROOM

IDENTIFICATION WITH

IN-05.07 Sign is to be placed at patient rooms. Page 9-5-13

PATIENT CONDITION

PULLOUTS

PATIENT ROOM

IN-05.08 IDENTIFICATION (TWO BED

Sign is to be placed at patient rooms. Page 9-5-15
ROOM)

12/2012 Page A3-6

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Use this sign above patient beds to

IN-06.05 PATIENT BED SIGN Page 9-5-17

identify the bed.

Use this sign above patient beds to

IN-06.06 PATIENT BED SIGN Page 9-5-17

identify the bed.

This sign always has tactile and Braille

section at the top of the sign component.
Use this sign for conference rooms,
IN-07.01 ROOM SIGN WITH INDICATOR meeting rooms. This type of sign can Page 9-5-19
also be used for exam rooms, treatment
rooms, and offices where the occupants
want to indicate that room is in use.

This sign always has tactile and Braille

section at the top of the sign component.
Use this sign for conference rooms,
IN-07.02 ROOM SIGN WITH INDICATOR meeting rooms. This type of sign can Page 9-5-19
also be used for exam rooms, treatment
rooms, and offices where the occupants
want to indicate that room is in use.

This sign always has tactile and Braille

section at the top of the sign component.
Use this sign for conference rooms,
IN-07.03 ROOM SIGN WITH INDICATOR meeting rooms. This type of sign can Page 9-5-19
also be used for exam rooms, treatment
rooms, and offices where the occupants
want to indicate that room is in use.

This sign always has tactile and Braille

section at the top of the sign component.
Use this sign for conference rooms,
ROOM SIGN WITH INDICATOR
IN-07.05 meeting rooms. This type of sign can Page 9-5-21
AND PAPER INSERT
also be used for exam rooms, treatment
rooms, and offices where the occupants
want to indicate that room is in use.

This sign always has tactile and Braille

section at the top of the sign component.
Use this sign for conference rooms,
ROOM SIGN WITH INDICATOR
IN-07.06 meeting rooms. This type of sign can Page 9-5-21
AND PAPER INSERT
also be used for exam rooms, treatment
rooms, and offices where the occupants
want to indicate that room is in use.

ROOM SIGN WITH INDICATOR This sign always has tactile and Braille
IN-07.07 Page 9-5-21
AND PAPER INSERT section at the top of the sign component.

12/2012 Page A3-7

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Use this sign for conference rooms,

meeting rooms. This type of sign can
also be used for exam rooms, treatment
rooms, and offices where the occupants
want to indicate that room is in use.

Use these signs to inform "No Smoking"

IN-08.01 NO SMOKING Page 9-5-23
in a bold manner.

PROHIBIT INSTRUCTIONAL Use these signs to inform in a bold

IN-08.02 Page 9-5-25
AND CONTROL manner.

Use these signs to inform with a symbol,

IN-09.01 RESTROOM IDENTIFICATION Page 9-5-27
tactile raised text and Braille.

Use these signs to inform with a symbol,

IN-09.02 RESTROOM IDENTIFICATION Page 9-5-27
tactile raised text and Braille.

Use these signs to inform with a symbol,

IN-09.03 RESTROOM IDENTIFICATION Page 9-5-27
tactile raised text and Braille.

Use these signs to inform with a symbol,

IN-09.04 RESTROOM IDENTIFICATION Page 9-5-27
tactile raised text and Braille.

Use these signs to inform with a symbol,

IN-09.05 RESTROOM IDENTIFICATION Page 9-5-27
tactile raised text and Braille.

Use these signs to inform with a symbol,

IN-09.06 RESTROOM IDENTIFICATION Page 9-5-27
tactile raised text and Braille.

Use these signs to inform with a symbol,

IN-09.07 RESTROOM IDENTIFICATION
tactile raised text and Braille.

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

IN-09.08 PICTOGRAM AND SYMBOL Page 9-5-29
as well as text.

Use these signs to hold posters, fire

IN-10.01 SIGN FRAME alarm bell schedules, maps or other Page 9-5-31
information sheets.

Use these signs to hold posters, fire

IN-10.02 SIGN FRAME alarm bell schedules, maps or other Page 9-5-31
information sheets.

Use these signs to hold posters, fire

IN-10.03 SIGN FRAME alarm bell schedules, maps or other Page 9-5-31
information sheets.

IN-10.04 SIGN FRAME Use these signs to hold posters, fire Page 9-5-31
alarm bell schedules, maps or other

12/2012 Page A3-8

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

information.

Use these signs to hold posters, fire

IN-10.05 SIGN FRAME alarm bell schedules, maps or other Page 9-5-31
information sheets.

Use these signs to hold posters, fire

IN-10.06 SIGN FRAME alarm bell schedules, maps or other Page 9-5-31
information sheets.

INFORMATIONAL OR Use this sign to communicate

IN-11.01 Page 9-5-33
INSTRUCTIONAL­ miscellaneous information.

INFORMATIONAL OR Use this sign to communicate

IN-11.02 Page 9-5-33
INSTRUCTIONAL­ miscellaneous information.

INFORMATIONAL OR Use this sign to communicate

IN-11.03 Page 9-5-33
INSTRUCTIONAL­ miscellaneous information.

INFORMATIONAL OR Use this sign to communicate

IN-11.04 Page 9-5-33
INSTRUCTIONAL­ miscellaneous information.

Use this sign for messages to be

IN-12.01 DESK OR COUNTER Page 9-5-35
communicated at counters and desks.

Use this sign for messages to be

IN-12.02 DESK OR COUNTER Page 9-5-35
communicated at counters and desks.

Use this sign for messages to be

IN-12.03 DESK OR COUNTER Page 9-5-35
communicated at counters and desks.

Use this sign for messages to be

IN-12.04 DESK OR COUNTER Page 9-5-35
communicated at counters and desks.

Use this sign for messages to be

PERPENDICULAR (FLAG)
IN-13.01 communicated in corridors on the wall, Page 9-5-37
MOUNT
above doors.

IN-14.01 WALL DIRECTIONAL Use this sign for directional information. Page 9-5-39

IN-14.02 WALL DIRECTIONAL Use this sign for directional information. Page 9-5-39

IN-14.03 WALL DIRECTIONAL Use this sign for directional information. Page 9-5-39

IN-14.04 WALL DIRECTIONAL Use this sign for directional information. Page 9-5-39

IN-14.05 WALL DIRECTIONAL Use this sign for directional information. Page 9-5-39

WALL DIRECTIONAL WITH

IN-14.06 Use this sign for directional information. Page 9-5-41
INSERT

12/2012 Page A3-9

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

WALL DIRECTIONAL WITH

IN-14.07 Use this sign for directional information. Page 9-5-41
INSERT

WALL DIRECTIONAL WITH

IN-14.08 Use this sign for directional information. Page 9-5-41
INSERT

WALL DIRECTIONAL WITH

IN-14.09 Use this sign for directional information. Page 9-5-41
INSERT

WALL DIRECTIONAL WITH

IN-14.10 Use this sign for directional information. Page 9-5-41
INSERT

Use this sign for directional information

in a elevator lobby or stairwell landing.
IN-14.11 FLOOR LEVEL DIRECTIONAL Page 9-5-43
This sign is always a top sign component
to designate floor level.

Use this sign for directional information

in a elevator lobby or stairwell landing.
IN-14.12 FLOOR LEVEL DIRECTIONAL Page 9-5-43
This sign is always a top sign component
to designate floor level.

Use this sign for directional information

in a elevator lobby or stairwell landing.
IN-14.13 FLOOR LEVEL DIRECTIONAL Page 9-5-43
This sign is always a top sign component
to designate floor level.

Use this sign for directional information

in a elevator lobby or stairwell landing.
IN-14.14 FLOOR LEVEL DIRECTIONAL Page 9-5-43
This sign is always a top sign component
to designate floor level.

Use this sign for directional information

in a elevator lobby or stairwell landing.
FLOOR LEVEL DIRECTIONAL
IN-14.15 This sign always has floor designation on Page 9-5-45
WITH INSERTS
the top of the signs to designate floor
level.

Use this sign for directional information

in a elevator lobby or stairwell landing.
FLOOR LEVEL DIRECTIONAL
IN-14.16 This sign always has floor designation on Page 9-5-45
WITH INSERTS
the top of the signs to designate floor
level.

Use this sign for directional information

FLOOR LEVEL DIRECTIONAL in a elevator lobby or stairwell landing.
IN-14.17 Page 9-5-45
WITH INSERTS This sign always has floor designation on
the top of the signs to designate floor

12/2012 Page A3-10

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

level.

Use this sign for directional information

in a elevator lobby or stairwell landing.
FLOOR LEVEL DIRECTIONAL

IN-14.18 This sign always has floor designation on Page 9-5-45

WITH INSERTS

the top of the signs to designate floor

level.

Use this sign for directional information

ELEVATOR LOBBY

in an elevator lobby or stairwell landing.

IN-14.20 DIRECTIONAL WITH STRIPS
Page 9-5-47
This sign always has floor designation
AND MAP

and a "You are Here Map".

Use this sign for directional information

ELEVATOR LOBBY

in an elevator lobby or stairwell landing.

IN-14.21 DIRECTIONAL WITH STRIPS
Page 9-5-47
This sign always has floor designation
AND MAP

and a "You are Here Map".

Use this sign for directional information

ELEVATOR LOBBY

in a elevator lobby or stairwell landing.

IN-14.25 DIRECTIONAL WITH DIGITAL
Page 9-5-49
This sign always has floor designation
PRINT INSERT

and a “You are Here Map”.

Use this sign for directional information

ELEVATOR LOBBY

in a elevator lobby or stairwell landing.

IN-14.26 DIRECTIONAL WITH DIGITAL
Page 9-5-49
This sign always has floor designation
PRINT INSERT

and a “You are Here Map”.

Use this sign for directional and

CEILING MOUNTED
department identification information that
IN-15.51 DIRECTIONAL AND
needs to be communicated overhead. Page 9-5-51
IDENTIFICATION
Sign is double sided and both sides can
be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional information

CEILING MOUNTED

that needs to be communicated

IN-15.52 DIRECTIONAL AND
Page 9-5-53
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
DEPARTMENT ID­
sides can be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional information

CEILING MOUNTED

that needs to be communicated

IN-15.53 DIRECTIONAL AND
Page 9-5-55
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
DEPARTMENT ID­
sides can be used for messages.

CEILING MOUNTED
Use this sign for directional and
IN-15.55 DIRECTIONAL AND
Department Identification information Page 9-5-57
IDENTIFICATION WITH INSERT
that needs to be communicated
overhead. Sign is double sided and both

12/2012 Page A3-11

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

sides can be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional information

CEILING MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-15.56 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-59
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
DEPARTMENT ID WITH INSERT
sides can be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional information

CEILING MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-15.57 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-61
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
DEPARTMENT ID WITH INSERT
sides can be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional information

CEILING MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-15.61 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-63
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
DEPARTMENT ID
sides can be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional information

CEILING MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-15.62 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-65
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
DEPARTMENT ID
sides can be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional information

CEILING MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-15.63 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-67
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
DEPARTMENT ID
sides can be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional information

CEILING MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-15.65 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-69
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
DEPARTMENT ID WITH INSERT
sides can be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional information

CEILING MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-15.66 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-71
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
DEPARTMENT ID WITH INSERT
sides can be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional information

CEILING MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-15.67 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-73
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
DEPARTMENT ID WITH INSERT
sides can be used for messages.

Use this sign for directional and

SOFFIT MOUNTED department identification information that
IN-16.51 DIRECTIONAL AND needs to be communicated overhead. Page 9-5-75
IDENTIFICATION Sign is single sided mounted on wall or
over doorway.

12/2012 Page A3-12

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Use this sign for directional information

SOFFIT MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-16.52 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-77
overhead. Sign is single sided soffit
IDENTIFICATION WITH INSERT
mount

Use this sign for directional information

SOFFIT MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-16.53 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-79
overhead. Sign is single sided wall
IDENTIFICATION
mount over header or doorway.

Use this sign for directional and

SOFFIT MOUNTED department identification information that
IN-16.55 DIRECTIONAL AND needs to be communicated overhead. Page 9-5-81
IDENTIFICATION Sign is single sided mounted on wall or
over doorway

Use this sign for directional information

SOFFIT MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-16.56 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-83
overhead. Sign is single sided soffit
IDENTIFICATION WITH INSERT
mount.

Use this sign for directional information

SOFFIT MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-16.57 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-85
overhead. Sign is single sided wall
IDENTIFICATION WITH INSERT
mount over header or doorway.

Use this sign for directional information

SOFFIT MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-16.61 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-87
overhead. Single sided wall mount over
IDENTIFICATION
header or doorway.

Use this sign for directional information

SOFFIT MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-16.62 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-89
overhead. Single sided wall mount over
IDENTIFICATION
header or doorway.

Use this sign for directional information

SOFFIT MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-16.63 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-91
overhead. Single sided wall mount over
IDENTIFICATION
header or doorway.

Use this sign for directional information

SOFFIT MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-16.65 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-93
overhead. Single sided wall mount over
IDENTIFICATION WITH INSERT
header or doorway.

Use this sign for directional information

IN-16.66 SOFFIT MOUNTED Page 9-5-95
that needs to be communicated
DIRECTIONAL AND
overhead. Single sided wall mount over
12/2012 Page A3-13
 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

IDENTIFICATION WITH INSERT header or doorway.

Use this sign for directional information

SOFFIT MOUNTED
that needs to be communicated
IN-16.67 DIRECTIONAL AND Page 9-5-97
overhead. Sign is double sided and both
IDENTIFICATION WITH INSERT
sides can be used for messages.

"YOU ARE HERE" MAPS AND DIRECTORIES

Sign Sign Name Description Page Number

Small size main lobby directory with 48

IN-17.01 Strip Directory Page 10-5-1
directory strips

Main lobby directory with 90 directory

IN-17.02 Large Strip Directory Page 10-5-3
strips

Small size main lobby directory with 48

IN-17.03 Strip Directory with Map Page 10-5-5
directory strips and map of building

Main lobby directory with 90 directory

IN-17.04 Large Strip Directory with Map Page 10-5-7
strips and a map of the building.

Small size elevator lobby directory with

IN-17.05 Strip Floor Directory Page 10-5-9
24 directory strips

Elevator lobby directory with 48 directory

IN-17.06 Large Strip Floor Directory Page 10-5-11
strips.

Small size main lobby directory header

IN-17.11 Directory with Insert Page 10-5-13
and digital print insert.

Large size main lobby directory header

IN-17.12 Large Directory with Insert Page 10-5-15
and digital print.

Directory with Map and Listing Small size main lobby directory header
IN-17.13 Page 10-5-17
Insert and digital print inserts.

Large Directory with Map and Main lobby directory header and digital
IN-17.14 Page 10-5-19
Listing Insert print with 90 directory listings.

Small size elevator lobby directory.

IN-17.15 Floor Directory with Insert Directory header and digital print with 24 Page 10-5-21
listings.

Elevator lobby directory. Directory

IN-17.16 Large Floor Directory with Insert Page 10-5-23
header and digital print with 48 listings

Page 10-5-31

12/2012 Page A3-14

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

This sign is for use at glass entry doors

GLASS DOOR AND SIDE LIGHT
IN-18.01 to rooms or departments that are used
GRAPHICS
by patients and public.

APPLIED DIGITAL IMAGE AND The sign is for use at the elevator doors
IN-18.04
GRAPHIC TEXT that are used by patients and public.

APPLIED DIGITAL IMAGE AND The sign is for use at the elevator doors
IN-18.05
GRAPHIC TEXT that are used by patients and public.

Identification of information counters,

IN-19.01 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS
major departments or services.

Identification of information counters,

IN-19.02 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS
major departments or services.

Identification of information counters,

IN-19.03 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS
major departments or services.

Use this sign above handicap accessible

IN-20.01 INSTRUCTIONAL SIGN
automatic door opening buttons.

Free Standing kiosk Identifies

IN-27.01 Freestanding Information Kiosk Information station or floor directory. Page 10-5-25
Used where wall is not available.

Wall mounted interactive information

Wall Mounted Touch Screen station for identification of information
IN-27.02 Page 10-5-27
Directory service and department location. Monitor
content is a separate project.

Freestanding interactive information

Freestanding Touch Screen station for identification of information
IN-27.03 Page 10-5-29
Directory service and department location. Monitor
content is a separate project.

PARKING STRUCTURES

Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Non-illuminated, ceiling hung sign. This

sign type is directed specifically to
22" - Long Ceiling Hung
PS-01.01 drivers providing them information such Page 5-5-1
Directional
as the exit, additional parking and the
elevators or stairs.

Non-illuminated, ceiling hung sign. This

22" - Short Ceiling Hung
PS-01.02 sign type is directed specifically to Page 5-5-3
Directional
drivers providing them information such
as the exit, additional parking and the

12/2012 Page A3-15

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

elevators or stairs.

Non-illuminated, ceiling hung sign. This

sign type is directed specifically to
15" - Long Ceiling Hung
PS-01.03 drivers providing them information such Page 5-5-5
Directional
as the exit, additional parking and the
elevators or stairs.

Non-illuminated, ceiling hung sign. This

sign type is directed specifically to
15" - Short Ceiling Hung
PS-01.04 drivers providing them information such Page 5-5-7
Directional
as the exit, additional parking and the
elevators or stairs.

Non-illuminated, beam mounted sign.

This sign type is directed specifically to
22" - Long Beac Mounted
PS-02.01 drivers providing them information such Page 5-5-9
Directional
as the exit, additional parking and the
elevators or stairs.

Non-illuminated, beam mounted sign.

This sign type is directed specifically to
22" - Short Beam Mounted
PS-02.02 drivers providing them information such Page 5-5-11
Directional
as the exit, additional parking and the
elevators or stairs.

Non-illuminated, beam mounted sign.

This sign type is directed specifically to
15" - Long Beam Mounted
PS-02.03 drivers providing them information such Page 5-5-13
Directional
as the exit, additional parking and the
elevators or stairs.

Non-illuminated, beam mounted sign.

This sign type is directed specifically to
15" - Short Beam Mounted
PS-02.04 drivers providing them information such Page 5-5-15
Directional
as the exit, additional parking and the
elevators or stairs.

Floor identification and directional

information specifically targeted to
Small Wall Mounted Level and
PS-03.01 pedestrians. Floor identification signs to Page 5-5-17
Directional
be placed next to or near elevators, and
exits.

Floor identification and directional

Large Wall Mounted Level and
PS-03.02 information specifically targeted to Page 5-5-19
Directional
vehicular traffic. Floor identification signs
to be placed next to or near elevators,

12/2012 Page A3-16

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

and exits.

Precautionary information placed

PS-04.01 Wall Mounted Warning strategically to avoid traffic conflict or Page 5-5-21
accidents.

Floor level identification marker for

PS-05.01 Square Colum Marker placement on the wide faces of the Page 5-5-23
column.

Floor level identification marker for

PS-05.02 Narrow Column Marker placement on the faces of narrow Page 5-5-25
columns.

Floor level identification marker for

PS-05.03 Round Column Marker Page 5-5-27
placement on round columns.

Floor level identification marker for

PS-05.04 Small Round Column Marker Page 5-5-29
placement on round columns.

Floor Level identification marker for

PS-05.05 Pole Mount Marker Page 5-5-31
placement on pole.

PS-06.01 Wall Mounted Identification Stairwell and elevator identification sign. Page 5-5-33

Floor level identification for placement on

PS-07.01 Floor Level Identification Vinyls Page 5-5-35
stairwell and elevator doors.

Floor level identification for placement

PS-07.02 Floor Level Identification Vinyls Page 5-5-37
inside stairwells.

Individual letters to identify an entrance

PS-08.01 Dimensional Letters Page 5-5-39
or exit.

Ceiling hung vehicular clearance

PS-09.01 Clearance Height Bang Bar identification marker to be placed at all Page 5-5-41
entrances and at grade level changes.

Sign to inform status of alternating

PS-10.01 Electronic Lane Use Sign Page 5-5-43
entrance / exit lane.

Non-illuminated, free swinging ceiling

hung sign with, and without, bang bar.
PS-11.01 Entrance and Exit Identification This sign type is directed specifically to Page 5-5-45
drivers providing entrance identification
and information.

Non-illuminated post or wall mounted

PS-12.03 Parking Stall Designation Page 5-5-47
parking identification and informational
sign. This type of sign is for use in

12/2012 Page A3-17

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

identifying or controlling specific parking

areas, spaces or stalls.

Wall mounted or single post, non-

PS-12.04 Handicapped Parking Stall illuminated handicapped parking stall Page 5-5-49
sign.

Wall mounted or single post, non-

illuminated handicapped parking area
sign. Identification of handicapped
parking areas and directional information
PS-12.05 Handicapped Parking Area Page 5-5-51
regarding access. These signs can also
be used to provide direction information
to drivers to direct them to handicapped
parking that may not be obvious.

Non-illuminated wall panel sign. Sign

PS-12.07 Informational Panel used to communicate various Page 5-5-53
informational or instructional messages.

Sign to inform visitors as to the number

of available parking spaces per floor.
Electronic counting devices record the
PS-13.01 Electronic Stall Availability Sign number of cars that enter and exit the Page 5-5-55
garage and floor levels. This information
changes as the corresponding number of
parking spaces per floor is reflected.

Exterior Building Mounted Illuminated double sided parking lot

PS-14.01 Parking Directional/Availability identification and parking stall availability Page 5-5-57
Sign sign.

Stalls can be assigned a designated

number based on a logical/sequential
stall numbering system. It is
recommended that each number be
PS-15.01 Stall Identification Number Page 5-5-59
painted at the isle facing end of each
stall. The ideal number height is 6 inches
(numbers should be no less than 4
inches in height).

Regulatory Regulatory Signs Parking and traffic regulatory signs. Page 5-5-60

Identification Signs Information and room identification. Page 5-5-61

Painted/Vinyl Floor, Wayfinding Painted and/or vinyl options for garage

Page 5-5-62
and Area Information Options core identification.

12/2012 Page A3-18

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Options for painted columns / column

Painted Wayfinding and Area
markers and overhead directional Page 5-5-63
Information Options
messaging.

PARKING LOT SIGNS

Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Large, non-illuminated post and panel

parking lot identification sign. This sign
PL-12.01 Post and Panel Information Page 6-5-1
type is for identifying parking lots to
drivers circulating on a roadway system.

Non-illuminated single post and panel

sign with messages directed specifically
Single Post and Panel
PL-12.02 to drivers. This sign can be used to Page 6-5-3
Information
communicate various informational or
instructional messages.

Non-illuminated single post parking

identification and informational sign. This
PL-12.03 Parking Stall Designation type of sign is for use in identifying or Page 6-5-5
controlling specific parking areas, spaces
or stalls.

Single post, non-illuminated

PL-12.04 Handicapped Parking Stall Page 6-5-7
handicapped parking stall sign.

Single post, non-illuminated

handicapped parking area sign.
PL-12.05 Handicapped Parking Area Identification of handicapped parking Page 6-5-9
areas and directional information
regarding access.

Parking lot and parking area

identification sign for mounting on light
Pole Mounted Lot Identification or pole in parking lots and parking areas
PL-12.06 Page 6-5-11
Area Sign where the size of the parking lot is so
large that zone information is needed to
assist the drivers in locating their cars.

Non-illuminated panel sign with

messages directed specifically to drivers
PL-12.07 Wall Informational Panel and pedestrian. This sign can be used to Page 6-5-13
communicate various informational or
instructional messages.

PL-12.08 Spinal Cord/Permit Parking Sign Page 6-5-15

Non-illuminated single post permit

12/2012 Page A3-19

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

parking sign.

Spinal Cord/Permit Van Parking Non-illuminated single post permit

PL-12.09 Page 6-5-17
Sign parking sign.

Sign to inform visitors as to the number

of available parking spaces per lot.
Electronic counting devices record the
PL-13.01 Electronic Stall Availability Sign number of cars that enter and exit the Page 6-5-19
lot(s). As this information changes, the
corresponding number of parking stalls
available per lot is reflected on the sign.

PL-15.01 Stall Identification Number Painted parking stall numbers. Page 6-5-21

Regulatory Parking and traffic regulatory signs. Page 6-5-22

Flexible Sign Post Flexible single post sign Page 6-5-23

EXTERIOR SIGNS

Internally illuminated large horizontal free

standing monument sign for identifying a
EI-01.01 Site Monument Page 4-6-1
medical center or the medical center’s
main entrance drive.

Internally illuminated horizontal free

standing monument sign for identifying a
EI-01.02 Site Monument Page 4-6-3
medical center or the medical center’s
main entrance drive.

Internally Illuminated small horizontal

free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center where there
EI-01.03 Site Monument Page 4-6-5
is a space limitation. This sign can also
be used to identify secondary drive
entrances to the medical center.

Internally Illuminated vertical free

standing monument sign for identifying a
EI-01.04 Vertical Site Monument Page 4-6-7
medical center or the medical center’s
main entrance drive.

Internally Illuminated small free standing

vertical monument sign for identifying a
medical center where there is a space
EI-01.05 Vertical Site Monument Page 4-6-9
limitation. This sign can also be used to
identify secondary drive entrances to the
medical center.

12/2012 Page A3-20

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Internally Illuminated Large directional

monument sign with 10 stacking strips.
EI-02.01 Monument Primary Directional Page 4-6-11
Directional sign with messages directed
specifically to drivers.

Internally Illuminated small directional

monument sign with 10 stacking strips.
EI-02.02 Monument Secondary Directional Page 4-6-13
Directional sign with messages directed
specifically to drivers.

Internally Illuminated large post and

panel sign for identifying a medical
center where there is a space limitation
or there are other physical restraints that
Post and Panel Building
EI-03.01 prevent a monument sign from being Page 4-6-15
Identification
installed. This sign, in a non-illuminated
version, can also be used to identify
secondary drive entrances to the medical
center.

Internally Illuminated post and panel

Primary Directional Post and
EI-03.02 directional sign with messages directed Page 4-6-17
Panel
specifically to drivers.

Internally Illuminated large/long auto

oriented stacking 8 directional sign strips
with messages directed specifically to
EI-04.01 Post and Panel Directional drivers. Internally illuminated sign to be Page 4-6-19
used only in locations where there is a
heavy night time driver need for
directional information.

Internally Illuminated standard auto

oriented stacking 8 strip bar directional
sign with messages directed specifically
EI-04.02 Post and Panel Directional to drivers. Internally illuminated sign to Page 4-6-21
be used only in locations where there is
a heavy night time driver need for
directional information.

Internally illuminated overhead wall

mounted identification sign for a stand
EI-06.01 Wall Mounted Overhead alone building that is not a medical Page 4-6-23
center. This sign type can also be used
to identify an entrance to a building.

Wall Mounted Building Internally Illuminated large wall mounted

EI-06.02 Page 4-6-25
Identification sign type that can be used to identify a

12/2012 Page A3-21

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

building on a medical center campus. It

also can be used for identification of a
stand alone building that is not a medical
center and there is no place to install a
free standing sign.

Internally Illuminated overhead wall

Wall Mounted Ambulance
EI-08.01 mounted sign to be placed above the Page 4-6-27
Entrance Identification
ambulance entrance.

Internally Illuminated wall mounted sign

Wall Mounted Ambulance
EI-08.02 to be placed on the wall adjacent to the Page 4-6-29
Entrance Identification
ambulance entrance.

Internally Illuminated post and panel sign

to be placed on the roadway, adjacent to
Post and Panel Ambulance
EI-08.03 the ambulance entrance to direct Page 4-6-31
Entrance Identification
ambulance drivers to the correct building
entrance.

Internal halo-illuminated, fabricated

Dimensional Building
EI-09.01 metal dimensional letters and logo for Page 4-6-33
Identification Letters
identifying a facility.

Internally Illuminated vertical free

standing monument sign for identifying a
EI-14.01 4 Panel Site Monument Kiosk Page 4-6-35
medical center or the medical center’s
main entrance drive.

Internally Illuminated vertical free

4 Panel Monument Kiosk with standing monument sign for identifying a
EI-15.01 Page 4-6-37
Directional medical center or the medical center’s
main entrance drive.

Internally Illuminated vertical free

4 Panel Monument Kiosk with standing monument sign for identifying a
EI-15.02 Page 4-6-39
Directional & Address medical center or the medical center’s
main entrance drive.

Internally Illuminated vertical free

Vertical Site Monument with standing monument sign for identifying a
EI-16.01 Page 4-6-41
Electronic Message Center medical center or the medical center’s
main entrance drive.

Internally Illuminated vertical free

Horizontal Site Monument with standing monument sign for identifying a
EI-16.02 Page 4-6-43
Electronic Message Center medical center or the medical center’s
main entrance drive.

12/2012 Page A3-22

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Large, non-illuminated 10 strip

directional monument sign with
messages directed specifically to drivers.
EN-02.01 Primary Directional Monument Page 4-7-1
Monument type directional signs should
only be used on the main entrance drive
and in front of the medical center.

Small, non-illuminated 10 strip directional

monument sign with messages directed
specifically to drivers. Monument type
EN-02.02 Secondary Directional Monument Page 4-7-5
directional signs should only be used on
the main entrance drive and in front of
the medical center.

Standard non-illuminated auto oriented

Primary Directional Post and
EN-03.02 post and panel sign with messages Page 4-7-7
Panel
directed specifically to drivers.

Small non-illuminated post and panel

sign with messages directed specifically
EN-03.03 Secondary Post and Panel Page 4-7-9
to drivers. This sign can also be used to
identify buildings.

Non-illuminated, post and panel sign

directional sign with messages directed
EN-03.04 Secondary Post and Panel Page 4-7-11
specifically to pedestrians. Also, the sign
can be used to identify buildings.

Large, non-illuminated auto oriented

building number/identification post and
panel sign for identification of a building
EN-03.05 Primary Building Identification when a large sign is needed because the Page 4-7-13
building is set back away from the
roadway or the architectural scale (size)
of the building warrants a large sign.

Non-illuminated, pedestrian oriented

building number/identification post and
Secondary Building Identification panel sign. This sign can be used for
EN-03.06 Page 4-7-15
& Information other general applications from
information text to identifying specific
functions or activities.

Primary Directional Post and Large/long, non-illuminated auto oriented

EN-04.01 Page 4-7-17

Stacking Bar 6-8 stacking bar directional sign.

Secondary Directional Post and Standard non-illuminated auto oriented 5

EN-04.02 Page 4-7-19

Stacking Bar to 8 stacking bar directional sign.

12/2012 Page A3-23

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Secondary Directional Post and Small, non-illuminated auto oriented 4 to

EN-04.03 Page 4-7-21

Stacking Bar 6 stacking bar directional sign.

Secondary Directional Post and Non-illuminated, pedestrian oriented 3 to

EN-04.04 Page 4-7-23

Stacking Bar 4 stacking directional bar sign.

Large, non-illuminated single post

identification, informational and
directional sign. This type of sign is for
EN-05.01 Large Single Post Informational miscellaneous uses and can be utilized Page 4-7-25
in landscape areas, at the head of
parking stalls, or in other locations which
have space limitations.

Standard, non-illuminated single post

identification, informational and
directional sign. This type of sign is the
standard one for miscellaneous uses. It
Medium Single Post
EN-05.02 can be utilized in landscape areas, at the Page 4-7-27
Informational.
head of parking stalls, or in other
locations which have space limitations
which preclude the use of a double post
and panel sign.

Small, non-illuminated single post

identification and informational sign. This
type of sign is for miscellaneous uses
and can be utilized in landscape areas at
EN-05.03 Small Single Post Informational Page 4-7-29
the head of parking stalls, or in other
locations which have space limitations.
This type of sign would be placed in
situations where a small sign is required.

Non-illuminated, overhead wall mounted

sign. Identification of a stand alone
EN-06.01 Wall Mounted Overhead building that is not a medical center. This Page 4-7-31
sign type can also be used to identify an
entrance to a building.

Large, non-illuminated wall mounted sign

This sign type can be used to identify a
building on a medical center campus. It
Wall Mounted Building
EN-06.02 also can be used for identification of a Page 4-7-33
Identification
stand alone building that is not a medical
center and there is not place to install a
free standing sign.

EN-06.03 Page 4-7-35

Wall Mounted Building Large, non-illuminated wall mounted sign

12/2012 Page A3-24

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Identification with separate name panel. Building

identification with and without names of
the occupant or service. The secondary
name of the occupant or service is on a
changeable panel to allow modification
to the sign without changing the entire
sign.

Medium, non-illuminated wall mounted

sign. Building identification. When names
Wall Mounted Building
EN-06.04 of the occupant or service are used Page 4-7-37
Identification
along with the building number, it should
be text that will not likely change.

Standard size, non-illuminated wall

mounted sign with separate name panel.
Building identification with and without
Wall Mounted Building names of the occupant or service. The
EN-06.05 Page 4-7-39
Identification secondary name of the occupant or
service is on a changeable panel to allow
modification to the sign without changing
the entire sign.

Standard size, non-illuminated wall

Wall Mounted Building mounted sign. Building identification with
EN-06.06 Page 4-7-41
Identification and without names of the occupant or
service.

Small, non-illuminated wall mounted

sign. This sign is for miscellaneous uses
EN-06.07 Wall Mounted Informational such as identifying minor entrances, Page 4-7-43
information messages, identifying sheds
and equipment buildings, etc.

Minor informational, non-illuminated wall

mounted sign. This sign is for
miscellaneous uses such as identifying
EN-06.08 Wall Mounted Informational Page 4-7-45
minor entrances, information messages,
identifying sheds and equipment
buildings, etc.

Overhead, non-illuminated wall mounted

Wall Mounted Ambulance
EN-08.01 sign to be placed above the ambulance Page 4-7-47
Entrance Identification
entrance.

Non-illuminated wall mounted sign to be

Wall Mounted Ambulance
EN-08.02 placed on the wall adjacent to the Page 4-7-49
Entrance Identification
ambulance entrance.

12/2012 Page A3-25

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Non-illuminated post and panel sign to

be placed on the roadway, adjacent to
Post and Panel Ambulance
EN-08.03 the ambulance entrance to direct Page 4-7-51
Entrance Identification
ambulance drivers to the correct building
entrance.

Non-illuminated dimensional letters for

identifying a facility. Should be placed on
EN-09.01 Dimensional Letters Page 4-7-53
the building in a location that is highly
visible to the public.

EN-10.01 Traffic Regulatory Signs Traffic regulatory signs Page 4-7-55

Non-illuminated double blade name sign

EN-11.01 2 Blade Street Sign Page 4-7-57
for an intersection

Tall, Non-illuminated single blade street

EN-11.02 1 Blade Street Sign Page 4-7-59
name identification for a single street

EN-11.03 Pylon Street Sign Non-illuminated Pylon type Street Sign Page 4-7-61

Non-illuminated, applied vinyl letter

identification sign with messages
Building Entrance Door
EN-14.01 directed specifically to pedestrians. The Page 4-7-63
Identification
sign can also be used to identify
buildings.

SPECIALTY SIGNS

Sign Sign Name Description Page Number

Small freestanding identification,

Small Freestanding Stanchion information, and directional sign to
SP-21.01 Page 11-4-1
Sign provide temporary information or
queuing for lines.

Freestanding identification, information,

SP-21.02 Freestanding Informational Sign and directional sign to provide temporary Page 11-4-3
information.

Freestanding Informational Sign Small freestanding information sign to

SP-21.03 Page 11-4-5
for Changeable Messages provide temporary information.

Freestanding Informational Sign Freestanding information sign to provide

SP-21.04 Page 11-4-7
for Changeable Messages temporary information.

Non-illuminated, freestanding, single

SP-21.05 Infection Control Sign sided kiosk to provide hand sanitizer, Page 11-4-9
tissues, gloves, information regarding
infection control and (possibly) face-

12/2012 Page A3-26

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

masks.

Card or paper holder to temporarily hold

SP-22.01 Card or Paper Holder Page 11-4-11
paper or notices

SP-22.02 Chart, File or Binder Holder Chart, file or binder holder Page 11-4-13

SP-22.03 Chart, File or Binder Holder Chart, file or binder holder Page 11-4-13

Door knob hanger used to indicate room

SP-22.04 Door Knob Hanger Page 11-4-15
is in use.

Room number sign to be placed on all

SP-22.05 Tangible Room Number Sign Page 11-4-17
rooms that require identification.

Painted or screened room number, or

SP-22.06 Secure Facility Sign Page 11-4-19
name, at room entrance

Message board on which staff members

can display information such as time,
SP-22.07 Reality Orientation Sign Page 11-4-21
place, and personnel information to
persons with dementia.

Non-illuminated display case to allow

display pictures, cards, mementos, etc.
Box can accommodate one person (a
single box) or two people (a double box).
Box can be designed to incorporate
SP-22.08 Memory Box Page 11-4-23
room number (this is optional, room
number may be a separate sign). Box
can be designed to be accessible from
the front or from the back (from opposite
side of wall)

LCD monitor set in wall with front access

SP-22.09 LCD Memory Box cover. LCD Screen to display resident’s Page 11-4-25
pictures.

Changeable exterior banners mounted

perpendicular to light poles (or other
existing poles or posts). Banners may be
vinyl, canvas or nylon with printed or
SP-23.01 Banners: Pole Mounted screened graphic imagery. Graphic Page 11-4-27
imagery to vary. Banners may contain
graphics on front and back sides of
banner. Graphics may be informational
or decorative.

SP-24.01 Construction Sign: Text Only Sign used construction sites to provide Page 11-4-29

12/2012 Page A3-27

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

information designating the specific

“Department of Veterans Affairs” project
under construction as well as the name
of the general contractor and other
project specific consultants.

Sign used at construction sites to provide

information designating the specific
Construction Sign: Text with “Department of Veterans Affairs” project
SP-24.02 Page 11-4-31
Rendering under construction as well as the name
of the general contractor and other
project specific consultants.

Sign used at construction sites to provide

visual information specific to the
SP-24.03 Construction Sign: Rendering Page 11-4-33
“Department of Veterans Affairs” project
under construction.

Sign used in construction sites to provide

SP-24.04 Construction Sign: Safety information regarding frequency of onsite Page 11-4-35
construction related accidents.

NATIONAL CEMETERY SIGNS

Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

National Cemetery non-illuminated, post

NC-01.01 Information / Regulations and panel. Informative sign with visitor Page 12-4-1
instructions and hours.

National Cemetery non-illuminated, post

NC-01.02 Information / Regulations and panel informative sign with visitor Page 12-4-3
instructions and hours

National Cemetery non-illuminated, post

NC-01.03 Information / Regulations and panel informative sign with visitor Page 12-4-5
instructions.

Horizontal non-illuminated cemetery

orientation map “You Are Here" sign with
map and messages directed specifically
NC-02.01 Horizontal You Are Here Map Page 12-4-7
to pedestrians. Position to provide
pedestrians with an unobstructed view of
the sign.

Vertical, non-illuminated cemetery

NC-02.02 Vertical You Are Here Map orientation sign, “You Are Here” map and Page 12-4-9
messages directed specifically to
pedestrians. Position to provide

12/2012 Page A3-28

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

pedestrians with an unobstructed view of

the sign.

National Cemetery post and panel traffic

NC-03.01 Low Profile Traffic Regulatory Page 12-4-11
regulatory sign

National Cemetery post and panel traffic

NC-03.02 Low Profile Traffic Regulatory Page 12-4-11
regulatory sign

National Cemetery post and panel traffic

NC-03.03 Low Profile Traffic Regulatory Page 12-4-11
regulatory sign

National Cemetery post and panel traffic

NC-03.04 Low Profile Traffic Regulatory Page 12-4-11
regulatory sign

National Cemetery post and panel traffic

NC-03.05 Low Profile Traffic Regulatory Page 12-4-11
regulatory sign

National Cemetery post and panel traffic

NC-03.06 Low Profile Traffic Regulatory Page 12-4-11
regulatory sign

National Cemetery post and panel traffic

NC-03.07 Low Profile Traffic Regulatory Page 12-4-11
regulatory sign

National Cemetery post and panel traffic

NC-03.08 Low Profile Traffic Regulatory Page 12-4-11
regulatory sign

National Cemetery non-illuminated, post

NC-03.09 Traffic Regulatory - Tall sign identifying accessible parking and Page 12-4-13
pathways

National Cemetery non-illuminated, post

and panel directional sign with messages
NC-04.01 Post and Panel: One Line of Text Page 12-4-15
with one line of text. The sign can also
be used to identify buildings.

National Cemetery non-illuminated, post

Post and Panel: Two Lines of and panel directional sign with messages
NC-04.02 Page 12-4-17
Text with two lines of text. The sign can also
be used to identify buildings.

National Cemetery non-illuminated, post

Post and Panel: Three lines of
NC-04.03 and panel directional sign with messages Page 12-4-19
Text
in three lines of text.

National Cemetery non-illuminated,

NC-06.01 Pylon Street Sign Street post with messages directed Page 12-4-21
specifically to vehicles.

12/2012 Page A3-29

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

National Cemetery non-illuminated, post

and flag panel street identification sign
NC-06.02 Flag Type Street Sign with messages directed specifically at Page 12-4-23
vehicles and pedestrians. The sign may
also be used to identify buildings.

National Cemetery non-illuminated, post

and flag panel street identification sign
NC-06.03 Tall Flag Street Sign Page 12-4-25
with messages directed specifically at
vehicles.

National Cemetery non-illuminated,

NC-07.01 Pylon Section Marker pylon sign with messages directed Page 12-4-27
specifically at pedestrians.

National Cemetery non-illuminated,

NC-07.02 Faucet Post with Sign Panel pylon sign with messages directed Page 12-4-29
specifically at pedestrians.

National Cemetery granite section

NC-07.03 Standard Granite Section Marker Page 12-4-31
marker.

This sign has applied graphics and is

NC-08.01 Wall Sign - Small Page 12-4-33
informational.

NC-09.01 Incised Letters Incised letters cast into wall. Page 12-4-35

NC-09.02 Incised Letters Incised letters cast into wall.

NC-09.03 Incised Letters Incised letters cast into wall.

Cast metal dimensional letters. Surface

NC-10.01 Dimensional Letters Page 12-4-37
mounted, tight to wall.

Cast metal dimensional letters. Surface

NC-10.02 Dimensional Letters
mounted, tight to wall.

Cast metal dimensional letters. Surface

NC-10.03 Dimensional Letters
mounted, tight to wall.

Cast metal seal inset or applied to entry

NC-11.01 Dimensional Seal Page 12-4-39
wall.

This sign must always be tactile and

NC-14.01 Primary Room Identification Braille. Use this sign to identify the Page 12-4-41
occupant or activity within a room.

NC-15.01 Restroom Identification Use these signs to inform with a symbol Page 12-4-43
as well as text: "Men- Handicapped

12/2012 Page A3-30

 Sign Sign Name Description Page No.

Access"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-15.02 Restroom Identification as well as text: "Women- Handicapped Page 12-4-43
Access"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-15.03 Restroom Identification as well as text: "Unisex/Family- Page 12-4-43
Handicapped Access"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-15.04 Restroom Identification Page 12-4-43
as well as text: "Men"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-15.05 Restroom Identification Page 12-4-43
as well as text: "Women"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-15.06 Restroom Identification Page 12-4-43
as well as text: "Unisex/Family"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-16.01 Pictogram and Symbol Signs Page 12-4-45
as well as text: "Information"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-16.02 Pictogram and Symbol Signs Page 12-4-45
as well as text: "Gravesite Locator"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-16.03 Pictogram and Symbol Signs Page 12-4-45
as well as text: "No Smoking"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-16.04 Pictogram and Symbol Signs as well as text: "This Is A Smoke-Free Page 12-4-45
Facility"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-16.05 Pictogram and Symbol Signs Page 12-4-45
as well as text: "Caution Flammable"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-16.06 Pictogram and Symbol Signs Page 12-4-45
as well as text: "Caution High Voltage"

Use these signs to inform with a symbol

NC-16.07 Pictogram and Symbol Signs as well as text: "Authorized Personnel Page 12-4-45
Only"

12/2012 Page A3-31